(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Official gazette of the United States Patent Office. [microform]"

i 




i 






A 



A 



micRD PHOTO Division 






I 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE of the UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE 



January 2, 19/3 



Volume 906 



Number 1 



CONTENTS 



page 



Patents and Trademark Notices 

Consolidated Listing of Recent Otficial Gazette Notices re Patent Office 

Practices and Procedures '^ ' ' " 

Board of Appeals Decisions Rendered in the Month of November 19 '_ . . ^i 

. . 91 

Patent Suits 

Patent Notices 

Certificates of Correction for the Week of Januar>- 2, 1973 9. 

. . 93 

Disclaimers 

. . 93 

Dedications 

. . 93 

Errata 

9*^ 
Condition of Patent Applications 

^ . . . 96 

Plant Patents Granted 

Patents Granted 

97 
General and Mechanical 

... 231 

Chemical 

295 
Electrical 

346 
Design Patents Granted 

PI 1 
Index of Patentees 

PI 3S 
Indices of Plants and Designs 

Classification of 

PI 37 

Patents 

JO,. .... PI 39 

De-signs and Plants 

Geographical Index of Residence of Inventors 

.... PI 40 

Patents 

PI 42 
Designs and Plants 



The following .re mailed under direction of the Superintendent of Document.. GoTernment 
Printing Office, Washington. D.C.. 20402. to whom .11 sub.cription. .hould be made payable and 
.11 communications addressed: 

THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (PATENTS SECTION), issued weekly, subscription $89.00 
per annum, foreign mailing $22.25 additional: single copies $2.00 each. 

THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (TRADEMARK SECTION), issued weekly, subscription $17.00 
per annum, foreign mailing $4.25 additional: single copies 40 cents each. 

CIRCULARS OF GENERAL INFORMATION concerning PATENTS or TRADEMARKS, 
price 15 cent! each. __^^^^^___ 

PRINTED COPIES OF PATENTS are furnished by the Patent Office at 60 cents each : 
PLANT PATENTS in color, $1.00 each: copies of TRADEMARKS and DESIGN PATENTS 
at 20 cents each. Address orders to the Commissioner of P.tenU. Wwhington. D.C.. 20231. 



Printing .uthonied by Section 11(a) 3 of Title 86. U.S. Code P.O. 



CONSOLIDATED LISTING OF RECENT OFFICIAL GAZETTE NOTICES 
RE PATENT OFFICE PRACTICES AND PROCEDURES 

PATENT SECTION 

Thr folUnrinn ..s a compilation of the more important notices ments Include the Group Number to which the application is 
and rules c}ian;,cs rrhirh have been published in the ofkmial assigned, as well as the Appeal Number and Serial Number. 
Cazfttf, Jroiii .JiiUi 1, IfifiJi, thrnuflh Decnnber '1. /''TJ. These 
notices and rules changes are currently in effect and are pub ^^^^ g 1965. 
lishcd as a part of our -•Better Service to the Public" program. 



EDWIN L. REYNOLDS, 
First Assistant Commissioner. 



CONTENTS 

Patent Section 

Infiirinatioii and ( '(irrpspondpnco 

llocnrds and KiU's -. - 

I"ri'< and l'ay"i''"t "f Mniicy _ - -- 

r.iwrrs (if At turncy 

AppllcatKiii ('(intont - - 

I'rinrity Applicati(ins -- - 

l>ra\viiiKs - - - 

i:xaniinaiii>n nf Applications _ --- 

Aiiicndnieiits - — 

Interviews ^ - - 

.lolndor - 

Time for Rt^^ponso _ - - - 

Appeals - - - 

Intorfcrenies _ - 

Correction of Krrors 

Abstracts- - - ^ 

Iteferences - --- - ■ 

I'i>stal Sorviro Eniopfzoncy - - 

Mi-rollaiKMuis - - 

TRADKMAItK SK'TIdN 

•l-radt'inarl< Xotlros and Rtile Clianj:es 

KriifatiMl Patent Notices Also Pertinent to Trade 



■I 
marks 



.-, 11, 22, 20). 27, .'in, 13. 4."). 4«, 48, lSl-lS,j 



It 

1- 

,3,5- 
43 
,") 7) - 

r,o- 

72- 

so- 

S5- 
121- 
121- 
126- 
136- 
141- 

ir.6- 

162- 
1(15- 
171- 
181- 
l«;6- 

3no- 
195, 



(' m s 

34 

42 

54 

59 

71 

7[» 

- 81 

120 

123 

-125 

-135 

-140 

-155 

-161 

-ir,4 

-170 

1 SO 

-1S5 

O 1 o 

-334 
212 



[815 O.G. 417] 

(4, Tf.lephone Numbers on Amenpmknts 

AND Other Papers 

In view of the increased use of telephone interviews regard- 
ing matter which can be readily cleared up by a telephone 
call to applicant or his representative, it is again recom- 
mended that amendments and other papers, such as letters 
of transmittal, include the complete telephone number with 
area code and extension, preferably near the signature of the 

writer. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 

Mar 11 1966. Assistant Commissioner. 

[825 O.G. 1] 



(5) 



ZIP Code Reminder 



INFORMATION AND CORRESPONDENCE 

(1) Information Re application Statds 

In view of the relatively long pendency of patent applica- 
tions at the present time, the Anal disposition of which may, 
in some cases, be of substantial Importance to the public in 
;;eneral or, at least, to persons other than the applicants. It 
has been decided effective immediately to advise any person 
who makes written request for Information as to the status 
of a United States application referred to by number in a 
foreign patent, which patent Is identified in the request, 
whether the application is pending, abandoned or patented 
and, if patented, what the patent number is. The former prac- 
tice' of giving similar information with respect to an appli- 
cation referred to by number In a United States patent (Man- 
ual of Patent Kxamining Procedure, section 102) will be con- 
tinued. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER, 
Dec. 11, 19C4. Commissioner oj Patents. 

[809 O.G. 1293] 



By Executive Memorandum of June 18, 1965, President 
Johnson directed all Federal Agencies to take the lead In 
adopting the ZIP Code system and Instructed the Post- 
master General to issue regulations governing the use of 
ZIP Codes by such agencies. 

Pursuant to this directive, Section 137.26 has been added 
to the Postal Manual requiring compliance by Federal Agen- 
cies as follows : 

1. Eflfective January 1, 1966. official mailings containing 
typed or handwritten addresses must include the ZIP 

Code. 

2. Effective January 1, 1967, all Federal Agencies must 
use the ZIP Code In the addresses on all official mail 
and are required to presort quantity mailings by ZIP 
code. 

TO THIS END, ALL FUTURE LETTERS, COUPONS, AND 
OTHER P\PERS BEARING THE SENDER'S ADDRESS 
WHICH ARE MAILED TO THE PATENT OFFICE MUST 
SHOW THE ZIP CODE DESIGNATION OF BOTH THE 
SENDER AND THE PATENT OFFICE. 

The Patent Office ZIP Code is 20231. This designation 
should be used when writing to the Patent Office for any 
matter. In addition, the sender's own ZIP Code designation 
should be given. The Itenefits to be gained by the im- 
mediate use of ZIP Code are many : positive Identification 
of areas ; faster delivery of mall by reducing the number 
of handlings from point of origin to destination ; and easier 
identification of post office address. 

C. A. KALK, 
Mar. 22 1966. Director of Administration. 



Telephone Numbers on Office Actions 



(2) 

Effective Immediately, the full surname of the Examiner 
who prepares the Office action will. In all cases, be typed 
below the action on the left side. The Examiner's telephone 
number will be typed below his name. This number should be 
called if the case is to be discussed or an interview arranged. 

The Notice of December 10, 1964, 810 O.G. 308, and Change 
Notice 2-15 are rescinded. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Apr. 5, 1965. Superintendent, Patent Examining Corps. 

[813 O.G. 1099] 



(6) 



[825 O.G. 428] 

Hand Delivery of Duplicate Copy of 
Papers by Attorney 



(3) 



Expeditino Papers Relating to Appeals 



In order to expedite the handling and processing of all 
papers relating to appeals, it Is essential that all such docu- 



The Notice appearing In 833 O.G. 1 Is hereby superseded. 
The practice set out in the above notice Is extended as follows : 

In further implementation of the Notice in 829 O.G. 1785 
concerning discontinuation of the practice of hand delivery 
by attorneys or others of officially date stamped pap_exa,^lt is 
directed that prompt consideration and appropriate action be 
taken on the hand-delivered duplicate copy of such papers, 
which may Include amendments, powers to inspect, requests 
for extension of time, etc. 

The effect of such consideration and action should be com- 
municated to applicant or his representative at the earliest 
practicable time to clarify the status of the case. 

If requested, at the conclusion of an interview, it would be 
appropriate to indicate on the attorney's copy and' the Office 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



duplicate copy any agreement reached and to Initial and date 

'°Actualtlerlcal entry of amendatory matter usually will re- 
aufre thl p e ence In the file of the original paper ; howeve . 
nending receipt of the original, examiner and clerical process^ 
fog of the application should proceed, based on the duplicate 
copy! as far as practicable In the circumstances of each case. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Dec. 21. 1966. Assistant Commissioner. 

[834 O.G. 829] 



(7) 



Att.\chments to Office Actions 



To expedite the preparation and mailing °'/".*'^'°.f ®f 
actions, the following changes in practice are effective July 1. 

^^Where references are furnished, applicant's copies of the 
Office action wm be camera reproductions of the ribbon copy 
hiTtead of the usual carbon copies. The list of reference clta- 
Tol\Xle\ofor. typed directly on t^e action, will be on a 
separate form, Notice of References Cited. PO-892. attacnea 
to applicant's copies of the action. ,„„oin. 

The manner of furnishing copies of the references remains 

"""Abouf Aug 1. 1967. the use of attachments to the Office 
acUon will be extended to include notification of Informalities 
in the application and drawings. Where applicable^ Notice o 
inforn^al Patent Drawings, PO-948, and Notice of Informal 
Pa^nt Applications, P(>-152 (rev.) will be attached to the 

first action. . ._ • .__ 

The attachments will bear the same paper number and are 

to be considered as part of the action. , ^. ,^ . . rrnif 

Replies to Office actions should include the 3-dlglt Art Unit 

number to expedite handling within the Office. 



(3) The Patent Office has an Office of Information Services 
where the public may obtain a list of current publications and 
general information concerning the functions and services of 
?he Patent Office. Information relating to patents may be ob^ 

a ned °o\n the Patent Reference Branch of the Office o 
PaTent Services, and information relating to l^^^'^^J^'l^^^ 
be obtained from the search room of the Trademark Examin- 
ing Operation. 
C Guide to Published Rules and Regulations. 

(1) Patent Office rules of procedure, descriptions of forms 

substantive rules of general applirahlllty. and statements ot 

ilttilSiill 

c!ses" and '-Trademark Rules of Practice of the I'atent Office 
With Forms and Statutes." each of which is ^or sale by the 
Superintendent of Documents. U.S. Government Printing Of 

'I'^rThTpaT^t Offi'crmaintalns also an administrative 
stai? manuare^ltled "Manual of Patent K--/''^';^^/;;- 
dure" and an index thereto, for the ^^^^ral guidance of Its 
staff and the public. The manual, with its index, as amended^ 

hanged and supplemented from time to ^ime. is available in 
^h! Pnt^nt Office (the Public Search Room and Library) for 

:;:pe" tiranrropiing. and copies are - saj.^.' t»;e ^uper n- 

tendent of Documents. US. Governmen^ Printing Office, u asn 

ington. D.C., 20402. 



Jane 20, 1967. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Assistant Commissioner. 

[840 O.G. 711] 



^ APPENDIX A 

(8) PUBLIC INFORM..TION APPENDIX-PATENT OFFICE 

A. Purpose. 

The purpose of this Appendix is to describe In gf^"*]- ^^e 
public information services of the Patent Office to <^escr^^be 
?he places at which and the methods whereby the P^^Hc may 
;bta?n information, make submissions or requests or obta n 
decisions, to inform the public as to the sources or availability 
or ules regulations, procedures, forms. Instructions, or other 
rJaulrement^of the Patent Office, which a«ect the public and 
otherwise to comply with the requirements of Section 552 or 
Title 5. U.S.C. as amended by Public Law 90-23. June 5. 1967 
(81 Stat. 54). 



B Public Information Services. 

(I) The Patent Office provides the public with a wide range 
of nformatlon relating to the organization, structure, descrip- 
tion, and functions of the Patent Office. Tb^« '"'^^^J^^^^^^/^i 
published regularly on a weekly basis, such as t^e Official 
GAZETTE, and copies of the patents and trademark reglstra 
tlons Identified therein. General Information concerning the 
procedures for obtaining patents or registering trademarks 
and for utilizing the search rooms and Scientific Ubrary of 
the Patent Office is readily available. ^ . ,». ♦. 

(2) Publications of the Patent Office are listed In the cata- 
log of publications sold by the Superintendent of Documents. 
U.S Government, Printing Office, Washington. DC, 20402. 
They are also listed in the Introduction of the "Rules of Prac- 
tice of the United States Patent Office In Patent Cases, and 
in the pamphlet "General Information Concerning Patents. 
The Patent Office also publishes a circular "Patent Office Publi- 
cations." which lists the available publications, and Provides 
information as to price and source. These publications IncMide • 

a Annual Index of Patents. 

b Decisions of the Commissioner of Patents^ 

c. Manual of Patent Classification, and Oasslflcation 

bulletins, 
d Patent Laws (pamphlet edition). ^ . ♦. 

e.' Directory of Registered Patent Attorneys and Agents 

Arranged by States and Cities, 
f. Guide for Patent Draftsmen. 



D Submission of Requests and Applications. 

The established places at which and the methods whereby 
the public may make requests concerning Patent O^ce tunc 
t?ons. operations, and procedures are listed In Sections B and 
C of this Appendix. 
E. {Reserved) . 
F Inspection and Copying of Opinions and Orders. 

■ (1) Final opinions and orders in the adjudication of patent 

vanla Avenue and Constitution Avenue. NNV ^^ashlngton 
D? 20231. readily accessible from the entrance on E Street 
near 14th Street. Instructions concerning the use of this facil 
ity are contained in the introductory portion to the pamphlet 
du"n of the Rules of Practice In Pate^' ^--'^ ^-^ '''' 
nnmnhlet "General Information Concerning Patents. 

material required to 5^«^-'^^,^,2^a 2) a eTde available for 
and copyln'g under 5 U.S.C. 552(a) U) a Examining 

such purposes In the ^^"^f,;:"^",,'^;,^^:^ Rhode Island 
operation In the Longfellow Building 174 ^^ 

4vpnue NW., Washington. D.C.. 202^1. irom o." 
6 00 pm on workdays only. Instructions concerning trade 
mark operations are contained in the pamphlet "Gene,,l In- 
formation Concerning Trademarks. 



G Inspection o/ Bureau Records. 

rpe:;irc;;:^^=irm:; -^^^^^^^^ commis. 

-- ^fJt^L a. re^gn^ 

^.';^nVo3)"whlch prescribe the procedures to be followed in 
:re opening of ceruin patent applications to '-^I'on-^ ^ 
(3) Assignment records, digests, and Indexes (37 C.KR^ 
1.12) rtlatfng to patent applications are not available to the 

""(4)'- Pending trademark applications are not open to general 

'"TsTxhe^'e^res'for^equestlng records not disclosed to 
(5) xne pro informational activities of 

section F. supra, or whose disclosure Is n^rovided 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



precluded by the regulations cited in paragraphs (1), (2), (3) 
and (4) of this section, are prescribed in 37 C.F.R. 1.15. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER. 
Date: Sept. 12, 1967. Commissioner oj Patents. 

Published in SS F.R. JS8S0, Oct. i, 1907 
[843 O.G. 1567] 



The publication is on sale by the Superintendent of Docu- 
ments. Unit-^d States Government' Printing Office. Washing- 
ton, D.C., 20402, for $1.50. 

EDWIN L. REYNOLDS, 
July 25, 1969. Chairman, Committee on Enrollment. 

[865 O.G. 663] 



(9) 



Post Card Receipt Re.minder 



Applicants and their attorneys or agents are reminded of 
the provision in Section 717.01(a) of the Manual of Patent 
Examining Procedure relating to the use of post cards as 
"receipts" of papers filed in the Patent Office. 

If a receipt for any paper filed In the Patent Office is de- 
sired, it may be had by enclosing with the paper a self- 
addressed post card identifying the paper. The Patent Office 
will stamp the receipt date on the card and place it In the 
outgoing mail. 

The identifying data on the card should be so complete as 
to match the paper with the application or other document 
to which it is to be associated. For example, the document 
should be identified by the applicant's name(s), Serial No., 
filing date, appeal number. Interference number, etc.. and the 
paper should be identified by specifying the type thereof, viz. 
affidavit, amendment, appeal, application papers, brief, draw- 
ings, fees, motions, supplemental oath or declaration, peti- 
tion, etc. 

When papers for more than one document are filed under a 
single cot»er a return post card should be attached to the 
paper for each document for which a receipt Is desired. 



(13) Orders for Copies of Foreign Patents .and/or 
Published Applications 

Some foreign countries are not publishing their patents 
and/or applications In numerical order. Since the U.S. Patent 
Office will begin supplying orders for copies of these foreign 
documents from master microfilm reels made up on weekly 
or other periodic publishing sequences, effective immediately 
all orders must Include the country, patent or application 
number, and the publication date (if known) of the ordered 
document. Reference should be made to Section 901 05(a) of 
the Manual of Patent Examining Procedure to assist in deter- 
mining the publication date of the commonly encountered 
foreign patents and applications. 

W. R. ARMSTRONG. 
Aug. 21. 1969. Director, Office of Patent Services. 

[866 O.G. 685] 



Nov. 21. 1968. 



RICHARD A. WAHL. 
Assistant Commissioner. 

[857 O.G. 667] 



(10) 



Office Action — First Page Form 



The printed form POL-326 formerly used as the first page 
of the first Office action, 845 O.G. 1205. has been revised. 

The new form is now being attached to all Office actions up 
to and Including final rejections. 



Jan. 22. 1969. 



RICHARD A. WAHL. 
Assistant Commissioner. 



[859 O.G. 677] 



(11) Offici.\l P.stent Office M.mling .\ddress 
Remains Washington, D.C. 



Feb. 20, 1969. 



C. A. KALK. 
Director of Administration. 



[860 O.G. 662] 



(14) Group Ncmber Siiocld .\ppe.\r on Communica- 
tions Relating to Pendi.vo applications 

It is again requested that tne Group number be typed on 
amendments and other communications relating to pending 
applications in order to expedite the handling of mall and to 
conserve manpower. The number of the Group should be 
placed on the right-hand side, opposite the Serial Number or 
name of applicant. In >iew of the vast amount of mail, con- 
tinued careful attention to these details will do much toward 
avoiding delay in handling of mall. 

C. A. KALK. 
Nov. 6, 1969. Director of Administration. 

[869 O.G. 3451 



The official mailing address for all communications sent to 
the Patent Office remains : 

Commissioner of Patents 
Washington, D.C. 20231 

Any telegrams sent to the Patent Office must also bear the 
above identical address. 

The physical location of the Patent Office Is 2021 Jefferson 
Davis Highway, Arlington, Virginia. This address must not 
be used when addressing mail to the Patent Office. 

No reference to Crystal Plaza, Virginia, should be made 
in the address of any communication intended for delivery 
to the Patent Office by the Post Office Department or Western 
Union. 

Compliance with this instruction will help prevent any un- 
necessary delay in the delivery of mall, telegrams, etc. 



(15) tr.\nsmittal FORi^ 

As a convenience to attorneys and to standardize process- 
ing forms have been developed for use in transmitting (1) 
new applications (PO-1082) and (2) amendments adding 
claims (PO-10S3). These forms were approved by a Notice 
appearing in the Federal Register. November 26. 1969. and 
are designated 37 CFR 3.51' and 3.52 (869 OG 1033). Attor- 
neys who desire to use these forms may obtain them without 
charge from the Correspondence and Mall Branch or the Re- 
ceptionist in Building 3 in Crystal Plaza. 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 
Jan 2 1970. Assistant Commissioner. 

[870 O.G. 1040] 



(16) 



Microfilm : Patent Number Sequence 
Classification Record 



(12) Directory of Registered Patant Attorneys 

AND Agents 

The Patent Office has recently published a new edition of 
the Directory of Registered Patent Attorneys and Agents 
Arranged by States and Countries. The new edition shows the 
addresses furnished to the Committee on Enrollment as of 
December 1968. of all attorneys, agents, and firms registered 
to practice before the Patent Office in patent cases. An added 
feature in the present edition is the use of a symbol to denote 
those registrants who are registered as patent agents. 



The Patent Office announces a new microfilm publication 
entitled Patent Number Sequence Classification Record. This 
official record lists the original and cross-reference classifica- 
tions together for each patent number, in patent number 
order This sequence contrasts with that of the previously 
announced Cumulative Index to the Classification of Patents 
which lists patent numbers by classification. In separate files 
for original and cross-reference classifications. 

The Patent Number Sequence Classification Record com- 
prises all patents Issued through April 29. 1969. The classifi- 
cation includes all reclassifications made effective through 
January 1. 1969. This publication, which is available only in 
microfilm form. Includes patents, design patents, reissue de- 
sign patents, reissue patents, plant patents, defensive publica- 
tions and patents issued from 1790 to 1836. Updates to this 
record will be announced periodically, as circumstances 

warrant. 

The Patent Number Sequence Classification Record com- 
prises 16 reels of 16 mm. roll microfilm which are offered Tor 
sale in three different ways. The complete record 1^ catalogued 
as PB-188600 and sells for $70.00. The 7 reels comprising 
patents Issued from numbers 2.225,518 (Issued in 1940) to 
the end of the file are offered together for those who desire 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



only more recent patents. This set Is catalogued as PB-188617A 
and sells for $35.00. Reels ordered Individually or In sets^ 
other than the two mentioned above, sell for $6.00 apiece 
and should be ordered using the catalogue number for each 
reel desired, as shovfn below : " • 

Cat No. Patent Nos. Included 

PB-188601 1- 276927 

PB-188602 276,928- 539.569 

PB-188603 539,570- 797,464 

PB-188604 797.465-1,054,425 

PB-188605 1.054,426-1,311,703 

PB-188606 1,311,704-1,568,108 

PB-188607 , 1,568,109-1,811,776 . -. 

PB-188608 1.811.777-2,015,447 „ :, 

PB-188609 2,015,448-2.225,517 

, PB-188610 - 2,225,518-2 431,496 

PB-188611 2,431,497-2,628,945 

PB-188612 ~ 2.628,946-2,819,182 

PB-188613 2,819,183-3,011,059 

PB-188614 ' 3.011,060-3,196,127 

PB-188615 3.196,128-3,377.086 

PB-188616 3.377.087-3.441,959 , 

and Reissue Patents 1-26,557, Design 
Patents 1-214,007, Plant Patents 
1-2,881 and all other categories 
mentioned In text above. 

Orders may be addressed to : . ' 

CFSTI 

5285 Port Royal Road 

Springfield, Virginia 22151 

Payment should be made in the form of a check or money 
order payable to the National Bureau of Standards — CFSTI. 
Inquiries, comments or suggestions concerning this record 
may be directed to the U.S. Patent Office, Office of Organiza- 
tion and Systems Analysis, Washington, D.C. 20231. 

E. A. HURD, 
Director, Office of Organization and Systems Analysis. 

Jan. 15, 1970. 

[871 O.G. 2] 



(17) 



H.AXD Delivery of P.\per.s 



The notice of November 10, 1969 (869 O.G. 345), regarding 
Hand Delivery of Papers is modified as indicated below. 

The privilege of personal delivery of papers by applicants, 
their attorneys or agents to the Examining Groups is hereby 
extended to include any paper which relates to a pending 
application file. Under this procedure the paper will be date 
srfeped with tho Group stamp and made an official paper in 
tlie file, thereby avoiding the necessity of processing and for- 
warding to the E.xaminlng Group via the Mail Room. The 
approval and initials of the examiner will no longer be neces- 
sary for delivering papers directly to the Group. In those In- 
st.inces where an additional fee is required, the paper will be 
date stamped by the clerk, hand carried, together with the 
check or letter of authorization to charge a Deposit Account, 
to the Finance Branch for processing and then made an official 
paper in the file. 

This procedure will be re-evaluated after it has been in 
effect for a period of six months. 



(19) lDENTIFIC.\TION FOR APPLICATION CORRKSPONDENCE 

The Office Is continuing to experience difficulty In match- 
ing Incoming papers with the corresponding application files. 
This applies especially to responses to Office Actions, powers 
of attorney, changes of address, status letters, requests for 
extensions of time, and petitions. 

A very necessary part of a complete identification of a pend- 
ing application Is the three-digit Group or Art Unit number, 
e.g., 110 or 111. Frequently, the Group Art Unit number is 
entirely omitted, or there are errors in this number. In the 
latter situation the error often occurs as a result of the case 
having been reassigned within the Office, and the communica- 
tion is directed to an Examining Group other than that indi- 
cated in the most recent Office Action. 

Where the Group Art Unit number Is entirely omitted, the 
routine operations of the Application Branch must be inter- 
rupted solely for the purpose of determining the location of 
the application so that the communication can be properly 
routed. Under these "circumstances the efficiency of the Appli- 
cation Branch Is impaired and the 'incoming paper is delayed 
in reaching its proper destination. Where such papers are 
not essential to compliance with a statutory period or time 
limit for response, they may be returned for completion to 
Identify the location of the files. 

To assist the Office In expediting Its business, it is requested 
that ALL papers relating to a pending application Include 
the following information : 

1. Serial number (checked for accuracy), 

2. Group Art Unit number (copied from filing receipt or 
most recent Office Action). 

3. Filing date, 

4.vName of the Examiner who prepared the most recent 

Office Action. 
5. Title of the Invention. 
To further reduce the burden on the Application Branch and 
the Examining Groups, It Is also requested that the submis- 
sion of additional or supplemental papers on a newly filed ap- 
plication be deferred until a filing receipt has been received. 
In the same vein, it would be appreciated If the filing of addi- 
tional papers relating to an allowed application were referred 
until a notice of allowance (POL-85) was received. 

If the above suggestions are adopted the processing of both 
new and allowed applications could proceed more efficiently 
and promptly through the Patent Office. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Mar. 5, 1971. Assistant Commissioner. 

[885 O.G. 2] 



(20) 



New Declaration Form 



Sept. 8, 1970. 



RICHARD A. WAHL. 

Assistant Commissioner. 



To facilitate electronic data Input and to expedite process- 
ing of new patent applications, a new declaration forn^ has 

been devised. . . .. , 

Single copies of the new form are available without charge 
for direct use or for reproduction purposes and may be picked 
up from the receptionist in Building No. 3 of the Patent Office 
at Crystal Plaza. Written requests for the form will be filled 
only If directed to the Commissioner of Patents, Office of 
Information Services, Washington, D.C, 20231. A stamped, 
self-addressed envelope must be enclosed. 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 
May 28, 1971. Assistant Commissioner. 

[887 O.G. 1840] 



[879 O.G. 667] 



(18) Office Actions 

Effective December 1, 1970, applicants or their attorney or 
agent will be provided with one carbon copy of all Office 
actions, and the provision of additional or other reproductions 
of the ribbon copy will be discontinued. 

Heretofore, the Office has provided one or two copies of the 
examiner's action, depending upon the nature of the action. 
ThM practice of furnishing more than one copy will be dis- 
continued and, effective with the above change, the applicant 
will be furnished oae copy of all examiner actions. 



Oct. 21, 1970. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 

Assistant Commissioner. 



[880 O.G. 740] 



(21) Patent Application Branch Service 

In order to expedite the processing of newly filed applica- 
tions, improve the efficiency of the Office, and assist In the 
effort to normally dispose of patent applications within 18 
months of their filing date, cooperation from the patent com- 
munity Is solicited with respectlto recent procedural modlfl,- 

*"'pruJ to examination concerning patentability, patent appli- 
cations are now examined for compliance with formal require^ 
ments and actions are mailed requiring correction of stated 
informalities. Many Inquiries have arisen concerning the effect 
of such actions. Since the actions concerning correction of 
Informalities Include the setting of a period for response, 
failure to respond within the period set results In abandon- 
ment of the application. 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



7 . 



Inquiries directed to the Application Branch, either In 
person or by telephone, concerning patent applications should 
~ not be made during the morning hours between 8 : 30 and 
10 : 30. 

The letter of transmittal accompanying the filing of con- 
tinuing applications, particularly streamlined continuations 
and Rule 147 divlslonals. should Include such additional In- 
formation as the Identification by serial number of the parent 
application. Its status, and location in the Patent Office. The 
supplying of this Information will permit the processing of 
these new applications more rapidly than at present. 

When a new application Is filed with a request to transfer 
drawings under Rule 88, the application papers should include 
drawing prints to enable the Application Branch to process 
the case before transfer of the formal drawings Is effected. 



June 1, 1971. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Assistant Commissioner. 



[887 O.G. 1841] 



(22) New Procedures for Proce.ssing Orders for Certi- 
fied Copies When Material Is Not Available for 
sPhotocopyino 

The previous practice of the Document Services Division 
In handling customer's requests for certified copies of material 
not yet processed In the Application Division has been to 
return tho order to the customer requesting him to reorder 
30 days after receipt of his Official Filing Receipt. 

In order to Improve this procedure, as of August 2, 1971, 
all requests for certified copies of material that has not been 
processed In the Application Division and has not been placed 
on microfiche are processed in the following manner. 

1. Each order Is given a control number. 

2. The customer Is notified as follows : 

o. He will receive an acknowledgment of the receipt of 
his order. 

b. He will be given the assigned control number for ease 
of reference In case an Inquiry Is necessary. 

c. He will be informed that his order will be held In the 
Document Services Division until the copy can be re- 
produced from microfiche. No definite time can be given. 

3. An Advance Order File has been set up In the Service 
Unit of the Document Services Division and the microfiche Is 
checked dally. 

For further service to Its customers, the Document Services 
Division will furnish the Serial Number and Filing Date of 
the latest application available on microfiche for publication 
In the Official Gazette. 

ROBERT J. RISH, 
Aug. 2, 1971. Acting Assistant Commissioner 

for Administration. 
[890 O.G.301] 



status Inquiry would be appropriate where a Notice of Al- 
lowance is not received within three months from receipt of 
either a Form POL-327 or an Examiner's Amendment. 

Current examining procedures also aim to minimize the 
spread In dates among the various examiner dockets of each 
Art Unit and Group with respect to actions on new applica- 
tions. Accordingly, the dates of the "oldest new applications" 
appearing In the Official Gazette are fairly reliable guides 
as to the expected time frames of when the Examiners reach 
the cases for action. 

Therefore. It should be rarely necessary to query the 
status of a new application. 

Amended Applications 

Amended cases are expected to be taken np by the examiner 
and an action completed within two months of the amendment 
date. Accordingly, a status inquiry Is not In order after 
response by the attorney until five or six months have elapsed 
with no response from the Patent Office. A post card receipt 
for responses to Office actions, adequately and specifically 
identifying the papers filed, will be considered prima facie 
proof of receipt of such papers. Where such proof Indicates 
the timely filing of a response, the submission of a copy of 
the post card with a copy of the response will ordinarily 
obviate the need for a petition to revive. Proof of receipt 
of a timely response to a final action will obviate the need 
for a petition to revive only If the response was in compliance 
with Rule 113. 

In General 

It Is expected that this new policy will result In sharply 
reducing the number of status inquiries and permit the time 
now spent on them to be used In Increasing Patent Office 
efficiency In other more essential areas. 

Such status Inquiries as may be still necessary may be 
more expeditiously processed by the Patent Office if each 
inquiry Includes the application Serial Number, filing date, 
name of the applicant, name of the Examiner who prepared 
the most recent Office action, and Group Art Unit (taken 
from the most recent Office communication) In addition to 
the last known status of the application, and is accompanied 
by a stamped return-addressed envelope. Telephone inquiries 
regarding the status of applications should be directed to 
the group clerical personnel and not to the examiners. Inas- 
much as the official records and applications are located In 
the clerical section of the Examining Groups, the clerical 
personnel can readily provide status information without 
consulting the examiners. 

Status replies will be made by the Patent Office clerical 
support force and will only indicate whether the application 
is awaiting action by the Examiner or the applicant's response 
to an Office action. In the latter Instance the mailing date 
of the Office action will also be given. 

The Notices of Dec. 5, 1969 (869 O.G. 1031) and Sept. 22, 
I960 (819 O.G. 444) are hereby superseded. 



Status Inquiries 



(23) . 

In an effort to sharply reduce the volume and need for 
status Inquiries, the past policy that diligence must be estab- 
lished by making timely status requests in connection with 
petitions to revive Is hereby discontinued. 

When an application has been abandoned for an excessive 
period before the filing of a petition to revive, an appropriate 
terminal disclaimer may be required. It should also be recog- 
nized that a petition to revive must be accompanied by the 
proposed response unless it has been previously filed (Rule 
137). Also, under Rule 113, "Response to a final rejection 
or action must Include cancellation of, or appeal from the 
rejection of, each claim so rejected and. If any claim stands 
allowed, compliance with any requirement or objection as 
to form." 

Neu) Applications 

Current examining procedures now provide for the routine 
mailing from the Examining Groups of Form POL-327 In 
every case of allowance of an application except where an 
Examiner's Amendment Is promptly mailed. Thus, tlie sep- 
arate mailing of a Form POL-327 or an Examiner's Amend- 
ment in addition to a formal Notice of Allowance (POL-85) 
In all allowed cases would seem to obviate the need for status 
Inquiries even as a precautionary measure where the applicant 
may believe his new application may have been passed to 
Issue on the first examination. However, as an exception, a 



Nov. 24. 1971. 



(24) 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Assistant Commissioner of Patent$. 

[893 O.G. 810] 



New application Processing 



Because of the delays In processing newly filed applications 
and the various problems attendant with those delays, a tem- 
porary Parallel Application Branch has been established. 

This unit is processing all new applications filed after 
Oct. 27, 1971, and will be mailing application filing receipts 
within one month of the application filing date. The regular 
Application Branch will continue to operate and process the 
Inventory of new applications and papers received through 

Oct. 27, 1971. 

As a result of this arrangement, applicants may receive 
filing receipts on applications filed after Oct. 27, 1971, prior 
to receiving filing receipts on applications filed before that 

date. 

The temporary Application Branch will continue opera- 
tions until the regular Application Branch has disposed of 
Its Inventory of unprocessed applications. At that time, ap- 
proximately Apr. 1, 1972, It Is planned to resume all process- 
ing of newly filed applications In the regular branch by im- 
proved methods designed to keep the fiow of applications 
moving on a current basis. 

\ 



8 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



A3 previously, all applications received by the Patent Office 
will be microfilmed for record and reproduction purposes. 
The temporary operation of two application branches will 
effectively double the output of processed applications and 
will place excessive demands on our "In-house" microfilming 
capabilities. Accordingly, the applications being processed In 
the regular Application Branch will be microfilmed using 
facilities outside the Patent Office. As a result, these appli- 
cations will be unavailable for approximately a two week 
period while they are being microfilmed. Consequently, the 
filling of requests for copies of these applications may be 
somewhat delayed. 
^ However, all application copy requests which are submitted 
subsequent to two weeks after mailing of the filing receipt 
will be promptly filled. Copies requested at the time of filing 
the application will be mailed within two weeks after the 
mailing of the filing receipt. 

All mailed Inquiries concerning requests for application 
copies should be addressed to the : 

Commissioner of Patents 
Washington, 'd.C. 20231 
Attn : Customer Relations Branch '' 

Telephone ajid In-person Inquiries concerning copy requests 
should be directed to the Customer Relations Desk (703) 
557-2003 which is located adjacent the Public Search Room, 
Crystal Plaza, 2021 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington, Va. 
All other Inquiries about applications undergoing Appli- 
cation Branch processing should be addressed or directed in 
the usual manner. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
Nov. 22, 1971. Acting Commisaioner of Patents. 

• [893 O.G. 807] 



(25) Patented Files Service 

Delays have frequently been experienced In receiving fyes 
and other papers ordered from the Federal Records Center at 
Sultland, Md. To provide better service In this respect, the 
Patent Office has Initiated Its own pick up and delivery serv- 
ice to and from the storage facility. Customer orders are now 
normally filled within two days. 

Orders for files may be placed at the Attorneys and Record 
Room Desk, Building 4, Room IDOl. There Is no charge for 
this service. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
Acting Cotnmiaaioner of Patents. 



Patent Office officials, or interruptions and Irregular demands 
on their time. 

The telephone number for this service is (703) 557-2003. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
Nov. 26, 1971. Acting Commiaaioner of Patents. 

[893 O.G. 807] 



(28) 



Access to Patent Application and 
Interference Files 



In order to Insure that access to patent application and 
Interference files is given only to persons who are entitled 
thereto or who are specially authorized to have access under 
Rule 14 of the Rules of Practice In Patent Cases, and to insure 
also that the file record identifies any such specially author- 
ized person who has been given access to a file, the following 
practice will be observed by all personnel of the Patent Office : 

• 1. Access, as provided for in the Rules of Practice, will 
be given on oral request to any applicant, patentee, as- 
signee, or attorney or agent of record in an application 
or patent only upon proof of identity or upon recogni- 
tion based on personal acquaintance. 

2. Where a power of attorney or authorization of agent 
was given to a registered firm prior to July 2, 1971. 
access will be given upon oral request as In paragraph 
1 above to any registered member or employee of the 
firm who has signatory power for the firm. 

3. Unregistered employees of attorneys or agents, public 
stenographers, and all other persons not within the pro- 
visions of paragraphs 1 and 2 above will be given 
access only upon presentation of a xcritten authorization 
for acceaa signed by a person specified in paragraph 1 
above, which authorization will be entered as a part 
of the official file. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
Nov. 24, 1971. Acting Commiaaioner of Patenta. 

[893 O.G. 810T 



Patent Office Services 



Nov. 26, 1971. 



[893 O.G. 807] 



(26) 



Public Records Certification Desk 



The certification desk, loc 
Attorneys and Record Room 
vides "on-the-spot" certifyl 
walk-In requests for certified c 



ted In Crystal Plaza In the 
Building 4, Room IDOl, pro- 
service. This desk handles 
lies of file wrappers, patented 



applications, patents, and selected papers from patented ap- 
plication files. Th? usual fee for\this service ($1.00 per cer- 
tification) may be applied at thlsXlocatlon in the form of a 
paid cash order form, obtainable at- the Cashier's Office ad- 
jacent the lobby of Building #2. 



Nov. 26, 1971. 



(27) 



ROBERT GOTTSCHALK. 
Acting Commiaaioner of Patenta. 

[893 O.G. 810] 



CrsTOMER Relations Center 



A Customer Relations Center, located in Crystal Plaza 
adjacent to the Public Search Room, Building 4, Rooms A102 
and A103, has been established to provide a central customer 



(29) 

During recent months we have achieved significant progress 
In improving various aspects of the operations of the Patent 
Office, and we are hopeful that this progress will continue. 
At the same time. It is essential that we consolidate and main- 
tain gains which we have achieved. Unfortunately, it appears 
that we have not done this in two areas of particular concern 
to attorneys and others dealing with the Patent Office— (1) 
filling mall orders for patent copies and (11) supplying certi- 
fied copies of patent applications. 

Within the past few weeks, criticism by examiners and 
the public— which I very much appreciate— brought to light 
these operating deficiencies and also the inadequacy of internal 
operating Information concerning them. 

Analysis of these situations in deptli was Immediately begun, 
and an all out remedial program was initiated to eliminate 
the causes of these difficulties and to improve our services 
in both of these areas. The purpose of this notice is to con- 
firm to you our awareness of these problems and their impor- 
tance, to Inform you of our efforts to overcome them, and to 
provide a current report of their status. 

Patent Copies 

I am pleased to be able to Inform you that, as of July 24, 
1972, we were back on schedule with respect to the filling of 
orders for patent copies. These are now being filled within 10 
days following receipt of the order in the Patent Office. 

Problems of accuracy and quality In the filling of such 
orders remain, however, and our efforts in this connection 
have been somewhat handicapped by the pressure to achieve 
promptness. We fully appreciate the Importance of these mat 
ters and have adopted quality control techniques which we 



complaint and Inquiry service. The Center Is staffed with six 

highly experienced employees who process inquiries concern- .^jii'jQp^gaslngly emphasize to provide necessary improvements. 

Ing copies of U.S. patent documents previously 



ordered but 

not received. This Center handles not only walk-in but tele- 
phonic, and written requests for assistance as well. In addi- 
tion to improving customer relations, this service Is intended 
to relieve the primary customer service areas (Patent Copy 
Sales, Document Services, and Reference Order Branch), and 



Certified Copiea 

Those experiencing difficulty In promptly obtaining certified 
copies should be aware of the availability in the Patent 
Office of "on the-spot" service in this connection, so that this 
may be utilized in appropriate circumstances. 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



9 



A notice concerning this service appeared in the Official 
Gazette of December 21, 1971 (893 O.G. 810) as follows: 

"The certification desk, located in Crystal Plaza In 
the Attorneys and Record Room, Building 4, Room 
IDOl, provides 'on-the-spot' certifying service. This desk 
handles walk-in requests for certified copies of file wrap- 
pers, patented applications, patents, and selected papers 
from patented application files. The usual fee for this 
service (i?1.00 per certification) may be applied at this 
location in the form of a paid cash order form, obtain- 
able at the Cashier's Office adjacent the lobby of Build- 
ing #2." 

This service continues to be available to provide Immediate 
service on orders for certified copies of patented files. 

However, as concerns orders for certified copies of pend- 
ing applications, delays are still being experienced with 
respect to both mail orders and walk-In requests, notwith- 
standing Improvements resulting from our continuing ef- 
forts. We anticipate that such delays may continue to be 
experienced with respect to orders received during the next 
30 days. 

We are mindful of the Importance of your being able to 
obtain certified copies promptly, especially where these are 
essential to obtaining the benefit of original filing dates with 
r»spect to patent applications filed abroad. We are determined 
to make every effort to meet your needs in this respect and, 
accordingly, are initiating for the duration of the present 
emergency peritxl a special program as follows : 

(1) Effective immediately, and continuing until further 
notice, a special "Expedited Service" for certified copies will 
be available through the Customer Relations Branch located 
adjacent the Public Search Room in the Patent Office. On 
request for such service, the Customer Relations Branch will 
locate and withdraw critically needed orders from the normal 
flow and fill them on a custom basis. This program will in- 
clude special courier service between the production opera- 
tions in the m.iin building of the Department of Commerce 
in Washington and the Patent Office facilities at Crystal 
Plaza. This special "Expedited Service" may be requested 
in person, by mail, or by telephone (703-557-2003). No addi- 
tional charge will be made for such service. 

(2) Attorneys and others requesting certified copies are 
requested 

(I) to file their orders, whenever possible, at least two 
(2) weeks in advance of the date when such copies 
are required, and 

(II) to specify, when filing such orders, the exact date 
by which such copies are required. 

Comjdiance will provide us with necessary lead time and al.so 
enable us to establish necessary priorities among the orders 
to be expedited. 

(3) Requests for "Expedited Service" sliould be requested 
only in cases of critical need. Special handling necessarily 
detracts from our capability to service other orders within 
a reasonable time, and Indiscriminate use of "Expedited 
Service" would impair our ability to meet the needs of those 
having critically urgent problems. 

It is our hope and expectation that regular service will 
soon be restored to an acceptable level. A notice terminating 
this special program will be published when that has been 
achieved. In the meantime, your cooperation and understand- 
ing will be appreciated. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
July 25, 1972. Commiaaioner of Patents. 

[90i O.G. 412] 



self-addressed post card is submitj^d with a patent applica- 
tion, that post card will be stamped with both the receipt 
date and seriarrtumber prior to returning It to the addressee. 

The identifying data on the post card should include: (1) 
applicant's name(s) ; (2) title of Invention; (3) number of 
pages of specification, claims, and sheets of drawing; (4) 
whether oath or declaration used; and (5) amount and man- 
ner of paying the fee. 

A return post card should be attached to each patent ap- 
plication for which a receipt Is desired. 

This notice supersedes the notice of March 10, 1971 (884 
O.G. 970). 

WILLIAM I. MERKIN, 
Assistant Commiasioner for Adminiatration. 

.August 9, 1972. 

[902 O.G. 2] 



(."^D NOTICE TO APPLICANTS, ATTORNEYS AND AGENTS 
RE PRELIMINARY CLASSIFICATION OF PATENT APPLICA- 
TIONS 

The Patent Office Is Initiating a pro^m for expediting 
newly filed applications through pre-examination steps. This 
program requires your cooperation to' attain the desired re- 
sult — a reduction in processing time. 

We are, therefore, asking you to Include a preliminary 
classification on newly filed applications. The preliminary 
classification, preferably class and subclass designations, 
should be identified in the upper right-hand corner of the 
letter of transmittal accompanying the application papers, 
for example. "Proposed class 2, subclass 129." 

This program is voluntary and the classification submitted 
will be accepted as advisory in nature. The final class and 
subclass assignment remains the responsibility of the Patent 

Office. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Aug. 11, 1972. Acting Commiaaioner of Patents^ 

~~l902 O.G. 376] 



(30) 



Earlier Notification of Serial Numbers 



(32) Patent Office Services 

Addendum to Official Gazette Notice of 
AUG. 8, 1972 (901 O.G. 412) 

We wish to call attention to a situation discovered during 
our study and analysis of the patent copy service. ^Ve found 
that there has been a lack of effective controls affecting 
orders for printed copies of patents placed by letter. Includ- 
ing cash order, and deposit account order forms. 

Effective controls for Patent Office coupon orders have 
been established. 

We are now implementing a similar procedure for orders 
placed by letter, including cash order, and deposit account 
order forms. It Is possible, however, that a few orders sub- 
mitted in this way In the last few months have gone astray. 
Accordingly, if you placed such requests for patent copies 
prior to July 15, 1972, and have not yet received those 
copies, we suggest that you submit, to the address given 
below, a follow-up communication which should Identify the 
original request by date and include the Patent Numbers 
originally ordered. 

Address inquiries to : 

Director 

Office of Public Services 
U.S. Patent Office 
Washington, D.C. 20231 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 

Commiaaioner of Patenta. 



Sept. 7, 1972. 



[903 O.G. 368] 



• Various procedures are being revised in an effort to reduce 
pre-examination processing time for newly filed patent ap- 
plications and to implement the new Patent Application Lo- 
cator and Monitorinc System. The first change which has 
been effected results In the assignment of serial numbers in 
the Correspondence and Mail Division immediately after mall 
has been opened. 

With the Implementation of this new procedure, it is no 
longer necessary to submit two self-addressed post cards 
when early notification of the serial number is desired. If a 



(33) 



Distribution of New Declaration 
Form PO-1147 (Revised) 



In a recent Issue of the Official Gazette (898 O.G. 738) 
we announced the availability of a new Sole-Joint Declara- 
tion Form, PO-1147. The distribution was limited to single 
copies of the form. We are pleased to report that use of the 



10 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



form has resulted in Increased efficiency in processing newly 
filed applications. 

In order to encourage greater use of the form, we now can 
furnish larger quantities without charge. Accordingly, dis- 
tribution will be made in single copies or In multiples of 10 
forms. Since our supply Is limited, only orders for reason- 
able quantities can be filled. 

The forms may be obtained from the receptionist In the 
lobby of Building 3 at our Arlington, Va. location or by mall 
request. The latter should be addressed to : 

Commissioner of Patents 
Washington, D.C. 20231. 
Attn : Form Distribution 



Sept. 11, 1972. 



ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 

Commiasioner of Patents. 



■ [903 0.0. 368] 



Assignments from original applications are applied without 
charge ONLY to divisional, continuation, or substitute appli- 
cations where the date of the assignment is prior to the filing 
date of the later-filed application. (Continuation-in-part 
applications require separate assignments if they are to be 
issued to the assignee.) 

Practitioners are reminded of the provisions of Rule 334. 
Unless an assignment is filed at or prior to the date of pay- 
ment of the Issue fee, the patent will normally be Issued In 
the name of the Inventor. 

Section 306 of the Manual of Patent Examining Procedure* 
will be amended appropriately. 

W. R. ARMSTRONG. 
Director, Office of Patent Servicea. 
Concurred : 

(signed) R. A. WAHL, 
Aaaiatant Commiaaioner. 

[830 O.G. 442 (Sept. 12, 1966)] 



(34) i Change in Copt Certification Procedures 

Pursuant to 28 USC 1744 the Patent Office provides "copies 
of letters patent or of any records, books, papers or drawings 
belonging to the Patent Office and relating to patents, authen- 
ticated under the seal of the Patent Office and certified by the 
Commissioner of Patents, or by another officer of the Patent 
Office authorized to do so by the Commissioner. . . ." In the 
Interest of improved efficiency the Patent Office will, effective 
Immediately, change Its method of certifying copies of the 
recited materials. Thereafter, the certificate and the copy 
win be secured together by a staple In lieu of the ribbon 
currently employed. The new procedures will retain the use 
of the Patent Office seal and the certification by the Com- 
missioner of Patents or other authorized officer in keeping 
with the requirements of the above statute. 



Sept. 20, 1972. 



RICHARD A. WAHL. 

Acting Commiaaioner. 

[903 O.G. 368] 



(37) Recording of Instrti.ments 

Effective April 1, 1967, the Patent Office will accept and 
record legible certified copies of original assignments or other 
instruments. 

The certified copy, if not in the English language, will not 
be recorded unless accompanied by a translation signed by 
the translator. 

Certification shall be to the fact that the Instrument sub 
mltted is a true oopy of the original and shall be made by a 
notary public or, if In a foreign country, by a consular officer 
of the United States or an officer authorized to administer 
oaths and authenticated by a consular officer of the United 

StfltBS ~~ 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 
Mar. 3, 1967. Aaaiatant Commiaaioner. 

[836 O.G. 1111] 



RECORDS AND FILES 



(35) Accessibility of Assignment Records 

In view of a number of Inquires as to the manner in which 
Rule 1.12 of the Patent Office Rules of Practice, as amended 
August 23, 1965 (819 O.G. 443) Is to be applied, the pro- 
cedure which It is planned to follow in certain types of cases 
is set forth below. 

1. Assignments relating to applications for registration of 
trademarks will be open to public inspection as heretofore. 

2. The Office will not open certain parts only of an assign- 
ment document to public inspection. If such a document 
contains two or more items, any one of which, if alone, would 
be open to such Inspection, then the entire document will be 
open. Thus, if an assignment covers either a trademark or a 
patent in addition to one or more patent applications, it will 
be available to the public ab Initio ; and if it covers a number 
of patent applications, it will be so available as soon as any 
one of them is patented. Assignments relating only to one 
or more pending applications for patent will not be open to 
public inspection. 

3. If the application on which a patent was granted is a 
division or continuation of an earlier case, the assignment 
records of that case will be open to public Inspection ; similar 
situations Involvlns continuation in part applications will be 
considered on their individual merits. 

4irfAsslgnment records relating to reissue applications' will 
be open to public Inspection. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER, 
Dec. 15, 1965. Commiaaioner. 

[822 O.G. 769] 



,33) * PUBLIC Search RopM 

Due to budget and personnel limitations which took effect 
on July 1, 1908. it has become necessary to adopt measures 
that are consistent with these limitations and that will per- 
mit continuance of Patent Office activities and facilities 
without curtailing their use to the public. Among these 
measures is the service of returning to the files those patent 
bundles used by the attorneys and the general public in the 
Public Search Room. 

Beginning August 19, 1968, in order that free access to 
the stacks may be maintained, persons drawing patent bundles 
from the search files will be expected to return them to the 
file slots from which they were withdrawn. 

This will enable the personnel In the Public Search Room 
to concentrate their time and efforts on the necessary up- 
dating and storage maintenance for Improvement of the in- 
tegrity of the search files. .^.TTT 

*• ' RICHARD A. WAHL, 

Aug. 12. 1968. Aaaiatant Commiaaioner. 

[854 O.G. 287] 



(39) 



Assignment Information for Issue Fee 
Transmittal Form 



(36) Notification Re : Conflict in .\ssign.ment in 
Certain Applications 

Effective September 12, 1966, Assignment Branch will dis- 
continue mailing notification in cases where there is a conflict 
in assignment between an original application and Its divi- 
sional, continuation, substitute, or continuation-in-part appli- 
cation. 



Rule 334, revised November 4. 1969, requires . . . "At the 
time of payment of the issue fee. a statement must be furnished 
indicating whether or not an assignment has been filed with 
the Patent Office. In the event an assignment has been filed 
such statement must Include the name of the assignee and 
indicate whether or not an acknowledgment of a recorded as- 
signment has been received from the Patent Office. 

The Issue Fee Transmittal Form POL-85b revised De^ 
cember 1969, provides space (Item 2) for Assignment Data 
wmch Should be completed to comply ^l'^ ^^^^^'^''^fZ 
an assignee's name and address are identified In Item 2 of the 
Ls .e Fee Transmittal Form POL-851,, the patent will issu to 
the applicant. Assignment data printed on the patent will be 
based on information so supplied. 

A request for correction of error arising from failure to 
correctly provide this Assignment Data In Item 2 will be con- 



JANUARY 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



11 



Bldered only under the provisions of Rule 323 for a certificate 
of correction of applicant's mistake. 

The recording of Instruments In the Assignment Branch Is 
not affected by this notice. 



Sept. 28, 1970. 



WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, JR., 

Commiaaioner of Patenta. 

[879 O.O. 988] 



(40) Certified Copies of Applications as 

Originally Filed 

The Patent Office has discontinued placing the assignments 
of record on the file wrapper of patent applications, except 
when a title report Is requested or upon allowance of the case. 
Accordingly, the copies of applications prepared in response 
to requests for a certified copy of a patent application as filed, 
will no longer Include an Indication of assignments. Applicants 
desiring an Indication of assignments of record should request 
separately certified copies of assignment documents. 

ROBERT J. RISH, 
Acting Aaaiatant Commiaaioner 

for Adminiatration. 

[887 O.G. 1042 (6-22-71)] 



(41) 



Patented Files Service 



Delays have frequently been experienced in receiving files 
and other papers ordered from the Federal Records Center at 
Sultland, Md. To provide better service In this respect, the 
Patent Office has Initiated its own pick up and delivery serv- 
ice to and from the storage facility. Customer orders are now 
normally filled within two days. 

Orders for files may be placed at the Attorneys and Record 
Room Desk, Building 4, Room IDOl. There is no charge for 

this service. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK. 

Nov. 26, 1971. .Acting Commiaaioner of Patents. 

[893 O.G. 807] 



(42) 



Public Records Certification Desk 



The certification desk, located in Crystal Plaza in the 
Attorneys and Record Room, Building 4, Room IDOl, pro- 
vides "on-the-spot" certifying service. This desk handles 
walk-in requests for certified copies of file wrappers, patented 
applications, patents, and selected papers from patented ap 
plication files. The usual fee for this service ($1.00 per cer- 
tification) may be applied at this location In the form of a 
paid cash order form, obtainable at the Cashier's Office ad 
jacent the lobby of Building »2. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
Acting Commiaaioner of Patenta. 



Nov. 26, 1971. 



[893 O.G. 810] 



FEES AND PAYMENT OF IVIONEY 

(43) Revision or^"Disconti nuance of Deposit Ac- 
count Service for Sale of Patent Copies" 

In view of the difficulties experienced by many of Its cus- 
tomers, the Patent Office is revising the Notice appearing in 
the December 1, 19G4, Issue of the Official Gazette of the U.S. 
Patent Office. This Notice — Discontinuance of Depo.slt Ac- 
count Service for Sale of Patent Copies — is revised to except 
certain types of patent copy orders. 

The Patent Office will now accept lists of fifty (50) or more 
numbers arranged In numerical sequence to be chargSTl to 
Deposit Accounts. Service charges, such as Special Handling 
and Air Mall postage for these orders, may also be charged 
to Deposit Accounts. 

C. A. KALK, 
July 15, 1965. Director of .Adminiatration. 

[818 O.G. 1207] 



(44) Fbes in Connection With Amendments 

to Patent Applications 

This notice supplements the Notice of September 10, 1965. 
818 O G 1207. September 28. 1965, relating to the adminis- 
tration of the act of July 24. 1965. Public Law 89-83, increas- 
ing certain fees payable to the United States Patent Office. 

That act provides for the payment of additional fees on 
presentation of certain claims during the prosecution of appli- 
cations This provision applies In the case of applications 
filed on or after October 25. 1965, the effective date of the 
act In such cases, when any amendment is filed which pre- 
sents additional claims over the total number covered by fees 
previously paid. It should be accompanied by any additional 
fppQ Hnp 

Ab In 'the case of claims presented after an application Is 
filed and before first action, described in the Notice of Septem- 
ber 10 1965. when Independent claims are subsequently pre- 
sented' so that the number of uncanceled Independent claims 
in the application as amended exceeds the number of such 
claims paid for. an additional fee of $10 is due 'o/ ^^^^ «";;; 
additional claim. Similarly, an add'tlonal fee of $2 is due 
for each claim added In excess of the number of uncanceled 
claims. Independent or dependent, already paid for. 

Treatment of .Amendmenta Unaccompanied bv Feea Due 
Amendments filed during and after the prosecution of an 
application and not accompanied by the entire fee due upon 
such filing will be treated as follows : 

If such an amendment is filed In reply to an Office action 
It will be regarded as not being fully responsive thereto and 
ho practice sot forth In section 714.03 of the Manual of 
Patent Examining Procedure will be followed, care being 
taken to avoid any abuse of this practice by -^"""^f J«' '^J 
example, by habitual submission of such amendments without 
fees or with Insufficient fees. 

If an amendment which Is not filed in response to an Office 
action is of such a nature as to require a fee and Is "ot ^ccom^ 
Janled by the full fee required. It will not be entered and the 
applicant will be so advised. 

Amendment During Interference 
\u amendment filed in connection with a motion to add 
counts to an interference (Rule 233) must be accompanied by 
the claim or claims to be added and with the appropriate fees, 
if any which would be due if the amendments were to be 
entered It may be that the amendments will never be en- 
tered Only upon the granting of the motion is It necessary 
for the other party or parties to present the claims, but the 
fees must be paid whenever presented. 

Claims which have been submitted in response to a sug- 
gestion by the Office for inclusion In an application must be 
accompanied by the fee due. If any. 

.Amendment .After Requirement for Reatriction 
After a requirement for restriction or election of species, 
nonelected claims will be Included in determining the fees due 
in connection with a subsequent amendment unless such 

claims a.tg canceled. 

Refunda 

Monev paid in excess or by mistake in connection with an 
amendm'ent will be refunded In the usual manner. 

Amendments affecting the claims cannot serve as the basis 
for irrantlnp any refund. 

Money paid In connection with the filing of a proposed 
amon.im.MU will not be refunded b.v reason of the nonentry of 

the amendment. ^^..-.^.^TT^n 

EDWARD J. BRENNER. 

Jan. 13. 1966. Commiaaioner of Patenta. 



[823 O.G. 814] 



(45) DEPOSIT Accounts— STATUTORY Fee Charges 

Beginning on May 1. 1966. a^d until further notice statu- 
tory fees, including filing fees for patent, design, and trade- 
mark applications, issue fees, appeal fees and oppos tion 
cancellation and petition fees may be charged against the 
deposit accounts provided for by Rule 25(a) of the Rules of 
Practice in patent cases. During this period the prohibition 
of Rule 25(b) against such charges will be suspended 

in v!ew of the facts that these fees are Indispensable parts 
of the actions to which they relate and that the charging 



12 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



of a fee against an account which does not contain sufficient 
funds to cover It cannot be regarded as a payment qf the fee, 
It l8 evident that the overdrawing of a deposit account may 
result in the loss of a vital date and may also Impose a sub- 
stantial burden on the Patent Office In making appropriate 
correction of Its records. It Is, therefore, necessary that^effec- 
tlve steps be taken to avoid such overdrafts, as follows : 

Checks of all accounts will be made periodically, and If any 
account Is found to have been overdrawn, It will be Immedi- 
ately removed from the active accounts and no further drafts 
on it will be honored. Prompt payment of the outstanding 
balance will be required and the depositor or his attorney 
may be called on for an itemized statement identifying all 
statutory fees charged against the account during the period 
In question In order that it may be ascertained whether any 
previously granted date should be withdrawn. 

It Is emphasized that the success of the procedure outlined 
above depends upon the maintenance of a sufficient balance 
In deposit accounts at all times to meet any charges yade 
against them. The Office must, therefore, strictly refuse to 
permit any depositor who has once overdrawn his account to 
maintain such an account In the future and In the event that 
any substantial number of overdrafts occurs It may be neces- 
sary to reestablish the prohibition of Rule 25(b) against 
charging statutory fees against deposit accounts. 

Accordingly, effective May 1, 1966, the requirement of 
Rule 25(a) that an amount sufficient to cover all charges 
made against an account must always be on deposit will b^ 
strictly enforced, regardless of whether any fee is Included 
In such charges and where this requirement Is not complied 
with the account Involved will be removed from the active 
accounts. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER, 
Feb. 23, 1966. Commiasioner. 

[824 O.G. 1200) 



(46) Practice in the Use of Accodnts for Pay- 
ment OF Statutory Fees 

In the Official Gazettes of March 15, 22, and 29, there 
appeared copies of an announcement by the Commissioner 
providing for a trial use of accounts established under Rule 
25 for the payment of statutory fees. A number of questions 
have come up in connection with the use of accounts in the 
payment of these fees prescribed by Public Law 89-83 and, 
in the Interest of uniform practice, publication of a statement 
is warranted. 

A general direction by an applicant or attorney to charge 
to an account these fees as they arise In any application 
prosecuted by the applicant, the attorney, or the firm will not 
be effective for such a purpose. Authority to make charges 
will be limited to a particular application. 

A separate direction to charge shall be filed for each fee. 
Each such direction to charge a fee shall be transmitted on 
a separate sheet of paper and. In the case of fees based on 
modification of claims shall Include the best estimate of the 
fee due. Failure to Include such an estimate provides the 
basis for a refusal to enter any amendment transmitted there- 
with, as an incomplete response. Where variable fees are 
Involved Inclusion of a direction to charge or credit a de- 
ficiency or overpayment would appear appropriate. 

An issue fee will not be charged to an account until a notice 
of allowance has been forwarded and a reply to that notice 
received. 

For the purposes of determining the fee due the Patent 
OflBce, a claim will be treated as dependent if It contains 
reference to one other claim In the application. A claim de- 
termined to be dependent by this test will be entered If the 
fee paid reflects this determination. This does not, however, 
prevent the rejection of such a claim as Improper, if, in fact, 
it Is not a dependent claim. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER, 
Apr. 12, 1966. Commiisioner of Patents. 

[825 0.0. 1183) 



which Incorporates by reference a single preceding claim, 
whether independent or dependent, and includes all the limi- 
tations of the claim so Incorporated, there appears to be still 
some uncertainty on this matter and it is therefore thought 
to be desirable to elaborate it. 

Since the initial determination, for fee purposes, as to 
whether a claim is dependent must be made by persons other 
than examiners, it is necessary, at that time, to accept as 
dependent virtually every claim which refers to another 
claim, without determining whether there Is actually a true 
dependent relationship. Such acceptance does not, however, 
preclude a subsequent holding by the examiner that a claim 
is not a proper dependent claim. 

An essential characteristic of a proper dependent claim Is 
that it shall Include every limitation of the claim from which 
it depends (35 U.S.C. 112) or In other words that It shall 
not conceivably be Infringed by anything which would not 
also Infringe the basic claim. Thus, for example. If claim 1 
recites the combination of elements a, b, c and d, a claim 
reciting the structure of claim 1 in which d was omitted or 
replaced by e would not be a proper dependent claim, even 
though it placed further limitations on the remaining ele- 
ments or added still other elements. 

The fact that a dependent claim which is otherwise proper 
might require a separate search or be separately classified 
from the claim on which It depends would not render it an 
improper dependent claim, although It might result in a 
requirement for restriction. 

The fact that the Independent and dependent claims are 
in different statutory classes does not, in Itself, render the 
latter improper. Thus, If claim 1 recites a specific product 
a claim for the method of making the product of claim 1 In 
a particular manner would be a proper dependent claim since It 
could not be Infringed without Infringing claim 1. Similarly, 
If claim 1 recites a method of making a product, a claim for 
a product made^by the method of claim 1 could be a proper 
dependent claim. On the other hand, if claim 1 recites a 
method of making a specified product, a claim to the product 
set forth in claim 1 would not be a proper dependent claim if 
the product might be made In other ways. 

Any claim which is in dependent form but which Is so 
worded that it does not, in fact. Include every limitation of 
the claim on which It depends, will be required to be cancelled 
as not being a proper dependent claim ; and cancellation of 
any further claim depending on such a dependent claim will 
be similarly required. The applicant may thereupon amend 
the claims to place them in proper dependent form, or may 
redraft them as Independent claims upon payment of any 
necessary additional fee. 

The basis for the difference in fees between Independent 
and dependent claims Is the fact that the examination of a 
dependent claim Is normally a comparatively simple matter 
after the claim on which it depends has been examined. 
This relationship, however, obtains only when the Independ- 
ent claim represents a bona fide attempt to define the Inven- 
tion and to distinguish it from the known prior art. Accord- ^ 
ingly, the presentation of a claim which on its face is obvi- 
ously unpate^able or indefinite, as basis on which other 
claims are defbudent. Is not considered to be proper prac 
tice. One example of such a practice Involves the use of a 
claim drawn to "all the features of novelty herein disclosed," 
with other claims, which actually recite the features thought 
to be novel, being dependent on the first. A similarly objec- 
tionable arrangement would Involve the use, as a basic inde- 
pendent claim, of a claim merely reciting "a wheeled vehicle," 
"an amino acid" or "an Internal combustion engine." 

Such a practice as that just described Involves not only 
an attempt to evade the free provisions of Public Law 89-83, 
but also the presentation of a claim known by the attorney 
or agent presenting it to be unpatentable. Any registered 
patent attorney or agent who makes a practice of presenting 
claims of this character may be called on to explain his 

actions. ' 

(signed) EDWARD J. BRENNER, 
June 8, 1966. Commiaaioner. 

[828 O.G. 1) 



(47) Dependent Claims ' 

(Aa\ Deposit Accounts 

Although the notice published on October 5, 1965, in 819 ^ ' 
O.G. 3, explained that for the purposes of the present fee The practice instituted on May 1, 1966. pursuant to the 
bill. Public Law 89-83, approved July 24, 1965, the Patent notice of February 23. 19G6 (824 O.G. 1200), whereby statu^ 
Office will consider a proper dependent claim as being one tory fees may be charged against deposit accounts, and such 



•s 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



13 



accounts are closed if overdrawn, has resulted In certain 
difficulties for the Patent Office and deposit account holders. 
It has been decided therefore to modify that practice as 
Indicated below. 

As was pointed out In that notice, the charging of a fee 
against an overdrawn account cannot be considered as pa.v- 
ment of the fee until a proper balance is restored or payment 
Is made in some other way. Accordingly, deposit account 
holders who charge such fees must assume the risk of losing 
vital dates If they do not maintain a proper balance In their 
accounts at all times. 

Apart from this, however, the overdrawing of an account 
places a^burden on the Patent Office, particularly where a 
number of Items are charged after the overdraft occurs, and 
It is appropriate that those who are responsible for causing 
such a condition should bear the cost of correcting It. In 
view of this fact, and of the hardship frequently caused If 
an account Is permanently closed, the practice of closing de- 
posit accounts merely because they are overdrawn will be 
discontinued, effective August 1, 1966. In lieu thereof an 
overdrawn account will be immediately suspended and no 
charges will be accepted against It until a proper balance Is 
restored, together with a payment of ten dollars to cover the 
work done by the Patent Office Incident to suspending and 
reinstating the account and dealing with charges which may 
have been made In the meantime. It Is expected, however, 
that reasonable precautions will be taken In all cases to avoid 
overdrafts, and If an account Is suspended repeatedly It will 

be necessary to close It. ,. „ . * nm^^ 

Similarly, because of the burden placed on the Patent Office 
Incident to the operation of deposit accounts, a charge of ten 
. dollars will be made for opening each new account. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER, 

Commiaaioner. 

[828 O.G. 377) 



After the patent Is printed and the number of pages of 
specification is found to exceed the one already paid for, a 
Notice of Balance of Issue Fee Due will be attached to the 
Grant. Failure to pay this balance within THREE MONTHS 
FROM THE DATE OF THE PATENT will result in lapse of 
the patent. 

Practitioners are urged to use the special fee transmittal 
forms provided with the Notice of Allowance and the Notice 
of Balance of Issue Fee Due. 

The above fees will not be accepted from anyone other than 
the applicant, his assignee, attorney, or a party in interest 
as shown by the records of the Patent Office. 

ATTENTION is also directed to the space designated on the 
Notice of Allowance Transmittal form P0-S5a wherein the 
name of the assignee is required if it ia desired to have the 
patent iaaued to an aaaignee or aaai^neea. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Jan. 31 1969. Aaaiatant Commiaaioner. 

[860 O.G. 2) 



(51) 



Calculation of Issue Fees 



June 23, 1966. 



(49) 



Practice Re : Filing Vkes 



It is suggested that attorneys review the notices pertaining 
to filing fees under the new Fee Act of 1905 appearing at 
818 O.G. 1207, September 28, 1965, and 823 O.G. 814, Feb- 
ruary 15, 196C. 

The filing fee Includes the basic $G5 fee plus an additional 
fee corresponding to the number and type of claims presented. 
For filing fee purposes the Patent Office considers any claim 
that specifically refers back to another claim to be a dependent 
claim, regardless of statutory class. 

It appears that some attorneys are submitting filing fees 
In excess of their computations, apparently to Insure against 
loss of a filing date should their computations be in error. 
This is neither necessary nor desirable. The Application 
Branch has been authorized to accept all applications, other- 
wise acceptable, if the basic fee of ?G5 is submitted, and If 
the deficiency Is no more than $25 of the required filing fee, 
and to require payment of the deficiency within a stated 
period upon notification of the deficiency. Practitioners are 
urged to discontinue submitting excessive fees, since process- 
ing such fees has proved costly to the Office, and since appli- 
cants are believed to be adequately protected against loss of 
filing date by the practice outlined above. 

There appears to be an erroneous impression that a Rule 
147 divisional case requires a filing fee based on the claims 
in the parent case. The 818 O.G. 1207 notice specifically 
states that an amendment filed with a Rule 147 ca.se will be 
effective to reduce the number of claims upon which the fee 

Is based. ^^^ 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 

June 30, 1966. Aaaiatant Commiasioner. 

[828 O.G. 1085) 



This notice is to clalrfy the manner In which the balance 
of issue fee due is calculated for the printed pages of specifi- 
cation (including claims) in excess of the one page already 
paid for by payment of the Minimum Issue Fee (see the notice 
of Januarv 31, 19G9. S60 O.G. 2). 

Under the authority of 35 U.S.C. 151. the charge is disre- 
garded WHERE ONLY ONE ADDITIONAL PAGE OR LESS 
is involved. Thus, if the patent consists of two pages or less. 
no balance fee Is due. However, if the patent consists of three 
pages, a Notice of Balance of Issue Fee Due for ?20 is mailed 
together with the original patent grant. (A page consists of 
one side of a printed sheet containing two columns or less.) 

CLARENCE A. KALK. 
Acting Aaaiatant Commiaaioner for Adminiatration. 

Feb. 4, 1970. • 

[872 O.G. 1) 



(52) 



Fees in Connection With Amendments to 
Patent Applications 



.\n Increasing number of amendments are being received 
with improper fees. Because of the problems occasioned there- 
by. It Is suggested that attorneys review the notices pertain- 
ing to fees and the Office practice related thereto (823 O.G. 
S14. Feb. 15. 196G: S28 O.G. 1. July 5, 1966; 828 O.G. 1085, 
July 26, 19G6). Attention Is invited to the new form 3.52, 
Amendment transmittal letter, for additional guidance in 
computing fees (869 O.G. 1036, Dec. 23. 1969). This form 
may be obtained from the Receptionist in Building 3 of Crystal 
Plaza. The new loose-leaf rule book, which will soon be avail- 
able. Includes a .sample form (No. 52) also. When submitting 
the new amendment transmittal letter please Include the 
Art Unit and Examiner's name. 

The above notices and new form may also be found as 
items 24. 25, 29 and 147 in the consolidated listing of notices 
in the Official Gazette of Jan. 13. 1970. 



Mar. 13, 1970. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Aaaiatant Commiasioner. 



[873 O.G. 1) 



(53) 



Examiner Amend.ments — Charge Against 
Deposit accounts 



(50) Issue Fees 

Effective March 31, 1969, the Patent Office will discontinue 
the practice of estimating the number of printed pages of 
specification In advance of printing. 

Instead, a Minimum Issue Fee will be due three months 
from the date of the Notice of Allowance. This minimum fee, 
which consists of $100 plus $10 for the first page of printed 
specification plus %2 for each sheet of drawing, will be shown 
on the Notice of Allowance which has been revised to reflect 
the new practice. 



The Examiners Amendment practice is hereby extended to 
include charges against deposit accounts under special condi- 
tions. Charges under this practice shall not exceed $50.00 for 
.^arh patent application. 

In order to expedite the Issuance of a patent on an applica- 
tion otherwise ready for allowance, an Examiner's Amendment 
win be acceptable to make a charge against a deposit account 
provided prior approval is obtained from the attorney or agent. 
When such an E.xaminer's Amendment is prepared, the prior 
approval will be Indicated by identification of the name of 
the authorizing party, the date and type (personal or tele- 
phone) of authorization, the purpose for which the charge Is 



14 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



made (drawing correction, additional claims, etc.), and the 
deposit account number. Further Identlfylnj: data. If deemed 
necessary and requested by the attorney, should also be In- 
cluded in the Examiner's Amendment. 



Mar. 17, 1970. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Acting Commissioner 0/ Patents. 

[873 O.G. 667] "^ 



(54) Changes in Ch.\rges for Copies 

The Patent OflBce Is announcing a change In the charges 
for copies of materials produced on coin-operated copiers lo- 
cated at Crystal Plaza. The charge will be 15^ per page. 

This change will be effective within the next 30 to 43 days 
due to the engineering changes necessary to accommodate the 
difference In number and value of coins. . 

The Patent Office will monitor this change for a period of 
six months to: (1) Evaluate effects on other services, equip- 
ment utilization, materials, and facilities: and, (2) Ensure 
that the new charge of IW per page will enable the Patent 
OflBce to fully recover the cost of operating the copiers. 

At the end of the period, the data obtained will be evalu- 
ated with a view to continuance or discontinuance of the 

reduced rate. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
June 6, 1972. . Commissioner of Patents. _ 

[899 O.G. 1230] 



POWERS OF ATTORNEY 

(55) Withdrawal of Attorney 

To expedite the handling of requests for permission to 
withdraw as attorney, under Rule 36, the request should be 
submitted In triplicate (original and two copies) and indicate 
thereon the present mailing address of the attorney who Is 
withdrawing. 

JOSEPH SCHIMMEL, 
Apr. 18. 1967. ^ Solicitor. 

" [837 O.G. 667] 



(56) 



Rule 34 — Appearances Before Board 
• or Appeals 



Applicants and their attornevs are reminded that Rule 34 
provides that before any attorney or apent will be allowed 
to 'take action of any kind In any application or proceeding, 
a written power of attorney or authorization . . . must be 
filed in the particular application or proceeding." [Italics 

added.] 

Henceforth this rule will be strictly enforced. This applies 

to attorneys app'-aring at oral hearings before the Board of 

Ai'peals. 

EDWIN L. REYNOLDS, 

July 26, 1967. First Assistant Commissioner. 

[841 O.G. 669] 



(57) 



TITLE 37— PATENTS. TRADEMARKS, 

AND COPYRIGHTS 

CHAPTER 1— Patent Office, Department of Commerce 

part 1 — RULES OF PRACTICE IN PATENT ..CASES 
PART 2 RULES OF PRACTICE IN TRADEMARK CASES 

Reconnition of Attorneys and^'Agents, Standards of Conduct, 
and Patent .ippUcation Petitions 
These rule charges eliminate present provision for the 
recognition and r.'L-istratlon of firms of attorneys and agents 
for practice in patent and trademark cases, and permit reg- 
istered attorneys and agents to file papers In patent appli- 
cations without tlie need for filing powers of attorney or 
authorizations. The changes further establish the Code of 
Professional Responsibility of the American Bar Association 
as the standard of conduct for those practicing before the 
Patent Office insofar as the Code is not Inconsistent with 
Patent Office rules. Other changes eliminate the present re- 
quirement for a petition or other express request for a patent 
and liberalize requirements as to inventor names. 



The changes relating to the discontinuance of the recog- 
nition and registration of firms are intended to obviate prob- 
lems incident to such registration such as, for example, the 
lack of certainty as to the responsibility of Individual attor- 
neys and agents for actions taken by registered nonpartner- 
ship business entitles, such as professional corporations, the 
problems associated with the rights to firm names and regis- 
tration numbers upon dissolution or reorganization of firms, 
and the recognition as "firms" of groups of attorneys or agents, 
such as parts of corporation organizations, when the attor- 
neys and agents are not In fact associated as partners. Ac- 
ceptance of papers filed in patent applications by registered 
attorneys and agents upon a representation that the attor- 
ney or agent is authorized to act In a representative capacity 
is for the purpose of facilitating responses on behalf of appli- 
cants In patent applications, and, further, to obviate the 
need for filing powers of attorney or authorizations of agent 
In Individual applications when there has been a change In 
composition of law firms or corporate patent staffs. Inter- 
views with a registered attorney or agent not of record will, 
In view of 35 U.S.C. section 122, bo conducted only on the 
basis of Information and files supplied by the attorney or agent. 
Provision is made for an applicant to supply an address to 
receive correspondence from the Patent Office concerning his 
application, In addition to his residence address, so that the 
Patent Office may direct mall to any address of applicant's 
selection, such as a corporate patent department, a firm of 
attorneys or agents, or an Individual attorney, agent, or 
other person. In connection with patent applications pending 
upon the effective date of the changes in which a firm Is the 
only representative of record (and In connection with divi- 
sions and continuations thereof not requiring executlolj by 
the applicant), the address of the firm will be considered to 
be the correspondence address for the application. Powers of 
attorney and authorizations of agent in favor of registered 
Individual attorneys and agents will, of course, continue to 
be recognized and accepted. 

The amendments to §§ 1.344 and 2.13 arc Intended to pro- 
vide a more definite and uniform standard of conduct for 
those engaged in practice before the Patent Office than do 
present rules. The Code of Professional Responsibility^ of 
the American Bar Association Is Incorporated by reference 
In the rule with a statement as to where copies thereof may 
be Inspected or obtained. The rule specifies that the standards 
referred to are those set forth in the Code of Professional 
Responsibility as amended February 24. 1970, and the rule 
does not, therefore, refer to standards Imposed by later 
amendments of the Code. Any standards In other Patent Office 
rules which are inconsistent with standards Imposed by the 
Code (as, for example, the limitations In J 1.345(b) on the 
distribution of professional announcements and the duties 
Imposed by § 1.205(b)) remain in force. 

' The elimination of the requirement for a petition request- 
ing the grant of a patent and the relaxation of requirements 
as to the names of applicants are Intended to simplify patent 
application procedures. Section 1.76 Is being revoked as re- 
dundant In view of revisions In { l.r)7. 

Notice of proposed rule making regarding revocation of 
55 135 and 1.61 and revl.slon of 5S 114. 121, 1.33. 134. 
136 151 1.52. 1.57, 1.76, 1.341, 1343, 1344, 1.346, 
1 347 2.13 and 2.15 of Title 37, Code of Federal Regu- 
lations was' published In the Federal Register of January 
15 1971 (38 F.R. 611). Interested persons were given 
an opportunity to participate in the rulemaking process 
through submission of comments In writing and at an oral 
hearing held on March 23, 1971. The rules are being adopted 
after full and careful consideration of all the material sub- 
mitted. The departures from the published text reflect cer- 
tain of the views expressed In the submitted material. 

Effective date. This revision shall become effective on the 
date of Its publication In the Federal Register (7-2-71). 

In consideration of the comments received and pursuant 
to the authority contained In Section 6 of the Act of July 19, 
1952 (66 Stat* 793: 35 U.S.C. 6). and Section 31 of that 
Act (66 Stat. 795: 35 U.S.C. 31). Title 37 of the Code of 
Federal Regulations is hereby amended as follows: 

1. In S 1.14, paragraph (a) Is revised to read as follows: 



§1.14 Patent applications preserved in secrecy. 

(a) Except as provided la § 1.11(b) pending patent ap- 
plications are preserved In secrecy. No Information will be 
given by the Office respecting the filing by any particular 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



15 



person of an application for a patent, the pendency of any 
particular case before It. or the subject matter of any par- 
ticular application, nor will access be given to or copies fur- 
nl.shed of any pending application or papers relating thereto, 
without written authority In that particular application 
from the applicant or his assignee or attorney or agent of 
record, unless It shall be necessary to the proper conduct of 
business before the Office or as provided by this part. 

• • • • • 

2. In $ 1.21, paragraph (h) Is revised to read as follows: 

§ 1.21 Patent and miscellaneous fees and charges. 

• * • • • 
(h) For registration of an attorney or agent : 

For admission to examination for registration to prac- 
tice, fee payable upon application $35.00 

On registration to practice 25.00 

• • • • • 

3. Section 1.33 is revised to read as follows : 

f 1.33 Correspondence respecting patent applications and 
proceedings. 

(a) The residence and post office address of the applicant 
must appear In the oath or declaration If not stated elsewhere 
In the application. The applicant may also specify and an 
attorney or agent of record may specify a correspondence 
address to which communications about the application are 
to be directed. All notices, official letters, and other communi- 
cations In the case will be directed to the correspondence 
address or. If no such correspondence address Is specified, to 
an attorney or agent of record (see { 1.34(b)), or, if no at- 
torney or agent is of record, to the applicant, or to any as- 
signee of record of the entire Interest If the applicant or such 
assignee so requests, or to an assignee of an undivided part 
If the applicant so requests, at the post office address of which 
the Office has been notified in the case. Amendments and 
other papers filed In the application must be signed: (1) By 
the applicant, or (2) If there Is an assignee of record of an 
undivided part Interest, by the applicant and such assignee, 
or (3) If there Is an assignee of record of the entire Interest, 
by such a.sslgnee, or (4) by an attorney or agent of record, or 
(5) by a registered attorney or agent not of record who acts 
in a representative capacity under the provisions of S 1.34(a). 
Double correspondence with an applicant and his attorney 
or agent, or with more than one attorney or agent, will not 
be undertaken. If more than one attorney or agent be made of 
record and a correspondence address has not been specified, 
correspondence will be held with the one last made of record. 

(b) An applicant who has not made of record a registered 
attorney or agent may be required to state whether he re- 
ceived assistance In the preparation or prosecution of his 
application, for which any compensation or consideration was 
given or charged, and If so, to disclose the name or names 
of the person or persons providing such assistance. This 
Includes the preparation for the applicant of the specification 
and amendments or other papers to be filed In the Patent Office, 
as well as other assistance In such matters, but does not In- 
clude merely making drawings by draftsmen or stenographic 
services in typing papers. 

4. Section 1.34 is revised to read as follows : 

S 1-34 Recognition for representation. 

(a) When a registered attorney or agent acting In a rep- 
resentative capacity appears In person or signs a paper In 
I)ractice before the Patent Office In a jiatent case, his personal 
appearance or signature shall constitute a representation to 
the Patent Office that, under the provisions of this part and 
the law, he Is authorized to represent the particular party 
In whose behalf he acts. In filing such a paper, the attorney or 
agent should specify his registration number with his signa- 
ture. Further proof of authority to act In a representative 
capacity may be required. 

(b) When an attorney or agent shall have filed his power of 
attorney, or authorization, duly executed by the person or 
persons entitled to prosecute the application, he Is a principal 
attorney of record in the case. A principal attorney or agent 
so appointed, may appoint an associate attorney or agent who 
shall also then be of record. 

S 1.35 [Revoked] 

5. Section 1.35 is revoked. 

6. Section 1.36 is revised to read as follows : 



f 1.36 Revocation of power of attorney or authorisation; 
withdrawal of attorney or agent. 

A power of attorney or authorization of agent may be re- 
voked at any stage In the proceedings of a case, and an at- 
torney or agent may withdraw, upon application to and ap- 
proval by the Commissioner. An attorney or agent, except an 
associate attorney or agent whose address Is the same as that 
of the principal attorney or agent, will be notified of the 
revocation of his power of attorney or authorization, and the 
applicant will be notified of the withdrawal of the attorney 
or agent. An assignment will not of Itself operate as a revoca- 
tion of a power or authorization previously given,- but the 
assignee of the entire Interest may revoke previous powers 
and be represented by an attorney or agent of his own 
selection. 

7. Section 1.51 Is revised to read as follows : 

f 1.51 General requisites of an application. 

Applications for patents must be made to the Commissioner 
of Patents. A complete application comprises : 

(a) A specification, Including a claim or claims, see {{ 1.71 
to 1.77. 

(b) An oath or declaration, see !{ 1.65 and 1.68. 

(c) Drawings, when necessary, see S! 1-81 to 1.88. 

(d) The prescribed filing fee. (See 35 U.S.C. section 41 for 
filing fees.) 

S. In § 1.52, paragraph (a) is revised to read as follows : 

S 1.52 Language, paper, writing, margins. 

(a) The specification and oath or declaration must be in 
the English language. All papers which are to become a part 
of the permanent records of the Patent Office must be legibly 
written or printed In permanent Ink. 

• • • • • 

9. Section 1.57 la revised to read as follows : 
{ 1.57 Signature. 

The application must be signed by the applicant In person. 
The signature to the oath or declaration will be accepted as * 
the signature to the application provided the oath or declara- 
tion is attached to and refers to the specification and claims 
to which It applies. Otherwise the signature must appear at 
the end of the specification after the claims. Full names must 
be given. Including at least one given name without abbrevia- 
tion together with any other given name or Initial. 

§ 1.61 [Revoked] 

10. Section 1.61 Is revoked. 

S 1.76 [Revoked] 

11. Section 1.7G Is revoked. 

12. In § 1.77, paragraph (h) Is revised to read as follows: 

S 1.77 Arrangement of application. 

• • • * • 
(h) Signature. (See { 1.57.) 

I 1.341 [Amended] 

13. Section 1.341 Is amended by revoking paragraph (d). 

14. Section 1.343 is revised to read as follows : 

J 1.343 Persons not registced or recognised. 

Only persons who are registered or given limited recog- 
nition as provided in { 1.342 will be permitted to prosecute 
patent apnlications of others beftre the Patent Office. 

IB. Section 1.344 Is revised to read as follows : 

1 1.344 Professional conduct. 

Attorneys and agents appearing before the Patent Office 
must conform to the standards of ethical and professional 
conduct set forth In the Code of Professional Responsibility 
of the American Bar Association as amended February 24, 
1970, Insofar as such code Is not Inconsistent with this part. 
A copy of the said code Is available for Inspection in the 
Office of the Solicitor, U.S. Patent Office, Room 11C04, Build- 
ing 3, Crystal Plaza, 2021 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington, 
Va. Copies of the code are available upon request to the Ameri- 
can Bar Center, 1155 E. GOth Street, Chicago, 111. 60637. 

16. Section 1.346 Is revised to read as follows : 

I 1.346 Signature and certificate of attorney. 

Every paper filed by an attorney or agent representing an 
applicant or party to a proceeding In the Patent Office must 



16 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



bear the signature 'of such attorney or agent, except papers 
which are required to be signed by the applicant or party In 
person (such as the application Itself and affidavits or dec- 
larations required of applicants). The signature of an at- 
torney or agent to a paper filed by him, or the filing or presen- 
tation of any paper by him, constitutes a certificate that the 
paper has been read ; that Its filing is authorized ; that to 
the best of his knowledge, information, and belief, there Is 
good ground to support It ; and that it is not Interposed for 
delay. 

17. Section 1.347 Is revised to read as follows : 

{ 1.347 Removing names from registers. 

Attorneys and agents, registered to practice before the 
Patent Office, should notify the OflHee of any change of ad- 
dress for entry on the register, by letter separate from any 
notice of change of address filed in Individual applications. 
The Office may address a letter to any person on the registers, 
at the address of which separate notice for the register was 
last received, for the purpose of ascertaining whether such 
person desires to remain on the register. The name of any 
person falling to reply and give the information requested 
within a time limit specified will be removed from the reg- 
ister, and the names so removed published in the Official 
Gazette. Any name so removed may be reinstated, either on 
the register of attorneys or the register of agents, as may be 
appropriate. 

18. Section 2.13 is revised to read as follows : 

{ 2.13 Professional conduct. 

Attorneys and other persons appearing before the Patent 
Office In trademarli cases must conform to the standards of 
ethical and professional conduct set forth In the Code of 
Professional Responsibility of the American Bar Association 
as amended February 24, 1970, insofar as such code is not 
inconsistent with this part. A co'py of the said code Is avail- 
able for inspection in the Office of the Solicitor, U.S. Patffit 
Office, Room 11C04, Building 3, Crystal Plaza, 2021 Jeffer.«on 
Davis Highway, Arlington, Va. Copies of the code are avail- 
able upon request to the American Bar Center, 1155 East 60th 
Street, Chicago, 111. 60637. 

19. Section 2.15 is revised to rea.d as follows : 

g 2.15 Signature and certificate of attorney or agent. 

Every paper filed by an attorney at law or other person 
representing an applicant or party to a proceeding in the 
Patent Office must bear the signature of such attorney at law 
or other person except those papers which are required to 
be signed by the applicant or party. The signature of an at- 
torney at law or such other person to a paper filed by him, 
or the filing of any paper by him, constitutes a certificate 
that the paper lias been read ; that its filinc is authorized ; 
that to the best of his knowledge, information, and belief 
there Is good ground to support It ; and that it is not Inter- 
po ;ed for delay. 

WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER. Jr., 

Commissioner of Patents. 
Approved : * • 

James H. Wakllin, Jr., 
Assistant Secretary for 
Science and Technology. 

[FR Doc. 71-9387 : Filed 7-1-71 ; 8 : 49 am] 

Puhlishei in 36 F.R. 12616, July 2, 1971 

[890 O.G. 298 (Sept. 14, 1971)] 



powers or authorizations filed prior to October 1. 1971, as a 
direction to consider the address of the firm as the corre- 
spondence address for the application. 

The privilege afforded by revised Rule 34(a) of the Rules 
of Practice in Patent Cases as to recopnltion of registered 
attorneys and agents not of record will apply to all applica- 
tions whether filed before or after the effective date. Attention 
is called to the requirement of Rule 34(a) that a paper filed 
by a registered patent attorney or agent In any application in 
Which he is not of record should include both his signature 
and registration number. 

Powers of attorney and authorizations of agent under Rule 
34(b) naming one or more registered individuals may con- 
tinue to be made. 

As prior to the effective date of the revised rules, where 
a paper is hand delivered to the Office and that paper has been 
properly signed by a registered attorney or agent whether 
or not of record in the particular case involved, a duplicate 
copy may be appropriately marked by the Patent Office em- 
ployee receiving the original and returned to the person de- 
livering the paper. As an example, a duplicate copy of a re- 
quest for an extension of time to make a response may he 
marked approved, initialed or signed, and returned to the 
delivering person. 

WILLIAM E. RCIHYLER, .Jr., 
.Vug. 5 1971. Commissioner of Patents. 

[890 O.G. 2] 



(59) 



Recognition of Firms of Attornf,ys 
AND Agents 



The notice of August 5, 1971, appearing In the Official 
Gazette September 7, 1971 (S90 O.G. 2) is revised as follows. 

The originally announced period terminating October 1, 
1971, relating to appointments of firms of attorneys or agents, 
filed in the Patent Office after July 2, 1971, Is liereby extended. 
Accordingly, until further notice, any power of attorney or 
authorization of agent naming a firm, received In the Patent 
Office after July 2, 1971, will be construed as a direction to 
consider the firm name and address as the correspondence 
address of the application. 



Sept. 27, 1971. 



ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
Acting Commissioner of Patents. 

[891 O.G. 886] 



(60) 



APPLICATION CONTENT 

Declaration in Lieu of Oath— Ribboning 
OF Papers Unnecessary 



Recent legislation, 35 U.S.C. 25. and Rule 68 based thereon 
permit applicants to make a written declaration In lieu of the 
customary oa?h or affirmation which accompanies a patent 
application. 

Such a declaration, even ft signed in a country foreign to 
the United States, need not be ribboned to the other papers. 

The declaration, like the oath, Is an integral part of the 
application and must be maintained together therewith. 
When a declaration is used, It is unnecessary to appear before 
any official in connection with the making of the declaration. 

Further details are given In 29 F.R. 18502, Dec. 29. 1964, 

811 O.G. 2. „, 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 

Mar. 2, 1965. Superintendent. Patent Examining Corps. 

[813 O.G. 2] 



(58) 



Recognition op Attorneys and Agents 



In connection with the revised rules concerning^recognltion 
of attorneys and agents, published in the Federal Register 
July 2, 1971 (36 F.R. 12616), the Patent Office will operate 
under the following procedures. 

The Patent Office will continue to give effect to powers of 
attorney and authorizations of agent naming firms filed, with 
respect to patent applications, before the effective date of the 
rules, July 2, 1971. 

As stated in the revised rules, powers of attorney or au- 
thorizations of agent naming firms of attorneys or agents 
filed in patent applications after July 2, 1971 will not be 
recognized. However, the Patent Office will construe any such 



^ 



(61) OriDCLiNEs for Drafting a Model P.vtent 
Application Under the Revised Rcles 

The following guidelines Illustrate the preferred layout and 
content for patent applications. They have been prepared to 
supplement the amendments to the rules which are effective 
January 1. 1967. These guidelines are suggested for the ap- 
plicant's use. 

.Arrangement and Contents of the Specification 

The following order of arrangement is preferable In fram- 
ing the specification and. except for the title of the Invention, 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



17 



each of the lettered items should be preceded by the headings 
Indicated. 



(a) Title of the Invention. 

(b) Abstract of the Disclosure. 

(c) Cross-References to Related Applications (If any). 

(d) Background of the Invention. 

1. Field of the Invention. 

2. Description of the Prior Art. 

(e) Summary of the Invention. 

(f) Brief Description of the Drawing. 

(g) EJescrlptlon of the Preferred Embodlment(8). 
(h) Clalm(8). 

(a) Title of the Invention: (See Rule 72(a).) Tlie title of 
the Invention should be placed at the top of the first page of 
the specification. It should be brief but technically accurate 
and descriptive. ,,„«.!» 

(b) .Abstract of the Disclosure: (See Rule 72(b), MPEP 
008 01(a). and 831 O.G. 1328. October 25. 1960.) 

(c) Cross-References to Related .Applications: (See Rule 
78 and MPEP 201.11) 

(d) Background of the Invention: The specification should 
set forth the Background of the Invention in two parts : 

(1) Field of the Invention: A statement of the field of 
art to which the invention pertains. This statement 
may Include a paraphrasing of the applicable U.S^ 
patent classification definltles. The statement should 
be directed to the subject matter of the claimed In- 
vention. 

(2) Description of the Prior Art: A paragraph(s) de- 
scribing to the extent practical the state of the prior 
art known to the applicant, including references to 
specific prior art where appropriate. Where applicable 
the problems Involved in the prior art, which are solved 
by the applicant's Invention, should be Indicated. 

(e) Summary: A brief summary or general statement of 
the Invention as set forth in Rule 73. The summary Is sep- 
arate and distinct from the abstract and Is directed toward 
the Invention rather than the disclosure as a whole. The sum- 
mary may point out the advantages of the Invention or how- 
it solves problems previously existent in the prior art (and 
preferably indicated In the Background of the Invention) In 
chemical cases It should point out In general terms the utility 
of the Invention. If possible, the nature and gist of the In- 
vention or the inventive concept should be set forth. Objects 
of the invention should be treated brlefiy and only to the 
extent that they contribute to an understanding of the 
Invention. 

(f) Brief Description of the Drawing: A reference to and 
brief description of the drawing(s) as set forth in Rule .4 

(g) Description of the Preferred Embodiments): A de 

• scrlption of the preferred embodiment (s) of the Invention as 
required In Rule 71. The description should be as short and 
specific as is necessary to adequately and accurately describe 
the Invention. 

Where elements or groups of elements, compounds, and 
processes, which are conventional and generally widely known 
in the field to which the Invention pertains, form a part ot 
the invention described and their exact nature or type Is not 
necessary for an understanding and use of the Invention by 
a person skilled In the art. they should not be described In 
detail However, wlf^re particularly complicated subject mat- 
ter Is Involved or where the elements, compounds, or processes 
may not be commonly or widely known In the field, the speci- 
fication should refer to another patent or readily available 
publication which adequately describes the subject matter, 
(h) Claim{»): (See Rule 75.) A claim may be typed with 
the various elements subdivided In paragraph form. There 
may be plural Indentations to further segregate subcombina- 
tions or related steps. 

Reference characters corresponding to elements recited in 
the detailed description and the drawings may be used In 
conjunction with the recitation of the same element or group 
of Clements In the claims. The reference characters, however, 
should be enclosed within parentheses so as to avoid con- 
fusion with other numbers or characters which may appear 
in the claims. The use of reference characters Is to be con- 
sidered as having no effect on the scope of the claims. 

CTalms should preferably be arranged in order of scope so 
that the first claim presented Is the broadest. Where sep- 



arate species are claimed, the claims of like species should 
be grouped together where possible and physically separated 
by drawing a line between claims or groups of claims. (Both 
of these provisions may not be practical or possible where sev- 
eral species claims depend from the same generic claim ) 
Similarly, product and process claims should be separately 
grouped. Such arrangements are for the purpose of facilitat- 
ing classification and examination. 

The form of claim required In Rule 75(e) Is particularly 
adapted for the description of Improvement type Indentions. 
It is to be considered a combination claim and should be 
drafted with this thought in mind. 

In drafting claims in accordance with Rule 75(e). tlie pre- 
amble is to be considered to positively and clearly Include all 
the elements or steps recited therein as a part of the claimed 

combination. 

"Vath 

(See Rule 65.) Where one or more previously filed foreign 
applications are cited or mentioned In the oath, complete 
Identifying data. Including the application or serial number 
as well as the country and date of filing, should be provided. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER. 
Date : Oct. 12, 1966. Commissioner of Patents. 



[832 O.G. 5] 



(62) PLANT P.\TENT APPLICATIONS— FILING DaTE 

Applicants and their attorneys are reminded that an ap- 
plication for a patent for a plant must include two copies 
of the specification. Rule 163(b). and two copies of the 
drawing when in color. Rule 165(b). 

Effective Immediately, applications for plant patents which 
fall to include two copies of the specification and two copies 
of the drawing when in color will be accepted for AHng only. 
Th Ipplication Branch will notify the aPP"cant immediate y 
of this deficiency and require the same to be r^^^J'fi^f J^^''' 
one month. Failure to do so will result in loss of filing date. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Nov. 21. 1968. Assistant Commissioner. 

[857 O.G. 668] 



(63) 



Reduction in Patent Application 
Disclosure 



Request for Comments 
A joint committee comprising representatives of the Patent 

Office the American Bar Association i-\'\'^^"''l''ZZ. 
Law Association was established In September 19f ^ /°r pur 
poses of investigating ways in which patent -PPftlon dU- 
closures could be improved and in particular ways In whicb 
he disclosures could be reduced. In the course of commit ee 
deliberations a number of proposals were generated. Those 
hTappeared to be most practical and to hold most promise 
or early Implementation have been compiled In the orm of 
proposed ••Guidelines for Preparation of Patent Application 
Sosures." The guidelines are set forth "elow for review 
and comment. All persons who desire to present the'r views 
objections, recommendations, or suggestions in connect on 
therewith 'are Invited to do so by/orwardlng the same o th 
Commissioner of Patents. Washington. D.C 20231 on or 
before March 31. 1969. No hearing will be scheduled. 

GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF PATENT APPLICATION 
DISCLOSURES 

Applications for patents frequently contain descriptive and 
Illustrative material in excess of that required by 35 D.S^. 
112. If such material were to be excluded from the applica- 
tion tri-fold benefits should accrue : 

1. The time and costs Involved in the preparation of an 
application should be reduced. 

2 Examination time should be less. 

3.' There should be a reduction in patent printing costs. 

In an effort to reduce such excesses, at least In part, the 
following guidelines, relating to preparation of patent appli- 
cations, have been promulgated. 

Drawing 

The illustration on the drawing should be restricted to the 
invention disclosed in the application. Old and known subject 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



18 

matter should be omitted unless essential for "t^bllshment 
^f Environment or for a clear understanding of the Invention. 

dUclosuTe of the latter type Is essential It should be pre- 
"ntdln skeleton or phantom form If possible. Reference nu- 
merals for such material should be held to a ">>" -;°^- 

Conventional sub-assemblies should be shown in block form 
with appropriate legends or by means of standard drawing 
Tymbo's in instances where detailed disclosure is no essen^ 
tuT for a proper understanding of the invention. If there U 
doubt as to whether or not symbolical representation is ap- 
nroSrlate reference should be made in the descriptive mate- 
Malto I patent or publication which will support the position 
hat ?be Uem so illustrated is conventional with the under^ 
standing that the supporting document or the appropriate 
portion thereof will be made available upon demand. 

Flow diagrams should be treated In a similar manner. 

Shading should be provided on the drawing only if essen^ 
tlal for Illustrating contours or showing specific relationships 
between structural parts. Test-can the Invention b« clearly 
understood Ui the absence of shading? 



Multiple Inientiona, Speciea, etc. 
Disclosures In divisional and other types of dependent ap- 
DllcatJons carved from\aslc or parent application as well as 
Sose n the parent application should be restricted to the 
respective claimed inventions, or as an alternative the de- 
pendent application may be printed with the customary Iden- 
mying information, an abstract, and the claims. The alter 
native printing should Include proper reference to the parent 
do ument. The abbreviated printing should be "^ed only if 
the parent precedes the dependent application In ssue (A 
copy of the parent or basic patent would be supplied along 
with the abbreviated patent in response to orders for the 

latter ) 

Cancellation of Detcriptive Material 

Descriptive material deemed superfluous or inessential for 
a clear understanding of the disclosed Invention foM\db^ 
Emitted, however. If such material is P^^^^"»ff„ '° ^^^^.r^f; , 
cation, the Examiner should require cancellation In the first 
Office action. This will provide applicant with an opportunity 
to traverse the requirement prior to final rejection Cancella- 
tion may be deferred until the presence of allowable subject 
matter is Indicated by the Examiner. 

Laudatory language, exhaustive descriptions of prior art 
unessential statements of objects and lengthy statements of 
environment should be omitted from, or reduced to bare essen- 
tials in the application descriptive material Lengthy deserlp^ 
tlons of items that are obvious and well i^nown to those 
skilled m the art should be avoided. A mere statement that 
such Items are known and conventional should be adequate 
in most instances, however, if doubt exists reference may be 
made no disclosures In specific documents for support. Llke- 
wi-^e lengthy descriptions regarding use should be avoided. 
Procedures for t.^stlng should not ordinarily be described. 
Biological studies and case histories should ordinarily not be 
• included In the ('.esicriptlve material since they can be pre- 
sented in aCQdavit form. 

Objects — Ahatracta — Summary 
State the primary object of the Invention and If essential 
a limited number of secondary objects— all should be brier. 
The abstract an.l statement of object (s) appear to satisfy 
the requirements iu Rules 73 and 77. a separate summary Is 
deemed unnecessary. 
. The abstract should be limited to the technical disclosure 
that is new in the art to which the invention pertains. 

Sectionalized Diacloaure 
Headings should be provided in patent applications to set 
off different portions, such as Abstract, Discussion of Prior 
Art Background of Invention. Technical Disclosure of Inven- 
tion Additional Species of Invention, and the like. Cancella- 
tion' of subject matter not pertinent to the claimed invention 
will be facilitated if the descriptive material is so organized. 
In order to make the most of computer capabilities of the 
future specifications should provide "Indicators" which can 
be readily Identified by the processing equipment. N\hlle this 
has general application it Is Illustrated below with regard to 
chemical disclosures. • * 

Context indicators : 

Set out in the specification 
Reserved word paragraph 



Heading such as — 
Utility 

Starting material 
Process 

Final-Products ^ ^ . . . , 

Chemical-Compounds-Names (followed by a tabulated 

Chemical-Compounds-Structures (followed by a tabu- 
lation of structures) 
Chemical-Compounds-Notatlons (the /^»>uUt«<J^ "«/. 
could be Wiswesser. UPAC. or Patent Office . trans 
formation could be made later) 
Miacella'neoua 
Words or phrases of high Information content (as dls^ 
tlnguTshed for example, from the word "means") appearing 
L claims as well as In invention descriptions, should be given 
indicator symbols or printed in bold face type, or Italicized 
so that future manual searching by the Exam ner and the 
public will be made easier A capability will exist for easier 
keyboardlng for full text analysis for computer based Infor- 

"u-here an elaborate expression appears In the descriptive 
material or claims it should be designated for exampe as 
"Definition 1" and later reference to the definition should be 
made with the designator. 

Vppllcatlons that include drawings should Include a list 
of elements and the associated reference numerals for the 
elements comprising the Invention. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER. 

Commiaaioner of Patenta. 

Approved : 

JOHN F. KINCAID. 

Aaaistant Secretary for Science and Technology. 

Publiahed in H F.R. 5H; Jan. 16, 1989 



[859 O.G. 1 (Jan. 16, 1969)] 



(B4) 



GUIDELINES FOR INCORPORATIO.N HY REFERENCE 

IN Patent Ai-plicxtions 



An application for a patent may incorporate essential ma- 
terial by reference to a United States patent, or an allowed 
r S application, subject to the conditions set out below. 
Essential material* is .lefinod as that which is necessary . ) 
to support the claims, or (2) for adequate d.sclosure of he 
invention (.15 U.S.C. 112). Material which is essential to the 
refprencing application may not b.- Incorporated by reference 
o Intents issued by foreign conntrios or to non-patent puhl - 
cat ons. Essential material may not be hu'on.ora tod by rofer- 
once to a patent or application which Itself Incorporates 
essential m.irerial by reference. 

The referencing application must Include (1) an abstract 
(2) a brief summary of the invention. (3) an Identification of 
the referenced patent or application. (4) at least one view 
m the drawing In those applications admitting of a 'Irawlng. 
and (5) one or more claims. Where appropriate It would be 
advisable to direct particular attention to specific portions of 
the referenced patent or application. 

If an application is filed with a complete disclosure essen^ 
tial material may be cancelled by amendment and the «ame 
material substituted by referenl^e to a P^l^^^'^l^^' ^^^[11 
and commonly owned allowed application In which the Issue 
?ee has been paid. The amendment must be accon.panled by 
In affidavit executed by the applicant or ^Is attorney o 
Lent of record stating that the material cancelled from the 
Application IS the aame material that has been Incorporated 

""if'lrrppllcatlon incorporates essential material by refer- 

fr, ^ r S natent or a pending and commonly owned 

T . T, s aDDllcatlon for which the issue fee has been 

together with an amaawv ^.„,.„. .^at the copy consists of 
attorney or agent of record stating that tne cop> 

•Non-essential subject maUer may be incorporated^^^^^^^ 

erence to patents Issued by tbfU°'*l?en applications^ filed In 
tries, prior filed commonly owned parent wi. ^^^ purposes 

^fin^Srtfnir^ark'groCd^Vf^tL^^oventlon or illustrating 
the state of the art. 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



19 



the aame material Incorporated by reference in the referencing 

application. 

If an application incorporates es-entlal material by refer- 
ence to a U.S. patent or a pending and c-mmonly owned 
application other than one In issue with the fee paid, appl^ 
cant will be required prior to examination to amend the dis- 
closure of the referencing application to Include the material 
inrorporated by reference. The amendment must be accom- 
panied by an affi.lavit executed by the applicant or his attor- 
ney or agent of record stating that the amendatory material 
consists of the aame material incorporated by reference in the 

referencing application. 

^ EDWARD J. BRENNER. 

Commiaaioner. 

.\pproved : Jan. 15. 1969. 
JOHN V. KINCAID. 

ssiatayit Secretary for Science and Technology. 

I'ubliahed in Si F.R. 88S ; Jan. 18, 10S9 

[859 O.G. 3461 



qulrement. applicants are requested to include the appropriate 
Patent Office classification on the papers submitted. 

The appropriate classification for the divisional applica-^ 
tlon may be found in the office communication of the parent 
case wherein the requirement was made. It is suggested that 
this classification designation be placed In the upper right 
hand corner of the letter of transmittal accompanying these 

divisional applications. „ . „t^ . «.»tit 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 

June 5. 1970. Aaaiatant Commiaaioner of Patent$. 

.[875 O.G. 702] 




INCORPOR.XTION BY REFERENCE— Fl LI NG DATE 

n clarification of the Notice of December 30. 1968. appear- 
'g in the OiFiCAL GAzr.TTE of February 11. 1909. the follow- 
ing amplification is made. 

The filing date of any application wherein essential ma- 
terial is incorporated by reference to a foreign patent or to a 
publication will not be affected because of the Presence of 
such reference. In such a case, as well as any other case wh ch 
in.properlv incorporates es.sential material by reference, the 
applicant "will be required to amend the disclosure to include 
the material Incorporated by reference. The amendment must 
be accompanied by an aflidavit executed by the ^PPLcant or 
his attorney or agent of record stating that the amendatory 
material consists of the aame material incorporated by refer- 
ence in the referencing application. 

ERRATIU 

Attention Is directed to the error In the above-mentioned 
notice appearing at 859 O.G. 346. Please delete the phrase 
"a U.S. patent or", which was erroneously printed In the 
second line of the last paragraph. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Mar. 7. 19G9. Aa.^istant Commisaioner. 

[A Notice covering this same subject, in 
form, has been published In 34 t.K. dood. 
[861 O.G. 680] 



(68) Reduction in P.atent application Discix)scre 

Notice of proposed Guidelines for Preparation of Patent 
Application Disclosure was published in the f'^"^'^'^!^ 
of January 14. 1969 (34 F.R^ 524). ^^W'^' ^^H''^'^ 
Gazette of the Patent Office of February 4. 1969 (859 O.G. 
1) Comments from the general public were Invited. 

After consideration of comments received, new guidelines 
are deemed unnecessary, even though the average length of 
specification seems to be increasing. Applicants and their 
attorneys are reminded that 35 U.S.C. 112 requires Inven- 
tions to be described "in such full, clear, concise and exact 
terms as to enable any person skilled in the art to 

mike and use the same- • • •." To satisfy the "concise 
requirement, lengthy and unnecessary descriptive detail 

should be avoided. 

WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER. JR.. 

Commiaaioner of Patenta. 

Approved : July 24. 1970. 

MlBON TRIBUS, 

Aaaiatant Secretary for Science and Technology. 



[F.R. Doc. 



70-9862: Filed. July 30, 1970; 8:45 a.m.] 
35 F.R. 11296, July SI, 1970 
[878 O.G. 1] 



slightly different 
Mar. 22. 19G9.] 



(6(5) PHOTOCOPIES OF APPLICATIONS 

Many of the patent application papers received by the 
Patent Office are copies of the original, ribbon copy. These 
are acceptable if. in the opinion of the Office, they are legible 
and permanent. Legibility includes ability to be photocopied 
and photomlcrographed so that suitable reprints can be made^ 
This requires a high contrast, with black lines and a white 
background. Gray lines and /or a gray background sharply re- 
duce photo reproduction quality. 

Vpplicants should make every effort to file patent applica- 
tions in a form that is clear and reproducible. The Office may 
accept for filing date purposes papers of reduced quality but 
will require that acceptable copies be supplied for further 

procosslnp. 

\ddltlonallv. legibility of some application papers becomes 
impaired due" to abrasion or aging of the printed material 
during examination and ordinary handling of the file. It tnay 
be necessary to require that clear, legible copies be furnished 
at later stages after filing, especially when preparing for issue. 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 
Jan 2S. 1970. Assistant Commiaaioner. 

[S72 O.G. 341] 



(69) New Sole-Joint Declar.\tion Form 

The sole declaration form. PO-1147. announced by the 
notice of May 28. 1971 (887 O.G. 1840) ^as been revised to 
permit Its use in either sole or Joint inventor applications. 
The revised form comprises two pages to provide space for 
the additional information. In most applications, only page 1 
will be necessary, in which case only that page need be signeU 
and submitted. Page 2 would be used only -bere Insufficient 
space 18 available on page 1 to fully furnish tbe requlr^ 
information. If page 2 is used, page 1 need not be signed, 
and a» signatures should appear on page 2. ^ 

Where appropriate, the present "sole" declaration form 

may be used. 

Specific instructions appear on the form. 

Single copies of the new form are available without charge 
for direct use or for reproduction purposes and may be pickeU 
up fJom the receptionist in Building No. 3 of the Paten 
Office at Crystal Pla^. %Vritten requests for tbe form will 
be filled only If directed to the Commissioner of Patent^ 
Office of Information Services. Washington, D.C.. 20231. a 
stamped, self-addressed envelope mifst be enclosed. 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 
17 1972 Aaaiatant Commissioner. 

[898 O.G. 738] 



(07) 



Divisional Application P.\pers 



In the interest of expediting the processing of newly filed .„ ...-- V"- wV deleting the word 
divisional applications, filed as a result of a restriction re- use the form by deleting 



(70) DECLAR.\TION AND POWER OF ATTORNEY FORM 

PO-1147 (Revised) (3-72) 
A revised Declaration and Power of Attorney Form, PO- 
1147 (Revised) (3-72), was recently issued and is supplied 
for use as a master copy for reproduction purposes Experience 
with the revised form indicates that sorne confusion has been 
caused by the reference to "effective" filing date in item 600 
of the form. The form is. therefore, being reprinted to delete 
the word "effective" from the descriptive language appearing 
in Item eofpersons who have copies of the old form may 
in infiu V . -effective" before the 



20 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



form la reprodnced. In this connection It Is noted that the 
word "eflfectlve" appears three times In Item 600, once on 

page 1 and twice on page 2. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Ang. 28, 1972. A8»iatant Commiaaioner 

for Patent Examining. 

[902 O.G. 1172] 



(71) 



TITLE 37— PATENTS, TRADEMARKS, 
AND COPYRIGHTS 



CHAPTER I— Patent Office, Department of Commerce 

PART 1 — RULES OF PRACTICE IN PATENT CASES 

Formula and Table Format 

On February 2, 1972, notice of proposed rule making regard- 
ing the amendment of || 1.52 and 1.75 and the addition of a 
new ! 1.58 of Title 37, Code of Federal Regulations, dealing 
with Formula and Table Format, was published in the Federal 
Register (37 F.R. 2520). Interested persons were given until 
April 30, 1972, to submit written comments, suggestions, or 
objections.*" Full and careful consideration was given to all 
written comments received. In view of these comments the 
pfoposed rule language has been revised. The revised rules do 
not now require that the formulas and tables be presented on 
separate brlstolboard sheets but simply require them to be 
presented In the specification In a form suitable for photo- 
graphic reproduction. 

These rule changes are Intended to facilitate the microfilm- 
ing of application papers and the printing of patents which 
contain formulas and tables in the text. 

Under the new rules the text of printed patents would con- 
tinue to be typeset, with formulas and tables being photo- 
graphically reproduced and appearing at their proper location 
In the text. This procedure should result In a reduction of 
printing errors and costs. 

This rule change also makes more liberal the size of paper 
permissible In patent applications. 

In consideration of the comments received and pursuant to 
the authority contained in section 6 of the Act of July 19, 
1952 (66 Stat. 793 ; 35 D.S.C. 6), Part 1 of Title 37, Code of 
Federal Regulations, Is hereby amended as follows : 

1. Section 1.52 Is revised to read as follows: 

I 1.52 Language, paper, writing, margins. 

(a) The specification and oath or declaration must be in the 
English language. All papers which are to become a part of 
the permanent records of the Patent Office must be legibly 
written or printed in permanent Ink or its equivalent in qual- 
ity. All of the application papers must be presented in a form 
having sufficient clarity and contrast between the paper and 
the writing or printing thereon to permit the production of 
readily legible co )ies In any number by use of photographic, 
electrostatic, photo-offset, and microfilming processes. If the 
papers are not of the required quality, substitute typewritten 
or printed papers of suitable quality may be required. 

(b) The appllc.itlon papeM (specification, including claims, 
oath, or declaration, papers^s provided for In IS 1-42, 1.43, 
1.47, etc.) and al.-o papers subsequently filed, must be plainly 
written on but ono side of the pa^er. The size of all sheets of 
paper should be 8 to 8».j by 10% to 13 Inches (20.3 to 21.6 
cm. by 26.6 to 330 cm.). A margin of li{. Inches (3.8 cm.) 
must be reserved on the left-hand side and on the top of each 
page of the specification, including claims. The lines must not 
be crowded too closely together ; typewritten lines should be 
double spaced. The pages of the specification, including claims, 
should be numbere 1 consecutively, starting with 1, the num- 
bers being placed in the center of the bottom margins. 

(c) Any Interlineation, erasure, or cancellation or other 
alteration of the application papers as filed must have been 
made before the application was signed and sworn to or decla- 
ration made, and should be dated and initialed or signed by 
the applicant in a marginal note or footnote on the same sheet 
of paper to Indicate such fact. No such alterations are permis- 
sible after execution of the application papers. (See S 1.5G.) 

2. A new | 1.58 is added to read as follows : 
I 1.58 Chemical and mathematical formulas and tables. 

(a) The specification, including the claims, may contain 
chemical and mathematical formulas, but shall not contain 



drawings or flow diagrams. The description portion of the 
specification may contain tables: claims may contain tables 
only If necessary to conform to 35 U.S.C. 112. ^ 

(b) All tables and chemical and mathematical formulas in 
the specification. Including claims, and amendments thereto, 
must be on pure white durable paper, the surface of which Is 
calendered and smooth, in order to permit use as camera copy 
when printing any patent which may Issue. A good grade of 
bond paper Is acceptable ; watermarks should not be promi- 
nent. India ink or its equivalent, or solid black typewriter 
ribbon must be used to secure perfectly black solid lines. 

(c) To facilitate camera copying when printing, the width 
of formulas and tables as presented should be limited normally 
to 5 Inches (12.7 cm.) so that It may appear as a single 
column in the printed patent. If it is not possible to limit the 
width of a formula or table to 5 inches (12.7 cm.), it is per- 
missible to present the formula or table with a maximum 
width of 10% Inches (27.3 cm.) and to place It sideways on 
the sheet. In which rase the formula or table will appear 
printed across both columns of the page in the printed patent. 
Typewritten characters u.«ed In such formulas and tables must 
be from a block (nonscrlpt) type font or lettering style having 
capital letters which are at least 0.085 inch (2.2 mm.) high 
(elite type). Hand lettering must be neat, clean, and have a 
minimum character height of 0.085 Inch (2.2 mm.). A space 
at least V4 Inch (6.4 mm.) high should be provided between 
the formulas and tables and the text. Tables should have the 
lines and columns of data closely spaced to conserve space, 
consistent with high degree of legibility. 
! 1.75 [Amended] 

3. Section 1.75 Is amended by adding at the end of para- 
graph (d)(1) the ezpresalon "(See | 1.58(a).)." 

Effective date. These amendments shall become effective on 
January 1, 1973, and will apply to applications filed after that 
date. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Acting Commiaaioner of Patents. 

Approved : Oct. 12, 1972. 

Richard O. Simpson, 

Acting Assistant Secretary for 
Science and Technology. 

[FR Doc. 72-17727 Filed 10-17-72 ; 8 :48 am] 

Published in 37 FR Z199i, Oct. 18, 1972 

[975 O.G. 255] 



(72) 



PRIORITY APPLICATIONS 

Reissue Applications — Foreign Priority 



A "claim" for the benefit of an earlier filing date in a 
foreign country under 35 U.S.C. 119 must be made in a re- 
issue application even through such a claim was made in the 
application on which the original patent was granted. How- 
ever, no additional certified copy of the foreign application 
is necessary. The procedure Is similar to that for "Continu- 
ing Applications" iriCThe last paragraph of MPEP 201.14(b). 

The heading on printed copies will not be carried forward 
to the reissue from the original patent. Therefore, it Is 
Important that the file wrapper be endorsed under "CTlalms 
Foreign Priority." 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Acting Superintendent Patent Examining Corps. 

[807 O.G. 579 (Oct. 20, 1964)] 



(73) 



Filing of Priority Papers 



In view of the shortened periods for prosecution leading to 
allowances. It is recommended that priority papers be filed 
as early as possible. Although Rule 55 permits the filing of 
priority papers up to and including the date for payment of 
the final fee, it is advisable that such papers be filed promptly 
after filing the application. Frequently priority papers are 
found to be deficient in material respects such as, for example, 
the failure to include the correct certified copy and there is 
not sufficient time to remedy the defl'iency. Occasionally a 
new oath may be necessary where the original oath omits the 
reference to the foreign filing date for which the benefit Is 
claimed The early filing of priority papers would thus be 
advantageous to applicants in that It would afford time to 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



21 



explain any inconsistencies that exist or to supply any addi- 
tional documents that may be necessary. 

It Is also suggested that a pencil notation of the serial 
number of the corresponding U.S. application be placed on 

the priority papers. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Dec. 1, 1965. Aaaiatant Commissioner. 

[821 O.G. 1261] 



(74) Effective Date of Uniteh States Patent 
In section 706.02, delete penultimate paragraph. 
Rewrite section 715.01 to read : 

The effective date of a United States Patent for use as 
a prior art reference Is not affected by the foreign filing 
date to which the patentee may be entitled under 35 
U.S.C. 119. /n re Hilmer, 833 O.G. 13, 149 USPQ 480 
(CCPA 1966) ; Lilly et al. v. Brenner. 153 USPQ 95 
(C.A.D.C. 19G7). The reference patent Is effective as of 
the date the application for It was filed In the United 
States (35 U.S.C. 102(e) and 103). Hazeltine Research, 
Inc. et al. v. Brenner, 824 O.G. 8 (U.S. Supreme Court 

1965). 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 
Apr. 5. 1967. Assistant Commissioner. 

[838 O.G. 11 



(75) Patent Headings 

As a service to the public, beginning with the Issue of 
January 16. 1968. the heading of the printed patent will In- 
clude all Identifying parent data of continuation In-part 
applications as Is now the practice In continuation, divisional, 
substitute, and reissue applications. It should be noted, how- 
ever, that Inclusion of this Information In the heading does 
not necessarily indicate that the claims are entitled to the 
benefit of the earlier filing date. 

The above practice will not change the procedure with 
regard to assignments as set forth In the first sentence of 
paragraph 2 of Section 306 of the M.P.E.P. 



Dec. 18. 1967. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Assistant Commissioner. 



[846 O.G. 337] 



(76) Chains of Continuing Applications 

In view of the decision of the Court of Customs and Patent 

Appeals In In re Ilenriksen (158 USPQ 224) the application 

of 35 U.S.C. 120 will no longer be limited to a chain of three 

successively filed continuing cases. 

Accordingly, Change Notice 12-8 Is rescinded. 



Aug. 9, 1968. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Assistant Commissioner of Patents. 

[854 O.G. 559] 



(77) foreign Priority of Continuing Application 

If the Examiner Is aware of the fact that the parent of a 
continuing application has fully compiled with the require- 
ments of 35 U.S.C. 119 and Is therefore entitled to the benefit 
of the filing date of an earlier filed foreign application, he 
should direct It to the applicant's attention In an Office action, 
as In the following exemplary language : 

"Applicant Is reminded that in order to be entitled to 
priority based on papers filed In parent application Serial 

No. under 35 U.S.C. 119, a claim for such 

priority must be made In this application. In making 
such claim, applicant may simply call attention to the 
fact that a certified copy of the foreign application Is In 
the parent application (M.P.E.P. 201.14(b))." 



Aug. 30, 1968. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
.Assistant Commissioner. 



(78) Germany: New Reqoire.ment for Submission of 
Copy of Original Application in Convention 
Cases 

Under Section 27 of the German Patent Law which came 
Into effect October 1, 1968, all applicants submitting a claim 
of priority in Germany under the Paris Union will be required 
to submit a copy of the application upon which the claim for 
priority Is based. The U.S. Patent Office has been advised by 
the German Office that the copy need not be certified correct 
by the Office in which the application was originally filed. 

Accordingly, for U.S. applicants, one method of complying 
with the new law would be to accompany the German filing 
with a copy of the prior U.S. applications as filed. This copy 
can be produced by the applicant himself. 

If the applicant does not submit the copy at the time of 
filing, the German Office will Issue, within two months after 
the German filing, a request to submit the copy. Failure to 
submit the required copy within two months after notification 
results in loss of the priority claim. 

With respect to application on file In Germany prior to 
October 1, 1968, the following applies : 

Copies of the original application will not be required for 
those applications already on file if the serial number of the 
application on which the priority claim is based had been 
communicated to the German Patent Office prior to October 1, 

with regard to applications on file prior to October 1, 1968. 
for which the U.S. serial number is communicated after 
October 1 1908, the request for the copy of the U.S. applica- 
tion will 'be made together with the notice preceding the 
laying open to public inspection of the file of the German 

application. „^, 

GERALD D. O'BRIEN. 

Jan. 13 1968. Assistant Commissioner. 

[859 O.G. 345] 



(79) Proposed Implementation of Inventor's 
Certificate Legislation 

[37 CFR Part 1] 

Serial Number and Filing Date 

Notice Is hereby given that, pursuant to the authority con- 
tained in section 6 of the Act of July 19. 1952 (66 Stat^ 793 ; 
35 use. 6), as amended October 6, 1971, P.L. 92-132. 85 
Stat 364 the Patent Office proposes to add a new paragraph 
(c) to I 1 55 (37 CFR 1.55(c)) to read as set forth below. 

All persons are invited to present their views, objections, 
recommendations, or suggestions In connection with the pro- 
posed changes to the Commissioner of Patents. Washington. 
D C 20231 on or before February 12. 1973. No oral hearings 
will be held Any written comments or suggestions may be 
inspected by any person, upon written request, a reasonable 
time after the closing date for submitting comments. 

The proposed rule change 1» Intended to implement P.L. 
92-358 dated July 28. 1972. reprinted below, which accords 
rights of priority to applications where the claims for priority 
are based on earlier filed applications for inventor s certifi- 
cates under certain conditions. This legislation now enab es 
the United States to complete its raUflcatlon of the Stockholm 
Revision of the Paris Convention. 

By the terms of the new legislation, inventor s certificates 
filed In a foreign country In which applicants have a right 
to apply at their discretion, either for a patent or for an 
inventor's certificate may form the basis for rights of 

^"^The'^new paragraph proposed below would insure that the 
right of priority would be granted for Inventor's certificates 
involving subject matter for which an applicant in the country 
of earlier filing has an option to file for either a patent or 
inventor's certificate, as required by the new legislation. It 
should be noted that In certain countries which grant both 
patents and Inventor's certificates to reward Inventors, ap- 
plicants may only be able to apply for Inventor's certificates 
as to certain subject matter, generally pharmaceuticals, food- 
stuffs, and cosmetics. , ,i „„ . 
The text of the proposed new paragraph Is as follows . 

I 1.55 Serial number and filing date of application. 



[855 O.G. 1] 



22 • 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



(c) An applicant may under certain circumstances claim 
priority on the basis of an application for an Inventor's cer- 
"tlflcate In a country granting both Inventor's certificates and 
patents. When an applicant wishes to claim the right of 
priority as to a claim or claims of the application on the 
basis of an application for an Inventor's certificate In such a 
country under 35 U.S.C. 119, last paragraph (as amended 
July 28, 1972), the applicant or his attorney or agent, when 
submitting a claim for such right as specified In paragraph 
■(b) of this section, shall Include an affidavit or declaration 
Including a specific statement that, upon an Investigation, he 
has satisfied himself that to the best of his knowledge the 
applicant, when filing his application for the lnventor'3 cer- 
tificate, had the option to file an application either for a 
patent or an Inventor's certificate as to the subject matter 
of the Identified claim or claims forming the basis for the 
claim of priority. 

KOBERT OOTTSCHALK, 
Approved : Nov. 21, 1972. Commiasioner of Patents. 

Richard O. Simpson, 

Acting Aiiistant Secretary 
for Science and Technologv- 

Public Law »2-358, Jolt 28, 1972 

To carry into effect a' provision of the Convention of Paris 
for the Protection of Industrial Property, as revised at 
Stockholm, Sweden, July 14, 1967. 

Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives 
of the United States of America In Congress assembled. That 
section 119 of title 35 of the United States Code, entitled 
"Patents," Is amended by adding at the end thereof the fol- 
lowing paragraph : 

"Applications for Inventors' certificates filed In a 
foreign country In which applicants have a right to ap- 
ply, at their discretion, either for a patent or for an In- 
ventor's certificate shall be treated In this country In the 
same manner and have the same eflFect for purpose of 
the right of priority under this section as applications 
for patents, subject to the same conditions and require- 
ments of this section as apply to applications for patents, 
provided such applicants are entitled to the benefits of 
the Stockholm Revision of the Paris Convention at the 
time of such filing." 
SBC. 2. Subsection 102(d) of title 35 of the United States 
Code Is amended to read as follows : 

"(d) the invention was first patented or caused to be 
patented, or was the subject of an Inventor's certificate, 
by the applicant or his legal representatives or assigns In 
a foreign country prior to the date of the application for 
patent In this country on an application for patent or 
inventor's certificate filed more than twelve months be- 
fore the filing of the application In the Untied States, or." 
Sic. 3. (a) Section 1 of this Act shall take effect on the 
date when Articles 1-12 of the Paris Convention of March 20, 
1883. for the Protection of Industrial Property, as revised 
at Stockholm, July 14, 1967, come Into force with respect to 
the United States and shall apply only to applications there- 
after filed In the United States. 

(b) Section 2 of this Act shall take effect six months from 
the date when Articles 1-12 of the Paris Convention of March 
20, 1883, for the Protection of Industrial Property, as re- 
vised at Stockholm, July 14, 1967, come into force with re- 
spect to the United States and shall apply to applications 
thereafter filed in the United States. 

Published in 37 FR tsnt, Nov. i8, I97t 

[905 O.G. 684] 



wlthld CO days, and pay the cost of comparing the photo- 
prints with the formal drawJng.s. 

A comparison charge of $10.00 per hour, with a minimum 
charge of $10.00 per application Is hereby established. This 
charj:c may be applied against deposit accounts and authoriza- 
tion to cliarge such accounts .should be included when the 
formal drawings are filed. For those who have no deposit 
acc(y(int acceptance of the formal drawings will be contingent 
upon payment of the comparison charge within the period set. 

This notice supersedes the notice of April 24, 1964, pub- 
lished May 26, 1964, in 802 O.G. 871. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER, 
July 16, 1964. Commissioner. 

^ [805 O.G. 3] 



(81) New Drawings Prepared by Patent Office 

In Section 608.02(x) the paragraphs headed "New Draw- 
ings Prepared by Patent Office" are cancelled and the follow- 
ing substituted therefor : 
"~ When new drawings have been required in pending ap- 

plications and have been prepared by the Office drafts- 
man, they are not sent to the applicant for his signature 
but a copy (print) is sent to him for his file. The name 
0% the Inventor (s) will be printed on the drawings by the 
Office draftsman. 

In the event that the application is in condition for 
allowance, the application will be sent to Issue immedi- 
ately after the drawing is prepared. 



Jan. 6, 1966. 



(82) 



RICHARD A. WAUL, 
Assistant Commissioner. 



1823 O.G. 1] 



Transfer of Drawings 



In view of the recent amendment of Rule 138 to permit the 
express abandonment of patent applications by the attorney 
there is no longer any sulhcient reason for delaying the formal 
abandonment of an application after all the drawings thereof 
hare been transferred to another case. Accordingly, effective 
February 1 1907, no request to transfer all the drawings from 
a pending application will be granted unless and until a formal 
abandonment of the application has been filed. In order to 
injured copondency. such an abandonment may be so worded 
as to become elTectlve only after the transfer of the drawings 

has taken place. „T,r-vvT-D 

EDWARD J. BRENNER, 

T^ ir ^nrr Commissioner. 

Dec. 15, 1900. 

[834 O.G. 4311 * 



DRAWINGS 

(80) Photoprints as Drawings — Filing Date Only 

Effective September 1, 1964 the Application Branch Is 
authorized and directed to accept all applications In which 
photoprints have been submitted in lieu of formal drawings, 
and to forward them to the Examiner, who will notify the 
applicant immediately that the application has been accepted 
for filing only, and that to be entitled to examination, the 
applicant must file formal drawings complying with Rule 84 



(83) TITLE 37-PATENTS, TRADEMARKS, 

AND COPYRIGHTS 

CHAPTER I— Patent Office. Department of Commerce 

PART 1 — RLLES OF PRACTICE IN PATENT CASES ^ 

Draicing Requirements 
These rule changes are Intended to facilitate the handling 
and filing of patent application drawings In the Patent Office 
Changing the drawing size to 8li by 14 Inches will permit 
fi ing'lf the original d'rawlngs in the nPPHcatlon file wrapper 
in the Patent Office. The new size will also permit the use of 
standard storage equipment, mailing envelopes, and copying 

^"^Thrrevised rules will prohibit the use of names within the 
••sight" of the drawing, thereby making additional space avail- 
able for illustration and reducing the number of formal objec- 
tions and corrections required. ^ . , * „„♦„„» „n 
Permanently mounted color photographs In plant Patent ap- 
plications will be accepted. This should result In substantial 

savings to applicant. „„„„ufort 

Since no names or other identification will be permitted 
within the "sight" of the drawing, applicants are «P^^'^<; ° 
use the space above and between the hole locations to Identify 
each sheet of drawings (note J 1-84(1) ). This •denjlflcatlon 
may consist of the attorney's name and docket number or the 
inventor's name and case number and may Include the sheet 



JANUARY 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



23 



number and the total number of sheets filed (for example, 
"sheet 2 of 4"). 

Notice of proposed rule making resardlng revision of 
f i 1.59, 1.84. 1.85. 1.123, and 1.165 and revocation of f f 1.82 
and 1.87 of Title 37, Code of Federal Regulations, relating to 
drawing requirements, was publlshesd In the Federal Register 
of January 15, 1971 (36 F.R. 610). Interested persons were 
given an opportunity to participate In the rule making process 
through submission of comments in writing and at an oral 
hearing held on March 23, 1971. 

Effective date. This revision shall become effective on the 
date of Its publication In the Federal Register. However, until 
Jan. 1. 1972, drawings complying with the unrevised rules will 
also be accepted. 

In consideration of the comments received and pursuant to 
the authority contained In section 6 of the Act of July 19, 
1952 (66 Stat. 793; 35 U.S.C. 6). Title 37 of the Code of 
Federal Regulations Is hereby amended as follows : 

1. Section 1.59 Is revised to read as follows : 

I 1.59 Paperi of complete application not to be returned. 

Papers in a complete application, including the drawings, 
will not be returned for any purpose whatever. If applicants 
have not preserved copies of the papers, the Office will fur- 
nish copies at the usual cost. 

I 1.82 [Revoked] 

2. Section 1.82 Is revoked. 

3. In { 1.84 the Introductory text preceding paragraph (a) 
and paragraph (h) are revoked and paragraphs (a), (b). (c), 
(j), and (1) are revised to read ns follows : 

I 1.84 Standards for drawings. 

(a) Paper and ink. Drawings must be made upon pure 
white paper of a tlilckness corresponding to two-ply or three- 
ply brlstol board. The surface of the paper must be calendered 
and smooth and of a quality which will permit erasure and 
correction with India Ink. India Ink, or its equivalent In 
quality, must be used for pen drawings to secure perfectly 
black solid lines. The use of white pigment to cover lines Is 
not acceptable. 

(b) Size of sheet and margins. The size of a sheet on which 
a drawing is made must be exactly 8'/. by 14 inches. One of 
the shorter sides of the sheet Is regarded as its top. The draw- 
ing must include a top margin of 2 Inches and bottom and side 
margins of one-quarter Inch from the edges, thereby leaving 
a "sight" precisely 8 by 11% Inches. Margin boarder lines 
are not permitted. All work must be Included within the 
"sight." The sheets may be provided with two 14-lnch-dlam- 
eter holes having their centerllnes spaced eleven-sixteenths 
Inch below the top edge and 2% Inches apart, said holes being 
equally spaced from the respective side edges. 

(c) Character of lines. All drawings must be made with 
drafting instruments or by a process which will give then 
satisfactory reproduction characteristics. Every line and lettei 
must be absolutely black and permanent ; the weight of all 
lines and letters must be heavy enough to permit adequate 
reproduction. This direction applies to all lines however fine, 
to shading, and to lines representing cut surfaces in sectional 
views. All lines must be clean, sharp, and solid, and fine or 
crowded lines should be avoided. Solid black should not be 
used for sectional or surface shading. Freehand work should 
be avoided wherever It Is possible to do so. 

• • • • • 

(h) [Revoked] 

. • • • • 

( j) Arrangement of views. All views on the same sheet must 
stand In the same direction, and should. If possible, stand so 
that they can be read with the sheet held In an upright posi- 
tion. If views longer than the width of the sheet are necessary 
for the clearest illustration of the Invention, the sheet may 
be turned on Its side so that the two-Inch margin Is on the 
right-hand side. One figure must not be placed upon another 
or within the outline of another. 

, • • • • 

(1) Extraneous matter. An inventor's, agent's, or attor- 
ney's name.-slgnature. stamp, or address, or other extraneous 
matter, will not be permitted upon the face of a drawing, 
within or without the margin, except that Identifying Indicia 
(attorney's docket number, inventor's name, number of sheets. 



etc.) should be placed within three-fourths inch of the top edge 
and between the hole locations defined In paragraph (b) of 
this section. Authorized security markings may be placed on 
the drawings provided they be outside the Illustrations and 
are removed when the material is declassified. 

• 

4. Section 1.85 Is revised to read as follows : 

( l.«5 Informal drawings. 

The requirements of S 1.84 relating to drawings will be 
strictly enforced. A drawing not executed In conformity 
thereto. If suitable for reproduction, may be admitted but In 
such case the drawing must be corrected or a new one fur- 
nished, as required. The necessary corrections or mounting will 
be made by the Office upon applicant's request or permission 
and at his expense. (See SS 1.21 and 1.165.) 

§ 1.87 [Revoked] 

5. Section 1.87 Is revoked. 

6. In I 1.123, paragraph (a) Is revised to read as follows : 

f 1.123 Amendments to the drawing. 

(a) No change in the drawing may be made except by per- 
mission of the Office. Permissible changes In the construction 
shown In any drawing may be mada only by the Office. A 
sketch in permanent ink showing proposed changes, to become 
part of the record, must be filed. The paper requesting amend- 
ratnts to the drawing should be separate from other papers. 

7. In J 1.165, paragraph (b) Is revised to read as follows : 
{ 1.165 Drawings. ~ 

. . • • • 

(b) The drawing may be In color and when color Is a dis- 
tinguishing characteristic of the new variety, the drawing 
must be in color. Two copies of color drawings must be sub- 
mitted Color drawings may be made either In permanent water 
color or gil, or in lieu thereof may be photograplis made by 
color photography or properly colored on sensitized paper. Per- 
manentlv mounted color photographs are acceptable. The paper 
in any case must correspond In size, weight and quality to 
the paper required for other drawings. See § 1.84. Nonperma- 
nently mounted copies will be correctly mounted at applicant's 

expense, S 1.21(1). 

WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, JR., 

Commissioner of Patents. 

Approved : May 25. 1971. 

James H. Wakelin. Jr., 
Assistant Secretary for 
Science and Technology. 

[FR Doc. 71-7504 Filed 5-27-71 ; 8 : 49 am] 

Bubliahed in S6 F.R. 977 i; May t8, 1071 

[887 O.G. 1840] 



(84) Graphic Symbols for Patent Drawings 

Rule 84(g) of the Rules of Practice In Patent Cases Indi- 
cates that graphic drawing symbols and other labeled rep- 
resentations may be used for conventional elements where 
appropriate, subject to approval by the Office. Also, suitable 
legends may be used, or may be required. In proper cases. 

The Rules of Practice pamphlet has, since the turn of the 
century. Included a section entitled "Symbols for Draftsman" 
showing various symbols which may be used on patent appli- 
cation drawings. Although these symbols still reflect current 
practice they are somewhat limited In number and scope. A 
more complete set of symbols might be beneficial to both the 
Office and the public since it would foster uniformity of pres- 
entation, and more Informative drawings. However, for the 
Office to develop and maintain a substantially complete list- 
ing of all graphic drawing symbols would be both difficult 

and time-consuming. ^ ^ t ♦h..,*^ 

Therefore, since the American National Standyds Institute 
Inc 1430 Broadv..y, New York, N.Y.. 10018, publishes a 
series of publications relating to graphic symbols under irs 
Y32 and Z32 headings, the Office Is calling the attention of 
patent applicants to these symbols for their consideration and 
use where appropriate in patent drawings. The below listed 



24 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



publications have been reviewed by the Office and the symbols 
therein are considered to be generally acceptable In patent 
drawings. Although the Office will not "approve" all of the 
listed symbols as a group because their use and clarity must 
be decided on a case-by-case basis, these publications may be 
used as guides when selecting graphic symbols. Overly spe- 
cific symbols should be avoided. Symbols with unclear mean- 
ings should be labeled for clarification. As noted In Rule 
84(g), the Office will retain final authority to approve the use 
of any particular symbol in any particular case. 
The reviewed publications are the following : 

Y32.2-1970. Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Elec- 
tronics Diagram ?11.50 

Y32. 10-1967. Graphic Symbols for Fluid Power Dia- 
grams ^-^^ 

Y32.11-1961. Graphic Symbols for Process Flow Dia- 
grams In the Petroleum and Chemical Industries -- 2.00 

Y32.14-1962. Graphic Symbols for Logic Diagrams - 4.75 

Z32. 2.3-1949 (R1953). Graphic Symbols for Pipe 

Fittings. Valves and Piping 2.00 

Z32. 2. 4-1949 (R1953). Graphic Symbols for Heat- 
ing, Ventilating and Air Conditioning 2.00 

Z32. 2.6-1950. Graphic Symbols for Heat-Power Appa- 
ratus = 2.00 

No change in the Rules of Practice is considered necessary 

at this time. 

The above list of publications will be included in the 

Manual of Patent Examining Procedure. 



Since the claims of pending applications are subject to 
cancellation, amendment or remembering, a terminal disclaim- 
er directed to a particular claim or claims will not be accept- 
ed ; the disclaimer must be of a terminal portion of the term 
of the entire patent to be granted. The statute does not 
provide for conditional disclaimers and accordingly, a pro- 
posed disclaimer which is made contingent on the allowance 
of certain claims cannot be accepted. The disclaimer should 
identify the dlsclaimant and his interest in the application 
and should specify the date when the disclaimer is to be- 
come effective. An acceptable form for such a disclaimer is as 
follows : 
To the Cominissloner of Patents : 

Your petitioner, John Doe, residing at tn the 

county of and State of represents that 

he is (here state exact interest of the dlsclaimant and, if he 
is an assignee, set out the liber and page or reel and frame 

where the assignment Is recorded) of application No. , 

filed on the day of 19 -- for 

Your petitioner hereby disclaims all that portion of the 
term of any patent to be issued on the said application sub 
sequent to 19 — 

The disclaimer must be accompanied by the statutory fee. 



Apr. 26, 1965. 



EDWARD J. BRENNER, 

Commissioner. 

[814 OvG. 359] 



May 19, 1972. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Aaaiatant Commissioner. 



(S7) 



Practice Re : Technical Re.iections 



[899 O.G. 12301 



(85) 



EXAMINATION OF APPLICATIONS 

lNFORM.\L APPLIC.\TI0XS OF FOREIGN 

Applications 



This Notice Is of special Interest to attorneys and agents 
prosecuting applications on inventions originating abroad. 

Many applications filed in this Office correspond in form 
and substance to the requirements (regulations) of countries 
foreign to the United States. Since they were not originally 
drafted to comply with our Rules of Practice, especially those 
based on 35 U.S.C. 112, the first examination cannot be the 
full and complete one contemplated under current examining 
procedures. This first examination is necessarily limited, under 
.MPEP 702.01, to pointing out the informalities and citing 
the results of a search, the search being based upon tlie Inven- 
tion so far as it can be understood from the foreign type of 
claims, often coupled with a somewhat generalized disclosure. 
Since U.S. Patent Office policy is to accord equal treatment 
to all cases regardless of origin, current examining procedures 
as explained in tl e address reprinted In 803 O.G. 893, subject 
these applications to final determination on the second action. 
It is obviously to applicant's advantage to file the applica- 
tion with an adeq late disclosure and with claims which con- 
form to the U.S. I'atent Office usages and requirements. This 
should be done v henever possible. If, however, due to the 
pressure of a Convention deadline or other reasons, this is 
not possible, applicants are urged to submit promptly, pref- 
erably within three months after filing, a preliminary amend- 
ment which corrects the obvious informalities. The infor- 
malities should be corrected to the extent that the disclosure 
is readily understod and the claims to be initially examined 
are in proper form, particularly as to dependency, and other- 
wise clearly define the Invention. "New matter" must be 
excluded from these amendments since preliminary amend- 
ments do not enjoy original disclosure status, section 
608.04(b), MPEP. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER. 
Mar. 4. 1965. Commissioner of Patents. 

• ' [812 O.G. 1295] 



In the interest of reducing the number of technical rejec- 
tions and expediting the prosecution of applications the fol- 
lowing changes will be instituted effective June 1. 1965: 

1. The inclusion of a negative limitation shall not, in Itself, 
be considered a sufficient basis for objection to or rejection 
of a claim. However, If such a limitation renders the claim 
unduly broad or indefinite or otherwise results in a failure 
to point out the invention In the manner contemplated by 
35 U.S.C. 112, an appropriate rejection should be made. 

2. When materials recited in a claim are so related as to 
constitute a proper Markush group, they may be recited either 
In the conventional manner heretofore permitted, or alterna- 
tively. For example, if ". . . wherein R is a material selected 
from the group consisting of A. B, C and D" is a proper 
limitation then ". . . wherein R is A. B. C or D" shall also 
be considered proper. 

3. The use of Markush claims of diminishing scope shall not, 
in Itself, be considered a sufficient basis for objection to or re- 
jection of claims. However, if such a practice renders the 
claims Indefinite or if It results in undue mJiltlpllcity, an 
appropriate rejection shall be made. This change does not In 
any way affect the substantive law governing the treatment 
of Markush claims. The foregoing practice with respect to 
Markush claims of diminishing scope will be effective on an 
experimental basis until December 1. 1965, and. if it proves 
satisfactory, will then be adopted permanently. 



Apr. 30, 1965. 



EDWARD J. BRENNER, 

Commissioner. 

[814 O.G. 715] . 



(86) Terminal Disclalmers Filed in applications 

In view of the increasing number of terminal disclaimers 
being filed in pending applications under 35 U.S.C. 253, it is 
considered advisable to point out the practice to be followed 
in such cases. 



(88) "Special" Examining PRocEncRE for Certain 
New applications 

The trial of "Special" Examining Procedure for Certain 
New Applications as announced In 812 O.G. 953 and later 
modified by 817 O.G. 423 indicates the desirability of making 
such procedure available on a standard operating basis. Ac- 
cordingly, an additional category Is being added to the list of 
situations in which an application may be advanced out of 
turn for examination. Rule 102 and M.P.E.P. 708.01 and 
708.02. The M.P.E.P. will be rewritten to incorporate this 

practice. ^ ^ ■ »„ 

Certain further modifications have been incorporated Into 
the conditions and procedure ; most importantly, the new case 
now may be a continuing or divisional application, the pro- 
hibition against an application having an earlier effective 
U S filing date has been removed. Original limits on filing 
date and on number In any Group have previously been 
deleted. 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



25 



The full text of conditions and procedures now applicable 
appears below, and the notices In 812 O.G. 953 and 817 O.G. 
423 are accordingly rendered obsolete. 

require.ments and procedures to effect accelerated 
examination of new applications 

Requirements Precedent to Grant of Special Status for 
Accelerated Examination 

A new application (one which has not received any ex- 
amination by the examiner) may be granted special status 
provided that applicant (and this term includes applicant's 
attorney or agent) concurrently : 

(a) Submits a written petition to make special. 

(b) Agrees that the application will not include more than 
ten claims at any time. Should the pending application 
contain more than ten claims when the request for spe- 
cial status is filed, an amendment must be proposed at 
that time to reduce the number to not more than ten, 
which amendment will be entered only if the special 
status is granted. All of the claims presented for this 
special prosecution must obviously be directed to a single 
Invention. 

(c) Submits a statement that a pre-examination search 
was made, and specifying whether by the inventor, attor- 
ney, professional searchers, etc., and listing the field of 
search by class and subclass, publication, chemical ab- 
stracts, foreign patents, etc. 

(d) Submits one copy each of the references deemed most 
closely related to the subject matter encompassed by the 
claims. 

(e) Submits a detailed discussion of the references, which 
discussion points out, with the particularity required by 
Rule 111(b) and (c). how the claimed subject matter is 
distinguishable over the references. Where applicant In- 
dicates an intention of overcoming one of the references 
by affidavit under Rule 131. the affidavit must be sub- 
mitted before the application Is taken up for action, but 
In no event later than one month after request for special 
status. 

In those Instances where the request for this special status 
does not meet all the prerequisites set forth above, applicant 
will be notified and the defects in the request will be stated. 
The application will remain in the status of a new application 
awaiting action in its regular turn. In those Instances where 
a request is defective in one or more respects, applicant will 
be given one opportunity to perfect the request. If perfected, 
the request will then be granted. 

Once a request has been granted, prosecution will proceed 
according to the procedure set forth below ; there is no provi- 
sion for "withdrawal" from this special status. 

Special Examining Procedure 

1. The new application, having been granted special status 
as a result of compliance with the requirements set out In the 
section titled "Requirements Precedent to Grant pf Special 
Status for Accelerated Examination," supra, will be taken up 
by the Examiner before all other categories of applications 
except those clearly in condition for allowance and these with 
set time limits, such as Examiner's Answers, Decisions on 
Motions, etc., and will be given a complete first action which 
will Include all essential matters of merit as to all claims. 
The Examiner's search will be restricted to the subject matter 
encompassed by the claims. This first action will terminate 
with the setting of a three-month shortened period for re- 
sponse. 

2. During the three-month perioa for response, applicant 
is encouraged to arrange for an Interview with the Examiner 
in order to resolve, with finality, as many issues as possible. 
In order to afford the Examiner time for reflective considera- 
tion before the interview, applicant or his representative 
should cause to be placed in the hands of the Examiner at 
least one working da>- prior to the interview, a copy (clearly 
denoted as such) of the amendment that he proposes to file 
in response to the Examiner's action, .^uch a paper will not 
become a part of the file, but will form a basis for discussion 
at the interview. 

3. Subsequent to the Interview, or responsive to the Ex- 
aminer's first action if no interview was had, applicant will 
file his "record" response. The response at this stage, to be 
proper, must be restricted to the rejections, objections, and 
requirements made. Any amendment which would require 



broadening the search field will be treated as not a proper 
response. 

4. The examiner will within one month from the date of 
receipt of applicant's formal response, take up the applica- 
tion for final disposition. This disposition will constitute 
either a final action which terminates with the setting of a 
three-month period for response, or a notice of allowance. 
No further response will be made by the Exam'lner after a 
final action with the exceptions that (a) an Examiner's 
Answer may be prepared in response to an appeal brief, or 

(b) the application may be passed to Issue. 

5. A personal Interview after final Office action will not be 
permitted unless requested by the Examiner. However, tele- 
phonic interviews will be permitted where appropriate for the 
■purpose of correcting any minor matters which remain out- 
standing. 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 

Dec. 14, 19G5. Assistant Commissioner. 

[822 O.G. 2] 



(S9) 



Prosecution of Patent Applications 
After Final Action 



Experience over the past several months indicates the need 
to re-emphasize certain areas of examining procedure outlined 
In Assistant Commissioner Wahl's address to the Patent 
Examining Corps on September 24, 1965 (819 O.G. 893). 
Certain paragraphs or parts thereof are quoted below, with 
emphasis added. 

"It Is planned, accordingly, that prosecution before 
the examiner should be essentially concluded after appli- 
cant's first response and the examiner's reply thereto. 
A'o amendments to claims, nor new claims, should be 
entered after final rejection, except in rare instances, 
unless it is readily apparent that these place the case in 
condition for allowance or materially reduce or simplify 
the issues for appeal. Also, no amendments should be 
entered which raise new issues or require further ^search. 
However, If a response to a final rejection is received 
and it would clearly place the case in condition for allow- 
ance except for minor matters which could be cleared 
up over the telephone, the examiner should telephone 
applicant or his attorney or agent to try to promptly 
clear up such matters." 

• 

"In general, a very complete and thoroughly considered 
first response by applicant will be in order because it 
n-ill determine the form and content of the claims, not 
only for the final consideration by the examiner, but also 
by the Board of Appeals if appeal be taken. In this 
connection, attention is directed to suggestions set forth 
In notices In the Official Gazette In recent years that 
applicant should Include in his application at the time 
of filing, or after the first complete action, the most 
detailed claim that he would be willing to accept as well 
as the broadest claim to which he considers himself 
entitled." 

"A third change in procedure Is that In all cases 
wherein the examiner decides that a requirement for 
restriction to one invention or for election of species 
must be made, a telephone call will be made to applicant 
or his representative advising him of the situation and 
requesting a prompt election by return telephone call If 
the decision cannot be made immediately. When the 
election Is made by telephone, the examiner In his action 
will make of record the complete requirement and will 
state the date of the call, the name of the applicant or 
his representative who made the election, and the result 
of the election. Such restriction or election requirements 
will, of course, be subject to written requests for recon- 
sideration (traverse) In accordance with Rule 143. If 
no reply Is received to the examiner's telephoned require- 
ment within a reasonable period, about three working 
days, he will proceed to make the requirement In a 
written action as heretofore." 

In further Implementation of these precedures, the follow- 
ing paragraphs add further details to take effect on the date 



26 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



of this notice and to apply to all Office actions taken or 
written, and to all communications received from applicant, 
*on or after the effective date. 

FINAL ACTION AND PRE-ATPEAL 

The pro$ecution of an application before the examiner 
thould ordinarily he concluded icith the final action. Hoxc- 
ever. one personal intervietc and one tcritten response by 
appUcant may be entertained after such final action if cir- 
cumstances icarrant. Thus, only one request by applicant 
for a personal Interview after final should be granted, but 
In exceptional circumstances, a second personal Interview may 
be Initiated by the examiner If In his, judgment this would 
materially assist In placing the application in condition for 
alloxcance. Any amendment submitted under Rule llG(a) and 
Rule 116(b) for purposes of appeal should be presented in 
the first response after final action and will be considered as 
heretofore ; If any amendments are submitted after the ex- 
aminer's reply to such first response, they should be refused 
entry as not warranted at this stage of prosecution, even 
though such amendments allegedly present rejected claims in 
better condition for appeal. Similarly, no affidavit should be 
considered If presented later than with the first response after 
final unless a showing Is made under Rule 116(b). 

The practice will be continued of advising applicant by 
means of the recently Introduced form letter (POL-303) as 
to the disposition of proposed amendments to the claims and 
as to the effect of any argument or affidavit submitted in the 
first response after final action. 

If a response subsequent to the first response after final 
action is received before appeal and which on its face clearly 
places the application In condition for allowance, it should 
be entered and a notice of allowability (POL^255) promptly 
sent to applicant ; If such subsequent response does not on 
its face place the application in condition for allowance, It 
should not be considered further (unless, in the examiner's 
Judgment, there are only minor matters which could be readily 
cleared up in a telephone Interview leading to a notice of 
allowance) and should be refused entry. A form letter 
(POL-309) will be used for notification that such subsequent 
responses do hot place the application in condition for allow- 
ance. 

Requests for extension of the shortened statutory period for 
reply after final action, under Rule 130(b), will be considered 
* by the Primary JJxamlner and if granted will be for not more 
than one montii ; petitions for further extensions will be 
decided by the Commissioner or his designees in this matter. 
It should be noted that, under Rule 181(f), the filing of a 
Rule 181 petition will not stay the period for reply to an 
Examiner's action which may be running against an appli- 
cation. 

Appeal and post-appeal 

The record on appeal should be essentially the record before 
the examiner at the time appeal is taken. Thus, no amend- 
ments, except under Rule 193(b), presented after appeal has 
been taken should be entered for purposes of appeal, and no 
exception should be made to this, see Rule 116(c). Amend- 
ments, arguments, or affidavits filed concurrently with or of 
even date with appeal notice will be construed as filed after 
appeal for the purpose of this procedure, even though they 
may be the first response to the final action. In accordance 
with Rule 195, affidavits or exhibits submitted after the case 
has been appealed should be considered for entry only if 
applicant makes the necessary showing why they were not 
earlier presented ; Rule 195 should be strictly construed in 
this regard. If after appeal has been taken, a paper is pre- 
sented which on its face clearly places the application in 
condition for allowance, such paper should be entered and' 
a notice of allowability (POLr-255) promptly sent to applicant. 
If such paper does not on its face place the application in 
condition for allowance, it should not be considered further 
(unless in the examiner's judgment there are only minor 
matters which could be readily cleared up in a telephone inter- 
view leading to a notice of allowance) and proposed amend- 
ments therein should not be entered. Notification that such 
papers do not place the application in condition for allowance 
will be made by use of a form letter (POLr-309). 

In accordance with the above, the Brief should be directed 
to the claims and to the record of the case as they appeared 
upon filing the appeal, but it may, of course, w;it^draw from 
consideration on appeal any claims or Issues as desired by 
appellant. 



Upon timely filing of a Brief, it will be referred to the 
examiner for his consideration of Its propriety as to the 
appeal issues and for preparation of an Examiner's Answer 
if the Brief Is proper and the application is not allowable. 
The Examiner's Answer will normally be of the shortened 
type referring to and relying on the final action ; it may with- 
draw rejection of claims or any objection or requirement as 
desired by the examiner. Xo new ground of rejection or ob- 
jection should be incorporated in the Examiner's Answer 
icithout express approval in each case by the Group Manager. 



RESTRICTION AND ELECTION 

A basic policy of the streamlined examining program Is 
that the second action on the merits should be made final. 
In those applications wherein a requirement for restriction 
or election is accompanied by the rejection of linking or 
generic claims, such action will be considered to be an action 
on the merits and the next action by the examiner should be 
made final. It may thus be to applicant's advantage to make 
a telephone election in such cases prior to the first action. 

Requirements for restriction or election will continue to be 
governed by existing criteria. However, in stating a require- 
ment for restriction hereafter there should be no citation of 
patents to show separate status or classification or utility. 
The separate inventions should as heretofore be identified by 
a grouping of the claims with a short description of the total 
extent of the Invention claimed in each group, specifying the 
type or relationship of each group as by stating the group is 
drawn to process, or to subcombination, or to product, etc., 
and should indicate the classification or separate status of 
each group, as for example, by class and subclass. 

The period for response to a requirement for restriction or 
election, where there Is no rejection of claims, will hereafter 
be set at 30 days. 

MANVAL OF PATENT EXAMINING PROCEDDRB 

Procedures currently set forth in the Manual of Patent 
Kxamlnlng Procedure which may be in conflict with the above 
are superseded by those anounced above. Change Notices 
and replacement pages will be issued in due course. 

MANUAL OF CLERICAL PROCEDCRE 

This information will also be Incorporated In the Manual 

of Clerical Procedure. 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 

[824 O.G. 4 (Mar. 1, 1966)] 



(90) 



Double Patenting 



In view of the uncertain situation which has arisen as a 
result of recent decisions dealing with "double patenting" 
it is thought to be advisable to restate the practice which 
should be followed in this area, particularly as regards the 
effect of terminal disclaimers. The term "double patenting 
is properlv applicable only to cases involving two or more 
applications and/or patents of the same inventive entity and 
should not be applied to situations involving commonly owned 
cases of different inventive entities. Sole and Joint Inventors 
cannot constitute a single entity, nor do two or more sets of 
joint inventors constitute a single entity if any Individual Is 
included in either set who is not also Included In the other. 
If two or more cages are filed by a single inventive entity, 
and if the expiration dates of the patents, granted or to be 
granted, are the same, either because of a common issue date 
or by reason of the filing of one or more terminal disclaimers, 
two or more patents may properly be granted. If the claims 
do not overlap, even though the subject matter to which the 
claims of one case are directed may be obvious In view of the 
subject matter claimed In the other case. In re Robeson, 1964 
CD. 561, 141 USPQ 485; In re Kaye. 1964 CD. 630, 141 
USPQ 829 Claims overlap within the meaning of this state- 
ment if it is possible for them to be infringed by the same 
process, machine, manufacture, or composition of matter. 
Cross reading is not necessary to constitute such an overlap. 
Overlapping claims should not be allowed in cases filed by 
the same inventive entity If they are directed to identical 
inventive concepts, or If the concept to which one set of 
claims Is directed would be obvious In view of that to which 
the other set is directed. This Is true regardless of the rela- 
tive filing dates of the cases or the relative scope of the claims. 
In situations involving cases filed by different Inventive 
entitles, regardless of ownership, Sections 102 and 103 of 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



35 U.S.C preclude the granting of two or more patents when 
directed to identical inventive concepts or when one of the 
concepts would be obvious In view of the other. A terminal 
disclaimer can have no effect In this situation since the basis 
for refusing more than one patent is not connected with any 
extension of monopoly. 

In view of 35 U.S.C. 135, it is necessary to determine pri- 
ority of Invention wlienever two different Inventive entities 
are claiming a single inventive concept, and this determination 
should ordinarily be made before any patent is Issued. This 
Is true regardless of ownership, and the provision of Rule 
201(c) that interferences will not be declared or continued 
between commonly owned cases unless good cause Is shown 
therefor does not mean that two patents are to be allowed 
In such cases, but that the common assignee should be called 
on to state which of the entities involved is prior to the other 
in date of invention. 

Accordingly, the assignee of two or more- cases of different 
inventive entitles, containing conflicting claims, should be 
called on to maintain a line of demarcation betweeji them. 
If such a line is not maintained then, when one of the cases 
is in condition for allowance, claims covering the conflicting 
subject matter should be suggested as provided In Rule 203, 
care being taken to Insure that such claims cover all the 
conflicting matter and the assignee should be called on to 
state which entity is the prior Inventor of that subject matter 
and to limit the claims of the other application accordingly. 
If the assignee does not comply with this requirement and 
presents the Interfering claims in both cases, an Interference 
should be declared, attention being directed to Rule 208 If 
there Is a common attorney. If suggested claims are not 
presented within the time allowed, rejection should be made 
on the ground of disclaimer as indicated In Rule 203(b). 

In the event that a common assignee, after taking out a 
patent on one of two or more applications, for the first time 
presents claims in a pending application which are not patent- 
ably distinct from claims of the patent, the claims of the 
application should be rejected on the ground that the assignee, 
by taking out the patent at a time when the application was 
not claiming the patented Invention, Is estopped to contend 
t^iat the patentee is not the prior Inventor. 

If a patent is Inadvertently issued on one of two commonly 
owned applications by different inventive entities which at 
the time when the patent issued were claiming inventions 
wlilch are not patentably distinct, the assignee should be called 
on to make a determination of priority as In the case of pend- 
ing applications and. If no election Is made, an interference 
should be declared. An election of the applicant as the first 
Inventor should not be accepted without a complete (not 
terminal) disclaimer of the conflicting claims in the patent 

EDWARD J. BRENNER, 

Commissioner, 
[834 O.G. 1615] 



822 O.G. 2, Is modified to the extent Indicated below in the 
case where' the Office determines that all of the claims pre- 
sented are not obviously directed to a single invention. 

Where the claims In a case are directed to more than 
one Invention, an election without traverse will be a pre- 
requisite to the grant of special status. 

The election may be made by applicant at the time of filing 
the petition for special status. Should applicant fail to in- 
clude an election wirh the original papers or petition and the 
Office determines tliat a requirement should be made, the 
established telephone restriction practice will be followed. 

If otherwise proper, examination on the merits will pro- 
ceed on claims drawn to the elected invention. 

If applicant refuses to make an election without traverse, 
the application will not be further examined at that time. 
The petition will be denied on the ground that the claims are 
not directed to a single Invention, and the application will 
await action in Its regular turn. 

Divisional applications directed to the non-elected Inven- 
tions will not automatically be given special status based on 
papers filed with the petition In the parent case. Each such 
application must meet on its own ail requirements for the new 

special status. 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 
Mar 21 1907. .Assistant Commissioner. 

[837 O.G. 667] 



Jan. 9, 1907. 



(91) Nox-FiNAL Second Action Rejection 1'ractice 

Experience since September 1, 1966, indicates that the 
non-final second action rejection practice announced on a 
trial basis at 829 O.G. 1755 (M.P.E.P. Change Notice 10—1) 
has worked out satisfactorily for both the Office and the ap- 
plicants. Effective Immediately, that practice as restated 
below will be followed on a regular basis. 

Second actions on the merits will not be made final where 
the examiner introduces a new ground of rejection not neces- 
sitated by amendment of the application by the applicant. 
I'urther, in carrying out this policy, a second action on the 
merits in any application will not be made final If it Includes 
a rejection of any claim not amended by applicant where 
that rejection relies on newly cited art. Also, amendments 
complying with objections or requirements as to form are to 
be permitted after final action in accordance with Rule 
110(a). 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Jan. 30, 19C7. Assistant Commissioner. 

[835 O.G. 715) 



(92) 



SPECIAL Examining Procedure for Certain 
New Applications 



(93) 



New First Action Procedure 



Effective January 2, 1968, a new practice Involving the 
use of a revised form for the first page of the first Office 
\ctIon will be Instituted. The use of this new form will intro- 
duce some new pr.ictlces and procedures and will terminate 
the "Interview Practice Preliminary to Notice Under 35 
use 132" announced August 1, 1967, at 841 O.G. 1. 

The heading of the revised form containing the address 
and application identification will have a completely revised 
format to facilitate future pre-action addressing by automatic 

tvpewriter. . , ., .. . 

■ Under the new procedure, the Examiner will signify on the 
revised form certain information Including the period set for 
response, any attachments, and. In a "summary of action, 
the position taken on all claims. 

The new procedure will also allow the Examiner, In the 
exercise of his professional judgment, to indicate that a dis- 
cussion with applicant's representative may result in agree- 
ments whereby the application may be placed in condition for 
allowance and that the Examiner will telephone the repre- 
sentative within about two weeks. Under this practice the 
applicant's representative can be adequately prepared to con- 
duct such a discussion. Any resulting amendment may be made 
either by the applicant's attorney or agent or by the Exam ner 
in an Examiner's Amendment. It should be recognized that 
when extensive amendments are necessary it would be prefer- 
able If they were filed by the attorney o-- °8^°f °' ""7.^' 
thereby reducing the professional and clerical workload in the 
Patent Office and also providing the file ^"aPP^^^'^'^^f,,^,""" 
record. Including applicant's arguments for allowability as 

required by Rule 111. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 

Dec. 11, 1967. . Assistant Commissioner. 

f [845 O.G. 1205] 



The practice of granting special status to certain new 
applications as set forth In the Notice of December 14, 1965, 



(94) Modification of Notice of Janu.^ry 31, 1967 

The practice set forth In the notice of January 31. 1967. 
entitled "Double Patenting" (834 O.G. 1615), Is modified to 
the extent that when a single inventive entity is 'evolved a 
terminal disclaimer will be accepted to avoid a double patent- 
ing rejection even If the claims overlap. If the claims which 
would otherwise be subject to such rejection could not have 
been allowed In the other application or patent, and if the 
terminal disclaimer further provides that the patent shall . 
expire immediately If It ceases to be commonly owned with 
the other application or patent. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER. 
Feb. 14, 1968. Commissioner. 

[848 O.G. 1] 



28 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



(95) CoNTiNDATioNS— Res Judicata Rejections 

Some confusion exists In the interpretation of the estab- 
lished Office policy regarding the use of res judicata rejections. 
To clarify the Manual on this point the following changes are 
made — 

The second paragraph of MPEP 201.07 Is rewritten 
to read : 

At any time before the patenting or abandonment of 
or termination of proceedings on his earlier application, 
an applicant may have recourse to filing a continuation 
in ordtT to introdiice into the case a new set of claims 
and to establish a right to further examination by the 
primary Examiner. 

The last two sentences of MPEP 201.11 are deleted. 
MPEP 706.03 (w) is rewritten to read : 

A prior adjudication against the Inventor on the same 
or similar claims constitutes a proper ground of rejection 
as re$ judicata. See Ex parte Budde, 150 USPQ 4G9 ; 
828 O.G. 409. The rejection should be used only when 
the earlier decision was a decision of the Board of Ap- 
peals or any of the reviewing courts, and when the time 
for further court review has expired and no such review 
has been sought, or, if filed, the review action is termi- 
nated. The timely filing of a second application copending 
with an earlier application does not preclude the use of 
res judicata as a ground of rejection for the second appli- 
cation claims. 

When making a rejection on res judicata, action should 
ordinarily be made also on the basis of prior art. 



Mar. 18, 1968. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 

Assistant Commissioner. 



[849 O.G. 277] 



(96) Guidelines for Considering Disclosures ok 
Utility in Drdo Cases 

On December 5, 1967 the text of certain guidelines which 
the Patent Office proposed to adopt in the examination of 
applications for druKS, was pul^Jished in the Official (;azette 
(845 O.G. 1). A hearing was had on January 16, 1968, and all 
perscms, who desired to, were invited to attend and to submit 
their views, objections, recommendations or suggestions. The 
following guidelines are being published after consideration 
of all the material and opinions, both written and oral, which 
were submitted in response to that Invitation. 



Mar. 19, 1968. 



EDWARD J. BRENNER. 

Commissioner of Patents. 



General 

These guidelines are set down to provide uniform handling 
of applications dl-icloslng drug or pharmaceutical utility. They 
are intended to guide patent examiners and patent applicants 
as to criteria for utility statements. They deal with funda- 
mental questions and are subject to revision and amendment 
if future case law indicates this to be necessary. 

The following two basic principles shall be followed In 
considering matters relating to the adequacy of disclosure 
of utility In drug cases : 

(1) The same basic principles of patent law which apply in 
the field of chemical arts shall be applicable to drugs, and 

(2) The Patent Office shall confine its examination of dis- 
closure of utility to the application of patent law principles, 
recognizing that other agencies of the government have been 
assigned the responsibility of assuring conformance to the 
standards established by statute for the advertisement, use, 
sale or distribution of drugs.^ 

A drug is defined by 21 U.S.C. 321(g) 

The term "drug" means (A) articles recognized in the 
official United States Pharmacopeia, official Homeopathic 
Pharmacopeia of the United States, or official Rational 
Formulary, or any supplement to any of them ; and (B) 
articles intended for use in the diagnosis, cure, mitiga- 
tion, treatment, or prevention of disease In man or other 
animals; and (C) articles (other than food) intended to 
affect the structure or any function of the body of man 



or other animals ; and (D) articles Intended for use as a 

component of any articles specified In clause (A), (B), 

or (C) ; but does not include devices or their components, 

parts or accessories. 

In addition, compositions adapted to be applied to or used 

by human beings, e.g.. cosmetics, dentifrices, mouthwashes. 

etc., may be treated in the same manner as drugs subject to 

the conditions stated. 

Any proof of a stated utility or safety required pursuant to 
these guidelines may be Incorporated In the application as 
filed, or may be subsequently submitted by affidavit If and when 
required. The Patent Office, In reaching its own Independent 
decisions on questions of utility and how to use under 35 
U.S.C. 101 and 112, will continue to avail itself of assistance 
and information from the Secretary of Health. Education, and 
Welfare as authorized by 21 U.S.C. 372(b). when necessary. 
In accordance with the basic principles set forth above, the 
following procedures shall be followed in examining patent 
applications in the drug field with regard to disclosures relat- 
ing to utility. 

35 U.B.C. 101 

Utility must be definite and In currently available form,* 
not merely for further investigation or research but commer- 
cial availability is not necessary. Mere assertions such as 
"therapeutic agents." » "for pharmaceutical purposes," ♦ "bio- 
logical activity,"" "Intermediates,"* and for making further 
unspecified preparations are regarded as insufficient. 

If the asserted utility of a compound is believable on Its 

face to persons skilled In the art in view of the contemporary 

knowledge in the art, then the burden Is upon the examiner 

to give adequate support for rejections for lack of utility under 

this section.^ On the other hand, incred'ble statements' or 

statements deemed unlikely to be correct by ono skilled in the 

art » in view of the contemporary knowledge in the art will 

require adequate proof on the part of applicants for patents. 

Proof of utility under this section may be established by 

clinical or in livo or in vitro data, or combinations of these. 

which would be convincing to those skilled In the art.'o More 

particularly, If the utility relied on Is directed solely to the 

treatments of humans, evidence of utility, if required, must 

generally be clinical evidence." Although animal tests may be 

adequate where the art would accept these as appropriately 

correlated with human utility.'^ If there is no assertion of 

human utility," or if there is an assertion of animal utility." 

operatlveness for use on standard test animals is adequate 

for patent purposes. 

Exceptions exist with respect to the general rule relating 
to the treatment of humans. For example, compositions whose 
properties are generally predictable from a knowledge of their 
components, such as laxatives, antacids and certain topical 
preparations, require little or no clinic proof.'* 

Although absolute safety is not necessary to meet the utility 
requirement under this section, a drug which Is not sufficiently 
safe under the conditions of use for which It Is said to be 
effective will not satisfy the utility requirement.'* Proof of 



i/n re Krimmel, 48 CCPA 1116, 292 F.2d 948. 130 USPQ 
215 : In re Hartop et al., 50 CCPA 780, 311 F.2d 249. 135 
USPQ 419. 



^'hn re Kirk el ol , 54 CCPA 1119. 153 CSPQ 48; E. parte 
'■'."iTJi Jofv^?'.'?, m'^CCPA 1159, 153 USPQ 45 : In re K,rK \ 

'»Hr;?H W^kwt'! ^.^r'^^-^'A* ^»^^}^u 

mis. '123 USPQ 581. 

;;f„%"e'irp";!- ."5"o^^|/|S8«.,3» F.2. «>. .S, 
USPQ 419: E» P'^^^e Murphy 134 VSPQ 134 

U^P?-47^2'" n 're ?rf;"e^'t8^c'?A\%.i9/F^ 948. 130 
USP§ 215: In re Dodson. 48 CCPA 1 25 292 F 2d 943. 130 
USPQ 224 In re Hitchings, 52 CCPA 1141, 342 F. 2d 8U. i** 

^';rPn';V Berael et al., 48 CCPA 1102 292 F.2d 955. 130 

^^r§/J«.>/^a«^on^raT: \^ glp§ m : E. parte Le.in. 

''?» In ^r? Hartop et al. 50 CCPA 780. 311 F.2d 249. 135 
USPQ 419. 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



29 



safety shall be required only in those cases were adequate 
reasons can be advanced by the examiner for believing that 
the drug is unsafe, and shall be accepted if it establishes a 
reasonable probability of safety. 

» 35 U.S.C. 112 

A mere statement of utility for pharmacological or chemo- 
therapeutic purposes may raise a question of compliance with 
Section 112. particularly ". . . as to enable any person 
skilled In the art to which it pertains ... to use the same." 
If the statement of utility contains within It a connotation of 
how to use. and/or the art recognizes that standard modes of 
administration are contemplated, Section 112 Is satisfied. ".If 
the use disclosed is of such nature that the art Is unaware of 
successful treatments with chemically analogous compounds, 
a more complete statement of how to use must be supplied 
than if such analogy were not present. '* It is not necessary to 
specify the dosage or method of use if It Is obvious to one 
skilled in the art that such information could be obtained 
without undue experimentation." 

With respect to the adequacy of disclosure that a claimed 
genus possesses an asserted utility representative examples 
together with a statement applicable to the genus as a whole 
, will ordinarily be sufficient If It would be deemed likely by 
one skilled in the art. In view of contemporary knowledge In 
the art. that the claimed genus would possess the asserted 
utility. ■» Proof of utility will be required for other members of 
the claimed genus only In those cases where adequate reasons 
can be advanced by the examiner for believing that the genus 
as a whole does not possess the asserted utility. Conversely, 
a sufficient number of representative examples, if disclosed 
In the prior art will constitute a disclosure of the genus to 
which they belong. 

In the case of mixtures Including a drug as an ingredient, 
or mixtures which are drugs, or methods of treating a specific 
condition with a drug, whether old or new, a specific example 
should ordinarily be set forth, which should include the or- 
. ganlsm treated. In appropriate cases, such an example may be 
Inferred from the disclosure taken as a whole and/or the 
knowledge In the art (e.g., gargle). 

Where the claimed compounds are capable of several differ- 
ent utilities and one use is adequately described In accordance 
with these guidelines, additional utilities will be investigated 
for compliance with Sections 101 and 112 only If not believ- 
able on their face to those ordinary skill In the art in view 
of the contemporary knowledge of the art. Failure to meet 
these standjinls may result In a requirement to cancel such 
additional utllltles.» 



(98) 



Special Examining Procedure 



(97) 



Applications To Be Taken Up Special 



The Special Examining Procedure whereby a new applica- 
tion may be granted special status and advanced for examina- 
tion Is hereby revised to remove the condition limiting the 
application to no more than ten claims. The petition for 
special status will be granted regardless of the number of 
claims pending in the application at any time provided all 
other remaining conditions of this program are met (sec 
MPEP 708.02). 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
June 12. 1968. Assistant Commissioner. 

[852 O.G. 509] 



"Cf. In re Johnson. 48 CCPA 733, 282 F.2d 370. 127 
USPQ 216 : In re Hitchings et al. 52 CCPA 1141, 342 F.2d 80, 
144 l!SPQ 637. 

'« In re Mourcu et al.. 52 C?CPA 1363. 345 F. 2d 595, 145 
USPQ 452 ; In re Schmidt et al., 54 CCPA 1577, 153 USPQ 
640. 

•»/n re Oprenauer. 31 CCPA 1248. 143 F.2d 974. 62 USPQ 
297: In re CavaUito et al. 48 CCPA 711. 282 F.2d 3^7. 127 
rSPQ 202 : In re CavaUito et al. 48 CCPA 720 2S2 F.2d 363, 

127 USPQ 206 : In re Schmidt, 48 CCP.V 1140, 29.'? F.2d 274, 
1.10 I'SPO 404 : In re CnvnUito. 49 CCr.\ I.I.I.') "^Ofi F "d ."in.i, 
134 USPQ 370 ; In re Surrev, 54 CCPA 855. 370 F.2d 349. 151 
USPQ 724 ; In re Lund et al, 54 CCPA 1361, 153 USPQ 625. 

-0 Ex parte Lanham, 121 USPQ 223 ; Ex parte Moore et al, 

128 USPQ S: In re Cit'on. ;')! CCPA S52 .'?25 F.2d -.'48. 1.^9 
USPQ .TIB : In re Gottlieb et al, 51 CCPA 1114. 328 F.2d 1016. 
140 USPQ 665. 

[849 O.G. 567] 



Hereafter the existence of the following facts will place 
the application concerned in the category of special cases, i.e., 
those to be advanced out of regular order for examination. 

Once a case Is taken up for action by an Examiner accord- 
ing to Its effective filing date. It should be treated as special 
by any Examiner, Art Unit or Group to which It may subse- 
([uently be transferred. Exemplary situations Includes: (1) 
new cases transferred as the result of a telephone election, 
and (2) cases transferred as the result of a timely response 
to any official action. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Feb. 29, 1968. .Assistant Commissioner. 

[850 O.G. 4] 



(99) Rejections Not Based on Prior Art 

The primary object of the examination of an application Is 
to determine whether or not the claims define a patentable 
advance over the prior art. This consideration should not be 
relegated to a secondary positiofi while undue emphasis Is 
given to non-prior art or "technical" rejections. Effort In 
examining should be concentrated on truly essential matters, 
minimizing or eliminating effort on matters which may have 
played a part in the examination process In the past but 
which are not really critical. Where a major technical rejec- 
tion is proper (e.g.. lack of proper disclosure, undue breadth, 
utility, etc.) such rejection should be stated with a full de- 
velopment of the reasons rather than by a mere conclusion 
coupled with some stereotyped expression. ■ 

Generally speaking, the Inclusion of (1) negative limita- 
tions and (2) alternative expressions, provided that the al- 
ternatively expressed elements are basically equivalents for 
the purpose of the Invention, are permitted if no uncertainty 
or ambiguity with respect to the question of scope or breadth 
of the claim is presented. 

The examiner has the responsibility to make sure the word- 
ing of the claims is sufficiently definite to reasonably deter- 
mine the scope. It Is applicant's responsibility to select proper 
wording of the claim, except to the extent that the selection 
of words makes the claims indefinite. Under no circumstances 
should a claim be rejected merely because the Examiner pre- 
fers a different choice of wording. 

Rejections not based on prior art are explained In 706.03(a) 
to 706.03(v). IF THE ITALICIZED LANGUAGE IN THESE 
SECTIONS IS INCORPORATED IN THE REJECTION, 
THERE WILL BE LESS CHANCE OF A MISUNDERSTAND- 
ING AS TO THE GROUNDS OF REJECTION. 



July 23, 1968. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Assistant Commissioner. 



[853 O.G. 603] 



(100) Double Patenting and Terminal Disclaimer 

The practice concerning double patenting and the effect of 
a terminal disclaimer on such a rejection Is set out below. 
The notices of January 9, 1967, and February 14, 1968, re- 
lating to this subject are hereby superseded except with ref- 
erence to the practice described involving different Inventive 

entitles. 

Claims should be rejected on double patenting only in cases 
Involving two or more applications and/or patents of the 
same Inventive entity and not in situations involving com- 
monly owned cases of different inventive entitles. Commonly 
owned cases of dllTerent Inventive entitles are to be treated 
In the manner set out in MPEP 804.03. 

If two or more cases are filed by a single Inventive entity, 
and If the expiration dates of the patents, granted or to be 
granted, are the same, either because of a common Issue date 
or by reason of the filing of one or more terminal disclaimers, 
two or more patents may properly be granted provided the 
claims of the different cases are not drawn to the same In- 
vention {In re Knohl, 155 USPQ 586; In re GrisKold, 150 
USPQ 804). 

Claims that differ from each other (aside from minor differ- 
ences In language, punctuation, etc.), whether or not the 
difference Is obvious, are not considered to be drawn to the 
same invention. In cases where the difference Is obvious, 
terminal disclaimers are effective to overcome rejections on 
double patenting. However, such terminal disclaimers should 



30 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



include a provision that the patent shall expire Immediately 
if It ceases to be commonly owned with the other application 
or patent. 

Where there Is no such difference, the Inventions are the 
same and a terminal disclaimer Is ineffective. 



Feb. 18, 1969. 



EDWARD J. BRENNER, 

Commissioner. 

[860 O.G. 661] 



(101) 



Revised Design Patent Practice 



• The following changes are being Instituted in order to 
clarify the distinction between the ornamental design for an 
article being claimed in a design patent and its environment. 
These changes are to be followed in the examination of all 
design applications as of the date of this notice. It is sug 
gested that applicants initiate compliance with these changes 
in all pending "design applications. 

The ornamental design ■ which is being claimed must be 
shown In solid lines in the drawing. Dotted lines for the pur- 
pose of indicating unimportant or immaterial features of the 
designed article are no longer permitted. There are no por- 
tions of a design which are Immaterial or unimportant. In re 
Blum, 852 O.G. 1045 ; 153 USPQ 177. 

The title of the article being claimed in a design patent 
must correspond to the name of the article .shown in solid 
lines In the drawing. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Feb. 26, 1969. Assistant Commissioner. 

■ [860 O.G. 999] 



programs was published In the Federal Register of October 22, 
1968 (33 F.R. 15600), and in the Official Gazette of the 
Patent Office of October 22. 1968 (855 O.G. 829). 

In view of the decision by the U.S. Court of Customs and 
Patent Appeals In "In re Prater et al.." 162 USPQ 541, 866 
O.G. 1034 (1969), the adopted guidelines are hereby rescinded, 
effective Immediately. For the time being, adoption of new 
guidelines for the examination of patent applications Is being 
deferred pending further judicial Interpretation of the law on 
a case-by-case basis. 

Consideration of "In re Prater et al." has brought Into 
question the advisability of Issuing guidelines for the exanil- 
jiatlon of patent apiillcations on computer programs. Ifartles 
who desire to present their views, recommendations, or sug- 
gestions concerning such guidelines are Invited to do so, by 
letter addressed to the Commissioner of Patents, Washington, 
DC. 20231. Those parties who recommend the issuance of 
such guidelines are Invited to submit comments concerning the 
proposed language of the guidelines. 

WILMAM E. RCHUYLKR, .Jr., 

Commissioner of Patents. 
.\pproved : October 3, 1969. 
Myron Tribcs, 

.Assistant Secretary for Science and Technology. 

[F.R. Doc. 6912194 ; Filed. Oct. 9, 1969. 8 : 48 a.m.] 

Published Si F R. 15724, October 10. 1969 

[868 O.G. 349] 



(102) "Mere Function of Machine" — Rejection- 

In view of the decision of the Court of Customs and Patent 
Appeals in In re Tarczy-Homoch appearing at 158 USPQ 141, 
process or method claims will no longer be subject to a rejec- 
tion by Patent Office examiners solely on the ground that 
they define the inherent function of a disclosed machine 
or apparatus. Accordingly, the subject matter of MPEP 
706.03 (r) 1^ inapplicable and hereby cancelled. 



Feb. 10. 1969. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Assistant Commissioner. 



[861 O.G. 343] 



(103) Final Rejection — Fir.st .\ction 

The claims of a new application may be finally rejected 
in the first Office action in those situations where (1) the 
new application Is a continuing application of, or a substl- 
tute for, an earlier application, and (2) all claims of the new 
application (a) are drawn to the same invention claimed in 
tho earlier application, and (b) would have been properly 
finally rejected on the art of record in the next Office action 
if they had been entered in the earlier application. A first 
action final rejertlon In a continuation-in-part application 
Is not proper whore any claim Includes subjpct matter not 
present In the parant case. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Mar. 20, 1969. .Assistant Commissioner. 

[861 O.G. 1011] 



(104) Claim Interpretation 

The notice of January 15, 1968, appearing in the Official 
Gazette of February 13, 1968 (847 O.G. 331) and concerned 
with statements relating to the scope of the Invention claimed 
In patent applications, is hereby rescinded. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 

Sept. 12, 1969. Assistant Commissioner. 

[867 O.G. 1] 



(105) Examination of Patent Applications on 
Computer Programs 

Notice of Rescission of Guidelines 

Notice regarding the adoption by the Patent Office of guide- 
lines for the examination of patent applications on computer 



(106) 



Certain Cases 



Reopening After Decision, Board of Appeals 



Effective with the date of this notice the Commissioner of 
Patents will, on a trial basis, enertain petitions under 
§ 1.108 of Title 37, Code of Federal Regulations (Patent 
Office Rule 19S), to reopen certain cases in which an appli- 
cant has sought review under 35 U.S.C. 141 or 145. This pro- 
cedure is restricted to cases which have been decided by the 
ISoard of Appeals and which are amendable to settlement 
without the need for going forward with the court proceeding. 
Such petitions will ordinarily be granted only In the follow- 
ing categories of cases : 

1. When the decision of the Re^rd of Appeals asserts that 
the rejection of the claims is proper because the claims do 
not include a disclosed limitation or because tliey suffer from 
some other curable defect, and the decision reasonably is 
suggestive tliar claims including the limitation or devoid of 
the defect will be allowable ; 

2. When the decision of the Roard of .\ppeals asserts that 
the rejection of the claims is proper because the record does 
not include evidence of a specified character, and Is reason- 
ably sug^stlve that If such evidence were presented, the 
appealed claims would be allowable, and it is demonstrated 
that such evidence presently exists and can be offered ; or 

3. When the decision of the Board of -Appeals Is based on 
a practice, rule, law, or judicial precedent which, since the 
Board's decision, has been rescinded, repealed, or overruled. 

Any such petition must be accompanied by the proposed 
amendment, evidence, or argument said to justify allowance 
of the claims. The petition further must point out how the 
case falls within one of the preceding categories. Failure to 
do' so or failure of the case to qualify as coming within one 
of the categories will usually constitute l)ases for denying 
the petition. In any event, no ca.se will be reopened unless 
it is for the consideration of matters not already adjudicated, 
and sufficient cause has been shown. 

Such petitions will not be ordinarily entertained after the 
filing of the. Commissioner's brief in cases In which review 
has been sought under 35 U.S.C. 141, or after trial In a 
35 U.S.C. 145 case. 

In the case of an appeal under 35 U.S.p. 141, If the petl- 
tien Is granted, steps will be taken to request the court to re- 
mand the case to the Patent Office and if so remanded the 
proposed amendments, evidence, and arguments will be en- 
tered of record in the application file for consideration, and 
further action will be taken by the Board of Appeals in the 
first Instance or by the Examiner as may be appropriate. In 
the case of civil action under 35 U.S.C. 145, steps will be 



JANUARY 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



31 



taken for obtaining dismissal of the action without prejudice 
to consideration of the proposals. 

WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, JR., 

Commissioner of Patents. 
Approved : Oct. 16, 1969. 
Myron Tribus, 

Assistant Secretary for Science and Technology. 

[F.R. Doc. 69-12674 ; Filed Oct. 22, 1969 ; 8 :48 a.m.] 

Published in S* F.R. 17210, Oct. 2S, 1969 

[868 O.G. 1058] 



under final rejection acceptance of a hand delivered amend- 
ment will require the initials of a Primary Examiner. 

The privilege of personal delivery of papers by attorneys" 
to the Examining Groups Is extended to requests for exten- 
sions of time in addition to amendments of the type referred 
to above. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Nov. 10, 1969. Assistant Commissioner. 

[869 O.G. 345] 



(107) Prosecdtion and Delivery of .Vmendments 

. General 

Many of the difficulties encountered in the prosecution of 
patent applications after final rejection may be alleviated If 
each applicant Includes, at the time of filing or no later than 
the first response, claims varying from the broadest to whlcli 
he believes he Is entitled to the most detailed that he is will- 
ing to accept. 

Prosecution After Final Rejection 
To expedite the resolution of cases under final rejection, 
an amendment filed at any time after final rejection but before 
an appeal brief Is filed, may be entered upon or after filing 
of an appeal provided the total effect of the amendment is to 
(1) remove Issues for appeal, and/or (2) adopt Examiner sug- 
gestions. Of course, if the amendment necessitates a new 
search, raises the Issue of new matter, presents additional 
claims without cancelling a corresponding number of finally 
rejected claims, or otherwise Introduces new issues, It will 
not be entered. Examiners will continue to respond to all non- 
entered amendments after final rejection, and will Indicate the 
status of each claim of record or proposed, Including the 
designation of claims that would be entered on the filing of an 
appeal if filed In a separate paper. It should be noted that an 
amendment placing a case In condition for allowance will be 
enterable by the Examiner at any stage prior to forwarding 
the answer on appeal. Except where an amendment merely 
cancels claims and/or adopts Examiner suggestions, removes 
issues for appeal, or In some other way requires only n cursory 
review by the Examiner, compliance with the requirement of 
a. showing under Rule 116(b) will be expected of all amend- 
ments after final rejection. 

In accordance with prior practice, In order to prevent aban- 
donment, a timely filed amendment after final rejection that 
reaches the Examiner near the end or after the expiration of 
the period for response, may be entered In part if this can be 
done to make the case allowable (e.g., a second amendment 
after final rejection filed on the last day of the response period, 
where no appeal has been filed and the amendment cancels 
all rejected claims and proposes to add claims, at least one 
of which Is unpatentable, entry would be approved to the ex- 
tent of cancelling the rejected claims and entering only the 
patentable claims). 

Only one attorney-Initiated personal Interview will be per- 
mitted after final rejection. However, the Examiner may Initi- 
ate an interview anytime he believes it would expedite the 
prosecution of the application. 

Hand Delivery of Papers 

For purposes of convenience In those cases where the attor- 
ney and the Examiner agree that a proposed amendment dis- 
cussed during a personal Interview would place the applica- 
tion In condition for allowance, the amendment may be left 
with the Examiner to become an official paper In the file with- 
out routing through the mall room, provided no additional 
fees are required. Where the case Is under final rejection, If 
changes In the proposed amendment are necessary and these 
changes are not practical to be .made by Examiner's Amend- 
ment, the attorney or a local associate will be permitted to 
hand deliver a corrected amendment to the Examiner, pro- 
vided no additional fees are required and further that the 
amendment Is submitted to the Examiner by the end of the 
next working day following the Interview and within the 
period for response. 

The Examiner who accepts these amendments will write 
"entry approved" In the left-hand margin of the first page of 
the amendment, date and Initial the amendment, and then 
have it date stamped with the Group Stamp. For applications 



(108) Petition To Revive Practice 

Effective Immediately, a decision on a petition to revive an 
abandoned application will be based solely on whether a satis- 
factory showing has been made that the delay was unavoidable 
(35 U.S.C. 133). A petition to revive will not be considered 
unless the petition fee and a proposed response to the last 
Office action have been received (Rule 137). 

The granting of a petition to revive does not serve In any 
way as a determination that the proposed response to the 
Office action is completely responsive. Revived applications 
will be forwarded to the examiner to determine the complete- 
ness of the proposed response. Such applications must be taken 
up Special. If the examiner determines that the response Is 
complete, he should promptly take the case up for action. If 
the proposed response is not a complete response to the last 
Office action, the examiner should write a letter to the appli- 
cant informing him of the specific defects In his response and 
set a one-month time limit for applicant to complete his re- 
sponse. If the applicant does not complete his response within 
the set one-month limit, the application is again abandoned. 



Dec. 11, 1969. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
.Assistant Commissioner. 



[869 O.G. 1362] 



(109) Environ-mental Qoality 

In signing the National Environmental Policy Act on the 
first day of this decade. President Nixon declared, "The 1970*8 
absolutely must be the years when America pays Its debt to 
the past by reclaiming the purity of Its air, Its waters and 
our living environment." This landmark legislation declares 
that it is the continuing policy of the Federal Government to 
use all practicable means and measures to foster and promote 
the general welfare, create and maintain conditions under 
which man and nature can exist In productive harmony, and 
fulfill the social, economic, and other requirements of present 
and future generations of Americans. The Act further directs 
that, to the fullest extent possible, the policies, regulation^, 
and public laws of the United States shall be Interpreted and 
administered In accordance with the policies set forth In this 
Act. 

In accordance with the desires of the President and this 
mandate of the Congress, the Patent -Office will accord 
"special" status to all patent applications for Inventions which 
materially enhance the quality of the environment of man- 
kind by contributing to the restoration or maintenance of the 
basic Ufe-sustalning natural elements — air, water, and soil. 
In order that the Patent Office may implement this procedure, 
we request that all applicants desiring to participate In this 
program request that their applications be accorded "special" 
status. Such requests should be written, should identify the 
applications by serial number and filing date, and should be 
accompanied by affidavits or declarations under Rule 102 ex- 
plaining how their inventions contribute to the restoration or 
maintenance of one of these life-sustaining elements. 



Jan. 29, 1970. 



WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, Jr., 

Commissioner of Patents. 

[871 O.G. 673] 



(110) Petition To Revive Practice — Clarification 

In clarification of the notice of Dec. 11, 1969.(869 O.G. 
1362), the practice set forth In the second paragraph thereof 
Is limited to proposed "responses" before final rejection. 
While a response to a non-final action may be either an argu- 
ment or an amendment under Rule 111, a response to a final 



1., 



32 

action "must Include cancellation of. or appeal from the re- 
jection of, each claim so rejected" under Rule 113. 

Accordingly. In any case where a final rejectloo had been 
made, the proposed response required for consideration of a 
petition to revive must be either an appeal or an amendment 
that cancels all the rejected claims or otherwise prima facie 
places the application In condition for allowance. 

In those situations where abandonment occurred because 
of the failure to file an appeal brief, the proposed response, 
required for consideration of a petition to revive, must Include 
a brief accompanied by the proper fee. 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



Feb. 20, 1970. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Asaiatant Commissioner. 



Second actions on the merits will be final according to pre- 
vafllng pra ice and any reference referred to In these or sub^ 
Lquent actions will be Identified by name or otherwise In 
conventional manner, not by capital letters as used on Form 
P(^ri42 For this reason, use of conventional reference Iden- 
tification in response to all Office actions will be helpful 

Only one carbon copy of the action will be furnished In 
accordance with the Notice of October 21. 1970. entitled 
"Office Actions" and appearing In 880 O.O. 740. 

All other Office policies, practices, and procedures remain 

*"''''"*• RICHARD A. WAHL. 

Jan 5 1971. Assistant Commissioner. 

[883 O.G. 2] 



[873 O.G. 1] 



(111) Timely Present.\tion of Affidavits of Dec- 
laratio.ns under rcles 131 and 132 

All affidavits or declarations under Rule 131 or 132 must 
be timely presented In order to be admitted. 

Affidavits and declarations submitted prior to a final rejec- 
tion will be considered timely. 

An affidavit or declaration presented with a first response 
after final rejection for the purpose of overcoming a new 
ground of rejection or requirement made In the final rejection 
will be entered and considered without a showing under 
Rule 116(b). 

No other affidavit or declaration, under Rule 131 or 132, pre- 
sented after a final rejection, will be considered unless a satis- 
factory showing Is made under Rule 116(b) or 195. 

All admitted affidavits or declarations will be acknowledged 
and commented upon by the Examiner In his next succeeding 

action. 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 
July 9, 1970. Assistant Commissioner of Patents. 

[877 O.G. 243] ^ 



(112) Abbreviated First Actions of the Merits 

Starting on or about February 1, 1971. and continuing for 
a trial period of up to twelve months, a newly developed form 
(PO-1142) win be used for first actions on the merits of 
patent applications Involving claims subject to rejection and/ 
or objection on statutory or. other legal grounds. 

The form is designed to furnish a clear, full, and complete 
first action Including the reasons for rejection and/or objec- 
tion together with such information and references as may be 
useful In judging the propriety of continuing the prosecution, 
all In accordance with the statute (35 U.S.C. 132) ; and It Is 
Intended to abridge the action with condensed language using 
essential words and phrases in abbreviated form, in order to 
expedite the prosecution and reduce the pendency time of 
applications awaiting examination. Where found necessary 
in exceptional cases, a regular action without the form will 

be/used. 

For abbreviation purposes, references referred to on the 
form will be designated by capital letters and Identified on 
revised reference list PO-S92, and their correlation as applied 
to the claims will be Indicated by symbols illustrated and 
explained on the bottom of the form. Sections 100-103, and 
112 of the patent statute are reproduced on the back of the 
form. 

Summary sheet POL-326 will continue In use with all first 
actions, and has been revised to Identify different parts of 
the sheet as "Part I" and "Part II." Form PO-1142 will be 
distinguished as "Part III." and If a second copy of the form 
Is necessary and Is used to complete the action It will be 
marked for distinction as "Part IIIo" (a regular typed page 
If anne.xed to an action with the form will be designated as 
"Part IV"). All parts of the action after Part I (Parts II. 
Ill, and IV) will each have numbered paragraphs starting 
with the numeral 1, and communications relating thereto may 
be properly Identified by the number on the particular part 
(for example, paragraph 2 on Part III may be Identified as 
paragraph III-2). 

As noted. Form PO-1142 will be used only for first actions 
on the merits concerned with claims subject to rejection and/ 
or objection on statutory or other legal grounds. It will not be 
used for any subsequent action nor a first action made final 
as In a continuing application. 



(113) AFTEB Final Rejection Practice 

[37 CFR Part 1] 
}fotice of Proposed Rule Making 
Notice is hereby given that pursuant to the authority con- 
tained in section 6 of the Act of July 19, 1952 (66 Stat. 793 ; 
35 U.S.C. 6), the Patent Office proposes to amend Title 37 or 
the Code of Federal Regulations by revising §| 1.116, 1.191, 
1 192 and 1.193, and by adding | 1.130. 

All persons Interested in presenting their views and objec^ 
tlons and recommendations In connection with the proposed 
changes are Invited to do so on or before March 23, 1971. on 
which day a hearing will be held at 2 p.m.. e.s.t.. In Room 
8C06 Building 2. 2011 Jefferson Davis Highway. Arlington, 
Va AH persons wishing to be heard orally are requested to 
notify the Commissioner of Patents of their intended appear- 
ance Any written comments or suggestions may be inspected 
by any person upon written request a reasonable time after 
the closing date for submitting comments. 

The proposed changes. If adopted, will provide a basis for 
a revised procedure for treating amendments filed after a 
final rejection. A proposed additional section is added to In- 
corporate the existing practice relative to affidavits 

The proposed procedure will provide that all timely filed 
first amendments after final rejection be entered as a matter 
of right subject to the limitation that additional clalrtis will 
not be entered beyond the number that would result In the 
total number of claims under prosecution equalling the number 
of claims finally rejected. Only those second and subsequent 
amendments which cancel claims will be entered as a matter 
of right The entry and treatment of any other amendments 
filed at this stage will be entirely within the discretion of 

the examiner. „,«.„, 

A distinction will be made between first amendments after 
final rejection filed within 2 months from the date of the final 
rejection and those filed after that period. 

A first amendment after final rejection filed within 2 months 
of the final rejection will receive a full and complete advisory 
action as soon as possible after Its receipt in the Patent Office. 
Under these circumstances, the revised procedure would per- 
mit the filing of an appeal within the period for "sponse to 
the final rejection or within 1 month from the date of the 
advisory action, whichever Is later. However. If an appeal 
had been filed before the mailing of the "^T'^^J/^^Vk h,.! 
appeal brief would not be due until 2 months after the date 
of the advisory action. 

Amendments filed later than 2 months after the date of 
the final rejection In nonappeared cases may be answered at 
the examiner's discretion, but no additional time will be al- 
owed for appeal. However, if an appeal Is filed In these cases 
a full and complete advisory action will be rendered and the 
time for filing the brief will be extended to expire 2 months 
from the date of the advisory action 

After jurisdiction of an application transfers to the Board 
of Appeals, no amendments will be considered for entry ex^ 
cept those restricted to cancellation of claims or copying 
claims for purposes of Interference. j ^ „, 

If new Issues are presented In the claims as amended or 
presented after final rejection, they will be rejected n the 
advTsoy action on the ground of being drawn to new issues^ 
These rejections will be reviewable by the Board of Appeals 
as "adverse decisions of examiners (35 U.b i-. o. 

The current practice of normally making the second action 
on the merits Snal and setting of a S-onth per od o^ re^ 
Bponse win continue. However, the practice of granting an 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



33 



automatic 1-month extension of time if an amendment is filed 
(notices of Aug. 7, 1967 ; 841 0.0. 1411 and of Sept. 26. 1968 : 
855 O.G. 1109) will be terminated, and extensions of time at 
this stage of the prosecution will not be encouraged. Further, 
any extension of time granted after a final rejection will not 
affect the 2-month period and the privilege of an advisory 
action. 

The present policy concerning consideration of affidavits, 
declarations, and exhibits will remain unchanged. 

Holding of Interviews after final rejection will be at the pri- 
mary examiner's discretion. 

This procedure will also allow the examiner to prepare 
examiner's answers which simply refer to the final rejection 
or the advisory action in most Instances. 

The sections. If amended as proposed, would read as follows : 

I 1.116 Amendments after final action. 



(b) A first amendment presented after final rejection will 
be entered and considered, but the total number of claims 
under prosecution may not exceed the total number finally 
rejected. Entry of second and subsequent amendments after 
final rejection will normally be limited to only those which 
cancel claims. 

(c) A first amendment filed within 2 months after the 
date of the final rejection, or after appeal, will receive a fuH 
and complete advisory action. If not previously filed, an ap- 
peal may be filed In such cases within the period for response 

^ to the final rejection or within 1 month from the date of the 
advisory action, whichever Is later. In those cases where an 
appeal was filed before the date of the advisory action, the 
appeal brief Is due 2 months after the date of the advisory 

• action. 

(d) After jurisdiction of an appealed case passes to the 
Hoard of Appeals no amendments may normally be made (see 
§ 1.191(d)). After decision on appeal, amendments can only 
be made as provided In | 1.198, or to carry into effect a 
recommendation under § 1.196. 

(e) Amendments after final rejection shall not introduce 
new Issues Into the prosecution. 

§ 1.130 Affidavits, declarations, or exhibits after final re- 
jection. 
Affidavits, declarations, or exhibits submitted with a first 
reply after final rejection for the purpose of overcoming a 
new ground of rejection or requirement made in the final 
rejection, shall be admitted and considered. No other affidavit, 
declaration, or exhibit presented after final rejection will be 
admitted and considered without a showing of good and 
sufficient reasons why they were not earlier presented. 

§ 1.191 Appeal to Board of .4.ppeals. 

(a) Every applicant for a patent or for reissue of a patent, 
any of the claims of which Imve been twice rejected, or who 
has been given a final rejection (§ 1.113) may, upon the pay- 
ment of the fee required by law. appeal from the decision 
of the primary examiner to the Board of Appeals within the 
time allowed for response. (See § 1.116(c).) 

• • • • • 

(d) The jurisdiction of an appealed case is retained by the 
primary examiner until the time for filing a reply to the 
examiner's answer (11.193(b)) has expired, at which time 
the Board of Appeals will take jurisdiction of the same. 

I 1.192 Appellant's brief. 

(a) The appellant shall, within 2 months from the date 
of the appeal, or within the time allowed for response to the 
action appealed from, or within the time allowed in an ad- 
visory action (§ 1.116(b)). whichever is later, file a brief, 
accompanied by the requisite fee. Said brief shall Include all 
of the authorities and arguments on which he will rely to 
maintain his appeal, Including a concise explanation of the 
Invention which should refer to the drawing by reference char 
acters, and a copy of the claims Involved, at the same time 
Indicating If he desires an oral hearing. Two extra copies of 
the brief are required If an oral hearing Is requested. Upon 
a showing of sufficient cause the time for filing the brief may 
be extended to a date not later than 2 months after the 
original expiration date. Any longer or further extensions 
must be sought from the Commissioner. All requests for ex- 



tensions must be filed prior to the expiration of the period 
sought to be extended. 

• • * • • 
f 1.193 Examiner's answer. 

• • • • • 

(b) The appellant may file a reply brief directed only to 
such new points of argument as may be raised in the examin- 
er's answer, within 1 month from the date of such answer. 
However, if the examiner's answer states a new ground of 
rejection appellant may file a reply thereto within 2 months 
from the date of such answer ; such reply may Include any 
amendment or material appropriate to the new groubd. 

WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, Jr., 

Commissioner of Patents. 
Approved : January 22, 1971. 

Richard O. Simpson, 

Acting Assistant Secretary for 
Science and Technology. 

[FR Doc. 71-1167 Filed 1-27-71 ; 8 : 47 a.m.) 

Pub. in 36 F.R. 1S56-57, Jan. 88, 1971 

[883 O.G. 880] 



(114) 



Deposit of .Microorganisms 



Some inventions which are the subject of patent applica- 
tions depend on the use of microorganisms which must be 
described in the specification in accordance with 35 U.S.C. 
112. No problem exists when the microorganisms used are 
known and readily available to the public. When the inven- 
tion depends on the use of a microorganism which is not so 
known and readily available, applicants must take additional 
steps to comply with the requirements of Section 112. 

In re .Argoudclis et al. 168 USPQ 99 (CCPA. 1970). ac- 
cepted a procedure for meeting the requirements of 35 U.S.C. 
112. Accordingly, the Patent Office will accept the following 
as complying with the requirements of Section 112 for an 
adequate disclosure of the microorganism required to carry 
out the Invention : 

(1) The applicant, no later than the effective U.S. filing 
date of the application, has made a deposit of a culture 
of the microorganism In a depository affording per- 
manence of the deposit and ready accessibility thereto 
by the public If a patent is granted, under conditions 
which assure (a) that access to the culture will be 
available during pendency of the patent application 
to one determined by the Commissioner to be entitled 
thereto under Rule 14 of the Rules of Practice In 
Patent Cases and 35 U.S.C. 122, and (5) that an re- 
strictions <,on the availability to the public of the cul- 
ture so deposited will be irrevocably removed upon 
the granting of the patent ; 

(2) Such deposit is referred to In the body of the specifica- 
tion as filed and Is identified by deposit number, name 
and address of the depository, and the taxonomic de- 
scription to the extent available Is included in the 
specification ; and 

(3) The applicant or his assigns has provided assurance 
of permanent availability of the culture to the pubUc 
through a depository meeting the requirements of (1). 
Such assurance may be In the form of an averment 
under oath or by declaration by the applicant to this 
effect. 

A copy of the applicant's contract with the depository may 
be required by the Examiner to be made of record as evidence 
of making the culture available under the conditions stated 

above. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 

Apr 29 1971. Assistant Commissioner. 

[886 O.G. 638] 



(115) Environmental Quality 

The National Environmental Policy Act declares that It is 
a continuing policy of the Federal Government to use all 



906 O.G.— 2 



34 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



practicable means and measures to foster and promote the 
•general welfare, create and maintain conditions under which 
man and nature can exist in productive harmony, and fulfill 
the social, economic, and other requirements of present and 
future generations of Americans. The Act further directs that, 
to the fullest extent possible, the policies, regulations, and 
public laws of the United States shall be interpreted and ad 
ministered in accordance with the policy set forth in the Act. 

Following the enactment of the National Environmental 
Policy Act, the Patent Office Initiated an Environmental 
Quality Program under which it accorded, upon request, 
"special" status to all patent applications for inventions which 
materially enliance the quality of the environment of manliiml 
by contributing to the restoration or maintenance of the 
basic life-sustaining natural elements — air, water, and soil. 

It seems apparent that not all patent applicants are aware 
of the availability of such special liandling under the pro- 
gram. While over 381 patent applications have already been 
approved' for accelerated processing by the Patent Office, a 
substantial number of patent applicants whose inventions 
would qualify have not requested special status for their 
patent applications. 

In order to participate in the program, hpplicants must 
request that their applications be accorded "special" status 
in writing, identifying the applications by serial number and 
filing date, and should submit affidavits or declarations under 
Rule 102 explaining how their inventions contribute to the 
restoration or maintenance of one of the three lifesiistaining 
elements mentioned. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
.Tune 7, 1971. Acting Commissioner of Patents. 

[888 O.G. 2] 



37 of the Code of Federal Regulations are hereby amended as 

follows : 

1. In i 1.41, paragraph (a) is revised to read as follows: 

§ 1.41 Applicant for patent. 

(a) A patent must be applied for and the application pa- 
pers must be signed and the necessary oath or declaration 
executed by the actual inventor in all cases, except as pro- 
vided by f§ 1.42, 1.43, and 1.47. (See S 1.60.) 

. » ♦ • • 

2. A new § 1.60 is added to read as follows : 

§ 1.60 Continuing application for invention di»close<l and 
claimed in a prior application. 

A continuation or divisional application (filed under the 
conditions specified in 35 U.S.C, 120 or 121), which discloses 
and claims only subject matter disclosed in a prior application 
may be filed as a separate application liefore the patenting or 
abandonment of or termination of proceedings on the i>rior 
application. If the application papers comprise a copy of the 
prior application as filed, signing and execution by the appli- 
cant may be omitted provided the copy either is prepared and 
certified by tlie Patent Office or is prepared by the applicant 
and verified by an affidavit or declaration by the applicant, 
his attorney or agent, stating tliat It Is a true copy of the 
prior application as filed. Certification may be omitted if the 
copy is prepared by and does not leave the custody of the Pat- 
ent Office. Only amendments reducing the number of claims or 
adding a reference to the prior application (§ 1.7.'<(a)) will 
be entered before calculating the filing fee and granting of the 
filing date. 

3.^n { 1.75. paragraph (d) (2) is revised to read as follows : 

§ 1.75 r/aim(«). 



(116) TITLE 37— PATENTS, TR.\DEMARKS, 

AND COPYRIGHTS 

CH.APTER I I'.ATENT OFFICE, DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE 

P.\RT 1 — RILES OF PRACTICE IN PATENT CASES 
PART 3 — FORMS FOR P.\TEXT CASES 

Division-Continuation Program 

The current Rule 147 divisional practice and the "stream- 
lined continuation" program set forth in the' notices of Febru- 
ary 11, 1966 (824 O.G. 1) ; May 13, 1966 (S27 O.G. 2) ; May 
31, 1966 (828 O.G. 1085) and October 14, 1969 (869 O.G. 1) 
are superseded by this change in the rules. 

The practice under f 1 60 permits persons having authority 
to prosecute the prior application to file a continuation or divi- 
sional application without an oath or declaration, if the con- 
tinuation or divisional application is a copy of the prior appli- 
cation as filed. However, some of the claims in the prior ap- 
plication as filed may be canceled by amendment in order to 
reduce the filing fee. An amendment presenting additional 
claims may accompany the request for filing an application un- 
der § 1.60 but such amendment will not be entfered until after 
the filing date has been granted. 

Form 3.54 is designed as an aid for use by both applicant 
and the Patent Office and should simplify fl^ng and process- 
ing of applications under | 1.60. 

Application copies may be prepared and submitted by the 
applicant, his attorney or agent, provided they are verified as 
true copies. No charges will be made for preparation of copies 
0that are retained'by tlie Office. 

Notice of proposed rule making regarding a revision of 
Si 1.41 and 1.75, an addition of §! 1.60 and 3.54 and revoca- 
tion of S 1 147 of Title 37, Code of Federal Regulations, Re- 
lating tj a division continuation program, was published in 
the Federal Register of January 28, 1971 (36 F.R. 13,")7). 

Interested persons were given an opportunity to participate 
In the rule making process through submission of comments 
in writing and at an oral hearing lield on March 23, 1971. 

Full consideration has been given to the comments received 
and changes in the text of'the original proposal have been made 
in view tliereof. 

In consideration of the foregoing and pursuant to the au- 
thority contained in section 6 of the Act of July 19, 1952 (66 
Stat. 793; 35 U.S.C. 6), Parts 1 and 3 of Chapter I of Title 



(d) • • * 

(2) See Si 1.141 to 1.146 as to claiming different Inventions 
In one application. 



S 1.47 [Revoked] 

4. Section 1.147 is revoked. 

5. Section 3.54 is added to rend as follows : 

S 3.54 Division continuation program application transmittal 
form. 

In THE United States Patent Office 

Docket No 

The Commissioner of Patents, 
Washington, D.C.i0231. 

Sir : This Is a request for filing a 
n Continuation 
'-' application under 37 CFR 1.60. 

rn Divisional 

of pending prior application Serial No. filed 

on of 

(date) (Inventor) 



for 



(title of invention) 



1. r- 1 Enclosed is a copy of the prior application as origlnal- 

ly filed and an affidavit or declaration verifying It 
as a true copy. 

2. (~] Prepare a copy of the prior application. 

3. rj The filing fee is calculated below : 



Claims as Filed. Less Any Claims Canceled by Amendment 

Rate 



For 



Number Number 
filed extra 



Basic 

fee $65 



Total claims... -10= >< m = 

Independent claims —1- X ^^ 



Total filing fee. 



4. 



n The Commissioner Is hereby authorized to charge any 
fees which may be required, or to credit any over- 
payment to Account No. .-• 

A duplicate copy of this sheet is enclosed. 

5. □ A check in the amount of $ Is enclosed. 

6. n Cancel claims 



JANUARY 2, 1973 U. S. PATENT OFFICE 35 

7 n Amend the specification by Inserting before the first As a result of this review the program will be continued and 

line the sentence • —This Is a n continuation, the form modified to Incorporate some of the suggested Im- 

ndlvlslon of application Serial No. provements. The space for the explanation of the rejection 

LJ^^ • _ will be expanded. In addition, the Instructions to the exam- 

8 n Transfer""th"e'drawings7rom the prior application to Iners will be supplemented to reinforce the original stress on 
'-' this application and abandon said prior appllca- the Importance of legibility, clarity and comple eness In set- 

tlon as of the filing date accorded this application, ting forth the examiner's position, and desirability of Includ- 

A duplicate copy of this sheet Is enclosed for filing in ing suggestions that would render the case allowable, 

the prior application file, RICHARD A. WAHL, 

9. r-| The prior application Is assigned to yinT. 17, 1972. Assistant Commissioner. 

10. n The power of attorney in the prior application Is to ' [§97 o.G. 762] 

(name. reg. No., and address) 

a. n The power appears In the original papers of (^g) Evidence of Patentability or Priority 

the prior application. fi? rPR Part 11 

b. n Since the powef does not appear In the original io< «.riv 

papers, a copy of the power In the prior ap- Proposed Special Statement in Affidavit or Declaration When 

plication Is enclosed. Reiving Tpon Facts, i)ata. Test Results or Other Evidence 

c. □ Recognize as associate attorney and address all ^ ^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^ authority con- 

future communications to ^^^^^^ .^ ^^^^^^^ ^ ^^ ^^^ ^^^ ^^ j^,y jg jg^j (66 Stat. 793: 

35 U.S.C. 6) the Patent OflSce proposes to amend Title 37, 

(name, reg. No., and address) ^^^^ ^f Federal Regulations, by adding a new 5 1-69. 

All persons are invited to present their views, objections, 

(Signature) recommendations, or suggestions In connection with the pro- 

[-1 Inventor(s) posed new section, to the Commissioner of Patents, Washlng- 

n Assignee of Complete Interest ton. B.C. 20221. on or before June 27. 1972, on which date a 

n Attorney or agent of Record In prior hearing will be held at 9 a.m. In Room 8C06, Building 2, Crys- 

application tal Plaza, 2011 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington. Va. 

Effective date These amendments shall become effective on 22202. Ail persons wishing to be heard orally at the hearing 

September 1 1971 and will apply to applications filed after are requested to notify the Commissioner of Patents of their 

that date ' ' Intended appearance. Any written comments or suggestions 

WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER. Jr., may be Inspected by any person upon written request a rea- 

Commitsioner of Patents. sonable time after the closing date for subrhlttlng comments. 

ADoroved • June 29 1971 - N>w § 1-69 seeks to guard against the omission from facts, 

^^ ' ' data, test results, or other evidence presented in connection 

James H, Wakelin, Jr., * ^,^^ patentability or priority of Invention, of known evidence 

Assistant Secretary for which Is Inconsistent with that presented or which would 

Science and Technology. convey a different Impression. The purpose Is to insure presen- 

IFR Doc 71-9484 Filed 7-2-71 ; 8 : 51 am] tatlon to the Patent Office of the evidence needed to make an 

[FR Uoc. 9484 i<iiea informed decision on patentability or priority of invention. 

Published in se F.R. It689 ; JulyS,19Tl j^^ section thus requires a verified statement that no such 

[889 O.G 31 Inconsistent evidence Is known to the person making the state- 

ment, if such Is the fact. 

~^^^^~~ The text of the proposed new 5 1 69 is as follows : 

(117) Abbreviated First Action Trial Program §169 Special statement in affidavit or declaration irhen 

Requests for Comment, " reiying upon facts, data, test results, or other evidence. 

The Abbreviated First Action Program, announced In the (a) An affidavit or ^^^\]'l''ZZVlZ'6 Z ZZTnTZ 

OFFICIAL GAzrrTE of February 2, 1971 (883 O.G. 2), using of an l^f'^'''\^''';'''\''fj''^^^^^^^^ 

form PO-1142 has been In operation for over nine months, patentab.ll ty or priority "^J;;^^"".^";^^; ^a^Mt o/de^^^ 

considerable experience with the use of this form should now ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ Z:nT^LZMc. 

be available throughout the patent profession It Is recog- laration stares u. r e affidavit or declara- 

nlzed that though the use of this form may not be an ideal ;;;---J-^-' /.'^/^V;" ,;", ""^C different from 

form of communication, the Increased burdens on the examlna- tlon or wnicn v^ou (i '^^ *" declaration 

tlon and processing of patent applications have neces.uated ^^f^^^^J^l^^^^^^^^^^ to establish 

the development of more efficient methods of expediting the J^^^\^\;i„';;:'^VTH;ron representations as to facts, data, or 

pro.^ecutlon. • .v *k test results "set forth In the specification, such representations 

Comments, criticisms, and suggestions concerning the Ab- ^^^ '^ ,„„,idered for that purpose only if applicant files an 

brevlated First Action Program are invited. It s requested -^ J^ declaration attesting as to the truth of the repre- 

that the opinions expressed be made In the light of current ^^ ^„,, a^-erting that i.<. facts, data, or test results are 

conditions under which the Office must operate and be based . • ^^^ ^^^^.^^ ^^^ inconsistent with those sot forth In 

on actual experience with the program. In order to adequately specification or which would tend to give an Impression 

determine the quality and value of this program all views, both . '. ^^'^^ ^{^^^ conveyed by the specification, 
favorable and unfavorable, are earnestly solicited. Any critical 

comments should be supported wherever practical by refer- Dated : April 28, 1972. 

ence to specific cases. ROBERT GOTTSCH.^LK 

Letters written In response to this request should be sent _ Commtsstoner of Patents. 

as soon as possible to the Commissioner of Patents, Washing- Approved : May 1, 1972. 

ton, D.C. 20231, Attn: Assistant Commissioner R. A. Wahl. James H. Wakelin. Jr , 

„^., .,,^T, .Assistant Secretary for 

FRANK H. BRONAUGH, ,^^.^^^ „„^ Technology. 
Nov 10 1971. Deputy Assistant Commissioner. 

' [FR Doc. 72-6925 Filed 5-5-72: 8:49a.m.l 

f RQ^ O (^ 1 1 

Published in S7 F.R. 9225, May 6. 1972 

-^■"^^"^ [899 O.G. 21 
(118) .\bbreviated First Action Program 

The Abbreviated First Action Program using Form PO-1142 

announced In the Official Gazette of February 2, 1971 (883 (12O) Status of Rule 69 Proposal 

O.G, 2) has been reviewed In the light of comments received ^-i^-h 

from examiners, attorneys, and other members of the public. TMi notice Is In response to numerous Inquiries '^^'J^ 

pursuant to the notice of November 10. 1971 (893 O.G. 1). by the Pat.nt Office relaUve to the status of the proposal. 



36 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



published at 37 F.R. 9225 on May 6. 1972 and at 899 O.G. 2 
on June 6. 1972, to add a new section 1.69 to Title 37. Code 
of Federal Regulations. 

All of the many written and oral comments received have 
been analyzed and are currently being studied. The analysis 
Indicates that comments In favor of and against the principle 
of the rule were about evenly divided. Many comments ex- 
pressed reservations concerning the language used. The "In- 
consistency" and "tend to give an Impression" clauses drew 
the most criticism. The first clause was viewed -as being 
too absolute, forcing the affiant or declarant to abdicate 
reasonable judgment concerning validity of Seemingly Incon- 
sistent or maverick test results. The second clause was viewed 
as being too subjective or vague which would result In second 
guessing later. The additional burden on both applicants and 
examiners was also advanced as reason to change the pro- 
posed language. 

In summary, the proposal Is still under study with the view 
of developing a satisfactory way to accomplish the Intent 

of the proposed rule. 

S. WM. COCHRAN. 

Nov. 22. 1972. - Soltcitor. 

[905 O.G. 4481 



INTERVIEWS 

Interview I'ractite 



(121) 



AMENDMENTS 

AMENDMENTS— B.\SIS IN ORIGINAL DISCLOSURE 

Manual of Patent Examining rROCEOiRE 



When an amendment Is filed In response to an objection or 
rejection based on incomplete disclosure, a study of the entire 
application is often necessary to determine whether or not 
"new matter" is involved. In the interest of expeditious 
prosecution, Examiners are directed, whenever such an objec- 
tion or rejection is made, to call attention to Rule 111(c). 
Applicant should specifically point out the support for any 
amendments made to the disclosure. 



Aug. 13, 1965. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Assistant Commissioner. 



[818 CO. 4] 



(124) 

To a>^Mst In earlv and equitable conclusion of examination 
of applications, the use of Interviews In person or by tele 
phone is enrour.iged. subject to the following guidelines 

Interviews with Ex.imlners. whether In person or by tele- 
phone, shall be governed in general by the provisions of Ru e 
n,-? \ request for iin interview, whether made orally or In 
writing before the first Ofiiee action Is untimely and will not 
be acknowledged If written, or granted If oral; Rule l^^(a) 

If upon examination or re exi.n.ination. It Is found that 
minor changes could be made to place the application in con- 
.Ution for allowance, the attorney or pro se inventor should 
1,0 «o notified l)v telephone. This practice should he followed 
whether or not ther,c has been a specific request for Interview 
or for such notification. 

Where an Interview is arranged, both the Examiner and the 
attorney should bo familiar with the is.sues In the application 
before starting the conference. It Is the responsibility of 
both parties to the interview to see that it Is not extended 
beyond a reasonable time, usually not longer than thirty 
minutes. The PrlmfTry Examiner personally responsible for 
the final disposition of the application .should be notlfie<l of 
the results of the Interview at Its t-oncluslon. 

Interviews in person or by telephone are to he encouraged 
after the first Office action on the merits. In addition to 
interviews initiated by applicant, the Examiner may Initiate 
Interviews where he believes It would bo productive. Tills 
practice may result in the filing of a first response that will 
so effectively advance the prosecution to permit disposing of 
the case in a bare minimuni number of actions. The telephone 
procedure .set forth In part 4 of Optimum Examining Proce- 
dure Memorandum #3. .SOI O.G. 267. requiring a call by the 
Examiner, if requested by applicant, before taking final action 
has been found not satisfactory and will no lon-'or be followed. 
An Interview may be granted after final rejection : however, 
except In rare Instances, only one such Interview should be 

granted. 

An interview should not be requested or approved, except 
In very unusual circumstances, after filing of a Brief on 
appeal or after an application has been passed to Issue by the 
Primary Examiner. 

Interviews are permissible any working day of the week 
except on overtime Saturdays. 



( 122) 



Examiner's Amendment Practice 



(125) 



♦ The present practice in making Examiner's Amendments g^pj j^j ^954 
when passing an application to issue Is modified to permit 
the amendment or cancellation of claims where these have 
been authorized by applicant (or his representative) In a 
telephone or personal interview. The Examiner's Amend- 
ment should include a statement indicating that the changes 
were authorized, the date and type (personal or telephone) 
of Interview, and with whom It was had. 

The current policy prohibiting changes in the drawing 
and/or description of an application Is maintained with the 
exceptions noted in MPEP Section 1302.04. 

The new procedure resulted from an employee's suggestion. 



RICH.\RD A. WAHL. 

Acting Superintendent. 
Patent Examining Corps. 



[807 O.G. 307] 



Telephone Interviews 



.May 11, 1966. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Assistant Commissioner. 



[827 O.G. 2] 



(123) Brackets and Rule 121 — Amendment of 

Claims 

In view of the number of Inquiries requesting an Interpre- 
tation of the word "brackets" appearing In amended Rule 121 
concerned with the amendment of claims, it Is thought that 
clarification Is desirable. 

The term brackets [ ] as set forth in the amendment to 
Rule 121 and first announced in 843 O.G. 373 does not en- 
compass and is to be distinguished from parentheses ( ). 
Therefore, any amendment using parentheses to Indicate can- 
celled matter In a claim rewritten undeii Rule 121(b) may be 
held non-responsive in accordance with Rule 121(c). 



Present Office policy places great emphasis on telephone 
Interviews initiated by the Examiner. Eor this reason. It Is 
no longer deemed necessary for an attorney to request a tele- 
phone interview as specified In the old Optimum Examining 
Procedure memos. Examiners are no longer required to note 
or .acknowledge requests for telephone calls or state rea.^ons 
why such proposed telephone Interviews would not be con- 
sidered effective to advance prosecution. However. It Is still 
desirable for an attorney to call the Examiner If the attorney 
feels the call will be beneficial to advance prosecution of the 

RICHARD .\. WAHL. 
Oct 11 1967. Assistant Commissioner. 

[846 O.G. 1022] 



Jan. 15, 19G8. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
.Assistant Commissioner. 



[847 O.G. 331] 



JOINDER 

(126) Telephone Practice in Restriction and 
Election of Species Situations 

If an examiner determines that a requirement for restric- 
tion should be made In an application, he should formulate 
a draft of such restriction requirement Including, If any, the 
grounds of rejection of Unking or generic claims. Thereupon 
he should telephone the attorney of record and ask if he will 
make an oral election, with or" without traverse If desired^ 
after the attorney has had time to consider the restriction 
requirement. The examiner should arrange for a ''f^""^ tele- 
phone call within a reasonable time, generally within three 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



37 



working days. If the attorney objects to making an oral elec- 
tion or falls to respond, the usual restriction letter will be 
mailed, and this letter should NOT contain any reference to 
the unsuccessful tele|)hone call. 

When an oral election is made, the examiner will then pro- 
ceed to Incorporate Into his letter a formal restriction require 
ment Including the date of the election, the attorneys name, 
and a complete record of the telephone interview, followed 
by a complete action on the elected claims Including Unking 
or generic claims If present. 

If on examination the examiner fin*; the elected claims to 
be allowable and no traverse was made, the letter should be 
written on POL 37 (Examiner's Amendment) and should 
include cancellation of the non-elected claims, a statement 
that the pro.^n-utlon is closed and that a notice of allowance 
will he sent In due course. Correction of formal matters in 
the above noted situation which cannot be handled by a tele- 
phone eall and thus requires action by the applicant should 
be handled under the /.J- parte ()»rti//c iiractice, using POL- 
00; these would usually be drawing corrections or the like 
re(|uirlng payment of charges. 

Should the elex-ted claims he found allowable in the first 
action, anil an or.-l traverse was noted, the examiner should 
include In his action a statement under Section 821.01. 
M.P.E.P.. making the restriction final and giving applicant 
thirty (fays (Rule 136) to either cancel the non elected claims 
or take other appropriate action. Failure to take action will 
lie treated as an authorization to cancel the non-elected claims 
by an Examiner's Amendment and pass the case to Issue. 
Prosecution of this appll<atlon is otherwise closed. 

In either situation (traverse or no traver.se). caution should 
le exerclse<l to determine If any of the allowed claims are 
linking or generic before cancelling the non-elected claims. 

Where the respective inventions are located in different 
groups the reciiiirenient for restriction should he made only 
after consultation with and approval by all groups involved. 
If an oral election would cause the application to be examined 
in another group, the initiating gnmp should transfer the 
application with ;i signed memorandum of the restriction 
requirement and a recoil of the interview. The receiving 
group will incoriiorato the substance of this memorandum in 
its official letter as indicated above. Differences as to restric- 
tion should be settled by the existing chain of command, e.g. 
Supervisory Primary Examiner or .Manager. 

This practice is limited to use by examiners who have at 
least negotiation authority. <'>ther exanyners must have the 
prior approval of their Supervisory Primary Examiner. 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 
Assistant Commissioner. 

[824 O.G. 408] 1 



(128) 



Election of Species 



Effective June 1, 1907, the following practice will be insti- 
tuted on a trial basis for 6 months. 

In cases involving Markush claims or generic claims of the 
formula tvpo including such a number and diversity of mem- 
bers as to* require an unduly extensive and burdensome search 
for the embodiments encompassed, the Examiner may require 
election of species without a search on the merits (Rule 10a). 

The election requirement may be made in the same manner 
as that described in the Change Notice 12-6 of Feb. 28. 1967, 
with a 30 dav shortened statutory period which will not be an 
".action on the merits" for the purpose of second action final 
program If a telephone requirement, made by the Examiner, 
is complied with the first written action will be a complete 
action on the merits and the usual 3 months shortened statu- 
torv period will he set. 

\s pointed out in Change^Notlce 12-6, the use of the tele- 
phone to make an initial requirement will be continued and Is 

"'""""""'• EDWARD J. BRENNER. 

,, , in, — Commissioner. 

Mav 4. I'Jtji. 

[838 O.G. 12231 



(120) 



N0N-ELECTEI> Ct-MMS 



In the Interest of expediting the prosecution of pending 
applications, the following change in procedure is made. When 
preparing a final action In an application where there has 
been a traversal of a requirement for restriction or election 
of species the Examiner should indicate in his action that a 
complete response must include cancellation of the non-elected 
claims or other appropriate action (Rule H4). 

In the above situations where a response to the final action 
Ins otherwise placed the application in condition for allow- 
ance the failure to lake appropriate action with respect to 
the non-elected claims will be construed as authorization to 
cancel these claims by Examiner's Amendment and pass the 
case to issue after the expiration of the statutory period. 



Mav 24. 1008. 



RICHARD A. WAHL. 
A.'ssisfanf Commissioner. 



[851 O.G. 893] 



(127) 



Restriction and Election Practice 



i;ffectlve April 1. the practice and procedure In cases in- 
volving a requirement for restriction or election Is changed 
as indicated below. 

Under the new practice, whenever a written or telephoned 
requirement is made in a case which includes claims con- 
sl.lered by the Examiner to be generic or linking, it will not 
include any rejection of these claims. The Examiner should 
specify which claims are considered to he generic or linking. 

Aliiiough no art will be cited where linking claims are 
present, a search should be made and art cited where generic 
claims are involved. In the latter situation the generic claims 
will not he rejected but merely indicated as not allowable In 
view of the cited art (Rule IK!). 

A 30 ilay shortened statutory period will be set for re- 
sponse to a written requirement. Such action will not be an 
"action on the merits" for the purpose of the second action 
final program. In either situation, with linking or generic 
claims, a response, to he complete, need only include a proper 
election. 

The only exception to the above' practice will be in the case 

where the Examiner gives a complete action on the merits of 

all the claims in addition to the requirement for restriction. 

The use of the telephone to make an Initial requirement will 

be continued and Is encouraged. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Feb.* 28, 1967. .issistant Commissioner. 

[837 O.G. 668] 



(130) CHANGE or Inventors 

Where a person Is added or removed as an inventor during 
the prosecution of an application before the I^f ^"^ Ofee' 
problems may occur upon claiming U.S. priority in a oreign 
filed case One such problem results from the apparent conflict 
hetv-^n the inventor(s) named in the foreign »PP '-;^^r,"°J 
the inventor(s) shown on the priority papers obtained from 
he US Patent Office. Another problem may occur where 
there is no conflict between the inventors in the foreign appll- 

;,ion as filed and the priority papers but a change of ^"^ 
ventors has been made In the U.S. application and a similar 
change Is to be made In the foreign application. 

In order to overcome the possibility of these P'^^blem ans^ 
, in thP future Examiners should acknowledge any addition 

Mi^ent-rd'e in accordance with the practice under Rule 
4r. ".eluding the following statement in the next communica- 
tion to the applicant or his attorney : ^^ ^^^ ^^^ 

made in the case where an inventor Is removed from those 
included in the application as filed. 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 
,„ ,oPe Assistant Commissioner. 

June 10, 19o8. 

[852 O.G. 509] 



(lU) restriction between inventions 



38 

longer automatically be permitted to serve as a basis for join- 
ing claimed Inventions which otherwise would be properly the 
subject of a restriction requirement. In other words, appli- 
cant win be required to elect one of the claimed inventions 
which are the subject of a proper restriction requirement. 
Combination claims, formerly considered llnlclng claims 
should be grouped as a separate invention. Rejoinder of the 
divided inventions, should any combination claim be allowed, 
however, also will no longer automatically be permitted. The 
statutory criteria for distinctness will be satisfied if the sub- 
combinations and/or combinations involved are shown to be 
separately classified, or to have acquired a separate status in 
the art, or to involve different fields of search. 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



> 



January 2, 1973 



June 20, 1968. 



RICHARD A. WAHL. 
Assistant Commissioner. 



(132) 



[852 O.G. 5091 



Election of Species 



The practice set forth In the Notice of May 4. 1967 (838 
O G 1'"'3) is made permanent and modified to permit a re- 
quirement for election of species in cases involving multiple 
species whether or not generic claims are present or searched 
prior to the election. Also, If no claims to species are pre- 
sented but the generic claim is of the burdensome type re- 
ferred to in the Notice, a requirement for election of species 
prior to search of the generic claims should be made. 

\s in the original Notice, if an election Is made pursuan 
to a telephone requirement, the action should include a full 
and complete action on the elected species as well as on any 
generic claims that might be present. If generic claims are 
found allowable, no change in the practice currently m effect 

Is contemplated. „, . r^r 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
\ug 19 1968. Assistant Commissioner. 

[854 O.G. 2871 



(133) TITLE 37— PATENT.^, TRADEMARKS. AND 

COPYRIGHTS 

CH.\PTER 1 — P.^TENT OFFICE, DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE 

PAET 1— RDLES OF PRACTICE IN P.\TENT CASES 

PART 3 FORMS FOR PATENT CASES 

Conflicting Claims 
These rule changes are Intended to provide: (1) a basis 
for requiring a determination of priority without an Inter- 
ference by the common owner of a plurality of applications, or 
patent and applications, containing conflicting claims, and 
(2) a basis for requiring Inclusion of a common ownership 
clause in all terminal disclaimers filed to obviate a double 
patenting rejection. 

The proposal to amend Title 37, Code of Federal Regula- 
tions by revising {| 1.78 and 1.321 and by adding a new 
I 3.53 was published In the December 31, 1970. issue of the 
Federal Register (35 F.R. 20011). 

All interested persons were given an opportunity to parttcl- : 
pate in the rule nialcing process by submission of comments in 
writing and In person at an oral hearing held on February 19. 
1971. Changes have been made In the text of the original pro- 
posal as a result of these comments. 

In consideration of the comments received and pursuant to 
the authority contained in section 6 of the Act of July 10. 
1952 (66 Stat. 793; 35 U.S.C. 6). Parts 1 and 3 of Title 37, 
Code of Federal Regulations, are hereby amended as follows : 

1. In i 1.78, paragraph (b) has been revised and paragraph 
(c) has been added to read ai follows : 
I 1.78 Crott-references to tjther applications. 

• • • • • 

(b) Where two or more applications filed by the same appli- 
cant contain conflicting claims, elimination of such claims 
from all but one application may be required in the absence of 
good and sufficient reason for their retention .during pendency 
In more than one application. >w 



(c) Where two or more applications, or an application and 
a patent naming different inventors and owned by the samo 
party contain conflicting claims, the assignee may be called 
upon to state which named Inventor Is the prior inventor. In 
addition to making said statement, the assignee may also ex- 
plain why an interference should be declared or that no con 
fllct exists in fact. 

2. Section 1.321 is revised to read as follows : 

S 1.321 Statutory disclaimer. 

(a) A disclaimer under 35 U.S.C. 253 must identify the 
patent and the claim or claims which are disclaimed, and be 
signed by the person making the disclaimer, who shall state 
therein the extent of his interest in the patent. A disclaimer 
which Is not a disclaimer of a complete claim or claims may 
be refused recordation. A notice of the disclaimer is published 
In the OFFICIAL Gazette and attached to the printed copies 
of the specification. In lllte manner any patentee or applicant 
may disclaim or dedicate to the public the entire term, or any 
terminal part of the term, of the patent granted or to be 
granted. 

(b) A terminal disclaimer, when filed in an application to 
obviate a double patenting rejection, must Include a provision 
that any patent granted on that application shall be enforce- 
able only for and during such period that said patent is com- 
monly owned with the application or patent which formed tlie 
basis for the rejection. See § 1.21 for fee. 

3. .\ new f 3.53 Is added, which reads as follows : 
i 3.53 Terminal disclaimers in applications. 
To the Commissioner of Patents : 

Your petitioner. '• residing at 

in the county of 

and'state' of represents, that he is (here 

state exact Interest of the disclaimant and. If he is an as- 
signee, set out the libir and page or reel and frame where the 

assignment is recorded) of application Serial No. 

filed on the day of 19--- for 

Your petitioner hereby disclaims 

jthe terminal part of any patent granted on the above-identified 
"application, which would extend beyond the explcatlon date 

•of Patent No. and hereby agrees that any patent 

so granted on the above-Identified application shall be enforce 
able only for and during such period that the legal title to sai<i 
patent shall be the same as the legal title to I'nlted States 

Patent No. this agreement to run with any patent 

granted on the above identified apllcatlon and to be binding 
upon the grantee. Its successors or assigns. 

Effective date. This revision shall become effective on April 

30. 1971. 

, WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, Jr., 

^ Commissioner of Patents. 

Approved : April 12, 1971. 
James H. Wakelin, Jr., 
Assi.itant Secretary for 
Science and Technology. 



[FR Doc. 71-5418; Filed 4-10-71; 8:51 a.m.] 

Published in 36 F.R. lilt; Apr. 17, i97i 

[886 O.G. 424) 



(134) 



Restriction Practice 

[37 CFR Part 1] 

Votice of Proposed Rule Making 



N.tlce li hereby given that, pursuant to the authority con- 
tained in section 6 of the Act of July 19, 1952 (66 Stat. 793 ; 
35 U.S.C. 6). as amended October 5, 1971. Public Law 92- 
132 85 Stat. 364, the PatHit Office proposes to amend Title 
37 of the Code of Federal Regulations by revising |i 1.141. 
1 142. 1.144, 1.145, and 1.146. 

AH persons are Invited to present their views objections, 
recommendations or suggestion, in connection wUh the pro- 
posed changes to the Commissioner of Patents. Washington^ 
DC 20231 on or before December 12, 1972. on which date a 
hearing will be held at 9 :30 a.m. In Room 11 C 24, Building 
3 2021 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington. Va. AH P^rsoas 
wishing to be heard orally at the hearing are requested to no- 
tify the Commissioner of Patents of their intended appearance. 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



39 



Any written comments or suggestions may be inspected by 
any person, upon written request, a reasonable time after 
the closing date for submitting comments. 

The proposed changes have three main purposes, (1) to 
clarify when a requirement for restriction may properly be 
made by an examiner, (2) to remove the limitation of five 
species If there Is an allowable generic claim in the case, 
and (3) to provide a basis In the rules for requiring restric- 
tion to a single invention when two or more patentably dif- 
ferent Inventions are claimed In a single Markush-type claim. 
See "Ex parte Markush." 1925 CD. 126 (Comm'r. Pat. 1924). 
The expression "patentably different" emphasizes the im- 
portance of requiring restriction between two or more Inven- 
tions only where there are unobvious differences between 
those inventions and separate patents can properly be granted 
to each invention. Otherwise due to the double patenting 
prohibition of 35 U.S.C. 121. multiple patents would be granted 
on a single invention. The proposed changes make it clear 
that a requirement for restriction is proper only when two 
or more patentably different inventions are claimed in one 
application. ^ _ , ,. ,., 

The practice under present f I 1.141 and 1.146 of Hmitlng 
an application to five species, even though a generic claim 
has been allowed, has caused some problems since 1953 when 
the present language of section 121 of the patent statute 
became effective. Section 121 prohibits the use of a patent 
as a reference In a subsequent divisional application filed as 
the result of a requirement for restriction In the application 
on which such a patent Is based. Present !§ 1.141 and 1.146 
indicate that nn application may be limited to five species 
even though nn allowable generic claim appears therein. If 
an application is so limited to five species, the other species 
can be speclficallv protected only if refiled In a divisional ap- 
plication. Such applications may be filed even though the 
species are not patentably different from each other. Since 
the flr'^t patent cannot be used as a reference against the 
second application, limiting the number of species in the first 
patent would result in a second patent Issuing on species which 
are not patentably different from the species In the first patent. 
The proposed changes would avoid this problem by removing 
from the rules the language limiting the claims in one appU- 
cation to five species. 

The Markush-type claim practice which allows enumeration 
In a claim of a plurality of alternatively usable substances 
or members, has been sanctioned to permit the inclusion of 
such members in a claim when a generic term covering them 
is not avaHable. Over the years, this form of claim has been 
used, for example, in claiming compounds having a large 
variety of substituent groups, and as a result, Markush-type 
claims are presented which are each directed to a plurality of 
Independent and distinct inventions. 

More than one invention is present In a Markush-type claim 
If the alternatively usable members of the Markush group are 
so unrelated and diverse that a prior art reference which shows 
one of the members and otherwise anticipates the claim could 
not ordinarily be used to reject under 35 U.S.C. 103 a claim 
reciting another of the members. In such circumstances, the 
claim is considered to be an improper Markush-type claim and 
not a generic claim. Such a claim imposes an undue burden on 
the Patent Ofl[ice. particularly with respect to the search 
which would have to be made for proper examination. 

The proposed changes expressly sanctioned the withdrawal 
of Improper Markush-type claims. It should be noted that the 
"withdrawal" of such improper Markush-type claims would 
provide the applicant with the benefits of the double patenting 
prohibition of 35 U S.C. 121. This benefit would not be avail- 
able If such Improper Markush-type claims were rejected. 

The proposed changes will permit examiners to expedite 
prosecution and make more meaningful searches to determine 
whether the disclosed and claimed Inventions are novel and 

patentable. 

The text of the proposed revised rules is as follows : 

I 1.141 Different inventions in one application. 

An application claiming two or more Independent and dis- 
tinct, patentably different inventions may be required to be 
restricted to one of the inventions. Inventions are patentably 
different when one is not obvious in view of the other, and 
they may properly appear in separate patents. 



I 1.142 Requirement for restriction heticeen inventions. 
(a) If two or more Independent and distinct^ patentably 



different Inventions are claimed In a single application and the 
examiner deems that restriction Is appropriate, he may re- 
quire the applicant to elect for prosecution In the application 
a single Invention, to which his claims shaU be restricted. 
Such a requirement may be made at any time before final ac- 
tion In the case, at the discretion of the examiner. 

(b) In an application containing a claim which enumerates 
alternatlvelv usable substances or members which are so un- 
related that the claim Is. In fact, directed to Independent and 
distinct, patentably different inventions, the examiner may 
require the applicant to elect the Invention to which his 
c\tAms shall be restricted. After election by applicant, such 
nn improper claim by enumeration may be withdrawn by the 
examiner from further examination because more than one 
invention is being claimed (35 U.S.C. 121). 

(c) Claims not restricted to the elected Invention, if not 
canceled, are nevertheless withdrawn from further considera- 
tion by the examiner by the election, subject, however, to re- 
instatement In the event the requirement for restriction Is 

"withdrawn or overruled pursuant to a petition under { 1144. 

I 1.144 Petition from requirement for restriction. 

Within 2 months after the examiner's adverse reply to a 
request for reconsideration of a requirement for restriction, 
the applicant mav petition the Commissioner to review the 
requirement. A petition will not be considered If reconsidera- 
tion of the requirement was not requested. (See | 1.181.) 
I 1.145 Subsequent presentation of claims for different 
invention. 

If after an examiner's action on an application, the appli- 
cant presents a claim or claims therein directed to a patent- 
ably different Invention, distinct from and independent of the 
Invention prevlouslv claimed, the examiner may require the 
applicant to restrict the claims to the invention previously 
claimed if the amendment is entered, subject to reconsidera- 
tion and review as provided in J| 1.143 and 1.144. 

I 1.146 Election of species. 

In an application containing a generic claim and claims 
directed to a plurality of Independent and distinct, patentably 
different species embraced thereby, the examiner may re- 
quire the applicant to elect that species of his invention to 
which his claims shall be restricted if no generic claim is 
finallv held allowable. If a generic claim is later found allow- 
able "the application may also contain claims to species in 
addition to the one elected, provided that such additional 
species claims are either written to be dependent from a ge- 
neric claim (§ 1.75 (c)) or to otherwise Include aU the limi- 
tations of the generic claim. 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 
Acting Commissioner of Patents. 

Approved : October 13. 1972. 

Richard O. Simpson, 

Acting Assistant Secretary 
for Science and Technology. 
[FR Doc. 72-17925 FUed^l 0-19-72 ; 8 : 47 am] 
Pub. in 37 F.R. 22625. Ocf. 20. 1972 
[905 O.c;. 254] 



(135) Proposed amendment of Rules on Restric- 
tion Practice in I'.vtent Cases 

On October 20 1972. the Patent Office published a notice 
of proposed rule making on restriction practice 1° P^^°t 
cases (37 F.R. 22625). The notice proposed to amend Title 
37 of the Code of Federal Regulations by revising || 1141 
1 142 1 144 1 145, and 1.146. In the notice, it was stated 
that a hearing would be held at 9 : 30 a.m. on J^^^^^ct 12 
1972. in Room 11 C 24, Building 3. 2021 Jefferson. Davis 
Highwav, Arlington, Virginia. 

The Patent Office has received requests from interested per- 
sons that the hearing be postponed to a later date to allow 
ample opportunity to consider the proposed amendments. The 
hearing, accordingly, will not be held at the time orlglna ly 
set but ha. been rescheduled for 2 : 30 p.m. on January 16, 



40 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



Highway. ^ Arlington, Virginia W ten ^ ■ J ^^ ^^,^. .,„., ,„rin. this 



Highway, Ariingiou, yiiBi"«" . 

recommemlatlons or suggestions will be considered if M.b- 
mitted on or before the date of the hearing. 

The text of the notice as originally published is reproduced 

^^^°^- ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 

NOT. 14. 19T2. Commissioner of Patent,. 

[905 0.(;. 254] 



•^(■^rTJm;";;; additional .....nth no appl.-ant or attor- 
ney-initiated Intorviow will b.« p.-rm.tted. 



Aug. 7, 1907. 



KDWAUn J. URKNNKR. 

Commissioner. 

[841 O.O. 1411] 



TIME FOR RESPONSE 

KxTF.NsioN OF Time 



(136) 

It 18 ordinarily desirable that notice of the action taken 
by the Patent Office on requests for extension of time be 
cLmunfcated to the persons making the -..uests as soon 
as is reasonably possible. In order to Improve ^^^^^^^^f^' 
service to patent and trademark applicants In this regard, 
he following procedure Is being Instituted effective immedi- 
I?ely If a request for extension of time is filed In duplicate 
and accompanied by a stamped return-addressed envelope 
the Office Will indicate the action taken on tlje dnphcate and 
return it promptly In the envelope. Utilization of this pro- 
cedure is optional on the part of applicant. 

EDWARD J. EfRENNER, 
Aug. 3. 1966. Commissioner of Patents 

[829 O.G. 1307] , 



(130) FiNAi. UK..KCTIOX Time kor Uksponse 

in clarification of the Notice of ^^^'•^;';,^!'^^' 
in the Official Gazette of August 20. 19..7 (S41 « .«.. 1411). 
thP fiMnr<f a timely rcspons.. aft.-r a In.al rej.-.-tlon is con^ 
:?rued a^ incUulin; a re.p.est for a one month extension of 

l^ih sh"f be lestrlcted to those whi.l. ,>n»,. far. place 
the application In condition for allowance. 

UICHARD A. W.Mll- 



Sept. 26, 19G8. 



.Assistant Commissioner. 



1855 O.G. 11091 



(137) 



Extension*!. OF Time 



Effective Immediately, a new liberal policy for Interprets^ 
tion and application of Rule 13G(b) will apply with respe t 
to first requests for a one-month extension of time for repb 
to Office actions where a shortened statutory P">od for re- 
sponse has been set. Any request under «">;^ f ''J^^Jj': 
extension of time must state a reason In support thereof 
under the above policy the application of the rule ^.U entail 
onlv ft limited evaluation of the stated reason. 

™s Xrallty will not apply to (1) any requests for more 
thJn a one month extension, and (2) second and subsequent 
requests for extension of time. 

In order to provide prompt notification of the action aken 
on extension requests, the request may be filed in duPUca*^' 
accompanied by a stamped return-addressed envelope (includ- 
ing a ZIP code), as announced In the Official Gazette of. 
August 3, 1966. 829 O.G. 1307). 

It is expected that requests for extension of time will -con 
tmue to be made only when a need exists and will not be^ 
come a standard operating procedure. Routine use of this 
practice may necessitate abandoning the new policy and a 
return to a less liberal interpretation of Rule 136(b). 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 
Assistant Commissioner. 



(140) Office A.tions Timei.v Kesponsk 

The Patent Office has been receiving an excessively large 

J^Lot petitions to revive based Pr;-"»J,Xacln?M ny 
of amendments and other responses to official actions, .^uu, 
of Tese petitions Indicate that the late filing was due to 
unusual Tan delays; however, the records generally show 
that the filing was only two or three days late^ 

In order to alleviate, for applicants and the omce, tne 
problemsLd expenditures of time and effort occasioned by 
abandonments and petitions to revive, »* !« -^^Jted tha 
resnonses to official action be mailed to the Patent Office at 
east one and preferably two, week(s) prior to the explra^ 
t on of he period within which a response Is -^l^^^rl- ™; 
Suggestion is made In the Interest of Improving efficiency, 
thereby providing better service to the public. 

WILLIAM FELDMAN. 

A,,., 2-5 1972 Deputy Assistant Commissioner 

Apg. 25, lW7-i. . *- ^^^ Patent Examining. 



(141) 



[902 O.G. 1172] 



APPEALS 

Appeal Ukiefs 



Jan. 26, 1967. 



[835 O.G. 716] 



(138) KiN.xL Rejection— T^ME fo^ Response 

Effective Sept. 1, 1967, the filing of a timely response to a 
final rejection having a shortened statutory period for re- 
sponse will operate to extend the period for appeal or filing 
of a containing case an additional month, but in no ease to 
exceed six months from the date of the final action. 

An object of this practice is to obviate the necessity for 
appeal or filing a continuing case merely to gain time to con- 
sider the Examiner's position in reply to an amendment timely 
filed after final rejection. ^„„„fo 

Present practice relating to the treatment of amendmen s 
after final rejection will continue to apply and failure to file 
a response during the three-month period will, as heretofore, 
result in abandonment of the application. In any case where 
this one-month extension applies and an amendment Is offi- 
cially received during this additional month, the amendment 
will not be entered or responded to unless It prima facxe places 
the application In condition for allowance (e.g. cancels all 



It appears that many appeal briefs are being filed which 

''"''. '''^Vnciudlng a concise explanation of the Invention 
Which 'siould refer to the drawing by reference char- 

»ct"8 ■ • •" EDWIN L. REYNOLDS, 

pirat Assistant Commissioner. 
Aug. d, iwoo. 

[817 O.G. 1241] 



Appeal Briefs 



be double spaced. eDWIN L. REYNOLDS, 

First Assistant Commissioner. 
Jan. 24, 1966. 

[823 O.G. 411] 



JANUARY 2, 1973 U. S. PATENT OFFICE 41 

(143) I-rscticeRe: Withdrawal of Final Re.tection rv The Item(s) checked below are appropriate : 

THE Examiner Aftee Notice of Appeal to the i. q An extension of time to respond to the final re- 

BOABD or APPEALS Jcction was granted on for 

. . II », „ month(s). 

Where Notice of Api)oal to the Board of Appeals has been 2 n A timely response to the Anal reJecUon has been 

filed and the Examiner withdraws the final rejection for • U ^^^^ ^^ provided in 841 O.G. 1411. 

allowance or further rejection, applicants are reminded that ^ ^^^ -^^^ ^^ 

this results In automatic removal of the appeal from the n Enclosed 

records of the Board of Appeals in that application. U ^^^ required (Fee paid In prior appeal.) 

Accordingly, a proper response to a subsequent final rejec- U "^^^^^^^^ ^^ Deposit Account No. • 

tion requires the filing of a new Notice of Appeal [without U ^^^^ .additional copy of this Notice is enclosed 

fee] and if this appoal is carried forward, the appropriate herewith.) 
fee on filing a brief In support of the second appeal is required. 

EDWIN L. REYNOLDS. Signature (Rule 191(b) ). 

•Mar. 29. 1967. First Assistant Commissioner. 

[837 O.G. 667] I'"II'III"I 

Post Office Address (to which 
,„ correspondence is to be sent). 

[849 O.G. 278 (Apr. 9. 1968)1 

(144) Rule 192- FILING or Appeal Brief 

Attention Is directed to the fact that the seasonable filing 

of an appeal brief is determined by Rule 192, Irrespective of ^^^g^ q^^j^ Hearings Under Rule 194 

whether the applicant or his attorney has received the appeal Effective September 1 1968, for a trial period of six 

acknowledgment with its reminder of the briefs due date. months new procedures will be initiated which will permit 

The above should be rcfiected In any docketing system for p^j^^^^^^ Examiners to present an oral argument before the 

, filing appeal briefs. „^„.,,, , ot-^w-nr r.c Board of Appeals In appeals where the applicant has been 

EDWIN L. RLYNOLDS. , , , ,. „ 

„ . . cranted an oral hearing. 

Aug. 4, 1967. First Assistant Commissioner. «- ^^^^^ ^^^ attorney or agent representing the appellant has 

[841 O G. 1412] made his presentation, the Examiner will be allowed fifteen 

minutes to reply as well as to present a statement which 

clearly sets forth his position with respect to the Issues and 

■^^— ~~~ rejections of record. Appellant may utilize any allotted time 

not used in the initial presentation for rebuttal. 

(145) New Appeal Procedure RICHARD A. WAHL. 

In the interest of facilitating and expediting the handling juiy 26, 1968. Assistant Commissioner. 

of appeals to the Board of Appeals of the Patent Office It concur : 

has been decided to institute a practice whereby the appllca- EDWIN L. REYNOLDS, 

tion file will ordinarily remain with the Examiner until the pirst Assistant Commissioner. 

Examiner's answer to the appeal is filed. It is therefore neces- [355 qq 827] 
sary to modify the appeal procedure, effective Immediately, 

as Indicated below. — ^^^^— ^— 

1. First Extension of Time To File Appeal Brief ^^^_^ abandonment of Applications Before 

To avoid delay in receiving notification of the granting Board of Appeals 

of a first extension under Rule 192. appellant should file ^stances of the Board of Appeals 

his request in duplicate. Where granted, the Board will J/^ ' '^Y'^'^j^io^ ^^ ^n application which had already 

stamp the action taken on both copies, promptly return- ;;;°^7^Jf^,\3'ntreamlined continuation, 

ing one copy to the addressee. recurrence of this situation, applicants should 

Further extensions must be sought from the Commla- ^^^^^^^^j^. ,^j^^^ ^^^ ^lerk of the Board in writing as soon 

sloner, as heretofore. ^^ ^j^^^." ^^^,^ positively decided to reflle or to abandon an 

■ 2 Notice of .Appeal application containing an appeal awaiting a decision. Failure 

,„..„„„ to exercise appropriate diligence in this matter may result 

• To expedite the processing of new appeals and to en- refusing an otherwise proper request to vacate 

sure their prompt acknowledgment, additional Informa- '"^j"^.^?"'' ' " u g 

tion will be necessary on the Notice of Appeal. Accord- i^eir uec . EDWIN L. REYNOLDS, 

ingly. Form 41 suggested in the Rules of U.S. Patent ^.^^^ Assistant Commissioner. 
Office Practice in Patent Cases. Is revised as shown below. 

Copies for duplication may be obtained from the re- [857 O.G. 1005 (Dec. 24, 1968)] 
ceptionist in Crystal Plaza and from the Correspondence 

and Mall Branch in the Main Commerce Building. The — 

use of this revised form Is solicited. 

All papers relating to appeals should Include the post (i48) Appeal Hearings 

office address of the person to whom correspondence Is ^^^ practice of permitting oral arguments by Primary 

to be directed. Examiners in appeals, announced for a trial period In the 

EDWIN L. REYNOLDS, official Gazette of Oct. 22. 1968 (855 O.G. 827), Is hereby 

First Assistant Commissioner. ^^^^ permanent. 

^ ., RICHARD A. WAHL, 

Revised Form 41 ^ . . _, ^„„„v..<----. 

Mar 27, 1969. Assistant Commissioner. 

notice or APPEAL FROM THE PRIMARY EXAMINER ConCUr : "^ 

TO THE BOARD OF APPEALS j; L REYNOLDS, 

In re application of: ^<'-" Assistant Commissioner. 

Serial No. : [861 O.G. 1011] 

For: 

Filed : ^^— ^— ^^ • 

Group Art Unit : 

To Commissioner of Patents • (149) Reply Briefs 

^'Applicant hereby appeals to the Board of Appeals from the Applicants should clearly and '^^f^'^'^'^^f^f^^ '°,f ^i' 

decision dated of the Primary Examiner reply briefs the new points of argument raised 1° "e » 

Anally rejectrng Claims amlner's answer" to which said reply briefs are directed. 



42 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



Rule 193(b) doei not permit general rebuttal of each state- 
ment made In the examiner! aniwer ; Conaequently a reply 
brief which is not restricted to answering "new points" may 
be refused consideration In ^oto. 



Apr. 15. 1»«». 



EDWIN L. REYNOLDS, 
Firtt Ai$i»tant Commi»$ioner. 



[862 0.0. 348] 



Appeals — Confidential Memoranda 



(150) 

The practice of presenting confidential memoranda to the 
Board of Appeals Is hereby terminated. All correspondence 
with the Board of Appeals, whether by the Examiner or the 
applicant will be on the record. No unpublished decisions 
which are unavailable to the general public by reason of 35 
U.S.C. 122 will be cited by the E.xaminer or the applicant 
except that either the Examiner or the applicant has the 
right to cite an unpublished decision In an application having 
common ownership with the application on appeal. 

WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, JR., 
July 28, 1970. CommisBioner of Patentt. 

! 

, [877 O.G. 733] 



Commissioner to appropriate Patent Office officials. All re^ 
quests for extensions must be filed prior to the expiration of 
the period sought to be extended. 

(b) On failure to file the brief, accompanied by the requi- 
site fee, within the time allowed, the appeal shall stand dis- 
missed. , 

Effective date. This amendment shall be effective Marcti 

30, 1971. , 

WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, JR., 

Commiationer of Patents. * 

Approved : March 25, 1971. 

Jaues H. Wakelin, Jr., 
Assistant Secretary for 
Science and Technology. 

[FB Doc. 71-4414; Filed 3-29-71 : 8:50 a.m.] 

Published in S6 F.R. 5850; Mar. SO, 1071 

[885 O.G. 044] 



(151) TITLE 37— PATENTS, TRADE>L\RKS, AND 

COPYRIGHTS 

CHAPTER 1— Patent Office, Department of Commerce 

PART 1 — RULES OF PRACTICES IN PATENT CASES 

Extensions of Time To File Appeal Briefs 
After the effective date of this rule change, the examining 
group clerical staffs will perform all processing and record- 
keeping relating to appeals to the Board of Appeals up to and 
Including the time when an examiner's supplemental answer 
to a reply brief Is mailed or the time for filing a reply brief 
has expired. At this time jurisdiction of an appealed applica- 
tion passes from the examiner to the Board of Appeals. 

Therefore, all Inquiries and papers concerning an applica- 
tion under appeal should be directed to the appropriate exam- 
ining group until the application Is In condition for considera- 
tion by the Board of Appeals. 

Papers filed in an appealed application under the Jurisdic- 
tion of the Board of Appeals, such as requests for reconsidera- 
tion or confirmation of an oral hearing date, should Include an 
expression In the heading such as "Before the Board of Ap- 
peals" so that it may be properly routed by the mallroom. 

The examining group appeal clerks are authorized to grant, 
upon the first request therefor, 1-month extensions of time 
to file the brief or reply brief. Any further extensions or any 
initial request for an extension of more than 1 month may be 
granted by the group directors. 

After the effective date, there will be no Patent Office 
acknowledgements of notices of appeals or briefs. 

There was published in the December 31, 1970, issue of the 
Federal Register (35 F.R. 20010) a proposal to revise { 1.192 
of Title 37, Code of Federal Regulations, to broaden the au- 
thority to grant extensions of time for filing appeal briefs. 

Interested persons were given the opportunity to partlci- 
pats in the rule making through submission of comments In 
writing, and at an oral hearing held on February 19, 1971. 

In consldtratloB of the foregoing and pursuant to the 
authority contained In section 6 of the Act of July 19, 1952 
(6« Stat. 793; 35 U.S.C. 6), { 1.192 of Title 37 of the Code 
of Federal Regulations Is hereby revised as follows : 

{ 1.192 Appellant's brief. 

(a) The appellant shall, within 2 months from the date of 
the appeal, or within the time allowed for response to the 
action appealed from. If such time is later, file a brief in trip- 
licate, accompanied by the requisite fee, of the authorities and 
arguments on which he will rely to maintain hl.s appeal, in- 
cluding a concise explanation of the Invention which should 
refer to the drawing by reference characters, and a copy of 
the claims involved, at the same time indicating if he desires 
an oral hearing. Upon a showing of sufficient cause, the Com- 
missioner may grant extensions of time for filing the brief. 
The determination of such requests may be delegated by the 



(152) Appeal Briefs Under Rile.s 192 and 193(1)) 

Appellants are reminded that their briefs in appealed cases 
must be responsive to every ground of rejection stated by the 
examiner. Including new grounds stated In his answer. 

Where an appellant falls to respond by way of brief or reply 
brief to any ground of rejection, and It appears that the fail- 
ure Is Inadvertent, appellant shall be notified that he Is al- 
lowed one month to correct the defect by filing a supplemental 
brief. Where this procedure has not been followed, the Board 
of Appeals should remand the application to the examiner 
for compliance. When the record clearly Indicates intentional 
failure to respond by brief to any ground of rejection, for 
example, by failure to file a supplemental brief within the 
one-month period allowed for that purpose, the examiner 
should Inform the Board of Appeals of this fact In his answer 
and merely specify the claims affected. 

Where the failure to respond by brief appears to be Inten 
tional, the Board of Appeals may dlsnilss the appeal as to the 
claims Involved. Oral argument at a hearing will not remedy 
such deficiency of a brief. 

This notice supersedes the notices of May 4, 1966, 826 
O.G. 1060. and of Oct. 20, 1966. 833 O.G. 1. 



Apr. 26. 1971. 



WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, Jr.. 

Commisaioner of Patents. 

[886 O.G. 4241 



(153) Examiner Testimony 

As stated in Section 1701 of the Manual of Patent Examin 
ing Procedure, patent examiners are forbidden to testify as 
patent experts or to express opinions, in testimony or other- 
wise, as to the Invalidity of any issued patent. Patent ex- 
aminers have. In connection with litigation Involving patent 
validity, been called to testify on factual matters. In those 
cases, the practice has been to permit the examiner to testify 
only upon the Issuance of a subpoena. 

Henceforth, patent examiners will be permitted to testify 
on deposition In patent suits, without the need for a subpoena, 
provided the following conditions are satisfied : 

1 The party proposing to take the testimony will state in 
writing that the questions to be asked of the examiner 
will be phrased to comply with the permissible scope of 
inquiry as outlined in the protective orders contained In 
the Court opinions In In re Mayexcsky. 162 USPQ 86, 8J 
and Shaffer Tool Works v. Joy Manufacturing Co.. 167 
USPQ 170 171 : "... the scope of .the oral depositions 
of the patent examiners Is hereby limited to matters of 
fact and must not go into hypothetical or speculative 
areas or the bases, reasons, mental processes, analyses, 
or conclusions of the patent examiners in acting upon 
the patent applications maturing Into the patent [In 
suit]." 167 USPQ 171. 

2 That m addition to complying with the requirements of 
' Rule 30 of the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure, the 

party taking the testimony will agree to give notice of 
the taking of the deposition of the patent examiner to 
the Solicitor, at least thirty days prior to the date on 
which the taking of the deposition Is desired. 



JANUARY 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



43 



3. That the party taking the deposition arrange with the 

Solicitor to notice the deposition at a place convenient 

to the Patent Office. 

If the party desiring ta take the testimony of the examiner 

does not agree to the conditions enumerated, the Patent 

Office will not permit the examiner to be deposed without a 

subpoena and compliance with the procedure set forth In 

Section 7.02, Department of Commerce Administrative Order 

205-12, June 29, 1967 as amended April 10. 1970. That 

section states : 

In any case where it is sought by subpoena, order or 
other compulsory process or other demand of a court 
or other authority (hereinafter referred to as a "de- 
mand") to require the production or disclosure of any 
record In the flies of the Department of Commerce or other 
Information acquired by an officer or employee of the 
Department as a part of the performance of his official 
duties or because of his official status, the matter shall 
be immediately referred for determination to the appro- 
priate official described in subsection 4.01 of this order. 
If such official has discretion with respect to disclosure 
and he determines that It would be improper to comply 
with the demand, or if he has no discretion with respect 
to disclosure, the matter shall be promptly referred to the 
Secretary of Commerce for final determination. Unless 
and until the Secretary determines that the records or 
information should be produced, the offlcor or employee 
who appears In answer to the demand shall Inform the 
court or other authority (o) that the section 7 of this 
order prohibits the officer or employee from producing or 
disclosing the records or other Information demanded 
without the prior approval of the Secretary of Commerce, 
and (h) that the demand has been, or is being, as the case 
may be, referred for the prompt consideration of the Secre- 
tary. The officer or employee shall also provide the court 
or other authority with a copy of the regulations pre- 
scribed In this section 7 of this order, and shall respect- 
fully request the court or other authority to stay the 
demand pending the receipt of Instructions or directions 
from the Secretary of Commerce concerning the demand. 



Mar. 13, 1972. 



ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 

Commissioner of Patents. 

[897 0.<;. 762] 



(154) TITLE 37— PATENTS, TRADEMARKS, 

AND COPYRIGHTS 

chapter I P.\TENT OFFICE, DEPARTMENT OK COMMERCE 

PART 1 — RILES OF PRACTICE IN P.VTENT CASES 
PART 2 — RTLKS OF PRACTICE IN TRADEMARK CASES 

Appeal to r.S. Court of Customs and Patent AppeaJs 



The Commissioner of Patents is amending f $ 1.301 and 
2.14.') of the rules of practice to set forth the time in which 
an OKler for transmitting a transcript to the Court of Cus- 
toms and Patent Appeals should be filed In the Patent Office. 
Additionally, for the purpose of clarification, all references to 
•'subsection" in § 2.145 have been amended to read "para- 
graph." These amendments do not effect any change in prac- 
tice, but merely notify parties filing appeals of the time neces 
sary for the Patent Office to copy and certify a transcript. 
Since these changes impose no burden on any person, notice 
and public procedure thereon are deemed unnecessary. 

Therefore, pursuant to the authority contained in section 
41 of the Act of Julv 5, 1946 (60 Stat. 440 ; 15 U.S.C. 1123). 
and section of the Act of July 19, 1952 (66 Stat. 793; 35 
U.S.C. 6), Parts 1 and 2 of Chapter I of Title 37 of the Code 
of Federal Regulations are hereby amended as follows : 

1. Section 1.301 is amended by adding a new sentence at 
the end. As amended, J 1.301 reads as follows : 
f 1.301 Appeal to U.S. Court of Customs and Patent Appeals. 

Any applicant dissatisfied with the decision of the Board of 
Appeals, and any party to an interference dissatisfied with 
the decision of the Bo:ird of Patent Interferences, may appeal 
to the U.S. Court of Customs and I'atent Apiieals. The ap- 
pellant must take the following steps In such an appeal : (a) 



In the Patent Office give notice to the Commissioner and file 
the reasons of appeal (see Si 1.302 and 1.304) ; (b) in the 
court, file a petition of appeal and a certified transcript of the 
record within a specified time after filing the reasons of ap- 
peal, and pay the fee for appeal, as provided by the rules of 
the court. The transcript will be transmitted to the Court by 
the Patent Office on order of and at the expense of the appel- 
lant. Such order should be filed with the notice of appeal, but 
in no case should It be filed later than 15 days thereafter. 

2 In I 2.145, paragraph (a) is amended by adding a sen- 
tence at the end; paragraphs (b), (c). and (d) are amended 
by substituting "paragraph" for "subsection." As amended, 
S 2.145 reads as follows : 
§ 2.145 Appeal to court and civil action. 

(a) Appeal to U.S. Court of Customs and Patent Appeals. 
An applicant for registration, or any party to an Interference, 
opposition, or cancellation proceeding or any party to an ap- 
plication to register as a concurrent user, hereinafter referred 
to as Inter partes proceedings, who Is dissatisfied with the 
decision of the Trademark Trial and Appeal Board and any 
registrant who has filed an affidavit or declaration under sec- 
tion 8 of the act or who has filed an application for renewal 
and is dissatisfied with the decision of the Commissioner 
(IS 2 165, 2.184), may appeal to the U.S. Court of Customs 
and Patent Appeals. The appellant must take the following 
steps In such an appeal : (1) In the Patent Office give notice 
to the Commissioner and file the reasons of appeal (see para- 
graphs (b) and (d) of this section) ; (2) in the court, file 
a petition of appeal and a certified transcript of the record 
within a specified time after filing the reasons of appeal, and 
pay the fee for appeal, as provided by the rules of the court. 
The transcript will be transmitted to the Court by the Patent 
Office on order of and at the expense of the appellant. Such 
order should be filed with the noHce of appeal, but In no case 
should it be filed later than 15 days thereafter. 

(b) Notice and reasons of appeal. (1) when an appeal Is 
taken to the U.S. Court of Customs and Patent Appeals, the 
appellant shall give notice thereof to the Commissioner, and 
file In the Patent Office, within the time specified In paragraph 
(d) of this section, his reasons of appeal specifically set forth 
in writing. 

(2) In Inter partes proceedings, the notice and reasons 
must be served as provided in S 2.119. 

(c) Civil action. (1) Any person who may appeal to the 
U.S. Court of Customs and Patent Appeals (paragraph (a) of 
this section), may have remedy by civil action under section 
21(b) of the act. Such civilization must be commenced within 
the time specified in paragraph (d) of this section. 

(2) If an applicant or registrant in an ex parte case has 
taken an appeal to the U.S. Court of Customs and Patent Ap- 
peals, he thereby waives his right to proceed under section 
21(b) of the act. 

(3) If a party to an Inter partes proceeding has taken an 
appeal to the U.S. Court of Customs and Patent Appeals, and 
any adverse party to the case shall, within 20 days after the 
appellant shall have filed notice of the appeal to the court 
(paragraph (b) of this section), file notice with the Com- 
missioner that he elects to have all further proceedings con- 
ducted as provided in section 21(b) of the act, certified 
copies of such notices will be transmitted to the U.S. Court 
of Customs and Patent Appeals for such action as may be 
necessary. The notice of election must be served as provided 
In S 2.119. 

(d) Time for appeal or civil action. The time for filing the 
notice and reasons of appeal to the U.S. Court of Customs and 
Patent Appeals (paragraph (b) of this section), or for com- 
mencing a civil action (paragraph (c) of this section), is 60 
davs from the date of the decision of the Trademark Trial and 
\ppeal Board or the Commissioner, as the case may be. If a 
petition for rehearing or reconsideration is filed within 30 
days after the date of the decision, the time is extended to 
30"davs after action on the petition. No petition for rehear- 
ing or" reconsideration filed outside the time specified herein 
after such decision, nor any procee<llng8 on such petition shall 
operate to extend the period of 00 days hereinabove provided. 
The times specified herein arc calendar days. If the last day 
of time specified for appeal, or commencing a civil action falls 
on a Saturdav. Sunday, or legal holiday, the time is extended 
to the next day which Is neither a Saturday, Sunday, nor a 
holiday. If a party to an inter partes proceeding has taken an 
appeal to the US. Court of Customs and Patent Appeals and 



^ 



44 

an adverse party has filed notice under section 21(a)(1) of 
the act that he elects to have all further proceedings con- 
ducted under section 21(b) of the act, the time for ei'^g ^ 
civil action thereafter Is specified In section 21(a)(1) of the 

act. 

Effective date. This amendment will become effective upon 
its publication in the Federal Register (5-11-72). 

Dated : May 1. 1972. 

ROBERT <JOTTSCHALK. 

Commissioner of Patenta. 

Approved : April 28. 1972. 
Jambs H. Wakelin, Jr., 

Assistant Secretary for 
Science and Technology. 

[FR Doc. 72-7159 ; Filed 5-10-72 ; 8 : 49 ami 
Published in 37 F.R. 9175; May 11. 1972 
'' • [899 O.G. 4091 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



(155) SERVICE OF COURT PAPERS ON COMMISSIONER 

OP Patents 

Those having occasion to serve on the Commissioner of 
Patents papers having to do with court proceedings are hereby 
reminded that proper service by mall may be effected only 
by mailing the papers to the Solicitor of the Patent Office as 
counsel for the Commissioner. Rule 5(b) of the Federal Rules 
of Civil Procedure provides in pertinent part : 

Whenever under these rules service Is required or per- 
mitted to be made upon a party represented by an at- 
torney the service shall be made upon the attorney unless 
service upon the party himself Is ordered by the court. 
Service upon the attorney • • • shall be made by deUver- 
Ing a copy to him or by mailing it to him at his last 
Isnown address • • *. 
Rule 25(b) of the Federal Rules of Appellate Procedure 
«lmilarlv provides, "Service on a party represented by counsel 
shall be made on counsel." The clerk of the U.S. Court of 
Customs and Patent Appeals has stated that, inasmuch as the 
rules of the Court are not specific on the manner of service 
In patent cases, the procedure outlined herein has the Court's 
approval. 

Accordingly, all service copies of papers filed In court pro- 
ceedings in which the Commissioner of Patents Is a party 
which are served by mall should be addressed : 

"(Name of Solicitor). Solicitor 
U.S. Patent Office 
Washington, D.C. 20231." 



of afBdavits to be filed under Rule 204(c) to secure inter^ 
feren^e conte ts with patentees whose filing dates antedate 
fheir own by more than three months, and It Is hoped that 
fhp following explanation will be helpful. 

In preparing affidavits under this rule applicants should 
have in mind the provisions of Rule 228, and especially the 

'°"°Ct 'after these affidavits are forwarded by the Pri- 
mary Examiner for the declaration of an Interference they 
will be examined by a Board of Patent Interferences. 

2 If the affidavits fall to establish with adequate cor 
rob^ration acts and circumstances which would i;;'°>» '"[i; 
entitle applicant to an award of priority ''^'-''^^j/^JJ^ 
effective filing date of the patentee, an order will be i.^sued 
concurrently with the notice of Interference, requiring appll^ 
cant to show cause why summary judgment should not be 
rendered against him. 

3 Additional affidavits in response to such order will not 
be considered unless justified by a showing under the pro- 
visions of Rule 22S. and If the applicant responds the 
patentee will receive from the applicant a copy of the re 
sponse (Rule 247) and from the P.itont Office a copy of the 
original showing (Rule 228), and will be entitled to present 
his views with respect thereto. 

4 It is the position of the Board of Patent Interferonres 
that all affidavits submitted must describe acts which the 
affiants performed or observed or circumstances observed, 
such as structure used and results of use or test except on 
a proper showing as provided In Rule 204(c). S atemen s 
of conclusion, for example, that the Invention of the counts 
viras reduced to practice, are peneraily considered to be not 
acceptable It should also be kept in mind that documen 
tary exhibits are not self-proving and require explanation 
by an affiant having direct knowledge of the matters In- 
volved However. It Is not necessary that the exact date 
of conception or reduction to practice be revealed In the 
affidavits or exhibits if the affidavits aver observation of 
the necessary acts and facts, including documentation when 
available, before the patentee's effective filing date. t)n 
the other hand, where reliance Is placed upon diligence, the 
affidavits and documentation should be precise as to dates 
from a date just prior to patentee's effective filing date. 
The showing should relate to the essential factors in the 
determination of the question of priority of invention as 
set out in 35 U.S.C. 102(g). 

.-, The explanation required by Rule 204(c) should be 
In the nature of a brief or explanatory remarks accompany- 
ing an amendment, and should set forth the manner In 
which the requirements of the counts ar« satisfied and how 
the requirements for conception, reducflon to practice or 

diligence are met. „^„c 

GEORGE W. BOYS. 

Apr. 21. 1966. Chairman, Board of Patent Interferences. 

[826 O.G. 7121 



Apr. 28, 1972. 



S. WM. COCHRAN, 

Solicitor. 

[898 O.G. 1500] 



(158) 



DESIGNATION OF INTERFERENCE RECORD 
RELIED UrON 



INTERFERENCES 

INTERFERENCE DECLARATION 



(156r 

Effective July 1, 1964. no Interference will be declared 
between pending applications. If there is a difference of more 
than three (3) months In the effective filing dates of the 
applicationa in the case of Inventions of a simple character, 
or a difference of more than six (6) months In other cases, 
except in exceptional situations, as determined and approved 

by the Commissioner. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER, 
June 26, 1964. Commissioner. 

[804 0.0. 297] 



(157) 



INTERFERENCE PRACTICE AFFIDAVITS 

Under Rdle 204(c) 

There has been difflcult> in a number of cases due to uncer- 
tainty on the part of applicants concerning the requirements 



During the taking of testimony In an Interference It Is 
frequently not clear just what testimony Is necessary to a 
party's case, since the contentions to be made by the opposing 
Sa y are not known, and In the case of a jun or party It is 
frequently not known whether or not the senior party wl 1 
Ike test mony. Therefore counsel taking testimony will nor^ 
many cover all matters which might possibly have an effect 
r ms case. Then. In preparing his briefs it may become ap- 
parent that certain portions of his record have no real slgnlfi^ 
cance as to Issues Involved. A review of these portions by the 
Board of Patent Interferences Is thus unnecessary. 

Accordingly, In order to reduce the time required by the 
Bot d of Pa nt Interferences to study the record and to more 
effectively and efficiently decide the Issues Involved, counsel 
relying on an evidentiary record in interference cases are 
requested to file a statement as to the portions of their record 
Sn which they rely. Such statement should be Included In 
the briefs of the respective parties. 

EDWIN L. REYNOLDS, 
First Assistant Commissiofier. 

[846 O.G. 679 (Jan. 16, 1968)1 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



45 



(159) TITLE .37— PATENTS. TRADEMARKS, 

AND COPYRIGHTS 

CHAPTER 1— Patent Office, Departme.nt of Commerce 

I'ART 1 — rules of PUAtTICE IN PATENT CASES 

Discovery During Interference Proceedings 
These rule changes are intt-nded to provide for: (1) Con- 
sideration of action souglit by a party to a patent Intciler 
ence proceeding outside tlie period prescribed tl(prefor wlierc 
the delay in seeking such action Is justified; (2) the desig 
nation of a specific period for discovery and the preparation 
for the taking of testimony; (3) specified discovery upon 
request (a) during the period for preparation for testimony 
as to evidence and testimony to be offered l)y junior parties 
and (b) after completion of testimony in cliief of the junior 
parties, as to evidence and testimony to l>e offered by senior 
parties; (4) the ordering of .idditional discovery upon mo 
tion by a party wliere the interest of justlve so re(|Uires ; 
and (5) sanctions by the Board. of Patent Interferences where 
there Is noncompliance witli a rei|ulrement of a rule or an 
order hv tlie l)oard. 

Tlie proposal to amend Title :{7, Code of Kederal Uegula- 
lions, l.y revising §§ 124.-. and 1.2.-.1 and l.y .-iddin^' a new 
§ 1.2S7 was puldlshed in the December 31. 1070, issue of the 
Federal Register (35 F.K. 20011). 

Ail interested persons were given an opportunity to par- 
ticipate in the rulemaking i.rocess by submission of com- 
ments in writing and In person at an oral liearing held on 
February 19, 1971. The rules are being adopte.l after full 
and careful consideration of all the material submitt.-.l. Tlie 
departures from tlie published text reflect <ertalu of the 
views expressed In the suluiiitted material. 

Fffcrtivv Ihitr. -Tlds amendment shall become effective :W 
davs after publication in the Federal Itegister and shall 
apply only to those Interferences In whlcli the times for 
t ikliig testimonv are set on or after sudi effective date. 

In consideration of the comments received and pursuant 
to the authority contained in section of the Act of July 
19 1952 (Cfi Stat. 793; 35 U.S.C. 0). I'art 1 of Title 3(. 
Code of Federal Kegulaticms Is liereby amen<UMl as follows : 
1. Section 1.24.-) Is revised to read as follows: 



§ 1.245 I'xtcnsion of time. 

Extensions of time in any case not otherwise pr.nided for 
mav he had by stipulation of the parties, subject to approval. 
„r on n.otlon duly brought, sufficient cause being shown lor 
such extension. A motion not timely made may b,- consi.Iered 
npon a showing of sufficient cau.se as to why such n.otlon 
was not timely presented. . ,,, ,. 

2 Section 1.251. paragraphs (a), (b). (c), and (d» an 
revised, and a new paragral-h (e) is added as follows: 
S 1.251 .\ssir7nment of times for disconry and talinr, testi 
iiiony. 

(a) A period for preparation of testimony will be set In 
which all parties sliouid complete discovery and .>tlier pre 
paratory activities. 

(b) Times will be assigned in which tlie junior party sliali 
complete his testimony In clilef, and in which the otlier 
party shall complete the testimony on liis side, and a further 
time in which the junior party may take rebutting testimony, 
but he shall take no other testimony. If there be more tlian 
two parties to the Interference, the times for taking testi- 
mony will be so arranged that each shall have an opportunity 
to prove Ids case against prior parties and to rebut their 
evidence, and also to meet the evidence of junior parties. 

(c) Times for preparation of testimony, for compliance 
with i 1.287(a) and for taking of testimony wHi ordinarily 
be assigned In notices sent to the parties after motions under 
§ 1.231 have been disposed of or. If no sucli motions have 
been filed, after the close of the motion period (§ 1.231). 

(d) Testimony shall be taken during the times ns.slgned 
In accordance with §§ 1.271 to 1.286. 

(e) The date for linal hearing will ordinarily be set in 
separate notices. 

3. A new § 1.287 is .added as follows : 

S 1.287 Discovery. 

(a)(1) Each party who expects to take testimony must 
.serve on each opposing party who requests service tlie follow 

'"»?■ . » 1 

(1) A copy of each document in his possession, custody, 

or control and upon which he intends to rely. 



(ii) A list of and a proffer of reasonable access to things 
In his possession, custody, or control and upon which he 

intends to rely, and 

(lii) A list giving the names and addresses of^all persons 
whom lie inten<is to call as witnesses and indicating the rela- 
tionship of each person to the Invention in issue. 

(2) Dates for compliance with subparagraph (1) of this 
paragraph will be set in accordance witli the following : 

(I) The date bv which all parties may recpiest service shall 
be not less tlian 10 days from the date of the order setting 

testimony time* ; . . ,, ».„ 

(II) The date for service by all junior parties shall be 
not less than 30 days from the date of the order setting 

such times ; . , 1, 1 ♦ 

(iii) Tlie date for service by the senior party shall be not 
less than 10 days from the date set for the close of testimony 
In chief of all junior parties. 

(3) Where more than two parties are Involved and one 
of the junior parties Is not entitled to take testimony as to a 
more senior party, the requirements of subparagraphs (1) 
and (2) of this paragraph shall not he applicable as between 

^"^(b)''The''''provislons of paragraph (a) of this section are 
without prejudice to the right of a party, where appropriate, 
to obtain production of documents or things during cross- 
examination of an opponent's witness or during his own pe- 
riod for rebuttal testimony. 

(c) Upon motion ($1,243) brought l.y a party during the 
period for preparation of testimony, or thereafter as auth..r^ 
ize<l under ? 1.245. and upon a showing that the interest of 
Justice so requires, the Hoard of Patent Interferences ma.v 
order additional discovery as to matters un.ler the control 
of a party within the scope of the discovery rules of the 
Feden.l Rules of Civil Procedure, specifying the terms and 
conditions of such additional '1«^^"^-*''->- -^" ,7''"' *;•! 'J' 
Board granting or denying a motion under this I'"=^Praph 
shall not be subject to review prior to a decision .awarding 

'"'(dT("V) V partv will not be permitted to ^ely on any docu- 
ment or thing in his possession, custody, or control, or on 
^nv witness, not listed and served by that Party as re- 
.luired by paragraph .a) of this section, -^^ "P""^/, 
promptly file.l motion accmpanled by the proposed addltlona 
d.Znents or lists together with a showing o^ -ffich>nt 
cause as to .vhy they were not served by the date set pur 
suant to paragraph (a) of this section. »,.„ „ro 

(2) Any failure to comply with an order under the pro 
visions of paragraph (c) of this section may »>o considered 
bv the Board of Patent Interferences as basis for appl.Mng 
.pp oprlate restrictions against the party failing to comply 
fir holding certain facts to have been established and in an 
appropriate case for awarding priority against h m or for 
talking such other action as may be deemed appr-.pr ate. 
'(e) The parties may by agreement --'"»^ /';'"- .r*"^ 
modify any of the foregoing requirements <'-^^^:"^/ ^ 
the s;hedule of times for taking testimony and filing tl.e 
record In the absence of such agreement, discovery will no 
be permitted prior to the period set for the preparation of 
testimony. 

Dated: May 6. 1971. 

WILLIAM E. SCHTTYLKR. JR.. 

Commissioner of Patents. 

.\pp roved : 



James H. Wakelin, Jr., 
Assistant Secretary for 

Science and Technology. t 

[PR Doc. 71-6617; Filed 5-11-71 ; 8:49 a.m.] 
Published in 56 F.R. 8732; Hay 12, 197 1 
[887 0>G. 726] 



Rule 283 



,160) TESTIMONY TAKEN IN A.NOTHER INTERFERENCE 

OR ACTION 

A discovery proceeding under the control of a ^^^'^'l""' 
Court, ancillary to an interference proceeding, is now con- 
sidered to be an "action' within the meaning of Rule 283. 
Acconilngly, "pretrial depositions" taken in a '^'---;- J" 
ceeding in accordance with the Federal Rules o Civil Pro 
cedur"'and under court control may be used In the Interference 



4 

T 

as' to which the discovery proceeding Is ancillary, subject to 
allother provisions of Rule 283. 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



May 2, 1972. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 

Aasiatant Commissioner. 



(161) 



[898 O.Gj 1500] 



Interference Pr.\ctice 

[37 CFR Parts 1, 5]i 
Notice of Proposed Rule Making 



Notice is hereby given that; pursuant to the authority con- 
tained In section 6 of the Act of July 19, 1952 (66 Stat. 793 ; 
36 U.S.C. 6) the Patent Office proposes to amend Title 37 of 
the Code of Federal Regulations by revising §§1.225, 1231 
(a)(5) and (d), 1.251(a), 1.253(f), 1.272(c), 1.277(a). and 
1.281, and revoking paragraph (b) of § 5.3. 

All persons are Invited to present their ylews, objections, 
recommendations or suggestions in connection with the pro- 
posed changes to the Commissioner of Patents, Washington, 
D.C. 20231 on or before October 10, 1972. No oral hearing 
will be held. Any written comments or suggestions may be 
inspected by any person, upon written request, a reasonable 
time after "the closing date for submitting comments. 

The proposed rule changes are intended to clarify the cur- 
rent practice before the Board of Interferences and to correct 
several inconsistencies. 

In { 1.225, It l9 proposed that the 20-day period be changed 
to 30 days. It Is also proposed that this rule be amended to 
make explicit the practice which has been in effect for a long 
' time of treating oppositions to certain types of motions as 
entitling a Junior party to a Anal hearing even though he 
would otherwise be subject to judgment on the record. 

In I 1.231(a) a reference to paragraph (d) Is proposed. It 
Is proposed that a new sentence be added 4^ I 1.231(d) which 
would defer to the final hearing consideration of motions for 
the conversion of inventorship filed during the testimony 
taking period. 

It is proposed to amend { 1.251(a) to make it consistent 
with f 1.2S7(a). 

Paragraph (f) of { 1253 Is proposed to be amended to 
specify that documentary exhibits should not be included In 
the bound volume* of testimony. 

It is proposed that a reference to { 1.253(c) be added In the 
last sentence of { 1.272(c). 

The proposed amendment of | 1.277(a) would not require 
consecutive numbering of all questions if paper with num- 
bered lines Is used. 

The proposed amendment to ri.281 would clearly Indicate 
that statenwnts may be either under oath or declaration. 

The proposed revocation of paragraph (b) of { 5.3 would 
remove an obsolete procedure from the regulations. Under 
current practice, applications under secrecy order are not 
placed into Interference until after the secrecy order Is re- 
moved. 

The text of the proposed amendment sections is as follows : 

$ 1.225 Failure of junior parti/ to file statements or to over- 
come flUng date of nenior party. 

If a junior party to an interference fails to file a pre- 
liminary statement, or if his statement falls to overcome the 
prima facie case made by the filing date of the application of 
another party, judgment on the record will be entered against 
such junior party unless he has filed a motion under { 1.231, 
within the time set for such motions, for some action in the 
interference or he has opposed a motion under 11.231(a) 
f2), (8). (4), or (5). If such a motion has been timely Hied 
but does not result in action In the Interference which will 
remove the basis for a judgment on the record, such judg- 
ment on the record will he entered unless the motion related 
to matters which may he reviewed at final hearing under 
I 1.258, and within 30 days of the decision disposing of the 
motion the junior party concerned requests that final hear- 
ing be set to review such matters. Also, such a Junior party 
may within such 30 day period request a final hearing to 
review such a matter raised by his opposition to a motion 
under | 1.231(a) (2). (3). or (4) which was granted over 
his opposition. 



{ 1.231 Motions before the primary ewaminer. 

(a) • • • 

(5) To amend an Involved application by adding or re- 
moving the names of one or more inventors as provided in 
I 1.45. (See paragraph (d) of this section.) 

• • • • 

(d) All proper motions as specified in paragraph (a) of 
this section, or of a similar character, will be transmitted to 
and considered by the primary examiner without oral argu- 
ment, except that consideration of a motion to dissolve will 
be deferred to final hearing before a Board of Patent Inter- 
ferences where the motion urges unpatentability of a count 
to one or more parties which would he reviewable at final 
hearing under i 1.258(a) and such unpatentability is urged 
against a patentee or has been ruled upon by the Board of 
Appeals or by a court in ex parte proceedings. Also con- 
sideration of a motion to add or remove the names of one or 
more Inventors may be deferred to final hearing if such mo- 
tion is filed after the times for taking testimony have been 
^set. Requests for reconsideration will not he entertained. 



$ 1.251. Assignment of times for discovery and taking 
testimony. 
(a)' A period for preparation for testimony will be set in 
which all parties should complete discovery and other prepara- 
tory activities, except for service by the senior party rcjuired 
by § 1.287(a) (1) which is governed by i 1.287(a) (2) (ill). 

• . • • 

§ 1.253 Copies of the testimony. 

. • . • • 

(f ) When the copies of the record are In typewritten form, 
they must be clearly legible on opaque unglazed. durable 
paper approximately 8'(. by 11 Inches In size (letter size) and 
one of the three copies must be a ribbon copy, but need not 
he executed by the certifying officer. (The certified transcript 
may he a properly executed carbon copy. See $1,277.) The 
typing shall be on one side of the paper, in not smaller than 
pica type; and double-spaced with a margin of 1'- Inches 
on the left-hand side of the page. The sheets shall be bound 
at their left edges. In such manner to He fiat when opened, 
in a volume or volumes of convenient size (approximately 100 
pages per volume is suggested) provided with covers. Docu- 
mentary exhibits should not be Included in bound volumes 
of testimony. Multigraphed or otherwise reproduced copies 
conforming to the standards specified will be accepted. 

§ 1.272 Manner of taking testimony of witnesses 

. • • • 

(c) By agreement of the parties, the testimony of any 
witness or witnesses of any party, may be submitted In the 
form of an affidavit by such witness or witnesses. The parties 
mav stipulate what a particular witness would testify to If 
called, or the facts in the case of any party may he stipulated. 
When' evidence is submitted In one of these forms, four 
copies of such aflldavit or stipulated testimony (| 1.253 (a), 
(c). (f)) are required. 
$ 1.277 Form of deposition. 

(a) The testimony must he written on letter size paper, 
with a wide margin on the left-hand side of the page, and 
with the writing on one side only of the sheet. The pages 
must be serially numbered throughout the entire record for 
each party (|i.253(l>)) and the name of the witness must 
be plainly and conspicuously written at the top of each page. 
The questions propounded to each witness must he consecu- 
tively numbered, unless paper with numbered lines Is used, 
and each question must be followed by Its answer. 

• • • • 

! 1.281 Additional time for taking testimony. 

If either party has proceeded with the taking of testimony 
on his behalf hut is un.able to complete his case because of 
inability to procure the testimony of a witness or witnesses 
within the time limited and said time has expired, and he 
desires additional time for such purpose, he must file a 
motion, accompanied by a statement under oath or in the 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



47 



form of a declaration setting forth specifically the cause of 
such Inability, the name or names of the witness or witnesses, 
the fact expected to be proved by such witness or witnesses, 
the steps which have been taken to procure such testimony, 
and the dates on which efforts have been made to procure 
It. (See { 1.245 for extensions of time In other situations.) 

I 5.3 [Amended] 

In I 5.3, It Is proposed that paragraph (b) be revoked. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 

Commissioner of Patents. 
A*pproved : June 16, 1972. 

James H. Wakelin, Jr., 
Assistant Secretary 

for Science and Technology. 

[FR Doc. 72-9990 Filed 6-29-72 ; 8 : 54 am] 

[901 0.0. 2] 



CORRECTION OF ERRORS 

(162) Cehtific.\tes of Correction Listing 

Certificates of Correction are Issued every Tuesday. Begin- 
ning on January 7, 1969, each issue of the Official Cazettk 
win numerically list all U.S. patents having Certificates of 
Correction Issuing that Tuesday. The list will appear under 
the heading "Certificates of Correction Issued (date)." 



Nov. 22, 1968. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
.Assistant Commissioner. 



[857 O.G. 1005] 



(163) TITLi: 37— PATENTS, TRADEMARKS, 

AND COPYRIGHTS 



(Chapter I — Patent Office, Department of Commerce- 
part 1 — RILES of practice IN PATENT CASES 

Issuance of Certificates of Correction 

On October 11, 1968, notice of proposed rulemaking re- 
garding the amendment of §i 1.322 and 1.323 of Title 37. 
Code of Federal Regulations, dealing with the issuance of 
certificates of correction, was published in the Federal Regis- 
ter (33 F.R. 15218). Interested persons were given 40 days 
In which to submit written comments, suggestions, or objec 
tlons regarding the proposed amendments. 

Full consideration having been given to all comments that 
were received In response to the public notice, the amend- 
ments originally proposed are hereby adopted without change 
and are set forth below. 

As a result of these rule changes It will no longer be neces- 
sary for the patentee to forward his patent to the Patent 
OflSce when requesting the Issuance of a certificate of correc- 
tion. Upon receipt of an appropriate request, a certificate of 
correction will be Issued and forwarded to the patentee, with 
an authorization permitting the patentee to physically attach 
same to the patent. 

In connection with this change of procedure, arrangements 
have been made with Shepard's Citations to Indicate under 
its listing of patents in Its set entitled "Shepard's United 
States Citations, Patents and Trademarks" those patents for 
vyhlch certificates of correction have been issued. Beginning 
in April of this year the Information will be published In that 
set's quarterly cumulative supplement and will appear In 
the bound volume thereof, when It is released. 

Effective date. These amendments shall become effective 
upon publication In the Federal Register. 

Dated : Mar. 18, 1969. 

^ EDWARD J. BRENNER, 

Commissioner of Patents. 

Approved : 

ALLEN V. ASTIN, 

Assistant Secretary for Science and Technology. 



(164) New Procedure for Handling Certificates 

of Correction 

In compliance with amended Rules 322 and 323, and to 
expedite the Issuance of certificates and reduce printing costs, 
practitioners are urged to submit the text of the certificate 
on a special form which could serve as the final copy for use 
In direct process reproduction (offset printing) of the cer- 
tificate of correction. The request for issuance of the certificate 
(together with the fee where the error Is due to applicant's 
mistake) should be in a separate letter accompanied by two 
copies of the form and a self-addressed envelope. 

Where the recommended format Is used and approved, one 
copy of said form, duly certified, will be returned to the pat 
entee for attachment to his copy of the patent. This will 
eliminate the present necessity for returning the patent when 
requesting a certificate. The other copy ^of the form will be 
used for direct offset printing of copies of the certificate 
which, as heretofore, will be attached to every printed copy 
of the patent subsequently sold or distributed. 

Copies of the form are obtainable for reproduction purposes 
from Correspondence and Mail Branch and from the recep- 
tionist in BIdg. 3, Crystal Plaza, helow is a sample form 
Illustrating a variety of corrections and the suggested manner 
of setting out the format. Particular attention is directed to : 

a. Identification of the exact point of error by reference 
to column and line number of the printed patent. 

b. Conservation of space on the form by typing slngl« 
space, beginning two lines down from the printed 
message. 

c. Starting the correction to each separate column as a 
sentence, and using semi-colons to separate corrections 
within said column, where possible. 

d. Two Inch space left blank at bottom for signature of 
attesting officer. 

c. Use of quotation marks to enclose the exact subject 
matter to be deleted or corrected ; use of double hy 
phens (--) to enclose subject matter^to be added, ex- 
cept for formulas. 

/. Where a formula Is Involved, setting out only that" 
portion thereof which is to be corrected. 

Where the recommended format Is not used or where the 
nature of the subject matter is such that It Is more expedient 
to print by the direct Image offset technique, e.g., entire 
sheet(s) of drawing or page(s) of specification omitted, mul- 
tiple pages of corrections. Intricate chemical formulas, etc., 
Issue and Gazette Branch will prepare the certificate as here- 
tofore. Patentee will receive a copy for attachment to his 

copy of the patent. 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 

Apr 1 1969. Assistant Commissioner. 

UMTED STATES PATENT OFFICE 

CERTIFICATE OF CORRECTION 



J.t.nt No.J^liZil!! 



^r.i April 1. 1H9 



JiMi W. Worth 



.nd tiit ..U Utt.r. P.t.nt .r. h.r.by corr.ct.d .. .h<«n b.lov. 

tn the drawings. Sheet J, Fig. 3, the reference numeril 
225 should be applied to the ilate element attached to the 
support member 207. Column 1. lines 45 to 49, the left-hand 
formula should appear as follows: 

Column t. formula XXXV, that portion of the formula reading 



.1 



should read 



CN 

I 

-C- 



Tormula XXXVII, that portion of the formula reading "-CH2CH-" 
should read ,, -CHjCHj. -•. Column 2, line 68 and fol"""'. 
lines 3 8 and 13, the claim reference numeral 2 . each 
oc"Jr.Ace, shoild read .- 1 --. Column 10 line 16. cancel 
lle»fnnini with "12, A sensor device" to and including tive 
»??ip»:" In column U, line 8, and insert the following clai. 

12, A control circuit of the character 
s«t forth In claim 1 and for an automobile having 
a convertible top, and including; means for moving 
said top between raised and lowered retracted 
positron and control means responsive to said 
sensor relay for energizing the top moving means 
for moving said top from retracted position to 
raised position. 



[861 O.G. 680] 



[862 O.G. 2] 



48 



(1G5) 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



ABSTRACTS 



Examination Requirements and Procedure in 

RELATION TO ABSTRACTS OF THE DISCLOSURE . 



The newly adopted amendment to Rule 72 which requires 
the submission of an Abstract of the Disclosure is being ap- 
plied to patent applications which receive a first Office action 
.,£ any kind from the Examiner on or after November 1. 19bG ; 
however on cases filed before January 1. 1967. abstracts will 
not be required where the application is passed to issue on 
the first action. 

The Examiner in the first office action on and after .No- 
vember 1 1966, should require the submission of a brief ab- 
stract of' the technical disclosure In the specification, the 
abstract to appear Immediately after the title of the invention 
and preceding the disclosure In a separate paragraph under the 
heading "Abstract of the Disclosure." The following form 
paragraph may be used to make the requirement : 

"An abstract is required, see new Rule 72(b)." 
Responses to such acrions should be treated under Rule 
111(b) practice like any other formal matter. 

Upon passing the case to issue, the Examiner should see 
that the abstract is an adequate and <clear statement of the 
contents of the disclosure and generally in line with the guide- 
lines in the followljig paragraphs; the abstract shall be 
changed by E.xaminer's Amendment in those instances where 

deemed necessary. 

1 The purpose of tlie abstract is to provide a nog-legal 
technical statement of the contents of the disclosure. The 
ab><tract should be an oljjective condensation (rather than 
a description) of the disclosure. In clear and concise language. 
Statements as to the relative merits or value, or speculative 
applications of the Invention shmild be omitted. 

2 The abstract should be especially designed to serve as 
a searching-scanning tool for the scientist, engineer or re 
searcher in the particular art. and therefore should serve 
to indicate whether there is a need for cnsulting the full 
specilication for details. 

3. The abstract should be as brief as the subject permits.- 
\ single paragraph of 50-100 words should be sufficient. 

4 Especially in tlie chemical field, the abstract should 
include a statement of the utility of the subject matter of 
the disclosure, particularly that which is related to the in- 
vention. 

5 The abstract should bo separate and independent of the 
"Summary of the Invention." One of the purposes of the 
abstract Is to determine quickly the nature and gist of the 

technical disclosure. 

RICIIARU A. WAHL, 
Oct. 7 1966. Assistant Commissioner. 

[831 O.G. 1328] 



(166) Change in Content of the Patents 

SECiyON OF THE OFFICIAL (;aZETTE 

In keeping with the Patent Office program to encourage tlie 
U.S.' of patents In the scientific, engineering and business com- 
munities, as well as the patent profession, a change In th»' 
content of the patents section of the Official (Jazette is 
being made. 

Beginning with the first issue of the Official <;azette in 
.Tarjuary 1968, a copy of the abstract of each patent where 
an abstract Is available will appear, in lieu of the claim. This 
change In content is being made in order tliat patent informa- 
tion may be better utilized by the patent public. 

In addition to the regular issue of the Official Gazette an 
extract of the patents section, i.e.. the descriptive matter re- 
lating to patents only, will be made available. The subscription 
rate for the patents section extract only for the first six 
months period beginning with tlie first Issue In January 196S, 
will be twenty-seven dollars ($27.00) and one dollar and 
twenty-five cents ($1.25) for a single copy. The extract will be 
mailed under the direction of the Superintendent of Docu- 
ments, Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., li0402, 
to whom all subscriptions should be made payable and all 
communications addressed. The title of the extract will be 
"Official Gazette — Patent Abstracts Section." 

It Is to be noted that tlie Government Printing Office has 
determined that the subscription rate for the regular Issue 



of the OFFICIAL Gazette will be Increased to sixty-seven dol- 
lars ($67.00) for the subscription year beginning •»«""»'>; 
196S. and the price of Individual copies will be nc^"";^;! /« 
one and a half dollars ($1.50). The Increased rate Is not re- 
lated to the new program. ...^ , „T>I.^VVVR 

EDWARD J. BRENNER. 
Sept. 25, 1967. Commissiouer of Patents. 

[843 O.G. 747] 



(167) Paragraph Requirements FOR Abstracts 

In view of some difficulties experienced In determining the 
extent of the abstracts, the Patent Office Is supplementing the 
Notice of October 7, 1966 (S31 O.G. 132S). 

\n ibstract should usually be limited to a single paragraph, 
under the heading, "Abstract of the Disclosure" as stated In 
Rule 72(b) and MPEP60S.01(h). 

In unusual circumstances where the application disclosure 
does not lend Itself to a single paragraph abstract, a plurfll 
par.igraph abstract may be acceptable. An example of these 
rare situations would be an application having claims to 
different statutorv classes. It being recognized that an abstract 
of the disclosure should he written ^ in.lude the advancement 

"T^fivold errors In printing where a plural paragraph ab- 
stract is deemed necessary and appropriate, the complete ab- 
•.tract mu^t be set off bv suitable headings to Indicate where 
the abstract begins and ends. Appropriate headings useable 
between the abstract and the subsequent description are to 
be found In the "Guidelines for Drafting a Model Patent 
Application Under the Revised Rules" ( S32 O.G. 5; MI EI 

60S.01(a)). „, .„T 

RICHARD A. WAIIE, 

Feb 16 196S. Assistant Commissioner. 

[854 O.G. 287] 



(168) 



Patent Abstracts 



The provision In Rule 72(b) of the Rules of Practice In 
Patent Cases, relating to inclusion of a "brief abstract of the 
technical disclosure" in applications for patent, has now been 
In effect for two and one-half years. 

Instructions regarding abstract preparation were published 
at 8?i\ 0.<;. 1328, October 25. 1966, and at about the same 
time a pamphlet entitled "Guidelines for the Preparation of 
Patent Abstracts" was published and made available to per- 
sonnel concerned with the preparation and review of abstracts 
of the tvpe noted. 

Abstracts are becoming more and more significant in the 
field of mechanized and computerized prior art retrieval. It 
is therefore important that they reach the optimum quality 
level at the earliest possible date. 

During the past vear abstracts, in a random sample of 
approximatelv 1000 allowed applications, were audited or re- 
viewed for purposes of determining degree of compliance with 
the aforenoted instructions and guidelines. Steady improve- 
ment in the quality of the abstracts was noted In the course 
of the review. The review clearly indicated, however, a need 
for further Improvement as well as a need for certain modifi- 
cations and revisions In the earlier published guidelines. There 
also appeared to be a nee.l for reemphasis of portions of the 
guidelines. 

\ccordinglv, a revised set of guidelines consoiiant with the 
needs suggested by the audit have been promulgated, and are 
set forth below for use In the preparation and review of 
patent abstracts. 

GUIDELINES FOR THE PREfARATION OF PATENT ABSTRACTS 

nnclfjrouml 
The Rules of Practlc^ in Patent Cases require that each 
application for patent Include an Abstract of the Disclosure, 

'^"The'clmtent of a patent abstract should be such as to en^ 
ab'e the reader thereof, regardless of his degree of famll arity 
"ith patint documents, to ascertain quickly the character of 
he sui" ect matter covered by the technical <1 ^'^l-^; »"^ 
should include that which Is new In the art to which the 
Invention pertains. infer- 

The abstract is not Intended nor designed for use In Inter 
pretmg the scope or meaning of the claims. Uule .2(b). 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



49 



Content 
A patent abstract Is a concise statement of the technical 
disclosure of the patent and should include that which is new 
In the art to which the invention pertains. 

If the patent is of a basic nature, the entire technical dis- 
closure may be new In the art. and the abstract should be 
directed to the entire disclosure. 

If the patent is in the nature of an Improvement In an Old 
apparatus, process, product, or composition, the abstract 
should include the technical disclosure of the improvement. 
In certain patents, particularly those for compounds and 
compositions, wherein the process for making and/or the use 
thereof are not obvious, the abstract should set forth a proc- 
ess for making and/or a vise thereof. 

If the new technical disclosure Involves modifications or 
alternatives, the abstract should mention by way of example 
the preferred modificatirm or alternative. 

The abstract should not refer to purported merits or specu- 
lative applications of the Invention' and should not compare 
the Invention with the prior Art. 

Where applicable, the abstract should Include the follow- 
ing: (1) If a machine or apparatus, its organization and oper- 
ation; (2) if an article, its method of making; (3) if a 
chemical compound, its identity and use; (4) if a mixture, 
its ingredients; (5) If a process, the steps. Extensive mechan- 
ical and design details of api>aratus should not be given. 

With regard particularly to chemical patents, for com- 
pounds or compositions, the general nature of the compound 
or composition should be given as well as the use thereof, 
e.g.. "The compounds arc of the class of alkyl benzene sul- 
fonyl ureas, useful as oral anti-diabetics.^' Exemplification of 
a species could be illustrative of members of tlie class. For 
, processes, the type reaction, reagents and process conditions 
should be stated, generally Illustrated by a single example 
unless variations are necessary. 

Language and Format 
The abstract should be In narrative form and generally 
limited to a single paragraph within the range of 50 to 250 
words. The form and legal phraseology often used In patent 
claims, such as "means" and "said," should be avoided. The 
abstract sliould sufficiently describe the disclosure to assist 
readers In deciding whether there Is a need for consulting the 
full patent text for details. 

The language should be clear and concise and should not 
repeat Information given in the title. It should avoid using 
phrases which can be Implied, such as, "This disclosure con- 
cerns," "The disclosure defined by this Invention," "This dis- 
closure describes," etc. 

Responsibility 
Preparation of the abstract is the responsibility of the ap- 
plicant. Background knowledge of the art and an appreciation 
of the applicant's contribution to the art are most important 
In the preparation of the abstract. The review of the abstract, 
for compliance witli these guidelines, with any necessary edit- 
ing and revision on allowance of the application Is the re- 
sponsibility of the examiner. 

Sample Abstracts 
A heart valve with an annular valve body defining an ori- 
fice and having a plurality of struts forming a pair of cages 
on opposite sides of the orifice. A spherical closure member Is 
captlvely held within the cages and Is moved by blood flow- 
between open and closed positions In check valve fashion. A 
slight leak or backfiow Is provided in the closed position by 
making the orifice slightly larger than the closure member. 
Blood flow Is maximized in the open position of the valve by 
providing an inwardly convex contour on the orifice-defining 
surfaces of the body. An annular rib Is formed In a channel 
around the periphery of the valve body to anchor a suture ring 
used to secure the valve within a heart. 



formed Immediately after heating within a period of time for 
any one surface point less than the total time of exposure to 
heated air of that point. Under such conditions the heat ap- 
plied to soften the thermoplastic coating Is dissipated after 
completion of the bond by absorption into the board acting 
as a heat sink without the need for cooling devices. 



Amides are produ 
acid with an amine, 
metal. The ester Is 
pressure of no more 
ture and acid gases 
then converted to a 
reaction. 

Apr. 23, 1969. 



ced by reacting an ester of a carhoxyllc 
using as catalyst an alkoxlde of an alkali 

first heated to at least 75* C. under R 
than 500 mm. of mercury to remove mols- 

which would prevent the reaction, and 
n amide without heating to Initiate the 

RICHARD A. WAUL. 

Assistant Commissioner. 



[862 O.G. 653] 



(169) DISCONTINUATION OF THE PUBLICATION "PATENT 
ABSTRACTS SECTION OF THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE" 

Effective Mar. 31, 1970, the Patent Office will no longer 
print the publication "Patent Abstracts Section of the Official 
Gazette." Reasons for this decision are the desire to incur a 
saving in printing costs, the same information now appears 
in the Official Gazette, and the number of subscribers no 
longer warrants a separate publication. 

The Superintendent of Do.cuments, U.S. Government Print- 
ing Office, will contact subscribers to the "Patent Abstracts" 
for appropriate action regarding their subscriptions. 

CLARENCE A. KALK, 
Acting Assistant Commissioner for Admini.'<tration. 

Feb. 9, 1970. 

[872 O.G. 1] 



(170) 



Claims Versus Abstracts for Publication 
IN the Patent Official Gazette 



Abstracts have.been required for all patent applications 
filed since January 1, 1967. Subsequent to the requlrenent 
for abstracts, the Office began substituting abstracts for patent 
claims In the Official Gazette. At the present time, ab- 
stracts ars used exclusively In the Official Gazette to de- 
scribe the inventions for which patents issue each week. 

Over the last several months, the Office has become increas- 
ingly aware of the disparity of views which exist regarding 
the merits of the publication of claims or abstracts In the 
Official Gazette. The utilization of abstracts In the Official 
Gazette was initially base on a desire to make that publica- 
tion more useful to the non-patent community. However, it 
now appears that a significant portion of the patent commu- 
nity, especially In the chemical area, would prefer the imbll- 
cation of claims in the Official Gazette as more useful than 
the publication of abstracts. 

To assist the Office in resolving this issue, it is requeste<l 
that Interested parties submit their comments in writing prior 
to January 1. 1973. Such comments should be addressed to 
the Commissioner of Patents, Washington, D.C., 20231. 

ROBERT GOTTSCIIALK, 
May 22. 1972. Commissioner of Patents. 

[899 O.G. S20] 



(171) 



REFERENCES 

Citation of Publications and Foreign 
Patents 



A method for sealing, by application of heat, overlapping 
closure panels of a folding box made from paperboard hav- 
ing an extremely thin coating of moisture-proofing thermo- 
plastic material on opposite surfaces. Heated air Is directed 
at the surfaces to be bonded, the temperature of the air at 
the point of Impact on the surfaces being above the char 
point of the board. The duration of application of heat Is made 
so brief, by a corresponding high rate of advance of the boxes 
through the air stream, that the coating on the reverse side 
of the panels remains substantially non-tacky. The bond Is 



Foreign Patents 
In accordance with Rule 107. for each foreign patent cited, 
there should be Indicated the number of sheets of drawing 
and pages of specification and also the sheet number (s) and 
page number(s) specifically relied upon if less than the entire 
disclosure Is used. Because it is essential to conserve space 
In the Examiner's file of applications and to minimize the cost 
to applicant under the automatic supply of references cited, 
whenever the total number of sheets and pages in any foreign 
patent exceeds ten, the Examiner should keep the total relied 
on as near to ten as possible. Applicants who desire a copy 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



50 

of the complete foreign patent or of the portion not "relied 
on" must order It. not through the automatic supply system, 
but In the usual manner. 

Publications 
Publications such as German allowed applications and 
Ne^heTnds printed specifications should ^e simi'ar >- ha-.^^^^^ 
With other publications such as ^ooks. Periodical and cata 
loKues the speciflt pages relied upon should be cited If tne 
copy ;elled upon is located only in the Group "taking the 
action (there is no call number), the additional information. 
"Copy in Group — " should be given. 



January 2, 1973 



Jan. 4, 1965. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Acting Superintendent, 
Patent Examining Corps. 



[811 O.G. 293] 



(172) AtJTOMATIC FCRNISHISG FREE COPIES OF 

Cited References 

Commencing November 1, 1965. one '^"'"P^^Jf f * °/ "^"' 
ences cited by Examiners in Office Actions will be automat - 
cally supplied without charge simultaneously with the mail- 
ing of the actions. ^ ^ ,„ 

\dditlonal copies of references desired must be properly 
Identified and purchased from the regular Patent Office copy 

supply facilities. ,. ^ , t r-i*nri 

This supersedes the notice. "Providing Copies of Cited 

References to Applicants" which was published In 809 O.G. 

317 on December 8. 1964. ,, . t tt 

C. A. KALK. 
Oct 1 1965. '. Director of Administration. 

[819 O.G. 1335] 



ra) Limits the number of references cited to not more 

necessary, and submits one copy of each of the refer- 
^"rbV submits a detailed discussion of t^e references 

matter is distinguisTiable over the references. 
References cited by applicants or ^"orneys under the 
..special" examining procedure announced on Ma-hf. ^196^5. 

riS oT re":: ce" c'e^d rthe^pLrnted^.e and P^-ed Patent. 

Prior art cited by applicants ^"Vr'TfiVo g" 7^3 802 >l 
tlce set forth in the notices published m 797 O.G. 733 80^ 
O G 601 ; 804 O.G. 1 and 805 O.G. 294 will no longer be listed 
in the printed patent. ^^^^.^^^^ j. BRENNER. 

,„ ,o«- Commissioner of Patents. 

Apr. 13. 19d7. 

[837 O.G. 1032] 



(173) 



Citation of References at Time of 
Allowance 

Commencing March 15. 1966. references cited by examiners 
when passing an application to issue will no longer be sup- 
plied under the automatic plan. Copies of these references. 
If desired, must be purchased from the regular Patent Office 
copy supply facilities. 

Except as above indicated references cited by examiners in 
Office actions will continue to be automatically supplied with- 
out charge simultaneously with the mailing of the actions. 

This modifies the notice. "Automatic Furnishing Free 
Copies of Cited References," which was published in 820 O.G. 

1 on November 2. 1965. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Feb 24, 1966. Assistant Commissioner of Patents. 

[824 O.G. 805] 



(176) REFERENCE CITATIONS IN CONTIXIIATION 

Arri.KATioNs 
Fffectlve December 1. 1967. the Office will discontinue the 
prac^c of furnishing, automatically and without charge 
oples of references cited in continuation "«;«'»<";;»"- ^' ^'-> 
had been previously cited in the parent application. 

?n the rare instance where no art is cited in a continuation .. 
„„nlication all the references cited during the FO/*'^"^ «" «' 
X parent application will be listed at allowance for printing 

'"ithercttlnulng applications. Including -ntl.uat.on-.n^ 
part and divisional applications, are not affected bj this 

^^^'""^^ RICHARD A. WAHL. 

Assistant Commissioner. 
Nov. 1, 1967. 

[846 O.G.. 10221 



(JY7) PATENT Classification 

As a service to the public, effective with the Issue of Decem- 
ber 10. 1968. all patents will contain a^he end of t e s^ec- 

iication^ after the ^^List of ^^^:::-^^^^,:; i^;::"::^:^ 

and subc asses in the L.b. ciassincaxiun ., 
the patent was cross-referenced at the time of Issue. This list- 
ing will be headed "I'.S. Ci.— X.R." nntents 
Beginning with the Issue of January 7. 1969. all patents 
win also include International Patent Classifications ,n the 
lieadlng and Identified as " Int. CI." 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 
Assistant Commissioner. 
Nov. 29, 196S. 

[858 0.0. 1029) 



(174) Orders for References Cited in Shortened 
St.\tutort Period Actions 

Effective immediately, the Patent Office will no longer 
supply copies of references cited on a "Special Handling" 
basis without the usual additional charge. This service was 
announced in the Official Gazette on June 2, 1064. 

The Patent Office has. since November 1. 1965. been fur- 
nishing one complete set of references cited by Examiners 
in Office Actions automatically, without charge, simultane- 
ously with the mailing of the actions. 

[825 O.G. 811 (Apr. 19, 1966)) 



(175) 



Policy Re : Vollntary Citation of Prior 
Art by Applicants 



,178) MACHINE Search Service 

The Mechanized Search Service presently used by the Patent 
Office in making examiner searches in the field of Data Process^ 
ing is Offered for public u.e under the conditions and procedures 

^^^^C^Sr available as a punched card «fe^an^r.tlal 
fp^ of S40 00 each The instruction manual Search Sjsttm 

'Z:'J*oZl Fleia Of D..a -— '«'->'^;^^,^,''J.,t ?, 
DP" Is Included as part of the "package. A rene«al Ke oi 
(Loo P°r ,e.r entitle, tl.e .ubscrlber (o receive a „t „< 

'"Tti:°«le":S"pre,e„,..v e,l.„ for n,ecl.a„l.ed search,., 
consists of : 



Field 



Class Subclass File content ' 



Effective Immediately, the following policy is being adopted 
in the hope of encouraging more frequent and meaningful ^ata processing 
citation of prior art by applicants and their attorneys on a 
voluntary basis. 

Prior art cited by applicants or their attorneys within 
thirty days of the filing of a patent application, or prior to 
the first Office action, whichever Is later, will be fully con- 
sidered by the Examiner, will be part of the official record. 



I 



236 
340 



157 2.965 U.S. Patents. 
172. 5 622 Literature articles. 



7^^;i;;^;^^;^^r^;^^:^^^^t 6ocu^eni. m the aies as of June 

^^- ^''^^ ". »!„„ nf thU file Is described In the 

Ti,e scope and organization of this flle is a 

publication "Search System Manual for the Field 

Processing-ICIREPAT System DP. 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



51 



A .substantial portion of this publication is devoted to the 
technique of preparing the code sheet which is the means pro- 
vided for expressing the search query for ihachine handling. 
Effective use of the mechanized search system and tlie achieve- 
ment of competent results are dependent upon understanding 
and care in applying the coding information offered in this 
publication. 

The Patent Office will accept requests for machine searches 
submitted on code sheets prepared in accordance with instruc- 
tions contained In the aforedescribed publication. Requests 
received in any other form will not be accepted, as the Patent 
Office will not assume the responsibility for the formulation 
of a search query or the representation of a query in coded 
form. The Patent Office will, however, provide assistance to 
persons seeking aid in resolving specific questions which may 
arise in completing the code sheet prior to submitting tlie 
search request. The code sheet serves as the query form for 
searches on this system. 

One or more Examiners Imve been designated to provide such 
assistance. A request for a conference on mechanized search 
questions in the field of Data Processing may be directed to 
the Supervisory Primary Examiner of Group Art Unit 237. 

A search constitutes all of the machine and related opera- 
tions required to retrieve from a data file, information con- 
tained therein which fulfills the search instructions repre- 
sented on a code sheet. When several code sheets are required 
to cover the full search need, each code sheet will constitute 
a search. A search will be considered to be complete and proper 
even under circumstances in which proper operation of the 
.system produces output representing documents which, while 
fulfilling the coded requirements, are determined by the user 
to lack pertinence or relevance in any or a sufficient degree ; 
or. conversely, fails to produce an output. 

The cost per search, which includes a list of the document 
references retrieved, is $5.00. Copies of all U.S. patent and 
non patent literature references will be supplied, if requested 
as part of the search service, for additional cost at established 
rates, chargeable to a deposit account maintained by the 
.search purchaser with the Patent Office. 

Code sheets for the machine search file may be obtained 
from the Patent Office. A<idress request to the Patent Office, 
Office of Search Systems and Documentation, Washington. 
DC. 20231. 

After any neces.sary consultation with the Examiner In 
I)reparing the search query, address search requests together 
with the completed code sheet and fee to the Commissioner 
of Patents. Washington, D.C.. 20231. Attention should be di- 
rected to the Office of Search Systems and Documentation, 
Office of the Adminstrator. 

['891 O.G. 886 (Oct. 19. 1971)] 



(179) Concordance: United States Patent Classifica- 
tion to Interna,tional Patent Classification 

A revised and updated edition of the "Concordance : United 
States Patent Classification to International Patent Classifi- 
cation" has been published and is available from the Super- 
intendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, 
for $1.50. This second edition is a revision ef the edition of 
April 1969, and contains about 3,000 changes, corrections and 
additions suggested by users of the book. It includes all new 
U.S. classes published up to and Including November 1971. 



Apr. 12, 1972. 



W. W. BURNS. Jr., 
Administrator, Office of 
Search Systems and Documentation. 

[S98 O.G. 368] 



(ISO) 



Machine Search Service 



The mechanized retrieval system formerly used by the 
Patent Office in making examiner searches in the field of 
steroids has been replaced by the ICIREPAT Shared System 
for this field (System ST). This new .system is based upon 
the original U.S. Patent Office system, with certain additions 
and modifications. Following are the changes that have been 
or are being effected : 

1. Two .sub-systems have been created, one for steroid 
structures and the other for processes which produce 
steroid structures. 



2. Patents relating to seco, nor, homo- and hetero steroids 
are within the scope of the new ICIREPAT system and 
are being added to the system. 

3. The new system does not at this time include U.S. pat- 
ents Issued prior to 1965. It Is anticipated that U.S. 
patents from 1961-1964 will be added. To date, no plans 
have been made for the Indexing of non-patent literature. 

4. Foreign patents relating to structures and processes 
within the scope of the sub-systems are being Indexed by 
cooperating foreign patent offices. 

5. The ICIREPAT structure sub-system Includes substan- 
tially the same capabilities for searching compounds as 
the old system ; the card format, however, has been 
modified. 

6. Both the manual and the code sheet have been revised 
to reflect these additions and modifications as well as 
a number of other minor changes. The manual Is still 
under revision ; however, draft copies are available to 
users of the system. 

The ICIREPAT System ST Is offered for public use under 
the conditions and procedures prescribed herein. 

This system Is available as a punched card file for an initial 
fee of $40.00. The Instruction manual Is still under revision ; 
however, as noted above, draft copies are provided with the 
card file. A renewal fee of $35.00 per year entitles the sub- 
scriber to receive cards for newly Issuing patents as well as 
for older documents (I.e., those indicated In Items 2, 3 and 
4 above) as these cards become available. • 

This flle which presently exists for mechanized searching 
consists of: 



Field 



Class Subclass File content ' 



Steroid. 



,«„ f 239.5+ 1,937 U.S. Patents. 
-^ I 397+ 1,111 Foreign Patents. 



' Approximate number of documents in the files as of October 1, 1972. 

A substantial portion of the Instruction manual is devoted 
to the technique of preparing the code sheet which Is the 
means provided for expressing the search query for machine 
handling. Effective use of the mechanized search system and 
the achievement of competent results are dependent upon 
understanding and care in applying the coding Information 
offered In this publication. 

The Patent Office will accept requests for machine searches 
submitted on code sheets prepared In accordance with Instruc- 
tions contained In the aforedescribed manual. Requests re- 
ceived in any other form will not be accepted, as the Patent 
Office will not assume the responsibility for the formulation 
of a search query or the representation of a query In coded 
form. The Patent Office will, however, provide assistance to 
persons seeking aid in resolving specific questions which may 
arise In completing the code sheet prior to submitting the 
search request. The code sheet serves as the query form for 
searches on this system. 

One or more Examiners have been designated to provide 
such assistance. A request for a conference on mechanized 
search questions In the field of steroids may be directed to 
the Supervisory Primary Examiner of Group Art Unit 124. 

A search constitutes all of the machine and related opera- 
tions required to retrieve from a data file, information con- 
tained therein which fulfills the search instructions repre- 
sented on a code sheet. When several code sheets are required 
to cover the full search need, each code sheet will constitute 
a search. A search will be considered to be complete and proper 
even under circumstances In which proper operation of the 
system produces output representing documents which, while 
fulfilling the coded requirements, are determined by the user 
to lack pertinence or relevance in any or a sufficient degree; 
or, conversely, falls to produce an output. 

The cost per search, which Includes a list of the document 
references retrieved. Is $5.00. Copies of all U.S. and foreign 
patent references will be supplied, if requested as part of the 
search service, for additional cost at established rates, charge- 
able to a deposit account maintained by the search purchaser 
with the Patent Office. 

Code sheets for the machine search file may be obtained 
from the Patent Office. Address requests to the Patent Office. 
Office of Patent Classification. Washington. D.C. 20231. 

Requests for searches In the original Steroid system will 
still be accepted, since the revised ICIREPAT system at pres- 
ent Includes among the U.S. patents only those which Issued 



1 



s& 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



dating for which terminated with the Issues of January 1972. Notice of Mar. ^b. i.».u, », 

Is as follows : 



5940 U.S. patents 

111 Foreign patents 
4179 Nonpatent literature Items 

The Instruction manual Is entitled "Revised Steroid Search 
System Coding Manual," R&D Report No. 19, Copies of this 
manual and code sheets may also be obtained from the Office 
of Patent Classification, and searches may be submitted ac- 
cording to the same procedures and guidelines set forth above 
for the new ICIREPAT Steroid system. 

EDWIN R. MACKERT. 
Acting Administrator, 
Office of Patent Classification. 

[905 O.G. 70] 



effect. 

Mar. 27, 1970. 



POSTAL SERVICE EMERGENCY 



(181) 



EMERGENCY SlTU.\TION IN THE 

U.S.. Postal Sbrvicb 

In view of the present emergency situation In U.S. postal 
service, the U.S. Patent Office is taking the following actions. 

In regard to pending applications, the time for taKlng any 
action or paying any fee expiring during the period beginning 
March 16 and ending April 15, 1970, both dates inclusive. Is 
hereby extended for ONE MONTH. However, no extension 
shall exceed a maximum period for response provided for In 
the Statutes. 

U.S. Department of Commerce Field Offices have been des- 
ignated, on an emergency basis, as receiving stations for the 
U.S. Patent Office. All papers should be enclosed in a sealed 
envelope and deposited In a Field Office. Such papers will be 
considered as received In the U.S. Patent Office on the day of 
deposit. The Field Office will date stamp each envelope so 
deposited, and applicants or their representatives should as- 
sure the legibility of the date stamp. Field Offices will place 
a corresponding date stamp on receipt cards provided by the 
depositor, which must completely Identify the papers de- 
posited. 

Field Office deposits should, if possible, be limited to such 
papers wherein the Patent Statutes do not provide a remedy 
for failure to obtain a particular date. Examples of these 
types of papers are : checks in payment of issue fees, new 
application papers wherein priority dates or statutory bars 
may be involved, amendments where the six month statutory 
period for response is about to expire, etc. 

The Field Office in New York designated to receive papers 
for the U.S. Patent Office Is located at : 

41st Floor. Federal Office Bldg. 
26 Federal Plaza, Foley Square 
New York, N.Y. 
The designated Field Office In Hartford, Connnectlcut Is 
located at : 

Room 610-B. Federal Office Bldg. 
450 Main St. 
Hartford. Conn. 
The addresses of Field Offices in other cities are listed In 
local directories and are available upon Inquiry to the Com- 
missioner of Patents. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Mar. 19, 1970. Acting Commissioner of Patents. 

[872 O.G. 1383] 



WIEI-IAM E, S( IllYEER. JR. 

Commis.-<ioncr of Patents. 

[873 0.(J. 3191 



(183) File History of Arri.u .xtions Akkected 

in I'OST.M. ExtKK(;EN< V 

As a result of the postal emergem-y. tlie time for taking 
any action or paying any fee In the U.S. Patent Office expir- 
ing between the dates of March 16, 1970 and April 15. 1970, 
both dates inclusive, was automatically extende.l for one 
month, provided It did not exceed a maximum period for re 
sponse provided In the Statutes. (See (),G. of March 24. 1970 
or March 31, 1970, 872 O.G. 1383 and April 7. 1970. HT.i O.G. 

TM 2.) 

Since this extension of time was automatic there will be 
nothing In the individual files to Indicate that a paper filed 
during that period was. In fact, timely though it was received 
later than its apparent due date. 

In order to provide a comi)lrte history In the afTe-te.l fll.-s 
and to dispel any question as to abandonment In the record 
of a patented file, applicants or their ntt-.rneys are requested 
to file a paper explaining these circunistancs. A separate 
paper should be filed in .-ach case so affected (identified by 
Serial No., filing date, title and applicant's name) and may 
be merelv a copy of the notice which authorized the one 
month extension or should speclfl.-ally refer to and identify 

that notice, 

KKMIAUI) A. WAHE. 

Apr. 27. 1970. Assistant Commissioner of Patents. 

[874 O.G. fiSS] 



(184) U.S. DEr.XRTMKNT OF CoMMERrE FIELD OFFICES TO 

Sekve as Ue( eivim; Stations Only i.s Declared 
Emerc.encies 

During the recent postal emergency. Field Offices of the 
U.S. Department of Commerce were designated as receiving 
stations for the U.S. Patent Office (according to the Notices 
of March 19, 1970, S72 O.G. i:?s:i and March 26, 1970, 873 
O.G. TM 2). In view of the subsequent resumption of normal j 
postal operations, that emergency arrangement was discon- 
tinued In accordance with the notice of March 27. 1970. 873 
O.G. 319. After April 15, 1970, the normal practice with re- 
spect to the filing of all letters and other papers relating to 
patent and trademark matters In the U.S. Patent Office was 
resumed. 

The Patent Office has received suggestions proposing that 
the Field Offices continue to serve as receiving stations for 
the U.S. Patent Office. These suggestions have received care- 
ful and svmpathetlc consideration. However, it has been con- 
cluded that anv activities of the Field Offices In this connec- 
tion must be restricted. In the future, to any emergency 
officially announced by the Patent Office as requiring such 

action. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 

Apr. 27, 1970. Acting Commissioner of Patents. 

[874 O.G. 6.S81 



(185) 



(182) Patent Office — Postal Service 

In view of the return to normal operations of the United 
States postal service, the Notice of Mar. 19, 1970 (published 
In the Official Gazette of Mar. 24, 1970, vol. 872, No. 4) is 
hereby revised. 

After Apr. 15, 1970, the U.S. Department of Commerce Field 
Offices will no longer be designated as receiving stations for 
the U.S. Patent Office. Accordingly, after the abovenoted date, 
all letters or other papers relating to patent and trademark 
cases win be considered as .-ecelved In the U.S. Patent Office 
only if they are filed In accordance with Rule 6 of the Rules 
of Practice in Patent Cases as amended Nov. 26, 1969. 



Patents and Trademarks 

Relief in Cases Affected hfj the Po.«tal Emergency 
of March t'.no 



On June 30, 1971, President Nixon signed Into law Public 

Law 92-34. , ^ «. , „„ 

Public Law 92-34 requires claims for the benefit of an 
earlier filing date (Section 1.) and requests for such other 
relief as may be appropriate (Sec. 2.) to be filed in the Patent 
Office within 6 months after enactment, that Is by December 
30 1971 Failure to file a statement within the noted period 
will result In loss of right to take advantage of the benefits 
of the law. Further explanation or evidence may be required 
at a subsequent time. Public Law 92-34 provides relief only 
for situations caused by the postal emergency which began 



JANUARY 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



53 



on March 18, 1970, and ended on or about March 30, 1970, 
and for which there Is no remedy under existing law. 

The following explanation Is designed to serve as a guide 
for persons desiring relief under the law. 

The verified statement required to be filed under sections 
1 and 2 of the law may be by any of the following : 

(a) Appllcant(s) for patent or trademark registration; 

(b) Patentee(s) or trademark registrant; 

(c) Owner(s) of record. 

In cases involving plural Inventors, statements made under 
(a) or (b) must be signed by all Inventors. 

The verified statement must specify the particular earlier 
date of receipt In the Patent Office to which the applicant, 
patentee or trademark registrant, or owner of record believes 
his application, fee or other paper would be entitled except 
for the delay caused by the postal emergency of March, 1970. 
The statement must be verified, that Is, In the form of an oath 
or declaration. (37 CFR 1.68 (Patent Rule 68) and 2.20 
(Trademark Rule 2.20).) 

Evidence will not normally be required or considered by the 
Patent Office regarding a claimed filing date of March 18, 
1970, or later. In applications actually filed before June 1, 
1970. Claims for earlier filing dates In cases actually filed after 
June 1, 1970. or claiming a date prior to March 18, 1970, will 
be considered prima facie unreasonable unless an acceptable 
explanation of the basis for the claim Is filed In the Patent 
Office with the claim or within 1 month or such longer time as 
may be prescribed by the Commissioner. Any claim not ac- 
cepted by the Patent Office because it Is obviously defective 
on Its face or unreasonable may be subjected to further review 
by petition to the Commissioner. 

The statement should adequately Identify the Involved 
application, patent, or trademark registration by Including the 
name of the applicant, patentee or registrant, title of the 
invention or an identification of the mark, serial number, filing 
date, group art unit number and any other Identifying data 
such as status of the case (e.g., awaiting first action, amend- 
ment, brief, etc.). Acceptable statements will be acknowledged, 
made of record and retained In the Patent Office files. 

When practical, earlier filing dates accorded under this law. 
as well as the originally granted filing dates, will be Identified 
on ensuing patents and trademark registrations. These dates 
will also be included In the Official Gazette In connection 
with patents, trademark registrations and trademarks pub- 
lished for opposition. In other cases, such as applications In 
Issue prior to filing of a claim, the patent or trademark regis- 
tration number and claimsd filing dates will be published in 
the Official Gazette after December 30, 1971. 

Patents Issued with earlier filing dates afforded by this law 
win not be effective as prior art as of such earlier filing dates 
under subsection 102(e) of title 35 of the United States Code. 
In a pending patent application In which a claim for an ear- 
lier filing date has been acknowledged under this law. appli- 
cants need not file a Rule 131 affidavit to overcome a reference 
having an effective filing date between the 'earlier " and the ac- 
tual filing date of the application. Intervening references of this 
type will be cited but not applied by the examiner. Although 
a statement claiming an earlier date is accepted by the Patent 
Office, the claimed earlier date may be called into question in 
subsequent inter partes proceeding in the Patent Office or 
in the courts. In these proceedings, the applicant or owner 
may be required to present further evidence establishing the 
filing date to which the application Is entitled. In such cases 
a definite determination shall be made as to whether the ap- 
plicant is entitled to the earlier date under the law. 

In cases where a patent application or an application for 
registration or late renewal of a trademark Is determined to 
have become abandoned for failure to meet a statutory time 
limit because of the postal emergency, the application will 
automatically be restored to pending status by the acceptance 
of the request, and prosecution or other processing of the 
application will be resumed. Similarly, if a trademark regis- 
tration is determined to have been cancelled for failure to 
meet the statuory time limit within which to file the affidavit 
required under section 8 of the Trademark Act (15 U.S.C. 
1058a) because of the said emergency, the order for cancel- 
lation will be rescinded. 

As explained In the notice of January 26, 1971 (882 O.G. 
1342), applicants who may be entitled to earlier filing dates 
should note that a change in their U.S. filing date might. In 
turn, alter the date of expiration of the 6- and 12-moDth 



periods for filing applications abroad under provisions of the 
Paris Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property. 

WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, Jr., 

Commitaioner of Patentt. 

Dated : July 14, 1971. 

James H. Wakelin, Jr., '^ 
Assistant Secretary for Science 
and Technology. 

[FR Doc. 71-10469 ; Filed 7-22-71 ; 8 : 52 a.m.] 

J6 F.R. lS69k; July iS. 1971 



(186) 



[889 O.G. 1064] 



MISCELLANEOUS 

Joi.NT United States Republic of the 
Philippines Program 



I am pleased to announce the availability of an exchange 
program on examination results between the United States' 
and the Republic of the Philippines. The program Involves 
patent applications filed In the United States which are sub- 
sequently followed by corresponding applications filed In the 
Republic of the Philippines and patent applications filed in 
the Philippines subsequently followed by corresponding appli- 
cations filed in the United States. 

The program would operate as follows : 

The applicant would file his application In the U.S. Patent 
Office which would process the application in the normal man- 
ner and examine the application In the usual time sequence. 

If the applicant should later file a corresponding appli- 
cation In the Philippines Patent Office, he may elect to use 
the special filing procedure. Under this special filing pro- 
cedure, applicant files his application In the Philippines ac- 
companied by a notice of election to participate in the special 
procedure; which notice of election contains a certification 
that the description (excluding references to related appli- 
cations), claims and drawings are Identical to those of the 
corresponding application originally filed In the United States. 
The earlier filed application must be fully Identified : and. In 
applications without a claim of priority, a certified copy of 
the earlier filed U.S. application must be submitted to the 
Philippines Patent Office. In addition, applicant must also 
agree that all amendments to his U.S. application will also 
be made with respect to his application filed in the Philippines. 

In the U.S. Patent Office, applicant will regularly file two 
copies of each amendment, one copy must be marked "Copy 
for Philippines Patent Office." Upon termination of prosecu- 
tion the U.S. Patent Office shall remove all copies so marked 
from the U.S. file and promptly forward the same to the 
Philippines Patent Office. 

Election forms for participation in this special program 
must be signed in duplicate and simultaneously accompany 
the application to be filed in the Philippines. 

Upon receipt of properly filed notice of election, the Philip- 
pines Patent Office would notify the U.S. Patent Office of the 
election bv forwarding one copy of the election forms to the 
U.S. Patent Office. The Philippines Office would defer action 
on the Philippines application pending receipt of information 
as to the disposition of the application by the U.S. Patent 
Office. If no such information is received by the Philippines 
Office within a reasonable amount of time from the date of 
filing In the Philippines, the Philippines Office may, either on 
its own initiative, or applicant's request, inquire as to the 
status of the U.S. application and. if desired, proceed with its 
own Independent examination. 

Upon disposal of the application by the U.S. Patent Office, 
appropriate information will be sent to the Philippines Patent 
Office which will include all necessary identifying data, 
whether allowed or abandoned, notice of allowance, copies of 
documents cited during examination, a copy of the last office 
action and. when necessary, any earlier actions which may 
be included bv reference in the last action. The Philippines 
Office would then make their own complete office action based 
upon the claims as amended with the U.S. Patent Office, per- 
forming whatever checks desired and search for copending 
interfering applications. Alternatively, the Philippines may 
request applicant to show cause why the results of the US 
examination should not be accepted In the Philippines. All 
avenues of appeal would remain open to the applicant. 



54 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



Where copending applications are cited and applied during ceedlngs In his favor would render the express abandonment 

ineffective "but would not result in the issuance of an en 
forceable patent. Instead, a normal Notice of Allowance would 
be Issued except that the applicant would be notififd that when 



examination in the U.S. Patent Office, full examination would 
not be forwarded to the Philippines Patent Office, and the 
fact that a U.S. copending application was cited would be 
noted as a matter of information, since such references would 
be inapplicable in the Philippines. 

Where the application originates in the Philippines Patent 
Office and is subsequently filed in the U.S. Patent Office, a 
similar procedure as outlined above consonant with U.S. Law 
will be followed. 

It is believed that this program will facilitate the handling 
of U.S. origin applications filed in the Republic of the Philip- 
pines resulting in a savings in time and expense of prosecu- 
tion to U.S. applicants. 

Election forms for participation in this special program are 
now available from The Foreign Exchange Section. Office of 

Patent Services. 

GERALD D. O'BRIEN. 

Assistant Commissioner. 

[847 O.G. 331 (Feb. 13, 1968)] 



(187) 



TITLE 37 — PATENTS, TRADEMARKS, 
AND COPYRIGHTS 



Chapter 1 — P.\tent Office, Department of Commerce 

part 1 rules of practice in patent casks 

part a forms for patent cases 



Amendment of Rules re yew Defensive Publication 
Program; Additional Form 

Section 1.11, 1.14, 1.101, 1.103 and 1.108 of Title 37 CFR 
(Patent Rules 11, 14, 101, 103 and 108) are amended or 
revised and a new { 1.139 (Patent Rule 139) is added to take 
effect May 1, 19G8, for the purpose of instituting a new de- 
fensive publication program. A new section 3.50 is added for 
the purpose of implementing the new program. 

The general substance of the proposed revisions and addi- 
tions was published in the Federal Register of February 20, 
1968 (38 F.R. 3189). A hearing was held on March 27, 1968, 
and all persons, who desired to, were invited to attend and 
to submit their views, objections, recommendations or sug- 
gestions. Both oral and written comments were carefully con- 
sidered. The sections are being revised substantially as pub- 
lished with a few additional changes. 

This program is Intended to provide better service to the 
public by making available the technical disclosure of certain 
applications in which the owner may prefer to publish an 
abstract in lieu of obtaining an examination by the Patent 
Office. The defensive publication would be in the form of an 
abstract of the technical disclosure, printed In the Official 
Gazette and made a part of the Patent Office search files. 
This program will be open to any applicant having an ap- 
plication awaiting action by the Patent Office and who files a 
written request no later than eight (8) months after the 
earliest U.S. effective filing date of the designated application 
and agrees to the conditions of the program, including waiv- 
ing his patent rights based on the designated application, 
opening the complete application to Inspection by the general 
public upon publication of the abstract, expressly abandoning 
his application, the abandonment to take effect five (5) years 
after the earliest U.S. effective filing date of the application 
unless within that period interference proceedings have been 
Initiated, and waiving his rights to a patent on a continuing 
application filed after the expiration of thirty (30) months 
from the earliest U.S. effective filing date of the designated ap- 
plication. Until November 1, 1968, this program icill be open 
to any pending application awaiting first action by the Patent 
Office at the time of the request without regard to the filing 
date of that application. 

In accordance with existing rules and procedures inter- 
ferences may be declared with applications and patents. Dur- 
ing the period beginning with the suggestion of claims by 
the Patent Office or the filing of claims by the applicant 
copied from a patent and ending with the termination of 
proceedings if an interference is declared or the mailing of a 
decision refusing to declare the interference, abandonment by 
reason of the expiration of the five year period will be stayed. 
Since the applicant has waived his patent rights and agreed 
to a defensive publication, termination of interference pro- 



the issue fee is remitted a disclaimer of the entire term of 
the patent to be granted in accordance with the second para 
graph of 35 U.S.C. 253 should be included. 

No special fees will be required for entrance into this pro 
gram. The applicant will be permitted to Include with his 
request a replacement or expanded abstract of the technical 
disclosure of up to two hundred (200) words. Acceptance of 
a request to enter this program will bo contingent upon screen 
Ing by the Patent Office to exclude such material that may be 
considered advertising, frivolous, scandalous, against pul)lic 
policy, subject to national security controls, etc. Acceptance 
of a designated application in this program is not Intended to 
preclude the examination of any continuing application filed 
under 35 U.S.C. 120 within thirty (30) months after the 
earliest effective U.S. filing date of the designated application. 

Upon receipt and approval of the request the application 
abstract will be published in the Official CJazette. Publi- 
cation of the abstract in the Official Gazette would be in 
a separate section identifying the application as l)eing open 
for Inspection by the general public and indicating that it is 
subject to the New Defensive Publication Program. 

Following publication the application would he filed in 
the Record Section of the Patent Reference Branch where it 
will be available for inspection upon written request. Copies 
of the application will be furnished by the Patent Office upon 
request and payment of fee. The application abstract and 
suitable drawing copies would then be made a part of the 
official search files. 

After the defensive publication has appeared in tlie Official 
Gazette the abstract and suitable drawing copies will he 
available as prior art from the date of publication under 
35 U.S.C. 102(a) or 102(b) as a printed publication. Also, 
at this time the application will lie available ;is prior art under 
35 U.S.C. 102(a) as evidence of prior knowledge from the 
actual date of filing the application in the Vatent Office. 



EDWARD J. BREN"NER, 

Commissioner of Patents. 
Approved : Apr. 9. .1908. 
JOHN F. KINCAID, 
Assigtant Secretary for 
Science and Technology. 

Published in 33 F.R. 5625; .Ipr. 11, 1968 

[849 O.G. 1221] 



(188) Stidy of Computer Program Protection 
Request for Comments 

The President's Commission on the Patent System, estab- 
lished by Executive Order No. 11215 on April 8, 1905, sub- 
mitted Its final report to the President on November 17. 1900. 
Included among the recommendations of the Commission Is 
the following regarding computer programs : 

A series of Instructions which control or condition the 
operation of a data processing machine, generally re 
ferred to as "program," shall not be considered patent- 
able regardless of whether the program Is claimed as: 
(o) an article, (5) a process described In terms of the 
operations performed by a machine pursuant to a pro 
gram, or (c) one or more machine configurations estab- 
lished by a program. 
The Patent Reform Act of 1967. S. 1042 and II.R. 5924 
included the Commission's recommendation and excluded 
computer programs from patentable subject matter. After 
r review of the comments submitted, the Department of 
Commerce withdrew Its support of this Provision of he 
Patent Reform Act for further study and evaluation of the 

subject. ,_„ 

Because of the significance of the computer programing 
industry to the economy and the interest evidenced hy he 
public and private sectors in commenting on this Provision 
of the r.itent Reform Act. the Patent Office has initiated a 
comprehensive study of the need for the protection of com- 
puter programs. The study is intended to <^"^«";^P"-^ "" "" 
pects of the question. Including that as to whether there is. 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



55 



or is not, a need for some kind of protection for programs. 
The study will Investigate which of various types of protec- 
tion would best satisfy any need for protection, including 
systems based either on originality or novelty. Problems re- 
lating to the question of the protection of computer programs 
wUl be considered ; for example, the nature of the disclosure 
and other requirements relating to applications for protection, 
the merits of examination and registration systems, the dura- 
tion of protection, and the administration and enforcement 
of the various plans of protection. 

The views of interested persons are solicited on the various 
aspects of the Patent Office study, the recommendation of 
the President's Commission and any related matters. These 
views should be submitted In writing to the Commissioner 
of Patents. Washington, D.C. 20231 by December 15. 1968. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER, 
Sept. 16. 1968. Commissioner of Patents. 

Approved : 

John F. Kincaid, 

Assistant Secretary for Science and Technology. 

[855 O.G. 555] 



the Notice of Allowance to be mailed that further processing 
of this application will be "special." 

In cases falling In category No. 6. the request must be 
filed after the Notice of Allowance has been received and 
no later than the date the issue fee Is paid. The request must 
be directed to the Head of the Issue and Gazette Branch. 



(189) 



Defensive Public.\tion Program 



The open season of the New Defensive Publication Pro- 
gram, originally announced In the Official Gazette of May 
7. 1968 (850 O.G. 1) as terminating November 1, 1968, is 
hereby extended. Accordingly, until January 1, 1969, this 
program will be open for any pending application awaiting 
first action by the Patent Office at the time of the request 
without regard to the filing date of that application. 

As originally announced this program will continue to be 
open until further notice to any applicant having an applica- 
tion awaiting action by the Patent Office and who files a 
written request no later than eight (8) months after the 
earliest U.S. effective filing date of the designated application. 



Oct. 1, 1968. 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Assistant Commissioner. 



[855 O.G. 1109] 



Nov. 29, 1968. 



RICHARD A. WAHL. 
Assistant Commissioner. 



[857 O.G. 1327] 



(191) 



Defensive Publication Program 



The notice of October 1, 1968 (855 O.G. 1109) which ex- 
tended the open season of the New Defensive Publication 
Program until January 1, 1969, is lierby modified to further 
extend the open season indefinitely. Accordingly, until further 
notice any patent application which has not been given a first 
action may be entered In the Defensive Publication Program. 



Dec. 20, 1968 



RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Assistant Commissioner. 



[858 O.G. 687] 



(192) Supplemental Notice Regarding the Patent Office 
Stddt of Computer Program Protection 

Extension of Time for Submitting Comments 
The deadline set in the Federal Register notice of October 
19, 1968 (33 F.R. 15562) for submitting comments In con- 
nection with the Patent Office Study on Computer Program 
Protection Is extended from December 15, 1968, to March 15. 

1969. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER. 

Commissioner of Patents. 

Approved : 

John F. Kincaid, 

Assistant Secretary for Science and Technology. 

Published in Si F.R. ISSS; Jan. t8, 1969 

[859 O.G. 345 (Jan. 28, 1969)] 



(190) Patent Printing Priority 

In view of the backlog of allowed cases waiting to be 
printed, the applications placed In the weekly formulation 
of an Issue set aside for printing will be selected according 
to the following priorities : 

1. Allowed caises which were made special by the Com- 
missioner (Including those under the New Special 
Examining Procedure). 

2. Allowed cases that are more than five years old. 

3. Allowed reissue applications. 

4. Allowed applications having an effective filing date 
earlier than that required for declaring an Interference 
with a copending application claiming the same subject 
matter. 

5. Allowed application of a party Involved In a termi- 
nated Interference. 

6. Allowed applications In which the applicant has filed 
a request In the nature of a petition setting forth his 
reasonn for advancing the printing date. 

7. Allowed applications ready for printing and not 
covered by any of the six preceding categories. The 
selection of cases in the involved category will be by 
chronological sequence based on the date the Issue 
fee was paid. 

To ensure that any application falling within the 
scope of the categories outlined above and Identified by num- 
bers 1 to 5 receives special treatment the Examiners should 
staple on the file wrapper a tag entitled "Special In Issue 
and Gazette Branch." The special tag, PO-364, may be ob- 
tained from the Group Clerk. The Examiner shall print di- 
rectly on the tag the recitation "In Issue and Gazette 
Branch" and the appropriate printing category outlined 
above. The application Is then forwarded to Issue and 
Gazette Branch In accordance with existing procedures. 

The personnel In Issue and Gazette Branch will then set 
the tagged cases aside and make a notation on all copies of 



(193) JOINT U.S.-Swedish Search Exchange 

A program for the exchange of search results between the 
patent offices of Sweden and the United States was Initiated 
In February 19G9. The program which Is now in full opera- 
tion Involves patent applications filed In one country which 
are subsequently followed by corresponding applications filed 
in the other. 

The program operates as follows : 

The applicant files an application In the U.S. Patent OfBce 
which then processes the application In the customary man- 
ner and In the usual time sequence. 

If the applicant later files an application In Sweden claim- 
ing the priority of the U.S. application, the Patent Office of 
Sweden notifies the U.S. Patent Office of this filing by for- 
warding a request for a list of the references cited by the 
U.S. examiner in the first office action on the merits. 

Where the application originates In Sweden and Is subse- 
quently filed In the U.S. Patent Office, a similar procedure Is 
followed whereby the U.S. office requests and the Swedish 
office supplies a list of references cited by the Swedish 
examiner. 

This program, which involves only the furnishing of list- 
ings of references cited, could Improve the quality of the 
patents granted by each office. 

WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, JR., 
Aug. 26, 1969. Commissioner of Patents. 

[866 O.G. 1031] 



(194) 



Defensive Publication Program 



1 To resolve certain inherent publication and reference 
problems, and to establish and treat Defensive Publication. 
Applications (notices published In 33 F.R. 5623, April 11. 



56 

1968. and O.G. 1221. April 30, 1968) In the same manner as 
patents, the following changes are being made : 

a. Publication Is to be weekly beginning with 869 O.Q. 
No. 3, December 16, 1969, and 

b. Distinct numbers are to be assigned per example : 

T 869 001 

L Number series, 001-999 available monthly, 

O.G. volume number, 

Document category, T for Technical dis- 
closure. 
2 Defensive Publications will continue to be Included in 
sub-class lists and subscription orders. The new number will 
be used for all official reference and document copy require- 
ments. . „, 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 

Nov. 21, 1969. Aaaistant Commisaioner. 

[869 O.G. 687) 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



chapter B-Government Inventions Jurisdiction. Former 
Parts 300. 301. and 302 are redesignated Parts 100, 101. and 
102 respectively. 

Published in H F.R. 20S8S. Dec. St. 1960 
[870 O.G. 10391 



(197) DELAY I.V I.SSU.\N< K OK I'ATKNTS 

On June 9 and June 16, 1970. only reissue patents, design 
patents, and trademark registrations will be Issued due to 
circumstances Involving the printing of patent speclflca Ions 

Delays may occur In filling orders for newly Issued patents. 
WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, JR.. 
May 21. 1970. Commissioner of Patents. 

(875 O.G. 3271 



(198) 



IVVTKNT KRONT 1'A<;E FORMAT 



(195) 



Change in Leoal IIompay.s 



Tho«e dolnp business before the Patent office are hereby 
reminded that by Public Law 90-363. 82 Stat. 250. elTectlve 
January 1, 1971. Section 6103(a) of Title 5, United States 
Code, was amended to read as follows : 
S 6103. Holidays 

(a) The following are legal public holidays : 
New Year's Day, January 1. 
Washington's Birthday, the third Monday In Feb 

ruary. 
Memorial Day. the last Monday In May. 
Independence Day, July 4. 
Labor Day, the first Monday In September. 
Columbus Day, the second Monday In October. 
Veterans Day. the fourth Monday In October. 
Thanksgiving Day, the fourth Thursday In No 

vember. 
Christmas Day, December 25. 
Each of the holidays enumerated will constitute "a holiday 
within the District of Columbia," as referred to In Section 21. 
Title 35. United States Code. 



Dec. 2, 1970. 



WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER. JR.. 

Commissioner of Patents. 

[881 O.G. 1707] 



(196) TITLE 37— PATENTS. TRADEMARKS. 

AND COPYRIGHTS 
s, CHAPTER I— Patent Office. Depabt.mext of Commerce 

SUBCHAPTER .\ — GENERAL 
SUBCHAPTER B — GOVERNMENT INVENTIONS JURISDICTION 

Editorial Note : Chapter I of Title 37 of the Code of Fed- 
eral Regulations is changed by designating the existing text 
as Subchapter A— General, and Inserting a new Subchapter 
B — Government Inventions Jurisdiction, containing former 
Parts 300, 301, and 302 which are transferred from Chapter 
III of this title and redesignated as follows : 

100 Administration of a uniform patent policy with respect 

to the domestic rights In Inventions made by Govern- 
ment employees. . ^\ , , 

101 Acquisition and protection of foreign rights In Inven- 

102 Licensing of foreign patents acquired by the Government. 
Accordingly, all references to sections In former Parts 300, 

301. or 302 shall be deemed to be to sections In Parts 100, 
101, and 102. Thus, a reference to former § 300.1 shall be 
considered a reference to § 100.1. 



Chapter III — Government Inventions Jurisdiction, 
Patent C^fice, Department of Commerce 

transfer of regulations 
The text of Chapter III of Title 37 of the Code of Federal 
Regulations Is transferred to Chapter I of this title as Sub- 



Aiwust 4 1970 marks the Inauguration of certain changes 
and innovations In the form and method of producing printed 
copies of patents. Nearly 100 patents in this issue were elec- 
trophotographlcally composed for printing as P"t of » "J" 
prehensive system for developing and utilizing a patent full^ 
text library in computer processable form. Numbers of patents 
produced m this manner are scheduled to Increase until o« 
patents enter the machlneable data base. . v,.k.« 

Patents produced by this new system are distinguishable 
in appearance from all others in the following respects : 

(a) Front pape 
The first sheet of each patent presents an arrangement of 
the applicable bibliographic type of data elements which are 
itemized and discussed elsewhere: an abstract of the dis- 
closure (or a claim when no abstract Is available) ; and a 
reduced reproduction of a representative drawing figure when 
the patent contains any drawings. 

(b) Other changes 
With Identification of the patent appearing on the front 
page, the title of the Invention and the name of the >°ventor 
will no longer be printed In the heading of drawings The 
patent number, date of Issuance, and sheet-of-sheets infor- 
mation will continue to be printed on the drawings. 

All of the bibliographic type of data and the abstract which 

previously appeared on sheets containing text matter are 

* removed from such pages and consolidated on the front page. 

Data elements presented on the front page are accompanied 

by a number which appears in brackets. 

The numbers are data element identifiers which have been 
^ adopted internationally for use on patents and published ap- 
plications to facilitate the worldwide use of such documents 
as set forth below : 
[11] Patent number 
[21] Application number 
[22] Filing date 

[31] Application number (of a Convention priority applica- 
tion) ,. ». \ 
[32] Filing date (of Convention priority application) 
[33] Country In which the Convention priority application 

was filed j, , ■ 

[45] Date of Patent Issue : followed by terminal disclaimer, 

If any , .* »■ _ 

[51] International Patent Classification : basic classification 

In bold face type ; other In light face 
[52] U.S. Classification : Original class and subclass In bold 

face type ; cross-references in light face 
[54] Title of the Invention: Followed by the number of 

claims and drawing figures 
[56] References cited : List of prior art documents cited by 
the examiner, arranged In the following categories : 
United States Patents 
Foreign Patents or Applications 
Other Publications 
[60] Related U.S. Applications: 
[62] Due to Dlvlslon(8) 
[63] Due to Continuation (s) 
[64] Due to relssue(8) 
[72] Name(s) of the Inventor(8) 
[73] A88lgnee(s) 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



57 



[ • ] Field of Search : Subclasses recorded on the file wrap- 
per as searched by the examiner 
[ • ] Primary Examiner : The person responsible for review 
of the patent allowance or who. In addition, ex- 
amined and allowed the patent application 
[ • ] Assistant Examiner : the person who examined and al- 
lowed the patent application, other than a primary 
examiner 
[ • ] Attorney : the principal attorney of record at the time 
the allowed application was prepared for patent 
printing 
[ • 1 Abstract 

Element numbers have not been assigned to the Items de- 
noted by the sign [•] 

For earlier Information respecting the front page format 
and date entries, reference Is made to the notice published 
In the Official Gazittb of March 11, 1969 (860 O.G. 336-7). 



July 16. 1970. 



WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, JR., 

Commiationer of Patent: 

[877 O.G. 1] 



Disclosure Document Program 



(199) 

This notice consolidates and supersedes the notices of Mar. 
26, 1969 (862 O.G. 1) and Aug. 11, 1970 (878 O.G. 1) relat- 
ing to the Patent Office Disclosure Document Program. 

Under this program the Patent Office accepts and preserves, 
for a period of two years, papers referred to as "Disclosure 
Documents." These papers may be used as evidence of the 
dates of conception of Inventions. 

The Program ^ 

A paper disclosing an Invention and signed by the Inventor 
or Inventors may be forwarded to the Patent Office by the 
Inventor (or by any one of the Inventors when there are joint 
Inventors), by the owner of the Invention, or by the attorney 
or agent of the lnventor(8) or owner. It will be retained for 
two years and then be destroyed unless It Is referred to In a 
separate letter In a related patent application within said 
two years. 

A Disclosure Document Is not a patent application and the 
date of Its receipt In the Patent Office will not become the 
effective filing date of any patent application subsequently 
filed. However, like patent applications, these documents will 
be kept in confidence by the Patent Office. If patent protection 
Is desired, a patent application should be filed as soon as 
possible. 

This program does not diminish the value of conventional 
witnessed and notarized records as evidence of conception 
of an Invention, but It should provide a more credible form 
of evidence than that provided by the popular practice of 
mailing a disclosure to oneself or another person by registered 
mall. The program Is made available as a service to those 
persons desiring to use It. 

Content of Disclosure Document 

Although there are no restrictions as to content and claims 
are not necessary, the benefits afforded by a Disclosure Docu- 
ment will depend directly' upon the adequacy of the disclosure. 
Therefore, It Is strongly urged' that the document contain a 
clear and complete explanation of the manner and process 
of making and using the Invention In sufficient detail to enable 
a person having ordinary knowledge In the field of the In- 
vention to make and use the Invention. When the nature of 
the Invention permits, a drawing or sketch should be Included. 
The use or utility of the Invention should be described, es- 
pecially In chemical Inventions. 

The Disclosure Document must be limited to written matter 
or drawings on paper or other thin, fiexlble material, such 
as linen or plastic drafting material, having dimensions or 
being folded to dimensions not to exceed 8Vj by 13 inches, 
Photographs also are acceptable. Each page should be num- 
bered. Text and drawings should be sufficiently dark to permit 
reproduction with commonly used office copying machines. 

A $10 fee Is charged for filing a Disclosure Document. Pay- 
ment must accompany the Disclosure Document when It Is 
submitted to the Patent Office. 

In addition to the $10 fee, the Disclosure Document must 
be accompanied by a stamped, self-addressed envelope and a 
separate paper In duplicate, signed by the Inventor, stating 
that he Is the Inventor and requesting that the material be 



received for processing under the Disclosure Document Pro- 
gram^The papers will be stamped by the Patent Office with 
an Identifying number and date of receipt, and the duplicate 
request will be returned In the self-addressed envelope to- 
gether with a warning notice Indicating that the Disclosure 
Document may be relied upon only as evidence and that a 
patent application should be diligently filed If patent protec- 
tion Is desired. The Inventor's request may take the following 

form : . 

"The undersigned, being the inventor of the disclosed xnven- 
tion, requests that the enclosed papers be accepted under the 
Disclosure Document Program, and that they be preserved 
for a period of two years." 

Retention 

The Disclosure Document will be preserved In the Patent 
Office for two years after Its receipt and will then be destroyed 
unless It Is referred to In a separate letter In a related patent 
application filed within the two-year period. The Disclosure 
Document must be referred to In the separate letter by title, 
number, and date of receipt. Acknowledgment of receipt of 
such letters will be made In the next official communication 
or In separate letter from the Patent Office. Unless It Is de- 
sired to have the Patent Office retain the Disclosure Docu- 
ment beyond the two-year period, It Is not required that It 
be referred to In a patent application. . ^ 

Warning as to Limitations 

The two-year retention period should not be considered to 
be a "grace period" during which the Inventor can wait to 
file his patent application without possible loss of benefits. 
It should be recognized that In establishing priority of Inven- 
tion an affidavit or testimony referring to a Disclosure Docu- 
ment must usually also establish diligence In completing the 
Invention or In filing the patent application since the filing 
o< the Disclosure Document. 

Inventors are also reminded that any public use or sale 
In the United States, or publication of the Invention anywhere 
In the world more than one year prior to the filing of a patent 
application on that Invention will prohibit the granting of 
a patent on that Invention. 

If the Inventor Is not familiar with what Is considered to 
be "diligence In completing the Invention" or "reduction to 
practice" under the patent law, or If he has other questions 
about patent matters, the Patent Office advises him to consult 
an attorney or agent registered to practice before the Patent 
Office. Patent attorneys and agents may be found in the tele- 
phone directories of most major cities. Also, many large cities 
have associations of patent attorneys which may be consulted. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Jan. 4, 1971. Assistant Commissioner of Patents. 

[883 O.G. 3] 



(200) 



Office of the Secretary 

[Dept. Organization Order 30-3B] 

Patent Office 

Organization and Functions 

This material supersedes the material appearing at 35 F.R. 
18553 of December 5, 1970. 

SECTION 1. Purpose. This order prescribes the organiza- 
tion and assignment of functions within the Patent Office. 

SBC 2 Organization Structure. The principal organization 
structure and line of authority of the Patent Office shall be 
as depicted In the attached organization chart. (A copy of 
the Organization Chart Is on file with the original of this doc- 
ument with the Office of the Federal Register.) 

Sec 3 Office of the Commissioner. The Commissioner de- 
termines the policies and directs the programs of the Patent 
Office and Is responsible for the conduct of all activities of the 
Patent Office. He Is prlnclally assisted by five Assistant Com- 
missioners who shall have the main duties as specified below : 

a The Deputy Commissioner (First Assistant Commissioner 
under 35 U S.C. 3) shall assist the Commissioner In the direc- 
tion of tho Patent Office and shall perform the duties and func- 
tion o^ the Commissioner In the latter's .absence. 

b The Assistant Commissioner for Patent Examining (an 
assistant commissioner under 35 U.S.C. 3) shall provide admln-- 
Istratlve and pollcv direction to the patent examining opera- 
tions which consist of the organizational elements enumerated 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



58 

in section 5. This Assistant Commissioner shali be assisted by a .04 The omce of Data Systems sijal, be--Po-J»',^^^^ 
Deputy Assistant Commissioner who. amon. other .iutie. sha.i vi^^. data ^;^;-^]l::^Z::'Z:^^ ILy.^ and 

equipment evaluation studies directly related to the des.pn 

ind development of systems and programs for applications of 

techniques, except systems for printinj; patents: 



perform the functions of this Assistant Commissioner during 
the latter's absence. 

c. The Assistant Commissioner for Appeals, Legislation, and a 
Trademarks (an assistant commissioner under 35 U.S.C. 3) ^"'"•*'^**'^^ 
shall provide admi 
of Appeals, the Offl 
the Trademark Trial and Appeal Board, and the Trademark ^;-.-'/;-^;; ^,V„.„ ,„„,,„ organization unit as an Integrnl 



inTstratiU and ;: c d r^^^^^^^^^ th Board preparation or procurement and testing of «o-P"t- ''-^-^^ 
L Of Legislation and international Affairs, and supplen.ontal data I-'^f »;;;--;; ^l^^^v ^ np 
_=-. ._. »„„„„, n.o,H „nH th» Trndemark general purpose ADP equipment, except that which m.ij neap 



Examining Operation. 

d. The Assistant Commissioner for Search Systems Devel- 
opment shall provide technical, administrative, and Policy 
Direction to the Office of Research and Development and the 
Office of Search Systems and Documentation. This Assistant 
Commissioner shall be assisted by a Deputy Assistant Commls 
sioner who, among other duties, shall perform the functions 
of this Assistant Commissioner during the latter's absence. 

e. The Assistant Commissioner for Administration shall 



part of its operations : and maintenance of a comprehensive 
library of programs, including these developed or procured by 
other organizational units. 

.05 The Office of Government Inventions and Patents shall 
administer Executive Order 10090. as amended by Executive 
Order 10930 and related regulations, including the rendering 
of final decisions on the ownership of patents and the rights 
to Inventions made by Government employees, and advise the 
Commissioner on matters involving the Committee on (Jovern- 



provlde administrative and policy direction to certain admlnls^ ,„ont'pUent Policv (of the Federal Council for Science and 
trative, public and internal support .services which consist of ment latent loiu.^ (oi r ^ ^^ 



the organizational elements enumerated in section 8. This 
Assistant Commissioner shall be assisted by a Deputy Assist- 
ant Commissioner who, among other duties, shall perform the 
functions of this Assistant Commissioner during the latter's 
absence. 

Sec. 4. O/ficesi reporting , to the Commissioner. .01 The 
Director of Planning. Budget. Evaluation, and Forecast shall 
be the principal assistant and advisor to the Commissioner In Paten 
Planning and Developing the major Programs of the Patent 
Office, in formulating and executing budgetary and fiscal 
policies, appraising the effectiveness of operations in attain- 
ing program objectives, and in assessing and forecasting tech- 
nological activities and Invention developments in the United 
States and other nations. He shall direct the activities of the 
following offices : 

o. The Office of Planning shall develop and recommend major 
plans and programs for accomplishing the objectives of the 
Patent Office; direct and coordinate the development and main- 
tenance of internal program planning for support of officewide 
objectives ; and analyze proposed programs for consistency and 
effective integration with organization responsibility, for perti- 
nence to goals and objectives, for measurabillty of accomplish- 
ment, and validity and usefulness of workload parameters as 
indicators of expected accomplishment. 

h. The Office of Budget shall formulate, interpret, and exe- 
cute budgetary and fiscal policies ; establish and maintain a 
comprehensive Plannlng-Programming-Budgetlng System col- 
laborating with operating officials in developing budget 
and fiscal plans ; develop and present budget requests : allocate 
and maintain budgetary control of av.TlIable funds ; and main- 
tain external liaison in budgetary matters. 

c. The Office of Evaluation shall review and evaluate the 
performance of operating units to determine their effectiveness 
in accomplishing previously established goals and objectives ; 
review and evaluate cost/benefit and cost/elTectlveness analy- 
ses of alternatives for program accomplishment : and conduct 
or initiate the submission of such studies as needed for evalu- 
ation purposes. 



Technology). It shall also conduct research, liaison, and co 
ordinative functions needed to <arry out Executive Order 
1009(5 and to advise the Comniis.sioner on Committee matters : 
provide executive secretariat support to the Committee; and 
assist in the development and formulation, to the extent ap 
proprlate, of a uniform Government wide patent policy. 

SEC 5 OfPces reporting to the Assistant Commissioner for 
.,..,..? Examining. 01 The Board of Patent Interferences 
shall conduct patent interference pro.-eedlngs and make final 
determination in the Patent Office as to priority of Invention. 
The Board shall also decide questions concerning property 
rights in inventions in the atomic energy and space fields 
brought before it under the provisions of 42 U.S.C. 2182 and 
2457 (d) and (e). 

.02 The Office of Examining and Documentation Control 
shall develop procedures, quality and quantity standards re- 
lating to the conduct of the examination and documentation 
functions; evaluate compliance with examination and docu- 
mentation standards ; and train new examiners In patent prac- 
tice and procedure. 

.03 The Office of Support Services shall provide direct ad 
mlnistrative and clerical support to the Examining Groui.s 
in the examination of patent applications and attend to the 
processing of applications boMi in advance of examination and 
after allowance by the examiners for patent issuance Its du- 
ties include the review of in -omlng apidlcations for compliance 
in matters of form ; the origination and maintenance of appli- 
cation inventorv docuinent;i tion and status; preparation, rout- 
ing movement, and maintenance of flies; liaison with other 
organization units in obtaining and processing documents ; an<l 
the provision of other logistical and administrative support. 
04 The Examining Groups, specified below, shall examine 
applications for patent to ascertain if the applicants are en- 
titled to patents under the law and grant patents to those so 
entitled. Each examining group shall i.erform this function 
for patent applications falling within the generic category in- 
dicated by the title of the group. The Examining Groups are : 
General Chemistry and Petroleum Chemistry ; 
General Organic Chemistry: 



d. The Office of Technology Assessment and Forecast shall High Polymer Chemistry, i'lastics and ^^o'<J'"£ =,,-.-„.„,,,,.. 

continually assess the status of technological activity In all Coatlng^amiJ^ammaU^ 

countries, compare inventive activity in the United States 'j^,j„^trj,^i Electronics and Related Elements : 
relative to other nations, and forecast technological develop 



Security and Designs : . „^ , «„»rio,.ni • 

Information Transmission. Storage and Retrieval. 
Electronic Component Systems and Devices ; 
Physics: .^, ,. 

Handling and Transportation Media . t, . . 

Material Shaping. Article Manufacturing. Tools: 
Vmusemenr Hu^^ Personal Treatment, Information ; 

ileat Power and Fluid Engineering : and 
Constructions, Supports, Textiles, and Cleaning. 

SEC 6 OfPces reporting to the Assistant Commissioner for 
Appeals. Legislation and Trademarks. .01 The Board of Ap- 
peals shall conduct hearings and render decisions on appeals 
from adverse decisions of examiners rejecting claims In patent 
applications. , aw i Jnir 

03 The Office of Information Services shall advise and rep- » .02 The Office of Legislation and International AITairs snaii 
resent the Commissioner on information matters; conduct ,„ake studies and advise the Commissioner on policy «n*i^c- 
programs fostering public understanding of the American tion concerning matters which may require legislation ana 
patent system and the functions, services and administrative international patent and trademark matters ; develop an 
publicationsof the Patent Office; develop publication policies; direct the implementation of related programs; '"'i'»|''' " 
provide direction and assistance in developing new and revised liaison with the Office of the Secretary, the Department 
publications; and assure conformity with policies, regulations, state, and appropriate congressional committees ; and con- 
and standards 'concerning publications and publication prac- ,i„n negotations in technical patent and trademark matters 
tices. in establishing or implementing international agreements. 



ments on a worldwide basis. 

.02 The Office of the Solicitor shall comprise the Solicitor, 
who is the chief legal officer for the Patent Office, and his 
professional associates. This Office shall handle all litigation 
to which the Commissioner is a party and provide other legal 
services, including drafting of legislation and advice and as- 
sistance on legislative matters. Other than in connection with 
the Issuance of patents or the registration of trademarks, the 
Office shall be subject to the overall authority of the Depart- 
ment's General Counsel, as provided in Department Organiza- 
tion Order 10-6. 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



59 



.03 The Trademark Trial and Appeal Board shall be re- 
sponsible for hearing and deciding adversary proceedings In- 
volving interfering applications, oppositions to registration, 
cancellation petitions, and concurrent use proceedings ; and 
for hearing and deciding appeals from final refusals of the 
trademark examiners to allow the registration of trademarks. 
.04 The Trademark Examining Operation shall be respon- 
sible for the classification and examination of applications for 
the registration of trademarks and service marks and the 
maintenance of the principal and supplemental registers of 
trademarks. 

Sec. "7. Offices reporting to the Assistant Commissioner for 
F!earch Systems Development. .01 The Office of Research and 
Development shall identify areas of needed research, formulate 
approaches to research problems, and conduct research (or 
monitor research carried out under contract) ; and design and 
Install experimental systems, new equipment, or other prod- 
ucts of research, and evaluate their effectiveness after instal- 
lation. Major research and development efforts are aimed at 
development of automated search and retrieval systems and 
more efTectlve dissemination of stored Information to Patent 
Office examiners, the patent profession, and the scientific com- 
munity. 

.02 The Office of Search Systems and Documentation shall 
develop. Improve, and maintain subject matter classification 
systems ; lmi)roTe and maintain the examiner's search file : 
develop. Improve, and maintain operational search systems 
both manual and electronic, for the storage and identification 
of patents and patent related literature so that examiners 
and the public may readily retrieve particular technical In- 
formation. 

Sec. 8. Offices reporting to the Assistant Commissioner for 
Administration. .01 The Office of Finance shall develop and 
maintain the financial accounting system of the Patent Office ; 
perform accounting operations for the revenue, trust funds, 
and appropriation of the Patent Office, including maintenance 
of general accounts and related fiscal records, preparation of 
financial statements and reports, audit and certification of 
vouchers for payment. Issuance of deposit account statements. 
Initiation of action to collect amounts due the Patent Office, 
andtadmlnistration of the payroll system and related employee 
accounts ; and provide financial advice and opinions. 

.02 The Office of Personnel shall administer activities relat- 
ing to recruitment, placement, employee relations, training 
and career development. Incentive awards, performance rat- 
ing, position classification and wage administration, group- 
management relations and various employee benefit programs. 
.03 The Office of Administrative Services shall provide office- 
wide services including the procurement and supply of equip- 
ment, furnishings, and con.sumable Items ; space and facilities 
management ; communications ; travel and transportation 
services ; mall, messenger, and general correspondence services ; 
and procurement and supply of graphic services and admin- 
istrative printing. Including office forms and publications. 
This Office shall also be responsible for carrying out a com- 
Iirehenslve paperwork management program In the Patent 
Office, embracing forms, reports, directives and records, 

.04 The Office of Public Services shall provide the materials 
and services offered directly to the public many of which are 
Iirovided on a fee basis. These shall include recording instru- 
ments that transfer property rights to patents and trade- 
marks ; furnishing copies of patents and office records ; pro- 
viding drafting services : and maintaining collections of perti- 
nent technical and scientific information such as United States 
and foreign patents, periodicals, books, and other publications 
for use by patent and trademark examiners and the public. 

.05 The Office of Patent Publications shall schedule and 
manage the processing and movement of allowed patent ap- 
I)llcatlon files In procuring the creation of full patent text 
machine language data base and the composition and printing 
of weekly patent Issues and related announcements in the 
Official Gazette : monitor the quality of jierformance by con- 
tributing sources ; provide technical direction and advice In 
contract administration : and maintain close liaison with the 



U.S. Government Printing Office; and prepare and Issue pat- 
ent grants. 

.06 The Office of Organization and Systems Analysis shall 
plan and conduct studies designed to Improve organization, 
methods, procedures, workflow, managerial techniques, re- 
source utilization, or otherwise Increase efficiency, effective- 
ness and economy of operations ; participate In implementing 
approved recommendations ; counsel and assist program man- 
agers In developing and instituting systems changes to en- 
hance effectiveness In meeting operational objectives, but not 
including computer systems ; having responsibility for design 
and development of systems for printing patents, whether 
computerized or not, including reproduction subsystems ; have 
responsibility for design and development of micrographlc 
systems ; provide data research and statistical analytical serv- 
ices, Including mathematical modeling ; develop and manage a 
system for the Issuance of Internal administrative orders and 
Instructions ; promote development of the Patent Office man- 
agement improvement program and coordinate the collection, 
review, and submission of reportable plans and accomplish- 
ments thereon ; maintain a program for the management and 
control of reports ; and make special studies as required. 



Effective date : May 4, 1971. 

LARRY A. JOBE, 
Assistant Secretary 
' for Administration. 

[FR Doc. 71-6957; Filed 5-18-71; ^: 45 a.m.) 

Published in 36 F.R. 9078, May 10, 1971 

[887 O.G. 727] 



(201) 



Supplemental to the M.vmal of 
Classification 



Over a span of years. Patent Examiners have created "un- 
official" subclasses and digests to facilitate searches within 
the arts under their jurisdiction. A recent Inventory of the 
unofficial U.S. patents In the Examiner search file (exclusive 
of designs) has enabled the Issuance of a listing of unofficial 
subclasses and digests as a supplement to the Manual of 
Classification. 

Current subscribers to the Manual of Classification shall 
receive the Supplement as soon as It becomes available (Sept.- 
Oct. '71), at a cost to be Included In a forthcoming renewal 
fee. New subscriptions shall Include the Supplement at a 
slightly higher cost. 

It should be noted that the Supplement Is Intended only 
as an Interim publication until such time as the Manual of 
Clas.slficatlon can be completely reprinted with the unofficial 
subclasses and digests shown in their proper relationship to 
respective official classes and subclasses. The reprinted Manual, 
In the described Integrated format, shall be derived from com- 
puter stored data now In the process of being complied and 
should be available by mid-1972. 



July 27, 1971. 



WILLIAM R. NUGENT, 

Assistant Commissioner. 



[889 O.G. 1064] 



(202) PRESIDENTIAL DOCUMENTS, TITLE 3— 

THE PRESIDENT 

Memorandum of August 23, 1971 

government patent policy 

Hemorandum for Heads of Executive Departments 
and Agencies 

The White House, 

Washington, August SS, 1971. 

On October 10, 1963, President Kennedy forwarded to the 

Heads of Executive Departments and Agencies a Memorandum 

and Statement of Government Patent Policy for their guidance 



60 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



in determining the disposition of rights to inventions mado 
under Government-sponsored grants and contracts. On the 
basis of the knowledge and experience then available, this 
Statement first established Government-wide objectives and 
criteria within existing legislative constraints, for the allo- 
cation of rights to inventions between the Government and 

Its contractors. ^ ^, r. ii«,. 

It was recognized that actual experience under the 1 olicj 
could Indicate the need for revision or modification. Accord- 
ingly a Patent Advisory Panel was established under the 
Federal Council for Science and Technology for the purpose 
of assisting the agencies in Implementing the Policy, acqulr^ 
Ing data on the agencies' operations under the Policy, and 
making recommendations regarding the utilization of Govern- 
ment-owned patents. In December 1965, the Federal Council 
established the Committee on Government Patent Policy 
to a'^sess how this Policy was working In practice, and to 
acquire and analyze additional information that could con- 
tribute to the reaflfirmation or modification of the Policy. 

The efforts of both the Committee and the Panel have pro- 
vided increased knowledge of the effects of Government patent 
policy on the public interest. More specifically, the .-studies and 
experience over the past 7 years have indicated that : 

(a) A single presumption of ownership of patent rights to 
Government-sponsored inventions either In the Government 
or in Its contractors Is not a satisfactory basis for Government 
patent policy, and that a flexible. Government-wide policy 
best serves the public Interest ; 

(b) The commercial utilization of Government-sponsored 
inventions, the participation of industry In Government re- 
search and development programs, and commercial competi- 
tion can be Influenced by the following faotors : the mission 
of the contracting agency; the purpose and nature of the 
contract; the commercial applicability and market potential 
of the Invention ; the extent to which the Invention Is devel- 
oped by the contracting agency; the promotional activities 
of the contracting agency ; the commercial orientation of tho 
contractor and the extent of his privately financed.research 
In the related technology ; and the size, nature and research 
orientation of the pertinent Industry ; 

(c) In general, the above factors are reflected in the basic 
principles of the 1963 Presidential Policy Statement. 

Based on the results of the studies and experience gained 
under the 1963 Policy Statement certain Improvements in the 
Policy have been recommended which would provide (1) 
agency heads with additional authority to permit contractors 
to obtain greater rights to inventions where necessary to 
achieve utilization or where equitable circumstances would 
justify such allocation of rights. (2) additional guidance to 
the agencies in promoting the utilization of Government- 
sponsored Inventions. (3) clarification of the rights of States 
and municipal governments in inventions In wiilch the Federal 
Government acquires a license, and (4) a more definitive 
data base for evaluating the administration and effectiveness 
of the Policy and the feasibility and desirability of further 
refinement or modification of the Policy. 

I have approved the above recommendations and have at- 
tached a revised Statement of Government Patent Policy for 
your guidance. As with the 1963 Policy Statement, the Federal 
Council shall make a continuing efTort to record, monitor and 
evaluate the effects of this Policy Statement. A Committee on 
Government Patent Policy, operating under the aegis of the 
Federal Council for Science and Technology, shall assist 4he 
Federal Council In these matters. 

This memorandum and statement of policy shall be pub 
llshed In the Federal Register. 

RICHARD NIXON. 



C The use and practice of these inventions and discoveries 
should stimulate Inventors, meet the needs of the Govern- 
ment, recognize the equities of the contractor, and serve the 

^"d* ThTpubllc Interest in a dynamic and efficient economy 
requires that efforts be made to encourage the "P^<»«'«"« 
deve lopm nt and civilian use of these Inventions. Both the 
neld for incentives to draw forth private Initiatives to this 
end and the need to promote healthy competition In Industry 
must be weighed In the disposition of patent rights under 
Government contracts. Where exclusive rights are acquired 
by the contractor, he remains subject to the provisions of 

the antitrust laws. 

E The public interest is also served by sharing of benefits 
of Government financed research and devclopn.ent with foreign 
countries to a degree consistent with our International pro- 
grams and with the objectives of U.S. Foreign policy. 

F There is growing Importance attaching to the acquisi- 
tion of foreign patent rights In furtherance of the Interests of 
U S Industry and fhe Government. 

O The prudent administration of Government research and 
development calls for a Government-wide policy on the dls 
position of inventions made under Government contracts re- 
flecting common principles and objectives, to the extent con- 
sistent with the missions of the respective agencies. The policy 
must recognize the need for flexibility to accommodate special 

situations. 

Policy 



STATEMENT OF GOVERNMENT PATENT POLICY 
Basic Consider.\tions 

A. The Government expends large sums for the conduct 
of research and development which results In a considerable 
number of inventions and discoveries. 

B. The Inventions In scientific and technological fields re- 
sulting from work performed under Government contracts 
constitute a valuable national resource. 



SECTION 1. The following basic policy Is established for 
all Government agencies with respect to Inventions or dls 
coverles made In the course of or under any contract of any 
Government agency, subject to specific statutes governing 
the disposition of patent rights of certain Government agencies. 

(a) Where 

(1) a principal purpose of the contract Is to create, de 
velop or Improve products, processes, or methods which are 
intended for commercial use (or which are otherwise Intended 
to be made available for use) by the general public at home 
or abroad, or which will be required for such use by govern- 
mental regulations ; or 

(2) a principal purpose of the contract Is for exploration 
into fields which directly concern the public health, public 
safetv. or public welfare ; or ^ , , 

(3) the contract Is In a field of science or technology iD 
which there has been little significant experience outside of 
work funded by the Government, or where the Government 
has been the principal developer of the field, and the acquisi- 
tion of exclusive rights at the time of contracting might con- 
fer on the contractor a preferred or dominant position ; or 

(4) the services of the contractor are 

(I) for the operation of a Government-owned research or 
production facility ; or 

(II) for coordinating and directing the work of others, 
the Government shall normally acquire or reserve the right 

to acquire the principal or exclusive rights throughout the 
world m and to any Inventions made In the course of or under 

the contract. 

In exceptional circumstances the contractor may acquire 
greater rights than a nonexclusive license at the time of con- 
tracting where the head of the department or agency certifies 
that such action will best serve the public Interest. Greater 
rights may also be acquired by the contractor after the Inven- 
tion has been Identified where the head of the department 
or agency determines that the acquisition of such greater 
rights is consistent with the Intent of this Section 1(a) and 
Is either a necessary Incentive to call forth private risk capital 
and expense to bring the Invention to the point of practical 
application or that the Government's contribution to the 
invention Is small compared to that of the contractor. Where 
an Identified Invention made In the course of or under the 
contract Is not a primary object of the contract, greater rights 
may also be acquired by the contractor under the criteria of 

Section 1(c). 

(b) In other situations, where the purpose of the contract 
Is to build upon existing knowledge or technology, to develop 
Information, products, processes, or methods for use by the 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



61 



Government, and the work called for by the contract is In a 
field of Tecluiology in which the contractor has a^qnired 
technical competence (dem.instrated by factors such as know- 
liow. experience, and patent position) directly related to an 
area In which the contractor has an established nongovern- 
mental c-ommer.lal position, the contractor shall normally 
acquire the principal or exclusive rights throughout the world 
in and to any resulting inventions. 

(c) Where the commercial interests of the contractor are 
not sufficiently established to be covered by the criteria speci- 
fied In Section Kb) above, the determination of rights shall 
be made by the agency after the invention has been identified. 
In a manner deemed most likely to servo the luihlie Interest 
as expressed in this policy statement, taking p.irti.ularly into 
account the intentions of the contractor to bring the Inven 
tton to the point of commercial application and the guidelines 
fff Section 1 (n) hereof, provided that the agency may proscribe 
by regulation spedal situations where the public Interest In 
lite availability of the Inv.-ntlons wouM best be served by per 
mitting the contractor to acquire at the time of contracting 
greater rights than a nonexclusive license. 

(d) In the situations specified In Sections Kb) and Kc). 
when two or more potential contractors are judged to have 
presented proposals of equivalent merit, willingness to grant 
the Government principal or exclusive rights In resulting 
Inventions will be an additional factor In the evaluation of 
the proposals. 

(e) Where the principal or exclusive rights In an Invention 
remain in the contractor, he should agree to provide written 
reports at reasonable Intervals, when requested by the Govern- 
ment, on the commercial use that Is being made or Is intended 
to be made of Inventions made under Governmental contracts. 

(f) Where the principal or exclusive rights In an Invention 
remain In the contractor, unless the contractor, his licensee, 
or Ills assignee has taken elTcctive steps within three years 
after a patent Issues on the Invention to bring the Invention 
to the point of practical application or has made the Inven- 
tion available for licensing royalty-free or on terms that are 
reasonable in the circumstances, or can show cause why he 
should retain the principal or exclusive rights for a further 
period of time, the Government shall have the right to re- 
quire the granting of a nonexclusive or exclusive license to 
a responsible ai>plicant(s) on terms that are reasonable under 
the circumstances. 

(g) Where the principal or exclusive rights to an Inven 
tlon are acquired by the contractor, the Government shall 
have the right to require the granting of a nonexclusive 
or exclusive license to a responsible applicant (s) on terms 
that are reasonable In the circumstances (I) to the extent 
that the'Inventlon is required for public use by governmental 
regulations, or (II) as may be necessary to fulfill health or 
safety needs, or (Hi) for other public purposes stipulated in 
the contract. 

(h) Whenever the principal or exclusive rights In an In- 
vention remain In the contractor, the Government shall nor- 
mally acquire, In addition to the rights set forth in Sections 
1(e), 1(f), and Kg). 

(1) at least a nonexclusive, nontransferable, pald-tip li- 
cense to make, use, and sell the invention throughout the 
world by or on behalf of the Government of the United States 
(Including any Government agency) and States and domestic 
municipal governments, unless the agency head determines 
that It would not be in the public Interest to acquire the 
license for the States and domestic munlcli)al governments : 

and 

(2) the right to sublicense any foreign government pursuant 
to any existing or future treaty or agreement if the agency 
head determines It would be in the national interest to acquire 
this right ; and 

(3) the principal or exclusive rights to the Invention in 
any country In which the contractor does not elect to secure 
a patent. 

(I) Whenever the principal or exclusive rights In an Inven- 
tion are acquired by the Government, tliere may be reserved 
to the contractor a revocable or Irrevocable nonexclusive 
royalty-free license for the practice of the invention through- 
out the world ; an agency may reserve the right to revoke 



such lioense so that It might grant an exclusive license when 
it iletermines that some degree of exclusivity may be necessary 
to encourage further development and commercialization of 
the Invention. Where the Government has a right to acquire 
the principal or exclusive rights to an Invention and does not 
elect to secure a patent in a foreign country, the Government 
may permit the contractor to acquire such rights In any 
foreign country in which he elects to secure a patent, subject 
to ihe Government's rights set forth in Section 1(h). 

Skc. 2. Under regulations prescribed by the Administrator 
of General Services, Government-owned patents shall be made 
available and the technological advances covered thereby 
brought into being In the shortest time possible through dedi- 
cation or licensing, either exclusive or non-exclusive, and 
shall be listed In ofticial Government publications or otherwise. 

Skc. :J. The Federal Council for Science and Technology In 
consultation with the Department of .Tustico shall prepare 
.It least annually a report concerning the effectiveness of 
this policy. Including recommendations for revision or modi- 
fication as necessary in light of the practices and determina- 
tions of the agencies In the disposition of patent rights under 
their contracts. The Federal Council for Science and Tech- 
nology shall continue to 

(a) develop by mutual consultation and coordination with 
the agencies common guidelines for the Implementation of 
this policy, consistent with existing statutes, and to provide 
overall guidance as to disposition of inventions and patents 
in which the Government has any right or Interest; and 

(b) acquire data from the Government agencies on the dis- 
position of patent rights to inventions resulting from federally 
financed research and development and on the use and prac- 
tice of such inventions to serve as bases for policy review and 
development ; and 

(c) nuike recommendations for advancing the use and ex- 
ploitation of Government-owned domestic and foreign patents. 

Each agency shall record the basis for its actions with 
respect to Inventions and appropriate contracts under this 
siatement. 

SEC. 4. Definitions : As \ised In this policy statement, the 
stated terms in singular and plural are defined as follows for 
the purposes hereof : 

(a) aovernment agency — Includes any executive depart- 
ment. Independent commission, board, ofl^ce. agency, admin- 
istration, authority. Government corporation, or other Gov- 
ernment establishment of the executive branch of the Govern- 
ment of the United States of America. 

(b) Stateg^meansi the States of the United States, the 
District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, Ameri- 
can Sanuia, Guam and the Trust Territory of the Pacific 
Islands. 

(c) Invention, or Iniention or rftscoi-fry— Includes any art, 
machine, manufacture, design, or composition of matter, or 
any new and useful improvement thereof, or any variety of 
plant, which Is or may be patentable under the Patent Laws 
of the United States of America or any foreign country. 

(d) Contractor — means any individual, partnership, public 
or private corporation, association, institution, or other en- 
tity which is a party to the contract. 

(e) Contract— meana any actual or proposed contract, 
agreement, grant, or other arrangement, or subcontract en- 
tered into with or for the benefit of the Government where a 
purpose of the contract is the conduct of experimental, de- 
velopmental, or research work. 

(f) .Vnffc — when used in relation to any Invention or dis- 
covery means the conception or first actual reduction to prac- 
tice of such Invention In the course of or under the contract. 

(g) To the point of practical application — means to manu- 
facture In the case of a composition or product, to practice 
In the case of a process, or to operate in the case of a machine 
and under such conditions as to establish that the invention 
is being worked and that its benefits are reasonably accessible 
lo the public. 

[FR Doc. 71-12023 : Filed S-25-71 ; 10 : 41 a.m.] 
36 F.R. 16SS7-16892; Aug. 26, 1071 



[890 O.G. 1.302] 



62 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



. » (203) Public Law 92 — 132 

. [92nd Congress, S. 1253] 

October 5, 1971 

AN ACT 

85 Stat. 364 

To amend section 6 of title 35. United States Code. "Patents." to authorize domestic and International 
studies and programs relating to patents and trademarks. 

Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of 
America in Congress assembled, That section 6 of title 35, United States Code, is amended 
to read as follows: 

"5 6. Duties of Commissioner 

"(a) The Commissioner, under the direction of the Secretary of Commerce, shall super- 
intend or perform all duties required by law respecting the granting and issuing of patents and 
the registration of trademarks; shall have the authority to carry on studies and programs 
regarding domestic and international patent and trademark law; and shall have charge of property 
belonging to the Patent Office. He may, subject to the approval of the Secretary of Commerce, 
establish regulations, not inconsistent with law, for the conduct of proceedings in the Patent 

Office. 

"(b) The Commissioner, under the direction of the Secretary of Commerce, may, m 
coordination with the Department of State, carry on programs and studies cooperatively with 
foreign patent offices and international intergovernmental organizations, or may authorize 
such programs and studies to be carried on, in connection with the performance of duties stated 
in subsection (a) of this section. _ 

"(c) The Commissioner, under the direction of the Secretary of Commerce, may, with 
the concurrence of the Secretary of State, transfer funds appropriated to the Patent Office, not 
to exceed $100,000 in any year, to the Department of State for the purpose of making special 
payments to international intergovernmental organizations for studies and programs for advanc- 
ing international cooperation concerning patents, trademarks, and related matters. These special 
payments may be in addition to any other payments or contributions to the international organi- 
zation and shall not be subject to any limitations imposed by law on the amounts of such other 
payments or contributions by the Government of the United States." 

Approved October 5, 1971. 



LEGISLATIVE HISTORY : 

HOUSE REPORT No. 92-475 (Comm. on the Judiciary) 
SENATE REPORT No. 92-71 (Comm. on the Judiciary) 
CONGRESSIONAL RECORD, Vol. 117 (1971) : 

Apr. 22, considered and passed Senate. 

Sept. 28, considered and passed House. 



Patents, 
trademarks. 
International 
programs, U.S. 
participation. 
66 Stat. 793. 



Transfer of funds. 



[892 O.G. 1600] 



(204) Numbers fob Which No P.\tents 

H.WE ISSfEI) 

The Calendar Tear 1970 Index of Patents will be available 
from the Superintendent of Documents, Government Print- 
ing Office In the very near future. Beginning with this year's 
Index, Part II "Subjects of Inventions" will list each patent 
number for which no patent was Issued during the year. The 
1970 Index will also Include ali the patent numbers for the 
years 1920 through 1969 for which no patents Issued. 

ROBERT J. RISH, 
Dec. 13, 1971. Acting Aniatant Commissioner 

for Administration. 
[894 O.G. 4641 



(205) 



Changes in Patent Front Pace 



Changes In the front page format of patents Inaugurated 
August 4, 1970 will become effective with the Issue of patents 
on January 18, 1972. They relate mainly to the sequence and 
grouping of data Items and to various features of typography. 
The revised format is Illustrated In a specimen which appears 
below. 

Data elements presented on the front page are accompanied 
by a number which appears In brackets. They are the 



"ICIREPAT Numbers for Identification of Data" (INID) 
which have been adopted Internationally for use on patents 
and published applications to facilitate the use of such docu- 
ments. . 
The definitions of INID numbers for data elements whlcn 
appear In U.S. patents are set forth below : 
[15] "Number of an examined patent. Inventor's certificate 

or like granted or approved document." 
[21] "Number as assigned to the application. . . ." 
[22] "Date(s) of filing of appllcatlon(s)." 
[30] "Convention priority data." 

The separate elements comprising such data — I.e., 

application number, filing date, and country— are not 

Individually coded on U.C. patents. Only the generic 

.^ INID number Is used. 

[45] "Date of publication by printing or similar process of a 

patent or like approved document." 
[51] "International Patent Classification (preferably pre- 
ceded by "Int. CI.")." 
[52] "Domestic or national classification." 
[54] "Title of the Invention." 
[56] "List of prior art documents. If separate from the text 

of the document." 
[57] "Abstract or claim." 
[58] "Field of search." 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



63 



[60] "Reference to other applications filed or documents is- 
sued in the same country, to which the document is 
legally related." 

This generic INID number is used when the relation- 
ship of the patent to other applications Is due both 
to [62] division and [63] continuation. 

[62] "Reference to other applications filed or documents Is- 
.sued in the same country, to which the document Is 
legally related : Relation due to division (s)." 



[63] "Reference to other applications filed or documents is- 
sued in the same country, to which the document is 
legally related: Relation due to continuation (s)." 
[72] "Name(s) of Inventor(s) if known to be such." 
[73] "Name of grantee(s) if other than applicant or inven- 
tor." 

R. J. RISH, 

Dec. 21. 1971. Acting Assistant Commissioner 

for Administration. 



United States Patent 

Clark et al. 



SPFX'IMEN 



(54] PREPARATION OF PYRIDINE 

172) Inventors. Dunun Clark, Norton-on-Tccs; Percy 
Haydcn, Norlon-on-Tces; Alan Bell, Run- 
corn; John Edward Colchester, Runcorn, 

all of England 

[73] Assignee: Imperial Chemical Industries Limited, 

London England 

(22] Filed: Apr. 7, 1969 

(21] AppI.No.: 817,251 

Related U.S. Application DaU 

[60] Continuation-in-part of Scr. No. 669,733, Sept. 22, 
1967, abandoned, which is a division of Scr. No. 
493,231, Oct. 5. 1965. abandoned. 

[30] Foreign Application Priority Data 

Apr. 7, 1965 Great Britain 14,778/65 

[52] VS. CL 260/83.7 R, 252/43 1 . 260/94.2 M 

[511 Int. CI C08dl/32,C08f 1/56, C08f 15/04 

[58] Field of Search 260/94.2 M. 83.7,665; 

252/431.431 F 



156] 



Referraccs Cited 

UNITED STATES PATENTS 



3,372,128 3/1968 Maedaetal 260/604 

3,177,257 4/1965 Detling et al 260/604 



[i5i 3,624,090 
(45J Nov. 30, 1971 



FOREIGN PATENTS OR APPLICATIONS 

878.802 10/1961 Great Britain 260/530 U 

999,836 7/1965 Great Britain 260/530 U 

903,034 8/1962 Great Britain 260/533 

OTHER PUBLICATIONS 

Dandcgaonker et al. MonaUh. Chcm. Vol. 96, No. 2, pages 

614-624(1965)0 I.M73 

Jerchel et al. Liebig' s Ann. Chem. Vol. 575, pages 162- 173 

(1952).0D1.L7 

Rao et al. Chem Abst. Vol. 53, columns 18012- 3 (1959) 

QDI.A51. 

Primary Examiner— Henry R. Jiles 
Assistant Examiner— CecWia M. Shurko 
/<ftomo'— Cushman, Darby & Cushman 



[57] 



ABSTRACT 



There is provided a process for preparing pyridine wherein 
substituted or unsubstitutcd glutaraldehydcs or precursors 
thereof are reacted in the liquid phase with ammonium ions in 
the presence of molecular oxygen and cupric ions and in a 
medium comprising an alkanoic acid. The alkanoic acid 
preterably has up to 6 carbon atoms in the alkyl group, such as 
acetic acid. The cupnc ions may be supplied in the form of a 
salt such as cupric acetate. Conveniently, the reaction tem- 
perature is up to 1 50° C. and the partial pressure of oxygen is 
at least 0.5 atmospheres. 



10 Claims, No Drawings 



[894 O.O. 464] 



(206) 



Notice to Official Gazette Subscribers 



It has come to the attention of the Patent Office that some 
subcribers to the Official G.vzette have not been receiving 
all of their copies of the patent and/or trademark sections 
of the Official Gazette. Several of the Incidents brought 
to our attention involved situations where subscriber.* had 
recently renewed their subscriptions. 

This matter was brought to the attention of the Superln 
tendent of Documents who advised us that subscribers to the 
Official Gazette are notified approximately 3 months in 
advance that their subscriptions are about to expire. It was 
indicated that if these notices are promptly utilized to renew 
subscriptions, no difficulties will arise. 

However, in order to facilitate the resolution of any prob- 
lems which may arise concerning subscriptions to the Official 
Gazette, an official liaison has been established between the 
Patent Office and the Superintendent of Documents. Under 
this arrangement, any person experiencing difficulties In ob- 
taining copies of the Official Gazette should contact Robert 
Rlsh, Director. Office of Public Services, U.S. Patent Office, 
Washington, D.C., 20231. All such inquiries will be given 

prompt attention. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK. 
Apr. IS. 1972. Commissioner of Patents. 

[898 O.G. 738] 



(207) Legal Joirnals 

[37 CFR Parts 1. 2] 
Proposed Placing of .i.nnounccments 

Notice is hereby given that pursuant to the authority con- 
tained in section 31 of the Act of July 19. 1952 (66 Stat. 705 ; 
3.". U.S.C. section 31), the Patent Office proposes to amend 
Title 37 of the Code of Federal Regulations by revising 
a 1.345(b) and 2.14(b). 

All persons are lnvlte<l to present their written views, ob- 
jections, recommendations, or suggestions in connection with 
the proposed changes on or before July 18. 1972. Such views, 
objections, recommendations, and suggestions should be ad- 
dressed to the Commissioner of Patents, Washington. D.C. 
20232. No oral hearing will be held. 

The proposed changes, if adopted, will permit agents and 
attorneys who practice before the Patent Office in patent or 
trademark matters to place dignified announcements In legal 
journals, intended essentially for lawyers only, to the effect 
that they are available to act as consultants to or as associates 
of other lawyers in the practice of patent or trademark law 
before the Patent Office. 

These changes would bring Patent Office regulations into 
conformance with that portion of disciplinary rule,- DR 2- 
105(A)(3) of the Code of Professional ResponsiblHty of the 
American Bar Association, which provides that "(a) lawyer 



M 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



shall not hold himself out publicly as a specialist or as limit- 
ing his practice except (that) • • • (a) lawyer available to 
act as a consultant to or as an associate of other lawyers 
In a particular branch of law or legal service may • • • 
publish In legal journals a dignified announcement of such 
announcement, but the announcement shall not contain a 
representation of special competence or experience." 

The proposed changes, however, would not be construed to 
permit a registered attorney or agent to "distribute (such 
announcements) to other lawyers," as now permitted by 
DR 2-105. 

The sections, If amended as proposed, would read as fol- 
lows : 
§ 1.345 Advertising. 

(b) The use of simple professional letterheads, calling cards, 
or office signs, simple announcements necessitated by open- 
ing an office, change of association, or change of address, dis- 
tributed to clients and friends, and insertion of listings in 
common form (not display) In a classified telephoi\e or city 
directory, dignified announcements addressed to lawyers. In 
legal journals Intended essentially for lawyers only, of avail- 
ability to act as a consultant to or as an associate of other 
lawyers in the practice of patent law before the Patent Office 
where such announcements are permitted by local custom, and 
listings and professional cards with biographical data In 
standard professional directories shall not be considered a 
violation of the rule. 



§ 2.14 Advertising. 

« • • • • 

(b) The use of simple professional letterheads, calling cards, 
or office signs ; simple announcements necessitated by open 
Ing an office, change of association, or change of address, dis 
trlbuted to clients and friends; listings In common form (not 
display) In a classified telephone or city directory ; dignified 
announcements addressed to lawyers, In legal journals In- 
tended essentially for lawyers only, of availability to act as 
a consultant to or as an associate of other lawyers In the 
practice of trademark law before the Patent Office where such 
announcements are permitted by local custom ; and listings 
and professional cards with biographical data in standard 
professional directories are not prohibited. 

• • • • • 

Dated : May 2, 1972. - 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Acting Commissioner of Patents. 
Approved : May 3, 1972. 
James H. \V.\kehn, Jr., 

Assistant Secretary for Science 
and Technology. 

[FR Doc. 72-7160; Filed 5-10-72; 8:49 am] 

Published in 37 FR 9^88J May 11, 1972 

[898 O.G. 408] 



which have substantial Impact on Individuals dealing with the 
Patent Office Our first such effort Involves the question of 
whether claims or abstracts are more appropriate for publi- 
cation In the OFFICIAL Gazette, and this is the subject of a 
separate notice In this Issue. 

Whether this practice of public participation Is continued 
will depend in large part upon the public response to notices 
of this nature. In the past, public response to the solicitation 
of views has been rather limited and has principally been 
from those who were opposed to proposed changes In rules 
and practices. Accordingly, It is requested that interested par- 
ties submit their views Irrespective of whether they agree or 
disagree wl«^h the proposal under consideration. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
May 22, 1972. Commissioner of Patents. 

1899 O.G. 8201 



(209) 



Printing of Firm Namks o.\ Patk.nts 
ukkjue.st for comme.nts 



(208) 



Solicitation op Public Views Concerning 
Chances in Patent Office Practices an 
Procedcres 



The Patent Office discontinued the recognition of firms of 
attorneys and agents by rule change, effective July 2, 1971 
(890 O.G. 298). Since that time there has been much interest 
concerning the propriety of printing firm names on the "front 
page" of patents. 

It has been argued that when one is seeking information 
concerning a patent, it is logical to communicate with the 
attorney if the Inventor cannot be located. The argument 
continues that it would be more likely for a firm to have 
continuity of existence and to have retained the file on the 
case as compared to an individual attorney. While there have 
been some suggestions that the listing of either a firm or 
individual attorney on a patent may be unethical and be 
considered advertising, the general consensus of the patent 
bar appears to be that such a listing Is merely informative 
and Is not objectionable. 

The Board of Managers of the American Patent Law Asso- 
ciation has urged the Patent Office to revise the transmittal 
form of the Notice of Allowance and to print on the front 
page of the patent the name of the firm and/or Individual 
designated on the form returned with the base issue fee. 

It is proposed that form POL,-85(b) be redesigned to pro- 
vide for the person submitting the base issue fee to indicate 
the names and registration numbers of not more than three 
registered attorneys or agents or the name of a firm which 
includes registered attorneys or agents. An Indication would 
also be required as to whether the name supplied was that 
of an attorney, agent, or firm. This Information would then 
be used to print the name on the front page of the patent. 
If no information is supplied, the patent would not Include 
the name of a practitioner or firm, regardless of whether a 
registered attorney or agent is of record. 

Views and comments of the patent community are solicited 
for consideration in the final determination of the decision 
and procedure, if appropriate, for printing names of practi- 
tioners and firms on the front page of patents. Interested 
parties should submit their comments in writing prior to 
Jan. 1, 1973, addressed to the Commissioner of Patents, 

Washington, D.C. 20231. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 

Sept. 8, 1972. Commissioner of Patents. 



In the effort to continually Improve operations and to re- 
spond to changing circumstances, the procedures and practices 
of the Patent Office are revised from time to time. While com- 
ments are requested and public hearings held on proposed 
changes In the Rules of Practice, changes In other practices 
and procedures of the Office have generally been implemented 
on the basis of Informal and more limited liaison with our 
constituents. This has, on occasion, given rise to inquiries as 
to the reasons for and wlfdom of certain of these changes, 
as well as to criticisms and proposals for further changes. 

While all changes in procedure must take Into consideration 
the efficient operation of the Patent Office, we have determined 
that on a trial basis, we will, where appropriate, solicit views 
and comments of the patent community so that they might 
be taken Into account In shaping the procedures of the Patent 
Office. The solicitation of such views will focus primarily on 
proposed changes in practices and procedures of the Office 



(210) 



[903 O.G. 369] 



REDI'CTION IN PATENTS GRANTED 



The backlog of patent applications awaiting printing has 
been virtually eliminated. Effective with patents issuing on 
October 31, 1972, the weekly number of General and Mechani- 
cal, Electrical, and Chemical patents granted will be deter- 
mined by the availability of applications in which the Base 
Issue Fee has been paid. Applicants who desire to o^t'tl'. ear y 
patent grant dates are encouraged to remit payment of Base 
Issue Fees promptly. ^il^iam I. MERKIN, 

r.-.* in 1072 Assistant Commissioner 

Oct. 10, 1872. ^^^ Administration. 

[903 0.0. 1512] 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



65 



(211) ICIREPAT Numbers fob Identification of Biblio- 
graphic Data on the First Paq« or Patent and Like 
Documents 

The Paris Union Committee for International Cooperation 
in Information Retrieval Among Patent Offices (ICIREPAT) 
has recently approved revisions in INID Codes (ICIREPAT 
Number« for Identification of DaU) which become effective 
for use by the countries which apply such codes to their docu- 
ments on January 1, 1973. A complete Uat of the Codes, as 
revised, appears below. 

Changes in INID Codes which particularly affect their ap- 
plication to U.S. patents consist of the provision of the new 
codes [75] and [76] that are Intended primarily for use by 
countries in which the national laws require that the Inventor 
and applicant are normally the same. Use of the code [72] 
which was heretofore applied to U.S. patents will be discon- 
tinued and, in lieu thereof, codes [75] and [76], as appro- 
priate, will be used effective with the patent issue of Janu- 
ary 2, 1973. 

The purpose of INID Codes is to provide a means whereby 
the various data appearing on the first page of patent and 
like docnments can be identlfled without knowledge of the 
language used and the laws applied. They are now used by 
a number of Patent Offices and have been applied to U.S. 
patents since Aug. 4, 1970. Some of the codes are not perti- 
nent to the documents of a particular country and some which 
are may, in fact, not be used. Those codes which are not 
applicable to U.S. patents or not used are identlfled In the 
list below. 
[ 10] Document identification 

[11] Number of the document 

[19] ICIREPAT country code, or other Identification, 
of the country publishing the document 

[20] Domestic filing data 

[21] Number(s) assigned to the appllcation(8), e.g. 

"Numero d'enreglstrement national," "Akten- 

zeichen" 
[22] Date(s) of filing application (s) 
[2S] Other date(s) of filing. Including exhibition filing 

date and date of filing complete specification 

following provisional specification ^ 

[301 Convention prioritv data * 

[81] Namber(B) assigned to priority application (s)^ 
[32] Date(s) of filing of priority application (b)» 
[33] Country (countries) in which priority applica- 
tion (s) was (were) filed* 

[40] Datels) of making available to the public 

[41] Date of making available to the public by view- 
ing, or copying on request, an unexamined docu- 
ment, on which no grant has taken place on or 
before the said date * 
[42] Date of making available to the public by view- 
ing, or copying on request, an examined docu- 
ment, on which no grant has taken place on or 
before the said date * 
[48] Date of publication by printing or similar process 
of an unexamined document, on which no grant 
has taken place on or before the said date* 



[44] Date of publication by printing or similar process 
of an examined document, on which no grant 
has taken place on or before the said date * 

[45] Date of publication by printing or similar process 
of a document, on which grant has taken place 
on or before the said date 

[46] Date of publication by printing or similar process 
of the clalm(8) only of a document* 

[47] Date of making available to the public by viewing, 
or copying on request, a document on which 
grant has taken place on or before the said 
date^ 

[60] Technical information 

[51] International Patent Classification 
[52] Domestic or national classification 
[53] Universal Decimal Classification* 
[54] Title of the invention 
[55] Keywords* 

[56] List of prior art documents, if separate from de- 
scriptive text 
[57] Abstract or claim 
[58] Field of search 

[60] Reference (s) to other legally related domestic docit- 
ment(s)* 
[61] Related by addltlon(8)* 
[62] Related by division (s) 
[63] Related by continuation (s) 
[64] Related by rei8Bue(s) 

[70] Identification of parties concerned with the document 

[71] Name(s) of appllcant(B)^ 

[72] Name(s) of Inventor(s) if known to be such* 

[78] Name( 8) of grantee (s) 

[74] Name(8) of attorney(8) or agent (s)* 

[75] Name(8) of inventor(s) who Is(are) also ap- 

pllcant(8) 
[76] NBme(8) of inventor(s) who Is(are) also appli- 
cant (s) and grantee (s) 

Codes [75] and [76] are intended primarily for use by 
countries in which the national laws require that the In- 
ventor and applicant are normally the same. In other cases 
[71] and [72] or [71], [72] and [73] should generally be 
used. 
Approved : 

WILLIAM I. MERKIN, 
Assistant Commissioner for Administration. 

Nov. 21, 1972. 



Notes concerning the application of INID Codes to U.S. 
patents : ,,„..•* 

* This item is either not applicable to U.S. patents or, ir 
applicable. Is eltner not coded or not assigned this code. 

» The respective specific data elements within this category 
are not Individually coded. They are printed In a particular 
format under the caption "Foreign Application Priority Data 
which is Identlfled by the INID (:ode (30]. ... 

• The specific data applicable to a particular patent Is 
printed under the caption "Related U.S. Application Data. 
Where the relationship Is due solely to division or to continu- 
ation and/or continuation-in-part, the data Is Identlfled by 
the appropriate specific INID Code. i.e.. [62] or [63]. re- 
spectively. Where the relationship is due to any combination 
of these two speclflc sub-categories, the data Is Identlfled by 
use of the generic INID Code [60]. 

[905 O.G. 684] - 



906 O.G.— 3 



66 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



(212) 



Orgaxizatiox of the Patent Office 



The accompanying block type organization chart printed herein shows 
the present organization of the Patent Office. It is based upon Department of 
Commerce Organization Order 30-3B, which explains the functions of the 
several units comprising the organization set forth in the chart, ihe Order 

is published following the chart. 

^ William E. Schuyler, Jr., 

December 18, 1969. - Commissioner of Patents. 

U.S. OEPAHTMENT OF COMMERCE 
Potent OHie» 



COMMISSIONil OF rATINTt 






Wxt oi It* 
S«licilw 



Data Sr«t««« 



0)l.ct •( 



ASSlSTAi<T COHrtSSlOHCT 
FOR PATENT EXAMIWMG 



Dc^rr Aifti- C*«MM»*iM*f 



ASSISTANT CO* MJSSrOHeR 

FOR APPEALS. LECISLATIOM 

i TRADEMARKS 



ASySTANT CO«MrSSlONER 

FOR SEARCH SYSTEMS 

DE VELOPMEN T 

Ottwry A»it C*«Nniiti«fi«r 



ASSISTANT COHMISSIOCR 
FOR AOMtMSTRATlON 



DMwtr Aui. CaMMM>*M* 



Oowd of P»«««l 



&«^«JA«pm)s 



0((.c« oJ 
Cont'ol 



0((ic« •< 



CKAMININC OOupS 

CK«»<»try 
G«Mvai 0>ff«iie CKvaitiry 
H.f*i P»iv«M C>«««>i>nr. Pt«t>K'» 

CMt"««i l«>>a«i:a«. BU«ck«M«, 

i C>t««»>c«l Efit'taafiMt 
l<^«*<>«l EI«C»f«n.c» t ftal#«4 

tMlAMMt'M Tr«N|«i||iwi, Sfrf 

C)ac •'•»•( Cavt^Mwrf SyttMNt 

Hwrfl -^ I T>a«i»«n«ii«« 

u«^.«i Sfc«»;-«. Artkk *4*M»- 
'•cu."^ TmIi 

T'a«iiH«<M, !«>«•*>••••« 

A CU— ■*« 



OHiCt •' L«9^>i«liMI i 

iMtrnOtitASl Alfoirl 



0<1>c» of RcHOrdi 



R 






I Apw..! Boon) 



Oll.ca •! 

FlAMC* 



OII.M •( PKianx** 



WMCTOIOf PLAKHlHft 
•UXfT.f¥»LU*T10M 
t FOKECAIT 




— 


OH.ci •! 

Pl«M.Af 








CMI.ca •! 








E.«lw«tt«i 






— 


Oi(.ca •! 

TicKmImt *imi»«»"« 

t Fa.icatl 



0(r.c«»i 

>tiWfOli«« S«l*ict« 






Ptiblx S«r<nc«> 



OH.cf W P«t«ii 



0((<c* •( 
0(fan>i«i>4'* & 



M«f 4. 1171 



[870 O.G. 334] 



INDEX OF PATENT NOTICES 



Abandonment : Items 

Application at Board of Appeals 147 

Transfer of Drawings 82 

Abstracts, Patent : 

Format 1^8 

Printed In Official Gazette 166, 169, 170 

Requirements 165, 167 

Acce.'^s to Files 25,28 

Actions, OflSce : 

Abbreviated First Action 112,117 

Attachments to 7 

Carbon Copy 18 

First Page Form 10,93 

Affidavits 111, 113, 119, 120, 157 

Amendments : 

After Final Rejection 89, 107 

Hasis in Original Disclosure 121 

Claims — Brackets 123 

E.xaminers' Amendment Practice 53, 122 

Fees •t4,52 

Hand Delivery of 6, 17, 107 

Appeals : 

Abandonment of Application on Appeal 147 

Attorney Appearances Before Board 56 

Briefs 113,141,142,144,149,151,152 

Confidential Memoranda 150 

Dismissal ^^^ 

Kxamlner Appearance Before Board 146, 148 



Declaration 



101 
12 



Items 

Form 20, 33, 69, 70 

In Lieu of Oath ^0 

Defense Inspection ^®8 

Defensive Publication Program 187, 189, 191, 194 

Delay in Issuance ^^' 

Dependent Claims ^"^ 

Deposit Accounts 43,45,46,48,53 

Design Patent Practice 

Directory of Registered Attorneys/Agents 

Disclaimers : 

Statutory ^^3 

Terminal 86.94,100,133 

Disclosure, Application 63, 64, 68, 114 

Disclosure Document Program 1^9 

Divisional Application 21,67,116 

Double Patenting 90,94,100 

Drawings 21,80-84 

Drug Guidelines ^^ 

E 

Effective Date of U.S. Patent ^4 

Election of Species 126,128,133 

Environmental Quality 109,115 

Examiners' Amendment Practice 53, 122 

Extensions of Time 136,137,145,151,181,183 



\ 



145 
3 



After Decision by 



Format of Notice 

Group Number on Papers - 

Reopening of Prosecution 
Board 

To C.C.P.A. 

.\pplication Branch : 

Service 

Temporary Parallel Branch . 

Assignee. Issue of Patent to 

Assignments : 

Accessibility of Records 

Omitted in Certified Copies . 

Notification re Conflict 

Recording of Certified Copies 

Statement at Time of Issue 
Attorneys, Agents and Firms : 

Recognition 57,58,59 

Standard of Conduct 57,207 



106 
154 

21 
24 
39 

35 
40 
36 
37 
39 



185 
65 
80 
62 

103 
91 



Certificates of Correction 162-164 

Certified Copies 22,26,29,34,40,42 

Claim Interpretation 

Claims : 

Confiictlng _ 

Dependent 

Markush Group ^^ 

Method 



104 

133 

47 

128 

102 



Pe^s 44,48-52.57,80.143,210 

Filing Date : 

Affected by Postal Emergency 

Incorporation by Reference - 

Photoprints as Drawing 

Plant Patent Applications _- 
Final Rejection : 

First Action 

Non-Final Second Action 

Prosecution After Final Rejection 89, 107, 113 

Time for Response 138, 139 

First Action Procedure 93,112,117,118 

Foreign Exchange Programs : 

Philippines-U.S. 

Swedlsh-U.S. 

Foreign, Miscellaneous Matters : 

Citation for Foreign Patents 

Informal Application 

Orders for Copies of Foreign Patents 

Priority In Reissue Applications 

Priority in Continuing Application _. 
Formats : 

Certificate of Correction 

Continuation 

Declaration 

Formula and Table 

Front Page of Patent 

Notice of Appeal 



Negative Limitation 87, 99 

Non-Elected 1^9 

Versus Abstracts ^^^ 

Classification : 

Patent 16,177 

Preliminary by Applicant 31 

Supplemental to Manual 201 

Computer Programs 105, 188, 192 

Concordance, U.S. to I.P.C. 1^9 

Continuing Applications : 

Chains of "^^ 

Continuations 21, 116 

77 



186 

193 

171 

85 

13 

72 

77 

164 

116 

20 

71 

198 

145 

Patent Headhigs 75,198,205,209 

Terminal. Disclaimer 86,133 

Function of Machine — Rejection 

G 



102 



78 

202 

84 



Foreign Priority 

Reference Citation in 

Res Judicata 

Streamline Continuations 

Copiers, Coin-Operated 

Correspondence : 

Application and Proceeding 

Necessary Information on Papers 3, 14, 19, 21, 67, 73 

Telephone Numbers 2, 4 

ZIP Code ^ 

Transmittal Forms 15,39 

Customer Relation Center 



176 
95 

116 
54 

57 



27 



German Requirements in Convention Cases 

Government Patent Policy 

Graphic Symbols 

Guidelines : 

Computer Program Applications — Rescission of 

Guidelines 105,188,192 

Disclosures of Utility in Drug Cases «* 

Incorporation by Reference In Patent Applica- 
tions ^*'^? 

Model Patent Application 

Preparation of Patent Abstracts 

Preparation of Patent Application Disclosures _- 



61 

168 

63.68 



H 



Headings, Patent 

Hearings : 

Appeal 

Trademark _ 

Holidays 



75 



146, 148 



195 



67 



68 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



Items 
ICIREPAT Identifiers - 211 

Incorporation by Reference 64. 65 

Informal Applications of Foreign Applications. 85 

Inquiries, Status 1,23,27 

Interference Practice 156-161 

Interviews ^24, 125 



Inventor's Certificate 
Inventors, Change of 



M 



Machine Search Service 

Mailing Address, Patent OflBce 

Microorganisms, Deposit 

N 
Xon-Elected Claims 

Non-Final Second Action Rejection Practice 

O 



79 
130 

180 

11 

114 

129 
90 

206 



Rejections — Continued 

Items 

Mere Function of Machine 102 

Non-Final Second Action 91 

Not Based on Prior Art 87,99 

Prosecution After Final Rejection 89,107,113 

Res Judicata ^^ 

Reopening Prosecution After Board of Appeals 

Decision 1^6 

Res Judicata ^^ 

Restriction and Election 92,126,127,131,134,135 

Revival 108, 110 

Rule Changes : 

Affidavit as to Test Results 119,120 



Official Gazette 

Orders : 

Certified Copies 22,25 

192 



After Final Rejection Practice 

Appeal to C.C.P.A. 

Certificates of Correction (Rules 323, 332) 

Conflicting Claims 

Defensive Publication Program — Extension 

187, 189, 191 



113 
154 
163 
133 



Published Applica- 



13 
178 

16 
174 
212 

209 
41 



Defensive Publication 

Foreign Patents and/or 

tlon 

Machine Search Service 

Microfilm Classification Record _ 
Reference Cited In SSP Actions 
Organization Chart 

P 

I'atent Copies 29,32,204, 

Patent Files 

Patent Office, Organization and Function 200,208,212 

Petitions : 

Patent Application 57 

To Revive 108,110 

Photocopies of Application 66 

Photoprints as Drawings 80 

Plant Patent Application 62 

Post Card Receipt 

Post Final Rejection Practice 89, 107, 113 

Postal Emergency : 

Earlier Filing Date 185 

Extension of Time _■ 181, 183 

Field Offices 181,183,184 

190 



Division — Continuation Program 

Drawing Requirements 

Extension of Time to File Appeal Brief 

Formula and Table Format 

Interference Practice 

Inventor's Certificate 

Legal Journals 

Patent Application Petitions 

Recognition of Attorneys and Agents, Standard 

of Conduct 

Restriction Practice 134 

Transfer of Regulation (Title 37) 



116 

83 
151 

71 
161 

79 
207 

57 

57 
135 
196 



186 
193 
38 
30 
155 
208 



Printing Priorities 

Prior Art : 

Voluntary Citation by Applicants 175 

Rejection Not Based on Prior Art 86 

Priority : 

Filing of Foreign Priority Papers 73 

Foreign Priority of Continuing Application 77 

German Applications 78 

Reissue Applications 72 

Public Information 8,16,166,169,200 

Public Law 92-132,203 

Public Service - 21, 22, 25-27, 178 

Publications. Citation of 171 

R 

Recording of Instruments 37 

References ; 

Automatic Furnishing 172-174, 176 

Citation at Allowance 173 

Classification Listed In Patent 177 

Machine Search Service 178 

Reissue Application — Foreign Priority 72 

Rejections : 

Final Rejection — Time for Response 138, 139 

First Action Final 103 



Search Exchange Program : 

Phillppines-U.S. 

Swedlsh-U.S. 

Search Room 

Serial Number, Early Notification 

Service of Court Papers 

Solicitation of "Views 

Special Treatment of Applications : 

Special Examining Procedure 88, 92. 98 

Applications To Be Taken Up Special 97, 108, 115 

Species, Election of 126, 128, 132 

Status : 

Inquiries 

Of Application Referred to in Patent 

Streamline Continuation Practice 



23 
1 

116 



Technical Rejections o^^ioa 

Telephone Practice ^^5, 126 

Testimony. Examiner 

Time for Response: ,,« ^o. 

Extensions oq 

Final Rejection ^^^' wn 

Timely Response 

Trademarks (See Index Before Item 300) 300-334 

Transmittal Forms ^^' ^® 

U 



U.S. Patent, Effective Date of 

W 
Withdrawal of Attorney ^•'' *" 

Withdrawal of Final Rejection After Notice of 

Appeal 

Z 



143 



ZIP Codes 



^ 



TRADEMARK SECTION 



The following is a compilation of the more important 
notices and rule changes concerning trademarks which have 
been published in the Official Gazette from July 1, 196i 
through December SI, 1972. Notices which have been rescinded 
are not included. Some notices issued prior to July 1, 196i, 
which have not been specifically rescinded and are still in 
effect, are not reproduced here. 



Items 
323 

314 
321 

309 

322 



INDEX 

Trademark Notices : 

Actions, Number of Copies 

Amended Applications, Examining and Report- 
ing Dates 

Applications, Initial Processing 

Deposit Accounts, Charges Under Special Condi 

tlons 

Identification of Goods and Services 

International ClasElfication 306,307,308,322,331 

Interviews 300 

"Johnny Horizon" Symbol 325 

Manual, Trademark Examining Procedure 315, 327 

Official Gazette, Trademark Section __ 304, 309. 310, 311 

Oppositions 301,302,312 

Powers of Attorney in Registered Files 305 

Recording of Documents Affecting Title 313 

Special, Petition 328 

Specimens, Bulky 332 

Status Inquiries 316.318 

Trademark Registration Treaty 334 

Trademark Rule Changes : 

Access to Pending Applications 319 

303 



A memorandum summarizing the conclusions reached at 
the interview should be prepared by the Examiner and placed 
in the application file. The memorandum will be retained 
in the application file until the prosecution Is completed. 
Such procedure will not, however, relieve the applicant of 
the responsibility of complying with the requirements of 
Trademark Rule 2.62. 

HORACE B. FAY, Jr.. 
July 6, 1964. Assistant Commissioner. 

This supersedes the notice of February 10, 1958, 728 O.G. 
(TM 1). 

[804 O.G. TM 147] 



Allowance 

Appeal 330,333 

Application 320,326 

Attorneys, Recognition 317 

Certificate of Registration 326 

Drawing 320,326 

Filing Date ^20 

Interferences ^24 

Inter Partes Procedure 329,330,333 

Specimens ^20 

Suspension ^26 

Patent Notices Also Pertinent to Trademarks (re- 
printed here for convenience) : 

Zip Code Reminder 

Mailing Address, Patent Office 

Certified Copies, When Material Not Available _- 

Certification Desk '■ — 

Customer Relations Center 

Accessibility of Assignment Records 

Deposit Accounts 43,45,46.48 

Emergency Situation in the U.S. Postal Serv- 

-__ 181-185 
195 
212 



5 
11 
22 
26 
27 
35 



Ice 



Change In Legal Holidays 

Dept. of Commerce, Organization Chart 



(300) 



Interviews Involving Trademark 
Application 



(301) 



Oppositions Under Section 13 of the 
Trademark Act of 1946 



Section 13 of the Trademark Act of 1946 provides that 
any person who believes that he would be damaged by the 
registration of a mark upon the Principal Register may, 
upon payment of the required fee, file a verified opposition 
In the Patent Office, stating the grounds therefor, within 
thirty days after publication under Section 12(a) of the 
mark sought to be registered. 

An unverified opposition may be filed by a duly authorized 
attorney, but the opposition will be null and void unless veri- 
fied by the opposer within a reasonable time after such filing 
to be fixed by the Commissioner. 

An opposition will not be accepted unless it complies with 
the statutory requirements, namely, it must be filed in the 
Patent Office within thirty days after publication under 
Section 12(a) of the mark opposed, be accompanied by a fee 
in the proper amount, must state the grounds therefor and. 
If filed by the opposer, must be verified. 

A request to extend the time for filing an opposition under 
Rule 2.102 must be received in the Patent Office before the 
expiration of thirty days from date of publication under 
Section 12(a) of the mark sought to be registered. The re- 
quest should specify the period of extension desired and be 
accompanied by a showing of good cause for the extension 
requested, but in the event circumstances do not permit sub- 
mission of the showing of good cause with the request, it 
must be furnished within ten days after filing the request for 
extension. 

Two or more parties may be joined In opposition to the 
registration of a mark, but separate fees for each party so 
joined must be paid. Likewise, a mark may be opposed in 
each of a plurality of classes, but a separate fee of $25.00 for 
each class In which opposition is sought, must accompany the 
opposition. To be complete, oppositions accompanied by fees 
insufficient to cover each class named in the application, must 
specify the particular classes In which opposition is sought. 

HORACE B. FAY, JR, 
July 15, 1964. Assistant Commissioner. 

[805 O.G. TM 39] 



(302) 



Change in Format for Publishing 
Trademarks for Opposition 



Interviews frequently result In a better understanding of 
the Issues Involved, shorten the prosecution and facilitate 
disposal of applications. 

Interviews for discussion of registrability of the mark of 
a pending application will not be had before the first official 
Office action thereon and ordinarily not before filing the first 
response. Arrangements for an interview should be made in 
advance so that the Examiner may review the case and be 
familiar with the details Involved. 

Interviews on Friday will no longer be prohibited as a 
matter of policy but all interviews should be set at a t:me 
satisfactory to all parties concerned. 



Section 30 of the Trademark Act of 1946 as amended by 
Public Law 772, 87th Congress, approved October 9. 1962, 
76 Stat. 769. provides for the filing of a combined application 
for the registration of a trademark In more than one class. 

The present practice of publishing the mark with pertinent 
data under each class In which registration is sought results 
In needless duplication. 

Beginning with the issue of November 3, 1964, "Marks 
Published for Opposition" will be divided Into two sections. 
In Section 1, all marks presented in combined applications 
for registration In more than one class will be published with 
only one reproduction of each mark. 

69 



70 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



The reproduction of the mark will be followed by the class 
numbers and titles, and under each class will appear the 
description of the goods in connection with which the trade- j^^^^ 3^^ ^gg- 
mark is used. If the date of first use applies to all classes, 
it will appear following the last class ; otherwise, the dates 
of use will appear after each class. 

Trademarks presented in applications for registration in a 
single class will be published, as in the past, in class order, 
in Section 2. 

The same procedure will be followed In the notice of the 
issuance of registrations on the Supplemental Register. 

EDWIN L. REYNOLDS, 
Sept. 18, 1964. First Assistant Commissioner. 



these powers of attorney do not directly concern the Patent 
Office, acknowledgments are not believed to be necessary. 



C. M. WENDT, 

Director. 



(306) 



[835 O.G. TM 95] 



Publication of International 
t Classification 



(303) 



[807 O.G. TM 51] 



TITLE 37— PATENTS, TRADE>L4JRKS, 
A'SD COPYRIGHTS 



Chaptee I — Patent Office, Department of Commerce 

part 2 — RULES of practice IN TRADEMARK CASES 

Allotcance of Application 

The following amendment is made, to take effect on publi- 
cation in the Federal Register. Notice and public procedure 
and deferment of the time of taking effect are deemed unneces- 
sary in view of the nature of the amendment, which is pro- 
cedural only. 

The purpose of the change is to eliminate the procedural 
step of signing a trademark application file prior to allow- 
ance, which has been found to be burdensome and which is 
unnecessary since the allowance of the application, subject 
to possible inter partes proceedings, has already been ap- 
proved by an E.xamlner having full signatury authority. 

Section 2.82 is amended by striking out the clause "the 
Examiner will sign the application file to Indicate allowance 
and," so that the section as amended will read as follows : 

I 2.82 Alloicance of application. 

If no opposition is filed within the time permitted (i§ 2.101 
and 2.102), or if filed and dismissed, and if no interference is 
declared, or concurrent use proceeding instituted, the appli- 
cation will be prepared for issuance of the certificate of regis- 
tration as provided in § 2.151. 

(Sec. 1, 66 Stat. 793, 35 U.S.C. 6 ; 60 Stat. 427, 
15 U.S.C. 1057) 

Dated : Mar. 23. 1966. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER, 

Commissioner of Patents. 

Approved : 

J. Herbert Holloman, 

Assistant Secretary for Science and Technology. 

[F.R. Doc. 66-3785 ; Filed, Apr. 7, 1966 ; 8 -.45 a.m.] 

Published in 31 F.R. 555i; Apr. 8, 1966 

[826 O.G. -TM 61] 



Beginning with the Official Gazette of March 5, 1968, the 
publication of trademarks for opposition under the provisions 
of section 12(a) of the Trademark Act of 1946, registrations 
issued on the Supplemental Register and renewals, with the 
exception of certification and collective membership marks, 
will include, in addition to the U.S. clas.sification, the Inter- 
national Classification, as follows: (Int. CI. ). 

Such published marks, upon issuance as registrations, will 
also include the International Classification. 

In the International Classification of services. Classes 35 
to 42, are identical to Classes 100 to 107, respectively, of the 
U.S. Schedule. 

Applicants are requested to include in applications for the 
registration of trademarks In addition to the U.S. Schedule 
of classes of goods and services, the International Classifi 

cation. 

EDWIN L. REYNOLDS, 

Jan. 5, 1968. First Assistant Commissioner. 



4. 



(304) Publication of M.aterial in "Notices" Sections 
op Patents and Trademarks Official Gazette 

Effective Jan. 3, 1967, publlcatioh of material in the Patent 
and Trademark "Notices" sections of the Official Gazette 
will occur only once. 

Dec. 1, 1966. 

[833 O.G. TM 108] 



(305) Powers of Attorney in Registered 

Tradem.ark Files 



On and after February 1, 1967, communications advising 
of changes in the powers of attorney for registered trade- 
marks will be placed in the registration files, but will not 
be acknowledged by the Patent Office. The information will 
thus be available to those who inspect the files, but since 



The International Classification of Goods and Services 

Is as Follows 

Goods 

1 Chemical products used in industry, science : photography, 
agriculture, horticulture, forestry : artificial and syn- 
thetic resins ; plastics in the form of powders, llQuids 
or pastes, for Industrial use; manures (natural and 
artificial); fire extinguishing compositions: tempt-ring 
substances and chemical preparations for soldering ; 
chemical substances for preserving foodstuffs: tanning 
substances ; adhesive substances uesd in Industry. 

2. Paints, varnishes, lacquers; preservatives against rust 

and against deterioration of wood ; colouring matters, 
dyestuffs ; mordants ; natural resins metals in foil and 
powder form for painters and decorators. 

3. Bleaching preparations and other substances for laundry 

use; cleaning, polishing, scouring and abrasive prepa- 
rations; soaps; perfumery, essential oils, cosmetics, 
hair lotions dentifrices. 

Industrial oils and greases (other than edible oils and 
fats and es.sential oils) lubricants; dust laying and 
absorbing compositions fuel? (Including motor spirit) 
and jlluminants candles, tapers, night lights and wicks. 

Pharmaceutical veterinary and sanitary substances: in- 
fants' and invalids' foods; plasters, material for ban- 
daging material for stopping teeth, dental wax disin- 
fectants ; preparations for killing weeds and destroying 
vermin. 

Unwrought and partly wrought common metals and their 
alloys; anchors, anvils, bells, rolle<l and cast building 
materials; rails and other metallic materials for rail- 
wav tracks ; chains (except driving chains for vehi- 
cles) • cables and wires (non-electric) ; locksmiths- 
work : metallic pipes and tubes ; safes and cash boxes ; 
steel balls ; horseshoes ; nails and screws ; other goods 
in non-precious metal not included in other classes; 

ores. , 

Machines and machine tools; motors (except for land 
vehicles) ; machine couplings and belting (except for 
land vehicles) ; large size agricultural implements ; Incu- 
bators. 
Hand tools and instruments : cutlery, forks and spoons ; 

side arms. 
Scientific, nautical, surveying and electrical apparatus 
and Instruments (Including wireless), photographic, 
cinematographic, optical, weighing, measuring, signal- 
ling checking (supervision), life-saving and teaching 



6 



7. 



8. 



9. 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



71 



apparatus and instruments ; coin or counter-freed appa- 
ratus ; talking machines ; cash registers ; calculating ma- 
chines ; fire-oxtlngulshing apparatus. 

10. Surgical, medical, dental and veterinary Instruments and 

apparatus (including artificial limbs, eyes and teeth). 

11. Installations for lighting, heating, steam generating, cook- 

ing, refrigerating, drying, ventilating, water supply and 
sanitary purposes. 

12. Vehicles ; apparatus for locomotion by land, air or water. 

13. Firearms : ammunition and projectiles ; explosive sub- 

stances ; fireworks. 

14. Precious metals and their alloys and poods in precious 

metals or coated therewith (except cutlery, forks and 
spoons) ; jewellery, precious stones, horologlcal and 
other chronometrlc instruments. 

15. Musical Instruments (other than talking machines and 

wireless apparatus). 

16. Paper and paper articles, cardboard and cardboard arti 

cles ; printed matter, newspapers and periodicals, books ; 
bookbinding material ; photographs ; stationery, adhe 
sive materials (stationery) ; artists' materials ; paint 
brushes; typewriters and office requisites (other than 
furniture) ; Instructional and teaching material (other 
than apparatus); playing cards; printers' type and 
cliches (stereotype). 

17. Gutta percha, indiarubber, balata and substitutes, articles 

made from these substances and not included in other 
classes ; plastics in the form of sheets, blocks and rods, 
being for use In manufacture ; materials for packing, 
stopping or Insulating ; asbestos, mica and their prod- 
ucts ; hose pipes (non-metallic). 

18. Leather and imitations of leather, and articles made from 

these materials and not included in other classes ; skins, 
hides ; trunks and travelling bags ; umbrellas, parasols 
and walking sticks ; whips, harness and saddlery. 

19. Building materials, natural and artificial stone, cement, 

lime, mortar, plaster and gravel : pipes of earthenware 
or cement : roadmaking materials ; asphalt, pitch and 
bltumln ; portable buildings ; stone monuments ; chimney 
pots. 

20. Furniture, mirrors, picture frames ; articles (not Included 

in other classes) of wood. cork, reeds, cane, wicker, 
horn bone. Ivory, whalebone, shell, amber, mother-of- 
pearl, meerschaum, celluloid, substitutes for all these 
materials, or of plastics. 

21. Small domestic utensils and containere (not of precious 

metal or coated therewith) ; combs and sponges ; brushes 
(other than paint brushes) ; brush-making materials: 
instruments and material for cleaning purposes ; steel- 
wool ; glassware, porcelain and earthenware, not In- 
cluded in other classes. 

22. Ropes, string, nets, tents, awnings, tarpaulins, -sails, 

sacks; padding and stuffing materials (hair, capoc, 
feathers, seaweed, etc.) ; raw fibrous textile materials. 

23. Yarns, threads, 

24. Tissues (piece goods) ; bed and table covers; textile arti- 

cles not Included in other classes. 

25. Clothing, Including boots, shoes and slippers. 

26. Lace and embroidery, ribands and braid ; buttons, press 

buttons, hooks and eyes, pins and needles ; artificial 
flowers. 

27. Carpets, rugs, mats and matting; linoleums and other 

materials for covering floors ; wall hangings (non- 
textile), t 

28. Games and playthings ; gymnastic and sporting articles 

(except clothing) : ornaments and decorations for 
Christmas trees. 

29. Meat, fish, poultry and game ; meat extracts ; preserved, 

dried and cooked fruits and vegetables ; jellies, jams ; 
eggs, milk and other dairy products ; edible oils and 
fats ; preserves, pickles. 

30. Coffee, tea, cocoa, sugar, rice, tapioca, sago, coffee substi- 

tutes ; flour, and preparations made from cereals ; bread, 
biscuits, cakes, pastry and confectionery, ices ; honey, 
treacle ; yeast, baking-powder ; salt, mustard ; pepper, 
vinegar, sauces, spices ; Ice. 

31. Agricultural, horicultural and "forestry products and 

grains not Included In other classes ; living animals : 
fresh fruits and vegetables ; seeds ; live plants and 
flowers ; foodstuffs for animals, malt. 



32. Beer, ale and porter; mineral and aerated waters and 
other non-alcoholic drinks; syrups and other prepara- 
tions for making beverages. 

33. Wines, spirits and liqueurs. 

34. Tobacco, raw or manufactured ; smokers' articles ; 
matches. 

Services 



35. Advertising and business. 

36. Insurance and financial. 

37. Construction and repair. 

38. Communication. 

."^9. Transportation and storage. 

40. Material treatment. 

41. Education and entertainment. 

42. Miscellaneous. 



The English Edition of the alphabetical list of the Interna- 
tional Classification of Goods and Services to which trade- 
marks are applied may be obtained from the British Office at 
10 shillings ($1.20) per copy which Includes postage by sea- 
mall. 

Orders may be sent to : 

Sale Branch, The Patent Office 
Block C, Station Square House 
St. Mary Cray. Orpington, Kent. England 
Payment for the publication may be made by money order 
or check payable to the Comptroller-General, Patent Office. 

[846 O.G. TM 183-184] 



(307) 



Purchase of Copies of International Clas- 
sification OF Trademarks and Supplement 



In the notice entitled "Publication of International Classifi- 
cation'' appearing in the Official Gazette of January 30. 
1968 (846 O.G. T.M. 184) announcing the availability of the 
English edition of the "International Classification of Goods 
and Services to Which Trademarks Are Applied," at the 
British Patent Office at 10 shillings ($1.20) per copy. It was 
stated that payment may be made by money order or check 
payable to the Comptroller-General Patent Office. 

Certain modifications and additions to the Classification 
were made at the Geneva meeting In April 1967 of the Com- 
mittee of Experts set up under the Nice Agreement. The 
English version of these amendments was published as a 
Supplement to the British Trade Mark Journal of November 
15, 1907 and is available from the British Office at one shilling 
(12C) per copy which includes postage by surface mall. 

We are advised by the British Patent Office that most 
orders for the first mentioned publication have been accom- 
panied by checks for $1.20 but such checks, upon conversion 
to Sterling (after deduction of bank charges) leaves a balance 
of only eight shillings and five pence. Accordingly, the British 
Patent Office has had to write for the balance. 

The British Patent Office advises that the best methods 
of pavment are (a) by International Money Order or (b) 
by Bankers' draft payable In Sterilng and drawn on a British 

bank. 

In either of these cases the British Patent Office would re- 
ceive 10 shillings and there would be no delay in filling orders. 

If a check Is sent for the International Classification It 
should be for $1.45. Persons desiring the Supplement should 
send one shilling by method (a) or (b). or alternatively, 

15 cents. 

Orders, as Indicated In the original Notice, may be sent to . 

Sale Branch, The Patent Office 
Block C. Station Square House 
St. Mary Cray, Orpington, Kent. England 



Apr. 18, 1968. 



EDWIN L. REYNOLDS, 
First .Assistant Commissioner. 



[850 O.G. TM 111] 



(308) Trademark Rules of Practice 

[37 CFR Part 6] 
Classification of Goods and Services 
On Februarv 12. 1969, notice of proposed rule making re- 
garding the revision of f 6.1 of Title 37, Code of Federal Reg- 



72 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



ulatlons relating to the classification of goods and services 
under the Trademark Act (15 U.S.C. 1112), was published in 
the Federal Register (34 F.R. 2052) (860 O.G. TM 1). 

The proposed change would have established the "Interna- 
tional Classification of Goods and Services to which Trade- 
marks are Applied" (the subject of the "Agreement of Nice 
concerning the International classification of goods and serv- 
ices to which trademarks are applied. Done at Nice, on June 
15, 1957" (550 U.N.T.S. 45), as revised at Stockholm, on 
July 14, 1967) as the primary and sole classification of goods 
and services for registration of trademarks and service marks 
beginning on July 1, 1969. 

Notice Is hereby given that, pending the completion of fur- 
ther studies, the proposed change will not take effect on 
July 1, 1969, as was previously announced. 

The'patent Office will continue to mark all published appli- 
cations and registrations with the appropriate International 
class as a subsidiary classification under the program which 
was started on March 5, 1968. 

WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, JR., 
Dated : June 6, 1969. Commissioner of Patents. 

Approved : 

Myron Tribus, 

Assistant Secretary for Science and Technology. 

[P.R. Doc. 69-6830 ; Filed, June 9, 1969 ; 8 :49 a.m.] 

Published in H F.R. 912i. June 10. 1969 

[864 O.G. TM 53] 



Finally, the "Decisions Leaflet" of the Official Gazette 
will no longer be supplied as a separate subscription item after 
January 26 1971. According to present plans, however, both 
the Patent Official Gazette and the Trademark Official 
Gazette will have Identical "Patent Office Notices" sections 
containing notices of the various types heretofore published 
In the Gazette decision leaflet and Trademark Section. Those 
notices of particular Interest to Patent Office employees will 
be accumulated and published approximately every fourth 
week, and distributed separately to employees. 



Dec. 29. 1970. 



WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, Jr.. 

Commissioner of Patents. 

[882 O.G. TM 33) 



(309) Charges Against Deposit Accounts Under 
Special Conditions 

The practice as to deposit accounts is hereby extended to 
include charges against deposit accounts under special con- 
ditions. Charges under this practice shall not exceed $50 for 
each trademark application, registration or notice of opposl- 

°The Director and the Assistant to the Director of the Trade- 
mark Examining Operation are authorized to make a charge 
against a deposit account provided prior approval, as by 
telephone is obtained from the applicant, registrant, attorney 
or agent This practice is limited to ex parte appeals to the 
Trademark Trial and Appeal Board, notices of opposition, 
affidavits under the provisions of Section 8, and applications 
for renewal and may be exercised only In emergency situations, 
such as where a party Is unable to file the fee within the stat- 
utory period. 

When such a charge is made, prior approval will be Indi- 
cated In the file by identification of the name of the authoriz- 
ing party, the date and the type of authorization, the purpose 
for which the charge Is made, and the deposit account number. 

WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, JR., 

Commissioner of Patents. 

[879 O.G. TM 151 (Oct. 27, 1970)] •* 



(311) PREFACE to the TRADEMARK O.G. NOTICES 

In September 1970. a Public Advisory Committee for Trade- 
mark Affairs was established by the Secretary of Commerce. 
The Purpose of this Committee was to advise the Patent Of- 
fice on ways to Increase the efficiency and effectiveness of the 
administration of the Trademark Act. A report of this Advl^ 
sory Committee has been received by the Commissioner of 
Patents. After reviewing the recommendations, although the 
review Is not complete. It has been decided to make certain 
changes In trademark practice and procedure, and to propose 
changes in the rules of practice. Beginning with this issue of 
the Official Gazette and In subsequent Issues as needed, 
announcements will be published concerning changes in pro- 
cedures and proposed amendments to the Trademark Rules 

of Practice. 

• . • • • 

WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, JR.. 

June 16. 1971. Commissioner of Patents. 

Published in 36 F.R. 1S2S2; July 16. 1971 

[889 O.G. TM 2] 



(312) 



REQUEST FOR EXTENSION OF TIME IN 
WHICH TO OPPOSE 



(310) 



Separation of the Patent and Trademark 

SECTIONS OF THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



Effective February 2. 1971, the Official Gazette will be 
separated Into two parts to be known as the Patent Offlctal 
Gazette and the Trademark Official Gazette. The subscription 
prices for these publications are as follows : 

Palfent Official Gazette : 
$89.00 per year 
22.25 additional for foreign mailing 
2.00 per single copy 
Trademark Official Gazette : 
$17.00 per year 

4.25 additional for foreign mailing 
.40 per single copy 

Also effective February 2, 1971, the Official Gazette will 
no longer contain "Decisions in Patent and Trademark Cases." 
Decisions of the type heretofore found In the "Decisions In 
Patent and Trademark Cases" are published by non Federal 
organizations such as, for example, the Bureau of National 
Affairs, Inc., 1231 25th St. NW., Washington. D.C. 20037, 
and West Publishing Co.. 50 Kellogg Blvd., St. Paul, Minn. 
55102. 



The Patent Office Is adopting a new procedure to be used 
when filing a request for an extension of time In which to 
oppose under Section 13 of the Trademark Act and Rule 2.102 
Trademark Rules of Practice. All requests for extension of 
time should be submitted In triplicate. The Patent Office will 
stamp each copy of the request with the action taken and send 
a copy to the requester and the applicant. The third copy will 
be entered in the file. 

The purpose of this new procedure Is to expedite the han- 
dling of extensions of time by eliminating the preparation of 
a formal notice of the disposition of the request. Further, 
this procedure will provide the applicant with additional In- 
formation concerning the potential opposition. 

WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER. JR.. 
June 16. 1971. Commissioner of Patents. 

Published in S6 F.R. ISiSt; July 16. 1971 
[889 O.G. TM 3] 



(313) Recording of Documents Affecting Title 

The Patent Office is liberalizing Its policy concerning the 
recording of documents, other than assignments, which affect 
title to trademark registrations and applications. Under 
Rule 2.185 of the Trademark Rules of Practice. Ins ruments 
affecting title to a trademark registration or application, and 
fl'enses of trademarks which are the subject of trademark 

registrations or applications, will be '"-^"'^^d^f ^^" * '""^.Vd/r 
recording thereof may not serve as constructive notice under 
Section 10 of the Trademark Act of 1946. as amended (15 
U.S.C. 1060). ^^^^^^^ ^ SCHUYLER. JR.. 

June 16. 1971. Commissioner of Patents. 

Published in 36 F.R. 13tSl: July 16. 1971 
[889 O.G. TM 2] 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



73 



(314) Trademark Examining Procedure for Amended Ap- 
plications ; Reporting Oldest Dates of Amended 
Trademark Applications 

Effective Immediately, the order In which amendments to 
trademark applications are examined is changed. Previously, 
Examiners have usually acted on amended cases in order of 
filing date of the application which the amendment concerned. 
I.e., amended cases with the oldest filing date were "xamlned 
first. Under the new procedure, amended cases will normally 
be examined in the order In which the amendment or other 
response is received, i.e., amendments that are received first 
will normally be examfted first. 

Effective with this issue of the Official Gazette (Trade- 
mark Section) in order to reflect more accurately the condi- 
tion of division dockets, the column reporting the date of 
the oldest amended application in each division has been 
changed to Indicate the date of receipt of the oldest filed 
amendment. Under this new method of reporting the oldest 
date of receipt of a filed amendment upon which no action 
lias been taken by an Examiner will be indicated for each 
division of the Trademark Examining Operation. 



o. Eighteen months after filing a response to the examiner's 
last received action, or 

b. A reasonable period after the Official Gazette (Trade- 
marks) indicates that the date of the oldest amendment filed 
that is awaiting action in the Division to which the applica- 
tion is assigned is more recent than the date of filing the last 
amendment to the application. 

It sho.ild be noted as an exception to the above that status 
inquiries are totally unnecessary during period (s) of time 
when an application is suspended pursuant to 37 CFR 2.67. 

Applicants are urged not to file status inquires within the 
first year after filing due to the current backlog of new ap- 
plications. 



Dated : July 28, 1971. 



ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
.Acting Commissioner of Patents. 



July 15, 1971. 



RENE D. TEGTMEYER, 

.Assistant Commissioner. 



[889 O.G. TM 6] 



Approved : July 30, 1971. 
James H. Wakelin, Jr., 
.Assistant Secretary for 
Science and Technology. 

[PR Doc. 71-11532 ; Filed 8-10-71 ; 8 :48 am] 

Published in 36 F.R. H771. Aug. 11, 1971 

[890 O.G. TM 5] 



(315) Establishment of Manual of Trademark 
Examining Procedure 



(317) 



TITLE 37— PATENTS, TRADE>L\RKS, 
AND COPYRIGHTS 



Preliminary work has begun on the preparation of a Manual 
of Trademark Examining Procedure. 

Directives on trademark exanilnl- ; procedure will be Issued 
by the Patent Office from time to tli.-e and, when appropriate, 
will be Included In the Manual at a 1 ter date. The directives 
will be numbered sequentially and those issued prior to pub 
licatlon of the Manual will be designated as Series 1. These 
directives will constitute the guidelines for the examination^ 
of trademark applications. 

Trademark Examining Directives are available through the 
Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C, 20013 at 
an annual subscription of $1.50 plus 50^ for foreign mailing. 



July 27, 1971. 



ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
Acting Commissioner of Patents. 

[889 O.G. TM 22G] 



(316) 



Trademarks — Status Inquiries 



In order to expedite the handling of inquiries regarding the 
status of both new and amended applications, the Patent 
Office has adopted a new procedure. Henceforth, status in- 
quiries should be filed in duplicate and should identify by 
title and date the last paper known by the applicant to have 
been filed to the case. Each inquiry should be accompanied by 
a self-addressed, stamped envelope. The original Inquiry will^ 
be entered In the file and the duplicate will be marked with 
it response and returned to the applicant. The date when the 
next office action can be expected will not be given unless 
.specifically requested. 

Status letters have been u.sed by applicants to establish 
diligence in support of a later petition to revive should the 
application become abandoned. Under current practice, at- 
torneys have frequently submitted status letters as a matter 
of course for such purposes. This has proved burdensome both 
to attorneys and the Patent Office. Until further notice, in 
new applications, the applicant will be considered to have 
exercised diligence in connection with a petition to revive 
an application abandoned for failure to respond to the Initial 
office action If inquiry as to the status of the application is 
received by the Patent Office within either one of the two fol- 
lowing periods, whichever expires later : 

a. Eighteen months from the filing date of the application, 
or 

b. A reasonable period after the Official Gazette (Trade- 
marks) indicates that the filing date of the oldest new case 
awaiting action in the Division to which the api)lication is 
assigned is more recent than the filing date of the application. 

For amended cases, the applicant w 111 be considered to have 
exercised diligence if inquiries as to the status of the appli- 
cation are received by the Patent Office within either one of 
the two following periods, whichever expires later : 



Chapter 1 — 1'atext Office, Dei'artmext of Commerce 

part 1 — RULES of PRACTICE IX PATENT CASES 
PART 2 — RULES OF PRACTICE IN TRADEMARK CASES 

Recognition of Attorneys and Agents, Standards of Conduct, 
and Patent .\pitlication Petitions 

These rules changes eliminate present provision for the 
recognition and registration of firms of attorneys and agents 
for practice In patent and trademark cases, ami permit reg- 
istered attorneys and agents to file papers in patent appli- 
cations without the need for filing powers of attorney or 
authorizations. The changes further establish the Code of 
Professional Responsibility of the American Bar Association 
as the standard of conduct for those practicing before the 
Patent Office Insofar as the Code is not inconsistent with 
Patent Office riiles. Other changes eliminate the present re- 
quireineut for a petition or other express request for a patent 
and liberalize requirements as to inventor names. 

The changes relating to the discontinuance of the recog- 
nition and registration of firms are Intended to obviate prob- 
lems incident to such registration such as. for example, the 
lack of certainty as to the responsibility of individual attor- 
neys and agents for actions taken by registered nonpartner- 
shlp biisiness entitles, such as professional corporations, the 
I>roblems associated with the rights to firm names and regis- 
tration numbers upon dissolution or reorganization of firms, 
and the recognition as "firms" of groups of attorneys or agents, 
such as parts of corporation organizations, when the attor- 
neys and agents are not in fact associated as partners. Ac- 
ceptance of papers filed in patent api»lications by registered 
attornevs and agents upon a representation that the attor- 
ney or agent is authorized to act In a representative capacity 
is for the purpose of facilitating responses on behalf of appli- 
cants m patent applications, and, further, to obviate the 
need for filing powers of attorney or authorizations of agent 
in individual applications when there has been a change in 
composition of law firms or corporate patent staffs. Inter- 
views with a registered attorney or agent not of record will, 
in view of 35 U.S.C. section 122. be conducted only on the 
basis of information and files supplied by the attorney or 

Provision is made for an applicant to supply an address to 
receive correspondence from the Patent Office concerning his 
application. In addition to his residence address, so that the 
I'atent Office mav direct mall to any address of applicant s 
selection, such as a corporate i>atent department, a firm of 
attorneys or agents, or an individual attorney, agent^ or 
other person. In connection with patent applications pending 
upon the effective date of the changes in which a A™ »« "f 
onlv representative of record (and in connection with divi- 
sions and continuations thereof not requiring execution by 



74 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



the applicant), the address of the firm will be considered to (318) 
be the correspondence address for the application. Powers of 
attorney and authorizations of agent In favor of registered 
individual attorneys and agents will, of course, continue to 
be recognized and accepted. 

The amendments to |i 1.344 and 2.13 are intended to pro- 
vide a more definite and uniform standard of conduct for 
those engaged in practice before the Patent Office than do 
present rules. The Code of Professional Responsibility of 
the American Bar Association is Incorporated by reference 
in the rule with a statement as to where copies thereof may 
be inspected or obtained. The rule specifies that the standards 
referred to are those set forth in the Code of Professional 
Responsibility as amended February 24, 1970, and the rule 
does not, therefore, refer to standards imposed by later amend- 
ments of the Code. Any standards in other Patent Office 
rules which are Inconsistent with standards Imposed by the 
Code (as. for example, the limitations in | 1.345(b) on the 
distribution of professional announcements and the duties 
Imposed by § 1.205(b) ) remain in force. 

The elimination of the requirement for a petition request- 
ing the grant of a patent and the relaxation of requirements 
as to the names of applicants are Intended to simplify patent 
application procedures. Section 1.76 is being revoked as re- 
dundant In view of revisions In | 1.57. 

Notice of proposed rule making regarding revocation of 
IS 135 and l.Gl and revision of §§1.14, 1.21, 1.33, 1.34, 

1 36' 1.51, 1.52, 1.57. 1.76, 1.341, 1.343, 1.344. 1.346. 1.347, 

2 13 and 2.15 of Title 37. Code of Federal Regulations was 
published in the Federal Register of January 15. 1971 (36 
FR 611). Interested persons were given an opportunity to 
participate In the rulemaking process through submission of 
comments in writing and at an oral hearing held on March 
23 1971 The rules are being adopted after full and careful 
consideration of all the material submitted. The departures 
from the published text reflect certain of the views expressed 

■ in the submitted material. 

Elective date. This revision shall become effective on the 
(late of its publication In the Federal Register (7-2-71). 

In consideration of the comments received and pursuant 
to the authority contained in Section 6 of the Act of July 19. 
1952 (66 Stat. 793: 35 U.S.C. G). and Section 31 of that 
Act (66 Stat. 795: 35 U.S.C. 31). Title 37 of the Code of 
Federal Regulations Is hereby amended as follows : 

18. Section 2.13 Is revised to read as follows : 

i 2.13 Professional cotnluct. 

\ttorneys and other persons appearing before the Patent 
Office m trademark cases must conform to the standards of 
ethical and professional conduct set forth in the Code of 
Professional Responsibility of the American Bar Association 
as amended February 24, 1970, Insofar as such code Is not 
inconsistent with this part. A copy of the said code is avail- 
able for Inspection in the Office of the Solicitor. U.S. Patent 
Office Room 11C04. Building 3, Crystal Plaza. 2021 Jefferson 
Davis Highway. Arlington. Va. Copies of the code are avail- 
able upon request to the American Bar Center. 1155 East 60th 
Street, Chicago. 111. 60637. 

19. Section 2.15 is revised to read as follows : 
§ 2.15 Signature and certificate of attorney or agent. 

Every paper filed by an attorney at law or other person 
representing an applicant or party to a proceeding in the 
Patent Office must bear the signature of such attorney at law 
or other person except those papers which are required to 
be signed by the applicant or party. The signature of an at- 
torney at law or such other person to a paper filed by him. 
or the filing of any paper by him. constitutes a certificate 
that the paper has been read : that its filing is authorized ; 
that to the best of his knowledge, information, and belief 
there is good ground to support It : and that It is not Inter- 
posed for delay. 

WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER. JR.. 

Commissioner of Patents. 

Approved : 

JAME3 H. WAKEtUN. JR.. 

Assistant Secretary for 
Science and Technology. 

[FR Doc. Tl-9387 : Filed 7-1-71 : 8 : 49 am] 

Published in 36 F.R. Ii616; July 2, 1971 

[890 O.G. TM 60 (Sept. 14, 1971)] 



Status Inquires; Amendment 

The notice entitled Status Inquiries wlilch appeared In the 
Federal Register of August 11, 1971 (36 F.R. 14771-14772). 
Indicated that all status inquiries regarding trademark ap- 
plications will be entered In the application files. That pro- 
cedure win not, however, be followed In all cases, and the 
first paragraph of the notice has, accordingly, been amended 
to read as follows : 

"In order to expedite the handling of Inquiries regarding 
the status of both new and amended applications, the Patent 
Office has adopted a new procedure. Henceforth, status in- 
quiries should be filed In duplicate and should identify by 
title and date the last paper known by the applicant to have 
been filed in the case. Each inquiry should be accompanied by 
a self-addressed, stamped envelope. Both the original inquiry 
and the duplicate will be marked with a response and the 
duplicate will be returned to the applicant. The original In- 
quiry will be entered In the file only if the applicant has re- 
quested an estimated date for the next Office action : otherwise, 
the original inquiry will be placed in a separate file." 

Dated: Sept. 14, 1971. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK. 
Acting Commissioner of Patents. 

[FR Doc. 71-14129 ; Filed 9-23-71 ; 8 : 50 a.m.] 

Pub. in 36 F.R. 18961, Sept. 2^. H'.Tl 

[891 O.G. T^I 142] 



(319) TITLE 37 — PATENTS. TRADEMARKS, AND 

COPYRIGHTS 

Chapter I— Patent Office, Dep.^rtment of Commerce 

PART 2— RULES OF PRACTICE IN TRADEMARK CASES 

Access to Pending Applications 

\ proposal was published at 36 F.R. 16194 to amend § 2.27 
by deleting the requirement to show good cause In order to 
obtain access to a pending application file. 

\fter consideration of all comments and suggestions sub- 
mitted by interested persons, the amendment as proposed Is 
hereby adopted, subject to the following changes : 

1. The title of § 2.27 is changed by inserting the word 
"trademark" after the word "pending." 

2. In paragraph (b) of S 2.27 the word "trademark after 
the word "pending" Is deleted. 

Access to a pending application will be granted upon oral 
request at the office of the Director of the Trademark Examin- 
ing Operation. The files will be ordered at 2 p.m. each day 
and will usually be available for inspection by 3 p.m. the 
same dav. Files must be inspected in the presence of office 
personne'l and papers may not be removed without authoriza- 
tion Copies of the contents of files may be made only In the 
Trademark Search Room or by the Document Service Branch 
Written requests for copies of the contents of application file* 
may be addressed to the Document Service Branch : the cost 
is 30 cents per page. 

The procedure for access to published and registered files 
and terminated Inter partes proceedings will remain un- 
changed. Access to a published application Is granted by re- 
quest in the Trademark Docket Section. In order to obtain 
access to a registered file or terminated inter partes proceed- 
ing an order must be placed In the Trademark Docket Section^ 
These files are available either the same day or the morning 
of the following day. , 

Effective date. This amendment Is effective on the date of 
its publication in the Federal Register (12-31-. 1). 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
Acting Commissioner of Patents. 

December 21, 1971. 

James H. Wakehn, Jr., 
Assistant Secretary for 
Science and Technology. 
December 22, 1971. 

The text of the revised section Is as follows : 
S 2.27 Pending trademark application index; access to ap- 
plications. 
(a) An index of pending applications including the name 
and address of the applicant, a reproduction or description 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



75 



of the mark, the goods or services with which the mark is 
used, the class number, the dates of use and the serial number 
and filing date of the application will be available for public 
Inspection as soon as practicable after filing. 

(b) Access to the file of a particular pending application 
will be permitted prior to publication under § 2.81 upon 
written request. 

(c) Decisions of the Commissioner and the Trademark Trial 
and Appeal Board In applications and proceedings relating 
thereto are published or available for inspection or publication. 

(d) After a mark has been registered, or published for 
oppcsltlori, the file of the application and all proceedings re- 
lating thereto are available for public Inspection and copies 
of the papers may be furnished upon paying the fee therefor. 

[F.R. Doc. 71-19801; Filed 12-30-71: 8:45 a.m.J 

Published in F.R. 2^506, Dec. 31, 1971 

[895 O.G. TM 2] 



(320) TITLE 37— PATENTS. TRADENLVRKS. 

AND COPYRIGHTS 



Chapter I — Patent Office, Depahtment of Commerce 

PART 2 RULES OF PRACTICE IN TRADEMARK CASES 

Trademark Application and Drawing Requirements 

A proposal was published at 36 F.R. 18002 to amend and 
revise $| 2.21-2.23, 2.52, and 2.56. Pursuant to this notice, a 
number of comments have been received from interested per- 
sons. In light of the comments submitted, some changes have 
been made in tlie rules as proposed. 

An additional subparagraph has been added to S 2.21 re- 
quiring that the application state tlie name of the applicant. 
In the same section, a paragraph (c) has been added. This 
paragraph incorporates the substances of proposed { 2.22. 
Section 2.52 has been revised to state that drawings must be 
8 to 8',j Inches wide and 11 inches long. In view of the change 
In S 2.52. § 2.31 has also been revised to make It clear that 
applications submitted on either letter or legal-size paper 
are acceptable. 

Effective date. This revision shall become eflfectlve on Feb- 
ruary 1, 1972. However, as to § 2.52. drawings which comply 
only with the existing rule will be accepted until March 1. 
1972. 

1. Section 2.21 is revised to read as follows : 

S 2.21 Requirements for receiving a filing date. 

(a) Materials submitted as an application for registration 
of a mark will not be accorded a filing date as an application 
until all of the following elements are received : 

(1) Name of the applicant : 

(2) A name and address to which communications can be 
directed ; 

(3) A drawing or other identification of the mark sought 

to be registered ; 

(4) An Identification of goods or services ; 

(5) At least one specimen or facsimile of the mark as ac- 
tually used ; 

(6) A date^of first use of the mark in commerce, or a cer- 
tification or certified copy of a foreign registration If the ap- 
plication is based on such foreign registration pursuant to 
section 44(e) of the act. or a claim of the benefit of a prior 
foreign application in accordance with section 44(d) of the 
act : 

(7) The required filing fee for at least one class of goods 
or services. 

Compliance with one or more of the rules relating to the ele- 
ments specified above may be required before the application is 
further processed. 

(b) The filing date of the application is the date on which 
all of the elements set forth in paragraph (a) of this section 
are received In the Patent Office. 

(c) If the papers are so defective that they cannot be ac- 
cepted, the applicant will be notified and the papers and fee 
held 6 months. If the requirements for receiving a filing date 
have not been satisfied within such time, the papers and fee 
will be returned to the applicant or otherwise disposed of ; 
the drawing or fee of an unaccepted application may be trans- 
ferred to a later application. 



i 2.22 [Revoked] 

2. Section 2.22 Is revoked. 

3. Section 2.23 Is revised .to read as follows : 

V 
§ 2.23 Serial number. 

Applications will be given a serial number as received, and 

the applicant will be informed of the serial number and the 

filing date of the application. 

4. Section 2.31 Is revised to read as follows : 
i 2.31 Application must be in English. 

The application must be in the English language and plainly 
written on but one side of the paper. It Is deemed preferable 
that the application be on legal or letter-size paper, type- 
written double spaced, with at least a one and one-half inch 
margin on the left-hand side and top of the page. 

5. Section 2.52 Is amended by revising paragraph (c) to 
read as follows : 

S 2.52 Requirements for drawings. ^ 

» • • • • 

(c) Size of paper and margins. The size of the sheet on 
which a drawing Is made must be 8 to 81-2 Inches wide and 
11 Inches long. One of the shorter sides of the sheet should 
be regarded as Its top. When the figure Is longer than the 
width of the sheet, the sheet should be turned on Its side with 
the top at the right. The size of the mark must be such as 
to leave a margin of at least 1 Inch on the sides and bottom 
of the paper and at least 1 inch between it and the heading. 

. . • • • 

6. Section 2.56 Is revised to read as follows : 

§ 2.56 Specimens. 

The application must include five specimens of the trade- 
mark as actually used on or In connection with the goods In 
commerce. The specimens shall be duplicates of the actual 
used labels, tags, or containers, or the displays associated 
therewith or portions thereof, when made of suitable flat 
material and of a size not to exceed 8Vj Inches wide and 13 
Inches long. 

Dated: January 11, 1972. 

RICHARD A. WAHL, 
Acting Commissioner of Patents. 

Approved : 

James H. Wakelin, Jr., 
Assistant Secretary 

for Science and Technology. 

[FR Doc. 72-924; Filed 1-20-72; 8:48 am] 

Published in 37 FR 931; Jan. 21, 1972 

[895 O.G. TM 193] 



(321) 



Initial Processing of Applications 



On February 1, 1972, the operations of the Trademark Ap- 
plication Section of the Patent Office will be reorganized. The 
purpose of the reorganization is to provide the public and 
applicants with more current information concerning newly 
filed applications. 

The prompt Initial processing of trademark applications Is 
necessary In order to fulfill one of the main Patent Office 
functions, that of producing a record, accessible to the public, 
of new trademark activity to facilitate the clearance of new 
marks for use, determine the registrability of proposed marks, 
and avoid conflicts with the rights of others. In order to main- 
tain a record of marks applied for which reflects the most 
current information available to the Office concerning them, 
the eariy processing of drawings in order to have them placed 
in the search room is considered as a first priority. The proc- 
essing of these drawings includes the assignment of serial 
numbers, initial classification, duplication of the drawing 
and the forwarding of copies of the drawing to the search 
room. Other functions which are necessary In the processing 
of applications, such as the processing and mailing of filing 
receipts, are secondary to the processing of drawings. 

In part vears, there have been delays in processing applica- 
tions and for^/ardlng application drawings to the search room. 



7g OFFICIAL GAZETTE January 2, 1973 

These delays bave varied from several weeks to several mouths, more specific term is used ^I'^^'Z/ZTtTvo.ZZyZ 

?n view o7L importance, both to applicants and the public, of ^^e application may be shoen^ ^ 

of recording essential information concerning newly filed ap- a T^'^^^^^'^^^^^J.^^^tf;" P"' '3" ""/or H^^^^ erms in the 

plications as quickly as possible, a reorganization of the work- greater partlculan^^^^ forth b, t 

flow in the Application Section is being effected. International f '^^^'A;;"^" "f '"^j.^.^^^eed therefor. Typical ' 

There Is no change In the processing of applications through the Examiner in the absence of a c ea r "^^"^ J";; ; j^^. 

the man room and finance branch to the Application Section, illustrations of clear need can be found in the following 

However under the new plan, upon receipt In the Trademark tlons : 

Application Section, all applications will be stamped with ^^^ ,j,^^ ^^^^^ ^^^m includes items which are classified In 

a serial number, and the drawing of the mark will be repro- ^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^ ^j^gg (^or example, "artists' materials.") 

duced immediately and placed in the search file. This process- ^g) The broad term is too Indefinite for proper examination, 

ing will occur as soon as the application files reach the Appli- ^^^^ example, 'metallic parts.") 

cation Section. Such procedures as determining whether or (3)(o) The Identification Is Inconsistent with the goods 

not an application will receive a filing date, preparation of ^^ services disclosed by the specimens. 

the file jackets, and mailing of the filing receipt will take ^^^ ^j^^ ordinary meaning of the Identification Is at varl- 

place at a later time. ance with the goods or services dl.sclosed by the specimens or 

Applicants who wish to be notified promptly of the date their ^^^^ record. (For example, •'deoalcomanlas" are not aile- 

papers were received In the office and their serial number, may ^^^^^^ly Identified by the term "publications." See also Ex 

send two self-addressed postcards with their application pa- p^^^^ Consulting Publishing Co., 115 USPQ 240.) 

pers. The mall room will stamp both postcards with the date ^^^ Wording Included In the mark requires limitation of 

of receipt and return one to the applicant; the second post- ^^^ identification. (For example, "beer" may not be included 

card will be stamped with the serial number and forwarded to ^^ ^^^ identification where the mark is "Newark 'Olde Town 

the applicant from the Application Section. The postcards ^j^., ^Ex parte Consumers Brewing Co., 5o Vi>VQ -126). ) 

should contain the applicant's name and the trademark which situations do not constitute clear 

is the subject of the application. When more than one set of On the other hand, some si tua ions 

appllcatloTpapers are'f'orwarded under one cover, postcards need, as illustrated by the following : 

should be attached to each set of papers for which a receipt (^ tij^ existence of a decision holding that a likelihood 

Is desired. of confusion exists in relation to items which are narrowly 

rnder the new system of processing application papers, your identified does not In Itself constitute a clear need to require 
particular attention Is directed to the following changes as amendment of a broad Identification to the more specific Items 

compared ro the present procedure. mentioned in the decision. 

1 Application drawings will be placed in the public search ^g) If the identification is understood when read in asso- 
: file prior to the mailing of the filing receipt. elation with the title of the class in which It is placed and is 

2 By using the postcard system described above, applicants otherwise satisfactory, further qualifying amendment should 
will be notified sooner of the date of receipt of their papers ^^^^ ^^ required. (For example, "mufflers" in the clothing class 
and the serial number of their application. Applicants are en- ^^.Q^^]^ not require further modification to indicate that articles 
couraged to use the postcard system. of clothing are Intended ; similarly the term "house organ ' In 

3. Additional papers sent In by the applicant or attorney ^j^^ ^jj^gg f^^ printed publications would not need further 
should be Identified by serial number, thereby enabling the qualification.) 

otfice to process these papers quickly. m « f.^w Instances the terminology In the International Clas- 

4. When an application is accompanied by a petition to the In a J^w Instances "^^^^ ^\ ^^^^^n usage In 
commissioner under i 2.146. the petition will not be considered f^«-^ ° ;^,,^,°;;^Vh^ term more commonly 
until processing by the Application Section is complete. ^''^ , ',^., ;r,ntrv should be selected 

Effective ^ate. The procedure outlined In this notice will "^J^^V^ngllsh edUlon of tl': •'International Classification of 

become effective February 1, 1972. ^^^^^ ^^^ Services to Which Trade Marks Are Applied" can 

RICHARD A. WAHL, ' .^e ordered from : ~ ~ 

. Acting Commissioner of Patents. » r>m„- 

,, ,Q,o Sales Branch, The Patent Office 

January 11. 1972. ^^^^^ ^ ^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^ „^^,^^ 

Approved : St. Mary Cray, Orpington, Kent, England 

J.AMES H. Wakelin, Jr., Certain modifications and additions to the Classification have 

Assistant Secretary for been published as supplements and are also available from the 

Science and Technology. British Office. 

„„ ,„ o ^„ ., We have been advised by the British Patent Office that the 

[FR DOC. 72-925; Filed 1-20-72; 8:48 ami only acceptable methods of payment are by International 

Published in 37 FR 9*2 ,' Jan. 21. 1072 Money Order or bankers draft, payable In sterling and drawn 

on a bank In the United Kingdom. Orders for the Interna- 
[895 O.G. TM 193] ju,nai Classification and for the supplements can be made 

by remittance in the following amount (s) : 

'^^~^^~ International Classification 50 pence 

rr. Nov 15 1967, supplement 5 pence 

(322) Identification OF Goods AND Services IN TR.ADEMARK ^,^- ,0' ,070 supplement - Free 

APPLic.TiONS-.REPRiNT OK NOTICE A.ND AMENDMENT) ^ar- ^'^'.g,, ' g^Jp^i^^^nt " 10 pence 

Effective Immediately, the Alphabetical List of Goods and Total cost (Including postage by 

Services which appears In the volume entitled "International surf ace mail i 65 pence ^^ 

Classification of Goods and Services to Which Trade Marks Additional charge for postage by air 1 pound o o pence 

Are Applied" (published by the World Intellectual Property j^all 

Organization (WIPO)) Is adopted as a general guideline for Total cost by airmail 2 pounds 20 pence 

determining the degree of particularity of Identification of (^^.^^^.g g^Quld be sent directly to : 
goods and services required In trademark applications. 

Terms which appear in the International Classification g^^j^g Branch, The Patent Office, Block C. 

listing will generally be accepted as proper identifications of station Square House, St. Mary Cray, 

goods and services. The use In the listing of more specific Orpington. Kent. England 

identifications Indented below the heading term does not " t.pptmfyfR 

necessarily preclude acceptability of that heading. For ex- RENE ^ .^''''')'^\ ' 

ample the International Classification lists, as Item A407, Assistant Commissioner for Appeals 

Ammunitiort, followed by specific types of ammunition, as Legislation and TrademarKs. 

Items A408 and A409 rnd A410. "Ammunition" will be ac- jj^^jg . j^^ i3_ 1972. 

cepted as an Identification in accordance with In re Dynamit ^^^ ^^^ 

yobel AG, 169 USPQ 499 (TTAB, 1971). However, If the i»^^ ' '' 






January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



77 



(323) 



Trademark Office Actions 



Z. Section 2.91 is revised to read as follows : 



Effective Apr. 1, 1972, trademark applicants or their 
attorneys will be provided with only one carbon copy of any 
office action, and the mailing of an additional carbon copy 
will be discontinued. 

This change is consistent with the current practice In the 
patent examining operations and should result in greater 
efficiency In the preparation and mailing of office actions. 



Feb. 7, 1972. 



ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 

Commistioner of Patents. 



[895 O.G. TM 238] 



(324) TITLE 37— PATENTS, TRADEMARKS, AND 

COPYRIGHTS 

CHAPTER I— Patent Office, Department of Commerce 

PART 2 — RULES of PRACTICE IN TRADEMARK CASES 

Interferences 

A proposal was published at 36 F.R. 18002 to amend, revise, 
or redesignate §! 2.27, 2.61, 2.80-2.82, 2.91, 2.92, 2.08, 2.101, 
and 2.103. Pursuant to this notice, a number of comments have 
been received from Interested persons, and due consideration 
has been given to all matter presented. Only editorial changes 
have been made In the rules as proposed. 

Effective date. This revision shall become effective on March 
1. 1972, and will apply to all applications except those In 
which a notice of publication was mailed prior to March 1, 
1972. 
§ 2.27 [Amended] 

1. Section 2.27 is amended by changing "2.81" In paragraph 
(b) to read "2.80." 
§ 2.61 [Amended] 

2. Section 2.92(c) is redesignated as S 2.61(c). 

3. Section 2.81 Is redesignated as § 2.80 and revised to read 
as follows : _ 
$ 2.80 Publication for opposition. 

If, on examination or reexamination of an application for 
registration on the Principal Register, It appears that the 
applicant Is entitled to have his mark registered, the mark 
will be published In the Official Gazette for opposition. The 
mark will also be published In the case of an application to 
be placed In concurrent use proceedings, if otherwise regis- 
trable. 
§§ 2.81, 2.82 [Redesignated] 

4. Sections 2.82 and 2.83 are redesignated as 5 S 2.81 and 
2.82, respectively. 

5. A new § 2.83 Is added and reads as follows : 

i 2.83 Conflicting marks. 

(a) Whenever an application Is made for registration of a 
mark which so resembles another mark or marks pending 
registration as to be likely to cause confusion or mistake or 
to deceive, the mark with the earliest effective filing date will 
be published In the Official Gazette for opposition If eligible 
for the Principal Register, or issued a certificate of registra- 
tion If eligible for the Supplemental Register. A notice will be 
sent, If practicable, to the applicants Involved Informing them 
of the publication or issuance of the earliest filed mark. 

(b) In situations In which conflicting applications have 
the same effective filing date, the application with the earliest 
date of execution will be published in the Official G.\/.ette 
for opposition or Issued on the Supplemental Register. A no- 
tice will be sent, if practicable, to the applicants Involved In- 
forming them of the publication or Issuance of the application 
with the earliest date of execution. 

(c) Action on the confilcting application which Is not pub- 
lished in the Official Gazette for opposition or not issued 
on the Supplemental Register will be suspended by the Exam- 
iner of Trademarks until the published or Issued application Is 
registered or abandoned. 

6. The heading for §§2.91-2.99 entitled "Interferences" 
Is revised to read "Interferences and Concurrent Use Proceed- 
ings." 



§ 2.91 Interferences. 

(a) An Interference will not be declared between two appli- 
cations or between an application and a registration except 
upon petition to the Commissioner. Interferences will be de- 
clared by the Commissioner only upon a showing of extraordi- 
nary circumstances which would result In a party being un- 
duly prejudiced without an Interference. In ordinary circum- 
stances, the availability of an opposition or cancellation pro- 
ceeding to the party will be deemed to remove any undue 

prejudice. 

(b) Registrations and applications to register on the Sup- 
plemental Register, registrations under the Act of 1920, and 
registrations of marks the right to use of which has become 
incontestable are not subject to interference. 

8. Section 2,92 is revised to read as follows : 

I 2.92 Preliminary to interference. 

Before the declaration of an Interference, the marks which 
are to form the subject matter of the controversy must have 
been decided to be registrable by each party except for the 
interfering mark. 

9. Section 2.98 Is revised to read as follows : 

§ 2.98 Adding party to interference. 

If, during the pendency of an interference, another case 
appears involving substantially the same registrable subject 
matter, the Examiner of Trademarks may request the sus- 
pension of the Interference for the purpose of adding said 
case Such suspension will be granted as a matter of course 
If no testimony has been taken. If any testimony has been 
taken or Is about to be taken, the case will not be added 
except upon approval of a member of the Trademark Trial 
and Appeal Board. If the case is not added, the Examiner of 
Trademarks may suspend action on such case pending termi- 
nation of the interference proceeding. 

§ 2.101 [.irnended] 

10. Section 2.101 Is amended by changing "2.81," to read 
"2.S0." 
f 2.103 [Amended] 

11. Section 2.103 Is amended by changing "2.81" In the sec- 
ond sentence to read "2.80." 

I 



Dated : February 2, 1972. 



ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 

Commissioner of Patents. 



Approved 



James H. Wakelin, Jr., 
Assistant Secretary for 
Science and Technology. 
[FR Doc. 72-1863; Filed 2-8-72; 8:46 am] 
Pub. 37 F.R. 2880, Feb. 9, 1972 
[89G O.G. TM 2] 



(325) TITLE 43— PUBLIC LANDS : INTERIOR 

SUBTITLE A— Office of the Secretary of the Interior 

[Circular 2320] 

Part 25— Use of the "Johnny Horizon" Symbol 

On page 21207 of the Federal Regis^ter of November 4, 
1971 there was published a notice and text of a proposed 
nmeiidment to Subtitle A of Title 43, Code of Federal Regula- 
tions. The purpose of the umendment is to provide rules for 
the commercial manufacture, Importation, reproduction, and 
use of the character "Johnny Horizon"— the official symbol 
for a public service antUltter and environmental cleanup pro- 
gram to maintain the beauty and utility of the Nation's public 
lands carried on by the Department of the Interior. It ;lso 
provides guidelines for noncommercial use and for contribu- 
tions of money and personal property to the "Johnny Hori- 
zon" program. These regulations are promulgated In accord- 
ance with the Act of September 25, 1970 (84 Stat. 870). 

Interested persons were given until December 16, 1971, 
within which to submit comments, suggestions, or objections 



78 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



to the proposed amendment. Only one comment was received "Johnny Horizon" name and symbol licenses will be subject, 



which suggested that the word "importation" be Included 
In certain sections to prevent the Importation of unauthorized 
"Johnny Horizon ' items manufactured or reproduced outside 
of the United States. This suggested change has been made. 
A reference to State agencies as possible cooperators has 
also been added. 

The proposed amendment is hereby adopted as changed, and 
is set forth below. This amendment shall become effective 
February 15, 1972. 

HARRISON LOESCH, 
Assistant Secretary of the Interior. 



but not limited, to the following terras and conditions 

(1) Payment of fair return to the United States for its 
Property through negotiation of use or royalty fees. 

(2) Licenses are nontransferable. 

(3) All proposed products must be approved by the Director 
prior to manufacture. Importation, or reproduction by the 
licensee. Substances Inherently dangerous to users shall not 
be used. 

(4) All licenses shall contain Equal Employment Oppor- 
tunity provisions in compliance with Executive Order 11246, 
as amended (30 F.R. 12319 (1965)), and regulations issued 
pursuant thereto (41 CFR Chapter 60 and Part 17 of this 
chapter). 

(5) Alteration of artwork must first be approved by the 

Director. 

(6) Licenses shall be subject to revocation by the Director 
at any time he finds that (1) the use Involved is Injurious 
to the characterization of "Johnny Horizon," or (11) there 
has been a violation of the terms and conditions of the license. 

§ 25.2 Xoncommercial use. 

(a) Permitted uses. Products^ bearing ihe name or symbol 
of "Johnny Horizon," provided by the Government or ac- 
quired from licensed sources, may be used without a license 

A new Part 25 is added to Subtitle A, Title 43 of the Code or advance permission by any person or organization for the 

purpose of furthering antllitter and environmental cleanup 
campaigns, provided that no charge Is made by the unlicensed 
user for service or products. 

(b) Technical advice. To the extent possible, technical ad 
vice will be given to Interested parties upon request to the 
Director. 

(c) Cooperation. The Director may enter into cooperative 



Feb. 4, 


1972. Ass 


Sec. 




25.0-1 


Purpose. 


25.0-2 


Objectives. 


25.0-3 


Authority. 


25.0-5 


Definitions. 


25.1 


Commercial use. 


25.2 


Noncommercial use 


25.3 


Contributions. 


25.4 


Unauthorised use. 



ACTHORITT : The provision of this Part 25 Issued under 
the Act of September 25. 1970 (84 Stat. 870). 



of Federal Regulations to read as follows 
§ 25.0-1 Purpose. 

This subpart establishes rules for the commercial and non 



commercial use of the 
I 25.0-2 Objectives. 



'Johnny Horizon" symbol and name. 



The objectives of these regulations are (a) to maintain the . * # 

integrity of the name and characterization of "Johnny Hori- agreements with other Federal and State agencies for use of 

the name or symbol of "Johnny Horizon. Agreements shall 



zon" — the official symbol for a public service antllitter and 
environmental cleanup program to maintain the beauty and 
utility of the Nation's public lands, (b) to authorize the non- 
commercial use of the symbol, and (c) to provide for use or 
royalty fees for the manufacture, reproduction, or use of the 
symbol for commercial purposes. 

§ 25.0-3 Authority. 

The Act of September 25, 1970 (84 Stat. 870) authorizes 
the Secretary of the Interior to establish and collect use or 
royalty fees for the manufacture, reproduction, or use of the 
"Johnny Horizon" name and symbol. The Act makes un- 
authorized manufacture, reproduction, and use a crime (IS 
U.S.C. 714). The Act also provides that royalty and use fees 
will be deposited In a special account and used for the purpose 
of furthering nationwide antllitter campaigns. 

i 25.0—5 Definitions. 
As used in this part : 

(a) The term "Johnny Horizon" means the name or char- 
acterization "Johnny Horizon" originated by the Bureau of 
Land Management, Department of the Interior, as the official 
symbol for a public .service antllitter and environmental clean- 
up program, and as described in 18 U.S.C. 714, the representa- 
tion of a tall, lean man, with strong facial features, who 
wears slacks and sport shirt buttoned to the collar (both 
green, when colored), no tie, a field jacket (red, when colored), 
boot-type shoes (brown, when colored) and who carries a back- 
pack. 

(b) "Director" means the Director of the Bureau of Land 
Management, or the person he delegates to act for him on 
matters pertaining to the "Johnny Horizon" program. 

(c) "Johnny Horizon program" means those activities and 
supporting services conducted in furtherance of a public serv 



state the responsibilities of each agency pertaining to (1) 
maintaining the integrity of the program, (2) supplying ma- 
terials, (3) assisting other groups or organizations, (4) re- 
strictions of uses of materials, (5) altering artwork, and (6) 
making arrangements with public personalities engaged in 
the program. 

I 25.3 Contributions. 

The Director may accept contributions of money and per- 
sonal property by any person or organization for use in the 
■Johnny Horizon" program. 

§ 25.4 Unauthorized use. 

Manufacture, importation, reproduction, or use of the 
"Johnny Horizon" name or symbol, except as provided for 
under these regulations, in this part Is prohibited (18 U.S.C. 
714). 

[FR Doc. 72-2144 ; Filed 2-11-72 ; 8 
37 F.R. .il>i3; Feb. 12. 191 i 
[896 O.G. TM 681 



51 a.m.] 



(320) 



TITLE 37— PATENTS, TRADEMARKS. 
AND COPYRIGHTS 



Chapter I- 



PART 2- 



-Patent Office, Department of Commerce 

-RULES OF practice IX TRADEMARK CASES 

Miscellaneous Amendments 



A proposal was published at 36 F.R. 19315 to revise || 2.54. 

2.67, 2.87, 2.88, and 2.187. Pursuant to this notice, comments 



ice antllitter and environmental cleanup campaign which uses have been received from interested persons. Full consideration 

has been given to all matter presented and changes in the 
text of the original proposal have been made in view thereof. 
Section 2.54 Is being revised to permit the Patent Office to 
accept substitute drawings in appropriate situations. 

The revision of § 2.67 clarifies the situations in which an 
examiner may suspend action on an application. 

Sections 2.87 and 2.88 are being revised to state that both 
Director determines that the proposed commercial use will pro- goods and services may be the subject of a single application 
mote the purposes of the "Johnny Horizon" program and will or certificate of registration in accordance with section 30 of 
not Impair the integrity of the name or symbol. the Trademark Act of 1946. Additionally, I 2.87 requires five 

(b) Terms and conditions. In order to maintain the integ- specimens be submitted for each class, 
rlty of the "Johnny Horizon" program ind to regulate the The revision to { 2.187 insures that the certificate of regls- 
raanufacture. Importation, reproduction, and use of the tration issues to the current owner of the mark. 

J 



the "Johnny Horizon" name or symbol. 

I 25.1 Commercial use. 

(a) Licenses. The "Johnny Horizon" name or symbol may 
be used for commercial purposes only under a license issued 
pursuant to the regulations in this part. Licenses will be 
granted to any individual, business, or corporation if the 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



79 



Effective date. This revision shall become effective March 
17, 1972. 

In consideration of the foregoing and pursuant to the au- 
thority contained in section 41 of the Act of July 5, 1946 (60 
Stat. 440; 15 U.S.C. 1123) and section 6 of the Act of July 
19, 1952 (66 Stat. 793; 35 U.S.C. 6), Part 2 of Chapter I 
of Title 37 of the Code of Federal Regulations is hereby 
amended as follows : 

1. Section 2.54 is revised to read as follows : 

i 2.54 Informal drawings. 

A drawing not in conformity with §S 2.51 to 2.53 may be 
accepted for purpose of examination, but the drawing must 
be corrected or a new one furnished, as required, before the 
mark can be published or the application allowed. The neces- 
sary corrections will be made by the Patent Office upon appli- 
cant's request and at his expense. 

2. Section 2.67 Is revised to read as follows : 

I 2.67 Suspension of action by the Patent Office. 

Action by the Patent Office may be suspended for a rea- 
sonable time for good and sufficient cause. The fact that a pro- 
ceeding Is pending before the Patent Office or a court which 
Is relevant to the issue of registrability of the applicant's 
mark, or the fact that the basis for registration is. under the 
provisions of Section 44(e) of the Act, registration of the 
mark in a foreign country and the foreign application Is still 
pending, will be considered prima facie good and sufficient 
cause. An applicant's request for a suspension of action under 
this section filed within the 6-month response period (see 
i 2.62) may be considered responsive to the previous office 
action. The first suspension is within the discretion of the 
Examiner of Trademarks and any subsequent suspension 
must be approved by the Commissioner. 

3. Section 2.87 is revised to jread as follows : 

{ 2.87 Combined applications. 

An application also may be filed to register the same mark 
for any or all of the goods and/or services upon or in con- 
nection with which the mark is actually used and which fall 
within a plurality of classes. However, dates of use for each 
class, five specimens for each class, and a fee equaling the 
sum of the fees for filing an application In each class are re- 
quired. A single certificate of registration for the mark may 
be issued. 

4. Section 2.88 Is revised to read as follows : 

S 2.88 Applications may be combined. 

(a) When several applications have been filed by the same 
applicant for registration on the same register of a mark 
shown in Identical form on the drawings for goods and/or 
services in different classes and each of the applications has 
been allowed, a single certificate based on .such applications 
may be issued. A request for the issuance of a consolidated 
certificate must be made of record In each of the applications 
involved prior to the allowance of any of the applications. 

(b) The issuance of any original certificate may be sus- 
pended upon request of the applicant, for a period not ex- 
ceeding 6 mouths, to permit such consolidation. 

5. Section 2.187 is revised to read as follows: 

{ 2.187 Certificate of registration may issue to assignee. 

The certificate of registration may be issued to the assignee 
of the applicant provided the assignment is recorded in the 
Patent Office at least 10 days before the application is allowed, 
and written notice of the recording of the assignment and 
the address of the assignee Is made of record in the application 
file by the applicant or assignee. 

Dated : February 14, 1972. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 

Commissioner of Patents. 
Approved : 

James H. Wakelin. Jr., 

Assistant Secretary for Science 
and Technology. 

[FR Doc. 72-2684 ; Filed 2-23-72 ; 8 : 46 a.m.] 

Published in 37 F.R. 3897, Feb. 2i, 1972 

[890 O.G. TM 130] 



(327) Trademark Manual of Examining Procedure 

Work is In progress on a Manual of Trademark Examining 
Procedure which is being designated in brief as "TMEP." 
Tlie preliminary material for the Manual consists of directives 
which are being prepared and, issued at Intervals. Each di- 
rective is devoted to a particular procedure in the trade- 
mark examining process, and the directives constitute official 
guidelines for the examination of trademark applications. 
Ten directives have been issued to date. 

Trademark Examining Directives can be ordered from the 
Superintendent of Documents, United States Government 
Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 20402, at an annual sub- 
scription of $1.50, plus 50< for foreign mailing. 

(See original announcement dated July 27, 1971 in the 
Official Gazette of August 31, 1971, vol. 889, No. 5.) 



Feb. 29, 1972. 



ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 

Commissioner of Patents. 



(328) 



[897 O.G. TM 2] 



PETITION TO Make Trademark 
Applications Special 



The practice of expediting the prosecution of new trade- 
mark applications on request of the applicant (accelerated 
prosecution) was rescinded, effective Aug. 1, 1971 (S6 F.R. 
13231, July 16, 1971 ; 825 O.G. 2). This action was taken after 
a careful study of the practice, including a recommendation 
of the Public Advisory Committee for Trademark Affairs that 
the Patent Office terminate accelerated prosecution of trade- 
mark applications. The study considered both the effect of 
the procedure on the workload of the Trademark Operations 
and the broader interest of examining trademark applications 
in an order which is equitable to all applicants. 

Since the termination of this practice, the Office has experi- 
enced some increase in the number of petitions requesting the 
Commissioner to invoke his supervisory authority pursuant 
to Rule 2.146 in order to advance the examination of applica- 
tions out of their regular order. This was to be expected since 
applicants who might have been able to show special circum- 
stances entitling them to advanced examination could pre- 
viously achieve this special treatment without resorting to 
a petition. However, some of the petitions now being received 
are not considered sufficient to justify the extraordinary 
relief of invoking the supervisory authority of the Commis- 
sioner for the purpose of advancing the applications out of 
their regular order. 

In particular, a number of such petitions have been based on 
the ground that the applicant Is about to embark on ah adver 
tislng campaign or to commit advertising or promotional ex- 
penditures in which the mark applied for Is material. Such 
a ground is not considered to constitute appropriate circum- 
stances justifying the advancement of the application out of 
its regular turn and the petitions based on such ground have 
been and will continue to be denied. The principal reason for 
the denial is that these circumstances are applicable to a 
substantial portion of the trademark applications filed In 
the Patent Office. The supervisory authority of the Commis- 
sioner should be exercised only where an extraordinary reason 
for such action has been disclosed. See Anderson d Dyer v. 
Loury. 89 O.G. 1861, 1899 CD. 230, and Wilputte v. Van 
Ackeren, 103 USPQ 235. Thus, the extraordinary remedy of 
invoking the supervisory authority of the Commissioner is 
not considered appropriate under these circumstances. 

In the interest of equitable treatment of all applicants, 
the policy of the Office in granting such petitions will be re- 
stricted to those cases in which particular and very special 
circumstances exist, such as a demonstrable possibility of loss 
of substantial rights, rather than circumstances which would 
be equally applicable to a large number of other applicants 
for trademark registration. 



Date : Mar. 



13, lOTJ 



ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 

Commissioner of Patents. 



[897 O.G. TM 2] 



80 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



(329) TITLE 37— PATENTS, TRADEMARKS, 

AND COPYRIGHTS 

Chapter I— Patent Office, Department of Commerce 

PART 2 RULES OF PRACTICE IN TRADEMARK CASES 

Trademark Inter Partes Procedure 

A proposal was published at 36 F.R. 18002 to revise, amend, 
rc<losignate, or revoke II 2.99, 2.104, 2.112, 2.117, 2.119. 
2 120, 2.122-2.125, and 2.127-2.129 of the Rules of Practice 
in Trademark Cases. Pursuant to the notice, written comments 
linve been received and a public hearing was held October 22, 
1!»71 Full consideration has been given to all matter pre- 
sented and changes in the text of the original proposal have 
been made In view thereof. 

Amendments to the present text of the rules are described 
below. In cases where the amendment differs from that set 
lorlh In the notice of proposed rule making, that change Is 
also described below. 

St^ctlons 2.104 and 2.112 are being revised by adopting 
langage from the Federal rules requiring a short and plain 
statement showing how the party would be damaged. The pro- 
posnl required a statement "tending to show why" the party 
would be damaged. 

Section 2.117 Is being redesignated as I 2.11G and Is being 
revised to clarify the applicability of the Federal Rules of 
Civil Procedure to Patent Office proceedings. 

A new I 2.117 authorizing suspension of proceedings by the 
Trademark Trial and Appeal Board when the parties are en- 
gngod In civil litigation which may be dispositive of the case, 
hn^ been added. The new rule gives the Board discretion in 
matters of suspension whereas the proposed rule required a 
m.'indatory suspension. 

Section 2.119 Is being amended by incorporating the sub- 
stance of I 1.248 in a new paragraph. 

' Section 2.120 is being revised to adopt the Federal Rules 
of Civil Procedure insofar as they are applicable to Patent 
Olllce proceedings. The numbers of the applicable Federal 
rules are not listed since they are Incorporated by reference 
in 12.120. For example, i 2.120(a) (3) as adopted does not 
refer to Federal Rule 32 which governs use of discovery depo- 
sitions. 

Section 2.120(a) sets forth restrictions on deposition pro 
cedures, discovery of a foreign party and use of discovery 
depositions. 

Existing I 2.120(b) is being deleted and the proposed para- 
graph is not being adopted. Rule 36 of the Federal Rules of 
Civil Procedure will govern requests for admissions. A new 
paragraph (b) governing use of admissions and answers to 
interrogatories is being adopted. 

Kxlstlng i 2.120 paragraphs (c) through (e) are being de- 
leted. 

Section 2.120(f) Is also deleted and proposed | 2.120(c) is 
not being adopted. Rule 33 of the Federal Rules of Civil Pro- 
cedure will govern the interrogatory practice. It is believed 
that t]ie Federal rule will provide uniformity in practice and 
a body of law which will serve as a guideline to both attorneys 
nnd the Board. Some comments were received, however, which 
expressed a preference for limited interrogatories. In view of 
such comments, the Office plans to evaluate on a continuing 
basis the effectiveness and utilization of Federal Rule 33. If 
ii stances arise In which Rule 33 does not appear to be fully 
satisfactory. It may be that consideration will be given to a 
)nore limited practice. 

A new 12.120(c) entitled "Failure to Make Discovery: 
Sanctions" has been added. 

Section 2,122 (b) is being revised to state that before a 
jileaded registration will be received in evidence, two copies 
of the registration showing its status and title or an order 
for such copies must accompany the opposition or petition to 
cancel. 

Section 2.123(c) relating to printed publications and official 
records, is being redesignated as | 2.122(c) and revised to 
Incorporate | 1.282 (Patent Rule 282). 

A new I 2.122(d) Is being added and Incorporates the sub- 
stance of I 1.283 (Patent Rule 283). 

Section 2.123 has been completely revised to incorporate tlie 
provisions of li 1.273-1.281, 1.285, and 1.286 (Patent Rules 
27;t-281, 285. and 286). Portions of the Patent Rules which 
are not applicable to trademark practice have been omitted and 
In some Instances the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure apply. 



A few changes have been made In this section as originally 
propsed ; they are as follows : 

The title of I 2.123 is being amended by inserting the word 
"trial" before "testimony." 

Proposed | 2.123(e) (5) is being revised to permit a witness 
to sign a deposition before any officer authorized to admin- 
ister oaths, m n ■,n'Hf\ ia\ 

Proposed | 2.123(f) (5) is being deleted and |2.12d(f)(e) 

is being redesignated as | 2.123(f) (5). 

Section 2 124(b) is being amended to require testimony by 
written questions to be prepared with each answer preceded 
by its corresponding question. 

Section 2.124a is being revoked. Testimony in foreign 
countries will be covered In | 2.124(d) which provides that 
such testimony will be taken by depositions upon written 

questions. . ^ j i.v 

Reference numbers In | 2.125 have been changed and the 
reference to "the original transcript" In the second sentence 
of paragraph (a) is being changed to read "the certified 

transcript." , „, , , a 

Section 2.127(a) provides that the Trademark Trial and 
Appeal Board may treat a motion as conceded when a party 
falls to file a brief In opposition to the motion. Sections 2.127 
(b) and 2.129(c) are amended by adding a sentence requir- 
ing briefs in opposition to petitions for reconsideration to be 
filed within 15 days. 

Section 2.128(b) Includes certain changes with respect to 
the form required for briefs. 

In consideration of the comments and pursuant to the au- 
thority contained in section 41 of the Act of July 5. 1946 (60 
Stat 440- 15 U.S.C. 1123) and section 6 of the Act of July 
19 1952 (66 Stat. 793, 35 U.S.C. 6), Part 2 of Chapter I of 
Title 37 of the Code of Federal Regulations Is hereby amended 
as follows : 



1. In I 2.99. a new paragraph (d) is added and reads as 
follows : 

I 2 99 AppUc<ition to register as concurrent user. 
. 

(d) When concurrent registration Is sought on the basis 
of a court determination of the rights of the parties to use 
the marks in commerce, the application shall be examined by 
the Examiner of Trademarks. If the applicant Is entitled to 
registration subject only to the concurrent lawful use of a 
party to the court proceeding, the Examiner of Trademarks 
may publish or allow the application, provided the court de- 
cree specifies the rights of the parties. 

2. Section 2.104 Is revised to read as follows: 
I 2.104 Contents of opposition. 

The opposition must set forth a short and plain statement 
showing how the opposer would be damaged by the registration 
of the opposed mark and state the grounds for opposition. 
A duplicate copy of the opposition including exhibits shall 
be filed. 

3. Section 2.112 is revised to read as follows : 
I 2.112 Petition for cancellation. 

The petition to cancel, which must be verified, or Include a 
declaration In accordance with | 2.20, must set forth a short 
nnd plain statement showing how the petitioner Is or will be 
damaged bv the registration, state the grounds for panella- 
tion, and indicate the respondent party to whom notice shall 
be sent. A duplicate copy of the petition, including exhibits 
shall be filed with the petition. Applications to cancel different 
registrations owned by the same party may be Joined in one 
petition when appropriate, but the fee for each application to 
cancel a registration must accompany the petition. 

4 Section 2.117 Is redesignated as I 2.116 and paragraph 
(a) is revised as amended, I 2.116 reads as follows : 
I 2.116 Federal Rules of Civil Procedure. 

(a) Except as otherwise provided, and wherever applicable 
and appropriate, procedure and Practice in inter partes pro- 
ceedings shall be governed by the Federal Rules of Civil Pro- 
cedure. 

5. A new | 2.117 is added and reads as follows : 
I 2 117 Suspension of proceedings. 

Whenever it shall come to the attention of the Trademark 
Trial and Appeal Board that parties to a pending case are 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



81 



engaged In a civil action which may be dispositive of the case, 
proceedings before the Board may be suspended until termina- 
tion of the civil action. 

6. Section 2.119 is amended as follows: Paragraph (a) Is 
revised, paragraph (b) Is redesignated as paragraph (c), and 
a new paragraph (b) Is added. As amended, i 2.119 reads as 
follows : 



i 2.119 Service of papers. 

(a) Every paper filed In the Patent Office In inter partes 
cases, Including notice of appeal, must be served upon the 
other parties except the notice of interference (12.93), the 
notice of opposition (| 2.105), the petition for cancellation 
(12.113), and the notice of a concurrent use proceeding 
(I 2.99), which are mailed by the Patent Office. Proof of such 
service must be made before the paper will be considered by 
the Office. A statement signed by the attorney or agent, at- 
tached to or appearing on the original paper when filed, clearly 
stating the date and manner In which service was made will 
be accepted as prima facie proof of service. 

(b) Service of papers must be on the attorney or agent of 
the party if there be such or on the party If there Is no at- 
torney or agent, and may be made In either of the following 
ways: (1) by delivering a copy of the paper to the person 
served; (2) by leaving a copy at the usual place of business 
of the person served, with someone In his employment; (3) 
when the person served has no usual place of business, by 
leaving a copy at his residence, with a member of his family 
over 14 years of age and of discretion; (4) transmission by 
first-class mall, which may also be certified or registered. 
Whenever It shall be satisfactorily shown to the Commissioner 
that none of the above modes of obtaining service or serving 
the paper Is practicable, service may be by notice published In 
the Official Gazette. 

(c) When service is made by mall, the date of mailing will 
be considered the date of service. Whenever a party Is re- 
quired to take some action within a prescribed period after 
the service of a paper upon him by another party and the 
paper is served by mall, 5 days shall be added to the prescribed 
period. 

7. Section 2.120 is revised to read as follows : 
I 2.120 Discovery procedure. 

The provisions of the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure re- 
lating to discovery shall apply In Inter partes trademark cases 
except as otherwise provided In this section. The Trademark 
Trial and Appeal Board will specify the closing date for the 
taking of discovery. 

(a) Depositions for discovert/ — (1) Procedure. The deposi- 
tion of a person shall be taken In the Federal Judicial district 
where he resides or Is regularly employed. The responsibility 
for securing the attendance of a propose deponent, other than 
a party or anyone who at the time set for the taking of the 
deposition was an officer, director, or managing agent of a 
party, or a person designated under Rule 30(b) (G) or 31(a) of 
the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure to testify on behalf of 
a party, rests wholly with the Interested party. See 35 
U.S.C. 24. 

(2) Discovery of foreign party. The discovery deposition 
of a party or an officer, director, or managing agent of a 
party, or a person designated under Rule 30(b)(6) or 31(a) 
of the Federal Rules of Procedure to testify on behalf of a 
party, domiciled In a foreign country may be taken In the 
manner prescribed by | 2.124. 

(3) Use of discovery depositions. A discovery deposition 
shall not be considered as part of the record In the case unless 
the party offering the deposition, or any part thereof, files the 
same before the close of his testimony period (testlmony-ln- 
chlef or rebuttal as appropriate) and also files a notice of 
reliance thereon. A discovery deposition should not be filed 
In the Patent Office In the absence of a notice of reliance. Ob- 
jections, Including any made during the examination, will 
be considered only If made or renewed at the hearing. 

(b) Use of admission or answer to interrogatory. No ad- 
mission or answer to an interrogatory shall be considered as 
part of the record In the case unless the party propounding 
the request for admission or Interrogatory files, before the 
close of his testimony period (testlmony-ln-chlef or rebuttal, 
as appropriate), a copy of the admission and the request 
therefor and/or a copy of the interrogatory and Its answer 
and also flies a notice of reliance thereon. 



(c) Failure to make discovery: Sanctions. If any party 
falls or refuses to answer any proper question in taking dis- 
covery depositions or falls or refuses to answer any proper 
question propounded by Interrogatories or falls or refuses to 
comply with a request to produce and permit the inspection 
and copying of designated things, the party seeking discovery 
may apply to the Trademark Trial and Appeal Board for an 
order compelling discovery. If a party or an officer, director, or 
managing agent of a party, or a person designated under Rule 
30(b) (6) or 31(a) of the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure to 
testify on behalf of a party, falls to obey an order to provide 
or permit discovery, the Trademark Trial and Appeal Board 
may strike out all or any part of any pleading of that party, 
dismiss the action or proceeding, or deny any part thereof, 
enter Judgment as by default against that party or take any 
such other action as may be deemed appropriate. 

8. In I 2.122, paragraph (b) Is revised and new paragraphs 
(c) and (d) are added. As amended, those paragraphs of 
I 2.122 read as follows : 



I 2.122 Matters in evidence. 

• • • • • 

(b) A registration of the opposer or petitioner pleaded In 
an opposition or petition to cancel will be received In evidence 
and made part of the record If two copies showing status and 
title of the printed registration or an order for such copies 
accompany the opposition or petition. 

(c) Printed publications, such as books and periodicals, 
available to the general public In libraries or of general cir- 
culation, and official records. If competent evidence and perti- 
nent to the issue, may be Introduced In evidence by filing In the 
Patent Office a notice to that effect during the period for the 
taking of the testimony of the party (during the period for 
taking of testlmony-ln-chlef if such matters are not In rebut- 
tal), specifying the record or the printed publication, the page 
or pages to be used, Indicating generally its relevance, and 
accompanied by the record or authenticated copy or the prlnte<l 
publication or a copy. When a copy of an official record of the 
Patent Office Is filed. It need not be a certified copy. The notice 
and copy of the record or publication must be served on each 
of the other parties. 

(d) Upon motion duly made and granted, testimony taken 
in another proceeding, or testimony taken In a suit between 
the same parties or those in Interest, may be used In a proceetl- 
Ing, so far as relevant and material, subject, however, to tlic 
right of any contesting party to recall or demand the recall 
of witnesses whose testimony has been taken, and to take 
other testimony In rebuttal of the testimony. 

I 2.123 Trial testimony in inter partes cases. 

(a) Manner of taking testimony: Testimony of witnesses 
in Inter partes cases may be taken (1) by depositions upon 
oral examination as provided by this section, or (2) by deposi- 
tions upon written questions in accordance with the require- 
ments of this section and | 2.124. 

(b) Stipulations; If the parties so stipulate In writing, 
depositions may be taken before any person authQrlze<l to ad- 
minister oaths, at any place, upon any notice, and In any 
manner and when so taken may be used like other depositions. 
By agreement of the parties, the testimony of any witness or 
witnesses of any party, may be submitted In the form of nn 
affidavit by such witness or witnesses. The parties may stipu- 
late what a particular witness would testify to If called, or 
the facts In the case of any party may be stipulated. 

(c) Notice of examination of witnesses : Before the deposi- 
tions of witnesses shall be taken by a party, due notice in 
writing shall be given to the opposing party or parties, as 
provided In | 2.119(b), of the time when and place where the 
depositions will be taken, of the cause or matter In which 
they are to be used, and the name and address of each witness 
to be examined ; if the name of a witness is not known, a gen- 
eral description sufficient to Identify him or the particular 
class or group to which he belongs, together with a satisfac- 
tory explanation, may be given Instead. Neither party shall 
take depositions In more than one place at the same time, nor 
so nearly at the same time that reasonable opportunity for 
travel from one place of examination to the other is not avail- 
able. 

(d) Persons before whom depositions may be taken : Depo- 
sitions may be taken before persons designated by Rule 28 of 
the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure. 



82 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



(e) Examination of witnesses : 

(1) Each witness before testifying shall be duly sworn ac- 



cording to law by the officer before whom his deposition is 
to be taken. 

(2) The deposition shall be taken In answer to questions, 
with the questions and answers recorded In their regular order 
by the officer, or by some other person (who shall be subject 
to the provisions of Rule 28 of the Federal Rules of Civil Pro- 
cedure) In the presence of the officer except when his presence 
Is waived on the record by agreement of the parties. The Tes- 
timony shall be taken stenographically and transcribed, unless 
the parties present agree otherwise. In the absence of all op- 
posing parties and their attorneys or agents, depositions may 
be taken In longhand, typewriting, or stenographically. 

(3) The opposing party shall have full opportunity to 
cross-examine the witnesses. If the opposing party shall attend 
the examination of witnesses not named In the notice, and 
shall either cross-examine such witnesses or fall to object to 
their examination, he shall be deemed to have waived his 
right to object to such examination for want of notice. 

(4) All objections made at the time of the examination to 
the qualifications of the officer taking the deposition, or to 
the manner of taking It, or to the evidence presented, or to 
the conduct of any party, and any other objection to the pro- 
ceedings, shall be noted by the officer upon the deposition. Evi- 
dence objected to shall be taken subject to the objections. 

(5) When the deposition has been transcribed, the deposition 
shall be carefully read over by the witness or by the officer 
to him and shall then be signed by the witness In the pres- 
ence of any officer authorized to administer oaths unless the 
reading and the signature be waived on the record by agree- 
ment of all parties. 

(f) Certification and filing by officer. The officer shall an- 
nex to the deposition his certificate showing : 

(1) Due administration of the oath by the officer to the 
witness before the commencement of his deposition ; 

(2) The name of the person by whom the deposition was 
taken down, and whether. If not taken down by the officer, It 
was taken down In his presence ; 

(3) The presence or absence of the adverse party ; 

(4) The place, day, and hour of commencing and taking 
the deposition ; 

(5) The fact that the officer was not disqualified as specified 
In Rule 28 of the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure. 
If any of the foregoing requirements are waived, the certificate 
shall so state. The officer shall sign the certificate and affix 
thereto his seal of office, If he has such a seal. Unless waived 
on the record by agreement, he shall then, without delay, se- 
curely seal In an envelope all the evidence, notices, and paper 
exhibits, inscribed upon the envelope a certificate giving the 
number and title of the case, the name of each witness, and 
the date of sealing, address the package, and forward the 
same to the Commissioner of Patents. If the weight or bulk 
of an exhibit shall exclude It from the envelope, it shall, un- 
less waived on the record by agreement of all parties, be au- 
thenticated by the officer and transmitted in a separate pack- 
age marked and addressed as provided In this section. 

(g) Form of deposition : 

(1) The pages of each deposition must be numbered con- 
secutively, and the name of the witness plainly and conspicu- 
ously written at the top of each page. The deposition may be 
written on legal-size or letter-size paper, with a wide margin 
on the left hand side of the page, and with the writing on 
one side only of the sheet. The questions propoynded to eaoh 
witness must be consecutively numbered and each question 
must be followed by Its answer. 

(2) Exhibits must be numbered or lettered consecutively and 
each must be marked with the number and title of the case 
and the name of the party offering the exhibit. Entry and con- 
sideration may be refused to improperly marked exhibits. 

(h) Depositions must be filed. All depositions which are 
taken must be duly filed in the Patent Office. On refusal to 
file, the Office at Its discretion will not further hear or con- 
sider the contestant with whom the refusal lies; and the 
Office may, at its discretion, receive and consider a copy of the 
withheld deposition, attested by such evidence as Is procur- 
able. 

(1) Inspection of depositions : After the depositions are filed 
in the Office, they may be inspected by any party to the case, 
but they cannot be withdrawn for the purpose of printing. 



They may be printed by someone specially designated by the 
Office for that purpose, under proper '■eft'''^"°°'- .^„„„ . ^^ 
(j) Effect of errors and Irregularities in depostlons. No- 
tice will not be taken of merely formal or technical object ons 
which shall not appear to have wrought a substantial Injury 
to the party raising them; and In the case of ""^^ ^^^^^ " 
must be made to appear that, as soon as the party became 
aware of the ground of objection, he gave notice thereof Rule 
32(d)(1). (2), and (3) (a) and (b) of the Federa Rules of 
Civil Procedure shall apply to errors and Irregularities In 

'^^'Ikt^Obj'ectlons to admissibility : Subject to the provisions 
of paragraph (j) of this section, objection may be made to 
receiving In evidence any deposition or part thereof, or any 
other evidence, for any reason which would require the ex^ 
elusion of the evidence according to the established rulea of 
evidence, which will be applied strictly by the Office. 

(1) Evidence not considered : Evidence not obtained and 
filed In compliance with these sections will not be considered. 



10 In S 2.124, paragraphs (a) and (b) are revised and a 
new paragraph (d) Is added. As amended, | 2.124 reads as 
follows : 
I 2.124 Testimony by depoaitiont upon written quettions. 

(a) A party may take the testimony of a witness by writ- 
ten questions to be propounded by an officer before whom 
depositions may be taken. See Rule 28 of the Federal Rules 
of Civil Procedure. The questions shall be served upon the 
other partv within 10 days after the opening date set for 
taking the" testimony of the party submitting the questions, 
together with a notice stating the name and address of the per- 
son who is to answer them and the name or descriptive title 
and address of the officer before whom the deposition Is to be 
taken. Within 10 days thereafter, a party so served may serve 
cros.s questions upon the party proposing to take the deposi- 
tion. Within 5 days thereafter, the latter may serve redirect 
questions upon a party who has served cross questions. Within 
3 davs after being served with redirect questions a party may 
serve recross questions upon the party proposing to take the 
depositions. Written objections to questions may be served on 
the party propounding the questions, and in response thereto 
substitute questions may be served, within 3 days. 

(b) \ copy of the notice and copies of all questions served 
shall be dellVered by the party taking the testimony to the 
officer designated In the notice, who shall proceed to take 
the testimony of the witness In response ^o the qu^tlons 
and to prepare each answer immediately preceded by ts cor- 
responding question, then certify, and file the deposition, at- 
taching thereto the copy of the notice and the questions re- 
ceived bv him. Such depositions are subject to the same rul- 
ings for "filing and serving copies as other depositions. 

(d) Testimony In foreign countries shall be taken only by 
depositions upon written questions unless the parties stlpu^ 
late otherwise In writing. Rule 28(b) of the Federal Rules of 
Civil Procedure shall apply to the taking of testimony in 
foreign countries. 
§ 2.124a [Revoked] 

11. Section 2.124a is revoked. 

12. Section 2.125 Is revised to read as follows : 

S 2 125 Copiea of testimony. 

(a) One copy of the transcript of testimony (taken In ac- 
cordance with S 2.123(e) through (h) or 12.124) together 
with copies of documentary exhibits, shall be -rved on each 
adverse party within 30 days after completion of he taking 
of such testimony. The certified transcript and exhlMts and 
one copy of the transcript shall be filed in the Patent Office as 

''Tl:^ ^-s'crlpt and the copies thereof shall comply 
with 12.123(g) as to arrangement, indexing and form. 

13. In S 2.127. paragraphs (a) and (b) are revised. Aa 
amended, { 2.127 reads as follows : 

{ 2 127 Motions. 

(a) Motions shall be made In writing and shall contain a 
full statement of the grounds therefor. Any brief or memoran^ 
dum m support of a motion shall accompany or be e^bod ed 
In the motion. Briefs in opposition to a motion shall be filed 
within Ts days from the date of service of the motion unless 
Tnotlier time is specified by the Trademark Trial and Appeal 



) 



January 2, 1973 



Ij. S. PATENT OFFICE 



83 



Board or the time Is extended on request. Where a party fails 
to file a brief In opposition to a motion, the Trademark Trial 
and Appeal Board may treat the motion as conceded. Oral 
hearings will not be held on motions except on order of the 
Trademark Trial and Appeal Board. 

(b) Any petition for reconsideration or modification of a 
decision, if it Is not appealable, must be filed within 10 days 
after the decision or. If the decision Is appealable, within the 
time specified In { 2.129(c). Any brief In opposition shall be 
filed within 15 days after service of the petition. 

14. In I 2.128, paragraph (b) Is revised. As amended, 
i 2.128 reads as follows : 

I 2.128 Final hearings and briefs. 

(b) Briefs shall be submitted In typewritten or printed form, 
double spaced on letter or legal size paper. Without leave of 
the Trademark Trial and Appeal Board, no brief shall contain 
more than 50 pages of argument and, in case of the reply 
brief, the entire brief shall not exceed 25 pages. Each brief 
shall contain an alphabetical index of cases therein. 

• • • • • 

15. In i 2.129, paragraph (c) Is revised. As amended, S 2.129 
reads as follows : 

i 2.129 Oral argument. 

• • * • * 

(c) Any petition for rehearing, reconsideration, or modifi- 
cation of a decision must be filed within 30 days from the date 
thereof. Any brief In opposition shall be filed within 15 days 
after service of the petition. 

Effective date. This revision shall be applicable to all pro 
ceedings Instituted on or after July 1, 1972. 

Date: April 5, 1972. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 

Commissioner of Patents. 
Approved : April 11, 1972. 
James H. Wakelin, Jr., 
Assistant Secretary for 
Science and Technology. 

[FR Doc. 72-5830 ; Filed 4-17-72 ; 8 : 52 am] 

Published in 37 F.R. 7605; Apr. 18. 197 i 

[898 O.G. TM 170] 



(.330) 



TITLE 37— PATENTS, TRADEMARKS, 
AND COPYRIGHTS 



Chapter I — Patent Office, Depabtment of Commerce 

PART 1 RULES OK PRACTICE IX PATENT CASES 

PART 2— RCLES OF PRACTICE IN TRADEMARK CASES 

.Appeal to U.S. Court of Customs and Patent .Appeals 

The Commissioner of Patents is amending $| 1.301 and 
2.145 of the rules of practice to set forth the time in which 
an order for transmitting a transcript to the Court of Cus- 
toms and Patent Appeals should be filed in the Patent Office. 
Additionally, for the purpose of clarification, all references to 
"•subsection" in § 2.145 have been amended to read "para- 
graph." These amendments do not effect any change in prac- 
tice, but merely uotlty parties filing appeals of the time neces- 
sary for the Patent Office to copy and certify a transcript. 
Since these changes impose no burden on any person, notice 
and public procedure thereon are deemed unnecessary. 

Therefore, pursuant to the authority contained In section 
41 of the Act of July 5, 194(? (00 Stat. 440; 15 U.S.C. 1123), 
and section 6 of the Act of July 19, 1952 (60 Stat. 793 : 35 
U.S.C. G), Parts 1 and 2 of Chapter I of Title 37 of the Code 
of Federal Regulations are hereby amended as follows : 

» • • • • 

2. In § 2.145, paragraph (a) is amended by adding a sen- 
tence at the end; paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) are amended 
by substituting "paragraph" for "subsection." As amended, 
i 2.145 reads as follows : 

I 2.145 .Appeal to court and civil action. 

(a) Appeal to U.S. Court of Customs and Patent Appeals. 
An applicant for registration, or any party to an interference, 
opposition, or cancellation proceeding or any party to an ap- 



plication to register as a concurrent user, hereinafter referred 
to as inter partes proceedings, who is dissatisfied with the 
decision of the Trademark Trial and Appeal Board and any 
registrant who has filed an affidavit or declaration under sec- 
tion 8 of the act or who has filed an application for renewal 
and Is dissatisfied with the decision of the Commissioner 
(iJ2.1C5, 2.184), may appeal to the U.S. Court of Customs 
and Patent Appeals. The appellant must take the following 
steps in such an appeal: (1) In the Patent Office give notice 
to the Commissioner and file the reasons of appeal (see para- 
graphs (b) and (d) of this section) ; (2) In the court, file 
a petition of appeal and a certified transcript of the record 
within a specified time after filing the reasons of appeal, and 
pay the fee for appeal, as provided by the rules of the court. 
The transcript will be transmitted to the Court by the Patent 
Office on order of and at the expense of the appellant. Such 
order should be filed with the notice of appeal, but In no case 
should It be filed later than 15 days thereafter. 

(b) .Voftce and reasons of appeal. (1) when an appeal is 
taken to the U.S. Court of Customs and Patent Appeals, the 
appellant shall give notice thereof to the Commissioner, and 
file in the Patent Office, within the time specified in paragraph 
(d) of this section, his reasons of appeal specifically set forth 

in writing. 

(2) In inter partes proceedings, the notice and reasons 
must be served as provided in | 2.119. 

(c) Civil action. (1) Any person who may appeal to the 
U S Court of Customs and Patent Appeals (paragraph (a) of 
this section), may have remedy by civil action under section 
21(b) of the act. Such civilization must be commenced within 
the time si>eclfied in paragraph (d) of this section. 

(2) If an applicant or registrant In an ex parte case has 
taken an appeal to the U.S. Court of Customs and Patent Ap- 
I>eals. he thereby waives his right to proceed under section 

21(b) of the act. 

(3) If a partv to an Inter partes proceeding has taken an 
appeal to the U.S. Court of Customs and Patent Appeals, and 
anv adverse party to the case shall, within 20 days after the 
appellant shall have filed notice of the appeal to the court 
(paragraph (b) of this section), file notice with the Com- 
missioner that he elects to have all further proceedings con- 
ducted as provided in section 21(b) of the act, certified copies 
of such notices will be transmitted to the U.S. Court of 
Customs and Patent Appeals for such action as may be 
necessary. The notice of election must be served as provided 

id) Time for appeal or civil action. The time for filing the 
notice and reasons of appeal to the U.S. Court of Customs and 
Patent Appeals (paragraph (b) of this section), or for com- 
mencing a civil action (paragraph (c) of this section), is 60 
days from the date of the decision of the Trademark Trial and 
Appeal Board or the Commissioner, as the case may be If a 
petition for rehearing or reconsideration Is filed within 60 
davs after the date of the decision, the time is extended to 
30" davs after action on the petition. Xo petition for rehear- 
ing or reconsideration filed out^de the time specified herein 
after such decision, nor any proc^lngs on such petition shall 
operate to extend the period of 00 days hereinabove provided. 
The time specified herein are calendar days. If the last day 
of time specified for appeal, or commencing a civil action falls 
on a Saturday. Sunday, or legal holiday, the time Is extended 
to the next day which is neither a Saturday. Sunday nor a 
holiday. If a party to an inter partes proceeding has taken an 
appeal to the U.S. Court of Customs and Patent APPea s and 
.-in adverse party has filed notice under section 21(a)(1) of 
the act that he elects to have all further proceedings con- 
ducted under section 21(b) of the act. the time for filing a 
civil action thereafter is specified In section 21(a)(1) of the 

HCt" 

Effective date. This amendment will become effective upon 
Its publication In the Federal Register (5-11-72). 
Dated : May 1. 1972. ^^^^^^ OOTTSCH-.LK. 

Coffi»ni8«io«c»- of Patents: 

Approved : April 28, 1972. 
James H. Wakelix, Jr., 
.4««i«fa»if Secretary for 
Science and Technology. 
[FR Doc. 72-7159 ; Filed 5-10-72 ; 8 :49 am] 
Published in 37 F.R. 9175; May 11. 197i 
[899 O.G. TM 77] 



84 

(331) 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



Januaky 2, 1973 



Trademarks — Proposed Adoption of 
International Classification 



On March 29. 1972, the Patent Office published a notice of 
proposed rule making in the Federal Register at 37 F.R. 6404. 
That notice proposed to amend Rule 6.1 of the Trademark 
Rules of Practice. A public hearing on the proposed amend- 
ment was held on June 14. 1972 in Arlington. Virginia, and 
Interested persons were given the opportunity to submit com- 
ments regarding the proposed amendment until that date. It 
has come to our attention that the Federal Register notice 
never appeared in the Official Gazette. 

In order to insure that all interested persons have had an 
opportunity to comment, the date for written comments la 
hereby extended to August 18, 1972. 

The notice as It appeared in the Federal Register is repro- 
duced below. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
Date : June 9, 1972. . Commissioner of Patents. 

Proposed Rule Making 

Classification of Goods and Services 

[37 CFR Part 6] 

International Schedule 

The Patent Office proposes to establish the "International 
Classification of Goods and Services to Which Trademarks 
Are Applied" (the subject of the "Nice Agreement Concern- 
ing the International Classification of Goods and Services for 
the Purposes of the Registration of Marks" of 1957 as revised 
at Stockholm, on July 14, 1967) as the primary classification 
of goods and services for registration of trademarks and serv- 
ice marks. 

The Patent Office has studied the International Classifica- 
tion and, since March 5, 1968, has Indicated the appropriate 
international class in all publications and on all Issued regis- 
trations and renewals, as a subsidiary classification. Based on 
this experience, it is now believed that adoption of the inter- 
national schedule as the primary classification is desirable. 
The International schedule Is in use In more than 60 countries 
and is the subject of the aforementioned Nice Agreement to 
which the United States has recentiy become a party. The 
Nice Agreement provides for an International Committee of 
Experts whose task is to keep the classification current. The 
classification of specific goods and services is set forth in an 
alphabetical list entitled "International Classification of Goods 
and Services to Which Trademarks Are Applied" (published 
by the World Intellectual Property Organization). This list- 
ing is currently used by the office as a guldelinp for determin- 
ing the degree of particularity of identification of goods. See 
"Identification of Goods and Services in Trademark Applica- 
tions." 895 O.G. 390. TM 54. 

Specifically It Is proposed that all applications for regis- 
tration of marks and renewals of registrations having a filing 
date later than September 30, 1972, be classified according 
to the International Classification for all administrative pur- 
poses set forth in the Trademark Act. Accordingly, the inter- 
national classification would be the sole criteria for deter- 
mining fees and classification of goods and services. Applica- 
tions and renewals which are pending at the close of busi- 
ness on September 30, 1972, would continue to be processed 
under the present classification system. However, the Office 
would continue to mark all such published applications and 
registrations with the appropriate international class as a 
subsidiary classification as It has been doing for several years. 
It is not proposed that the existing documents in tlie Trade- 
mark Search Room be reclassified. The U.S. classification sys- 
tem would continue to be used for purposes of searching regis- 
tered and pending marks until such time as a complete con- 
version of the Trademark Search Room file to the interna- 
tional classification system is effected. Until such conversion 
Is made, the U.S. class number would continue to be printed 
on all registrations In addition to the international class 
number so that searches can be made on the basis of the 
existing U.S. system. It should be noted that approximately 
53 percent of these documents are indexed alphabetically, 
without regard to class. The remaining 47 percent of the 
files are organized under approximately 50 headings (e.g., 
common prefixes such as SAN, GOLD. etc. and numerals, 



letters, design features, etc.) and under each, the documents 
are filed by class. This portion of the search file would be 
maintained as at present, i.e. classified according to the pres- 
ent schedule of classes. Until such time as all documents In 
the search room Include the International classification, the 
documents organized by class would continue to be filed ac- 
cording to the present U.S. classification. 

For an Interim period (I.e.. until all marks pending as of 
September 30, 1972, have been disposed of) the trademark 
sections of the Official Gazette which are organized by 
class would include two parts, one part for applications pub- 
lished or marks Issued on the basis of applications filed prior 
to October 1 1972, organized by class according to the exist- 
ing schedule of classes ; the other for applications published 
or marks issued on the basis of applications filed after Sep- 
tember 30. 1972, organized by class according to the new 
International schedule. All publications of applications will 
show both the U.S. and the International class. number. 

None of the above changes apply to certification marks and 
collective membership marks which would continue to be 
classified as set forth in !i 6.2 and 6.3. 

All persons are Invited to present their views, objections, 
recommendations, or suggestions in connection with the pro- 
posed change to the Commissioner of Patents, Washington, 
DC 20231, on or before June 14, 1972. on which date a 
hearing will be held at 2 p.m. e.d.s.t.. In Room 8C06, Building 
2 2011 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington. Va. All per- 
sons wishing to be heard at the hearing are requested to 
notify the Commissioner of Patents of their Intended appear- 
ance. Any written comments or suggestions may be inspected 
by any person upon written request a reasonable time after 
the closing date for submitting comments. 

Notice Is hereby given, therefore, that, pursuant to the 
authority contained in section 6 of the Act of July 19. 1952 
(66 Stat. 792: 35 U.S.C. 6) and Ih section 30 of the Trade- 
mark Act of 1946, as amended (October 9. 1962. 76 Stat. 
773: 16 U.S.C. 1112), the Patent Office proposes to amend 
Title 37 of the Code of Federal Regulations by revising | 6.1. 



ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
Dated : March 21, 1972. Commissioner of Patents. 

Approved : 

James H. Wakelin, Jr., 
Assistant Secretary 
for Science and Technology. 

! 6.1. Schedule of Classes op Goods and Servicbs 
t Goods 

1. Chemical products used In Industry, science, photography, 
agriculture, horticulture, forestry: artificial and synthetic 
resins : plastics In the form of powders, liquids or pastes, for 
industrial use; manures (natural and artificial); fire extin- 
guishing compositions; tempering substances and chemical 
preparations for soldering; chemical substances for preserv- 
ing foodstuffs ; tanning substances ; adhesive substances used 

In industry. 

2. Paints, varnishes, lacquers; preservatives against rust 
and against deterioration of wood ; coloring matters, dyestuff ; 
mordants : natural resins ; metals. In foil and powder form for 
painters and decorators. 

3. Bleaching preparations and other substances for laun- 
dry use; cleaning, polishing, scouring, and abrasive prepa- 
rations; soaps; perfumery, essential oils, cosmetics, hair 
lotions ; dentifrices. 

4 Industrial oils and greases (other than edible oils and 
fats and essential oils) ; lubricants; dust laying and absorb- 
ing compositions; fuels (Including motor spirit) and 11- 
luminants ; candles, tapers, night lights and wicks. 

5. Pharmaceutical, veterinary, and sanitary substances: 
Infants' and invalids' foods; Plasters, material for bandag- 
ing; material for stopping teeth, dental wax; disinfectants; 
preparations for killing weeds and destroying vermin. 

6 Unwrought and partly wrought common metals and their 
alloys ; anchors, anvils, bells, rolled and cast building ma- 
terials • rails and other metallic materials for railway tracks ; 
chains '(except driving chains for vehicles) ; cables and wires 
(nonelectric) ; locksmiths' work ; metallic pipes and tubes ; 
safes and cash boxes; steel balls; horseshoes; °all8 'ind 
screws; other goods In nonpreclous metal not Included In 
other classes ; ores. 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



85 



7. Machines and machine tools ; motors (except for land 
vehicles) ; machine couplings and belting (except for land 
vehicles); large size agricultural implements; Incubators. 

8. Hand tools and Instruments ; cutlery, forks, and spoons ; 
side arms. 

9. Scientific, nautical, surveying and electrical apparatus 
and instruments (including wireless), photographic, cinemato- 
graphic, optical, weighing, measuring, signalling, checking 
(supervision), lifesaving and teaching apparatus and instru- 
ments ; coin or counterfreed apparatus ; talking machines ; 
cash registers calculating machines ; fire extinguishing ap- 
paratus. 

10. Surgical, medical, dental, and veterinary Instruments 
and apparatus (Including artificial limbs, eyes, and teeth). 

11. Installations for lighting, heating, steam generating, 
cooking, refrigerating, drying, ventilating, water supply and 
sanitary purposes. 

12. Vehicles ; apparatus for locomotion by land, air, or 

water. 

13. Firearms ; ammunition and projectiles ; explosive sub- 
stances ; fireworks. 

14. Precious metals and their alloys and goods in precious 
metals or coated therewith (except cutlery, forks, aud 
spoons) ; Jewellery, precious stones, horological, and other 
chronometrlc instruments. 

15. Musical Instruments (other than talking machines and 
wireless apparatus). 

16. Paper and paper articles, cardboard and cardboard 
articles : printed matter, newspaper and periodicals, books ; 
bookbinding material ; photographs ; stationery, adhesive ma- 
terials (stationery) ; artists' materials: paint brushes; type- 
writers and office requisites (other than furniture) : Instruc- 
tional and teaching material (other than apparatus) ; playing 
cards; printers' type and cliches (stereotype). 

17. Gutta percha, indiarubber, balata, and substitutes, arti 
cles made from these substances and not Included In other 
classes ; plastics in the form of sheets, blocks, and rods, being 
for use in manufacture: materials for packing, stopping, or 
Insulating: asbestos, mica and their products; hose pipes 
(nonmetalllc). 

18. Leather and imitations of leather, and articles made 
from these materials and not Included In other classes : skins, 
hides : trunks and traveling bags ; umbrellas, parasols, and 
walking sticks ; whips, harness, and saddlery. 

19. Building materials, natural and artificial stone, cement, 
lime, mortar, plaster, and gravel : pipes of earthernware or 
cement ; roadmaking materials ; asphalt, pitch, and bitumen ; 
portable buildings ; stone monuments ; chimney pots. 

20. Furniture, mirrors, picture frames; articles (not In- 
cluded In other classes) of wood, cork, reeds, cane, wicker, 
horn bone, Ivory, whalebone, shell, amber, mother-of-pearl, 
meerschaum, celluloid, substitutes for all these materials, 
or of plastics. 

21. Small domestic utensils and containers (not of precious 
metals, or coated therewith); combs and sponges: brushes 
(other than paint brushes) ; brushmaklng materials; instru- 
ments and material for cleaning purposes, steel wool ; un- 
worked or semlworked glass (excluding glass used In build- 
ing) ; glassware, porcelain, and earthernware, not included 
In other classes. 

22 Ropes, string, nets, tents, awnings, tarpaulins, sails, 
sacks; padding and stuffing materials (hair, kapok, feathers, 
seaweed, etc.) ; raw fibrous textile materials. 

23. Yarns, threads. 

24. Tissues (piece goods) ; bed and table covers ; textile 
articles not Included In other classes. 

25: Clothing, including boots, shoes, and slippers. 

26. Lace and embroidery, ribands and braid ; buttons, press 
buttons, hooks and eyes, pins and needles ; artificial flowers. 

27. Carpets, rugs, mats, and matting; linoleums and other 
materials for covering existing floors; wall hangings (non- 
textile). 

28. Games and playthings ; gymnastic and sporting articles 
(except clothing) ; ornaments and decorations for Christmas 

trees. 

29. Meat, fish, poultry, and game; meat extracts; pre- 
served, dried and cooked fruits and vegetables : jellies, jams ; 
eggs, milk, and other dairy products: edible oils and fats; 
preserves, plokles. 

30. Coffee, tea, cocoa, sugar, rice, tapioca, sago, coffee 
substitutes; flour, and preparations made from cereals; 



bread, biscuits, cakes, pastry and confectionery, Ices ; honey, 
treacle ; yeast, baking powder ; salt, mustard, pepper, vinegar, 
sauces, spices ; ice. 

31. Agricultural, horticultural, and forestry products and 
grains not included in other classes; living animals; fresh 
fruits and vegetables; seeds; live plants and flowers; food- 
stuffs for animals, malt. 

32. Beer, ale, and porter ; mineral and aerated waters and 
other nonalcoholic drinks ; syrups and other preparations for 
making beverages. 

33. Wines, spirits, and liqueurs. 

34. Tobacco, raw or manufactured ; smokers' articles ; 

matches. 

Services 



35. Advertising and business. 

36. Insurance and financial. 

37. Construction and repair. t 

38. Communication. 

39. Transportation and storage. 

40. Material treatment. 

41. Education and entertainment. 

42. Miscellaneous. 

[FR Doc. 72-4744 Filed 3-28-72; 8:47 am] 
[900 O.G. TM 2] 



(332) 



BtTLKY Specimens in Trademark and 
Service Mark applications 



Many of the applications which are being received In the 
Trademark Application Section contain specimens which are 
too bulky to be placed inside the application file. The handling 
and storing of these bulky specimens Is taking more time 
and space than can be justified. The trademark rules do not 
provide for filing bulky specimens, and applicants and at- 
torneys are requested to adhere to the precise provisions of 

the rules. 

Trademark Rule 2.56 requires that specimens be of a ma- 
terial suitable for being placed In a file, be capable of being 
arranged flat (preferably not more than one inch in thickness), 
and not be larger than 8Vi x 13 Inches. If specimens of this 
character cannot be furnished. Trademark Rule 2.57 provides 
that facsimiles in the nature of photographs or similar repro- 
ductions be filed. Facsimiles must not be larger than 8Vi x 13 
inches and should clearly and legibly show the mark and all 
matter used in connection therewith. 

In order to reduce the quantity of bulky specimens and to 
avoid the possibility of delay In examination due to bulky 
specimens, the following procedure has been adopted : 

When specimens cannot be fitted into the file, the Trade- 
mark Application Section forwards the specimens to the Ex- 
aminer separate from the file and attaches to the file two 
copies of a form which Is a pre-examlnation memorandum 
pointing out that the bulky specimens are not acceptable and 
that proper specimens should be filed promptly. Upon receipt 
of the file and the forms, the Examiner mails one copy of the 
form to the applicant, or applicant's attorney If there be 
one, and places the other copy in the file. The Examiner will 
then destroy four of the bulky specimens, retaining one until 
proper specimens or facsimiles are received. Failure to fur- 
nish proper specimens as requested In the memorandum may 
delay the process of examination of the application. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
June 16, 1972. Commissioner of Patents. 

[900 O.G. TM 176] 



(333) TITLE 37— PATENTS, TRADEMARKS. 

AND COPYRIGHTS 

chapter I— Patent Office. Department of Commerce 

PART 2 RfLES OF PRACTICE IN TRADEMARK CASES 

Petition for Reviexc of Interlocutory Decision 
The Commissioner of Patents is amending | 2.127(b) of 
the rules of practice to extend the time for filing a petition 
for reconsideration or modification of an interlocutory de- 
cision. The existing rule requires that such petition be filed 



86 

within 10 days from the date of the decision. Recent experi- 
ence has demonstrated that this time period is insufficient 
in view of tlie possibility of delays in communicating the de- 
cision to the concerned parties. Accordingly, the rule is 
amended to permit filing of a petition within 30 days from 
the date 6f the decision. Since this change imposes no burden 
on any person, notice and public procedures thereon are 
deemed unnecessary. 

Therefore pursuant to the authority contained In section 
41 of the Act of July 5. 1946 (GO Stat. 440; 15 U.S.C. 1123^ 
and section 6 of the Act of July 19. 1952 (66 Stat. .93 ; 3o 
U.S.C. 6), Part 2 'of Chapter I of Title 37 of the Code ot 
Federal Regulations is hereby amended as follows : • 

§ 2.127 notions. 

(b) \ny petition for reconsideration or modification of a 
decision must be filed within 30 days from the date thereof. 
Any brief in opposition shall be filed within 15 days after 
service of the petition. 

t- * 

Effective date. This amendment shall be applicable to all 
decision dated on or after September 1, 1972. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
July IS 1972. Commiasioner of Patents. 

Approved : July 21, 1972. 

J.VMES H. W.\KELIN. Jr.. 

Assistant Secretary for 
Science and Technology. 

[FR Doc. 72-11883; Filed 7-28-72 ; 8:54 am] 

Published in 37 F.R. loSOi; July 29, 1972 

[902 O.G. TM 2] 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



^334) 



Trademark Keuistration Treaty 
Vienna Diplomatio Conference 



This is further to the notice published in Volume 902 of 
the OFFICIAL GAZETTE of September 19. 1972 (Trademark 
section, p. 105 and Patent Section, p. 751) including the 
Conference draft of the Trademark Registration Trea y 
(TRT), the current draft of the Regulations and related 

documents. „ ^ v, nn iqt'.> 

\s a result of the decision taken on September 29, 197A 
by' the Executive Committee of the Paris Union, a Diplomatic 
Conference for the negotiation of the proposed Trademark 
Registration Treaty will convene in Vienna, Austria, from 
Mav 17 to June 12, 1973. ... , „ 

In order to assist in the development of a position for a 
final preparatory meeting of a Committee of Experts sched- 
uled in Geneva from December 5 to 12, 1972. to review the 
draft Regulations for the Treaty, Interested parties were 
requested in the notice published on September 19 to submit 
their views or suggestions, particularly in regard to the draft 
regulations, to the Commissioner of Patents, Washington 
D C 20231 by November 20, 1972. We have been advised that 
the Conference draft of the Regulations to be produced from 
the December meeting is planned to be released by the A\ oria 
Intellectual Property Organization in January 1973. When 
released it will be published in the Official Gazette. 

Final comments on the Conference drafts of the Treaty and 
the Regulations should be submitted to the Commissioner of 
Patents by April 0, 1973. in order to be considered in prepa- 
ration of the U.S. position at the Diplomatic Conference of 

Vienna. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK. 

Oct 24 1972. Commissioner of Patentt. 

[903 O.G. TM 244] 



REPEATED PATENT NOTICES ALSO 
PERTINENT TO TRADEMARKS 



(5) 



ZIP Code Reminder 



By Executive Memorandum of June 18, 1905. President 
Johnson directed all Federal Agencies to take the lead in 
adopting the ZII' Code system and Instructed the Post- 
master General to issue regulations governing the use of 
ZIP Codes by such agencies. 

Pursuant to this directive. Section 137.26 has been added to 
tffe Postal Manual requiring compliance by Federal Agencies 
as follows : 

1. Effective January 1. 1900, official mailings containing 
typed or handwritten addresses must include the ZIP 

Code. 

2. Effective January 1. 1907, all Federal Agencies must 
use the ZIP Code in the addresses on all official mall 
and are required to presort quantity mailings by ZIP 
code. 

TO THIS END, ALL FUTURE LETTERS, COUPONS, AND 
OTHER PAPERS BEARING THE SENDER'S ADDRESS 
WHICH \RE MAILED TO THE PATENT OFFICE MUST 
SHOW THE ZIP CODE DESIGNATION OF BOTH THE 
SENDER AND THE PATENT OFFICE. 

The Patent Office ZIP Code is 20231. This designation 
should be used when writing to the Patent Office for any 
matter. In addition, the sender's own ZIP Code designation 
should be given. The benefits to be gained by the Immediate 
use of ZIP Code are many : positive identification of areas ; 
faster delivery of mail by reducing the number of handlings 
from point of origin to destination ; and easier identification 

of post office address. 

C. A. KALK, 

Mar. 22, 1966. Director of Administration. 



Any telegrams sent to the Patent Office must also bear the 
above identical address. 

The i.hvsical location of the Patent Office is 2021 Jefferson 
Davis Highway, Arlington, Virginia. This address must not 
be used when addressing mail to the Patent Office. 

No reference to Crystal Plaza. Virginia, should be made 
in the address of any communication intended for delivery 
to the Patent Office by the Post Office Deimrtment or Western 

^"compliance with this Instruction will help prevent any un- 
necessary delay in the delivery of mail, telegrams, etc. 



Feb. 20, 1909. 



C. A. KALK, 
Director of .idministration. 



[860 O.G. 662] 



[825 O.G. 428] 

(11) Official Patent Office Mailing Address 
Remains Washington, D.C. 
The official mailing address for all communications sent to 
the Patent Office remains : * 

Commissioner of Patents 
Washington, D.C. 20231 



(■->2) NEW PROCEDURES FOR PROCESSING ORDERS FOR CBRTI- 
* FIED COPIES WHEN MATERIAL Is NOT AVAILABLE FOR 
PHOTOCOPYING 

The previous practice of the Document Services Division 
in handling customer's requests for certlfle.1 copies of mate^ 
Hal not yet processed in the Application Division has been o 
return the order to the customer requesting him to reorder 
30 days after receipt of his Official Filing Receipt^ 

In order to improve this procedure, as of August 2. mi. 
all requests for certified copies of material that has not been 
process^ in the Application Division and has not been placed 
on microfiche are processe<l in the following manner. 

1. Each order is given a control number. 

2. The customer is notified as follows : 

a. He will receive an acknowledgment of the receipt of 

b He ^n be given the assigned control number for ease 

of reference in case an inquiry is necessary. 
c He will be Informed that his order will be held in the 
■ Document Services Division until the copy ^an be re- 
produced from microfiche. No definite time can be given. 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



87 



3. An Advance Order File has been set up in the Service 
Unit of the Document Services Division and the microfiche is 
checked dally. 

For further service to its customers, the Dociynent Services 
Division will furnish the Serial Number and Filing Date of 
the latest api)licatlon available on microfiche for publication 
in the Official Gazette. 

ROBERT J. RISH. 
Aug. 2, 1971. Acting Assistant Cotnmissioner 

for .Administration. 
'~ [890 O.G. 301] 



(26) 



Public Records Certification Desk 



The certification desk, located in Crystal Plaza In the 
Attorneys and Record Room, Building 4, Room IDOl, pro- 
vides "on-the-spot" certifying service. This desk handles 
walk-in requests for certified copies of file wrappers, patented 
applications, patents, and selected papers from patented ap- 
plication files. The usual fee for this service (1.00 per cer- 
tification) may be apidled at this location in the form of a 
paid cash order form, obtainable at the Cashier's Office ad- 
jacent the lobby of building #2. 



(43) Revision of "Discontinuance of Deposit Ac- 
count Service for Sale of Patent Copies" 

In view of the difficulties experienced by many of its cus- 
tomers, the Patent Office is revising the Notice appearing In 
the December 1, 1904, issue of the Official Gazette of the U.S. 
Patent Office. This Notice — Discontinuance of Deposit Ac- 
count Service for Sale of Patent Copies — is revised to except 
certain types of patent copy orders. 

The Patent Office will now accept lists of fifty (50) or more 
numbers arranged in numerical sequence to be charged to 
Deposit Accounts. Service charges, such as Special Handling 
and Air Mail postage for these orders, may also be charged 
to Deposit Accounts. 

C. A. KALK, 
July 15, 1905. Director of Administration. 

[818 O.G. 1207] 



Nov. 26, 1971. 



(27) 



ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
.Acting Commissioner of Patents. 

[893 O.G. 810) 



Customer Relations Center 



A Customer Relations Center, located In Crystal Plaza 
adjacent to the Public Search Room. Building 4. Rooms A102 
and A103, has i)een established to provide a central customer 
complaint and inquiry service. The Center is staff'ed with six 
highly exi)erienced employees who process inquiries concern- 
ing copies of U.S. patent documents previously ordered but 
not received. This Center handles not only walk-in but tele- 
phonic, and written requests for assistance as well. In addi- 
tion to improving customer relations, this service Is Intended 
to relieve the i)rlmary customer service areas (Patent Copy 
Sales, Document Services, and Reference Order Branch), and 
Patent Office officials, or interruptions and Irregular demands 
on their time. 

The telephone number for this service is (703) 557-2003. 

ROBERT GOTTSCHALK, 
.Acting Commissioner of Patents. 



Nov. 20. 1971. 



[893 O.G. 807] 



(35) 



Accessibility of Assignment Records 



In view of a number of inquiries as to the manner in which 
Rule 1.12 of the Patent Office Rules of Practice, as amended 
August 23, 1965 (819 0.(;. 443) is to be applied, the pro- 
cedure which it is i)lanned to follow in certain tyiies of cases 
is set forth below. 

1. Assignments relating to applications for registration of 
trademarks will be open to public inspection as heretofore. 

2. The Office will not oi>en certain parts only at an assign- 
ment document to public insi)ection. If sucli a document 
contains two or more items, any one of which, if alone, would 
be open to such inspection, then the entire document will be 
open. Thus, If an assignment covers either a trademark or a 
patent In addition to one or more patent applications, it will 
be available to the i)ublic ab initio ; and if it covers a number 
of patent applications. It will be so available as soon as any 
one of them is patented. Assignments relating only to one 
or more pending applications for patent will not be open to 
public insitectlon. 

3. If the application on which a patent was granted is a 
division or continuation of an earlier case, the assignment 
records of that case will be open to i)ublic inspection ; similar 
situations involving continuation in part ai)pllcatlons wlll^e 
considered on their individual merits. 

4. Assignment records relating to reissue applications will 
be open to public Inspection. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER, 
Dee. 15, 1905. Commissioner. 

[822 O.G. 709] 



(45) Deposit Accounts — Statutory Fee Charges 

Beginning on May 1, 1960, and until further notice, statu- 
tory fees, including filing fees for patent, design, and trade- 
mark applications, issue fees, appeal fees and opposition, 
cancellation and petition fees may be charged against the 
deposit accounts provided for by Rule 25(a) of the Rules of 
Practice in patent cases. During this period the prohibition 
of Rule 25(b) against such charges will be suspended. 

In view of the facts that these fees are indispensable parts 
of the actions to which they relate and that the charging 
of a fee against an account which does not contain sufficient 
funds to cover It cannot be regarded as a payment of the fee, 
It Is evident that the overdrawing of a deposit account may 
result In the loss of a vital date and may also impose a sub- 
stantial burden on the Patent Office in making appropriate 
correction of its records. It Is, therefore, necessary that effec- 
tive steps be taken to avoid such overdrafts, as follows : 

Checks of all accounts will be made periodically, and If any 
account is found to have been overdrawn, it will be immedi- 
ately removed from the active accounts and no further drafts 
on it will be honored. Prompt iiayment of the outstanding 
balance will be required and the depositor or his; attorney 
may be called on for an Itemized statement identifying all 
statutory fees charged against the account during the period 
in question in order that it may be ascertained whether any 
previously granted date should be withdrawn. 

It is emi)haslzed that the success of the procedure outlined 
above depends ui)on the maintenance of a sufficient balance 
in deposit accounts at all times to meet any charges made 
against them. The Office must, therefore, strictly refuse to 
permit any dejwsitor who has once overdrawn his account to 
maintain such an account in the future and In the event that 
any substantial number of overdrafts occurs it may be neces- 
sary to reestablish the prohibition of Rule 25(b) against 
charging statutory fees against deiJosit accounts. 

Accordingly, effective May 1. I960, the requirement of 
Rule 25(a) that an amount sufficient to cover all charges 
made against an account must always be on deposit will be 
strictly enforced, regardless of whether any fee is included 
in such charges and where this requirement is not complied 
with the account involved will be removed from the active 

accounts. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER. 

Feb. 23, 1960. Commiasioner. 

[824 O.G. 1200] 



(40) 



Practice in the Use of Accounts for Pay- 
ment OF Statutory Fees 



In the Official Gazettes of March 15, 22, and 29, there 
appeared copies of an announcement by the Commissioner 
providing for a trial use of accounts established under Rule 
25 for the payment of statutory fees. A number of questions 
have come up in connection with the use of accounts in the 
Iiayment of these fees prescribed by Public Law 89-83 and, 
in the Interest of uniform practice, publication of a statement 

^rranted. 

A general direction by an api)licant or attorney to charge 
to an account these fees as they arise in any ai)plicatlon 
prosecuted by the applicant, the attorney, or the firm will not 
be effective for such a purpose. Authority to make charges 
win be limited to a particular application. 



88 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



basis for a refusal to enter any amendment transmltt^ there- POsUedl. , ^ j^ ,f possible, be limited to such 

With, as an Incomplete response. Where variable fees are ^'f^^^^^;. ^ ^Itentlftatu^ n^t provide a remedy 

involved inclusion of a direction to charge or credit a de- P^^^^^^^^;^ ;\*,Yal„ ^ ^artlcula^ date. Examples of these 

flciency or overpayment would appear appropriate. ^oes of papers are ■ checks In payment of Issue fees, new 

An issue fee will be charged to an account until a no ce tjpes f P'^^"" "•; . ^^^j^ jo^y ^ates or statutory bars 

of allowance has been forwarded and a reply to that notice ^j;'-;;-^^ amendments wher'e the six month statutory 

"?i;1he purposes of determining the fee due the Patent P"^«^ ^TelTSZ: TnT; Yo^^Sgnated to receive papers 

Office, a claim will be treated as dependent If It contains The Field Utnce 



reference to one other claim In the application. A claim de- 
termined to be dependent by this test will be entered If the 
fee paid reflects this determination. This does not, however, 
prevent the rejection of such a claim as Improper, If, In fact, 
it Is not a dependent claim. 

EDWARD J. BRENNER, 

Comtni88ioner of Patents. 



Apr. 12, 196G. 



(48) 



[825 O.G. 1183] 



Deposit Accounts 



for the U.S. Patent Office Is located at : 

41st Floor. Federal Office Bldg. 
26 Federal Plaza, Foley Square 
New York, N.Y. 
The designated Field Office In Hartford. Connecticut Is 
located at : 

Room GIO-B Federal Office Bldg. 
450 Main St. 
Hartford, Conn. 
The addresses of Field Offices In other cities are listed in 



. * *, „ local directories and are available upon inquiry to the Com- 

The practice instituted on May 1, 1966. pursuant to the ' .^^^^ ^f patents, 

notice of February 23, 19G6 (824 O.G. 1200), whereby statu- ""'»>" RICHARD A. WAHL, 

tory fees may be charged against deposit accounts, and such ^^^^ ^^ ^^^^ Acting Commigsioner of Patentg. 



tory fees may be charged against aepoMi nnuu...... o..^ "— ^^^^ 

accounts are closed if overdrawn, has resulted in certain - 
difficulties for the Patent Office and deposit account holders. 
It has been decided therefore to modify that practice as 
indicated below. 

As was pointed out In that notice, the charging of a fee ^^^^ 
against an overdrawn account cannot be considered as pay- 
ment of the fee until a proper balance is restored or payment 



[872 O.G. 1383J 



I'ATENT Office— Postal Service 



ment of the fee until a proper balance is restorea or pay„.e... j, view of the -^urn to normal oP-atlons of the UnUed 

is made in some other way. Accordingly, deposit account States ,.ostal service, the Notice of Mar^ 19. J7P ^ ^^ 

holders who charge such fees must assume the risk of losing ,n the Official Gazette of Mar. 24, 197U, ^o.. »< . 

vital dates If they do not maintain a proper balance in their hereby revised. ^^^^ ^^^ ^ ^ Department of Commerce Field 

"T;;" f"m Ih^however. the overdrawing of an account olL will no longer' be <^-'j--<^XrThTabo'v:"oi^"da?e: 

places a burden on the Patent Office, particularly where a the U.S. Patent Office, ^^^^^ut /o .a^e^t ani 

number of Items are charged after the overdraft occurs, and «„ letters or other papers relating to latent a ^^^^ 

it is appropriate that those who are responsible for causing ,ases will be considered «« ^ecen^;' iui. Rule 6 of the Rules 

such a condition should bear the cost of correcting it. In „niy if they are filed in accordance ^"" ""*'' 

view of this fact. and>»f^the hardship frequently caused if of Practice in Patent Cases ^^.^^^^f ;^',; \q^o and the 
an account is permanently closed, the practice of closing de- aU other Provisions of the ^°""''. «' -/"^^^.k, remain in 

posit accounts merely because they are overdrawn will be Notice of Mar. 20. 1970. relating to Trademark. , 

discontinued, effective August 1, 1966. In lieu thereof an effect. „„tt4M V SCHUYLER Jn. 

overdrawn account will be immediately suspended and no WILLIAM *- ' J" ^, Patents. 

charges will be accepted, against it until a proper balance Is y^^j. 27, 1970. commi 

restored, together with a payment of ten dollars to cover the 



work done by the Patent Office incident to suspending and 
reinstating the account and dealing with charges which may 
have been made In the meantime. It is expected, however, 
that reasonable precautions will be taken In all cases to avoid 
overdrafts, and If an account is suspended repeatedly It will 
be necessary to close it. 

Similarly, because of the burden placed on the Patent Office 



(183) 



[873 O.G. 319] 



FILE History of Applications Affected 
BY Postal Emergency 



SlmilarLv. because of the burden placed on the Patent Office As a result of the P««tj'^™^'",^;"^^' 'p^teliT OfflcVexp"r^ 
incident to the operation of depo.^it accounts, a charge of ten "">■ «<;»'°'\°'; ^"^'"^^^7 j^j/rth 10. 1970 and April 15, 1970, 



dollars will be made for opening each new account. 



June 23, 19G6. 



(181) 



EDWARD J. PRENNER. 

Commisaioner. 

[828 O.G. 377] 



Emergency Situation in the 
U.S. Postal Service 



month, provided it did not excet-u u Mnroh 24 1970 

sponse provided In the Statutes^ (See O.C.. of March 24^ i»T 
or March 31, 1970, 872 O.G. 1383 and April 7, 1970. 87d U.u. 
"^'since this extension of time was automatic there will be 



In view of the present emergency situation in U.S. postal ^^ ^^^^j. to proviue u. y.^...y.^^^ "i"V „„„. ,„ the record 

service, the U.S. Patent Office is taking the following actions. ^„j ^^ dispel any question as ^o abandonment "> J « ^^^^^^ 

In regard to i>endinK applications, the time fo: taking any ^, „ patented file, applicants or their «»oj''^>« ""V separate 
action or paying any fee expiring during the period beginning ^^ ^j^ „ p^per explaining these '''■•«^»"^J^";, (identified by 
March 16, and ending April 15. 1970. both dates inclusive, is .^ould be filed in each case ;;» ""^^ff ^J ;'"^„d may 
hereby extended for ONE MONTH. However, no extension ^^^,^, ^.,., fiHng date, title and ''PP '^""^^..^J^^J "^i "Z one- 
shall exceed a maximum period for response provided for In ^^ ^^^^ly a copy of the not'"/*^ f J""7_ „nd identify 
.,,- t,»„»..»„.. »K ovtpnsion or should specifically reter to uim 



the Statutes. 

U.S. Department of Commerce Field Offices have been des- 
ignated, on an emergency basis, as receiving stations for the 
U.S. Patent Office. All i)apers sliould be enclosed in a seale<l ^^j. 27, 197a 
envelope and deposltetl in a Field Office. Such papers will be 
considered as received in the U.S. Patent Office on the day of 



n^onth extension or shoul.l specifically refer to and identify 
that notice. RICHARD A. WAHL, 

.Assistant Commissioner of Patents. 



[874 O.G. G88] 



January 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



89 



(184) U.S. Department of Commerce Field Offices to 
Serve as Receiving Stations Only in Declared 
Emergencies 

During the recent postal emergency, Field Offices of the 
U.S. Department of Commerce were designated as receiving 
stations for the U.S. Patent Office (according to the Notices 
of March 19, 1970, 872 O.G. 1383 and March 26, 1970, 873 
O.G. TM 2). In view of the subsequent resumption of normal 
postal operations, that emergency arrangement was discon- 
tinued in accordance with the notice of March 27, 1970, 873 
O.G. 319. After April 15, 1970, the normal practice with re- 
spect to the filing of all letters and other papers relating to 
patent and trademark matters in the U.S. Patent Office was 
resumed. 

The Patent Office has received suggestions proposing that 
the Field Offices continue to serve as receiving stations for 
the U.S. Patent Office. These suggestions have received care- 
ful and sympathetic consideration. However, it has been con- 
cluded that any activities of the Field Offices in this connec- 
tion mast be restricted, in the future, to any emergency 
officially announced by the Patent Office as requiring such 

action. 

RICHARD A. WAHL. 
Apr. 27. 1970. .4ctinj7 Commissioner of Patents. 

[874 O.G. 688] 



(185) Patents and Trademarks 

Relief in Cases .Affected by the Postal Emergency 
of March 1970 

On June 30. 1971. President Nixon signed into law Public 

Law 92-34. 

Public Law 92-34 requires claims for the benefit of an 
earlier filing date (Section 1.) and requests for such other 
relief as may be appropriate (Sec. 2.) to be filed in the Patent 
Office within G months after enactment, that is by December 
30, 1971. Failure to file a statement within the noted period 
will result In loss of right to take advantage of the benefits 
of the law. Further explanation or evidence may be required 
at a subsequent time. Public Law 92-34 provides relief only 
for situations caused by the postal emergency which began 
on March 18. 1970, and ended on or about March 30. 1970. 
and for which there is no remedy under existing law. 

The following explanation Is designed to serve as a guide 
for persons desiring relief under the law. 

The verified statement required to be filed under sections 
1 and 2 of the law may be by any of the following: 

(a) Applicant(s) for patent or trademark registration; 

(b) Patentee(s) or trademark registrant ; 

(c) Owner (s) of record. 

In cases involving plural inventors, statements made under 
(a) or (b) must be signed by all Inventors. 

The verified statement must specify the particular earlier 
date of receipt in the Patent Office to which the applicant, 
patentee or trademark registrant, or owner of record believes 
his application, fee or other paper would be entitled except 
for the delay caused by the postal emergency of March, 1970. 
The statement must be verified, that is, in the form of an oath 
or declaration. (37 CFR 1.68 (Patent Rule 68) and 2.20 
(Trademark Rule 2.20).) 

Evidence will not normally be required or considered by the 
Patent Office regarding a claimed filing date of March 18, 
1970, or later. In applications actually filed before June 1, 
1970. Claims for earlier filing dates In cases actually filed after 
June 1, 1970, or claiming a date prior to March 18, 1970, will 
be considered prima facie unreasonable unless an acceptable 
explanation of the basis for the claim is filed in the Patent 
Office with the claim or within 1 month or such longer time as 
may be prescribed by the Commissioner. Any claim not ac- 
cepted by the Patent Office because It Is obviously defective 
on its face or unreasonable may be subjected to further review 
by petition to the Commissioner. 

The statement should adequately identify the involved 
application, patent, or trademark registration by Including the 
name of the applicant, patentee or registrant, title of the 
invention or an Identification of the mark, serial number, filing 
date, group art unit number and any other Identifying data 
such as status of the case (e.g.. awaiting first action, amend- 
ment, brief, etc.). Acceptable statements will be acknowledged, 
made of record and retained in the Patent Office files. 



When practical, earlier filing dates accorded under this law, 
as well as the originally granted filing dates, will be Identified 
on ensuing patents and trademark registrations. These dates 
win also be Included in the Official Gazette in connection 
with patents, trademark registrations and trademarks pub- 
lished for opposition. In other cases, such as applications in 
issue prior to filing of a claim, the patent or trademark regis- 
tration number and claimed filing dates will be published in 
the Official Gazette after December 30, 1971. 

Patents issued with earlier filing dates afforded by this law 
will not be effective as prior art as of such earlier filing dates 
under subsection 102(e) of title 35 of the United States Code. 

In a pending patent application In which a claim for an ear- 
lier filing date has been acknowledged under this law, appli- 
cants need not file a Rule 131 affidavit to overcome a reference 
having an effective filing date between the "earlier" and the 
actual filing date of the application. Intervening references of 
this type win be cited but not applied by the examiner. Al- 
though a statement claiming an earlier date is accepted by the 
Patent Office, the claimed earlier date may be called into ques- 
tion In subsequent inter partes proceeding In the Patent Office 
or in the courts. In these proceedings, the applicant or owner 
may be required to present further evidence establishing the 
filing date to which the application Is entitled. In such cases 
a definite determination shan be made as to whether the ap- 
plicant Is entitled to the earlier date under the law. 

In cases where a patent application or an application for 
registration or late renewal of a trademark Is determined to 
have become abandoned for failure to meet a statutory tUne 
limit because of the postal emergency, the application wlU 
automatically be restored to pending status by the acceptance 
of the request, and prosecution or other processing of the 
application will be resumed. SimUarly, If a trademark regis- 
tration is determined to have been cancened for failure to 
meet the statutory time limit within which to file the affidavit 
required uhder section 8 of the Trademark Act (15 U.S.C. 
1058a) because of the said emergency, the order for cancel- 
lation will be rescinded. 

As explained in the notice of January 26. 1971 (882 O.G. 
1342) appUcants who may be entitled to earlier filing dates 
should note that a change in their U.S. filing date might, in 
turn, alter the date of expiration of the 6- and 12-month 
periods for filing applications abroad under provisions of the 
Paris Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property. 



WILLIAM E. SCHUTLER, JR., 

Commissioner of Patents. 

Dated: July 14. 1971. 
James H. Wakelin, Jr., 

Assistant Secretary for Science • 
and Technology. 

[FR Doc. 71-10469; Filed 7-22-71; 8:52 a.m.] 

S6 F.R. 1369i; July 23, 1971 

[889 O.G. 1064] 



(195) Change in Legal Holidays 

Those doing business before the Patent Office are hereby 
reminded that by Public Law 90-363, 82 Stat. 250. effective 
January 1. 1971, Section 6103(a) of Title 5, United States 
Code, was amended to read^s follows : 

S 6103. Holidays 

(a) The fonowing are legal public holidays : 
New Year's Day. January 1. 

Washington's Birthday, the third Monday in Feb- 
ruary. 
Memorial Day, the last Monday in May. 
Independence Day. July 4. 
Labor Day. the first Monday In September. 
Columbus Day. the second Monday In October. « 
Veterans Day, the fourth Monday In October. 
Thanksgiving Day, the fourth Thursday In No- 
vember. 
Christmas Day, December 25. 

Each of the holidays enumerated will constitute "a holiday 
within the District of Columbia." as referred to In Section 21, 
Title 35, United States Code. 



Dec. 2, 1970. 



WILLIAM E. SCHUYLER, JR., 

Commissioner of Patents. 

[881 O.G. 1707] 



90 
(212) 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 
Organization of the Patent Oftice 



January 2, 1973 



in the chart. The Order is publislied following the chart. ^^^^^^^^ ^ s,„,.,,^,., J„., 
December 18. 1969. Commmioner of PatenU. 

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE 
Patent Ofiica 



COMMIJSIONH or PATINt* 
0*pwly C*ii>ilii>*A*r •( faKnii 



OHict al liil»>M>iW 






ASSlSTAWT COMKiSSiO** 
FOR P»TEnT EX*»1mihC 

^r,ti Alt' C.~iiii.«w 



I 



Ollctal 



Otiict •( 

& Patanlt 



*SMST*MT CO»MISSlQHE» 

FOR APPEALS. LEOIStATIOM 

i TRAOeiARKS 



AiMSTANT COMMISSIONER 

FOR SEARCH SYSTEMS 

DEVELOPMENT 

DapwiT Attt CaawNiitiaMaf 



ASSISTANT COl<»lSSIOI«R 
FOR ADMINISTRATION 



OaMlf Am C«~"»a'a~' 



R 






E« 


Oll'ca cl 








0(1. ca •! 

Svaao'' S^'icta . 



B«>*J J Anwatt 



tiAM'NiNC GROUPS 
H,fk ?*.(»•••• CK««.»tfY, Pl«»l.<'» 

lnl«,«.«t.*M Tr«n»M<tl>««, Sl*r«t* 
PK,w. 

A^wMM*"*. Hwibon^y. P»>t«>«( 

H««<. P»« 
Cm ltif4 •••■*. 






0*Ut J R«»M«K 
4 D«^loi 






.Officttff 
F>nonc« 



Offset •(PfMTM*! 



DIRECTOR Of fUl»«lHft 
tUOCET. EVALUATION 
t FORECAST 










— 


Oll'Ca af 
Piann.Af 












OH'Ca al 
».4f' 










Ofkcaal 
Evalxai-aA 










Oil.ca al 

Tacl>A»l.9» A.wiaiw* 

& Faiacaat 





4 



kTtMl 









Office •! 



OH.ct aJ P0f«nt 
Pwkl'CM'tnt 



1 



Otf'Ct •« 
O'ffanilM'O" & 






w<f 4. nd 



[870 O.G. 334] 



PATENT OFFICE NOTICES 



Board of Appeals Decisions Rendered in the Month of 
November 1972 

Examiner afflrmed ^^, 

Examiner afflrmed In part ^^ 

Examiner reversed 

Total 220 



Patent Suits 

Notices under 35 U.S.C. 290 ; Patent Act of 1952 

3.080.264, Zlmmle and Bloecher. METHOD OF REMOVING 
SILT FROM TANKS ; 3.085.916, same. METHOD OF REMOV- 
ING \ND PREVENTING ACCUMULATION IN COOLING 
SYSTEMS, filed July 18, 1972, D.C.. S.D. Ohio (Clnclnnatn, 
Doc 7819, W. E. Zimmie. Inc. v. Ohio Valley Chemical Corp. 
and Charles J. Kennedy. Consent judgment. Plaintiff owner 
of patents, defendants permanently enjoined. July 20, 1972. 



3.085.916. (Sep 3,080.264.) 

3,216.609. C. Bogert, CAN CLOSURE, filed July 24, 1972. 
D.C. Conn. (Bridgeport), Doc. B-555-C, Farley Investments, 
Ltd. V. American Can Company. 

3 367.126. J. D. Howell, FLOATING AGITATOR ; 3.381.302, 
Relmus and Saporlto, FREEZE CONCENTRATION OF COF- 
FEE EXTRACT; 3,404,007, J. G. Muller. FREEZE DRIED 
COFFEE PROCESS AND PRODUCT : 3,449,129, Relmus and 
Saporlto, CONCENTRATION PROCESS ; 3,474,723. same, 
BEVERAGE APPARATUS; 3,495,522, J. G. Muller. same; 
3,531,295, N. Ganlarls. FREEZE CONCENTRATION OF COF- 
FEE EXTRACT ; 3,620.034. same, MULTI-STAGE FREEZE 
CONCENTRATION OF COFFEE ; 3.632,353, Relmus and Sapo 
rlto. REMOVAL OF TARS AND WAXES IN FREEZE CON- 
CENTRATION OF COFFEE ; 3,636.722, N. Ganlarls. CONCEN- 
TRATION OF COFFEE, filed Apr. 13, 1972, D.C. N.J. (New- 
ark), Doc. 66.3-72, Struthers Patent Corporation v. Nestle 
Company, Inc.; filed Apr. 13, 1972, D.C, N.D. Ga. (Atlanta). 
Doc. 16467, Struthers Patent Corporation v. The Coca-Cola 
Company. 

3,381,302. (See 3,367,126.) 

3.404,007. (See 3,367,126.) 

3,404.494, H. D. Wolfe, THEATRE AND STATE CON- 
STRUCTION, filed June 23, 1972. D.C, W.D. Va. (Roanoke), 
Doc. 72-C-86-R, H. D. Wolfe v. S'. Belkin. 

3,410.330, J. Matyas, FOLDING DOOR CONSTRUCTION. 
filed Feb. 4, 1969, D.C, E.D. Mich. (Detroit). Doc. 32306, 
J. .Matyas, doing business as Alliance Metal Products v. Great 
Lakes Hardware. Stipulated order of dismissal signed by 
Hon. Charles Joiner, July 20, 1972. 

3 447.351, C. W. Werntz, ROLL FORMING MACHINE IN- 
CLUDING DIVIDED ROLL PARTS AND SPACERS THERE 
FOR, filed May 18, 1971, D.C, E.D. Mo. (St. Louis), Doc. 
71-C-314 (2), Engel Industries, Inc. v. The Lockformer 
Company. Order entered Feb. 18, 1972 hereby set aside and 
(Merk Is ordered to enter a new judgment In favor of defend- 
ant and against plaintiff, May 22, 1972. 

3,449,129. (See 3,367,126.) 

3,458.783. M. A. Rosenberg, HERMETICALLY SEALED CA- 
PACITOR, filed Sept. 10, 1971, D.C, W.D. Pa. (Erie), Doc. 
108-71 Erie, San Fernando Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc. 
V. Erie Technological Products, Inc. Order entered, approving 
consent judgment, July 13, 1972. 

3.472,309, A. Calderon, METHOD OF AND APPARATUS 
FOR CONTINUOUSLY CASTING STEEL, filed July 20, 1972, 
D.C, E.D. Mich. (Detroit), Doc. 38618, Calderon Automa- 
tion, Inc. V. General Motors Corp. 

3,474,723. (See 3,367,126.) 



3 481,228, Dlckmann, Flick and Palmer, POWER TONG AS- 
SEMBLY AND CONTROL MEANS THEREFOR; 3.481.229, 
Dlckmann and Palmer, POWER TONG ASSEMBLY AND 
TRANSMISSION MEANS THEREFOR, filed June 20, 1972, 
D.C, S.D. Tex. (Houston), Doc. 72-H-811, Byron Jackson, 
Inc. V. Peck Sales d Service, Inc. 

3,481.229. (See 3.481,228.) 

3,495.522. (See 3,367,126.) 

3,511.208. O. C. Woodruff, FISHING RIG. filed Feb. 17, 
1972 D.C, W.D. Okla. (Oklahoma City). Doc. 72-104-C, 
Jamajo Industries, Inc. v. Speegle-Horaney, Inc. Parties 
settled. Case dismissed with prejudice. Judge Chandler, June 
26, 1972. 

3.531,295. (See 3,367.126.) 

3,552,051, E. B. Rltchey, EAR TAG, filed Nov. 11, 1971. 
D.C. Minn. (St. Paul), Doc. 3-71-C-277, E. B. Ritchey v. 
Fearing Manufacturing Co., Inc. 

3.561.093, B. GuUstan, METHOD OF ATTACHING A 
SLEEVE TO A WORKPIECE, filed July 17, 1972, D.C, CD. 
Calif. (Los Angeles), Doc. 72-1632-IH, Southco, Inc. v. 
Deutsch Fastner Corp. 

3.588.095. Ward. Ward and Bachmann, SUCTION TABLE 
SYSTEM FOR FEEDING OF WARPED SHEETS, filed July 
14, 1972, D.C.N.J. (Newark), Doc. C-1195-72. The Ward 
Machinery Company (formerly The Ward-Turner Machinery 
Company) v. W. C. Haicthome and Associates. 

3.594.255, W. D. Budlnger, HICKEY ROLLER AND METH- 
OD ; 3.635.158, same, ROLLER FOR PRINTING PRESS, filed 
June 1, 1972. D.C, N.D. IlL (Chicago), Doc. 72cl372, Rodel, 
Inc. and W. D. Budinger v. American Roller Co. 

3,598.064, E. H. Stempel, SHELVING, filed Oct. 1, 1971, 
DC, S.D. Fla. (Miami), Doc. 71-1527-C-EC, Belaco, Inc. 
V. .Advance Metal Products, Inc. and Air-Flor Shelving Sys- 
tems, Inc. Cause dismissed on stipulation, claim of Belaco, 
Inc. dismissed pursuant to stipulation without prejudice, 
counterclaim of Advance Metal Products, Inc. and Alr-Flor 
Shelving Systems. Inc. dismissed without prejudice, June 2, 
1972. 



3.620.034. (See 3,367,126.) 

3,635.158. (See 3,594,255.) 

3.636.722. (See 3,367,126.) 

Re. 25.536, D. T. Thompson, APPARATUS FOR MAKING 
AN ANNULUS, filed July 7, 1972, D.C, N.D. 111. (Chicago), 
Doc. 72C1669, Thompson Bagel Machine Mfg. Corp. v. At- 
u'ood Corp. 

Re. 26,168, B. F. W. Heyer, ENGINE PARAMETER ANA- 
LYZER, filed Jan. 14, 1972, D.C, N.D. 111. (Chicago), Doc. 
72cl24, Applied Poxcer Industries, Inc. v. Sun Electric Cor- 
poration. Cause removed from active calendar with leave to 
reinstate on or before Aug. 18, 1972. Further ordered that 
cause be continued to Aug. 18, 1972 for report on status, 
June 13, 1972. 

.D. 210,842. R. Genin, TOY CEMENT MIXER, filed Sept. 
26, 1968, D.C, S.D.N.Y., Doc. 68-C-3831, Child Guidance Toys, 
Inc. v. R. H. Macy d Co., Inc. Order of dismissal for lack of 
prosecution with prejudice. Judge Canella, July 19, 1972. 

D. 211.156. J. H. Wilson, JAR, filed May 10, 1972, D.C. 
S.D.N.Y., Doc. 72-C-2009, The Nestle Company v. General 
Foods Corp. 

D. 212,872, Trimble and Rottman, GOAL POST, filed Dec. 
28, 1971, D.C, M.D. Fla. (Tampa), Doc. 71-574-C-T, Triman 
Tele-Goal, Inc. v. Pinellas County School Board et al. 

D. 212,722, R. D. Kahn, FLASHING SIGNAL UNIT, filed 
July 30, 1969, D.C, E.D.N.Y. (Brooklyn), Doc. 69C938, Fedtro, 
Inc. v. Osrow Products Co., Inc. et al. Consent judgment. 
May 24, 1972. 

D. 213,«09. C C GlannouUs, COAT, filed Apr. 22, 1969, 
D.C, S.D.N.Y., Doc. 69-1683, Sidney Ellis Associates, Inc. v. 
Lilli Ann Corporation. Stipulation and order, dismissed with 
prejudice, June 22, 1972. 

91 



TM 92 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



O. .3.... K. G. Logan, VEHICLE SAFETY LIGHT AND «^ fi:;JZl''fr\\lTaerZT^^^^^^^^ 

BRACKET THEREFOR, filed June 19. 1972 D.C.. N.D^ Iowa - ^ Remington. LIGHTING FIXTURE FOR 

(Fort Dodge). Doc. 72-C-2017-C, Saflite Corp. v. Eugene j^^^jf^'^'^^/^^^^L VEHICLES. BOATS OR THE LIKE, filed 

Ryeraon, Rycol Corp. and Manco. Inc. j^^^ ^^ jg^2, DC, N.D. 111. (Chicago). Doc. 72cl514, 

D 224.106, F. Baranowskl, Jr., PRESSURE REGULATOR. Progressive Dynamics v. Triangle Products. 



JANUARY 2, 1973 



U. S. PATENT OFFICE 



Certificates of Correction for the Week of Jan. 2, 1973 



Re. 27,356 

D. 221,639 

3,455,731 

3,496,139 

3,530,074 

3,553,000 

3,576,464 

3,579,484 

3,583,423 

3,600,098 

3,603,954 

3,608.745 

3,609,411 

3,611,973 

3,612,783 

3,615,663 

3,616,850 

3,618,046 

3,618.652 

3,620,673 

3,620.749 

3,622,295 

3,627,927 

3,629,336 

3,631.151 

3,«32,652 

3,637.287 

3.637.794 

3.641,242 

3.641,279 

3.641.831 

3.642.482 

3.642.504 

3.643.818 

3,645.859 

3.646,300 

3,646,573 

3.646.574 

3.647.737 

3.649.729 

3.651.481 

3,653,743 

3,653.876 

3,655,628 

3,656,064 

3,656,931 

3,657,391 

3,658,496 

3,658,646 

3,658,732 

3.659,315 

3,659,652 

3,660,223 

3,660,482 



3.660.5©6 

3.661.423 

3,661,473 

3,©61,776 

3,661.965 

3,662.368 

3,663.074 

3,663,637 

3,663.955 

3,664,287 

3,664,640 

3,664,642 

3,664.730 

3,665,021 

3.665.524 

3.665.544 

3.666,436 

3.666.649 

3.666.664 

3.666,667 

3.666,693 

3.667.058 

3,667.199 

3.667.244 

3,667,249 

3.667,357 

3,667,403 

3.667.618 

3.667,913 

3.668.270 

3.668,662 

3.668,849 

3.669,758 

3,669.931 

3.670,006 

3.670.042 

3.670,283 

3.670.171 

8.670,371 

3,670,446 

3,670.958 

3,671.293 

3.671,501 

3.671,528 

3,671,725 

3,671,740 

3,672,172 

3,672.210 

3.672,748 

3^672.778 

3,672,869 

3,673,009 

3,673,205 

3,673,254 



3,673,262 

3,673,263 

3,673,285 

3.673,325 

3,673.575 

3,673,840 

3,673,843 

3,673,912 

3,674,115 

3,674,394 

3,674.501 

3.674,502 

3,674,683 

3,674,791 

3,674,963 

3,675,037 

3,675,085 

3.675,158 

3,675.317 

3.675,325 

3,675,480 

3,675,911 

3,675,935 

3,676,021 

3,676.025 

3,676,028 

3,676.080 

3,676,123 

3,676,168 

3,676,267 

3,676.391 

3,676,421 

3,676,621 

3,676,829 

3,676,970 

3.677,206 

3,677,444 

3,677,461 

3.677,533 

3.677.643 

3.677.701 

3.677.724 

3.677.778 

3.677,795 

3.677.804 

3.677.838 

3.677.895 

3,677,942 

3,677,948 

3,678,029 

3,678,049 

3,678,091 

3,678,098 

3,678,134 



Disclaimers 



3.678,418 

3,678,435 

3,678,445 

3,678,502 

3,678,726 

3,678,805 

3,678,922 

3,678,939 

3,679,065 

3.679,321 

3,679,383 

3,679,458 

3,679,519 

3,679,575 

3,679,662 

3,679,665 

3,679,678 

3,679,707 

3,679,738 

3,679,772 

3,680,040 

3.680,416 

3,680,605 

3,680,609 

3,680,612 

3.680,675 

3,680,803 

3,680,980 

3,681,140 

3,681,213 

3.681,349 

3.681.422 

3.681.428 

3.681.471 

3,681.488 

3.681.561 

3,681,709 

3,681,939 

3,682,318 

3,682,775 

3,683,494 

3,683,693 

3,684,119 

3,689.446 

3,690.229 

3,690,429 

3,690,454 

3,690.539 

3,692,230 

3,692.357 

3,692,515 

3,693,256 

3,693,455 

3,698,219 



3,347,365. — Chirland B. Funkhouser. Waynesboro, Va. PACK- 
AGE CONSTRUCTION AND METHOD OF MAKING 
THE SAME OR THE LIKE. Patent dated Oct. 17, 1967. 
Disclaimer filed Apr. 24, 1972, by the assignee, Reynolds 
Metals Company. 
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1, 2, 4, 6, 6, 8, 10, 11, 

12, 14, 15, 16, 18 and 20 of said patent. 



3,368,039.— Ocnunff L. Clapper. Vestal, N.Y. SPEECH ANA- 
LYZER FOR SPEECH RECOGNITION SYSTEM. Patent 
dated Feb. 6, 1968. Disclaimer filed Oct. 30, 1972. by the 
assignee. International Business Machines Corporation. 
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1 and 8 of said 

patent. 

3,438,147.— gfanlcy C. Lander, Aurora. 111. DISCONNECT 
FOR DOORS. Patent dated Apr. 15, 1968. Disclaimer filed 
Apr. 28, 1972, by the assignee, White Consolidated Indus- 
tries, Inc. 
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1, 2, 3, 11, 12 and 

13 of said patent. 

3.511,793. — James Burnett Ezell, Richmond, Va. MODIFIED 
VINYLIDENE CHLORIDE COPOLYMER COATING 
COMPOSITION. Patent dated May 12, 1970. Disclaimer 
filed May 31, 1972, by the assignee, E. I. du Pont -de 
Nemours and Company. ' 

Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said patent. 



3,591,274.— PWHp Joseph Donald, Woodbury, N.Y. PROJEC- 
TION OF COLOR-CODED B AND W TRANSPARENCIES. 
Patent dated July 6, 1971. Disclaimer filed May 12, 1972, 
by the assignee. RCA Corporation. 
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said patent. 



3,601,812. — Joseph A. Weiebecker, Cherry Hill, N.J. MEM- 
ORY SYSTEM. Patent dated Aug. 24. 1971. Disclaimer 
filed May 4, 1972, by the assignee, RCA Corporation. 
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1 through 7 and 19 

through 21 of said patent. 



3,603,588. John W. Ebstein, Roslyn Heights. N.Y. BASKET- 
BALL GOAL. Patent dated Sept. 7, 1971. Disclaimer filed 
Apr. 24, 1972, by the assignee Gabriel Industries, Inc. 
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claim 5 of said patent. 



3,012,303.— RaZpfc Whitaker, Philadelphia, Pa., Ralph Whit- 
aker, Jr., Raleigh, and Frank E. Whiting, Garner, N.C. 
PRODUCTION OF MULTICOLORED PILE FABRIC, patent 
Patent dated Dec. 12, 1961. Disclaimer filed May 5, 1972, 
by the assignee, Fred Whitaker Company. 
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claim 5 of said patent. 



3,644,180. — Russell Burock, Allentown, David M. 8u:irsky, 
Mlnersvllle, and Robert A. Whitner, Allentown, Pa. 
METHODS OF USING INORGANIC RESISTS. Patent 
dated Feb. 22, 1972. Disclaimer filed May 8, 1972, by 
the assignee, Western Electric Company, Incorporated. 
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims L^2 and 8 of said 



Dedications 



s 



3,172.289. — Seymour N. Blackman, Englewood. N.J. GLASS 
THERMOMETER. Patent dated Mar. 9. 1965. Disclaimer 
filed May 17. 1972. by the inventor. 
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 2, 4 and 6 of said 

patent. 

3 345 589.— OeroW C. Di Piazza, Lake Hiawatha. N.J. TRANS- 
MISSION LINE TYPE MICROWAVE FILTER. Patent 
dated Oct. 3. 1967, Disclaimer filed June 5, 1972, by the 
assignee, Bell Telephone Laboratories Incorporated. 
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1, 4 and 7 of 

said patent. 



3,084,064. — Lewis M. Cotcden, Indianapolis, and Joseph R. 
Clark. Brownsburg, Ind. ABRADABLE METAL COAT- 
INGS AND PROCESS THEREFOR. Patent dated Apr. 
2, 1963. Dedication filed May 25, 1972, by the assignee, 
Union Carbide Corporation. 
Hereby dedicates to the Public the remaining term of said 

patent. 

3,156,834.— Albert L. Stillxcell, Green Brook, N.J. AUTO- 
MATIC LEVEL CONTROL. Patent dated Nov. 10, 1964. 
Dedication filed June 5, 1972, by the assignee. Bell Tele- 
phone Laboratories, Incorporated. 
Hereby dedicates to the Public the entire remaining term 

of said patent. 



3 1^7 814 —Herbert 0. Corbett, Canandalgua, NY. APPARA- 
' TUS FOR FORMING BLOWN TUBULAR FILMS. Patent 
dated Feb 2 1965. Dedication filed. May 19, 1972, by 
the assignee. National Distillers and Chemical Corpo- 
ration. 
Hereby dedicates to the Public the entire term of said 
patent. 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,196,359.— Adolph J. Oiger, Murray Hill, N.J. WIDE BAND 
CURRENT LIMITER. Patent dated July 20, 1965. Dedl 
cation filed June 5, 1972, by the assignee. Bell Telephone 
Laboratories, Incorporated. 
Hereby dedicates to the Public the entire remaining term 

of said patent. 



3 278,808.— Murray D. Bonfeld, FuUcrton, Pa. SUPERCON- 
DUCTING DEVICE. Patent dated Oct. 11, 19«6. Dedi- 
cation filed June 5, 1972. by the assignee. Bell Telephone 
Laboratories, Incorporated. 
Hereby dedicates to the Public the entire remaining term 

of said patent. 

3 657 200 —William Ross Moore and Ralph Rolland Langner, 
' Lake Jackson. Tex. COPOLYMERS OF SULFUR DIOX- 
IDE WITH ALLYL EPOXYALKANE ETHERS. Patent 
dated Apr. 18. 1972. Dedication filed May 17. 1972. by 
ttoe assignee. The Dote Chemical Company. 
Hereby dedicates the remaining term of said patent to the 
free use of the People of the United States. 



3,201.721. — Rudolph W. Voelcker. Greensboro. N.C. COAXIAL 

LINE TO STRIP LINE CONNECTOR. Patent dated Aug. 

17. 1965. Dedication filed June 5, 1972, by the assignee, 

Western Electric Company, Incorporated. 

Hereby dedicates to the Public the entire remaining term 

of said patent. 



3,248,659.— Adolph J. Oiger, Murray Hill, and Arthur F. 
Perks, Warren Township. Somerset County, N.J. HIGH 
EFFICIENCY DISCRIMINATOR. Patent dated Apr. 26, 
1966. Dedication filed June 5. 1972, by the assignee. 
Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. 
Hereby dedicates to the Public the entire remaining term 

of said patent. 



Errata 

All reference to Patent Number 3,681,800 to Hermann 
Thoma. Swimming Aids, appearing in the Official GAztTtB 
of Aug. 8. 1972. should be deleted as the application inad- 
vertently issued. 

All reference to Patent Number 3,702.074 to John S. Mullen, 
Pipe Line Leak Detection and Location System, appearlnjr 
In the Official Gazette of Nov. 7, 1972, should be deleted 
as the application Inadvertently Issued. 



All reference to Patent Number 3.702.400 to Ronald I. 
Morley et al.. Addressing Apparatus, appearing in the Offi- 
cial Gazette of Nov. 7, 1972. should be deleted as the afore- 
mentioned patent is a duplication of Patent Number 3,688,112. 



PATENT EXAMINING CORPS 

R. A. WAHL, Assistant Commissioner 
- WILLIAM FELDMAN, Deputy Assistant Commissioner 

CONDITION OF PATENT APPLICATIONS AS OF DECEMBER 12. 1972 



PATENT EXAMINING GROUPS 



Actual 

FUlng Date 

of Oldest 

New Case 

Awaiting 

Action 



CHEMICAL EXAMINING GROUPS 

(JFNERAL CHEMI.=iTRY AND PETROLEUM CHEMISTRY. GROUP llO-M. STERMAN, Director .-... 10-18-71 

InoSanlc Sompounds; Inorganic Compositions; OrKano-Metal and Organo-Metj Hold Chemistry; Metallurgy; Meta Stock; E lectto 
Chemistry; l^^ttertes". Hydrocarbons; Mineral Oil Technology; Lubricating Compositions; Gaseous Compositions; Fuel and 
Ignltlngr Devices. « /v» n 

(JFNFRAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. GROUP 120— I. MARCUS, DlrfCtor -- 8-W-71 

Heterocyclic Amides- Alkaloids; Azo; Sulfur; MLso. Esters; Carbohydrates; Herbicide.; Poisons: Medicines; Cosmetics; Steroids; 
0x0 and Oxy;Qulnones; Acids; Carboxyllc Acid Esters; Acid Anhydrides; Acid Halldes. 
HIGH POLYMER CHEMISTRY. PLASTICS AND MOLDING, GROUP HO-L. J. BERCOVITZ Director. 8-(»-71 

Synthetic Resins; Rubber; Proteins; Macromolecular Carbohydrates; Mixed Synthetic ResUi Com^pastlons;Synthelc Resins 
With Natural Polymers and Resins; Natural Resins; Reclaiming; Pore-Fomilng; Compositions (Part^ e.g.: Coating; Molding, 
Ink: Adhesive and Abrading Compositions; Molding. Shaping, and Treating Processes. 
COATING AND LAMINATING, BLEACHING, DYEING AND PHOTOGRAPHY. GROUP 160-A. P. KENT. Director. 8-30-71 

Coating- Processes and Misc. Products; Laminating Methods and Apparatus: Stock Materials; Adhesive Bonding; Special Chemical 
Manufactures; Special Utility Compositions; Bleaching; Dyeing and Photography. 
SPECIALIZED CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES AND CHEMICAL ENGINEERING, GROUP 170-R. FRIEDMAN. Director 8-03-71 

Fe Ull/ers; Fwds; Fermentation; Analytical Chemistry; Reactors; Sugar and Starch; Paper Making; Glass Manufacture ;^^^^^^^ 
Heatlneand Illuminating; Cleaning Processes; Liquid Purification; Distillation; Preservlng;Llquid,Gas and Solid Reparation, 
ols and Liquid Contact Apparatus Refrigeration; Concentrative Evaporators; Mineral Oils Apparatus: Misc. Physical Processes. 

ELECTRICAL EXAMINING GROUPS 

1N1:>USTR1AL ELECTRONICS, PHYSICS AND RELATED ELEMENTS, GROUP 210-N. ANSHER Director - 4-19-72 

Generation and Utilization; General Applications; Conversion and Distribution; Heating and Related Art Conductors; Switches; 
Photography; Motion Pictures; Illumination; Horology; Acoustics; Recorders; Weighing Scales. 

m>FriAI LAWS ADMINISTRATION GROUP 220— R. L. CAMPBELL, Director -^ ■-,■--. i^-V/" 12-18-71 

Ordnance Firearms and Ammunition;' Radar. Underwater Signalling, Directional Radio Torpedoes, Seismic Exploring, Radio- 
Active Batteries. Nuclear Reactors, Powder Metallurgy. Rocket Fuels; Radio-Active Material. 
INFORMATION TRANSMISSION, STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL. GROUP 230-J. F COUCH. Director... --"---:- l'^*" 

Communications; MulUplexing Techniques; Facsimile; Data Processing, Computation and Conversion; Storage Devices and 
R'*latpd Arts 
RECEPTACLES SANITATION AND CLEANING, WINDING. AND MEASURING, GROUP 240-L^FORMAN, Director.. 8-09-71 
Receptncles; Joint Packfng:Condu^^ Plumbing Fiitures; Textile Spinning; Food; Agitating; Cleaning; Pressing; Geometrical 
Instruments; Sound Recording; Winding and Reeling; Measuring and Testing; Indicating. 
ELECTRONIC COMPONENT SYSTEMS AND DEVICES. GROUP 250-W. L. CARLSON, Director .— -..----- ll-2»-<l 

Seml-Conductor and Space Discharge Systems and Devices; Electronic Component Circuits; Wave Transmission Lines and Net- 
works; Optics; Radiant Energy; Measuring. 

DESIGNS. GROUP 290-R. L. CAMPBELL, Director 4-^-7i 

Industrial Arts: Household, Personal and Fine Arts. 

MECHANICAL EXAMINING GROUPS 

11 ANDLING AND TRANSPORTING MEDIA, GROUP 310-A. BERLIN. Director— -. -^, v— i-,-iyc;;w;VY.;,V.' ^^"^'"^' 

Convevo^; Hoists; Elevators; Article Handline Implements; Store Service; Sheet and ?eb Feeding; Dispensing: Fluld^^^^^^^^ 
Fire Extinguishers: Coin Handling: Check Controlled Apparatus; Classifying and Assorting Sohds, Boats, Ships, Aeronautics. 
Motor and Land Vehicles and Appurtenances; Brakes; Railways and Railway Equipment. „ -, -, 

MATERIAL SHAPING, ARTICLE MANUFACTURING. TOOLS. GROUP 320-D J. pT;OCK:iNG. Director .... 9-07-71 

Manufacturing Proces,se.s, Assembhne. Combined Machines. Special Article Makng; Metel Defornimg: Sheet Meta 
Working; Metal Fusion-Bonding. ^letal Founding; Metallurgical Apparatus; Plastics ^"J[king Apparatus PastlcB^^^^ 
Earthenware Apparatus: Machine Tools for Shaping or Dividing; Work and Too! Holders Woodworking, Tools, Cutlery. Jaclcs. 
AMUSEMENT HUSBANDRY PERSONAL TREATMENT. INFORMATION. GROUP 330-A. RUEGO, Director 11-18-71 

ASment and ExetcTslnfDWices; Projectors; Animal and Plant Husbandry; Butchering; Earth ^^^^'^'■^^"d E»«v«"^; 
Fishing, etc.: Tobacco; Artificial Body Members; Dentistry Jeweh-y; Surgery; Toiletry; Printing; Typevmters, Sutionery, 
Information Dissemination. t_na_w 

IIFAT, POWER. AND FLUID ENGINEERING. GROUP 340-M M. N^^'^^AN. Director. .............--.--------- l-"*-^-* 

Power Plants; Combustion Engines; Fluid Motors; Reaction Motors; Pumps; Rotary Engines and P"J?^f»' ^^t Oeneratlon an^^ 
Exchange; Refrigeration: Ventilation; Drj-ing; Temperature and Humidity Regulation; Machine Elements, Couplings, Uear 
Ing; Bearings; Clutches; Power Transmission; Fluid Handling and Control: Lubrication. 
MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTIONS, TEXTILES AND MINING, GROUP «"-T^ /■ HICKEY Dirw-tor.^^^. -^-^^ 10-04-71 
Joints; Fasteners: Rod. Pipe and Electrical Connectors; Miscellaneous Hardware; Locks; Bmldlng Structures, ClMiu-e(^^ 
Bridges; Closures: Earth Engineering; Drilling: Mining: Furniture; Supports; Cabinet Structures, Centrifugal Separations 
Coating; Textll«B; Apparel and Shoes; Sewing Machines. 

Fxplratlon of patents: The patents within the range of numbers indicated below expire during January 19"3.?icept those which "J^y have 
expired earlier due to shortened terms under the provisions of Public Law 6% 79th Congress. aPP-^o^d August 8 1946 (60 Stat. *^^^^^^ 
I..1W 61Q, 83rd Congress, approved August 23. 1954 (6S Stat. 764). or which may have had their terms curtailed 6y ^Isclalmw under the provlsion^^^^ 
3.'i IT S.C. 253. Other patent, issued after the dates of the range of numbers Indicated below, may have expired before the fuU term of 17 years lor 
the same reasons, or have lapsed under the provisions of 35 U.S.C. 151. ^^ ^ ^ ^^^ ^ ^ _^^^ ^^^^^^^^ 

95 



PLANT PATENTS 

GRANTED JANUARY 2, 1973 

„,„.,„U... for P..nt pate-t. ... a.u.,,. .. Co, ..d ..e,efo„ ,. .. ..t pr.e..c.b,. to reproduc. «e draw,.,. 



3,281 

ALSTROEMERIA HYBRID (YELLOW TIGER) 

Maurits C. van Staaveren, 30 Hornweg, 

Aalsmeer, Netherlands 

FUed Apr. 9, 1971, Ser. No. 132,921 

Int. CI. AOlh 5100 

U.S. CI. Pit— 68 . , u ♦ ^"Z 

A new variety of alstroemeria plant characterized by 
its novel color, the abundance of its annual crop of flower 
stalks, the profuse production of blossoms on each flower 
stalk, and the very long lasting quality of the blooming 
plant as a cut flower. 



3,282 
ROSE PLANT 
Herbert C. Swim and O. L. Weeks, Ontario, Calif., as- 
signors to The Conard-Pyle Company, West Grove, Pa. 
FUed July 22, 1971, Ser. No. 165,412 
Int CI. AOlh 5100 

U5. CI. Pit 19 1 Claim 

1.' A "new and distinct variety of rose plant of the 
hybrid tea class, substantially as herein shown and de- 
scribed, characterized particularly as to novelty by the 
unique combination of excellence of its hybrid tea habit, 
particularly good foliage having above average disease 
resistance, a habit of bearing most of the flowers siiigly 
and on long and strong stems, an' ability to retain a high- 
centered flower bud conformation through substantially 
the entire flower life, a distinctive, attractive and out- 
standing pink flower color which is maintained through- 
out the blooming stages from bud to open flower, an 
unusually strong, pleasant and true rose flower fragrance, 
and good lasting flower qualities and remontance of 
bloom which give the overall effect of almost continuous 
blooms on an attractive plant which is well covered with 
excellent foliage. 

3,283 
ALSTROEMERIA PLANT (CANARIA) 
Maurits C. van Staaveren, 30 Hornweg, 
Aalsmeer, Netherlands 
nied Apr. 9, 1971, Ser. No. 132,918 
Int CL AOlh 5100 
U.S. CI. Pit.— 68 1 Claim 

A new variety of hybrid alstroemeria plant character- 
ized by the novel overall yellow coloring of its flowers, the 

96 



abundance of its annual crop of flower stalks, the serial 
blooming of the buds on each branch of the flower stalk, 
and the very long-lasting quality of the blooming plant as 
a cut flower. 



3,284 
HYBRID ALSTROEMERIA PLANT 

Maurits C. van Staaveren, 30 Hornweg, 
Aalsmeer, Netherlands 
FUed Apr. 9, 1971, Ser. No. 132,917 
Int CI. AOlh 5100 
U.S. CI. Pit— 68 1 Claim 

A new variety of hybrid alstroemeria plant character- 
ized by the unusual pink color of its blooms, its vigorous 
growth and branching of the flower stalk, its tendency 
to flower the year around with an abundant flower crop 
on each stalk, and the long lasting quality of the blooms 
as a cut flower. 



3,285 
KALANCHOE PLANT 
James T. Irwta, Canyon, Tex., assignor to Irwin 
Greenhouses, Inc., Canyon, Tex. 
Filed Apr. 13, 1971, Ser. No. 133,769 
Int CI. AOlh 5100 
U.S. CI. Pit— 68 1 Claim 

1. A new and distinct variety of kalanchoe plant, sub- 
stantially as herein shown and described, characterized 
particularly as to novelty by the unique combination of a 
highly branched and upright habit of growth, medium 
sized and flexible foliage of moss green to fern green 
color, a uniform and consistent plant height and bloom 
date, an ability to initiate and develop flower buds under 
high night temperatures of summer when other varieties 
fail, a profuse blooming habit, with the ability to respond 
to short day treatment and with consequent capability 
of year-around flowering, a distinctive, attractive and uni- 
form apricot flower color, superior resistance to root rot 
as compared with most other varieties, and long-lasting 
qualities as a potted plant. 



t. 



PATENTS 

GRANTED JANUARY 2, 1973 

GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 

3,707,729 3,707,731 

GARMENT CONSTRUCTION ARTIFICIAL LEG k, ^u u ■ 

Lydla Scarsella, Astoria, N.Y., assignor to ZIm-Stra Originals Robert D. Morgan, 3130 CoWwater Canyon, North Hoi- 

Inc., Ne^ York, N.Y. ly wood, Calif. k« ««n 7Vi Nov 28 1969 

Filed Nov. 27, 1970, Ser. No. 93,055 ConUnuaUon-ln-part of Ser. No. »80f,^' ^o^- 28. 1969 

Int CI A41d 3m abandoned. This appUcation June 9, 1971, Ser. No. 151,220 

ii«ri2 R« 3 Claims lnt.Cl. A61f 7/05 

U.S.CI.2_88 U.S.CI.3-21 9 Claims 




A garment constructed in the form of a cape having a pair of 
spaced arm openings permitting the wearer to pass her arms to 
the front of the garment A flap member is provided on the 
inner side of the garment adjacent each arm opening, said flap 
member overlapping the opening to conceal the dress worn 
beneath the garment. 



3,707,730 
BASKETBALL PRACTICE GLOVE 
Gordon R. Slider, 229 East Walnut St., AUentown, Pa. 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 761,716. Sept. 23, 1968, 

abandoned. This applicaUon Dec. 17, 1970, Ser. No. 99,022 

Int CI. A lid/ 9/00 

U.S.CI. 2— 161A 6 Claims 





An artificial leg consuucted to be particularly adapted for 
use by amputees engaged in activities requiring particular 
degrees of freedom of movement, such as golf. The leg com- 
prises a lightweight socket adapted to receive a stump and a 
leg part with a joint between the socket and leg part allowing 
360° of relative rotation therebetween. The socket and leg 
part are rigidly aligned. At the lower end of the leg part is a 
foot with a joint between the foot and leg part allowing lateral 
tilting of the leg relative to the foot and to provide a cushion- 
ing shock absorber effect. The foot member is round and sym- 
metrical about its center, thus, avoiding any problem of foot 
alignment with the socket and leg stump. 



3,707,732 

STEAM BATH CABINET 

Dale L. Cosper, 1603 E. Hoover Ave., South Bend, Ind. 

Filed Sept. 14. 1970, Ser. No. 71,977 

IntCI.A61hii/06 

U.S. CI. 4-164 10 Claims 



A glove, to be worn while practicing basketball, having 
palm, back, and wrist portions, and open thumb and fmger 
portions. The palm portion includes a pad, which spaces the 
wearer's palm from the ball, and the back portion includes a 
longitudinally extending stay, which limits bending movement 
of the wearer's wrist. An adjustable strap extends between the 
thumb and index finger portions of the glove to limit the ex- 
tent to which these members can be separated. The restraining 
action of the strap between the index finger and thumb por- 
tions and the pad in the palm portion of the glove form the 
wearer's hand into a cup-like shape so that a basketball held m 
the gloved hand is controlled by the tips of the thumb and fin- 
gers. 

908 O.G. — 4 




A steam bath cabinet including a closet part having an 
opening thereinto defined by coplanar edge portions. A door 
hinged to the closet part and including edges adapted to make 

97 



98 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



sealing contact with the coplanar end portions of the closet 
part of the cabinet. The door of the cabinet is of a generally 
concavo-convex configuration which protrudes forwardly 
from the closet part of the cabinet when the door spans the 
opening of the closet part. The upper edge of the door is inter- 
rupted to form a slot into which the neck of the cabinet user is 
positioned when the door is closed. 



3,707.735 
SAFETY DEVICE FOR FLUID FILLED MATTRESSES 
Robert N. Carson. Jr., San Rafael, Calif., assignor to Carson 
Manufacturing Co., San Rafael, Calif. 

Filed March 10, 1971, Ser. No. 122.699 

Int. CI. A47c 27/05 

U.S. CI. 5-348 6 Claims 



3,707,733 

FLAPPER FLLSH VALVE 

William C. Gore, and Eugene B. Shapiro, both of Skokie, III.. 

assignors to Beatrice Foods Company , Skokie. III. 

Filed April 19. 1971, Ser. No. 135,252 

Int.CI. E03d//i4 

U.S.CI.4-57P 6 Claims 




A flapper flush valve comprising an integral unitary flexible 
resilient valve unit provided with means whereby it may be 
anchored to fit around the overflow tube of a toilet tank, or 
may be connected to the projections or trunions on an over- 
flow tube, or may be anchored to a support member other 
than the overflow tube. 



3,707,734 

UNIVERSAL SPINE AND SPLINTING BOARD 

Max Matthews, 1502 East Eleven Mile Road, Royal Oak, 

Mich. 

Filed March 17, 1971, Ser. No. 125,065 

Int.CI. A61g//00.A47c/7/64 

. U.S. CI. 5-82 20 Claims 





In order to prevent flooding in the event of a leakage or 
break in a fluid filled mattress, the mattress is surrounded by a 
lining in the bed frame or the like, and the lining has a 
drainage outlet connected to a safety bag under the bed, 
whereby the water escaping from the mattress into the lining is 
drained into the safety bag below the bed, means being pro- 
vided for draining the water out of the safety bag at will; there 
may be provided also a cover over the top of the fluid filled 
mattress to completely enclose the mattress in the bed. 



3,707,736 
FISHERMAN'S LANTERN FLOAT 
Robert C. Bass, Pelham, Ga., assignor to Bimbo Inc., Pelham, 
Ga. 

Filed Nov. 20, 1 970, Ser. No. 9 1 ,320 

Int. CLB63b 2 //52 

U.S. CL 9—8.3 R 5 Claims 




A board structure is constituted by a pair of separate rigid, 
generally rectangular panels, each of which may be used in 
various ways to the exclusion of the other, or which may be 
used in combination as a full flat splint length, as coupled 
rigidly by a stretcher's poles of the like. Each panel has a pair 
of elongated parallel and laterally spaced slots extending lon- 
gitudinally within side and end margins thereof, the slots being 
of a width sufficient to receive torso, forehead and/or chin im- 
mobilizing strap-like devices by which the patient is restrained 
prior to, during and after transportation from the scene of an 
■ injury. Each panel or board member is also provided, laterally 
outwardly of the said slots thereof with a series of openings, 
generally oblong in the direction of the panel's length, which 
may serve as hand holes and are also adapted to receive pa- 
tient restraining and supporting strap means of one sort or 
another Clusters of small belt-receiving slots adjacent cor- 
responding lower corners of the boards complete the pattern 
of aperturing of the latter. The use, in association with the 
boards, of cushioned forehead and chin restraining strap 
devices having hook and loop-type pressure fasteners and sup- 
plemental adjustable buckle or snap fastener means is contem- 
plated. 



A float having a well in the top surface thereof for receiving 
the base of a lantern, and having a ballast filled cup projecting 
from the lower surface thereof beneath said well. A lantern 
placed in said well is anchored by a pafr of closely spaced, 
parallel elastic cords secured at their opposite ends to the top 
wall of said float to extend across the well. 



3,707,737 
APPARATUS FOR CLEANING SUBMERGED SURFACES 
David F. Brower, San Diego, Calif., assignor to Peltec Corpora- 
tion, San Diego, Calif. 

Filed Aug. 30. 1971, Ser. No. 175,820 
Int. CI. E04h 3120 
U.S. CI. 15—1.7 *0 Claims 

A liquid under pressure flows through a conduit to an inlet 
of a jet pump means from which issues a high velocity stream 
of liquid. An area of pressure lower than ambient pressure is 
established in the high velocity stream and this is commu- 
nicated through a passageway to an inner face of a compressi- 
ble resilient pad which is to be disposed against the submerged 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



99 



surface. A pressure differential exists between the ambient 
liquid on the outer side of the pad and the liquid flowing 
between the inner surface of the pad and the submerged sur- 
face and this pressure differential urges the compressible pad 
toward the submerged surface to conform to the contour 
thereof and results in a thin high velocity film of liquid flow 
across the submerged surface to clean the same. Rubbing con- 



parts are fashioned to provide a zero draft or taper angle 
between the mold parts and the threads formed thereby so 




tacts between the submerged surface and asperities on the sur- 
face of the pad serves to augment the cleaning action of the 
liquid flow The resilient pad may also be somewhat porous 
thus allowing the flow of some liquid directly from the 
peripheral areas of the pad to the inlet of the jet pump thus 
lending to increase the surface flow velocity in these 
peripheral areas. 



3,707,738 

BASKET BALL WASHING DEVICE 

Milan Samuel Morris. P.O. Box 214, Towner, Colo. 

Filed April 12, 1971, Ser. No. 133,286 

Int. CL A63b47/04 

IJ.S.CL15— 21 A 




that linear parting of the mold parts is then possible. A pair of 
angularly disposed threaded openings can be formed by the 
mold. 



3,707,740 

CLEANER FOR PAINT ROLLERS 

Romeo J. N. Demers, 10 Trudel Ave., Dracut, Mass. 

Filed Nov. 13, 1970, Ser. No. 89,418 

Int. CI. B44d 3100 

U.S. CI. 15—236 R 



8 Claims 



1 Claim 





An apparatus for cleaning paint rollers comprises a relative- 
ly thick, solid body having an aperture therethrough, 
preferably of truncated, conical configuration, for admitting a 
paint roller for scraping paint therefrom by contact with the 
bottom, beveled cleaning edge of the aperture. The lop por- 
tion of the body includes an integral, annular peripheral 
flange, or bearing surface, serving as a hand grip. In one deep 
dished, embodiment of the invention, the material is con- 
structed of a sufficiently low modulus material that some pres- 
sure exerted on the bearing surface causes the edges of the 
aperture to be deflected inwardly to aid the cleaning action. 



A washing machine for basket balls. This device includes a 
multiple number of electric motor-driven brushes which scrub 
the basket ball with a solution carried from the tube portion of 
the device onto the ball. 



3,707,739 
MOLDED BRUSH HEAD 
Benito J. Hermann, Jr., St. Charles, III., assignor to NaUonal 
Brush Company, Aurora, III. 

Filed Dec. 9. 1970, Ser. No. 96,552 
Int.CLA46b//00 

U.S.CL 15-176 ^^^Tl 

A brush head of pushbrooms, or the like, with molded 
threads so that threaded handles can be screwed therein. The 
threads formed in such brush head have thread deformations 
that are formed by protuberances located on a pair of mold 
parts of such configurations so that the contoured portions 
formed by the mold parts closely approximate a complete 
thread within the respective openings to receive a threaded 
end of a broom handle. The contoured portions of the mold 



3,707.741 
WINDSHIELD W IPER 
Harry W . Roberts, Merrick, N.Y., assignor to Pylon Manufac- 
turing Corporation 

FUed April 5, 1971, Ser. No. 131,091 

Int. CLB60s/ /02 

U.S. CI. 15-250.42 1 Claims 




59 H^ 



^2V^^ 53 



A universal windshield wiper having a supporting su- 
perstructure delachably supporting a subassembly comprised 
of a blade, a backing strip and a latching clip detachably 



100 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



retaining the blade and backing strip The latching clip >s pro- 
vided with two legs, each having a contoured exterior with a 
single shoulder and the shoulders are offset one from the other 
so as to engage opposite sides of opposed parts of the support- 
ing superstructure. 



3,707,742 
DEVICE FOR HOLDING OBJECTS IN A HANDBAG OR 

THE LIKE 
Marjorie T. Justice, and Jack JusUce, both of 70 Linden Drive, 

Ventura, Calif. 

Filed Jan. 29, 1 97 1 . S«r. No. 11 1 ,049 

Int. CI. A44b 2 / 100 i A45c 11132 

L.S. CI. 24-86 8 2 Claims 



3 707 744 
ADJUSTABLE END CONNECTOR FOR WATCHBANDS 
Joseph F. Manzo, Cranston, R.I.; James P. Harris, Attleboro, 
Mass.; Robert T. Harris, Providence, and Er>*in W. Mauch, 
Warwick, both of R.I.. assignors to Brite Industries, Inc., 

Providence, R.L 

FUed May 19, 1971, Ser. No. 144,975 

Int. CI. A44c 5/8 

U.S. CI. 24-265 B * C'"'""* 





ae 'S3' 



An adjustable end connector for watchbands and the like, 
said connector having means movable between and open and 
a closed position permitting the connector to be clipped onto 
a conventional mounting pin bridging the lugs extending from 
the watch case, said connector further having oppositely 
disposed end pieces protruding outwardly from opposite sides 
of the connector and surrounding the mounting pin, and 
resilient means urging said end pieces outwardly into engage- 
ment with the mounting lugs whereby the connector automati- 
cally adjusts itself to differently spaced lugs. 



A device for holding a key ring or the like in which a hook 
projects from the lower edge of a plate from one side of the 
plate member, the upper end of the plate being inclined from 
the hook, while one or more prongs extend downwardly from 
the upper end to a position of engagement with the opposite 
side of the plate, terminating in pointed ends bent outwardly 
away from the plate. A pressure-sensitive adhesive element 
may be included on the opposite side of the plate. 



3,707,745 
YARN TEXTURING 
Ronnie D. Nikkei, Greenville, S.C, assignor to Phillips Petrole- 
um Company 

Filed Dec. 16, 1970, Ser. No. 98,668 

Int.CLD02g//20, ///2,///6 

U.S.CL28-1.3 8 Claims 



V-'.- 



4 



3,707,743 

TREATMENT OF CONTINUOUS SHEET MATERIAL 

Paul Henri Marchal, Neuilly, France, assignor to Midland-Ross 

Corporation, Cleveland, Ohio , 

Division of Ser. No. 886,835, Dec. 22, 1969, Pat. No. 

3,643,343. This application Oct. 21, 1971, Ser. No. 191,165 

Int. CL F26b 13/06; \44b 2 1/00 

U.S.CL 24-252 R 1 Claim 



SP.^ri. 




93,99 



-Ss 37 




This disclosure pertains to a multi-pass web-treating ap- 
paratus particularly adapted for drying a paper web. The web 
is transferred between passes or zones by turning rolls. A 
threading device associated with the dryer utilizes turning 
sheaves which are associated with each turning roll over which 
at least one threading rope or tape travels. An attachment 
device is fixed to the tape to hook or unhook the end of a 
paper web to be threaded through the dryer. 



Yarn is textured by passage at an elevated temperature into 
a zone of turbulence. The resulting textured yarn is passed 
through a chamber which contains a plurality of layers of rods. 
The individual rods of alternate layers are curved and straight, 
respectively. These rods exert a force on the yarn to produce a 
confined wad. Fluid employed to produce the turbulence zone 
is separated from the textured yam in the chamber. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



101 



3,707,746 

PROCESS OF PREPARING A TUFTED PRODUCT 

Ronald J. Summers, W ilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. du Pont 

de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del. 

Division of Ser. No. 853,633, Aug. 28, 1969, abandoned. This 

application June 3, 1971, Ser. No. 149,846 

Int. CI. D04h 1 8/00; B32b 5/00 

U.S.CL 28-72.2 F II Claims 




3,707,748 

CUTTING TOOL FOR HOLDING A PLURALITY OF 

DISPOSABLE CUTTING INSERTS 

Warren R. Price, Utica, Mich., and John H. Brownlee, St. Clair 

Shores, Mich., assignor to General Electric Company 

Filed Dec. 7, 1970, Ser. No. 95,445 

Int.CI.B26d;/04. //OO, 7/72 

U.S. CI. 29-95.1 4 Claims 



Zi/J- ^^ 




A process for forming pile structures comprising the form- 
ing filamentary pile loops and securing the base of the loops to 
a ronwoven backing material by impinging the material with 
liqjid streams to entangle the fibers. The resultant unitary 
stricture is formed without requiring the use of adhesive 
bonding, has excellent strip tensile strength and tuft pull out 
strength, and is useful in conventional pile-fabric end-uses, 
e.g., carpets. 



^ S 14 



A cutting tool of the broach type for holding a plurality of 
disposable and indexable cutting inserts. The broach tool 
comprises a holder body having a plurality of transverse 
grooves on its peripheral surface, each of the grooves contain- 
ing a plurality of spaced cutting inserts. The cutting inserts, 
generally U-shaped, straddle projections in the base of the 
groove for lateral location of the insert. A wedge member ad- 
jacent the inserts cooperates with the projections to hold each 
of the inserts in spaced location in the grooves of the holder 
body. 



3,707,747 
INSERT FOR CUTTING TOOL 
Willi Falk, Tonisvorst, Germany, assignor to Deutschne Edel- 
stahlwerke A.G., Krefeld, Germany 

Filed Jan. 27, 1971, Ser. No. 1 10,168 
Claims priority, application Germany, Jan. 31, 1970, P 20 

04 387.2 

Int. CI. B26d7 /OO 

U.S. CI. 29-95 ^ ^'■''"* 



3,707,749 

VARIABLE PRESSURE BED ROLLER 

Virgil E. Henley. Akron, Ohio, assignor to the General Tire & 

Rubber Company 

Filed Oct. 12, 1970, Ser. No. 79,846 

Int. CI. B21b 37/32 

U.S.CL 29-113 R 5 Claims 




ZCb. 



The disclosure is directed to an insert of hard metal material 
which when mechanically clamped to a recessed toolholder 
can serve as a cutting tool. The upper and lower faces of the 
insert have a substantially rhomboidal form and thus the insert 
is substantially in the form of a rhombohedron. The insert is 
provided with two single-point cutting edges which are 
disposed adjacent to opposite corners of the insert, each of 
which is in the form of an acute angle By providing each of 
the cutting edges on a different opposite side of the msert as 
well as diagonally opposite one another, the insert when 
mounted in a toolholder can alternately present either of the 
cutting edges in an operative position. As a result the useful 
life of the insert between sharpening operations can be ap- 
preciably extended. As determined by the positioning of the 
recess in the toolholder, the insert can be mounted therein 
with a predetermined back rake angle extending from a sub- 
stantially zero value to a positive back rake angle. Adjacent to 
each of the side cutting edges of the insert there is provided a 
groove which can serve as a chip breaker for a chip cut from a 
work surface. The surface of the groove extending toward and 
terminating in the side cutting edge can be provided with a 
positive side rake angle even though the face of the insert is 
disposed in the toolholder with a negative side rake angle. In 
this way both the back rake angle and the side rake angle can 
be established to be positive. 




In applying pressure to sheets of pliable material, solid rol- 
lers do not provide for variation in pressure dwell time. Varia- 
ble pressure rollers that do provide variation in pressure dwell 
time tend to crown or distort except where complicated anti- 
distortion mechanisms are utilized. This invention is a variable 
pressure bed roller for application of pressure to sheets of plia- 
ble material that is crown and distortion resistant and of ex- 
tremely simple design. 



3,707,750 
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING A TURBINE BLADE 
Georg Klass, Tuerkenfeld, Germany, assignor to Motoren^und 
Turblnen-Union .Munchen GmbH, Munich, Germany 

Filed Nov. 13, 1969, Ser. No. 876,256 
Claims priority, application Germany, Nov. 14, 1968, P 18 

08 852.3 

Int. CI. B21k 3/04; B23p 75/02. 15/04 

U.S. CI. 29-156.8 B ^"'^'T* 

A method for manufacturing a turbine blade in which a 
sheet metal strip, corresponding in its dimensions to the 
developed blade, is provided with cooling passages, thereafter 



102 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



blade wall, and thereafter the blade wall is placed about a tool 





core and is deformed into the shape of the blade whereupon 
the ends of the strips are connected with each other by brazing 
or welding to form the trailing edge of the blade. 



3,707.751 
DAMPENING ROLLER HAVING HYDROPHILIC 
SURFACE COATING 
Robert D. Misch, and Donald A. Daus. both of Chicago, III., as- 
sianors to MBT Corporation, Chicago. III. „ , . ^ 

Division of Ser. No. 8,530. Feb. 4, 1970, Pat. No. 3,637 416, 
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 636,258. May 5, 1967, 
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 
473 2 1 2 July 19, 1965, abandoned, and a conUnuation-in-part 
of Ser No. 524,454, Feb. 2, 1966. abandoned, which is a 
continuaUon-in-part of Ser. No. 231.299, Oct. 17. 1962 
abandoned. This applicaUon June 9, 1971, Ser. No. 151,416 
Int. CLB21bi//0«.B60b 5/00, 27/00 
t.S.CI.29-132 ^Claims 



simultaneously unwinding the strip from a strip holding means 
under brake tension to permit winding so as to decrease the 
width of the strip by at least three percent. 

3,707,753 
METHOD OF MAKING CAGES 
Joseph K. Bailey. Jr., Lakewood, N.Y., assignor to TRW Inc., 
Cleveland. Ohio 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 83,768. Oct. 26, 1970, 

abandoned. This appUcatwn Sept. 8, 1971, Ser. No. 178,717 

Int. CI. B21d 53112; B23p 13/04 

IJ.S.CK 29- 148.4 C 10 Claims 




ftONOINS LAVXR 
on FlCM 




An anti-friction rolling element cage having a plurality of 
circumferentially spaced ball receiving radially directed 
openings having integral tabs projecting radially inwardly at 
one end of the openings to prevent ball dropout in a radia 
direction, the tabs being formed solely by removal of metal 
from the cage ring blank. 



A method of improving the surface characteristics of 
plastics and elastomers which in its preferred aspects includes 
the steps of forming a bonding or coupling film on the surface 
of a plastic or elastomeric material and thereafter contacting 
the film with a compound or a mixture of compounds, or a 
solution thereof, capable of forming a deposit or coating of sil- 
ica or silica gel thereon, and articles produced in accordance 
with the method. 



3,707,754 
METAL WORKING 
Abdou Hanna Meleka, and W illiam Alfred Proops, both of Fil- 
ton, England, assignors to SecreUry of SUte for Defence 

Filed June 29, 1970, Ser. No. 50,873 
Claims priority, applicaUon Great BriUin, Aug. 11, 1969, 

34,943/69 

Int. CLB23p/ 5/02 

U.S.a. 29-156.8 H ^ Claims 



3,707,752 
ROLL COVERING 
Donald A. Brafford, and Richard J. Adams, both of Beioit, 
W is., assignors to Beioit Corporation, Bek)it, W is. 
Filed Oct. 28, 1970, Ser. No. 84,782 
Int.CI.B21bi//05 
U.S.CL 29-132 4 Claims 

A roll capable of operating at high speeds and high nip pres- 
sures having an outer shell of a composite material formed by 
bonding a needled nonwoven mat of either acrylic fibers, 
polyester fibers or mixtures of these fibers with an epoxy resm 
so that ten to forty percent by weight of the composite is fiber. 
The covering above described may be manufactured by wind- 
ing a continuous strip of the mat. said mat having been satu- 




A method of die-less drawing of metal under tensile load by 
applying localized heating to a transition zone at which elon- 
gation occurs. The temperature applied lies between defined 
limits and the strain rate obtained also lies between defined 
limits. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



103 



3,707,755 
APPARATUS FOR MOUNTING FILM TRANSPARENCIES 
Sven Goran Pettersson, Weldstrasse 20, Zug, Switzerland 
Filed Aug. 3, 1971, Ser. No. 168,690 
Claims priority, application Sweden, Aug. 17, 1970, 

11175/70 

Int. CLB23p/ 9/00 

U.S.CL 29-200 B 9 Claims 



3,707,757 
IN-LINE REPLACEMENT TOOL 
George J. Roebelen, Jr., Suffield, and Thomas E. Fitzslmmons, 
Granby, both of Conn., assignors to United Aircraft Cor- 
poration, East Hartford, Conn. 

Filed Sept. 2, 1970, Ser. No. 68,832 

Int. CLB23p 79/04 

U.S.CL 29—213 7 Claims 








.\\\Vxx\\\\N» ^ 



This invention relates to a tool and a method for replacing 
component parts used in a fluid system whose parts are made 
in a cartridge fashion readily adaptable to receive the tool so 
as to keep fluid loss and atmosphere inclusion at a minimum. 



An apparatus for mounting film transparencies onto flat, 
frame-like carrier members comprises a reciprocatable suc- 
tion head, to the concave forward end of which the trans- 
parencies are supplied in a pre-curved condition to be picked 
up by suction and delivered to each one of a series of can-ier 
members fed stepwise through the apparatus. Curving of the 
transparencies is accomplished by feeding them along a track 
having converging side rails and a wedge-like member 
between said rails. The transparencies may be severed by 
cutting from a long film strip just before being picked up by 
the suction head. A retractable ejector member projecting 
through the concave end of the suction head provides for posi- 
tive release of the transparencies from the suction head and 
their attachment to the carrier members. 



3,707,758 
INSTALLATION FOR MOUNTING SEALING RINGS AND 
THE LIKE, ESPECIALLY FOR RADIOACTIVE 
ENCLOSURES 
Eric J. Townsend, Vitry sur Seine, France, assignor to Com- 
missariat A L'Energie Atomique. Paris, France 
Filed AprU 16, 1970, Ser. No. 29,044 
Int. CI. B23p 79/04, G21c /9/24 
U.S. CI. 29-235 8 Claims 



1} 



3,707,756 
WIRE POSITIONER FOR TERMINAL ATTACHING 
MACHINE 
Joseph Wolyn, Gurnee, III., assignor to Thomas & Betts Cor- 
poration, Elizabeth, N J. 

Filed Feb. 12, 1971, Ser. No. 1 14,858 

Int. CL HOlr 43104; H05k 7i/00 

U.S.CL 29-203 D 5 Claims 




A wire positioner for controlling both the transverse and 
vertical movement of the free end of a stripped wire prepara- 
tory to being crimped to the ferrule portion of an electrical 
connector includes a retractable vertical guide which 
cooperates with a stationary guide to limit transverse move- 
ment of the wire, and a horizontally disposed member which is 
downwardly movable to force the conductor downwardly 
between said vertical guides to a position in close proximity to 
the electrical connector. 




\ 



An installation for mounting extensible rings and compris- 
ing a tool for inserting a ring up to the collar of an enclosure at 
the extremity of a passageway which provides access to said 
enclosure and for producing the movement of extension of the 
ring against the collar. The tool comprises a tubular frame 
which can be temporarily fixed in a predetermined position 
within the passageway and two concentric tubular elements 
placed within the frame, said elereents being displaceable by 
Two actuating devices. One device produces the simultaneous 
and axial displacement of both tubular elements within the tu- 
bular frame. The other device produces the axial displacement 
of one tubular element with respect to the other in combina- 
tion with gripping members which are carried by one of the tu- 
bular elements, said gripping members being moved in a sub- 
stantially radial direction as a result of the relative axial dis- 
placements of the two tubular elements. \ ' 



104 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,707,759 
PUMP MAINTENANCE CRADLE 
Edward C. Ray. Auburn, and William P. Kahabka, Seneca 
FalU. both of N.Y., assignors to Goulds Pump Incorporated, 

Seneca Falls. N.Y. 

Filed June 30, 1971. Ser. No. 158,420 

Int. CI. B23p 7100 

IJ.S. CI. 29-401 10 Claims 



block is attached to the vehicle frame at its center, so the op- 
posite ends wherein the axles are held free to deflect up- 



JS^JS" 







^v. 



>^ 



A cradle facilitating maintenance of an in-line pump selec- 
tively at the pump site or at a remote maintenance shop. 



3,707.760 
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ARTICLE WORKING SLCH 
AS FRACTURING OF SEMICONDUCTOR SLICES AND 
SEPARATING SEMICONDUCTOR CHIPS 
Paul Stuart CItrin. New Milford, Conn., assignor to Sleburg In- 
dustries Incorporated. Danbury. Conn. 

Filed May 19. 1971, Ser. No. 144,917 

Int. CI. B23p/ 7/00. /9/00 

U.S. CI. 29-413 i6 Claims 





wardly. thereby permitting greater wheel deflection by a child 
pressing down on the vehicle without causing deflection of the 
axles past their elastic limit. 



3,707,762 
METHODS OF USING FLUXES IN JOINING METAL 
SURFACES 
Julius H. Bochinski, La Habra; Karl O. Christe, Calabasas; 
Frank C. Gunderloy. Jr.. Santa Susana; Donald Pilipovich, 
Agoura. and Richard D. Wilson, Canoga Park, all of Calif., 
assignors to North American Rockwell Corporation 
Filed Oct. 29, 1970, Ser. No. 85,308 
Int. CI. B23ki//02. i5/i5 
U.S. CI. 29— 494 16 Claims 

A method for joining metal surfaces such as by soft solder- 
ing, brazing or solder reflowing is provided wherein a gaseous 
hydrazine flux is used to remove tarnish films from the metal 
surfaces to permit the metal surfaces to form a good metallur- 
gical bond. 



3,707,763 

BONDING TUNGSTEN W ITH A FUGITIVE ALLOY 

BINDER 

Norman C. Binkley, Oak Ridge, and Joseph P. Hammond, 
Knoxville, both of Tenn., assignors to The United States of 
America as represented by the United SUtes Atomic Energy 

Commission 

Filed July 1,1971, Ser. No. 158,837 ^ 

int. CI. B23k J y/02.i5/24 
U.S. CI. 29-498 » Claim 



A method and device for separating semiconductor chips 
are described A heat-actuated self-expandable substrate 
material is provided with an expanded memorized shape. 
Semiconductor chips in their compact array position are sup- 
ported by the self-expandable substrate which upon heating 
thereof expands to its memorized shape to separate the chips 
from one another Several self-expandable substrate configu- 
rations are shown and an apparatus for scribing and fracturing 
of a semiconductor slice and separating the chips from their 
compact position in the fractured array is described. The self- 
expandable substrate material is characterized by its accurate- 
ly predictable expansion to provide uniform chip separations 
suitable for subsequent handling. 



3,707,761 
METHOD OF CONSTRUCTING A TOY VEHICLE 
Harvey W. LaBranche, Olympla, Wash., assignor to Mattel, 
Inc., Hawthorne, Calif. 

DivUion of Ser. No. 816,196. April 15, 1969, Pat. No. 

3,621,609. This application June 21, 1971, Ser. No. 154,931 

Int. CI. B23p7/ /02 

U.S. CI. 29—446 3 Claims 

A toy vehicle in which axle wires are molded into a thin 

block of resilient plastic to keep the axles well aligned. The 




A method of forming a tungsten-to-tungsten joint which 
comprises depositing on at least one of the faying surfaces a 
thin film, foil or coating of an alloy consisting essentially of, in 
weight percent, 55-75 percent nickel, balance iron, pressing 
the faying surfaces together, heating the joint area to just 
above the melting point of the alloy in an inert atmosphere to 
produce a joint which has a remelt temperature approximating 
the melting point of the tungsten-base metal. 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



105 



January 2, 1973 

1 nm -if^ 3,707,766 

WHOLLY INTEGR^Jo^^^ METHOD OF MA^NU^.C^TUI.^^^^^^^^ 

George J. FrankovlTsa^ndy^luhJ^^gnor to Kennecott Alois L.VeUH, Freiburg, Genn.ny, assignor to ITT Industries, 
Copper Corporation, New YorKN.Y^ Inc., New Yor^N^Y ^^ ^^ ^^^^^ 

Filed Apnl 1, 1970, Ser. No. 24,71 1 ^^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^^ ^^^ ,3 ,^,^ p ^o 

5 Claims 23 288.6 

Int. CLBOlj 7 7/00 

U.S. CI. 29-588 11 Claims 



Int. CI. B23k/ 9/00 



U.S. CI. 29-527.6 



lib ,„ lib 



Metallic copper or other metal, such as nickel, to be sub- 
jected to electrolytic refining is formed into a continuous slab 
strip of anode width and thickness The strip is cut transverse- 
ly of its width to form successive, rectangularly shaped, anode 
slab blanks, each having a pair of elongate members extending 
longitudinally of the strip at one set of corners of the blank. 
The so-formed blanks are passed individually through a bend- 
ing operation, by which the elongate members of each blank 
are bent outwardly laterally of the blank and preferably within 
the plane thereof and intermediate the lengths of such mem- 
bers to form suspension lugs wholly integral with the 
remainder, i.e. slab body, of the blank, while being held 
preferably at the notched other set of corners of the blank 
from which the elongate members of the immediately 
preceeding blank were cut. The individual anodes, as articles 
of manufacture, have respective slab bodies, with wholly in- 
tegral and upwardly and laterally outwardly projecting lugs at 
the upper corners thereof to serve as suspension hangers. 
These anodes are characterized by elongate notches at the 
lower corners of the respective slab bodies, such notches ex- 
tending upwardly along the lateral margins of the slab bodies. 




-10 



A plurality of rectifier bridges are made simultaneously by 
placing rectifier components on both sides at the end of comb 
leads. A T-shaped part is placed in contact with each pair of 
rectifiers on each side of the comb leads to complete the 
bridge. Each bridge is encapsulated and the comb leads are 
severed from the comb support. 



3,707,767 
MATRIX WITH INTEGRATED SEMICONDUCTORS FOR 

DEAD MEMORY 
Janic Quevrin, Ollainville, France, assignor to Compagnie 
Generate D'Electricite, Paris, France 

Filed June 26, 1970, Ser. No. 50,285 
Claims priority, application France, June 26, 1969, 

6921528 

Int.CI.H01l//y6 

U.S. CI. 29-593 * Claims 



3,707,765 
METHOD OF MAKING ISOLATED SEMICONDUCTOR 

DEVICES 
Michael G. Coleman. Tempe, Ariz., assignor to Motorola, Inc., 
Franklin Park, III. 

Filed Nov. 19, 1970, Ser. No. 90,960 

Int. CI. BOIj/ 7/00 

U.S. CI. 29-578 3 Claims 



^'t.^, , ,-r^J^^>. ■ ■ .^^^. 



iiirntiufrtiiiiiriTiii 




hS 



/., 



La 







r22 



k^ 




D 



►M^ 



2) 



-D 



Process of manufacturing a matrix with integrated semicon- 
ductors for a dead memory, comprising semiconductor com- 
ponents included in the intersections of lines-columns of a net- 
work, which are adapted to being subjected to an electric test 
between line and column. 
The process consists in making on the one hand each of the 
After a semiconductor device is completed and tested, it is columns, or lines, and on the other hand at least one of the re- 
elec ^ally i^ la°ed^^^^^^ «-- °f ^^^ components in the form ^^ ^ P- °^/j- " 

a t^al or dish of insulating material in the substrate and sur- columns, or half-columns, and demi-components. or half- 
rounding the semiconductor device. components. 



106 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3.707,768 
SAW FOR MACHINING A WORKPIECE HAVING A 
CURVED SURFACE 
Ernst Maximilian Spengkr, HuessensUmm, Germany, as- 
signor to Roeder & Spengler OHG, Bergen- Enkheim, Hes- 
sen, Germany 

Division of Ser. No. 776,516, Nov. 18, 1968, Pat. No. 
3,570,351. This application Nov. 12, 1970, Ser. No. 88,974 
Claims priority, application Germany, Nov. 25, 1967, R 47 
443 138; Nov. 25, 1967. R 36 448 38 

Int.CI.B23d49//6 
U.S. CI. 30-166 3 Claims 



3,707,770 
METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION OF CHEESE SOLIDS 
Robert S. Timmins, Concord; Bernard S. Horton, Cambridge, 
and Robert L. Goldsmith, Watertown, aU of Mass., assignor^ 
to Abcor, Inc., Cambridge, Mass. 

FUed Aug. 1 1 , 1 97 1 , Ser . No. 1 70,844 ' 
Int. CI. AOlj 25/7/ 
U.S. CI. 99— 116 11 Claims 




to PCKMCATC 




cT-^^: 



«MCT MLUTE 
SOLUTIOK WHtT 

SOUITiON 










ULtll»rn.T«*TlOII( 
SECTOR ^ 







05M05I5 



LACTOSC 



ftCvCOSf 

-- — ' 05l*0$i5 



L4CT051 



COWCCWTW*TE 




,-.-1. 

I LACTOSE 
H SC»«lt«riON 
'OR RCCCNCttT 



The present saw has a curved workpiece support which is 
rotatably attached to the saw by a bearing through which the 
saw blade extends whereby a curved surface workpiece may 
be cut so that the saw blade extends perpendicularly relative 
to the curved surface at all times during the cutting operation. 



3,707,769 
DEVICE FOR MANUFACTURING CHEESE OF CHEDDAR 

TYPE 

Eero Syrjanen, Tampere, and Olavi Reijonen, Helsinki, both of 

Finland, assignors to MKT-tehUat Oy, Helsinki, Finland 

Filed Dec. 14, 1970, Ser. No. 97,957 

Int. CI. AOlj 25/05,25/75 

U.S. CI. 99-460 3 Claims 



22 







«iM < WJtJ<<><Mtl^/liJ ( > I V.«»j»4ilM^»MW»;»'*^A»/^^ 



In a process for the preparation of a cheese solid and a treat- 
ment of the whey solution by a semipermeable membrane, the 
improvement which comprises: employing, to wash the curd 
product of the cheese solid, a low BOD effluent fraction 
derived from a reverse osmosis high-pressure membrane stage 
used to treat the whey solution; and recycling the wash ef- 
fluent to the whey solution to be treated, thereby improving 
the total management of water in the cheese manufacturing 
process and avoiding water-pollution problems. 



21 18 19 W 



The invention relates to an improvement in a device for 
manufacturmg Cheddar-type cheese, consisting of a ched- 
darising or ripening tank, a mincing device for the ripened 
cheese, a saltmg device for the minced cheese, a cheese press 
and conveyors for transporting the cheese from one phase to 
another The invention is characterized in that the ripening 
tank consists of a tank known in itself in the manufacturing of 
other types of cheese, which has been provided with a per- 
forated bottom moving from the initicil to the ultimate end of 
the tank, with a press plate placed above and with a cutter for 
cutting the cheese mattress which rests upon the bottom, and 
that the device comprises a conveyor extending from the ulti- 
mate to the initial end of the tank for feeding the minced and 
salted cheese once more into the same tank and for ultimate 
pressing of the cheese in said tank. 



3,707,771 
MEANS FOR DETECTING DENTAL OCCLUSIONS AND 
METHOD OF USE 
Humberta R. Guerra, 4800 Marque Drive, New Orleans, La. 
Filed Dec. 21, 1970, Ser. No. 100,512 
Int.CI. A61c9/00 
U.S. CI. 32— 19 1 Claim 

An aerosol spray-on composition of matter comprising es- 
sentially of powdered calcium carbonate in a compatible 
aerosol propellant such as freon. Additional compatible 
agents such as an adhesive (benzoin), food-dye, and flavoring 
(peppermint ) may also be added to the powder before suspen- 
sion in the freon. In use, the powder in suspension is deposited 
in a thin film on the occluding surfaces of the teeth, the 
propellant evaporating in the air during propulsion. The 
broken film indicates the areas of occlusion after the mouth is 
naturally closed until the teeth meet, and high points in the 
fittingof dental work. "" 



3,707,772 
INCLINATION INDICATOR 
Ashby M. Cotter, Manchester, Tenn., assignor to Roy Harper, 
Manchester, Tenn., a part interest 

Filed June 30, 1971, Ser. No. 158,410 
Int. CI. GO Ic 9/76 

U S CI 33—373 ^ Claims 

An inclinometer for simultaneously measuring inclination in 

two perpendicularly related planes having a first ring member 

rotatably mounted to a base member for rotation about an axis 



January 2, 1973 



normal to the longitudinal axis of the base and a second ring 
member, with a pendulum pivolally mounted for movement in 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 107 

by a first treatment in a continuous dehydration press, which 





may be a screw, followed by mechanical breakup and then im- 
mediate drying in a pneumatic conveying drier. 



the plane thereof, pivolally mounted concentrically of the first 
ring member for movement about an axis perpendicular to the 
normal axis. 



3,707,773 

MULTI-LINE GLUING OF SUPERIMPOSED LEAVES 

Larry B. Wolfberg, and John Harper, both of Wichita, Kans., 

assignors to Service Business Forms, Inc., WichiU, Kans. 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 882,256, Dec. 4, 1969, Pat. 

No. 3,584,199. This application Jan. 27, 1971, Ser. No. 

110,186 

Int. CLBOlk 5/00 

U.S.CL34-+ 15 Claims 



3,707,775 
METHOD OF DRYING GOODS SUSPENDED IN A GAS 

STREAM 
Berndt Kaltin, Tomvagen, Sweden, assignor to Aktiebolaget 
Svenska Flaktfabriken, Stockholm, Sweden 

Filed Sept. 24, 1970, Ser. No. 75,210 

Int.CLF26bi/70 

U.S.CL34— 10 3 Claims 




A series of spaced, transverse glue lines and/or one or more 
longitudinal glue lines, used to join certain of the face-to-face 
sheets of a continuous web along either or both of its marginal 
edges, are dried simultaneously, regardless of the width of the 
web or the spacing between its glue lines, by evaporation of 
the moisture content of the glue as the web is advanced. Heat 
energy is applied to the glue lines through use of wave guides 
that conduct electrical energy in the microwave region, and 
the amount of heat energy so applied is controlled in ac- 
cordance with the number of glue lines being dried. 



3,707,774 
METHOD FOR THE DRYING OF HIGH-MOISTURE 
W ASTE PRODUCTS OF LIVING ORGANISMS 
Edwin E. Eise, Negger, Bronschhofen. and Hans-Peter Hefer- 
mehl, Vevey, both of Switzeriand, assignors to Gebrueder 
Buehler AG, Urwil and H. P. Hefermehl SA, Vevey, Switzer- 
land 

FUed Feb. 24, 1971, Ser. No. 1 18,529 
Claims priority, appUcatlon Switzerland, March 3, 1970, 

3058/70 

Int. CLF26b 5/74 

U.S.CK34— 14 7 Claims 

High moisture waste products of living organisms are dried 




A method of drying material in which the drying material is 
suspended in a stream of gaseous drying medium in successive 
drying stages, the drying medium used being common to all of 
the stages and being circulated from the final stage into the 
preceding stage, and from the preceding stage into the initial 
stage and being heated between stages to an extent to elevate 
the temperature of the drying medium above its previous tem- 
perature whereby the drying medium in the first stage is at the 
highest temperature and highest moisture content and the 
temperature and moisture content decreases successively 
toward the final drying stage. 



3,707,776 
CONTROL MEANS FOR AN INDUCTANCE MEANS 
Phillip L. Schmidgall, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to P. R. Mal- 
lory & Co. Inc., Indianapolis, Ind. 

FUed Feb. 10, 1971, Ser. No. 114,140 
Int. CI. F26b 75/70 
U.S. CI. 34-45 8 Claims 

A resonant control means causes the voltage and current of 



108 ' OFFICIAL GAZETTE 

an inductance drive means to be out of phase with each other 



January 2, 1973 




3,707,778 
TEACHING MACHINE 
Thomas K. McGourty, Aptos, Calif., assignor to EDP Limited. 
Nassau, Bahamas 

Filed Oct. 20, 1971, Ser. No. 190,773 
Int. CI. G09b 7102 



U.S. CI. 35—9 B 



7 Claims 



so as to prevent operation of the inductance drive means. 



3,707,777 
FILM DRYING APPARATUS 
Erwin Geyken, Munich; Siegfried Krauss, Gnienwald near 
Munich; Franz Kocourek, Munich; Horst Koninger, Mu- 
nich, and Gerhard Schwarzmaier. Munich, all of Germany, 
assignors to Agfa-Gevaert AkUengesellschaft, Leverkusen, 

Germany 

Filed Aug. 3, 1971. Ser. No. 168,554 
Claims priority, application Germany, Aug. 6, 1970, P 20 39 

206.7 

Int. CLF26b/ 9/00 
U.S. CI. 34-48 10 Claims 

V 




^C" 




A teaching machine is provided for use with question and 
answer sheets wherein the correct answers appear to be ran- 
domly spaced on the sheet. A cursor moves over a ruler and a 
student presses the button when he beheves he has the right 
answer. An indicator such as green or red hghts indicate 
whether a right or wrong answer has been obtained and means 
are provided on both the cursor and the ruler so that the con- 
nections are reversed from column to column and from line to 
line so that the student does not learn any set pattern as to 
where the correct response will be on the machine. A relay 
may be provided so that after the button is depressed the light 
will remain lit until the cursor or ruler is moved. A novel rack 
and pinion arrangement maintains the ruler in a parallel rela- 
tionship with the answer sheet. 



3,707,779 
DUAL-USE OPTICAL PROJECTION APPARATUS 
Kozo Yamamoto, HirakaU, Japan, assignor to MaUushiU 
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan 

Filed Feb. 1, 1971, Ser. No. 111,227 

Int.CLG09bJ/06 

U.S.CI.35-9E 10 Claims 



\ 




A drier for strips of developed film has a housing wherein 
the film IS transported downwardly and is dried by ascending 
streams of hot air furnished by several discrete blowers each 
of which is equipped with a composite air heating device. 
Each heating device has a first electric resistance heater which 
is started in response to closing of a master switch to furnish a 
basic heating action, a second resistance heater which is ad- 
justable by a regulator having a manually adjustable poten- 
tiometer, and a third resistance heater which can be started by 
a temperature gauge. The latter monitors the temperature of 
air which circulates in or leaves the housing and starts the 
third resistance heater when the thus determined temperature 
is below a preselected value. Some of the spent air which 
leaves the housing is recirculated to the blowers. 



A dual-use optical projection apparatus having movable 
dousers or light-intercepting plates inserted between a screen 
on which an image on the film in an optical system is projected 
and the film itself, and a control system for moving the light- 
intercepting plates between a position where part of the image 
on the film is prevented from being projected on the screen 
and another position where the whole image is projected on 
the screen, whereby the projector is usable both as educa- 
tional equipment combined with a film having question and 
answer sections and an ordinary projector. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



109 



3,707,780 

TEACHING MACHINE 

Vladimir AlejAndrovich VadjushIn, uUtsa Knorina, 19, kv. 28, 

Minsk, U.S.S.R. 

Filed June 28, 1971, Ser. No. 157,450 

Int. CLG09bi /OO 

U.S.CL35-9F 2 Claims 




simulated roadway by the intervening light-transmissive mir- 
ror, the apparatus operator being able to remotely control the 
free- vehicle's seeming transverse position and longitudinal 
velocity with respect to the simulated roadway, and automatic 
transverse motivation means for abruptly translating the free- 
vehicle transversely with respect to the simulated roadway 
when a seeming collision occurs between it and a road-vehi- 
cle. Preferred optical characteristics for imparting realism to 
the apparatus include: a hollow housing that is substantially 
opaque (with the exception of the operator's viewing open- 
ing); novel lumination and fluorescent coloring for the road- 
way and the several miniature vehicles; and special techniques 
for imparting seeming relative longitudinal velocity to the 
several miniature vehicles. 



3,707,782 
NECK FOR TEST DUMMY 
Samuel W. Alderson, New York, N.Y., assignor to Alderson 
Research Laboratories, Inc., Stamford, Conn. 

FUed June23, 1971, Ser. No. 155,842 

Int. CI. G09b 23132 

U.S.CL 35-17 8 Claims 



A teaching machine has a body which is divided into two 
sections by means of a partition wall, one of the sections of the 
body accommodates a draw-out cassette containing a control 
program which consists of columns of questions and correct 
answers to them. The other section accommodates sheets with 
answers to be evaluated, and the body wall adjoining the latter 
section features a transparent window. Mounted in the body is 
a locking mechanism adapted to prevent the drawing-out of 
the cassette up to the column of correct answers when the sec- 
tion accommodating the answers to be evaluated is opened 
and to provide for the opening of the latter section after cover- 
ing the correct answers. 



3,707,781 
APPARATUS FOR SIMULATING ROADWAY DRIVING 
CONDITIONS 
Richard L. Brown, Bellevue, Nebr., assignor to Bally Manufac- 
turing Corp., Chicago, III. 

Filed Nov. 22, 1971, Ser. No. 201,030 

Int. CI. G09b 9/02 

U.S.CI.35-11 11 Claims 





An anthropomorphic test dummy wherein the simulated 
flesh section forming the neck defines a body of revolution at 
each end. The thoracic and head sections each defines a mat- 
ing socket. In this manner, reasonable human contours are 
retained throughout the limits of normal motion of the head 
and neck. 



3,707,783 

TEACHING MACHINE 

Marian S. Hajduk, 150-48 29th Avenue, Flushing, N.Y. 

Filed April 12, 1971, Ser. No. 133,302 

Int. CI. G09b/ 9/02 

U.S.CL 35-31 R 22 Claims 



79 ^ V" 

T9C 99C 



There is provided apparatus enabling an externally posi- 
tioned operator to peer forwardly into an upright hollow hous- 
ing containing therewithin and forwardly of a light-transmis- 
sive mirror a simulated roadway including a plurality of minia- 
ture intra-lanes road-vehicles arranged columnarly and 
seemingly traveling along transversely distinct respective 
roadway lanes, a transversely movably controllable miniature 
free-vehicle realistically optically superimposed upon the 




A teaching machine, on a given number of depressions of a 
first button, which makes a distinct sound with each depres- 



110 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



sion, lights that number of lamps in a first 3 by 3 matrix in a 
given order to show the groups of I's, 2's, and/or 3's which 
make up that given number. A second button, on each depres- 
sion, unlights a single lamp to show subtraction. A second 3 by 
3 matrix of lamps has one lamp light after all lamps are lit in 
the first matrix on depression of the first button which then 
turns off the bulbs of the first matrix. This second matrix 
shows the decimal concept of number from ten up. Numerical 
indicators show the numbers represented. Arrows pointing 
between the matrixes show the addition of nine plus one mov- 
ing from the first units matrix to the second tens matrix or the 
subtraction of ten minus one moving from the second tens 
matrix to the first units matrix. A square overlay divided into 
three zones is placed over at least the first units matrix with 
the zones in a horizontal or a vertical position to selectively in- 
dicate different groupings of lamps making up a given in- 
dicated number. 

Specific circuitry is used so that each additional lamp in a 
matrix which is lit lights all the other required bulbs to indicate 
a given number. 



locating one or more lesson cards on which the information is 
presented in adjacent horizontal lines. The apparatus includes 
a carriage movable across the base for line selection, with the 
line selection carriage carrying two laterally movable car- 
riages. One laterally movable read carriage carries a pick-up 
head, for detecting the line of magnetically recorded informa- 
tion, and an indicator for indicating the corresponding visible 
or tactile information. The other laterally movable control 
carriage coacts with cam means on the baSe for effecting line- 
by-line advance of the line selection carriage, and coacts with 
control means for controlling the operation of the apparatus. 



3,707,784 
CUSHION INSOLE FOR SHOES 
Cleo SUfford, 411 North 7th St., Corning, Ark. 

Filed Oct. 19, 1971,S€r. No. 190,497 
Int.CI. A43bi/y2 
U.S.Cl.36-11.5 



10 Claims 




A composite insole for shoes is disclosed including a 
generally rigid upper layer and a resilient and compressible 
lower layer which underlies the upper layer throughout and is 
laminated thereto Spaced upper elements of a shoe are im- 
pressed through a binding element, attached to the insole, into 
the resilient and compressible lower layer in order to provide a 
substantially uninterrupted bottom binding surface to which a 
shoe outsole is attached Heel attachment, without openings, 
and with a smooth, sculptured appearance for the shoe upper 
is also disclosed. 



3,707,785 
TEACHING APPARATUS 
Bruce D. Reed, 2112 Cloverdak, Arlington, Tex., and Herbert 
Franklin O Dell, 807 J Place, Piano, Tex. 

Filed Dec. 1 1, 1970, Ser. No. 97,230 

Int. CI. G09b 5/06, Gl lb 5/00 

U.S. CI. 35— 35 C 16 Claims 




3,707,786 

METHOD AND MEANS OF PRESENTING A 

PLANETARIUM DISPLAY 

WUIiam T. Clark, P. O. Box 885, Jackson, Miss. 

Filed Feb. 5, 1968, Ser. No. 703,009 

Int. CI. G09b 2 7/00 

U.S. CI. 35—42.5 



3 Claims 



Apparatus for presenting information in both audible and 
either visible or tactile form includes a base for supporting and 




The provision of a planetarium projector provided with a 
near-point light source for the projection of the star images 
and including means for mounting, and maintaining, a star 
projection sphere concentric with the underside of a hemi- 
spherical dome within which the projector means is operative- 
ly positioned, to provide a highly realistic, accurate reproduc- 
tion of the heavens as they appear from a given observation 
point upon the surface of the earth. The planetarium projector 
means also includes optical projection means for the sun, 
moon and planets which includes means for eliminating paral- 
lax from these projectors due to their somewhat non-concen- 
tric placement relative to the projection dome. Still further, 
the utilization of a point light source provided with means for 
decreasing the intensity of the lamp toward that portion 
thereof responsible for the projection of the fixed star images 
in the equatorial regions of the projection dome provides a 
unique method of presenting a planetarium display charac- 
terized by a high degree of realism in the projected night sky. 



3,707,787 
FLAT SPRING FOR BOOTS AND SHOES 
Kathryn Hughes, 1204 Leet Rd., Niles, Mich. 

Filed Oct. 20, 1970, Ser. No. 82,267 
Int. CLA43b 00/00 

11 S CI 36 2 5 R ^ Claim 

A footwear constructed with a generally flat coil spring 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



111 



part, of .h. footwea, which are subject ,o excessive amoum of »;;-;'^»-J;f^ ^^^^'^ ,",„ /„^,^,, „, ,„„,o, surface of ,he 

side wall of the tire, and the inner ring includes several lugs 




bending and flexing; the present spring preventing the forma- 
tion of objectionable wrinkles in the footwear appearance. 



ERRATUM 

For Class 36 — 11.5 see: 
Patent No. 3,707,784 




that engage the inner periphery of the wall. The mating sur- 
faces of the rings are provided with recesses and projections 
that engage each other to hold the inner and outer rings 
together. 



3,707,790 

ILLUMINATED DISPLAY DEVICE 

Morris D. Jaffe, Jr., 300 Alameda Circle, San Antonio, Tex. 

Filed March 31, 1970, Ser. No. 24,284 

Int. CLG09f/ i/JO 



U.S. CI. 40-34 



7 Claims 



3,707,788 
LOCKING MEANS FOR CAP-TYPE TOOTH 
Walter L. Sturgeon, Los Altos, Calif., assignor to Pengo Cor- 
poration, Sunnyvale, Calif. 

Filed Dec. 28, 1970, Ser. No. 101,859 

Int. CL E02f 9128 

U.S.a.37-142A 11 Claims 



as ^zi 




26 



r ■ 




Improved retaining means for a tooth having a blade formed 
at its proximal end with a pocket which receives a shank at- 
tached by welding, bolting, etc.. to earth excavating equip- 
ment A resilient insert is positioned in the distal end of the 
pocket Holes in the pocket walls and shank are initially 
slightly offset. The resilient insert is deformed by the distal end 
of the shank when a hard pin is driven through the holes 
thereby bringing the holes up to alignment, forcmg the tooth 
rearwardly and causing the margins of the holes in the pocket 
walls to tightly engage the pin and prevent umntentional 
dislodgement of the pin. When it is necessary to replace the 
tooth, the pin may be forcibly driven out of the holes. 



A display device comprising a rotatably driven member and 
discs rotatably mounted thereon with illuminating means of 
different colors secured in desired patterns on said discs 
whereby selective energization of said member and said illu- 
minating means results in varying displays. 



3,707,789 
TIRE CENTER DISPLAY APPARATUS 
William S. Hart, Commack, N.Y., assignor to Dinaco, Inc., 
New York, N.Y. 

Filed Nov. 26, 1971, Ser. No. 202,206 

Int.CL G09f/ /OO 

U.S.CL 40-125 M 7 Claims 

A sheet of plastic film having a message printed thereon is 

stretched across the center opening of two concentric rings. 



3,707,791 

EASEL BACK HAVING INTEGRAL SUPPORTING 

STRUCTURE 

Leon M. Levy. Chicago, III., assignor to Condecor, Inc., Mun- 

delein. III. ,,.,.. 

Filed March 12, 1971, Ser. No. 123,714 
Int.CI.G09f //OO 

U.S. CI. 40-124.1 ^i^I'T 

An easel back for supporting a photo frame in which the 
structure includes a backing member, a triangular supporting 
member and a triangular bracing member all hinged integrally 
together and with the triangular members folded at the hinges 
and locked to form a rigid supporting leg of tetrahedron 
shape The triangular members are foldable as a unit against 
the backing member for transport m compact, non-set-up con 
dition. The same supporting tetrahedron serves as a leg to 



112 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



stand the frame for either horizontal or vertical viewing. The 
parts are preferably molded as a single, or integral, unit em- 




ing tear gas cartridges. The gun includes an elongate stock 
portion of a size adapted for gripping in the palm of the hand 
of a user and thumb operative plunger means for selectively 



?s la 




ploymg a plastic having a high degree of flexibility and with 
sc'^r-lines being molded in reduced thickness for facilitating 
relative bending. 



and 



3,707,792 

GRAPHIC DISPLAY SYSTEM 

Lindell E. Mabrey, 729 Old Trail, Highland Park, III. 

Richard C. Fogelson, 431 Oakdak, Chicago, III. 

Continuation of Ser. No. 734,414, June 4, 1968, abandoned. 

This application July 19. 1971,Ser.No. 164,069 

Int.CI.G09f /i/y2 

L.S. CI. 40-219 2 Claims 



discharging a cartridge chambered in the breech section of the 
gun, and includes a sliding shield member translationally ad- 
justable between positions covering and uncovering 
breech chamber. 



the 



»r 




A display system for graphic indicia includes a source of il- 
lumination mounted in a cabinet having an open viewing side. 
A light-diffusion plate is mounted in the opening of the 
cabinet; and a glass plate having a low light transmissivity is 
mounted in front of the diffusion plate, and it forms part of the 
cabinet structure for the light source. A plastic plate bearing a 
negative reproduction of the indicia to be displayed is 
removably interposed between the diffusion plate and the 
glass plate; and there is provision for overlapping of opaque 
areas of superposed indicia-bearing plates to form a complete 
light seal except of the transparent indicia itself A transparent 
color film of plate may, if desired, be interposed between the 
diffusion plate and the indicia plate or film. 



3,707,794 
CONCEALED SINGLE SHOT FIRING MECHANISM 
John G. Rocha, Westfield, and Richard W. Livingston, Spring- 
field, both of Mass., assignors to The United States of Amer- 
ica as represented by the Secretary of the Army 
Filed AprU 16, 1963, S«r. No. 273,533 
Int. CL F41c 9100, 9104, 19100 
L.S.CI.42-1J 10 Claims 



3,707,793 
TEAR GAS FIRE ARM MEANS 
Samuel Pearce Holton, II, 4510 S. W. 74th Street, South 
.Miami, Fla. 

Filed Sept. 25, 1970, Ser. No. 75,534 
Int. CI. F41ci/00, 9/00 
L.S.CI. 42— IG 10 Claims 

A hand gun and cartridges therefor, each cartridge being 
provided with a charge of tear gas or other toxic substance. 
The gun is generally of elongate compact configuration and is 
provided with a breech section defining a chamber for receiv- 




I . A single shot firing mechanism adapted to be concealed 
in an elongated rod normally utilized for an entirely different 
purpose comprising, a tubular housing forming a section of the 
rod, a barrel portion removably secured to the forward end of 
said housing for holding a cartridge in position to be fired, a 
forwardly biased striker longitudinally disposed in said hous- 
ing for firing contact with the cartridge, a cylindrical sear 
secured to the rear end of said striker, a cocking rod disposed 
in said housing in simultaneous contact with the breech face of 
said barrel portion and the front face of said sear for retaining 
said striker in a cocked position, a firing ring surrounding the 
junction of said housing and said rod for rotatable and slidable 
movement thereon, and means for transferring the rotation of 
said firing ring to said sear to release said striker for movement 
into firing contact with the cartridge. 



3,707,795 
CYLINDER BREECH FOR SMALL FIREARMS 
Heinz Bielfeldt, 233 Eckemforde, Germany, assignor to J. P. 
Sauer & Sohn GmbH, Eckernforde, Germany 

Filed March 22, 1971, Ser. No. 126,462 
Claims priority, application Germany, Nov. 19, 1970, P 20 
56 929.3 

Int. CL F41c 11106; F41d 1100 
U.S. CL42— 16 7 Claims 

A breech mechanism wherein a bolt actuated locking sleeve 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



113 



sealingly closed at its forward end. A sprmg is mounted 



X « 



»i5tMi7'^a1J a,i«>22 n 




"^^^^^ ^13^ 






y22 MO te <''■ 




gB 



cam breech bolt locking lugs outwardly into abutting coopera- 
tion with forwardly facing, breech chamber recess wall means 



between the forward end and the piston. The piston rod pro- 
jects rearwardly through a relatively long bore hole in the rear 
wall of the cylinder and the rod side of said piston and cylinder 
is vented to the atmosphere through a hole in the rear wall. 



3,707,796 

SAFETY APPARATUS FOR A GUN TRIGGERING 

MECHANISM 

Heinz Bielfeldt, 233 Eckemforde, Germany, assignor to J. P. 

Sauer & Sohn GmbH, Eckernforde, Germany 

Filed March 22,1971, Ser. No. 1 26,438 
Claims priority, application Germany, Dec. 2, 1970, P 20 59 

396.8 

lnt.CI.F41c 7 7/00, 7 7/05 

U.S. CI. 42-70 C 9 Claims 



3,707,798 
DECOY 
Ned A. Tryon, Kent Island, Chester, Md. 

Filed Dec. 31, 1970, Ser. No. 103,147 
Int. CLAOlmi 7/06 

U.S. CI. 43-3 



3 Claims 




A safety device for preventing unintentional firing of a gun 
comprising an easily-rotatable mass part mounted on the gun 
and having a stop which is in alignment with a recess in the 
triggering mechanism when the mass part is at rest, thus per- 
mitting movement of the triggering mechanism to fire the gun. 
When the gun is subjected to a force great enough to cause an 
unintentional firing, the mass part will be rotated by the force 
to a non-rest position wherein the stop is unaligned with the 
recess and prevents movement of the trigger mechanism for 
firing the gun When the force diminishes, the mass part 
returns to its rest position to permit the gun to be fired. 




A goose decoy comprising a form upon which is mounted a 
color photoreproduction of an actual goose 

3,707,799 

FISH NET RETRIEVAL APPARATUS 

Lowell J. Hatley, 5452 40th Avenue West, Seattle, W ash. 

Filed Aug. 10, 1970, Ser. No. 62,516 

Int. CLAOlk 69/02 

U.S. CL 43-8 13 Claims 



3,707,797 

RECOIL ABSORBER 

Kenneth Ruth, P.O. Box 7039, Corpus Christi, Tex. 

Filed Nov. 18, 1970, Ser. No. 90,690 

Int.CLF41c2i/00 

U.S. CI. 42-74 10 Claims 

A recoil absorber for a firearm having a shoulder stock. A 

sleeve member is telescopically mounted at the rear end of the 

stock and attached to the end of at least one piston rod which 




Mechanically, this apparatus comprises two spaced-apart 
spools or drums and an endless belt running around these 
drums. There is a means to power the drums and the endless 
belt for reeling in the fishing net. 



114 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,707,800 

nSH MOUTH SPREADER AND HOLDER 

Charles S. Wolfe, 2316 Norman, Pasadena, Tex. 

Filed Sept. 2. 197 1 , Ser. No. 177,250 

Int. CI. AOlk 97/00 

U.S. CI. 43-53.5 



6 Claims 




3,707,802 
DELAYED STARTING INDICATOR APPARATUS AND 
TOY STARTING SYSTEM 
James I. Tucker, Jr., Manhattan Beach; Joseph H. Bales, 
Huntington Beach; Denis V. Bosley, Palos Verdes Peninsula; 
Brian S. Prodger, Torrance; Kurt Ruppel, Redondo Beach, 
and WilUam F. Summerfield, Huntington Beach, all of Calif., 
assignors to Mattel, Inc., Hawthorne, Calif. 

Filed Jan. 2 1 , 1 97 1 , Ser. No. 1 08,496 
Int. CI. A63h 33100 

3 Claims 



U.S. CI. 46— IK 



A fish mouth spreader and holder which can be held and ac- 
tuated with one hand, easily operated to open the mouth of a 
fish, hold the fish while removing a hook, and carry the fish, all 
without touching the fish thereby avoiding being bitten, finned 
lor soiled. The device comprises an L-shaped body the short 
side forming a portion of a pistol grip and with a piercing point 
extending generally perpendicularly from the long side of the 
body. An arm is pivotally secured to the body having a second 
piercing point extending therefrom and is actuated by a pistol 
grip handle pivotably secured to the end of the body's short 
side and connected to the arm by an actuating shaft. A ratchet 
mechanism is provided on the handle coacting with the free 
end of the handle for extending and holding the points in a set 
position with a ratchet releasing means on the handle for deac- 
tuating the apparatus with a single hand The arm includes a 
plurality of pivot connections for selectively changing the 
stroke of the points. The handle has first and second spaced 
portions on opposite sides of the body for providing a sturdy 
yet light weight device with plastic guide members between 
the handle and the body for preventing rust and corrosion. 



3,707.801 
FISHING ROD HOLDER WITH BEEPER 
Louis Gednalske, Second Street, Dell Rapids, S. Dak. 
Filed Dec. 2 1 , 1 97 1 , Ser. No. 2 10,407 

Int. CI. AOlk 97/72 
U.S. CI. 43- 17 



8 Claims 




-.nrri 




A starting system having a delayed starting indicator ap- 
paratus comprised of a housing, a movable indicating element, 
a resetting element and a premature start indicator 
mechanism. The indicator apparatus simulates a "Christmas 
Tree" starting device commonly used for drag races As the 
movable indicating element drops within the housing in a re- 
tarded fashion, spaced, paired openings in the housing make 
visible a sequential showing of color including a different 
color to indicate the beginning of the race. The premature 
start indicator mechanism causes a still different color to ap- 
pear by offsetting the indicating element. The apparatus is 
easy to manipulate, simply constructed, rugged, inexpensive 
to manufacture and exciting to use. 



3,707,803 

SIMPLIFIED MARIONETTE 

Richard F. Palmer, 3840 A Ivanhoe, Shiller Park, III. 

FiledMarch29, 1971, Ser. No. 129,011 

Int. CI. A63h 7100 

U.S.CL 46-126 3 Claims 



A tubular fishing rod holder is fixedly superimposed axially 
on the front face of an inherently flexible but sturdy vertical 
supporting standard, that is adapted to be staked in the ground 
or attached to a boat or similar support, and an alarm casing is 
fixed to such face of the standard immediately below the lower 
open end of the holder. Such casing provides a bottom for the 
holder, in which the butt end of a fishing rod is snugly 
socketed, and encloses a self-contained alarm unit that has a 
switch contact button slidably disposed through the front face 
of the casing The button is activated by an overlying finger 
that integrally depends from the front portion of the edge of 
the lower end of the holder upon a predetermined amount of 
flexure of the supporting standard in response to the tug of a 
hooked fish on the fishing line of a reel which is mounted on 
the fishing rod 




A marionette is manipulated by only three cords. One of 
these cords, which may be elastic, is secured to the top of the 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



115 



head. The other two cords go down through the body com- 
mencing at the shoulders and are secured to the bottom of the 
legs. 



3,707,804 
GROOVED TRACK FOR TOY VEHICLES 
John S. Cook, Sunnyvale, Calif., assignor to Mattel, Inc., 
Hawthorne, Calif. 

Filed Aug. 25, 1970, Ser. No. 66,757 

Int.CLA63h/9/iO 

U.S.CL 46-202 6 Claims 



which includes a section of toy vehicle track whereon the 
vehicle travels, and, gate and twist restraining arrangement 
may be mounted on the base to stabilize the toy when the 
torque is introduced. The toy vehicle may preferably include a 
negator type mechanical motor in which spring-wound drums 
are horizontally mounted to provide a compact and low 
profile. 




A track for self-powered or coasting type toy vehicles which 
allows passing of slower vehicles by faster ones by encourgag- 
ing lane changing when vehicles bump one another prior to 
passing, while thereafter reducing the tendency of vehicles to 
wander from one side of the track to the other. The track has 
several low ridges extending along its length for urging vehi- 
cles to run straight along the track, the ridges being low 
enough and being rounded to enable a vehicle to easily climb 
over them to another section of the track. The ridged track 
section is used along banked curves to reduce the tendency for 
vehicles to climb the curve and is used along straight-away 
sections to enable passing while reducing wandering ten- 
dencies. 



3,707,805 
TOY VEHICLE REMOTE W INDING APPARATUS 
Gordon H. Buck, Torrance, Calif., assignor to Mattel, Inc., 
Hawthorne, Calif. 

Filed Nov. 2, 1970, Ser. No. 86,012 

Int.Cl!A63h7//yO 

U.S. CI. 46-202 • 10 Claims 




'sr 

39 >" 






if 






3,707,806 
CONTAINER AND HANDLE ARRANGEMENT 
Vern J. Toews, Ruthven, OnUrio, and Harold E. Wigle, 
Leamington, OnUrio, both of Canada, assignors to W illiam 
P. Bryan, Jr., Tifton, Ga. and Vern J. Toews, Ruthven, On- 
tario, Canada ^ 
Filed Jan. 9, 1970, Ser. No. 1,806 
lnt.CI. B65d 25128; AOlg 9/02 
U.S.CL 47-34.13 II Claims 




A container set formed from a thermoplastic material in- 
cluding at least two containers which are joined together by an 
integral fiexible strip or web. The containers have side walls 
which diverge in a direction toward the upper open end of the 
container. A handle extends upwardly from a location 
between the containers to facilitate lifting the container set. A 
wedge adjacent the lower end of the handle engages the facing 
side walls of opposed containers to prevent the containers 
from tipping toward each other when the container set is lifted 
by the handle. Several of the disclosed handles can be con- 
nected to the container by a stab-in movement from above the 
container without lifting or otherwise disturbing the container. 



3,707,807 
SEED COATING COMPOSITION 
Thomas M. Graves, Richmond, Calif., assignor to Chevron 
Research Company, San Francisco. Calif. 

Division of Ser. No. 748,617, July 30, 1968, Pat. No. 

3,598,565. This applicaUon Dec. 2, 1970, Ser. No. 94,559 

Int. CI. AOlc 1/06; AOln 5/00 

U.S. CL 47-57.6 ' ^ Claims 

Composition for treating seeds comprising an aqueous 

emulsion of a substantially water-soluble neutralized 

copolymer of an a,/3-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and a 

lower alkyl acrylate and a crosslinked copolymer of vinyl 

acetate and a lower alkyl acrylate. These compositions 

enhance the germination of the seeds. 



A winding device for providing a torque input to a mechani- 
cally powered toy vehicle situated remotely from the winding 
device, the torque being produced by the winding device and 
coupled to the toy vehicle through flexible coupling means 
such as a Bowden cable, for example. The winding device may 
be disposed in a housing simulating an automobile service sta- 
tion pump, and the Bowden cable may represent a fuel 
delivery hose. The housing may also be mounted on a base 



3,707,808 
RAIL GRINDER 
Raymond A. Danko. Minneapolis, Minn., and Donald L. 
Minge, New Hope, Minn., assignors to Mannix Construc- 
tion Inc., Minneapolis, Minn. 

FUed Oct. 5, 1970, Ser. No. 78,124 

Int. CI. B24b 2i/00 
U.S. CI. 51-178 4 Claims 

Grinding stones of a mobile railroad rail grinder are ar- 
ranged in pairs in grinding units that are themselves mounted 
in pairs in grinding modules pivotally mounted at both ends 
and on both sides of a central cab unit of the vehicle The 



116 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



modules are pivotable between raised and operative positions 
in which the stones contact the upper rail head surfaces. The 
vehicle is self-propelled and an underspeed detector raises the 
modules part way. enough to move the stones out of contact 
with the rails, if the vehicle speed diminishes below a 



dence upon the resistive torque detected by a d'etector. A 
pneumatic device including a nozzle connected in a circuit 
serves to detect when one of the honing members contacts the 




minimum. The grinding stones move up and down in pairs, the 
downward movement being restricted by dash pots to a very 
slow travel These features enable the stones to span a trough 
in the rail head surface and to grind metal only from the higher 
points thus helping to eliminate rail depressions. 



3,707,809 
ALTOM ATIC PROFILE GRINDING MACHINE WITH AN 

INDEXING MECHANISM 
Oscar Schnellman. Zurkh, Switzerland, and Henry Willy Stkr, 
Dearborn HeighU, Mkh., assignors to Carmet Company, 
PitUburgh, Pa. 

Division of S«r. No. 751,879, Aug. 12, 1968, Pat. No. 
3.598,192. This application April 28, 1971, Ser. No. 138,182 
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Aug. 16, 1967, 

11623/67 

Int. CI. B24b 4 7/20 
t.S. CI. 51-215 H 9 Claims 




corresponding bore to be honed. This contact serves to in- 
crease by a predetermined value, depending on the particular 
honing member at which contact was detected, the value of 
the resistive torque. 



3,707,811 
SELFPACKAGING PORTABLE HOUSING STRUCTURE 
Jack E. Hampson, Calgary, Alberta, Canada, assignor to Atco 
Industries Ltd., Calgary, Alberta, Canada 

Filed Sept. 24, 1970, Ser. No. 75,092 
Claims priority , application Canada, July 3 1 , 1 970, 089,726 
lnt.CI. E04h;//2 
U.S.CL 52-23 8 Claims 




An automatic profile grinding machine with indexing 
mechanism especially for contour grinding of relatively small 
parts such as tool inserts, comprised of a grinding wheel, work 
stations arranged around said grinding wheel, universal work 
feeding mechanism associated with each work station, in- 
dividual cam mechanisms for each work station to index the 
grinding steps, electric and fluid pressure control mechanisms 
to control operation of the machine, work measuring 
mechanism and adjusting mechanism associated with the mea- 
suring mechanism to compensate for wear or out of balance 
condition of the grinding wheel 



3,707,810 
EXPANDIBLE HONING HEADS 
Albert Grosseau, ChavUle, France, assignor to S.A. Automo- 
biles Citroen, Paris, France 

Filed June 9, 1971, Ser. No. 151,204 
Int. CLB24b 9/02, 49/00 
U.S. CI. 51—346 

A honing head is constructed with at least two honing mem- 
bers so that lAvo co-axial bores, not necessarily of the same 
diameter can be honed simultaneously. A mechanism serves 
to expand the honing members simultaneously and in depen- 



7 Claims 




A portable, prefabricated, self-packaging housing structure 
having a box beam roof component, wall panels and a flat 
floor component. In an erected condition, the wall panels ex- 
tend vertically between the roof component and the floor 
component and tie-down means connect the roof and floor 
components, the tie-down means bemg tensioned to maintain 
a bottom edge surface of the roof component against the top 
edge surfaces of the wall panels and the bottom edge surfaces 
of the wall panels against the upper peripheral edge surface of 
the floor component. The engaged surfaces of the roof com- 
ponent, wall panels and floor component are provided with 
mating keystnps and keyslots to increase the rigidity of the 
structure and to seal the joints against the weather. In a 
shipping condition, the wall panels are enclosed under the 
roof component which is secured by the tie-down, means 
directly on the floor component, whereby a package is formed 
which may be stacked with a number of like structures, one 
directly upon the other. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



117 



3,707,812 3,707,814 

DWELLING PRE-FABRICATED STAIRWAY 

Julius RoessI, 40 Larkin Street, P.O. Box 433 Port Richmond, Gkn A. Se«gers, Lombard, lU., assignor to Amerkan SUir 

Staten Island, N.Y. ^''^"'^V:!!!f'^\'^\-,, ^ n« i^^#i^7 

Filedjan. 18, 1971, Ser. No. 107,134 Fikd June 16, 1971, Ser. No. 153,637 



U.S.CL52— 27 



lnt.CLF03d/y/04 



Int. CLE04fy 7/02 



1 Claim U.S.CL 52—185 



8 Claims 




A dwelling comprises a cylindrical outer wall and an inner 
partition wall coaxial with a central pier in the form of a hol- 
low column. Radially extending from the central pier to the 
inner partition wall are further walls to define several closed 
rooms. Between the outer and inner partition walls are parti- 
tions to provide separate living areas. A domed roof is sup- 
ported by the central pier and extends to the outer wall. On 
the domed roof is a cupola including a wind-driven rotor' 
which drives a generator supported by the central pier. 



3,707,813 
MODULAR STRUCTURE 
Morris M. Cymbrowltz, 63-61 Yellowstone Blvd., Forest HUls, 
N.Y., and John C. Mudgett, 201 Clinton Street, Brooklyn, 
N Y 

Filed June 30, 1 97 1 , Ser . No. 1 58,379 

Int. CLE04hy /00,//04 

U.S.CL 52-79 8 Claims 





A stairway including a plurality of components including 
stair supporting masts and stair units. The stair support masts 
and stair units are stored and shipped as components and as- 
sembled into a stairway at the building site. 



3,707,815 
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AND ELEMENTS FOR USE 

THEREIN 
George Molyneux, Gisbum, England, assignor to Econa (G. & 
B.) Plastics Limited, Shirky, Solihull, England 
Fikd Jan. 13, 1970, Ser. No. 2,579 
Claims priority, application England, March 11, 1969, 
12,688/69; July 7, 1969,34,191/69 

Int. CI. E06b 1/58, 1132; E05b 1102 
U.S. CI. 52-213 



7 Claims 



A 'uuilding formed by an array of identical modules held 
together in a space frame, each module being constituted by 
four quadrants, having a wedge-like formation. Each quadrant 
is provided with a rectangular wall section, a triangular head 
section, and a triangular base section, the head section being 
sloped upwardly relative to the wall section, and the base sec- 
tion being sloped downwardly relative thereto, such that when 
the quadrants are joined together, the head sections thereof 
define a four-sided pyramidical dome and the base sections 
define an inverted pyramidical base of the same geometry 
Channels are formed at the junctions of the quadrants to 
establish a four-branched channel network whose terminals 
are the vertexes of the head and base pyramids, such that 
when the modules are arrayed in side-by-side and stacked 
relation to create a multi-unit building they are locked 
together into a unitary structure by filling the channels with a 
moldable material that bridges the modules at their coincident 
channel positions to develop a space frame. 




An upstanding channel member, serving as a mounting for a 
door or window frame, has a rectangular or trapezoidal cen- 
tral portion received with all-around clearance in a space 
between two adjoining wall elements and bears with one or 
two transverse base flanges upon an end face of one or both 
wall elements. Two flat anchor members, secured to opposite 
sides of the central channel portion by a dovetail fit, are inde- 
pendently shiftable along these surfaces to fit between courses 
of building blocks or bricks constituting the wall elements. 
The mortar bonding these courses together flows into the 
clearance around the central channel portion and holds it, 
together with the anchor members, in position between the 
wall elements. 



118 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,707,816 
PROTRUDING PANEL FRAME MEMBER EMBEDDED 
IN St RROLNDING CONCRETE FOR THE ATTACHMENT 

OF A WINDOW CONSTRUCTION 
Hendrik Johan Van W uyckuyse, Fwyldrecht, Netherlands, as- 
signor to Schokbeton Products 

Filed Oct. 21, 1970, Ser. No. 82,598 

Int.CI. E06b///6 

U.S. CI. 52-213 5 Claims 



penetrate into the wall and thereafter diverge without closing 
upon themselves or each other, the ends of the flanges bemg 







An elongated boss is formed with opposed recesses which 
are engaged by mold elements and held in place during the 
hardenmg of concrete m the mold The boss becomes em- 
bedded in the hardened concrete and includes a projecting 
portion which can receive a flexible gasket of a glazing con- 
struction. 



3,707,817 I 

BUILDING CONSTRUCTION 

Robert F. Schmitt, 399 Crossbrook Rd., and Edward A. 

Schmitt, 690 Wyleswood Dr., both of Berea, Ohio 

Filed June 26, 1970, Ser. No. 50,140 

Int. CI. E04b5/45 

U.S. CI. 52-221 21 Claims 





used to anchor the facing layer of the wall Resiliency can be 
introduced into the flanges to reduce sound transmission. 



3,707,819 

DECKING SYSTEM 

William D. Calhoun, Route 8, Box 328; William T. Hemsley, 

501 S. Fourth Street, both of Chambersburg, Pa., and 

Charles M. Sioberg, 37 Hartzell Drive. Fayetteville, Pa. 

Filed Dec. 1, 1970, Ser. No. 94,085 

Int. CI. E04b 5\26; E04c lli& 

U.S. CI. 52— 319 4 Claims 




This disclosure relates to a decking construction for 
buildings. A precast concrete deck formmg member, which 
may be utilized either as a roof or floor forming member, is 
constructed to receive, without modification, ceiling panels 
which are merely slipped into place and held in place by gravi- 
ty. Each decking member includes a horizontal slab portion 
and at least one depending beam portion, the beam portion 
being particularly configurated to receive the ceiling panels 
and the decking member being of a configuration to provide 
space above the ceiling panels for building utilities. 



A building construction suitable for employment in low cost 
modular housing including a major structural element adapted 
to serve as a grade beam with provision for heating, cooling, 
and ventilating means as well as a raceway for electrical wir- 
, ing. Such grade beam is designed to engage and support wall 
' and floor members or panels to form a cooperative assembly 
therewith m a manner facilitating expeditious erection with a 
minimum use of skilled labor. 



3,707,820 

CONSTRUCTION BLOCK ASSEMBLY 

Raymond Leandri, 72 Boulevard de Reuilly, Paris, France 

Filed Nov. 23, 1970, Ser. No. 91,70*7 

Int. CI. E04b2/;(S. E04c HIO 

U.S. CI. 52-436 4 Claims 



m 



X-^ 



'J^ 



3,707,818 
SHAFT CAVITY W ALL AND STUD 
Nek Nelsson, Des Plaines, 111., assignor to United SUtes Gyp- 
sum Company, Chicago, 111. 

Filed Nov. 10, 1970, Ser. No. 91,338 

InL CI. E04b 2/25,2/75 

U.S. CI. 52-220 9 Claims 

A cavity wall and stud wherein the stud is characterized by a 

base exposed to the corridor, and two side flanges which 



.^ 



I ; 



jr 



I 

la. 



i=^ 



"li 



I 



m> 



I 



The present invention concerns improvements in hollow 
building blocks, such as cement or cinder blocks and a method 
for assembling same. The hollow blocks of the present inven- 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



119 



tion have a male tongue at one end. a groove for receiving the 
tongue at the opposite end, and an intermediate offset trans- 
verse web of a thickness slightly exceeding the depth of a 
groove. In assembly, the blocks of each course are arranged 
with tongues reversed from those of lower course and with 
each joint situated over the web of a lower block 



3,707,823 

PRESERVING PRODUCTS IN SEALED CONTAINERS 

Gerhart A. Guckel, Los Altos, Calif., assignor to James Dole 

Corporation, San Francisco, Calif. 

Division of Ser. No. 74 1,393, July 1, 1968, Pat. No. 3,606,997. 

This application \pril 2, 1971. Ser. No. 130.668 

Int.CI. B65b 55/06 

U.S.CL53-I12R 5 Claims 



3,707,821 
METHOD FOR INSTALLING ALUMINUM SIDING 
Robert Leddy. 389 Mayer Court, Ridgefield, N.J. 
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 67,929, Aug. 28, 1970, Pat. 

No. 3,662,510, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 

875,031, Nov. 10, 1969, abandoned. This appUcation Aug. 13, 

1971,Ser. No. 171,615 

Int.CI. E04f/i//2 

U.S. CI. 52-748 4 Claims 





SeciionA 



This disclosure relates to a new improved method for in- 
stalling aluminum siding wherein a true level line is first 
established around the structure. A starter strip having a body 
portion greater than three inches and up to about six inches in 
width with a flange at the lower end thereof is installed at the 
true level line. A series of vertical stringer strips are attached 
to the structure with the squared off lower edges in substan- 
tially abutting relationship with the flange in the starter strip to 
thereby ensure true level alignment of clips located at 
predetermined distances (usually eight inches) along such 
stringers. 



3,707,822 
ROTATING BOTTLE CLOSING MACHINE 
Leonardus Petrus van der Meer, Roelofsarendsveen, Nether- 
lands, assignor to N.V. Leidsche Apparatenfabriek, Leiden, 

Netherlands 

Filed March 16, 1971, Ser. No. 124,996 
Claims priority, applicaUon Netherlands, Dec. 8, 1970, 

7018308 

Int. CI. B65b 1128 
U S. CI. 53— 331-5 7 Claims 

A rotating bottle closing machine provided with elevation 
adjustment for capsulation of bottles of different heights com- 
prising a frame, a vertical shaft held against rotation carried by 
said frame, a driven main hub rotatably supported m the 
frame rotatable about the axis of said vertical shaft and pro- 
vided with a screw thread, an auxiliary means held against 
rotation relative to the vertical shaft and provided with a guid- 
ing track, an auxiliary hub also rotatable about the vertical 
shaft supported by said auxiliary means and provided with a 
screw thread cooperating with the screw thread of said mam 
hub whereby the elevation adjustment is carried by turning 
the auxiliary hub relative to the mam hub, closing spindles for 
the bottles to be capsulated supported from said guide track, 
and lock means to fix the auxiliary hub relative to the main 
hub. 



A horizontally positioned rotor in an aseptic canning 
system, particularly adapted for glass jar containers, is rotata- 
ble about an upright axis in an enclosed container sterilizer 
housing having an entrance and an exit for the containers. A 
plurality of peripheral pockets open toward the periphery of 
the rotor continuously convey the containers. Vacuum is ap- 
plied to the pockets beyond the entrance to withdraw air, and 
saturated steam under superatmospheric pressure is applied 
between the vacuum and the exit to sterilize the containers. 
Pressure is relieved by a blaed connection between the steam 
application and the exit, which leads to a location adjacent but 
ahead of the entrance to thus provide a pressure seal against 
entrance of outside air into the sterile portion of such con- 
tainer sterilizer. 

The rotor has a floating support on a bearing ring on the 
bottom of the housing, which also serves as a seal. The rotor 
spokes which form the pockets have spring pressed seals en- 
gageable with the side wall of the housing; and the rear wall of 
the respective pockets is provided with a cushioning bar and 
insulating shield adapted for glass jars, and allowing steam to 
flow around the back of the containers. The top of the rotor 
spokes are notched to expand the steam, and thus reduce its 
velocity, thereby minimizing bouncing of the containers in the 
pockets. ALSO, the respective cushioning bars have retaining 
lips engageable over upper portions of the jars for the same 

purpose. 

To effect discharge of the respective containers through the 
housing exit, a well allows them to drop by gravity and expose 
their bottom portions below the rotor; and a stripper member 
engages such exposed bottom portions to direct the containers 
to the exit. 



3,707,824 
BAG SUPPLYING DEVICE 
Hiroshi Ishida; Isamu Isoiaki, and Minoru Mukai, all of 
Kanagawa, Japan, assignors to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., 
Minami Ashigara-shi, Kanagawa, Japan 

Filed June 28, 1971, Ser. No. 157,527 

Claims priority, application Japan, June 30, 1970, 45/57052 

Int.CI. B65b4i/2<S 

U S CI 53—188 11 Claims 

A bag supplying device comprising a first hopper, a second 

hopper, and a first bag supplying unit including a suction pipe 

for picking up bags in the first hopper one-by-one and feeding 

them to the second hopper. A second bag supplying unit in- 



120 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



dudes a suction pipe for picking up the bags in the second 
hopper and supplying them to bag receiving brackets mounted 




ing mechanism is adapted to locate an open bag m the bag 
opening recess. The counter also includes a cash register sup- 
port which is mounted for movement between two positions 
relative to one of the counters so that the check-out counter 
itself may be operated by one or two operators. Bag storage 
means is formed in one of the counters on one side of the 



on a conveyor. The bag receiving brackets are provided with 
guide plates for opening the mouth of each bag to facilitate the 
insertion of articles therein 



3,707,825 
HOSIERY PACKAGING MACHINE 
Cecil R. Bell, Pinnacle; Jessie E. Swaim, VVinston-Salem; 
Horace Paul Gilgo, Walkertown; Robert C. Rogers, 
Bethania; Walter Ray Siiemore, and Samuel M. Orr, Jr., 
both of Winston-Salem, aU of N.C., assignors to Hanes Cor- 
poration, W inston-Salem, N.C. 

Filed Dec. 23, 1970, Ser. No. 100,900 

Int. CI. B65b 5/04 

U.S. CI. 53-282 4 Claims 




recess and the bag opening means includes a clamping 
mechanism which is movably mounted in the counter in the 
opposite side of the recess for movement across the recess to 
grip the edge of a bag located in the bag storage means and 
back across the recess to locate the bag in a vertically disposed 
open configuration. 



3,707,827 

SADDLE HORN WRAP 

Donald E. Strang, 1411 Bohart Lane, Bozeman, Mont. 

Filed Aug. 6, 1971, Ser. No. 169,683 

Int. CI. B68c0; /20 

L.S. CI. 54-46 



5 Claims 




A packaging machine having a frame and an endless con- 
veyor carrying a plurality of package receiving devices. A 
package feeding mechanism deposits at least portions of 
packages in the receiving devices, and articles to be packaged 
are subsequently positioned within the deposited package por- 
tions by an article feeding apparatus. A package closing 
device then provides a closure which is positively positioned 
to form a finished, and sealed package. 



3,707,826 
CHECK-OUT COUNTER 
Edmund A. Cole, Cooksville, Ontario, Canada, assignor to Er- 
nest C. Peters, Bramalea, OnUrio, Canada, a part interest 
Filed March 1 1 , 1 97 1 , Ser. No. 1 23,294 
Int. CI. B65b 67/04. 6 7//2 
U.S. CI. 53-384 5 Claims 

A check-out counter for use in retail stores and including an 
automatic bag opening mechanism. The check-out counter 
consists of two counters arranged in a generally T-shaped con- 
figuration A bag loading recess is formed in one of the coun- 
ters at the intersection of the two counters and the bag open- 




A strip of rubber having strap extensions at each end is 
wrapped around the horn of a western saddle to increase the 
friction thereof, and the strap ends are secured together by the 
Conway buckle, and the excess strap ends are cut after the 
wrap is completed. The rubber thereby increases the friction 
and a lariat rope is wound around the wrap in roping cattle in 
the usual way, but requires a less number of turns of the rope 
around the rubber-wrapped saddle horn. 



3,707,828 

• PRECIPITATOR CELL 

Ivan T. Burney, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to Westinghouse 

Electric Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa. 

Filed June 24, 1970, Ser. No. 49,443 

Int. CI. B03c i/40 

lJ.S.CI.55-138 3 Claims 

A precipitator cell is provided with a plurality of spaced al- 
ternately oppositely charged collecting plate electrodes with 
certain spaced ones of the electrodes with the same one 
polarity of charge being projected to extend beyond the 
remainder of the plates in the direction against the direction of 
the gas now to thereby form ionizing zones. Cantilever spring 
support means of electrically conductive sheet material are 
connected at their bases from respective ones of the elec- 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



121 



trodes of the other polarity so as to have their free-ends cantil- 
evered out over the ionizing zones. Ionizing wires are con- 




nected under tension between the spring support means to 
span the ionizing zones between the extension of the plate 
electrodes of the one polarity. 



3,707,830 

CYCLONE SEPARATOR 

Karl-Axel G. Gustavsson, Enkoping, Sweden, assignor to 

Aktiebolaget Bahco Ventilation. Enkoping, Sweden 

Filed May 18, 1971, Ser. No. 144,574 

Int.CI.B01d45//6 

U.S. CI. 55— 410 1 Claim 




A cyclone separator having a cyhndrical shell with a conical 
converging inlet portion. A ring of guide vanes is positioned 
within the outlet to impart a rotational flow to the entering gas 
and are axially moveable. At the opposite end of the shell a 
central tube extends through the end wall more than halfway 
into the shell, the tube having longitudinal slots tapered 
towards their free ends, the width being 20 to 40 percent of 
the diameter of the tube. 



3,707,829 

APPARATUS FOR INJECTING DRY SOLID PARTICLES 

INTO A LIQUID INCLUDING NOISE MUFFLING MEANS 

Harris T. Siegel, Rochester, N.Y.. assignor to Eastman Kodak 

Company Rochester, N.Y. 

Filed Oct. 21,1 970, Ser. No. 82,650 

Int. CLBOld/ 7/02 

U.S. CI. 55-239 2 Claims 







3,707,831 
CORRUGATED GAUZE REACTOR 
Frits M. Dautzenberg; Jaap E. Naber, and Cornells W . J. Ver- 
wey, all of Amsterdam, Netherlands, assignors to Shell Oil 
Company, New York, N.Y. 

Filed May 28, 1970, Ser. No. 41,460 
Claims priority, application Netherlands, June 23, 1969, 
6909550 

Int. CI. BOld 29/08; BOlj 9/04 
U.S. CI. 55—483 3 Claims 




A process and apparatus for accelerating dry solid particles 
entrained in a fluid stream to a high velocity, and decreasing 
the velocity of the fluid stream without appreciably decreasing 
the velocity of the particles. The particles which are directed 
toward a liquid strike and enter the liquid where they are dis- 
solved. The apparatus comprises a nozzle having a flared out- 
let for greatly decreasing the velocity of the exiting fluid 
stk'eam so that upon striking the liquid, the fluid stream itself 
does not materially disturb the liquid, but without appreciably 
decreasing the velocity of the heavier dry particles which 
therefore continue to travel at high velocity, striking and 
penetrating the surface of the liquid. A muffler attached to the 
nozzle and partially immersed in the liquid muffles the noise 
generated by the apparatus 



Apparatus for contacting a gas with a solid material com- 
prising an assembly of tubular containers for the solid material 
which are mounted in a housing provided with a gas inlet and a 
gas outlet. The containers have gas-permeable walls and are 
positioned so that gas channels are formed along the con- 
tainers by the walls of adjacent containers and/or the walls of 
adjacent containers and the walls of the housing To construct 
the apparatus, a number of corrugated parallel gauze plates 
may be tack-welded together such that each plate forms a mir- 
ror image of an adjacent plate. When in use some of the chan- 
nels thus formed contain solid material, and others are used as 
gas channels. 



122 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,707,834 
3,707,832 HFIGHT CONTROL DEVICE FOR A HARVESTER 

FILTER AND FILTER SUPPORT APPARATUS HEIGHJ CON KUU ^^^^^ 

Charles B. Multer, Houston. Tex., and Fred C. Jones Addison, Schumaker, II, and Gunter Schumaker, borh of Haus 

NY., assignors to SclenUfk Glass Blowing Company, ^ ^^ 5,523, Ej^helhardt, Germany 

Houston, Tex. Filed Oct. 21, 1970, Ser. No. 82,639 „ „ ,„ 

Filed Aug. 12. 1970, Ser. No. 63,086 application Germany, Oct. 24. 1969, P 19 

Int. CI. BOld JO/00 53 644.8 

U.S. CI. 55-486 llCtoims Int. CL AO Id 67/00 

U.S. a. 56-208 6 Claims 




A filter and filter support apparatus according to the 
present invention comprises conduit sections having external 
nanges. A filter assembly is interposed between the flanges 
and includes a porous structural element having a resilient 
sealing periphery bonded to the outer periphery thereof and 
disposed in sealed engagement with both of the flanges. The 
resilient sealing periphery is provided with an inner peripheral 
recess disposed in co-planar relation with the upper surface of 
the porous structural element to define a <"'»ter membrane 
recess in which is retained a filter membrane or the like held 
into assembly by one of the fianges. The porous structural por- 
tion of the porous structural element is so related to the 
resilient sealing periphery that the filter support assembly is 
oriented in centered relationship with the internal periphery 
of the conduit sections. 





A height adjustment device for a harvester cutter has a con- 
trol valve controlling a piston and cylinder for raising and 
lowering the cutter, a height control member which is adjusta- 
ble for preselecting the ground clearance of the cutter and 
means responsive to the adjustment of the height control 
member and the position of the cutter for discontinuing the 
supply of pressure fiuid to the piston and cylinder when the 
cutter has been lowered to a preselected position determined 
by the adjustment of the height control member. 

In one arrangement, these means comprise a check valve 
between the control valve and the piston and cylinder, and in 
another arrangement a linkage for actuating the control valve. 



3,707,833 
CORN HARVESTER ROLLS 
Ralph L. Sutton, Rock Island, III., assignor to International 
Harvester Company, Chicago, III. 

Filed April 8, 1968, Ser. No. 719,587 

Int. CI. AO Id 45/02 

U.S. CI. 56-104 6 Claims 



3,707,835 
RAKE 
George P. McNaUy, Jackson Heights, N.Y., and Edward A. 
Jonasch, Syracuse, Ind., assignors to Glastool Corporation, 
Brooklyn, N.Y. 

Filed March 18, 1971, Ser. No. 125,697 

Int. CLAOld 7/00 

U.S. CI. 56-400.0 1 3 Claims 



An apparatus for separating ears of sweet corn from the 
stalk for minimizing damage to the ears. The apparatus has 
blades with cutting edges that cut through a substantial por- 
tion of the stalk and then pull the stalk away from the ear to 
rupture the uncut portion of the stalk. The ears are held by 
stripper plates during the rupture of the stalks. The blades are 
arranged with respect to the stalk such that the pulling force is 
applied to the stalk over a large fiat surface normal to the lon- 
gitudinal axis of the stalk. 




A garden rake in which the tines are formed of the heat and 
pressure molded product of a plurality of stacked layers of col- 
limated glass filaments extending substantially in the longitu- 
dinal direction of the tines. Each layer of glass filaments is sup- 
ported by a substrate and is coated with resinous means. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



123 



3.707,836 
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ATTACHING FAIRING 

STRIPS TO CABLES 
Stanley L. Lovett, Jr., Culpeper, Va., assignor to The 
Rochester Corporation, Culpeper, Va. 

Filed April 29, 1971, Ser. No. 138,532 

Int. CI. D07b 3100, 1/14, 7/18 

U.S. CI. 57— 1 UN 42 Claims 




A method of attaching flexible fairing strips to a conven- 
tional cable having a core portion surrounded by a layer of 
armor wires includes unlaying all of the armor wires, inserting 
the fairing strips under the unlayed armor wires and re-laying 
the armor wires around the core portion, so that the fairing 
strips are fixedly secured. An apparatus for performing this 
method includes a swivel frame supporting the let-off reel, 
three bearing disk units for guiding and rotating the grouped 
armor wires, a support for a driven take-up reel and a manual 
control for operating the apparatus. ■ 



• 3,707,837 

FIBRILLATION PROCESS 

John D. Gibbon. 7000 Thermal Rd.. Charlotte, N.C. 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 59.383, July 30, 1970. This 

appUcation Sept. 9, 1970, Ser. No. 70,713 

Int.CI.D02g//y6 

U.S. CI. 57—157 F 5 Claims 




There is provided a commercial process for fibriltating a 
fibrillatable tape at windup speeds in excess of 500 feel per 
minute. In this process the tape is subjected to the action of at 
least four fluid twisting means wherein the direction of twist 
imparted to the tape is completely and sharply reversed 
between adjacent twisting means and the tape is advanced 
from one fluid twisting means to another while being main- 
tained under a tension of from about 0.05 to about 0.2 grams 
per denier. 



3,707,838 
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF STAPLE FIBERS 
Oskar Dorschner, Bad Homburg; Franz Josef Carduck, 
Bergen Enkheim. and Norbert Kuhne. Dornigheim, all of 
Germany, assignors to Metallgesellschaft Aktiengesellschaft, 
Frankfurt am Main, Germany 

FUed Aug. 25, 1969, Ser. No. 3,259 
Claims priority, application Germany, Feb. 13, 1969. P 19 
07 205.0; Aug. 24. 1968. P 17 85 203.8 

Int. CI. D02g 1/16; D04h 3/00 
U.S. CI. 57— 157 R 17 Claims 




Staple fibers are produced continuously and rapidly from a 
thermoplastic material by spinning and drawing filaments 
from the thermoplastic material, projecting the spun filaments 
at high speeds onto a lay-down receiver partly disposed over a 
vacuum zone so that ropy fiber aggregates are Iqid down on 
the receiver outside the vacuum zone and a randonf web is 
formed on the receiver above the vacuum zone, consolidating 
the resulting non-uniform web, twisting it into a strand and 
cutting the strand into staple fibers. 



3,707,839 
METHOD OF MAKING A CLOSED LAYER OF SHAPED 
WIRE IN WIRE ROPES. ETC. 
Mikhail Fedorovich Glushko; Viktor Klimentievich Skalatsky, 
both of Odessa, and Ivan Timofeevich Skripnik. Moscow, all 
of U.S.S.R.. assignors to Odessky Politekhnichesky Institut, 
bdessa, U.S.S.R. 

Filed Nov. 6, 1970, Ser. No. 87,395 

Int.Cl. D07b5//0 

U.S.CL57— 161 5 Claims 




The making of a closed layer from shaped wires on ropes, 
cables and similar products in which shaped wires are wound 
on a rope core and in concurrent plastic squeezing of these 
wires for redistributing their material and changing their 
profile so that they become reliably interlocked throughout 
the entire layer. 



124 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,707,840 
STEM CONSTRLCTION IN A CALENDAR W ATCH 
Mamoru Vliyasaka, Nagano-ken, Japan, assignor to Kabrishiki 
Kaisha Suwa Seikasha, Tokyo, Japan 

Filed July 27, 1972, Ser. No. 166.373 
Claims priority, application Japan. July 30, 1970. 45/75485 
Int.CI.G04b/9/24.i7/06 

U.S. CI. 58-58 ^C*^* 



3.707,842 

SANDGLASS 

David Splvak. One Washington Square Village, New York. 

Filed Sept. 30. 1971, Ser. No. 185,315 

lnt.CI.G04f //06, //0« 
U.S.Cl.58-144 ^C'-'-"* 




A watch stem in a calendar watch has a number of grooves 
ihereon One end of a sprmg. fastened at the other end to a 
base plate, .s seated resil.ently .n one of the grooves. Move 
ment of the watch stem in an axial direction requires that the 
seated end of the spring ride up on the walls of the grooves 
which are tapered. The resistance which must be overcome in 
moving the watch stem from one position to another can be 
vaned by changing the angle of the groove walls and by chang- 
ing the height of the walls between adjacent grooves. 




A sandglass is combined with an electrical signal actuator to 
give a signal when the sand has passed through the appropriate 
chamber. 



3,707,841 

ECCENTRIC CAM STRUCTURE FOR AN 

AUTOMATICALLY WOUND WATCH 

Mamoru Miyasaka. Nagano-ken. Japan, assignor to Kabushiki 

Kaisha Suwa Seikasa, Tokyo. Japan 

Filed Dec. 27. 1971. Ser. No. 212,245 

Claims priority. appUcation Japan. Dec. 28, 1970, 

45/132712 

Int. CI. G04b 5102 

U.S. CI. 58-82 R l/^^'"" 



3.707.843 

PRIME MOVER SYSTEM UTILIZING BIS 

(TRIFLUOROMETHYL) BENZENE AS WORKING FLUID 

Rex C Conner. Englewood. and Louis L. FersUndig. 

Ridgewood, both of N J., assignors to Halocarbon Products 

Corporation. Hackensack. N J. 

Filed Jan. 4. 1972. Ser. No. 215,438 

Int. CKFO Ik 25/00 

U.S. CL 60-36 U Claims 

An anti-poUulion heat engine including a prime mover 

system wherein the working fluid comprises bis 

(trifluoromethyl) benzene. 




3,707,844 
HYDRAULIC ACTUATOR 
Robert E. Brooks, Worthington, and Robert T. Marks, Colum- 
bus, both of Ohio, assignors to Ranco Incorporated. Colum- 
bus, Ohio 

Filed Aug. 3, 197 1, Ser. No. 168,596 

lnt.CLF15b/5/y« 

U.S. CI. 60-52 B 3 Claims 



A cam for mounting m an oscillating weight in an autoriiati- 
cally wound watch has a central axis and a lateral surface 
which is a surface of revolution about said central axis. 1 he 
fact that the lateral surface is a surface of revolution simplifies 
the forming of the cam. The cam is then mounted eccentri- 
cally in the oscillating weight responsible for winding the 
watch. 




lo^ ly 



A hermetically sealed hydraulic actuator comprises a spring 
loaded piston and cylinder, the position of the piston in the 
cylinder being controlled by the output of a constantly 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



125 



running fluid pump which withdraws oil from a sump in com- 
munication with the cylinder and discharges into the cylinder. 
The pump discharge may be more or less diverted from the 
cylinder to the sump by a diverter valve regulated by the 
movement of an electrically heated thermal element in the 
sump. The thermal element temperature is controlled by a 
suitable power supply circuit, which may respond to dif- 
ferences in a condition to be regulated by the actuator, and 
the effect of the element on the diverter valve for a given cir- 
cuit response is adjustable by shifting the port of the diverter 
valve relative to the element. A screw accessible from the ex- 
terior of the sump shifts the diverter valve port. 



3,707,845 
DUAL MASTER CYLINDER ASSEMBLY 
Robert E. Mitton, San Diego, Calif., assignor to Hal C. John- 
son, Chula Vista; Shirley M. Jones. San Diego; Marie Jones 
and Eric D. Ross. National City. Calif., part interest to each 
Filedjan. 27, 1971.Ser. No. 110,022 
Int. CI. F15b 7/00; B60t 1/00 
U.S. CI. 60—54.6 R 6 Claims 




A dual master cylinder assembly for separately operating 
two hydraulic brake systems for a wheeled vehicle, employs 
two oppositely moving pistons in coaxial bores. An actuator 
extending transversely between the pistons carries toggle 
mechanism comprising a pair of links, one connected to each 
of the pistons, respectively. A roller at the pivotal connection 
between each link and its respective piston rolls on the bore 
surface to eliminate side loading and insure that only axial 
forces are applied to the pistons. As the toggle links straighten 
out the axial force on the pistons is multiplied. 



which is outwardly divergent and extends beyond the frame 
and defines a socket rabbet for assembly with a panel od an 
adjacent casing ring; the panel comprises, on one of the trans- 



3,707,846 
LININGS OR CASINGS FOR TUNNELS, GALLERIES, 
MINE PITS AND THE LIKE 
Christian Georges Leblond, Atton. and Jacques Francois Marie 
Oger. Pont-A-Mousson. both of France, assignors to Centre 
De Recherches De Pont-A-Mousson Maidieres, Pont-A- 
Mousson, France 

Filed Aug. 25, 1969, Ser. No. 852,602 
Claims priority, application France, Aug. 27, 1968, 
68164222 

Int.Cl. E21d/7//4 
U.S. CI. 6 1 —45 R 1 3 Claims 

Casings acting as circular-section revetments or coverings 
of cavities formed in the ground to resist the thrust of the 
ground; in said casing, a panel which adapts itself to the 
ground it must cover and which has an arcuate web bordered 
by inner flanges constituting a roughly rectangular frame, the 
web havong a meridian sectional shape having an outer bulge, 
the web being extended laterally by a frustoconical portion 




verse flanges of its frame, at least one rib for assembly with an 
adjacent panel of the same casing panel and, in the transverse- 
ly opposed flange, a support recess correspondint to and 
cooperating with said rib. ^ 



3,707,847 
INSTALLATION OF SAND DRAINS 
Augustus P. Godley. Hohokus; Francis M. Fuller, Washington 
Township, Bergen County; Charles R. Houk. Scotch Plains; 
Henry A. Nelson Holland. Ridgewood. and George J. Gen- 
dron. Oradell. all of NJ.. assignors to Raymond Interna- 
tional Inc., New York, N.Y. 

Filed Feb. 6, 1968, Ser. No. 703,440 

Int. CI. E02b 7 7/00. 5/i4 

U.S. CL 61 — 11 12 Claims 







T ',^. 




Formation of sand drains in the earth by drilling and forcing 
a fluid at high velocity to wash out a hole and thereafter filling 
the hole by forcing filler material down through a pipe; the 
pipe being outfitted with special valve control means to con- 
trol the flow of fluid and filler therethrough in generally in- 
verse manner. 



3.707,848 
PROCESS AND SYSTEM FOR INCREASING LOAD- 
BEARING CAPACITY OF SOIL 
Stephen V. Chelminski. West Redding, Conn., assignor to Bolt 
Associates, Inc., Norwalk, Conn. 

Filed April 7. 1971. Ser. No. 131,919 
Int. CI. E02d 5/42, 5/44, 3/ JO 
U.S. CL 61 — 11 10 Claims 

Process and system for increasing the load bearing capacity 
of soil by producing load-bearing columns formed of densely 
compacted granular material, such as sand or gravel or of 
concrete. For producing each column, the granular material 
or concrete is fed down through a hollow member, and an air 
gun supported at the lower end of a pipe assembly extending 
down coaxially through the hollow member is actuated to 
produce powerful impulses to impel the soil outwardly away 
from the lower end of the hollow member to compact the soil 



126 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



and then to impel the granular material or concrete outwardly 
to distribute It into the resulting cavity formed m the com- 
pacted soil When sufficient material has been distributed and 
compaced by the powerful impulses from the air gun, the hol- 
low member and pipe assembly are withdrawn an increment of 
distance, and then the steps are repeated to distribute and 
compact more of the desired material at a level above the first 
deposit and so forth, to create a column of such material. It 
desired to create an encased concrete column, the pipe as- 
sembly IS withdrawn from the interior of the hollow member. 




cation column and passed in indirect heal exchange relation- 
ship with a vaporizing external refrigerant such as methane or 
natural gas. The resultant liquified nitrogen is recycled to the 
column and acts as reflux liquid therein. To provide make-up 
refrigeration for liquid products that are removed from the 
system without passing through the main heat exchanger, a 
portion of the withdrawn nitrogen is heated in the main heat 
exchanger, thereby cooling the incoming air. The warmed 
nitrogen is then pre-cooled and subsequently liquefied by the 
external refrigerant. The nitrogen recycle steps are conducted 
at approximately the same pressure of nitrogen thereby 
eliminating the need for compressor and expansion valves on 
said recycle line. 



3,707,850 

CRYOGENIC STORAGE TANK IMPROVEMENTS 

Joseph A. Connell, Harbor City; Anthony J. Baranyi, CosU 

Mesa, and Paul V. Laylander, Irvine, all of Calif., assignors 

to Systems Capitol Corporation, Phoenix, Ariz. 

Filed Oct. 12, 1970, Ser. No. 80,1 17 

Int.CI.F17c//00 

U.S. CI. 62-45 7 Claims 



y^T^^ 



which is then filled with concrete. To facilitate the initial in- 
sertion of the hollow member into the soil, water is jetted 
down through it while the air gun is actuated producing 
powerful impulses to impel the soil away from the lower end, 
and to compact the soil cylindncally about the descendmg 
member to enhance lateral support. A novel air gun energy 
source is adapted to be operated while embedded in soil, 
poured concrete, sand, gnt, and similar hostile environments. 
Columns of more coarsely granular material can be produced 
in the soil to enable ground water to percolate up, the ground 
water being released by intense, repeated air gun impulses. 

3,707,849 

FRACTIONATION OF AIR BY USING REFRIGERATION 

FROM OPEN CYCLE EVAPORATION OF EXTERNAL 

CRYOGENIC LIQUID 

Rudolf Becker. Munich, Germany, assignor to Linde Aktien- 

gesellschaft Zentrale PatenUbteUung, Hollriegelskreuth. 

Germany 

Filed March 3, 1970, Ser. No. 16,077 
Claims priority, application Germany, March 7, 1969, P 19 

11765.8 

Int.CI.F25j//02,i/04 

U.S.a.62-40 2 Claims 





Liquified gas is stored underground in a large double walled 
container seated in an openmg in the earth's surface. Between 
the walls of the liner, thermal insulation is distributed in a con- 
tinuous layer along the floor and wall of the opening. A 
diaphragm is supported across the top of the opening with a 
seal being provided between the diaphragm and the double 
walled liner to form a container for the liquified gas. Sur- 
rounding the lip of the opening is a concrete ring across which 
a net of cables is stretched to support a thermally insulating 
ceiling A cooling system is provided for freezing the earth to 
aid in the excavation of the opening and this system is sub- 
sequently used to maintain the wall and floor of the opening 
frozen to a controlled thickness by cooling th^ in response to 
a rise in the temperature of the surrounding earth above a 
predetermined temperature level. 

Also disclosed are various techniques for constructing a 
storage tank of the type described. 



3,707,851 
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM EFFICIENCY MONITOR 
Robert B. McAshan, Jr., Houston, Tex., assignor to Machine 
Ice Co., Houston, Tex. „ . „ „ 

Filed Oct. 28, 1970, Ser. No. 84,837 
Int. CI. F25b 49\00 
US CI 62-125 23 Claims 

*A monitor for monitoring and comparing the efficiency of 
operating conditions in a refrigeration system is disclosed. The 
monitor includes a flrst and second sensing means, such as 
thermistors, for sensing and comparing the values of two con- 
— dilions in the system, such as an ambient temperature condi- 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



127 



alarm signal or indication is provided when the difference have portions devoid of loops. This is achieved by providing 
between these temperatures exceeds a predetermined the rear and/or the front loop holders at the locations of the 
amount, and a second alarm signal or indication is provided 
when the differences between these temperatures is less than a 



1: 






predetermined amount. The monitor also includes a delay cir- 
cuit for delaying the application of voltage to the mechanism 
until a preset period after start up of said refrigeration system, 
and an alarm is also given in the event electric power is lost to 
the refrigeration system. 



3,707,852 
SEALING SLEEVE OF ELASTIC MATERIAL 
Manfred H. Burckhardt, Waiblingen, and Lutz Schafer, Stutt- 
gart-Bad Cannstatt, both of Germany, assignors to Daimler- 
Benz Aktiengesellschaft, Stuttgart-Unterturkheim, Germany 

FUed Sept. 27, 1968, Ser. No. 763,274 
Claims priority, application Germany, Sept. 28, 1967, P 16 
25 974,8 

Int.CI. F16di/<S4 
U.S. CI. 64—32 F 1 1 Claims 




A sealing sleeve made from elastic material, particularly for 
sealing the gap between a joint part and a shaft in rapidly 
rotating, so-called homo-kinetic joints, in which the inner ring 
of the sealing sleeve abuts sealingty against the shaft and the 
outer ring against a joint part, whereby the outer ring and the 
inner ring are connected with each other by a conically con- 
structed ring diaphragm which is deformable into a roller bel- 
lows in the installed position. 



3,707,853 

DEVICE FOR PRODUCING DOUBLE-SIDED LOOPED 

CLOTH UPON CROCHET GALLOON MACHINES 

Heinz Lindner, Strasse de Freunschaft 331, and Georg 

Roscher, Thumer Strasse 21 Od, both of Geyer/Sa, Germany 

Filed Aug. 30, 1967, Ser. No. 664,388 

Int. CI. D04b 23m 

U.S. CI. 66—84 4 Claims 

Crochet galloon machines are improved for the purpose of 

making thereon double-sided looped cloth which does not 



weft yarn pressure sinkers with slots, recesses or milled por- 
tions. The sinkers are vertically shifted and guided in these 
recesses. 



3,707,854 
YARN CATCHER 
George J. Matzel, Rego Park, N.Y., assignor to Stop-Motion 
Devices Corporation, Plainview, N.Y. 

Filed May 3, 1971, Ser. No. 139,757 

Int. CI. D04b/J/45.J5/y4 

U.S.CK66— 125R 12 Claims 




A yarn catcher for a stop motion device used with knitting 
machines and the like, the stop motion device including a fly 
wire which carries the yarn into the yarn catcher when the 
yarn breaks. The yarn catcher comprises a bracket with a 
flange member attached to the stop motion device and an ex- 
tending plate portion which is provided with an aperture 
through which the yarn passes and further is provided with a 
pair of leaf spring members being maintained in flexion 
against one another with the yarn being carried by the fly wire 
between the leaf spring members to be held thereby, and a 
cover plate member of a generally U-shape having leg mem- 
bers which sandwich the extending plate portion between 
respective opposite surfaces and selectively mask a portion of 
the aperture and guide the yam between the leaf spring mem- 
bers when the yarn breaks. 



3,707,855 
GARMENT FINISHING COMBINATION 
Norman A. Buckely, Wauwatosa, Wis., assignor to McGraw- 
Edison Company, Elgin, III. 

Int.CI. D06C//00 
U.S. CL 68— 6 10 Claims 

A garment finishing system comprised of a finisher having a 
heat exchanger and a steam discharge nozzle, and a low pres- 
sure steam boiler coupled to the finisher in a manner so that 
the finisher heat exchanger outlet is located vertically higher 
than the boiler water level thereby allowing gravity conden- 
sate return and infeed to the boiler, and makeup water infeed 
to the boiler generally from line pressure and without a pump. 



128 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



129 



Most professional cleaning plants have available high pres- 
sure steam systems generally between 55 and 125 psi, and 
consequently most garment fmishers are designed to be used 
with these available high steam pressures The cost of having 
steam boilers of this high pressure is substantial, but even 
more important, many safety codes preclude the operation of 
such systems under certain conditions. For example, under 
some codes the accepted use of high pressure steam systems 
requires special room enclosures for or locations of the boiler 



3,707.857 

MULTI-PURPOSE SENSOR ASSEMBLY FOR 

AUTOMATIC WASHER 

Robert T. WIgfall, St. Joseph. Mich., assignor to Whirlpool 

Corporation. Benton Harbor, Mich. 

Filed Sept. 20, 1 97 1 , Ser. No. 1 8 1 ,89 1 

Int. CI. D06f ii/02 

U.S.CI.68-12R 8 Claims 




and/or possibly the continued presence of a certified operator. 
The code distinction between low and high pressure steam 
systems frequently is made at 1 5 psig, based on ASME ( Amer- 
ican Society of Mechanical Engineers) and BOLA (Building 
GfTicials Conference of America ). 

Based "in part on the above code restrictions, in coin-ops or 
self-service installations where non-technical customers would 
operate unattended finishing equipment, certain types of 
finishing equipment have heretofore not been used. 



3.707.856 
TOTAL SENSING COMBINATION W ASHER-DRYER 
Anthony Niewyk. St. Joseph, and Donald E. Janke. Benton 
Harbor, both of Mich., assignors to W hirlpool Corporation. 
Benton Harbor. Mich. 

Division of Ser. No. 730,358. May 20. 1968. Pat. No. 

3 575.193. This application Jan. 14, 1971, Ser. No. 136,276 

Int.CI.DO6fii/02 

U.S. CI. 68-12 R 9 Claims 





A sensing system for a laundry appliance includes a pair of 
temperature responsive devices, heating means, and a ther- 
mally conductive disk which places one of the temperature 
responsive devices in good heat-flow relationship with the 
healing means and the washing fluid. The sensing system in- 
cludes associated switching and biasing circuitry which ena- 
bles the system to be used to sense a variety-of machine func- 
tions. 



3,707,858 

W ASHING MACHINES FOR CLOTHES AND OTHER 

ARTICLES 

Fritz Guliow. and Egon Hartmann. both of Hlldesheim. Ger- 
man>^ assignors to Senkingwerk GmbH Kommandit- 
gesellschaft, Hlldesheim, Germany 

Filed Dec. 3. 1970. Ser. No. 94,724 
Claims priority, application Germany, Dec. 3, 1969, P 19 60 

677.2 

Int. CI. D06f i7/0S.i9/0S 

U.S.CI.68-I43 3 Claims 




A semielectronic control system for a combination washing 
and drying machine utilizing a solenoid-actuated stepping 
switch, each successive position of the switch controlling such 
functions as water fill, agitate, drain, extract, and dry making 
up the washer-dryer's cycle of operation. Energization of the 
solenoid is controlled either by RC timer circuitry having a 
number of selective delays or by circuitry responsive to sensed 
conditions. The stepping switch selects the appropriate delay 
in the RC timing circuitry or the proper condition responsive 
circuit which causes energization of the solenoid to advance 
the stepping switch to the next position. 



A washing machine comprises a drum rotatable about a 
horizontal axis and divided axially into a plurality of washing 
compartments and rinsing compartments. Hot water or other 
washing medium is fed into a final wash compartment from a 
housing surrounding the final wash compartment, the adjacent 
surface portion of the drum being perforated. The washing 
medium flows from the final wash compartment successively 
through the other washing compartments to be discharged 
from the drum at the charging end thereof 



i 



3,707,859 
APPARATUS FOR TREATING TEXTILE MATERIAL 
Robert D. Carr; Harry T. Collier, and Clarence E. Jones, all of 
Hopewell, Va., assignors to Allied Chemical Corporation, 
Petersburg. Va. 

Filed April 11, 1969, Ser. No. 815,440 
Int. CI. D06j 35100 



member. A second member is telescoped in respect to the first 
member and it includes a locking cylinder which is key 
operated to engage a latch into a receiving groove of the first 
member to lock the two members together and prevent access 
to the screw head. 



U.S. CI. 68—202 



3 Claims 




An apparatus for applying, controlling and monitoring the 
amount of liquid to moving filamentary material per unit 
length of the material by moving said material in wiping en- 
gagement with part of the surface of a driven roller, another 
part of which dips into a reservoir normally containing a 
prescribed amount of liquid, maintaining a specified level of 
liquid within the reservoir by means of a sensing element that 
activates a fill pump upon separation of the sensing element 
from the liquid level of the reservoir, and monitoring the 
amount of liquid pickup by the filamentary material by count- 
ing the pump impulses upon each activation thereof and said 
counter means being operatively in communication with a 
continuous digital tape readout for liquid pickup surveillance. 



3.707.860 
DEVIC: FOR LOCKING ARTICLES TO A MOUNTING 

BASE 

M. Leonard Singer. 1500 Cardinal Drive. Little Falls. N.J.. and 

Robert M. Woletz. 294 Buttonwood Drive. Paramus, N.J. 

Filedjuly7, 1971.Ser. No. 160,314 

Int. CI. E05b 69/00 

U.S. CI. 70—58 . 4 Claims 




3,707.861 

PERMUTATION LOCK. FOR EXAMPLE. FOR 

SUITCASES. BRIEFCASES OR THE LIKE 

Gustav Lindner, Iserlohn, Germany, assignor to Firma Hein- 

rich Hulter Jr.. Iserlohn. Germany 

Filedjan. 8. 1971.Ser. No. 104.983 
Claims priority, application Germany, Jan. 9, 1970, P 20 00 
769.6 

Int. CI. E05bi7/;2. 65/50 
U.S.CI. 70— 74 7 Claims 



10 24 14 



A device particularly for locking a calculator to a mounting 
base comprises a U-shape stirrup which is secured to the bot- 
tom of the device such as by epoxy glue and which includes a 
reinforcing rod therethrough so that it cannot be easily 
severed. The complete locking device includes a bar member 
having a hook shaped end which engages over the stirrup in an 
unreleasable manner and a securement end which extends 
beyond the end of the device being secured so that it cannot 
be pivoted out of this stirrup. The securement end is secured 
by a securing screw which extends through a locking device 
comprising a first member which engages through the securing 
plate to the mounting base and a threaded screw which ex- 
tends through the first member and engages into the mounting 
base and has a head portion which is covered within the first 

906 O.G.— 5 




A permutation lock for suitcases, briefcases or the like, 
which comprises a housing having a cover and a bottom. Per- 
mutation discs and locking discs are provided, which permuta- 
tion discs are capable of being locked with thejocking discs 
for variation of the opening permutaling in different angular 
positions. The locking discs have a first opening. A displacea- 
ble bolt slide includes locking projections and are cooperative 
with a hasp. The locking tongues enter the first opening and 
the cover has a second opening. The permutation discs in- 
clude an upper part and a lower annular collar. The permuta- 
tion discs project through the second opening with their upper 
part and support themselves with their lower annular collar on 
the inner face of the cover and have a central third opening, 
receiving a shaft of the locking disc resiliently against the bot- 
tom. Recesses are disposed on the under side of the lower an- 
nular collar concentrically about the third central opening, 
and projections are provided on the end face of the locking 
discs, which projections enter the recesses. 



3.707.862 
KEY-CONTROLLED DOOR LOCK 
John V. Pastva, Jr., Parma Heights. Ohio, assignor to The 
Eastman Company, Cleveland, Ohio 

Filed Feb. 19, 1971. Ser. No. 116,969 

Int. CI. E05b 5/00 

U.S. CI. 70— 150 2 Claims 

A paddle-type, key-controlled flush-mounted, spring-biased 

bolt lock for swinging doors made primarily of metal 

stampings and having the key control in the shallower part of a 



130 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



iwo level recess and the handle in the deeper part of the recess 
with the non-p.voted end of the handle adjacent to the key 



between the two vessels. Liquid .s pressurized in the inter- 
space to support the inner vessel. The inner vessel '""PP^^ed 
without constraint from the outer vessel and the ends of the in- 
terspace are closed by joints which allow freedom.of radial ex- 




control The key control includes a cam selectively movable 
into and out of the path of a member engageable with the bolt. 




3,707,863 
CYLINDER LOCK 
Dittmar Schwab, and Heinz Schwab, both of Hausen, Ger- 
many, assignors to Ymos-Metallwerke Wolf & Becker 
GmbH & Co., Offenbach/Main, Germany 

Filed Nov. 10, 1970. Ser. No. 88,374 
Claims priority, application Germany, Nov. 17, 1969, P 19 

57 642.2 

Int. C\.EOSh 15/14.29/00 

L.S. a. 70-364 R 7 Claims 



pansion of the ends of the inner vessel without giving rise to 
stressing of the adjacent ends of the outer vessel. In a particu- 
lar arrangement the ends of the interspace are closed by 
sealed joints which make sliding contact with the end faces of 
the inner vessel. 




3,707,865 
METHOD FOR RESTORING THE INITIAL WORK- 
HARDENED CONDITION IN A CONDUCTOR PORTION 
ANNEALED BY WELDING AND APPARATUS FOR 
CARRYING OUT SAID METHOD 
Agostino Oriani, Sesto San Giovanni, luly, assignor to Indus- 
trie Pirelli S.p.A., Milan, lUly 

Filed Oct. 20. 1970, Set. No. 82,439 
Claims priority, application lUly, Feb. 3, 1970. 20134 A/70 
int. CLB2 If /5yOS 
U.S.CL 72-340 1 1 Claims 



A cylinder lock has tumblers mounted in two rows, the tum- 
blers being arranged symmetrically in pairs, each pair having 
one tumbler from each row in a plane, and the tumblers in 
each pair being mutually offset and displaceable parallel to 
one another in opposite directions against b.assing springs 
when a key is inserted, whereby protrudmg parts of the tum- 
blers are withdrawn from recesses in the outer cylinder ot the 
lock to allow the barrel to be turned The key may be reversi- 
ble 1 e the profile on one edge may be a mirror image of that 
of the other edge about the longitudinal center line of the key. 
To shorten the length of the lock for a given number of tum^ 
biers the rows are staggered longitudinally of the lock. Each 
tumbler may have two key engaging edges, stepped relative to 
the diametral direction to engage correspondingly stepped key 
nrofiles The invention increases the number of tumblers, and 
hence the number of alternative key profiles, in a given length 
of lock compared with conventional locks. 

3.707.864 

PRESSURE VESSELS 

Albert Edward Pigott. Clifton; Brian Tomkins. Bolton, both of 

England, and Lionel Edward Raraty. deceased, late of 

■ Lvthan St. Annes, England, by Hermanna Raraty, admin- 

istratrix. assignors to United Kingdom Atomic Energy 

Authority, London, England 

FUed March 9, 1970. Ser. No. 17,628 

Claims priority, application Great Britain, March 17, 1969. 

13,991/69 

Int. CI. B2 Id 27/00 

U.S. CI. 72-60 6 Claims 

A pressure vessel of double ring construction comprising 

mner and outer concentric vessels with an annular interspace 




The annealed region of electrical cable conductors which 
have been butt welded together are restored to their initial 
work-hardened condition by clamping them on opposite sides 
of the annealed region and applying forces in either or both 
the axial and transverse directions to the cables via the clamps 
so as to swage and work-harden the annealed region. The 
clamps include means for applying hammer-type forces, in- 
cluding inclined planes for obtaining axially directed forces; 
and they further include screw thread means for applying 
gradual swaging forces, as well as screw thread and pneumatic 
piston means for applying clamping forces. 



3,707,866 

MACHINES FOR FORMING A WORKPIECE BETWEEN 

TWO RAM HEADS 

Willi Brauer, Coburg. Germany, assignor to Langenstein & 

Schemann Aktiengesellschaft, Coburg, Germany 

Continuation of Set. No. 764,901, Oct. 3, 1968, abandoned. 

This application Feb. 24, 1971, Ser. No. 1 18,528 
Claims priority. applicaUon Austria, Oct. 9, 1967, 9134 
Int.CLB21j7/i4 
US. a. 72-407 7CIauns 

Improved hydraulic forming and forging presses for com- 
bined operation, in which \here are valving facilities and 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



131 



piston and cylinder arrangements enabling various combina- 
tions of relative movement and rates of movement of the rams 




to be adjusted, in accordance with the kind of metal-forming 
operations which are to be effected. 



3,707,867 
CARTRIDGE-TYPE CRIMPING TOOL 
Arne H. Mayala, Stillwater, Minn., assignor to Minnesota Min- 
ing and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn. 
Filed March 12, 1970, Ser. No. 18,929 
Int. CI. B2 Id 9/05 
U.S.CL72— 410 8 Claims 




source and a null reading reflected beam detector. The Bour- 
don tube itself is mounted on a mounting member which is 
selectively movable with respect to a frame member on which 
is mounted the null reading detector. This permits linearizing 
the response of the instrument. Initially, the range of the in- 



A hand tool which rigidly holds a connector in position to 
accept a plurality of wires to be joined, assures permanent 
electrical connection by retaining the connector until a proper 
crimp has been made, forces the properly crimped connector 
from the tool, and automatically presents a new connector in 
the proper position from a supply cartridge. The connectors 
are of the type having a wire receiving base portion and a 
telescoping cover portion movable into the base portion. 



ERRATUM 

For Class 72—379 see: 
Patent No. 3.708,060 






A' 

i 




•■isnj 



strument is adjusted by moving the mirror parallel to the 
source light beam to produce a read-out corresponding to the 
upper limit of the pressure range desired to be measured. 
Then the mirror is moved perpendicular to the source light 
beam to produce a linear response at a point at approximately 
the mid-point of such range. 



3,707,869 
AIRBORNE ISOKINETIC SAMPLER 
Gilbert S. Raynor, Manorville, N.Y.. assignor to The United 
States of America as represented by the United States Atomic 
Energy Commission 

Filed June 9, 1971, Ser. No. 151,402 

Int. CL coin 1/24, BOld 46/00 

U.S.CL 73— 28 3 Claims 



3,707,868 
PRECISION PRESSURE MANOMETER 
Jerry L. Fruit, Houston, Tex., assignor to Mensor Corporation, 
Houston, Tex. 

Filed AprU 16, 1971, Ser. No. 134,607 

Int. CI. GOlr 27/00 

U.S. CL 73-4 9 Claims 

A design Bourdon tube manometer, wherein tube deflection 

is detected by sensing the arc subtended by a light beam 

reflected from a mirror on the Bourdon tube, has a fixed light 




A lightweight airborne isokinetic sampler employing a sam- 
pling head mounted on a track and connected by flexible hosc- 
to the air-moving and controlling equipment located within 
the aircraft. Flow of air is controlled by a coaxial valve and a 
bleed-in valve. A pitol tube is used to measure air flow. 



1 



132 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,707,870 

APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATIC AND CONTINUOUS 

PLOTTING OF ABSORPTION-DESORPTION ISOTHERMS 

EMPLOYED FOR DETERMINING THE 

MICROSTRUCTURE OF POROUS BODIES 

Michel Herve, Bures sur Yvette. and Bernard Rasneur, 

Chevreuse, both of France, assignors to Commissariat A 

L'Energie Atomique, Paris, France 

Filed Feb. 22, 1971.Ser. No. 117,462 
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 26, 1970, 7006933 
Int. CI. GOln 75/05 
U.S. CL 73—38 7 Claims 



3,707,872 
COMPOUND FLUID METER 
Nariiider Masson, Jersey City; William John Korenicki, Lin- 
den, and Walter Ludwig Lechner, New Providence, all of 
N J., assignors to Gamon-Calmet Industries, Inc., Newark, 

N.J. 

Division of Ser. No. 23,355, March 27, 1970. This application 

May 10, 1971, Ser. No. 142,035 

Int.CI.GOlf ///O 

U.S. CL 73—231 R ^0 Claims 




The apparatus essentially comprises a variable-volume en- 
closure, a pressure transducer in communication with said en- 
closure, a vacuum Ime, at least one pipe for the admission of 
adsorbabie gases or vapors, a pipe for the admission of non- 
adsorbable gases and a sample-holder. Said pipes and said 
sample-holder are also in communication with said enclosure 
but can be cut-off by means of cocks. An analog computer is 
connected electrically to the transducer and to the enclosure 
and a cartesian-coordinate plotter is connected to the com- 
puter to provide absorption-desorption isotherms. The enclo- 
sure, the transducer, the analog computer and the sample- 
holder are maintained at constant temperature 



3,707,871 
SENSOR FOR A VARIABLE-PRESSURE ROLLING BALL 

VISCOMETER 
Robert T. Emmet, Glen Burnie, Md., assignor to The United 
States of America as represented by the SecreUry of the 
Navy 

Filed Dec. 14, 1970, Ser. No. 97,561 

Int. CLGOIn/ 7/72 

U.S. CI. 73-57 8 Claims 





A compound fluid meter including a turbine type high flow 
metering device disposed in a main metering conduit, a low 
flow positive displacement metering device disposed m a 
bypass conduit connected to the main conduit, changeover 
valve means in said main conduit for preventing fluid flow 
therethrough when the fluid pressure is less than a predeter- 
mined pressure, the bypass conduit being adapted to receive 
fluid upstream from the valve means and reintroduce it 
downstream of the valve means, the turbine type high flow 
metering device comprising a fixed rod-like support member 
upon which an impeller is rotatably mounted, the rod-like sup- 
port member having a free end extending towards the up- 
stream end of the main conduit, a recess in said free end of the 
rod-like support member, a first thrust member loosely 
disposed in the recess and extending therefrom toward the up- 
stream end of the main conduit, a ball-shaped thrust member, 
and a recess in the hub of the impeller shaped to receive at 
least the free end of the rod-like support member with the first 
thrust member extending therefrom and the ball-shaped thrust 
member disposed between the upstream end of the hub recess 
and the first thrust member. Holes may be provided in the im- 
peller for introducing the fluid being metered into the hub 
recess to lubricate and cool the relatively rotating elements 
therein. Further, face polarized annular permanent magnets 
are provided for coupling the impeller to an intermediate gear 
train and the intermediate gear train to the gearing of a re- 
gister box to permit the intermediate gear train to be disposed 
in a fluid tight casing. Still further, the changeover valve 
means may comprise a toggle link mounted valve member 
having a cam follower adapted to cooperate with a cam for 
.guiding the valve member through its opening and closing 
movements. 



The present invention relates to a variable-pressure rolling 
ball viscometer which is essentially invarient to pressure, and 
has improved mechanical stability. The pressure insensitivity 
of the new viscometer is obtained by including in the manufac- 
turing of the sensor circuits a step wherein the thermosetting 
resin used is cured under high pressure. 



3,707,873 
TEMPERATURE MEASURMENT 
Robert Eric Young, 12 Whitnash Rd., Leamington Spa, En- 
gland 

Filed Oct. 2, 1970, Ser. No. 77,688 
Claims priority, application Great Britain, Oct. 3, 1969, 

48,632/69 

int. CI. GOlk 5/7*. 5/iO 

U.S. CI. 73-362 R ^ Claim 

A device for measuring temperature in which an inductance 
coil surrounds each arm of a glass manometer containing a 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



133 



liquid such as mercury acted on by a temperature expansive 
liquid such as ethyl alcohol. Each inductance coil forms part 



lO 12 8 Cy -4 



lOSClLUATOB 



15 17 



y^' 



J\ 13 
. f ^ 

I OSC'L.ATOS I t) - 



::^'f^ 




of an oscillatory circuit and the outputs of the two oscillatory 
circuits are compared in a beat frequency mixer to give a 
digital representation of the temperature. 



against the actuating arm of a switch to move the arm from a 
first position to a second position. When the solenoid is not 
energized or energized with reverse polarity, the switch arm 
returns from its second position to its first position under the 
bias of a spring. In one of these positions the switch closes a 
circuit to a motor which in turn controls the length of time 
that a dip tube is in a receptacle of wash liquid. In the other 
position the switch closes a circuit to the motor which in turn 
controls the length of time that a dip tube is in a sample recep- 
tacle. Accordingly, adjusting the times that the solenoid is 
energized and de-energized by means of the electronic pulsing 
circuit, one can establish any desired ratio of sample to wash 
liquid or vice versa. Adjusting the cycle time of the energizing 
and de-energizing pulses, one can adjust the rate at which 
samples with intervening wash liquid are aspirated by the dip 
tube. 

A timing circuit is adjustable to achieve the desired ratios 
and cycle lime, putting out solenoid energizing pulses. 



3,707,874 
SOLID STATE POSITION SENSING APPARATUS 
Wainwright Tuttle, Cincinnati, Ohio, assignor to Spati Indus- 
tries, Inc., Covington, Ky. 

FiledMarch24, 1971, Ser. No. 127,515 

Int. CI. GO II 9/02 

U.S. CI. 73—398 R 7 Claims 




Device including a temperature sensitive, self-heated im- 
pedance means and a spaced apart solid means. Any condition 
between the impedance means and the solid object which af- 
fects the heat transfer therebetween may be sensed by measur- 
ing the electrical resistance of the impedance means. 



3,707,875 
TIMING DEVICE FOR AUTOMATIC SAMPLING 
APPARATUS 
Gary Michael Freeman, Elyria, Ohio, assignor to Gilford In- 
strument Laboratories Inc., Oberlin, Ohio 

Filed April 1 , 1 97 1 , Ser . No. 1 30,2 1 1 
Int. CI. GOln 7//4. HOlh -^7/75 
U.S. CL 73—423 A 



12 Claims 




The mechanical timing cam of an automatic sampling 
device is replaced by a solenoid actuated lever controlled by 
an electronic pulsing circuit. The lever is adapted to be moved 



3,707,876 
TIME SWITCHING APPARATUS WITH CONTROLLABLE 

STEP-BY-STEP TIME DURATIONS 
Walter K. Holzer, Meersburg, Germany, assignor to Holzer 
Patent AG, Zug, Switzerland 

Filed Feb. 16, 1971, Ser. No. 115,337 
Claims priority, application SwiUerland, Feb. 16, 1970, 
2172/70 

Int.CI. G05g2 7/00 
U.S.CI. 74— 3.52 8 Claims 




A tensioned cam surface operates a conveying device and is 
mounted concentrically with respect to a cammed program 
disk which carries timing gear teeth scanned by a time lever 
with which the conveying device can be locked or unlocked. 
Time metering apparatus is operated by at least one of the tim- 
ing gear teeth on the continuously revolving cammed program 
disk and at the end operating position of the conveying device 
is reversed in direction. The time metering apparatus com- 
prises a counter wheel rotatably mounted on a counter wheel 
lever and supported in a counting position by a front surface 
of the cammed program disk The release of a cocking lever is 
simultaneous with a time when one of a number of special tim- 
ing gear teeth engages with the counter wheel. The cocking 
lever is actuated by a time metering lever in the time metering 
apparatus and a locking latch locks the cocking lever in 
response to a timing cam mounted on the cammed program 
disk The tension cam surface is shaped so that the unlocking 
of the cocking lever by the time metering lever is delayed and 
that delayed release is variable for any desired length of time 
either by a magnetically operated locking device or by a varia- 
tion of the RPM of the main drive of the cammed program 
disk. 



134 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2. 1973 



. 3,707,879 

.,, THaJnfLTL'NER fluid pressure PIJLSATION absorbers 

Electric Co., Kaw«saki-shi, Japan Filed June 22. 1970, Set. No. 48,338 

Filedjuly30. 1971, Ser. No. 167,575 Int CI FOlbyWOO 

Int. CI. F16h 35/75 „ c r^. o-> 4« " ' 6 Claims 

U.S.CI.74_10.52 7 Claims U.S. CI. 92-48 





An all-channel tuner using varactors in the tuner circuit 
comprises a selector shaft which is disposed axially movably 
and rotatablv. and which has the first gear at the rear end, the 
second and third gears which selectively mesh with the first 
gear upon axial movements of said shaft; a planetary motion 
mechanism section which couples both the gears at predeter- 
mined reduction gear ratios by the planetary motion; and a 
variable resistor which is coupled to the planetary mechanism, 
and which adjusts an applied voltage to the varactors. The 
tuner circuit is tuned by the change in the applied voltage of 
the varactors. 



In a nuid pressure pulsation absorber, a disc spring shaped 
diaphragm is disposed in a casing to receive pressurized fluid 
on one side and the pheriphery of the diaphragm is clamped 
between annular resilient members. The annular resilient 
members are made of a resilient material having smaller spring 
constant than the diaphragm so that pulsations of lower 
frequencies are absorbed by the resilent members and pulsa- 
tions of higher frequencies are absorbed by the diaphragm. 



3,707,878 
PRESSURE BALANCED TUBE ASSEMBLY 
Ernest Treichler, SanU Ana, Calif., assignor to Parker-Han- 
nifin Corporation, Cleveland, Ohio 

Filed Dec. 21, 1970, Ser. No. 99,734 

lnt.CI. F01bi//00 

U.S. CI. 92-164 15 Claims 



3,707,880 
HYDRAULIC BRAKE BOOSTER WITH PISTON RETURN 

DEVICE 
Lloyd'c. Bach, South Bend, Ind., assignor to The Bendix Cor- 
poration, South Bend, Ind. 

Filed Dec. 18, 1970, Ser. No. 99,413 

Int.CI.F15b/i/;0, /i//6 

U.S. CI. 91-391 10 Claims 




lo ,< «? S' *f ^^ ••?» ',' 




\ (» \ U \ 1?- :! \ lO \'f irr^ " 1 '* ' »* 

_ - | '-;r .- ^•-^■'■■t'' -tirWi^'ii^'ir-i-^r!.'".'"' f' .■'■^.^^-'Why^'-^ 




M 



A pressure balanced tube assembly characterized in that the 
tube thereof has end portions in telescoped sealed relation 
with spaced apart coupling members, the assembly being such 
that fluid pressure therein does not impose an axial separating 
force on the coupling members. The tube assembly is further 
characterized in that the tube end portions remain sealed in 
the coupling members despite departure of the spaced loca- 
tion of the coupling members, due to tolerance variations, 
from predetermined relation with respect to each other both 
axially and laterally. 



A brake applying mechanism having a chamber with inlet 
and outlet ports, a piston slidably arranged in the chamber and 
a valve to be controlled by an operator for admitting fluid 
under pressure from the inlet to thereby act on the piston in 
such a manner as to cause it to advance in the chamber. The 
piston is returned from the position to which it advanced 
under fluid pressure by a return mechanism normally oppos- 
ing advance of the piston. Upon failure of inlet fluid pressure 
the piston can be advanced manually by the operator unop- 
posed by the return mechanism which is now rendered inef- 
fective. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



135 



3,707,881 

CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HYDRAULIC FLUID-FEED 

MECHANISM 

Heinz Neuhaus, Am Hoing 21, and Henning Peters, Am Kamp 

24, both of Germany, assignors to Friedrich Uhde GmbH, 

Dortmund, Germany 

Filed March 8, 1971, Ser. No. 121,713 
Claims priority, application Germany, March 12, 1970, P 20 
1 1 570.2 

Int. CI. FO 1 1 25/06 



U.S. CI. 91—306 



3 Claims 



3,707,883 

POWER TRANSMISSION PULLEY AND MEANS FOR 

CHANGING THE DIAMETER OF SAME 

Rudolph J. Kamenick, Terre Haute, Ind., assignor to The B. F. 

Goodrich Company, New York, N.Y. 

Filed Oct. 2, 1971, Ser. No. 187,328 

Int. CI. F16h 55/52 

U.S. CI. 74-230.16 13 Claims 



14a. 




In a control for a hydraulic cylinder, incorporating a 
hydraulically actuated reversing valve, the reversing time at 
each end of the stroke is minimized by the use of pilot valves 
each of which is spring urged to its retracted position and is 
hydraulically urged to its extended position by hydraulic pres- 
sure applied to its piston and to the reversing valve by way of 
the other pilot valve. In operation, the retracting motion of a 
first pilot valve is initiated mechanically and completed by 
spring force as a second pilot valve releases the extending 
pressure as it is moved to extended position by hydraulic fluid 
flowing through the first pilot valve. 



3,707,882 
BELT SHIFTER WITH CURVED FINGERS FOR 
MULTIPLE SPEED DRYER 
Alvln E. Burkall, St. Joseph, Mich., assignor to W hirlpool Cor- 
poration, Benton Harbor, Mich. 

Filed June 24, 1971, Ser. No. 156,244 

Int. CI. F16h 7108; D06f 2 / 100, 23100 

U.S. CI. 74-242.3 9 Claims 





A power transmission pulley having a metal hub and 
grooved rim for receiving a belt with a plurality of adaptor 
rings of plastic material for incrementally changing the diame- 
ter of the pulley. Each ring has a circumferential rib on the 
inner periphery and a belt groove on the outer periphery. The 
adaptors are nested concentrically over the rim of the pulley. 
Each adaptor ring is axially assembled by circumferential 
stretching over the rim or previously assembled adaptor ring 
with the rib received in the belt groove. 



3,707,884 

METHOD AND DEVICE FOR POWER TRANSMISSION 

TRANSFER 

Junichi Go, 18 Nakasu-machi, Gifu, Japan 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 859,665, Sept. 22, 1969, 

abandoned. This application Nov. 20, 1970, Ser. No. 91,558 

Int. CI. F16h i//0, F16d 47/07 

U.S. CI. 74-372 17 Claims 




A belt shifter for shifting a drive belt on a drive pulley of a 
belt driving system for a clothes dryer in which the drive pul- 
ley has a tapered surface to provide a gradual increase in 
diameter which surface is provided with circular grooves 
which engage and receive circumferential grooves formed in a 
surface of the drive belt. 



A change speed device for power transmission, including, in 
one form, parallel input drive and output driven shafts, each 
having preferably a plurality of axially spaced, different 
diameter interengageable members preferably in the form of 
gears and forming part of the drive train, and for providing 
various drive speeds thereof The input or drive gears are fixed 
to rotate with the input shaft at all times when it rotates, while 
the driven gears are mounted for idle rotation on the output 
shaft, responsive to intermeshed drive by the drive gears, and 
the driven gears are only selected normally one at a time to be 
interconnected or frictionally coupled to the output shaft to 
impart output rotation to the driven output shaft from the 
input drive shaft. A novel shifter device utilizing circum- 



136 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



ferentially spaced, axially directed, laterally notched, slide 
members to control roller or ball members which are earned 
in transverse grooves on the output shaft and mterposed 
between the shaft and driven gears thereon, is embodied 
therewith to selectively align preselected notch portions of the 
laterally notched slide members with a predetermined one or 
set of the transverse grooves, to permit the rollers to move into 
said lateral notches where there the radial distance between 
the 1 D of the selected driven gear and the depth of the groove 
is lessened or less than the diameter or effective radial dimen- 
sion of the roller or ball member, to thereby form a servo-type 
camming frictional interengaging or coupling action between 
the selected change-speed gear and the output shaft, respon- 
sive to continuing relative rotation of the drive and driven 
gears When the notches and transverse grooves are non- 
aligned, a neutral condition exists for the power transmission. 
The shifter comprises separate circumferentially spaced 
notched slides which seat in or between complementally 
formed splines on the output shaft, which slides are collective- 
ly attached to and actuated by a common actuator collar and 
suitable linkage mechanism. 

3,707,885 
HOIST HANDLE 
Anthony G. Profet, Charlolte. N.C., assignor to Duff-Norton 
Company, Inc., Charlotte, N.C. 

Filed Oct. 1 2, 1 97 1 , Ser. No. 1 88, 1 09 

Int.CI.G05g//04 

U.S. CI. 74-524 15 Claims 



3,707,887 

STEERING CONTROL MEANS AND GRAB BAR 

COMBINATION 

Ralph R. Day, Aurora, III., assignor to Caterpillar Tractor Co., 

Peoria, III. 

Filedjunel4, 1971,Ser.No. 152,514 

Int.CI. B62d//04 

L.S.CI. 74— 552 8 Claims 



,'10 





A steering handle attached to a steering shaft is utilized both 
as a control means to steer the vehicle and as a grab bar with 
which the operator can brace himself when the vehicle is 
negotiating rough terrain. The steering handle is shaped and 
placed so as to provide several convenient and comfortable 
grasping areas for the operator's hands. 



3,707,888 
VARIABLE SPEED TRANSMISSION 
Henry Schottler, North Riverside, III., assignor to Roller Gear 
Ltd., Zug, Zug, Switzerland 

Filed July 3 1 , 1970, Ser. No. 60,073 

Int.CI.FI6h/5/50. yi//4 

U.S. CL 74-796 4 Claims 



...r^v,>^ 



A bending element and hoist handle, the latter preferably 
having a hollow tubular plastic lever portion. A bending ele- 
ment body fitted within one end of the lever. The diameter at a 
connecting portion designed to a given overload. An adapter 
fits to the bending element and is fitted to the hoist. The result 
IS a hoist handle in which the bending element will fail before 
the hoist is overloaded by the operator. 



3,707,886 

ARRANGEMENT AT HYDRAULIC LIFTING JACKS 

Karl Borje Yngve Flodin. Eskilstuna, Sweden, assignor to 

Domkraft A B Nike. Eskilstuna, Sweden 

Continuation of Ser. No. 9,921, Feb. 9, 1970, abandoned. This 

application Jan. 17, 1972, Ser. No. 218,562 

Int.CI.G05g//04 

U.S. CI. 74-547 5 Claims 





A manually operable hydraulic jack having a horizontally 
extending jack body including a pump which is disposed near 
one end of the jack, a manually operable pumping lever for ac- 
tuating said pump, said lever being adjustable in length, one 
end of said lever being connected to said pump by being 
mounted on an arm which is pivotable about a horizontal axis, 
said lever being adapted to permit movement between an 
operating position and an out-of-the-way position, so that in 
an out-of-the-way position, said second end of said lever ex- 
tends substantially parallel to said jack body. 



A variable speed transmission for transmitting torque to an 
output shaft at a substantially constant selected speed. Driving 
balls arranged in constant rolling frictional contact with pairs 
of inner and outer concentric and axially separable ball races. 
One pair of races is associated with an input shaft, and the 
other pair of races is associated with an output shaft. The driv- 
ing balls and races engage along contact tracks defined on the 
races and balls to thereby transmit torque between the shatts 
at a speed ratio determined by (he contact tracks. Control 
means adjusts the axial positioning of one pair of races within 
a selected range to infinitely vary the contact tracks and 
thereby vary the speed ratio. Pressure regulator irjeans 
responds to differential twist torque between the shafts to 
maintain the balls and races in frictional rolling contact 
throughout said selected range of adjustment and vary the 
contact pressure between races and balls in proportion to the 
output torque. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



137 



3,707,889 
POWER CONTROL APPARATUS 
Susumu Kitajima, Higashi-Osaka, Japan, assignor to Kurita 
Machinery Manufacturing Company Limited, Osaka, Japan 

Filed March 18, 1971. Ser. No. 125,638 
Claims priority, application Japan, March 27, 1970, 
45/26084; March 27, 1970, 45/26086; April 4, 1970, 
45/29153 

Int. CI. F16h 5/66 
U.S. CL 74— 845 10 Claims 






K) 15 ?^ 31 12 30 K 



22 19 24 17 13 20 16 




A control element comprising a suitable gear mechanism 
and adapted to perform a power transmitting function under a 
given overload or braking force is provided as a constituent 
clement of the power transmitting system between an input 
shaft and an output shaft When the output shaft is subjected 
to a load exceeding the braking force, the control element so 
functions as to permit a relative rotation between the input 
shaft and the output shaft against the braking force. This 
operation of the control element further actuates a control 
switch for drive means and automatically controls the drive 
means. Due to the automatic control thus effected, the drive 
means is brought to a halt and the direction of rotation of the 
same is switched from the normal to the reverse and vice ver- 
sa. 



valve is connected to the source of regulated pressure and to 
exhaust, and directly controls supply and exhaust fluid relative 
to the first servo. The shift valve is connected through a 
passage having a flow restricting orifice therein to the second 
servo, and is also connected to the orifice control valve, which 
latter is in communication with the second servo. The orifice 
control valve has a first position blocking direct communica- 
tion between the shift valve and the second servo and a second 
position by-passing the flow restricting orifice and establishing 
direct communication helween the shift valve and the second 
servo. The orifice control valve is subjected to the throttle 
pressure and the pressure in the first hydraulic servo, acting in 
opposition. When shifting from low speed to high speed, the 
orifice control valve has its second position so that the pres- 
sure in the second servo is slowly decreased while the pressure 
in the first servo is rapidly increased. The increased pressure 
in the first servo moves the orifice control valve to its second 
position so that pressure is rapidly exhausted from the second 
servo after the pressure in the first servo has attained a 
predetermined value. In shifting from high speed to low speed, 
oil is rapidly discharged from the first servo to rapidly 
decrease the pressure therein, with the orifice control valve in- 
itially occupying its second position so that the pressure in the 
second servo is rapidly increased. As the pressure in the first 
servo decreases, the orifice control valve is moved, by the 
throttle pressure, back to its first position to decrease the rate 
of increase of the pressure in the second servo. 



3,707,890 
HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM FOR TRANSMISSIONS 
Shin Ito, Toyota, Japan, assignor to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo 
kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota-shi, Japan 

Filed Feb. io, 1971, Ser. No. 114,142 
Claims priority , application Japan, Feb. 12, 1970, 45/1 1480 
Int.CI. B60k2y/00 
U.S. CI. 74—868 6 Claims 




101 130 



3,707,891 
HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM FOR TRANSMISSION 
OF VEHICLE 
Tadao Asano, and Noboru Murakami, both of Kariya-shi, 
Japan, assignors to Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kariya- 
shi, Aichi-ken, Japan 

Filed Feb. 16, 1971, Ser. No. 115,301 
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 16, 1970, 45/13326 
" Int. CI. B60k2//02, 29/00 
U.S. CI. 74—869 6 Claims 



■yi 'jil^^ 




100 



A hydraulic control system, for transmissions in which the 
high speed range is obtained by supplying oil under pressure 
into a first hydraulic servo while discharging the oil from a 
second hydraulic servo, and the low speed range is obtained 
by supplying oil under pressure to the second hydraulic servo 
while discharging oil from the first hydraulic servo, includes a 
source of hydraulic fiuid under pressure, a pressure regulator 
valve, a governor valve, a throttle valve, a shift valve an ori- 
fice, an orifice control valve and an accumulator. The shift 



Disclosed herein is a hydraulic control system for a trans- 
mission of a vehicle having a driving engine. The control 
system comprises a drive shaft driven by the engine, a driven 
shaft, means for providing muJti-ratio power trains between 
the drive shaft and driven shaft and having friction engaging 
device for completing the power trains when engaged, the 
device including servo-means for engagement thereof, a 
source of fiuid pressure, a line pressure conduit for connecting 
the pressure source to the servo-means, pressure regulating 
means for controlling line pressure within the conduit to and 
from a high value and a low value, manual selector means for 
selectively connecting the line pressure to the servo-means, 
now regulating means for regulating fluid pressure supplied 
into the servo-means, sensing means for controlling operation 
of the pressure regulating means in response to a fluid pres- 
sure into the servo-means through the flow regulating means 
and the line pressure, for thereby eliminating possible and 
positive shocks in shifting down the power trains through the 
transmission. 



138 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,707,892 

TRANSMISSION CONTROLLED THROTTLE FOR 

INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE 

Takashi Kuroda, and Yasuo Tatsutomi, both of Hiroshima, 

Japan, assignors to Toyo Kogyo Co., Ltd., Hiroshim*, Japan 

Filed Aug. 11. 1970, Ser. No. 63,197 
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 1 1, 1969, 44/76467 
Int.Cl. B60k2//00 
U.S. CI. 74-873 2 Claims 



the fastener adjacent the head of the fastener by a second per- 
manent magnet which surrounds both the driving tool and the 
first permanent magnet. The driving tool may be in the form of 





a bit for receiving a fastener having a recessed head or may be 
in the form of a socket for receiving a fastener having a 
polygonal shaped head. 



A fuel supply system for an internal combustion engine 
utilizing an automatic transmission including a torque con- 
verter and a gear train has a carburetor with an inlet passage 
and a throttle valve therein. A sensing member is in a first 
position when the gear train is in a neutral position and a 
second position when the gear train is in a drive position. A 
throttle valve control slightly opens or closes the throttle valve 
in response to the sensing member. The throttle valve control 
operates to slightly open the throttle valve to hold the idling 
speed of the engine to a predetermined value when the gear 
train is in the drive position, thereby preventing the engine 
speed from decreasing due to the load. ^ 



3,707,895 

DEVICE FOR SHEARING A FELLED TREE 

Charles E. McEWerry, 9206 Grand Avenue Place, Duluth, 

Minn. 

Division of Ser. No. 781,148, Dec. 4, 1968, Pat. No. 3,572,410. 

This application Dec. 28, 1970, Ser. No. 101,584 

Int.CI. B26d3/72 

L.S. CI. 83-623 2 Claims 



Xift^. 




3,707,893 

MECHANICAL SPEED RATCHET 

Bernard L. Hofman, Bonanza Trailer Court, Leommon Valley, 

Nev. 

Filed Oct. 20, 1970, Ser. No. 82,410 

Int.CI. B25b/i/00, /7/00 

L'.S. CI. 81-58.1 6Ctalms 




An elongated lever bar having a head on one end mounted 
for rotation about a first axis transverse to the centerline of the 
bar and a handle sleeve rolatably mounted on the other end of 
the bar for rotation relative thereto about the center axis of 
the bar The deactivatable driving structure is provided and 
drivingly couples the handle sleeve to the head and the head 
and corresponding bar end include coacting reversible ratchet 
structure for allowing rotation of the head in either direction 
and preventing rotation of the head in the other direction rela- 
tive to the bar. 



■J '-'Ilstl 



A support means, a tree delimber unit having articulated ar- 
cuate limb cutting blades for placement about a felled tree, a 
pair of tree cutting blades in alignment with the articulated 
blades together with gripping rollers positioned on the support 
means intermediate of and in alignment with the articulated 
limb cutting blades and the tree cutting blades for gripping 
and moving a felled tree through said limb cutting blades and 
to the tree cutting blades. ^ 

3,707,896 
MACHINE FOR WORKING METALS BY IMPULSES 
Vadim Grigorievich Kononenko; VasiUevich Yatsenko Igor 
Pavtovich Komnatny; Serafim Vasilievich Schekochikhm; 
Viktor Alexecvich Stelmakh; Stanislav Anismovich 
Mazichenko, all of Kharkov, and Valentin Semenovich Kud- 
rvavtsev. Krasnoyarsk, all of L.S.S.R.. assignors to 
Kharkovsky Aviatsionny Institut, Kharkov, L.S.S.R. 

FUedMay 19, I97I, Ser. No. 144,91 1 
Claims priority, application U.S.S.R., May 26, 1970, 

1442016 

Int. CI. B26d 5/72 
U.S. CI. 83-639 3 Claims 



3,707,894 
MAGNETIC FASTENER DRIVING TOOL 
George B. SUUwagon, Jr., Dayton, Ohio, assignor to Gardner- 
Denver Company, Dayton, Ohio 

Filed Feb. 10, 1971, Ser. No. 114,136 

Int. CI. B25b/i/06, 2i//2 

U.S.CL 81-125 8 Claims 

A magnetically attractable threaded fastener is retained in 

driving engagement with a driving tool by a first permanent 

magnet, and a magnetically attractable washer is retained on 




a ^ ' W 



A machine incorporating two tools, one of which is fastened 
on the plunger of an impulse chamber and the other fastened 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



139 



on an anvil connected through a rigid coupling with the im- 
pulse chamber forming a common power block. The impulse 
chamber encloses a guide sleeve to accommodate the movable 
plunger and a cavity to be charged with an energy carrier. The 
impulse chamber is fitted with side channels in communica- 
tion with the space in the guide sleeve beneath the plunger to 
form a common closed conduit, running along the perimeter 
of the impulse chamber and being filled with fluid. 



3,707,897 
KEYBOARD TEACHING DEVICE 
Sanford HerU, Belleville, N J., assignor to GTR Products, Inc., 
Kenilworth, N J. 

Filed May 14, 1971, Ser. No. 143,329 

Int. CI. G09by 5/05 

U.S. CI. 84—479 9 Claims 



"v 


STMr 


"C 


























, 


\ 


2 


2 


J 


. 


4 


3 




s 


« 


T 


■ 


iT*r ■*■ 


> 


♦ 


2 


2 


S 


4 
4 4 


s 


♦ 
S 


• 


• 


7 


• 


* 


• 


• 


10 




♦ 


i 




u 


5 


14 


19 


"P 


• 


I 


2 S « « » 


'1- 


• 


r • 


• 


• 


f 


,0 




12 


12 


.. 


IS 


14 


■a 


+ ♦ 

IS i« [•] 


IT 1* 


w 


« 




toioizi 


22 






















































■^ 














1 •! :.?; 






! K :»'• : •! 



: !•! :•! 



/: 



^f* , '■»-' ^i-- '•fJ i *»•' ^t' ' "-H H-* ■V ' 't-' -t- ! -r' <r^ V^ ; 



: c ; o : t 
i i ' .. 



• ! c ! 






-i...i.. 



A teaching device for keyboard instruments for permitting 
an individual employing a numbers, alphabetical or other non- 
conventional musical system to freely and, at will, play keys in 
different octaves or registries on the keyboard. The device in- 
cludes a body having a plurality of strips thereon, each strip 
containing markings consecutively disposed thereon for refer- 
ring to the keys on the keyboard. Each strip is so arranged on 
the body that any one particular number common to each 
strip, will permit the player to play the key corresponding 
thereto in any desired octave or registry. 



3,707,898 
FASTENER 
James A. Holly, Richton Park, III., assignor to Hollymatic Cor- 
poration 

Filed Sept. 8, 1 97 1 , Ser. No. 1 78,646 

Int. CL Fl 6b i 7/04 

U.S.CI. 85— 3R 16 Claims 




tion laterally of the second part preparatory to subsequent en- 
gagement with the first area, and means such as a threaded 
screw engaging a threaded opening in the first part for moving 
the projecting first part and the second part relatively toward 
each other to press the grasping portions against the first and 
second areas of the article and fix the fastener in position in 
the fastener receiving opening. 



3,707,899 

FIREARM MUZZLE DEFLECTOR 

Walter E. Perrine, 4428 W . Osbom, Phoenix, Ariz. 

Filed July 29, 1970, Ser. No. 59,046 

Int.CI. F41c2///5 

U.S.CL89— 14C 



A fastener attachable to an article having a fastener receiv- 
ing opening with spaced first and second areas such as inner 
and outer surface areas in which the fastener has a first part 
with a laterally movable grasping portion adapted to be ar- 
ranged against the first area, a second part carrying the first 
part with the grasping portion retracted for insertion of the 
fastener into the receiving opening in which the second part 
has a grasping portion adapted to be arranged against the 
second area, means for moving the first part grasping portion 
laterally relative to the second part after insertion of the 
fastener into the opening to project the first part grasping por- 



4 Claims 



^3- 




A deflector for firearms threaded to the end of a gun barrel 
and employing one or more discrete holes on the lop of the 
deflector for allowing gasses escaping outward of the gun bar- 
rel to impinge on gases baffle surface and deflected by the baf- 
fle surface rearwardly where they are further deflected up- 
wardly and forwardly out of the holes for controlling deflec- 
tion of the firearm. 



* 3,707,900 

PLASTIC MUSHROOM HEAD PACKING 
Josef Hornfeck, and Klausheinz Rauch, both of Dusseldorf, 
Germany, assignors to Rheinmetall GmbH, Dusseldorf, Ger- 
many 

Filed Oct. 24, 1969, Ser. No. 369,063 
Claims priority, application Germany, Nov. 8, 1968, P 18 07 
778.6 

lnt.CI. F41f///02 
U.S. CI. 89— 26 1 Claim 





^ii' 




' ' 






rfTi: 


u 


w 


i 


<- 


41;^ 


'////' 
//'■ 




^/' ' 




L^ 


L^ 







A plastic mushroom head packing for gun breechblocks 
movable crosswise to the core of the gun barrel, which com- 
prises a carrier which receives the mushroom head packing. 
The carrier is axially displaceable on an axle disposed parallel 
to an axis of the barrel and is secured on a branch member of 
the gun barrel and swingably mounted cross-wise to the axis of 
the barrel. 



ERRATA 

For Classes 91—391 and 91—316 see: 
Patents Nos. 3,707,880 and 3,707,881 



140 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



ERRATA 

For Classes 92—164 and 92—48 see: 
Patents Nos. 3.707,878 and 3,707,879 

' 3,707,901 
PAVEMENT AND COMPOSITION THEREFOR 
Douglas Bynum, Jr., CoUege Station, and Bob M. Gaila>*ay, 
Brvan, both of Tex., assignors to U. S. Rubber Reclaiming 
Co., Inc., Vicksburg, Mich. 

Filed Dec. 22, 1970, Ser. No. 100,661 

Int.CI. E01c7//5 

U.S. CI. 94—9 4 Claims 



3,707,903 
FLASH INDICATOR FOR PHOTOFLASH LAMPS 
Kurt H. Weber, Pepper Pike, Ohio, assignor to General Elec- 
tric Company ^ 
Filed Dec. 4. 1970, Ser. No. 95,102 

Int.CI.G03b/5/0i 



U.S. CI. 95— 11.5 R 




Pavement having an inner layer between a surface course 
and a base, and a composition therefor The inner layer may 
comprise ground tire slock or other particulate vulcanized 
rubber together with sand or other fine material aggregate, 
and, as a binder, asphalt from an oil-in-water asphalt emulsion 
which may be about 65 percent asphalt. A typical composition 
may contain equal parts by volume of mineral aggregate and 
particulate vulcanized rubber, and asphalt emulsion in an 
amount of 20 to 40 percent of the total volume. The layer, 
which may be from about one-eighth to one-half inch in 
thickness, will serve to relieve strain in the surface course and 
to arrest cracking thereof, by virtue of its reduced elastic 
modulus In addition, it will desirably fill cracks in the base, 
and protect the base 



15 Claims 



3,707,902 
PHOTOTYPESETTING EQUIPMENT 
Haydn V. Purdy, and Ronald C. Mcintosh, both c o Harris, 
Purdy, Mcintosh, 269 Abbeydale Rd., Wembley, Middlesex, 
England 

Filed Aug. 10, 1970, Ser. No. 62,532 

Int. CI. B4 lb /i/00 

U.S. CI. 95-4.5 5 Claims 




In an arrangement of photoflash lamps, one or more of the 
lamps is provided with a fiash indicator pin adhered thereto by 
means of lacquer or other material which softens due to heat 
generated when the lamp is fiashed, thus permitting the in- 
dicator pin to be movable upon the lamp flashing. The flash in- 
dicator pin extends from the lamp and coacts with an indicator 
mechanism in a camera for indicating in the viewfinder 
whether or not an unflashed lamp is available in position to be 
flashed, and/or for locking the camera mechanism to prevent 
operating the shutter if a previously flashed lamp is placed in 
operating position. 



3,707,904 
PHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS WITH BRAKING MEANS 

FOR ROLL FILM 
Dieter Engelsmann; Fritz Kessler, both of 8025 Unterhaching; 
Dieter Mass, and Kurt Zattler, both of 8 Munich 90, all of 
Germany, assignors to Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft, 
Leverkusen, Germany 

Filedjuly 26, 1971,Ser. No. 165,911 
Claims priority, application Germany, July 30, 1970, G 70 

28 784.2 

Int. CI. G03b//4«.y 7/25 
U.S. CI. 95-31 R 10 Claims 




-» HC0WlTE»f 7* >.« 
i p- |RI6ISTE»y ^ — 



lEIEEir 



6S^'i 



C^T^' 



T«Kk 
TKAIBPOWT 



H 



STAJif JsSTFF 



CODE 

HECIEVER 



4. 



switch]—*. PHIHT OUT 



Characters on a movable chara<4er vehicle are identified by 
a plurality of character readers (fllsh lamps and TV camera 
tubes) spaced around the vehicle, and character signals are 
stored in short term storage registers for each reader. A 
character imput, such as a tape or the like, is read in advance 
and compared wiin the characters m the short term storate re- 
gisters for coincidence. When coincidence occurs, a compara- 
tor cancels the stored signal in the coinciding register and 
transfers the character to an address store register capable of 
storing one or more characters, where it is retained until 
called for by the phototypesetter The apparatus speeds-up 
"read-off time by reading the imput sequence in advance of 
the output by one or more characters, and by identifying a 
chosen character and predicting its arrival time. 



-V ~* 



rS^^^^J^ 



*'f";^-"^--f' v--"-r~ 




__J 



" «9 «■ ro 9 



A still camera wherein a spring-biased pressure plate is 
mounted on a movable wall of the housing and is provided 
with apertures adjacent to the marginal portions of roll film 
which is guided in a channel in front of the pressure plate. The 
movable wall further supports a spring-biased plate-like carri- 
er which is located behind the pressure plate and is provided 
with braking members extending through the apertures of the 
pressure plate and into the channel to engage the respective 
marginal portions of roll film in the channel and to prevent un- 
controlled lengthwise movements of the film. The braking 
members have convex film-engaging surfaces and bias the 
respective marginal portions of the film against guide surfaces 
provided on the main body portion of the camera housing. 
When the channel is empty, the carrier abuts against the rear 
side of the pressure plate. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



141 



3,707,905 3,707,907 

INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATIC CLEANING DEVICE FOR DEEP FAT COOKER 

COFFEE BREWER Robert G. Wilson, 165 Faris Circle, and Raymond W. Rogers, 

Owen J Schwertfeger, Hartville, Mo., assignor to The Seeburg 414 Potomac Ave., both of Greenville, S.C. 

CorporaUon of Delaware, Chicago, III. Filed April 26, 1971, Ser No. 137,225 

Filed Oct. 21, 1971, Ser. No. 191,212 »nt. CL A47j 37/72 

Int.CI.A23f//00 U.S. CI. 99-408 



2 Claims 



U.S. CI. 99— 289 



6 Claims 




A hollow vertically aligned manifold is provided in commu- 
nication with the intake orifice of a brew chamber of an auto- 
matic coffee brewing machine. A partition divides the 
manifold into an intake chute and exhaust channel. The intake 
end of the exhaust channel is positioned immediately above 
the intake orifice of the brew chamber, and the opposite end 
of the exhaust channel is connected to an exhaust fan. Coffee 
and hot water when introduced into the intake chute flow into 
the intake orifice of the brew chamber, and steam and moist 
air emitted from the intake orifice of the brew chamber are ex- 
hausted through the exhaust channel. 




^^yriwrnn Vi I 'i ,1 u I i, i ii ii.i 1.1.; »j, ^ 
^ '^23 ^. 

" 10 '- 



M 



^IZ 




Means for filtering the liquid cooking medium and for 
cleaning the pot of a deep fat pressure cooker include means 
for pumping filtered cooking medium from the filter means 
and returning the filtered cooking medium under pressure to 
the pot with spray means within the pot directing the filtered 
cooking medium under pressure in a stream across the inner 
surface of the pot. washing cooked food particles impinging 
thereon away for further filtering. 



-3,707.908 
PRESS EQUIPPED WITH A TRANSFER DEVICE 
Lothar Merk, Eislingen/Fils; Wolfgang Michael, and Werner 
Munch, both of Goppingen, all of Germany, assignors to L. 
Schuler GmbH, Goppingen, Germany 

Filed Dec. 8. 1970. Ser. No. 96,174 

Int. CI. B30b/ 5/iO 

U.S. CI. 100-207 20 Claims 



3,707,906 

TWO-PLATE GRIDDLE 

Paul Marrie, Dijon, France, assignor to Societe a Response- 

bilite Limitee dite ETUD. Quetigny (Cote dOr), France 

Filed Oct. 15, 1970, Ser. No. 80,838 

Int.CI. A47ji7/06 

U.S. CI. 99—372 9 Claims 




H n t5 e 13 



A transfer press having a series of rams each provided with a 
transfer mechanism which are independently driven, the 
transfer mechanism being supported on means such as a table 
or base plate moveable from an operative position within the 
press frame to a withdrawn position to enable the transfer 
mechanism and the tool parts of any selected ram or rams to 
be withdrawn as when changing or replacing tools. 



A cooking griddle has a pair of heat-storing plates with in- 
terfitting faces. The two plates are brought into engagement 
and one of them is heated directly so that the other is heated 
by conduction. Once a predetermined temperature is reached 
the heat is arrested and a piece of food, preferably meat, is 
clamped between the two faces and cooked with the heat 
stored in the two plates. An indicator is provided to show 
when the plates are sufficiently hot for cooking, and a thermo- 
stat can be provided to shut down the heat, if the unit is heated 
electrically, when a predetermined temperature is reached. 



3,707,909 
PRESSURE ROLL LOADING 
Hank Volkers, Aalsmeer, Netherlands, assignor to S & S Cor- 
rugated Paper Machinery Co., Inc., Brooklyn, N.Y. 
Filed Aug. 13, 1971, Ser. No. 171,619 
Int. CI. B30b] 5/1 4, 3104 
U.S. CI. 100— 47 6CUims 

In a single facer, the roll for applying pressure to the liner 
web forcing it against the glue containing flute tips of the cor- 
rugated web is moved between operating and retracted posi- 



142 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



lions by double acting power cylinder means operated by rela- 
tively high pressure fluid. When the pressure roll reaches its 
operating position, it operates a control valve to automatically 
control application of an opposing pressure, at lower than said 




3,707,911 

DOCUMENT POSITIONING MEANS FOR USE WITH AN 

IMPRINTER^ 

James M. Patterson, Jr., Fairfax County, Va.. assignor to Far- 

rington Business Machines Corporation, Springfield, Va. 

Filed Nov. 4, 1970, Ser. No. 86,704 

Int. CI. B41fi/20, J/50 

U.S. CI. 101-269 7 Claims 




high pressure, to the double acting cylinder means so that the 
net force maintaining the pressure roll in its operating position 
is derived from the net value of the high and opposing pres- 
sures. 



3,707,910 
OPTICAL BAR CODE SERIAL PRINTER 
Oliah Combs, Morrow, Ohio, assignor to The National Cash 
Register Company, Dayton, Ohio 

Filed June 30, 1970, Ser. No. 51,071 

Int. CI. B41f ]/44, B41j 5/44, 33/00 

U.S. CI. 101— 93 C 2 Claims 



Document positioning means for use with an imprinter 
whereby a document such as a sales invoice may be fixedly 
located at two different positions on the print bed thereof. The 
first position may be removed from the second position in two 
directions— that is, along the length and width of the print 
bed. 







3.707,912 
MECHANICAL FUZE WITH SELF-DESTRUCT 
MECHANISM 
Cecil L. Duncan; John F. McNelia, both of Silver Spring, and 
William C. Pickler, Fulton, all of Md., assignors to The 
United SUtes of America as represented by the SecreUry of 
the Navy 

Filed Aug. 20, 1971, Ser. No. 173,446 

Int.CLF42c///4 

U.S. CL 102-7.4 8 Claims 



-..>?• 



A printing apparatus for recording data according to a 
predetermined code on a record medium. The apparatus in- 
cludes first and second recording stations and a feed 
mechanism for successively feeding the record medium 
thereto in equal increments so as to provide equally-spaced 
recording locations on the medium. First and second indicia 
(like stripes printed in first and second colors) are recorded 
on the record medium at the appropriate recording locations 
in conformity with the code. One surface of the medium is 
used for a third indicium, and the first and second indicia are 
recorded thereon in the form of parallel stripes. Data to be 
recorded on the medium are entered on a keyboard whose 
output is fed to logic circuitry which controls printing ap- 
paratus at the first and second recording stations, and the feed 
mechanism The code used is of the transition type, which uses 
three different indicia. Each succeeding indicium on the 
record medium is always different from the next preceding 
one. so as to eliminate the need for a separate clocking pulse 
on the medium. 




A mechanical fuze for aerial ordnance devices having an ex- 
tendable probe, and impact sensor mounted on the probe, an 
impact responsive inertia weight operable with an auxiliary fir- 
ing pin as a backup for the probe sensor, and a self-destruct as- 
sembly. The self-destruct assembly includes a percussion 
primer actuated during extension of the probe and coupled to 
a thin column of deflagrating material sheathed in a flexible 
metal and having an explosive charge at its terminal portion 
for driving a piston against the inertia weight if both the probe 
sensor and inertia weight remain unactivated when the 
column burn front reaches the explosive charge, thereby 
detonating the device through the auxiliary firing pin. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



143 



3,707,913 

PULSED-ENERGY DETONATION SYSTEM FOR 

ELECTRO EXPLOSIVE DEVICES 

Willis L. Lee, 1879 Marlowe Street, Thousand Oaks, Calif. 

FUed July 31, 1969, Ser. No. 849,256 

Int. CI. F42b 22/30 



U.S.CL102— 18 



3,707,915 
W AD ASSEMBLY FOR SHOTGUN SHELL 
Jack A. Kerzman, 18606 Elast Leadora Avenue, Glendora, 
Calif. 

Filed Oct. 19, 1970, Ser. No. 81,690 
Int. CI. F42b 7/06, 7/08 



1 Claim U.S. CI. 102—42 C 



18 Claims 



A 



POWC" SUPPLT 






> 









RCftSONANT 

CIRCUIT 
I MO 
ANTEIMA 



The invention comprises a technique and apparatus for 
destroying electro-explosive devices such as underwater mines 
by subjecting them to intense electromagnetic radiated fields. 
A unique arrangement of a capacitor which discharges into a 
resonant circuit including an antenna is used to generate the 
high energy field by pulse techniques. t 



3,707,914 
EXPLOSIVE STIMULATION WELL COMPLETIONS 
Karl M. Land, Tulsa, Okla., assignor to Cities Service Com- 
pany, Tulsa, Okla. 

Filed Dec. 1 1, 1970, Ser. No. 97,202 

Int.CLF42d//00 

U.S. CI. 102—20 8 Claims 




A wad assembly for a shotgun shell, including two separate- 
ly formed parts, one of which has a portion at one end for 
receiving the force of a powder charge, and has a split sleeve 
portion projecting toward its opposite end for receiving at 
least some of the shot. The second part is receivable within the 
shot sleeve of the first part, at a location to transmit axial 
forces to the shot charge, and includes a transverse wall for 
acting against the shot, and one or more posts which are 
bendable to changed conditions to allow for reception of dif- 
ferent amounts of shot, and to also cushion the axial forces 
produced on firing. 



3,707,916 
IGNITER ASSEMBLY 
Daniel Meraz, Jr.; Anthony J. Simhauser, both of China Lake; 
Jack A. Yeakey, Ridgecrest, and David W. Carpenter, China 
Lake, all of Calif., assignors to The United States of America 
as represented by the Secretary of the Navy 

Filed July 30, 1970, Ser. No. 64,919 

Int. CI. F42c/ 9//2 

U.S. CI. 102—49.7 6 Claims 




~x- 



Disclosed is a method and apparatus for preventing damage 
to the tubular goods and cement sheath of wells during an ex- 
plosive stimulation treatment. The invention includes the use 
of periodic intervals of a shock absorbing medium in the ce- 
ment sheath of a well bore to absorb the damaging shock ener- 
gy emanating from explosions, used to stimulate producing 
zones, by the placement of the shock absorbing medium in the 
cement sheath above and below the wellbore zone to be stimu- 
lated. 




An igniter assembly for a rocket motor is positioned within 
a hollow boss of a heat barrier composed of phenolic asbestos 
and provided with two gussets for proper orientation and 
which prevent rotation of four equally spaced igniter ports 
with the rocket motor propellant grain perforation The igniter 
assembly comprises a pair of electrical squibs located within 
sockets in the hollow boss, a booster charger assembly con- 
taining booster F>owder compressed against the electrical 
squibs, a cross-shaped igniter propellant grain having one end 
inserted in the booster charge assembly, an igniter cushion to 
absorb shock, and a closure plug to receive the other end of 
the propellant grain and to retain the igniter assembly within 
the hollow boss of the heat barrier. 



144 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,707.917 

PRECISION INITIATION COUPLER 

Louis Zerno^. Glendora. and Arthur Louis Mottet. Pacific 

Palisades, both of Calif , assignors to W hittaker Corporation 

Filed Dec. 23, 1970, Ser. No. 91,664 

Int. CI. F42b/ 9/6*5 

L.S. a. 102-70 R 10 Claims 




3,707,919 
RAILROAD HOPPER CAR WITH FLEXIBLE HATCH 

COVER 
Franklin P. Adier, Michigan City, Ind., assignor to Pullman 
Transport Leasing Company, Chicago, III. 

Filed Dec. 16, 1970, Ser. No. 98,518 
Int.CI.B61d-?9/00 

„, ,-_ 4 Claims 

L.S.CL 105— 377 



A device for funnellng a detonation wave from a detonator 
to a mam explosive charge to substantially eliminate the detri- 
mental effects of axial misalignment of the detonator and main 
explosive charge, comprising a detonation-confining body car- 
rying therein a generally 1-shaped explosive extending axially 
through It The device is placed between a detonator and main 
charge and in axial alignment with the latter A detonation 
wave from the detonator may be eccentrically received by one 
end of the I-shaped explosive, but it is funnelled down the 
column of the I, which is m axial alignment with the main 
charge so that the latter "sees" an axially-aligned detonation 
wave emanating from the other end of the I. The explosiv-e. the 
material forming the detonation-confining body and the 
dimensions of the i-shaped charge are selected to insure that 
there is substantially no interference with the detonation of 
the I-shaped explosive, to preferably maximize the detonation 
velocity through the explosive, and to ensure that detonation 
of the mam explosive is initiated from the I-shaped explosive 
and not from the confining body. 




A railway hopper car includes a roof structure having an 
elongated hatch opening through which the car is loaded A 
cover for the opening includes a pair of elongated flexible 
sheets having outer edges connected to the roof around he 
peripheral edges of the hatch opening and inner edges of the 
flexible sheets in adjacent relation are provided with slide 
fastener means permitting the cover to be opened »« expose 
the entire length of the hatch and operable to close the hatch 
opening with the cover in sealed relation. The fastener means 
includes a pair ofsl.de members which may be moved longitu- 
dinally along the cover to provide a limited access to the in- 
terior of the car in spaced locations along the length of the 
cover. 



3,707,918 

AEROSOL DISSEMINATOR 

Dann% D. Dunfee. Fairfax; Robert W. Evans. Herndon. and 

Richard C. Grimm, Triangle, all of Va., assignors to The 

Susquehanna Corporation, Fairfax County, Va. 

Filed Feb. 26, 1971, Ser. No. 1 19,280 

Int.CI. F42byJ/46 

U.S.CL 102-90 11 Claims 



3,707,920 
LATERAL RAILW AY SPRING SUSPENSION SYSTEM 
John A. Germer. Doylestov^n. Pa., assignor to The Budd Com- 
pany, Philadelphia, Pa. 

Filed Oct. 28, 1970, Ser. No. 84,682 

Int. CI. B61fi/00. 5/02. 5/iO 

U.S. a. 105-210 ^Claims 




An embodiment of the invention disclosed herein shows a 
two-compartment disseminator for generating aerosols of 
smoke, poisons, gases, and other lethal and non-lethal agents. 
One disseminator compartment houses the propellant and the 
other compartment houses the agent These two compart- 
ments are coaxially disposed, and a tubular bulkhead 
separates these two compartments Sonic nozzles are formed 
in this bulkhead The gases generated by propellant com- 
bustion are vented through these nozzles at sonic velocity into 
passageways formed in the solid agent. The agent is eroded, 
finely atomized and vaporized by the gases and expelled 
through exit orifices. The vaporized agent now condenses into 
minute particles to form with the gas an aerosol having long- 
term effectiveness. Close control of agent concentrations and 
dissemination time is also achieved. The coaxial arrangement 
enables higher loading ratios of agent to propellant as com- 
pared to a tandem arrangement. 









A lateral spring suspension system for attenuating lateral 
truck movements relative to a carbody and a track for ac- 
ceptable ride comfort. A pair of tow bars pivotally connected 
to the truck frame with spring loaded guide means 
therebetween serve to cushion lateral movements of the truck 
relative to the carbody and the track. Torques generated by 
accelerating and braking are transmitted into the carbody 
through the upper and lower tow bars. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



145 



3,707,921 
CROSS-TRACK SWITCH 
George E. Fort, New Castle, Ind., assignor to American Stan- 
dard Inc., New York, N.Y. 

Filed Dec. 18, 1970, Ser. No. 99,629 

Int. CI. EO lb 25/26 

U.S.CL 104—99 ' 2 Claims 



3,707,923 
VARIABLE SPEED CONVEYOR ^ 
Gerald L. Woodling, Akron, Ohio, assignor to The Goodyear 
Tire & Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio 

Filed Aug. 19, 1971, Ser. No. 173,090 

Int. CI. B65g / 7/24 

U.S. CI. 104—137 16 Claims 




-^ •CCei.e««TCIip— 



-wOCCCLCAMiO*lt< 



rm 



An automatic cross-track switch includes trolley-actuated 
triggers in each track leg whioh operate to rotate a turntable to 
permit a trolley to be operated on either one of two intersect- 
ing tracks The turntable mechanism includes an overcenter 
spring mechanism which assures full movement of the turnta- 
ble when an appropriate one of the fingers is contacted. If the 
turntable is already in the correct position, the triggers are 
deflected out of the way. 




A conveying system for accelerating or decelerating pas- 
senger and load carrying platforms in which the platforms en- 
gage cylindrical surfaces of a series of rollers linked together 
and pulled along inclined rails. The rollers also have substan- 
tially conical faces which engage the rails at areas of different 
diameters causing the speed of revolution of the rollers to vary 
and thereby changing the speed of the platforms. 



3,707,924 
ELECTROMAGNETIC MOTION IMPARTING MEANS 
AND TRANSPORTOR SYSTEM EMBODYING THE SAME 
Maurice Barthalon. 78 Avenue Henri Martin, Paris; Auguste 
Moiroux. Ecole Centrale Lyonnaise. Ecully, Rhone, both of 
France, and Patrick W atson. Park Farm House, Farm Lane, 
Ashtead, England 
Division of Ser. No. 697,089, Jan. 1 1, 1968, abandoned. This 
application April 28, 1970, Ser. No. 32,774 
Claims priority, application France, Jan. 25, 1967,6792411 
Int. CI. B60I 13/00, H02k41/02 
U.S. CI. 104— 148 LM 40 Claims 



3,707,922 
SELF-PROPELLED VEHICLE SYSTEM FOR USE IN 
TRANSFER OF MATERIALS 
Richard H. F. Dillon, Apt. 1001 257 Lisgar St., Ottawa, On- 
tario, Canada 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 727,906, May 9, 1968, 

abandoned. This application Dec. 4, 1970,Ser. No. 95,019 

Claims priority , application Canada, May 29, 1967, 991714 

Int. CI. B6 lb 7/06 

U.S. CI. 104— 1 14 14 Claims 





A ship-to-ship or ship-to-shore material conveying system 
comprises a load line extending between a supply station and a 
receiving station and means for keeping the load line under 
substantially constant tension. A self-propelled load carrying 
vehicle is arranged to travel along the load line and has means 
for reducing impact between the vehicle and one of the sta- 
tions which may move with respect to the other. 



An electromagnetic device producing a mechanical action, 
as in a transporter syaem comprising a suspended car, or in an 
electric motor, includes a magnetizing assembly and a mag- 
netized assembly adapted to move one with respect to the 
other. The magnetizing assembly comprises at least one mag- 
netic circuit defining an air gap and provided with at least one 
inductor winding, the magnetized assembly, subjected to the 
action of the magnetizing assembly comprising at least one 
magnetic portion associated with at least one non-magnetic 
portion and being in part housed in the air gap of said mag- 
netizing assembly. This latter comprises at least two elec- 
tromagnetic units each comprising an air gap and disposed in 
line whereas said magnetized assembly comprises a number of 
separate magnetic sections at least equal to two, the pitch of 
which is different from that of the electromagnetic units of 
said magnetizing assembly, said magnetic sections being cou- 
pled together mechanically, separated by non-magnetic sec- 
tions and constituting a series in line. The windings of said 
electromagnetic units are connected to a switch adapted to 
ensure their energization following a predetermined sequence, 
guiding means being provided so as to permit the displace- 
ment of the magnetic sections of said magnetized assembly in 
the air gaps of said electromagnetic units in a transverse 
direction relative to the lines of force in said air gap. 



146 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,707,925 

REVERSIBLE INCLINED CONVEYOR FOR MEAT 

CARRYING TROLLEYS 

Robert M. Byrnes, Sr., Box 1121 Ames Avenue SuUon, 

Omaha, Nebr. 

Filed May 4, 1971, Ser. No. 140,112 

Int. CI. B61b 13112, B6Sg33l04 

L.S.CL 104-167 11 Claims 



3,707,927 
RESILIENT TRUCK SIDE BEARINGS 
Robert P. Geyer, Palatine, and Robert W. Gierlach, Do>*ners 
Grove, both of III., assignors to SUndard Car Truck Com- 
pany, Chicago, III. 

Filed Sept. 28, 1970, Ser. No. 76,015 

int. CI. B61f 5H4; F16c / 7/04, 1 7/08 

U.S. CMOS- 199 CB 4 Claims 




« J? 



An inclined screw conveyor assembly for moving meat trol- 
leys is provided which mciudes an elongated screw shaft 
rotatably mounted within a support frame having an inchned 
trolley rail attached thereto for support of the trolley wheel of 
a meat carrying trolley, a shaft support bearmg at each end of 
the screw shaft, an adjustable intermediate sleeve bearing 
which engages the outermost surfaces of the screw shaft to 
prevent flexing or buckling thereof, and a side guide rail ex- 
tending along the length of the support frame for maintaining 
the trolley in proper alignment with the trolley rail. Each end 
of the screw shaft extends beyond the ends of the inclined trol- 
ley rail to deliver and receive the meat trolleys to and from 
relatively horizontal upper and lower sections of trolley rail. 



\ 3,707,926 
RAILW AY VEHICLE HEIGHT CONTROLLING SYSTEM 
Floyd P. Ellzey, 2301 Marshallfield Lane, Redondo Beach, 

Calif. 

Filed Jan. 5, 1970, Ser. No. 769 
Int. CL B61b5/02. 9/00; B61f / 1/00 



U.S. CI. 104— IR 




A side bearing for railroad car trucks having elements in 
constant contact and compressible at variable rates as the rail- 
road car and truck side move relatively toward each other. 



3,707,928 
VERTICAL RAILW AY SPRING SUSPENSION SYSTEM 
John A. Germer, Doylestown, Pa., assignor to The Budd Com- 
pany, Philadelphia, Pa. 

. Filed Oct. 28, 1 970, Ser. No. 84,692 
Int. CI. B6lt 3/00.5/02.5/30 
U.S.CL 105-210 • 5 Claims 



10 Claims 





"^Z^ 



A vertical spring suspension system for transmitting loads 
from a carbody to a wheel-axle truck. The suspension system 
includes opposed leaf springs secured to opposite sides of the 
carbody which extend diagonally beneath the center portion 
of the carbody to rest on journals which support the wheel- 
axle unit for rotation. Roller means are provided between the 
lower ends of the leaf springs and the journals to enable rela- 
tive movement between the ends of the springs and the truck. 



A roadbed height controlling system for the carriages of 
track supported trucks, especially for example of trains and/or 
monorails, and characterized by a precisely positioned height 
controlling element disposed protectively between and inde- 
pendently of the tracks and transversely spaced wheels of the 
truck, the height control being of the type wherein the said 
controlling element is supported independently of the roadbed 
and not subjected to deflective loading. T+iis protectively posi- 
tioned controlling element concept is applicable to column 
supported roadbeds, and suspended roadbeds as well. 



3,707,929 

PALLET 

Fred E. Lauffer, Toledo, Ohio, assignor to O^ens- Illinois, Inc. 

FUed May 28, 1971, Ser. No. 148,025 

Int. CLB65d 79/00 

U.S. a. 108-51 ^ ^^^^ 

A pallet for use in a flow rack loading system, wherein the 
pallet is mounted on guide tracks, said pallet having a platform 
comprising a crenelated reinforcing deck and a pair of sup- 
porting pads, integrally attached to the deck and positioned 
beneath the platform, offset from the corresponding platform 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



147 



edges, the pads having a sloping wall for contact with the 
guide track, and a plate positioned on the lower surfaces of the 




3,707,932 

ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR, METHOD AND 

APPARATUS 

Robert Maclay Murray, Elizabethtown, Pa., assignor to AMP 

Incorporated, Harrisburg, Pa. 
Division of Ser. No. 864,787, Oct. 8, 1969, Pat. No. 3,587,502. 
This application Aug. 28, 1970, Ser. No. 68,033 
Int.CLB21dJi/J6 
U.S.CL 113-119 



^ 



platform in each of the area between the bases and the cor- 
responding platform edge for positioning the pallet on the 
guide tracks of the loading rack. 



3,707,930 

POW ER OPERATED PEDESTAL TABLE AND SAFETY 

CLUTCH THEREFOR 

Leonard J. Yindra, and Joseph R. Klug, both of Manitowoc, 

\Nis.. assignors to American Hospital Supply Corporation, 

Evanston, 111. 

Filed July 26, 1971, Ser. No. 165,963 

Int. CI. A47b 9/00 

U.S.CL 108— 147 14 Claims 




A power-operated pedestal table having an extendable 
column for selectively varying the elevation of the table top. 
The column includes a pair of telescoping sections which are 
expanded and contracted by a power driven screw shaft. A 
one-way safety clutch automatically disengages the upper sec- 
tion from further downward movement under power when 
such downward movement is restrained by an obstruction 
such as, for example, an item of furniture or the operator him- 
self. 



3,707,931 
FURNACE FOR THE COMBUSTION OF SOLIDS 
Walter Ruegsegger, Tobelhofstrasse 348, 8044 Zurich, Swit- 
zerland 

Filed July 30, 1970, Ser. No. 59,475 
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Aug. 18, 1969, 
12526/69 

Int. CI. F23g 7/00 
U.S. CI. 1 10—8 C 19 Claims 



f 



ri^^ 



» fi 




M'i 



6 Claims 



J l-»/ tt n $* 

A shaft furnace equipped with grates, air supply ducts, flues 
wherein at least one grate forms a fireplace with an air supply 
duct and the flues. 






n 




>-*• 



An electrical connector formed by a die blanking operation 
having an improved smooth edge contact surface formed by a 
flne scraping of said edge to remove the rough fractured sur- 
face remaining after the blanking operation; also, the method 
and apparatus for forming said improved smooth contact sur- 
face. 



/ 



3,707,933 
APPARATUS FOR TERMINAL MANUFACTURE 
Quentin Berg, c/o Berg Electronics, Inc., Exit *16, York Ex- 
pressway, New Cumberland, Pa. • 
Filed Dec. 21, 1970, Ser. No. 100,252 
Int. CLB2 Id 5i/i6 
U.S.CL 113—1 R . 4 Claims 




An end mill is used to form a reduced thickness step in an 
indefinite length of strip material. If, due to tolerances and 
other factors the reduced thickness material is slightly too 
thick, it is swaged to a reduced thickness following which ter- 
minals are formed of both the thinned and original thickness 
material. 



to Interstate 



3,707,934 
FLOATING STABLE TERMINAL 
Ernst G. Frankel, Cambridge. Mass.. assignor 
Oil Transport Co., Philadelphia, Pa. 

Filed Jan. 14, 1971, Ser. No. 106,446 
Int. CLB63bi5/00, 27/00 
U.S. CI. 1 14-0.5 R - 25 Claims 

A horizontal bank of structurally tied, horizontally extend- 
ing, usually submerged storage cylinders. An above water, 
horizontal wing structure fitted for berthing ships alongside. A 



148 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



plural.ty of rows of vertical struts joining the cyl.nder bank substant.ally horizontal pos.tion i*'^.;'"'' "^f^^ ""^^"^^^^^^^^^ 
and w.ng structure, and providing therebetween slips for water thereby mcreasmg the speed of the boat. A pair of water 





■^3—^ 



—5 



deflectors are disposed on the hull forward of the pivotal 
planes to prevent bow waves generated during movement of 
the hull from passing over the planes 



3.707,937 
docking barges Means for cargo storage and transfer. Provi- ANTI-POLLUTION BALLAST CONTAINER 

sion for ballasting of the struts and storage cylinders. Support ^^^^y y^^^^^ Rou,^ 2. Box 82, Brunswick, Ga. 
facilities for the berthed ships. Filed April 23, 1971, Set. No. 136,916 

Int. CI. B63b 25/08 
U.S.CLJ14-74R 10 Claims 



3,707,935 

SURFING SAILBOAT 

John B. Rachie. Route No. 3. Box 126, Forest Lake, Minn. 

Filed Sept. 16, 1970, Ser. No. 72,762 

int. CI. B63h 9/06 

U.S. CI. 1 14-39 14 Claims 





An anti-pollution ballast container to be installed in an oil 
tanker as a receptacle for clean ballast water, to be located in 
a compartment of the tanker which is adapted to be filled with 
oil. The container is formed of elastic material such as rubber 
and is constructed for collapsing within the compartment as 
the latter is filled with oil, with support rings between the folds 
of the compartment wall slidable within the compartment as 
the container expands or contracts. The container is adapted 
to be filled with clean ballast which may be taken from the sea 
and pumped into the container for ballast when the compart- 
ment is empty of oil. A similar container may be provided in 
several or all of the compartments of the tanker. 



The disclosure is directed to a sailboat which is constructed 
for riding in surfboard fashion. The boat includes a sail which 
is symmetrically mounted for rotation about a vertical mast. 
The mast is disposed toward the rear of the boat in order that 
wind striking the sail may serve to both steer and power the 
boat, and to give the rider unobstructed forward vision. 
Direction of boat movement is determined by angular devia- 
tion or side tipping of the boat hull from its normal floating 
position. Tipping is affected by weight shifting on the part of 
the rider, and is sensed by apparatus which governs attitude of 
the sail with respect to the wind. 



3,707,938 
SELF-PROPELLED WATER VEHICLE 
John R. Olson, P.O. Box 689, Price, UUh 

Filed Aug. 3, 1970, Ser. No. 60,361 
Int. CI. B60f 3100 
U.S. CI. 115— IR 



8 Claims 



3,707,936 
BOAT HULL CONSTRUCTION 
Henry B. Harris, Box 303, San Bruno, Calif. 

Filed Sept. 17, 1970, Ser. No. 73,002 

Int. CI. B63b; /22 

U.S. CL 1 14-66.5 P 9 Claims 

A boat hull of the double end displacement type having a 

pair of pivotal planes mounted on the lower portion of the 

after end of the hull such thai when the planes are pivoted to a 




A self-propelled water vehicle has a structural assembly 
which includes an elongate, water-tight hull adapted to pro- 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



149 



vide seating for one or more persons along the top thereof and 
means, such as propellor or jet unit, for propelling the vehicle 
along the surface of a body of water. A control housing 
disposed at the forward end of the hull contains drive means 
operationally connected to the propelling means, and also en- 
closes a steering control mechanism connected to a pair of 
pontoons disposed at opposite lateral sides, respectively, of 
the forward end of the hull. The pontoons are pivotally con- 
nected to the vehicle by support means. The vehicle is 
preferably constructed for conversion to a snowmobile by 
replacement of the pontoons and the water-tight hull, respec- 
tively, with pairs of skiis and an elongate snowmobile hull hav- 
ing endless track propelling means attached to the bottom 
thereof for propelling the vehicle over snow. In fact, existing 
snowmobiles may also be readily converted to the vehicle of 
the invention by use of the disclosed structural assembly. 



pivotally mounted shaft-like member with a seat at its upper 
end is operable when in its at rest position to support the 
trigger mechanism to counteract the influence of gravity. A 
float is connected to tilt the support away from its at rest posi- 
tion as a function of pool disturbance so that the trigger 
mechanism slips from the support seat and actuates the alarm 
to indicate pool disturbance. 



3,707,939 

STEERING ASSEMBLY 

John A. Berg, Miami, Fla., assignor to Schottel of America, Inc. 

Filed Nov. 16, 1970, Ser. No. 89,551 

Int. CL B63h 25/42 

U.S. CL 115— 35 19 Claims 




A combined power propulsion and steering mechanism as- 
sembly for use especially in ocean-going vessels wherein the 
assembly comprises a flexible drive transmission for connect- 
ing the power unit to the propeller drive shaft, the drive trans- 
mission and its associated gearing being housed within a 
power-operated, rotating steering cylinder capable of laterally 
rotating the propeller about a vertical axis a complete 360°. 



3,707,941 

CHANNEL INDICATING MEANS FOR TELEVISION 

RECEIVERS 

Hidenori Kunishige, Moriguchi, and Kosaku Uchida, 

Neyagaua, both of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric 

Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan 

Filed Oct. 15, 1971, Ser. No. 189,529 
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 20, 1970, 
45/104865 

Int.CLH03j//0'/ 
U.S.CLII6— 124.4 6 Claims 



3,707,940 
SAFETY ALARM ASSEMBLY FOR SWIMMING POOLS . 
AND THE LIKE 
George T. Sherrick, 7542 Bloomington Avenue, Burbank, and 
William E. Seelinger, 5826 Murietta Avenue, Van Nuys, 
both of Calif. 

Filed June 23, 1971, Ser. No. 155,858 
Int.CLG08bi/02 



U.S.CL 116-67 



10 Claims 














^^^ 










/?'-^\ 


26 


fvj 


^jAM 










s 




\ . 1 








14 







A channel indicating means for television receivers, which 
comprises a movable, for instance rotatable, channel indicat- 
ing body interlocked to the channel selector and carrying 
channel indicating members such as cards bearing numeral 
prints removably attached to it. It is possible to change the 
channel indication very easily. 



3,707,942 

LINE MARKING APPARATUS 

Mario Leri, 77 Seventh Avenue, New York, N.Y. 

Filed May 28, 1970, Ser. No. 41,451 

Int.CLB05c//05, y//6 

U.S.CLI18— I 



1 1 Claims 



se 80 



9«9e 

■ 5fl 




An alarm has a trigger mechanism actuatable by the in- 
fluence of gravity. A tillable support which is preferably a 



An apparatus for line marking a sheet. Means are provided 
for marking lines on a sheet which includes a rotaiably 
mounted line inscribing means having a line printer and an 
inker. Additional means are provided for driving the sheet to 
be marked past the line marking means. The line printer is 
provided with one marking surface per line and is roiatably 
mounted in cooperative relation with the inker and the driving 
means so as to be inked by the former and substantially driven 
by the latter. The sheet is ink-marked with lines by the printer 
as it is driven past the printer. The location of a marked line on 
the sheet as well as the spacing between marked lines if more 
than one is inscribed, can be varied by changing the lateral 
position of the printer marker surfaces with respect to the 
sheet to be marked and/or each other. The marking means is 
provided with a variable means for adjusting the contact pres- 
sure between the line printer, the sheet to be marked, and the 
driving means. 



150 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



151 



3,707,943 
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC DEVICE 
Seiji Matsumoto, and Yasuo Tamai, both of SaiUma, Japan, 
assignors to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., Ashigara-Kamigun, 

Kanagawa, Japan 

Filed Jan. 8, 1971, Ser. No. 104,978 

Claims priority, applicaUon Japan, Jan. 9, 1970, 45/2820 

Int.CI.B05c;y/00 

U.S.CL 118-7 10 Claims 



3,707,945 

MEANS TO SELECTIVELY WET WEB MATERIAL 

Philip Boone, 15 Fenwick Road, Winchester, Mass. 

Continuation of Ser. No. 678,600, Oct. 27, 1967, abandoned. 

This application June 18, 1970, Ser. No. 48,916 

Int.CI. B05C//06 

L.S. CI. 118-234 17 Claims 




T^8 



An electrophotographic device which connprises a detector 
which detects the entry of a sheet-shaped material provided in 
the path of the sheet-shaped insulating material to a develop- 
ment station including a developing electrode divided into 
smaller portions in the direction perpendicular to the 
direction in which the sheet is advanced, closing and opening 
circuits for application of electric potential to the portions of 
the developing electrode, and a delay circuit which receives 
the signal from the detector and makes the circuits close so as 
to apply electric potential only to the portions of the electrode 
confronting the sheet-shaped insulating material. 



3,707,944 
AUTOMATIC PHOTORESIST APPLY AND DRY 
APPARATUS 
Forrest Robert Grundon, Wappingers Falls; Frank Harrison 
Masterson; Robert John Wagler, both of Poughkeepsie. and 
Fred Ernest W ustrau. Accord, all of N.Y., assignors to Inter- 
national Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y. 
Filed Oct. 23, 1970, Ser. No. 83,401 
Int.CI.C23cyi/70 
U.S. CI. 118-50 6 Claims 





840 



Means to selectively wet a web include a continuous sup- 
port carrying a plurality of frangible pods which each contain 
wetting agent, means to incrementally feed such pod whereby 
to locate such pod at a transverse edge of a web section to be 
wetted, means to fracture the pod at such location and means 
to effect relative motion of the web across the fractured pod 
and in the longitudinal direction of the web. 



3,707,946 
ADHESIVE APPLYING DEVICE 
Anton Muhlbach, Frankfurt/Main-Sossenheim, Germany, as- 
signor to USM Corporation, Flemington, N J. 

Filed AprU 28. 1971, Ser. No. 138,158 
Claims priority, application Germany, May 6, 1970, P 20 22 

274.6 

Int.CI. B05c/y//0 
U.S.C1. 118— 410 4 Claims 




Apparatus for applying a thermoplastic adhesive to a shoe 
insole prior to lasting over the upper margin improved by an 
articulating applicator having nozzle plates for extruding the 
adhesive on the insole, a reservoir of a one-shot capacity, a 
compressed air ejection means, wherein the applicator articu- 
lates between an application position with the nozzle plate in 
contact with the insole and a retracted position where the one- 
shot reservoir is refilled for the subsequent application. 



Apparatus for automatically positioning articles, as silicon 
semiconductor wafers, on rotary spin assembly mechanisms 
and indexing transporting means and a means for holding said 
wafer thereon combined with a means for dispensing a 
predetermined amount of photoresist solution on said wafers 
and spinning a uniform film of solution on the wafers and spin 
air drying through a sequence of rotating indexing steps fol- 
lowed by automatic transfer to and through drying means and 
a means for unloading therefrom and transporting the wafers 
to a receiver holder for further processing and transportation. 



3,707,947 
CROSS-CHANNEL MIXER 

Louis W . Reichart, Jr., Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Xerox Cor- 
poration, Stamford, Conn. 

FUed Dec. 29, 1970, Ser. No. 102,474 

Int.CLG03g7J/00 

U.S. CI. 118-637 5 Claims 

A developer circulating system, part of an electrostatic 

printing device, includes apparatus for mixing, agitating and 

distributing developer cyclically by diverting the normal 






gravitational flow of the developer in its circulating cycle. The 
mixing, agitating and distributing device includes at least two 
banks of channels, with the channels common to one bank 
slanted in one direction and the channels common to the other 
bank slanted in the opposite direction. The channels of one 




3,707,949 
ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING BRACKET FOR FOW L CAGE 

MOUNTED W ATERING CUPS 
Dominic M. Lippi, c/o A. R. Wood Manufacturing Co., Box 
218, Luverne, Minn. 

Filed July 30, 1970, Ser. No. 59,469 

Int. CI. AOtk 39/02 

U.S.CLn9— 18 8 Claims 



bank are so slanted or offset so as to efficiently walk the circu- 
lating developer, in cyclic steps, along the bank, channel by 
channel to the last channel in the bank and the last channel 
causes the circulating developer to switch banks thereby cycli- 
cally walking the developer back and forth along the banks ef- 
fectively mixing, agitating and distributing the developer. 



3,707,948 

OYSTER SPAW NING FACILITY 

Jay P. Dunathan, Tequesta, Fla., assignor to Oceanography 

Mariculture Industries, Inc., Riviera Beach, Fla. 

Filed Dec. 1, 1970, Ser. No. 93,963 

Int.CI. AOlk 67/00 



U.S. CI. 1 19—4 



12 Claims 





A water supply tube is fixedly mounted to a cage. A flexible 
delivery tube is connected at one end thereof to the supply 
tube and is connected at the other end thereof to a watering 
cup that is adjustable as to its vertical height with respect to 
the cage floor. 



3,707,950 

ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM FOR INTERNAL 

COMBUSTION ENGINES 

Ewald Schlimme. Hildesheim, Germany, assignor to Robert 

Bosch GMBH, Stuttgart, Germany 

Filed Oct. 16, 1969, Ser. No. 867,025 
Claims priority, application Germany, Oct. 25, 1968. P 18 
05 050.5 

Int. CI. F02b 3/00; F02m 39/00 
U.S. CL 123-32 EA 50 Claims 



3i 



A single closed system facility is provided for both precon- 
ditioning and inducing oysters to spawn. The facility com- 
prises an insulated cabinet having vertically arranged, slidably 
disposed trays or drawers which are supplied with water from 
a plurality of pipes, each conducting water of a different tem- 
perature, so that the temperature of the water in each tray 
may be selectively controlled by valving the proportion of the 
water being received therein from the respective pipes. Drain 
pipes from the trays feed into a vertical pipe disposed outside 
the cabinet which feeds into a filtering and collecting basin, 
from which the filtered water is pumped and returned to its 
source. Operatively, the upper trays may be used for condi- 
tioning oysters placed therein by providing water thereto and 
feeding the same with artificially grown food according to a 
prescribed program for a predetermined period of time. After 
this time, the oysters may be placed in the lower trays, wherein 
the water is maintained at a predetermined temperature most 
desirable for inducing the oysters to spawn. After spawning 
and fertilization of the eggs, removal from the spawning trays 
may be accomplished by siphoning the same into a nearby 
aquarium tank. 



i3 i 
3d 35 « -j;"-:s-+:h- f^^ 




An injector injects fuel in each operating cycle, the quantity 
varying in dependence upon fuel control signal A desired 
speed signal is furnished by circuitry associated with the gas 
pedal. An actual speed signal is also furnished High gain 
direct amplifier means having an input circuit and a feedback 
circuit are adapted to furnish the fuel control signal as a func- 
tion of both the desired speed signal and the actual speed 
signal. Various configurations of input circuits and feedback 
circuits, as well as amplifier output circuits, are illustrated for 
shaping the characteristic fuel-speed lines which determine 
motor operation. 



152 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,707,951 
STORAGE CONTROL FOR GASOLINE INJECTION 
INSTALLATIONS OF COMBUSTION ENGINES 
Erhard Bigalke, Wolfsburg; Dieter H. W. Pundt, 
Braunschweig, and Jurgen W olf. Wolfsburg. all of Germany, 
assignors lo Volkswagenwerk Aktiengesellschaft 
Filed Sept. 30, 1970. Ser. No. 76,901 
Claims priority, application Germany, Oct. 2. 1969, P 19 49 

725.7 

Int. CI. F02b 3110; F02d 5/00 
U.S.CL 123-32 EA 4 Claims 




and an enclosed cable control means adaptable to be secured 
at one end for pivotal actuation at a hand control location of a 
vehicle after its opposite end has been quickly and removably 
secured to the compression release mechanism by the con- 
venient placement of its large abutment cable end in a lower 
restraining space, chamber, or recess in the compression 
release housing and immediately passing the cable, per se, 
respectively through aligned slots in this housing of the com- 
pression release mechanism, through the valve ball retainer 
and beyond through the combined valve stem retainer and 
valve spring retainer where the flexible control cable cover is 
secured, so upon control lever pivotal action, as the cable 
cover is caused to increase its curvature, the braking release 
valve is opened against the force of its return biasing spring 
and braking occurs. 



A storage control for gasoline injection installations of in- 
ternal combustion engines to control the opening times of m- 
jection valves in dependence on operating conditions of the 
engine. 



3,707,953 
IGNITION TIMING CONTROLLER FOR AN ENGINE 
Warren A. Rhoades, Jr., Danville, and Alfred R. Fleischer, 
Concord, both of Calif., assignors to De Laval Turbine 
California, Inc. 

Filed Feb. 5, 1971, Ser. No. 1 12,981 

Int.CI. F02p5//0 

U.S.CL 123-117 R 4 Claims 



3,707,952 

COMPRESSION RELEASE MECHANISM FOR TWO 

STROKE ENGINES USED TO BRAKE A VEHICLE 

Andrew W . Knebel, 15444 S.E. 144th St., Renton, Wash. 

Filed Aug. 20, 1970, Ser. No. 65,515 

Int. CI. FOll 13108; F02n / 7/08 

U.S. CI. 123-97 B 3 Claims 





A compression release mechanism is adapted for incorpora- 
tion into the cylinder head combustion chamber structure of a 
two stroke, or two cycle, internal combustion engine to 
produce, when desired, a braking action to slow down a vehi-^ 
cle, such as a motorcycle. The compression release 
mechanism includes: a housing adapted to be threaded into 
the combustion chamber structure at a braking exhaust port 
provided lo receive this mechanism; a braking valve posi- 
tioned through the compression release housing and spring 
biased using a spring and its retainer to keep the braking valve 
in its normally closed position; an exhaust passageway net- 
work within the housing commencing at the braking exhaust 
port and terminating in multiple passageways, each with ori- 
fices able lo discharge fluids into the atmosphere as the fluids 
come from the combustion chamber, valve balls used with 
each orifice to move clear of their seats and against their 
retaining structure as engine fiuids flow out into the at- 
mosphere, and to move in the opposite direction, under at- 
mospheric and differential pressures, against their seats as out- 
side air, generally laden with dust and dirt, attempts to enter 
the combustion chamber during such engine braking periods. 



An internal combustion engine with variable spark ignition 
timing is provided with an air intake passage, an oil pressure 
system and a speed responsive device. To vary the ignition 
spark timing there is provided a housing enclosing primary 
and secondary levers connected to each other at one end by a 
link pivoted at opposite ends thereto. The primary lever has a 
fulcrum moved by the expansion of a chamber connected to 
the air intake passage and is in turn connected to a servo 
mechanism actuated by oil pressure and in turn varying the 
spark ignition timing. The secondary lever has a fixed fulcrum 
and at the other end from the link is connected to an expansi- 
ble chamber responsive to the speed responsive device. In an 
alternate version the fixed fulcrum of the secondary lever is 
replaced by an expansible chamber connected to an engine 
temperature responsive device. In another version, the servo 
mechanism is overridden by a plunger responsive to the en- 
gine starting cycle. In a fuel injection engine, the servo 
mechanism output is connected to the fuel injection timer. 



3,707,954 
EXHAUST GAS PURIFYING DEVICE 
Masahiko Nakada, and Hirofumi Matsumoto, both of Toyota, 
Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo KabushikI Kaisha, 
Aichi-ken, Japan 

Filed June 17, 1971, Ser. No. 153,993 
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 24, 1971, 46/9189 
Int. CI. F02p 5 HO; F02m 7/00 
U.S.CL123-1I7A. 3 Claims 

An exhaust gas purifying device for internal combustion en- 
gines comprising a thermo-valve mounted in an air passage 
through which secondary air is supplied to the intake manifold 
and adapted to operate by responding to the degree to which 
the engine is warmed up. a flow rate regulating valve also 
mounted in said air passage through which secondary air is 
supplied to the intake manifold and adapted to regulate the 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



153 



flow Tate of secondary air supplied to the intake manifold in 
accordance with the operating condition of the engine, a first 
orifice and a second orifice provided in a branch passage 
branching from an air passage between said two valves, a first 
connecting line mounted between the portion of the branch 
passage which is disposed posterior to the first orifice and a 
diaphragm chamber of a vacuum advancer provided in the ig- 



3,707,956 

APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FORMING RELIEF 

PORTIONS IN THE PERIPHERY OF A GRINDING WHEEL 

Henry F. Swenson, 28 Holmehill Lane, Roseland, N J. 

Filed Feb. 19, 1971, Ser. No. 1 16,806 

Int. CI. B24b 53/08 

U.S. CL 125—11 TP 10 Claims 




nition distributor for maintaining communication 
therebetween, and a second connecting line mounted between 
the portion of the branch passage which is disposed posterior 
to the second orifice and a vacuum port of the carburetor for 
maintaining communication therebetween. The secondary air 
flow rate can be regulated and the degree of vacuum advance 
can be reduced in accordance with the operating condition of 
the engine. 



3,707,955 
ENGINE APPARATUS 
Otmar M. Ulbing, Lisle, N.Y., assignor to Borg-Warner Cor- 
poration, Chicago, HI. 
ConUnuation of Ser. No. 786,233, Dec. 23, 1968. This 
application June 1 , 1 97 1 , Ser. No. 148,867 
Int. CI. F02h iJ/C4 
U.S. CI. 123-73 AD 16 Claims 





This invention pertains to the dressing of face-formed grind- 
ing wheels and in particular diamond-faced grinding wheels 
wherein certain face portions may be at an acute angle to a 
plane normal to the axis of the grinding wheel. To drastically 
reduce the probability of burning the workpiece while contour 
grinding a selected portion of this workpiece, apparatus is pro- 
vided to alter the periphery of the grinding wheel so that 
determined portions of said periphery of the grinding wheel 
are relieved. The grinding wheel face so contoured presents a 
series of face-forming segments by which the workpiece is 
ground. The dressing apparatus is selectively movable to and 
from a dressing condition of the periphery of the grinding 
wheel. 



3,707,957 
VAS VALVE 
Louis Buci'lo. Holbrook, N.V., assignor to Investors In Ven- 
tures, Inc., New York, N.Y. 

Filed Jan. 4, 1971, Ser. No. 103,606 
Int. CI. A61b/ 9/00 

U.S.CL128— IR 



1 1 Claims 




Improved system for supplying fuel and oil to two-cycle in- 
ternal combustion engines including a simple and reliable fuel- 
oil injector pump which mixes the fluids in a desired ratio from 
separate tanks. Means for automatically shutting off fuel flow 
upon loss of oil are provided. Crankcase scavenging pressure 
assists oil pumping. The injector pump continuously circulates 
fuel through the fuel tank to avoid vapor lock. Several ar- 
rangements for properly correlating the injector pumping rate 
with engine air flow are disclosed. An improved injection noz- 
zle utilizing an elastomeric band is disclosed. A system for sup- 
plying dual cylinders from the same injector pump is dis- 
closed. 



A vas valve adapted to be situated in a human vas deferens 
for closing and opening the latter. The valve includes an inner 
component having at one end a bored valve body and having a 
stem fixed to and extending from the valve body An outer 
component houses the valve body of the inner component and 
part of the stem adjacent thereto, this outer component con- 
sisting of integrated molecular layers one of which forms an 
inner surface of the outer component and fluid-tightly engages 
and is complementary to an outer surface area of the inner 
component. The outer component has open-ended tubular ex- 
tensions extending in opposite directions from the valve body 
and communicating with the bore thereof when the inner 



154 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



component is turned with respect to the outer component to 
an open position. These tubular extensions are adapted to be 
situated along the tubular interior of a human vas while the 
stem extends laterally through and beyond the vas wall and 
terminates in an outer operating end portion enabling the 
inner component to be turned between closed and opened 
positions The size of the valve is small enough for location 
within a vas without substantially distending the vas while at 
the same lime the hollow interiors of the tubular extensions 
and bore of the valve body have a diameter large enough to 
provide for substantially unrestricted flow through the vas 
when the valve is in its open position. 



ing detecting electrocardiac signals comprising cycles of suc- 
cessive functional periods including an RS waveform, compar- 
ing said waveform with standard reference voltages to detect 
R waves by detecting positive peaks in said waveform above a 
preset level and to detect S waves by detecting negative peaks 
below a preset level producing from the detected R and S 
waves a signal proportional to the R-S interval and indicating 
the RS interval. 



3,707,958 * 

METHOD OF GROW ING A GRAFT MEMBER IN A 

LIVING BODY 

Charles H. Sparks, 3725 S. E. Martins St.. Portland, Oreg. 

Division of Ser. No. 823,287, May 9, 1969. Pat. No. 3,625,198, 

which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 655,838, July 25, 

1967, Pal. No. 3,514,791. This appUcation Aug. 30, 1971. Ser. 

No. 175,915 

int. CI. A61b 19100- A61f U24 

L.S. CI. 128-1 R 6 Claims 



PECTORALS 

MAJOR 

MUSCLE 




3,707,960 

BALLOON CARDIAC ASSISTING PUMP HAVING 

INTRAAORTIC ELECTROCARDIOGRAPHIC 

ELECTRODES 

Paul S. Freed, Brooklyn, N.Y., assignor to The United SUtes of 

America as represented by the Secretary of the Department 

of Health 

Filed Sept. 3, 1970, Ser. No. 69,191 

Int. CLA6 lb 5/04 

U.S. CI. 128—2.06 E 4 Claims 



A cluster of tubular tissue dies in a die holder is inserted 
lengthwise in a slab wound Each die lube is perforated and 
contains a cloth tube spaced outward from a central mandrel 
in the tube Ingrowth of tissue encapsulates the cloth lube and 
fills the space between the cloth lube and mandrel forming a 
graft lube containing the cloth lube as a reinforcing member 
adjacent its outer surface and remote from the lumen formed 
by the mandrel The die cluster containing the graft lubes is 
removed lengthwise from a second stab wound adjacent one 
end of the cluster. 



3,707,959 
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING 
ELECTROCARDIAC SIGNALS 
Colin C. W ilton-Davies, Alverstoke. England, assignor to Na- 
tional Research Development Corporation. London, England 
Filed July 13, 1970. Ser. No. 54,550 
Int. CI. A61biV04 
U.S. CI. 128-2.06 A 14Claims 




- ) IITMUIW 1 - 



^ 



H cmnmiiiT" 

l/HF 

I 

- 1 MMMMIOIB 



The method and apparatus for monitoring electrocardiac 
signals to detect the onset of decompression sickness compris- 




An intra-arterial cardiac assisting pump is provided with in- 
traaortic electrocardiographic electrodes to improve the 
signal-to-noise ratio of the electrocardiogram and the reliabili- 
ty of trigger signal for phase-shift pumping. 



3,707,961 
FOOT MASSAGING APPARATUS 
Gerard Duplessis, 10, 806 St. Denis Street, Montreal, Quebec, 
Canada 

Filed April 29, 1971, Ser. No. 138,631 
Claims priority, application Canada, June 22, 1970, 

086,202 

Int.CLA61h//00 
U.S.CL 128-33 8 Claims 



20 21 ,"^^ 




A foot massaging apparatus adapted to receive and massage 
both feel simultaneously while the user is comfortably seated 
with his legs extending in a natural inclined position and with 
his feet spread apart in a natural manner. The apparatus com- 
prises a platform made of rigid material and adapted to rest on 
the floor, said platform having a top surface and arranged in a 
plane substantially parallel to the floor and defining a pair of 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



155 



elongated recesses which are deeper at one end than at their 
other end and have a bottom surface inclined with respect to 
the floor, each recess adapted to receive the underside of the 
user's foot, and a vibrator unit comprising an electric motor 
secured to the platform and having a rotor with an excentric 
mass to set up low amplitude and high frequency vibrations in 
the platform. 



3,707,962 
BELT MASSAGE MACHINE 
Dale C. Cosper, South Bend, Ind., assignor to Research Cor- 
poration, New York, N.Y. 

Filed Sept. 28, 1970, Ser. No. 75,872 

Int. CI. A61h7/00 

U.S. CI. 128—63 7 Claims 



forearm and the support permits relative motions between the 
two along a path approximating the radial and ulnar paths of 
the patient's hand. A second joint permits relative motions of 
the hand support in up and down directions in combination 
with or instead of motions in the radial and ulnar directions. 
Thumb and finger guides for the patient are movably mounted 
to the hand support, engage the thumb and fingers of the pa- 
tient and permit movement of the thumb and fingers towards 
and away from each other for the grasping and releasing of ob- 
jects. Means responsive to up and down motions of the hand 
support move the finger guides. 



11 >ii- * 




A belt massage machine having a base and an integral 
upright monocoque constructed support. A bell drive is jour- 
naled in the support at the upper end portion thereof. A drive 
motor is mounted in the support and is positioned below the 
belt drive. Power transmitting means interconnect the motor 
and belt drive 



3,707,964 

SURGICAL DRAPE WITH HAND RECEIVING CUFF 

HAVING INTERNAL STOP GUIDES 

Donald Patience, and Robert F. Collins, both of Harrington. 

III., assignors to The Kendall Company. Boston. Mass. 

Continuation of Ser. No. 804,596, March 5, 1969, abandoned. 

This application June 20. 1970, Ser. No. 56,679 

Int.CLA61f /i/00 

U.S. CL 1 28— 1 32 D 9 Claims 








3,707,963 
ARTICULATED HAND BRACE 
Michael Keropian, 3870 California Street, San Francisco, 
Calif. 

Filed Jan. 2 1 , 1 970, Ser. No. 4,646 

Int.CL A6If5/yO 

U.S.CL 128—77 9 Claims 




/» v.?» 



A hand brace secured to a patient's forearm including a sup- 
port maintaining the patient's hand in an extended position. A 
connection between the portion of the brace fastened to the 



A surgical legging drape having a generally trapezoidal con- 
figuration, and provided with an enlarged cuff surrounding the 
open end thereof, to function as a receiving pocket for the 
nurse's hands. The drape is folded in a unique manner such 
that a portion of the cuff covers a substantial area of the top 
panel. Seal lines provided at specified internal points along the 
cuff function as internal stop guides for the nurse's hands to 
permit the drape to bow and droop forward when unfolded 
and opened. 



3,707,965 
CARBON DIOXIDE ABSORBER APPARATUS 
Casimer M. Guzay, 7705 Peterson Avenue. Chicago. III. 
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 843.947, July 23, 1969. This 
application Oct. 22. 1970. Ser. No. 82,975 
Int.CI.A62b7//0 
U.S.CI. 128— 19IR 12Claims 

A carbon dioxide absorber apparatus for use in the adminis- 
tration of anesthesia, said apparatus being demountable in its 
entirety to a plurality of components all sterilizable in 
demounted condition by use of conventional autoclave equip- 



156 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



ment, said absorber apparatus having solely inte 
passageways to define a unidirec 



us navmg .o.c.y .....rnal method making use of permanent percutaneous tubes extend- 
tiona" pa"h for the passage of ing into the abdominal cavity and means for circulating a d.- 




REGENERATION ,, 




alysate through the abdominal cavity and reconstituting the 
dialysate. 



3,707,968 
ARMING CAP FOR BREECH LOADED SYRINGE 
Elmer A. Koenig. Kirkwood, Mo., assignor to Sherwood Medi- 
cal Industries Inc. 

Filed Oct. 7, 1970, Ser. No. 78,767 

gases therethrough, with all portions of the path being Int.CI. A61m 5/00 

demountable and accessible for said sterilization. U.S. CI. 128-218 FA 



6 Claims 



3,707.966 

PERSONAL BREATHING MASKS 

Joseph A. Nebel. 15630 Dobson Ave., Dolton, III. 

Filed Feb. 25, 1971, Ser. No. 118,912 

Int.CI. A61m 15100 

U.S.CL 128-212 



3 Claims 





An arming cap for loading a resilient piston within a cylin- 
drical part of a hypodermic syringe including a generally cylin- 
drical member open at one end and having a diameter suffi- 
cient to loosely receive both the resilient piston and the cylin- 
drical syringe part into which it is to be inserted, there being 
provided an annular projection at the closed end of the cap to 
arrest movement of the resilient piston so that the cylindrical 
syringe part may slide within the arming cap over the resilient 
piston to compress and encapsulate the same. • 



An appliance for warming or treating air for personal 
breathing. It has an upper face mask and a lower chest pad; 
and these units are connected by a flexible conduit. The chest 
pad is of cellular construction opening in the direction of the 
wearer's body to receive heat from the same; and the face 
mask has inlet and outlet valves activated by inhalation and 
exhalation to draw warmed air from the chest pad and expel it 
from the face mask. The chest pad may be filled with a porous 
substance which filters atmospheric air or lends it a medicated 
content beneficial for respiratory ailments. 



3,707,969 

INCONTINENCE DEVICE 

Mable M. Sanford, 473 Noe Street, San Francisco, Calif. 

Filed Dec. 14, 1970, Ser. No. 97,558 

Int.CI.A61f5/44 

U.S.CL 128-287 5 Claims 



3,707,967 

STEADY FLOW REGENERATIVE PERITONEAL 

DIALYSIS SYSTEM AND METHOD 

Sotiris Kitrilakis, Berkeley, and Thomas Charles Robinson, El 

Cerrito, both of CaUf., assignors to Tecna Corporation, 

Berkeley, Calif. ,^^^ 

Filed Oct. 1, 1970, Ser. No. 77^40 
Int. CI. A61m 5/00 
U.S.CL 128-213 9 Claims 




, ^. ,,« ,,, ycuiims An incontinence device formed from an elongated sheet of 

S. CI. 128— 2IJ . „u„», u/atpmroof material having a front panel, an 

A steady-flow regenerative peritoneal dialysis system and flexible, planar, waterprool materi g 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



157 



intermediate panel, and a rear panel. The front panel is 
formed to extend over the pubic area between the furrows of 
the groin, and the rear panel is formed to extend partially over 
the buttocks, while the intermediate panel is formed to extend 
from the front panel, between the legs, to the rear panel and to 
form a receptacle for moisture absorbent material and to 
receive the genital organs. The sheet is gathered to an elastic 
strip along its edges that extend between the front panel and 
rear panel to provide yieldable expansion. 

The intermediate panel is folded along lines extending 
generally longitudinally of the sheet in a direction away from 
the front panel to provide pleat-like walls that are expandable 
tranversely of the sheet for the genital organs and moisture ab- 
sorbent material, and a relatively wide transversely extending 
pleat extending between the side edges of the intermediate 
panel provides a pair of opposed walls defining opposite sides 
of a forwardly opening recess to receive and restrict rearward 
flow of moisture within the forward portion of the receptacle 
toward the rear panel. 

The front panel is held in position by elastic bands 
releasably secured thereto and to the rear panel, to releasably 
hold the device in position, and to permit forward dropping of 
the panel to remove moisture laden material and to enable 
replacement without removal of the device. 



3,707,970 
SURGICAL INSTRUMENT FOR HYSTERECTOMY 
Boris Andreevich Smirnov, Moscow; Emilia Ivanovna Ax- 
enova, Kaliningrad Moskovskoi oblasti; Vladimir 
Leonidovich Rychkov, Moscow, and Nikolai Dmitrlevich Lu- 
kichev, Reutov, all of U.S.S.R., assignors to Vseojuzny 
Nauchno-Issiedovatelsky Institut Khirurgicheskoi Appratu- 
ry i Instrumentov, Moscow, U.S.S.R. 

Filed May 4, 1971, Ser. No. 140,204 
Claims priority, application U.S.S.R., May 4, 1970, 
1431407 

Int. CI. A61b /7/J2; B25f i/00; B26b 13/00 
U.S. CI. 128— 305 2 Claims 



3,707,971 
FACE STEAMER 
Hiroshi Yamamoto, Suita, Japan, assignor to Matsushita Elec- 
tric Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan 

Filed Oct. 18, 1971, Ser. No. 190,396 

Int.CLA61hii/00 

U.S. CI. 128— 368 3 Claims 




A face steamer which applies sieam to the skin to open 
pores of the skin, so as thereby to remove foreign matters and 
simultaneously encourage metabolism and further to enhance 
the effect of a skin treatment or make-up. A hood to be ap- 
plied to the hand, face or other portion of the body for confin- 
ing steam therein and a main body having a stream generator 
disposed therein are fabricated in similar shapes, so that the 
former may be put over the latter to render the face steamer 
compact in shape when said face steamer is not in use. 



3,707,972 
IRRIGATION CONNECTOR WITH SHUT-OFF VALVE 
Frank K. Villari, Oak Park, and Bhupendra C. Patel, Elgin, 
both of III., assignors to The Kendall Company, Boston, 
Mass. 

Filed July 28, 1971, Ser. No. 166,877 

Int.CI. A6 In 25700 

U.S. CL 128—349 R 10 Claims 





A surgical instrument for hysterectomy, which includes a C- 
shaped body, the cantilevered sections thereof forming a gap 
open on one side to accommodate the uterine portion being 
excised, a locking bar adapted to interact with the ends of the 
cantilevered body sections, and a knife. The knife is free to 
move along the guide slots of the body and the locking bar in 
the direction from one of the cantilevered body sections to the 
other, one of said cantilevered body sections serving as a sup- 
port for the knife during cutting. The knife has the shape of a 
hollow right truncated trihedral prism, wherein the edges of 
the faces that overlook the knife-supporting body section are 
cutting edges adapted to interact with the correspondingly- 
shaped faces of said supporting section. One of the knife faces 
is lanceolate in shape when viewed from above, its pointed 
end being advanced with respect to the cutting edges of other 
two knife faces. 



An irrigation connector for a liquid drainage-system includ- 
ing, a flexible body member having a longitudinal main chan- 
nel which communicates with a drainage tube through one 
end of the body member and with a catheter through the other 
end. The body member includes a side arm having a channel 
which opens into the main channel, a flexible bellows inter- 
mediate the body member ends, and a valve seat intermediate 
the side arm opening and the one body member end. A stem is 
received in the main channel and has a passageway extending 
from one end of the stem to an opening in the stem inter- 
mediate the one stem end and a plug adjacent the other end of 
the stem. The one body member end is movable between an 
outer position with the bellows extended and the plug spaced 
from the seat to permit liquid drainage from the catheter to 
the drainage tube, and an inner position with the bellows 
flexed and the plug sealingly engaged against the seat to 
prevent drainage of liquid. 



158 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3.707,973 
HIGHW AISTED GIRDLE 
David Peter Welsch, Livingston, N J., and Harry Yannes, Al- 
lentown. Pa., assignors to Cupid Foundations, Inc., New 

York,N.Y. 

Filed March 9, 1972, Ser. No. 233,205 

Int.CI. A41C//00 

L.S.a. 128-533 8 Claims 




3,707,975 
FILTER CIGARETTE HAVING APERTURED BAND 
Alfred Charles Davis, Bristol, England, assignor to Imperial 
Tobacco Group Limited, Bristol, England 

Division of Ser. No. 686,482, Nov. 29, 1969, Pat. No. 

3,590,825, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 435,004, 

Feb. 24, 1965, Pat. No. 3,410,274. This application March 22, 

1971, Ser. No. 126,721 

Claims priority, application Great BriUin, Dec. 9, 1966, 

553,688/66. The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to 

Nov. 12, 1985, has been disclaimed. 

Int.CI. A24d0//02.0//04 
U.S. CI. 131-9 2Ctaims 



A high-waisied girdle is disclosed which includes a body en- 
circling region lerminating at an upper end thereof in a high- 
waist portion which extends above the waistline location; a 
first band of material having a predetermined modulus of 
elasticity, with said band being secured to said body encircling 
region at the waistline location, and a second band of material 
having a predetermined modulus of elasticity, with said 
second band being secured to said high-waist portion and 
spaced slightly from said first band of material. 





A cigarette is disclosed having a wrapped tobacco portion 
and a two section stub secured to it by a band of impermeable 
material. Beneath the impermeable band, a band of highly 
permeable material is disposed. The impermeable band is pro- 
vided with at least one opening adjustably located over the 
butt joint between the two sections of the stub whereby the 
amount of air passing into the butt may be controlled. 



3,707.976 
CIGAR MAKING MACHINE 
Anton VanVeen, Morgan Road, RED, Canton Center. Conn. 
Filed Dec. 16. 1970. Ser. No. 98.548 

Int.CI.A24c//i0.5/0S 
L.S. CI. 131-36 4 Claims 



3,707.974 

BODY ORGAN STIMULATOR WITH VOLTAGE 

CONVERTER 

WiUiam J. Raddi. P.O. Box 8109. Philadelphia. Pa. 

Filed Dec. 1 1. 1970. Ser. No. 97.255 

Int.CLA61n//i6 

U.S. CI. 128-419 P 6 Claims 




The invention comprises a cigar making machine including 
two belts with means for driving same at different speeds; the 
slower, to feed the wrapper to the filler or bunch, and the 
other to roll the filler, or bunch and wrapper, plus means for 
stretching the wrapper and for sizing the cigar. 



3.707,977 

AUTOMOTIVE TENT FRAMEWORK AND COVERING 

THEREFOR 

Clarence A. Grady. Route 1. Box 192. Rockaway, Oreg. 

FiledMay6, 1971,Ser. No. 140,877 

Int.CLA45f //OO. //y6 

U.S.CI. 135-lA 7 Claims 



An organ stimulator is provided having a power supply, a 
pulse generating circuit, a voltage converter and output ter- 
minals. The voltage converter includes at least one capacitor 
which is arranged such that, during the interpulse interval 
between pulses from the pulse generator, the capacitor 
charges to approximately the voltage of the power supply and 
upon application of a pulse to the voltage converter, the com- 
bined voltages of the power supply and the charged capacitor 
are supplied to the output terminals. 

A novel current limiting circuit is also provided which regu- 
lates the output pulse current of the pacer. 



^^-•^?^-W^ 




-J L >.1 ' 






•^ 



A tent framework for use in conjunction with a vehicle and 
including a pair of frame assemblies mounted lengthwise on 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



159 



opposite sides of the vehicle roof structure. Said assemblies 
being rearwardly extensible to permit pivotally attached leg 
and crossmembers to be swung out vardly into perpendicular 
disposed relationship to the main longitudinal member of each 
frame assembly. Plates affixed to the rearward ends of the 
main members hingedly attach the leg and crossmembers to 
the main member with the adjacent ends of the leg and cross- 
members in abutting, interlocking relationship. A covering for 
the framework may be compactly stowed in place on the 
framework. 

3,707,978 
AUTOMATIC CONTROL AND ANTIBACKLASH SYSTEM 
Joseph A. Volk, Jr.. Florissant, Mo., assignor to Beta Corpora- 
tion of St. Louis. Mo. 

Filed Sept. 24, 1971, Ser. No. 183,429 

Int.CI. F16ki///2 

U.S. CI. 137-2 19 Claims 



3,707,980 

DUAL REGULATOR PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM 

HAVING AUTOMATIC ALIGNMENT MEANS FOR 

CASCADE AND MANUAL OPERATION 

Giorgio Bergamini, Bari, luly, assignor to Pignone Sud S.p.A, 

Bari, Italy 

Filed Nov. 6, 1970, Ser. No. 87,498 
Claims priority, application Italy. Nov. 8, 1969, 62099 A/69 
Int. CI. G05d 76/00 
U.S.CL 137-84 12 Claims 




This invention relates to a system for controlling the rate of 
fluid flow within close tolerances while providing correction 
for backlash and includes mechanical means for controlling 
the rate of Huid flow, means for indicating the rate of fluid 
flow relative to prescribed limits, means for increasing the rate 
of fluid flow when the rate drops below the lower limit, and 
means for decreasing the rate of fluid flow when the rate goes 
above the upper limit. An antibacklash network is provided 
for removing slack or backlash in the mechanical control 
means whenever it, in making a correction, is made to operate 
in a reverse direction. The system further includes means for 
signalling malfunctions in the fluid system and for measuring 
the quantity of fluid flowing through the system. 



3,707,979 
COOLED TEMPERATURE SENSITIVE OSCILLATOR 
Edward G. Zoerb, Rosevllle, Minn., assignor to Honeywell Inc., 
Minneapolis. Minn. 

Filed Feb. 28, 1969, Ser. No. 803,482 

Int.CLF15cy/0S 

U.S. CI. 137-81.5 7 Claims 





A system is described for connecting two force equilibrium 
pneumatic balance regulators, adapted to be actuated by a 
pair of variables, so that those regulators can be operated in 
cascade or manually and the operation can be readily changed 
at will from cascade to manual, and vice versa, without caus- 
ing jumps in the output pressure of the system; whereby, dur- 
ing manual operation, the output of an amplifier-relay of the 
primary regulation is utilized as a set value for the secondary 
regulator whereas, during manual operation, a secondary vari- 
able is used as set value for the secondary regulator, and the 
manual outlet of the two cascade regulators is connected 
directly to the positive reaction of the secondary regulator. 



3,707,981 
COMPENSATING UNLOADER VALVE 
Harry J. Sadler, St. Paul; Ramon Pareja. and John Leschisin, 
both of Minneapolis, all of Minn., assignors to Lear Siegler, 
Inc., Maple Heights, Ohio 

FiledSept.8, 1971,Ser. No. 178,625 

Int. CI. F16k/ 7/04 

U.S.CL 137—115 11 Claims 




A temperature sensor of the fluidic oscillator type wherein 
the oscillator housing is cooled to permit the measurement of 
temperature exceeding the melting temperature of the hous- 
ing. 



An unloader valve apparatus arranged for compensating for 
variations in pressure and capacity, and comprising, in com- 
bination, a valve housing having an inlet, a first outlet defining 
a normal discharge, and a second outlet arranged between the 
inlet and the normal discharge and defining an unloading 
discharge outlet. The housing is provided with a bore for 
receiving a valve plunger or an intermediate sealing liner or 
sleeve which itself receives the plunger, with the valve plunger 
having a bore extending therethrough to permit fluid commu- 
nication between the inlet and the normal discharge Circum- 
ferential sealing means including an outer seal along the 



160 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



periphery of the plunger and mating sealing means along the 
inner periphery of the housing are provided, with the plunger 
being adapted for reciprocatory sliding movement within the 
housing The plunger is provided with a working area dif- 
ferential for plunger motion, including a certain first annular 
area disposed in opposed relationship to the inlet port and a 
certain second and larger annular area disposed in opposed 
relationship to the outlet port, with the plunger being normally 
resiliently biased toward the outlet port to establish communi- 
cation between the inlet and the normal outlet discharge, and 
with the circumferential sealing means normally blocking 
communication between the inlet and the unloading discharge 
outlet An annular chamber is arranged between the outer 
diameter of the plunger and the inner diameter of the housing 
or housing sleeve, with the plunger having means establishing 
communication between the inlet and the annular chamber. 
Check valve means are interposed in the bore of the valve 
plunger and are arranged to move or function axially within 
the bore to block fluid passage through the bore in response to 
an increase in pressure in the normal discharge outlet, and 
thereby permit the increased pressure which is exposed to the 
larger area of the area differential to establish a force to move 
the valve plunger against the bias to establish fluid communi- 
cation between the inlet and the unloading discharge outlet. 
Upon reaching this condition, the force working against the 
inlet side or area of the plungei falls substantially, the check 
valve closes, and the entire area of the outlet side of the 
plunger is exposed to the outlet pressure This combination of 
conditions acts to snap the plunger into the unloading posi- 
tion. 

The circumferential sealing means includes an axially elon- 
gated peripheral seal surface extending between the outer sur- 
face of the plunger and the inner surface of the valve housing, 
with the sealing means being disposed between the annular 
reservoir chamber and the unloading discharge port while the 
plunger is in its normal disposition. The circumferential seal 
means is arranged to provide a continuation of sealing along 
the axially elongated peripheral seal surface while the plunger 
moves or floats axially for a substantial distance to an inter- 
mediate or floating sealing position away from the normal 
position and toward the unloading position against the 
resilient bias and in response to normal variations in fluid pres- 
sure existing in the discharge outlet, due to normal manufac- 
turing tolerances in the pump, and in the resilient valve spring 
force. 



3,707,983 

LIQUID FLOW MONITORING 

Wilbur T. Butler, P.O. Box 535, Pond Creek, Okla. 

Filed Jan. 11, 1971,S€r. No. 105,533 

Int. CI. F 16k 45/00 

U.S.CI. 137— 173 




7 Claims 



3,707,982 
SNAP ACTION PNEUMATIC RELAY 
Joseph E. Hogel, River Grove, III., assignor to Honeywell, Inc., 
Minneapolis, Minn. 

FUed Sept. 23, 1971, Ser. No. 182,995 

Int. CI. FlSb 5100; G05d 16106; F15c 3104 

U.S.CI. 137— 119 lOCIaims 




Apparatus for regulating and monitoring the flow of a 
liquid/gas fluid mixture such as the type encountered in crude 
petroleum recovery. The apparatus includes a first expansion 
enclosure receiving liquid and/or gas input with the first out- 
put from said expansion enclosure being applied through a 
biased valve which allows output flow at greater than 
predetermined pressures. A second valve member disposed in 
a second output of the expansion enclosure is operated via a 
float to close at a predetermined liquid level within said ex- 
pansion enclosure and to open below such level thereby to 
allow by-pass flow of gas substance from said second output 
for later addition to the first output. Flow monitor means 
responsive to the position of said first valve means provides a 
flow time indication and/or output record. 



3,707,984 
HYDRAULIC VALVE WITH LEAKAGE CONTROL 
Clarence W . BanU, Aurora, III., assignor to Caterpillar Trac- 
tor Co., Peoria, III. 

Continuation of Ser. No. 873,172, Nov. 3, 1969, abandoned. 

This application Sept. 2, 1971, Ser. No. 177,496 

Int. CI. F16k/ //07 

U.S.C1. 137— 312 7 Claims 



18 JO 




A miniature pneumatic snap action relay having a bistable 
snap disc arranged to interconnect first and second sets of two 
ports when in one stable position and to interconnect third 
and fourth sets of two ports when in the other stable position. 



A hydraulic valve of the spool type with means to trap 
hydraulic fluid which tends to leak between the spool and the 
bore of the valve in which it slides and to bypass said fluid to 
atmosphere or a tank in order to prevent it from flowing past 
the spool to actuate a hydraulic motor causing it to move or 
creep when it should be at rest. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



161 



3,707,985 
DIAPHRAGM TYPE FLUID SEAL 
Elmer A. Haase, and James M. Kirwin, both of South Bend. 
Ind., assignors to The Bendix Corp., South Bend. Ind. 

Division of Ser. No. 828,178, May 27, 1969, Pat. No. 

3,587,408. This application Jan. 22, 1971, Ser. No. 109,047 

Int.CI. F16kJ///2.J//i6 



U.S.CI. 137—495 



4 Claims 




A diaphragm-type fluid seal adapted for use with a push rod 
exposed to pressurized air and liquid fluids. A flexible 
diaphragm fixedly mounted at its radially outermost portion is 
provided with a central opening through which the push rod 
extends providing frictional engagement and thus a fluid seal 
between contacting surfaces of the diaphragm and rod thereby 
isolating the pressurized air and liquid The diaphragm is flexi- 
ble to the extent of axial movement of the rod to avoid relative 
movement between the diaphragm and rod in response to rod 
movement An adjustable member threadedly carried by the 
rod and engageable with the centermost portion of the 
diaphragm provides a way of easily and accurately positioning 
the diaphragm relative to the rod to eliminate undesirable 
spring rate effect of the diaphragm on the rod. 



3,707,987 

ADJUSTABLE VALVE ASSEMBLY 

Robert E. Gordon, Brooklyn, N.Y., assignor to Mueller Steam 

Specialty Division SOS Consolidated, Brooklyn, N.Y. 

Filed Aug. 3, 1970, Ser. No. 60,679 

Int. CI. F16ky5//<S 

U.S.CI. 137— 543 3 Claims 




A valve capable of being adjusted so that it can function as a 
check valve, a throttle valve, or a shut-off valve. A valve hous- 
ing has an upstream tubular inlet and a downstream tubular 
outlet coaxial with the inlet to provide a straight-line flow for 
fluid. Between the inlet and outlet the housing carries a valve 
seat having an annular seating surface, and a valve member 
extends across the valve seat and has a closure surface which 
engages the seating surface when the valve member is in a 
closed position. A spring continuously urges the valve member 
toward its closed position so that the function of a check valve 
is achieved A shut-off member can be placed'^^in a position 
maintaining the valve in its closed position, to achieve the ef- 
fect of a shut-off valve, while an adjusting structure coacts 
with the shut-off member to adjust the extent to which the 
valve member can move before engaging the shut-off member 
so as to achieve in this way the operation of a throttle valve. 



t. 



i 3,707,986 

ONE-W AY DIAPHRAGM SEAL FOR DRAINS 

William J. Breen, 427 Willis Avenue, Williston Park, N.Y. 
Filed Feb. 19, 1971, Ser. No. 116,854 
Int. CI. F 16k; 5/00 
U.S. CI. 1 37- 525.1 2 Claims 



3,707,988 - 

CONTROL VALVES 
Robert F. Hodgson. Youngstown, Ohio, assignor to Com- 
mercial Shearing and Stamping Co., Youngstown, Ohio 
Filed Sept. 24, 1971, Ser. No. 183,535 
Int. CI. F16k;y//0 
U.S. CI. 137— 596.12 SCIaims 




A one-way diaphragm for use in combination with the drain 
of a sink, for example, is provided with a plurality of axially ex- 
tending, radially oriented, double thickness flanges which are 
corrugated throughout substantially their entire length. The 
lower end of each of the flanges is split whereby water drain- 
ing from the sink can flow therethrough. The diaphragm is 
made of resilient material so that the flanges are normally 
closed and provide a seal at their lower end to prevent 
backflow of any gases, fluids and foams into the sink. 




[\ sN \ X XWX 



lOO •« 



A pressure compensated directional control valve capable 
of supplying a constant volume of fluid is provided having a 
directional control valve with inlet and outlet ports and first 



906 O.G.— 6 



162 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



and second motor ports for connection to opposite sides of a 
fluid motor, a longitudinal bore in said control valve, a valve 
member movable in said bore, said valve member being hol- 
low at each end forming spaced chambers selectively,commu- 
nicating with one another and through the valve member walls 
with the inlet ports, outlet ports and work ports and with a pair 
of spaced grooves surrounding the valve member, three 
spaced annular grooves in the valve walls communicating with 
the grooves in the valve member, a pressure sensing port com- 
municating with the intermediate groove in the valve walls, a 
pressure compensating valve having an axial bore, an inlet 
port connected to the inlet port of the control valve, an outlet 
port connected to the outlet port of the control valve, a pres- 
sure sensing port, a valve member movable in the bore and 
biased to a position normally blocking the inlet from the outlet 
port, said valve member having opposite surfaces thereon ex- 
posed respectively to the fluid pressure at said inlet port and to 
fluid pressure at said pressure sensing port acting with the 
biasing means and being movable in response to a fluid pres- 
sure differential between its inlet port and pressure sensing 
port through the directional control valve to connect said inlet 
port to said outlet port for bypassing fluid from said 
directional control valve to thereby regulate the input flow 
through said directional control valve to a work port. 



3,707,990 
CONCRETE PLACEMENT APPARATUS 

Aaron M. Schaible. deceased, late of Rochester, Wis.; James F. 
Bremer, special administrator, Waterford, Wis.; Bernard G. 
Braun, Waterford, Wis.; Wilbur G. Bennett, Terre Haute, 
and Richard L. Brown. Terre Haute, both of Ind., assignors 
to J. I. Case Company, Racine, W is. 

Filed Jan. 11, 1971. Ser. No. 105,266 

Int. CI. B67d 5136, 5160, 5/64 

U.S. CI. 137—615 22 Claims 




3,707,989 
MODULAR SYSTEM FOR PNEUMATIC CONTROL 
Jean Jullien-Davin, Valence. France, assignor to Crouzet, 
Paris, France 

Filed Dec. 22, 1970, Ser. No. 100,720 
Claims priority, application France. Dec. 22. I%9, 6944770 
lnt.CI.F16k///02 
U.S. CI. 137-608 8 Claims 





/ir[^ 



5/ I 86 



87 



A concrete placer including a boom supported for pivotal 
movement on a horizontal pivot axis of a base with powered 
linkage means for pivoting the boom on the base. The 
powered linkage means includes a link having one end pivoted 
on the horizontal axis through a fluid motor interposed 
between the base and the link. A second fluid ram is pivotally 
connected to the link and the boom and the powered linkage 
means is arranged so that the boom can be pivoted about 1 80° 
about the horizontal pivot axis. 

The boom is of the articulated type having a plurality of sec- 
tions with each adjacent pairs of sections being pivotally inter- 
connected and having cooperating powered linkage means for 
pivoting adjacent pairs of sections from an overlapping rela- 
tion to a substantially end-to-end relation. 

The boom sections support concrete transmission means 
which includes a conduit for each of the boom sections with 
the adjacent ends of the respective conduits interconnected by 
end pieces having a portion located on the pivot axis for the 
respective sections which accommodates pivotal movement of 
the sections. 



A modular system for pneumatic control of the type which 
is constituted by a support pane! arranged in the form of a 
frame fitted with a series of transverse cylindrical rods in 
uniformly spaced relation so as to receive in a coplanar 
orthogonal arrangement, a plurality of interengageable base 
plates each having the shape of a standardued right-angled 
parallelepiped and is adapted to receive on the front face 
which forms a unitary mounting surface at least one stan- 
dardized pneumatic component of the system and on the rear 
face thereof at least one series of connectors which commu- 
nicate respectively with the openings of the corresponding 
component, each base plate having a rear face provided on 
each of two opposite edges, in symmetrical relation to the axis 
located at right angles to the mounting surface at the point of 
intersection of its diagonal lines, with at least two members for 
simultaneous bearing on one of the rods of the support panel 
and with a member for attachment on the rod, with all of said 
members being spaced along the edge face in order that the 
bearing members of two juxtaposed base plates can be 
similarly mounted astride the same rod. 



3,707,991 

REMOTE CONTROLLED VALVE FOR IRRIGATION 

SYSTEMS 

Jonas M. Shapiro, 177 Saw Mill Road, Stamford, Conn. 

FUed April 12, 1971, Ser. No. 133,028 

Int.CI. F16k/;/02 

U.S. CK 137— 625.1 1 5 Claims 




A rotatable valve member of Delrin plastic material is coax- 
lally positioned in the main housing portion of a housing of 
Delrin plastic material and is adapted to be rotated about its 
axis to connect an inlet port to each of a plurality of outlet 
ports in a selected sequence. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



163 



3,707,992 3,707,994 

ELECTROMAGNETIC VALVE ASSEMBLY REGULATABLE TRIGGERS FOR PNEUMATIC DEVICES 

John E. Ellison, Newington, and Herbert M. Flink, East Hart- James L. Brown, 106 Carriage Square Drive, St. Louis County, 

ford, both of Conn., assignors to Skinner Precision Indus- Mo. 

tries. Inc., New Britain, Conn. Filed Dec. 7, 1 970, Ser . No. 95,6 1 1 

Filed Nov. 9, 1970, Ser. No. 87,679 Int. CI. F16k J 100 

Int.Cl.F06k U.S. CI. 137— 637.4 2 Claims 
U.S. CI. 137-625.65 16 Claims 



Mir »t 




An all ports in body valve assembly wherein a reciprocable 
solenoid armature is received within a guide sleeve mounted 
on a body and a spring is drivingly connected between the ar- 
mature and a rod carrying a valve member for sealing engage- 
ment with a valve seat in an arrangement wherein both the 
guide sleeve and valve member are isolated from armature im- 
pact forces upon energization. The valve seat is formed in an 
insert fitted in the body, and the insert provides fluid passages 
for communicating with ports formed in the body. An illustra- 
tive embodiment of the rod includes a terminal portion radi- 
ally offset relative to the axis of movement of the armature 
and to the valve seat providing a valve assembly particularly 
suited for a three-way valve featuring an all ports in body con- 
struction. 



3,707,993 
HEIGHT CONTROL VALVE 
David R. Hardwick, St. Louis, Mo., assignor to >Vagner Elec- 
tric Corporation 

Filed March 15, 1971, Ser. No. 124,286 

Int. CI. F16k n/07; B60t 13/16 

L.S. CI. 1 37 —636 7 Claims 




^-i 



A height control valve for use in a vehicle air suspension 
system is provided with an oscillatable member for actuating 
valve means to control the ingress and egress of fluid pressure 
in said system and also with a damping mechanism for provid- 
ing a time delay in the operation of said valve means by said 
oscillatable member. 




This invention relates to a regulatable air supply device for 
use with pneumatic tools and provides a trigger slidably 
mounted in a sleeve which is rotatably mounted within a shell, 
the sleeve being provided with at least one bore which may be 
overlapped in varying degrees with a complementary bore in 
the shell by manual rotation of the sleeve within the shell, 
whereby to vary selectively the size of the orifice formed by 
the overlapping bores. 



3,707,995 
WEAVING MACHINE 
Erwin Pfarrwaller, Winterthur, Switzerland, assignor to Sulzer 
Brothers Ltd., W interthur, Switzerland 

Filed April 5, 1971, Ser. No. 131,119 
Claims priority, application Switzerland, April 9, 1970, 
5239/70 

Int. CI. D03d 49/00, 49/02, 49/20 
U.S. CK 139—1 15 Claims 




The weaving machine is provided with a supporting struc- 
ture above the machine base on which the cloth beam is 
mounted. A mechanism is also provided to allow an empty 
cloth beam to be rolled up onto the supporting structure or a 
full cloth beam to be rolled off the supporting structure. The 
cloth is drawn off the cloth end of the machine base and 
guided about an access passageway upwardly to the support- 
ing structure for winding onto the cloth beam. 



164 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,707,996 

TAKE-t P DEVICE HAVING A TENSION-DERIVED 

COMPACTING MEANS 

Donald Dane Zebiey, Gre«nville, S.C., and Joseph Wayne 

Cashion, Statesville, N.C., assignors to United Merchants 

and Manufacturers, Inc., New York, N.Y. 

Filed April 22, 1971,Ser. No. 136.474 

Int. CI. D03d 49120 

U.S. CI. 1 39—304 20 Claims 




A take-up device for winding continuously woven cloth 
upon a take-up roll to form hard, straight-ended rolls without 
pick line distortion A pivotably supported S-wrap assembly 
rests tiltably upon the take-up roll. Its swing axis is parallel to 
an input roll, around which the incoming cloth travels at the 
same speed as the loom let-off, and to the take-up roll. A ten- 
sional pressure plane passes through the swing axis and in- 
wardly of the center line of the S-wrap assembly The cloth 
moves reversibly through the S-wrap assembly and onto the 
take-up roll. When a selected tension torque, in addition to 
the winding torque, is applied to the take-up roll shaft, the 
cloth is tautened, the S-wrap assembly is pulled toward planar 
relationship with the cloth and the tensional pressure plane, 
and a tension-derived pressure is created. This pressure acts 
inwardly upon the take-up roll to compact the cloth wound 
thereupon and increases with the increasing diameter of the 
wound cloth upon the take-up roll. 



ERRATUM 

For Class 141—93 see: 
Patent No. 3,707,998 



3,707,997 
SAW CARRIAGE APPARATUS 
Jewell S. Baldwin, and Hazel Baldwin, both of P.O. Box 183, 
Lexington, Mo. 

Filed March 23, 1971, Ser. No. 127,248 

Int. CI. B27b5//<S 

U.S. CI. 83-483 2 Claims 




mounted on the rails, and motors mounted to the carriage for 
moving the carriage relative to the rails and for actuating a 
saw blade above the carriage. 



3,707,998 

DUST COLLECTOR SHROUD 

Jerry C. Dalrymple, 5192 Princeton, Westminister, Calif. 

Filed June 28, 1971, Ser. No. 157,188 

Int. CI. B65g69//* 

U.S. CI. 141-93 7 Claims 




A collapsible shroud prevents the escape of cement dust or 
other dust into the atmosphere when filling a transit mix 
concrete truck from a batch plant loading station The shroud 
is raised to provide clearance for positioning the truck and its 
filler member relative to the discharge chute of the batch 
plant The shroud is made of accordion-pleated material, and 
is movable about a pivot to encompass and loosely enclose the 
exposed portion of the truck filler member A suction tube ex- 
tends into the interior of the shroud for removing dust 
generated during gravity discharge of materials from the 
discharge chute into the filler member. The shroud may con- 
tain small apertures for air entry to prevent buildup of dust on 
the inner walls of the shroud. 



3,707,999 

MOVING SHADOW LIGHT INDEXING MEANS 

Jesse C. Coats, P.O. Box 167, Horse Shoe Bend, Idaho 

Filed Jan. 25, 1971, Ser. No. 109,407 

Int. CI. B27b27/yO 

U.S. CI. 83—438 6 Claims 




A raised platform with longitudinal rails, a wheeled carriage 



The present invention comprises a rotating drum assembly 
mounted on a framework above a conveyor assembly disposed 
transversely to the drum, a cross conveyor in the conveyor as- 
sembly operable to drivingly feed lumber into a saw assembly. 
The rotating drum assembly is provided with a multiplicity of 
groups of wires suitably fastened to the opposite terminal end 
plates of the drum and a light projecting source suitably 
mounted in the drum being operable to project light through 
unit groups of wires passing under the light projecting source 
in response to rotation of the drum and to project shadow imp- 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



165 



ages of the wires upon lumber traveling on the conveyor 
thercbeneath. The drum assembly also includes a parallax 
guide suitably fixed inside the rotating drum assembly opera- 
ble to planarly orient unit groups of wires on the drum as they 
are caused to pass over the guide in response to rotation of the 
drum. The wires of each of the unit groups are parallelly 
spaced apart on the drum a distance geometrically coincident 
w ith the spacing of parallel mounted saw blades in the saw as- 
sembly. Each unit group of wires on the drum are spaced apart 
a distance geometrically coincident with the spacing of lumber 
guide bars on the conveyor assembly. Adjusting means is pro- 
vided on the drum assembly to interrupt the synchronous 
drive of the drum operable to selectively align shadow imp- 
ages on a selected piece of lumber being carried by a respec- 
tive guide bar on the conveyor The adjusting means is electri- 
cally interconnected to the saw assembly to selectively align 
saw blades coincident with the shadow line images on the 
lumber. 

The conveyor assembly comprises an endless conveyor 
disposed about a table framework and including a multiplicity 
of equally spaced guide bars disposed transversely to the 
direction of travel of the conveyor. Means are provided on the 
table to urge lumber on the table against respective guide bars. 
A cross conveyor is distally disposed near one of the terminal 
ends of the conveyor being operable to drivingly feed lumber 
into the saw assembly. Driving rollers in the cross conveyor 
are disposed at an angle between a pair of opposing side frame 
members. In this manner lumber tends to be drivingly fed into 
the saw assembly and urged against one of the side frame 
members. Lumber is drivingly fed into the saw assembly from 
a preselected fixed datum reference guide formed by the side 
frame member. Hence, the relationship between the datum 
reference guide and the preselected position of saws in the saw 
assembly is the same as the relationship of projected shadow 
images on the lumber and its position against the respective 
guide bar on the conveyor assembly. Means are provided on 
the conveyor table to selectively support lumber above the 
cross conveyor and to planarly drop the lumber flatly onto the 
cross conveyor. Electrically interconnecting control means 
are also provided to selectively lower individual saw blades 
into engagement with respective pieces of lumber. 



3,708,000 
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HARVESTING TREES 
Br>an Dufl'ty: Theodore B. (ioloh; Stanley C. Jasinski. and 
.jack /wart, all of Woodstock, Ontario, Canada, assignors 
to Eaton Vale & Towne Canada Ltd., London, Ontario, 
Canada 

Filed Dec. 7. 1970, Ser. No. 95,592 

Claims priority, application Canada, Oct. 14, 1970, 95528 

Int. CI. AOlg 2i/02 

U.S. CI. 1 44— 3 D 46 Claims 



length. The processing apparatus includes a delimbing 
mechanism, a cutting mechanism, and a clamping mechanism 
The delimbing mechanism is operable to delimb the tree upon 
relative movement between the tree and the delimbing 
mechanism. The clamping mechanism is operable to engage 
the tree and pull the tree through the delimbing mechanism to 
thereby effect delimbing of the tree. The cutting mechanism is 
located between the clamping mechanism and the delimbing 
mechanism and is operable to cut the tree into bolts of a 
predetermined length after the tree has been delimbed and the 
bolts are then deposited in a bunk mechanism for storage The 
delimbing mechanism is fixedly supported on a tree- 
processing boom which is pivotable relative to the vehicle 
about a substantially horizontal axis when a tree is placed in 
the delimbing mechanism so that the boom assumes a position 
which is parallel to the tree when the tree is placed in the de- 
limbing mechanism. The cutting and clamping mechanisms 
are also supported on the boom and are movable along the 
boom relative to the delimbing mechanism to enable a tree to 
be sequentially clamped, delimbed and cut into bolts. Means is 
provided for sensing the diameter of the tree as the tree passes 
through the processing apparatus and which is operable to ef- 
fect ejectment of the top of the tree from the apparatus when 
the diameter of the tree in the apparatus is below a predeter- 
mined diameter. . ° 



3,708.001 
BARKING DRUM 
Rauno Veikko Koskinen, Hallituskatu 6, Pori, Finland 
Filed Nov. 10, 1970, Ser. No. 88,332 
Claims priority, application Finland, Nov. 12, 1969, 
3260/69 

Int. CI. B271 1104 
VjS. C\. 144—208 B 10 Claims 



i; 



ft 



/ 12 



II • « 



/C 






//-^ 



Bill i i P | 8 ^-P- ' 



MMi^JffliPMMBffl^^ 















I ' .in 



M 




A tree harvester includes a tree-processing apparatus for 
delimbing and cutting a tree into bolts of a predetermined 



A drum barker including an elongated drum arranged to 
rest in a horizontal position and supported for rotation by 
several systems of motor driven wheels placed in a row on 
both sides of the drum and for axial movement by a set of 
wheels engaging a pair of guiding rings situated on the drum. 
The drum is adapted to receive through one end the timber to 
be debarked. The inner surface of the drum is provided with 
projections for removing the bark, while the outer surface is 
provided with slots through which the detached bark is 
, discharged. Alternatively, the outer surface is provided with a 
plurality of reinforcing hoops with a set of wheels symmetri- 
cally disposed on either side thereof. A spray system is in- 
cluded for spraying a liquid on the timber either as it enters 
the drum to soak the bark or as it leaves the drum to facilitate 
the removal of loose bark from the timber, or both. The spray 
system may also spray the rotating and axially movable drum 
and the system of wheels to reduce the friction between the 
outer surface of the drum and its points of contact with the 
system of wheels. Alternatively to, or in conjunction with, the 
spray system a parallel switching system may be utilized for 
equalizing the operation of the motor driven wheels. 



166 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,708,002 
MALTING OF DEHUSKED GRAIN 
John Anthony Collier, and William Aidan Buckley, both of Ip- 
swich, Suffolk, England, assignors to Pauls and Sandars 
Limited, London, England 

Filed May 1 1, 1970. Ser. No. 36,468 
Claims priority, application Great Britain, May 13, 1969, 
24,305/69 

Int. CI. B02b 3100 
U.S. CI. 99-50 9 Claims 

The invention relates to improvements in the malting of 
gram m which a proportion of the outer layers i.e., the husk 
when present and the pericarp testa is removed by mechanical 
treatment whereby the speed of malting is increased. 

Preferably the mechanical treatment penetrates the per- 
icarp of essentially all of the grains. The amount of the outer 
layer removed may be for example up to 3 percent and can be 
as high as 10 percent of the dry weight of the grain. The 
removal of larger amounts of the outer layers produces m ad- 
dition to a faster malting a higher extract and a high protein 
content in the spent grains. 



rigid bag portion supports a pair of wheels at the bottom 
center or at the forward edge when a foot at the rearward edge 
is provided to form a ihree-point support. A bail is pivoted at 




the top of the bag portion which is movable downwardly 
thereagamst to form a compact unit. The bag portion, bail, 
wheels and axle are boxed as a kit and require no assembly by 
the manufacturer. 



3,708,003 3,708.005 

METHOD FOR PREPARING CITRUS HALVES ^ . ,,.„ ^^"V^^^^ ot^ . . ^ 

« r^ . ij c K in» „„^n«„« R-van P o R«* Rta M. Grain, 5419 S. 4th Avcnue, Phocnix, Afk. 

Hans W . Grotewold, Sebr.ng, Ha., and Don S. Bryan, P.O. Box ^.^^ ^^ 1971, Ser. No. 181,103 

154, Bartow, Fla. , p, LAtfiinn 

Division of Ser. No. 5,6 11, Jan. 26, 1970, Pat. No. 3.638.695. ,,__,,„ ^ lnt.ci.A^>CJ/w jociaims 

This application Oct. 13, 1971, Ser. No. 188.962 ^S- <='• 150-30 
Int. CI. A23n /5/00 
U.S.CL 99— 233.11 2 Claims 




An apparatus and method are provided for preparing citrus 
halves such as grapefruit for the table, comprising a Vee 
trough conveyor means receiving and transferring a generally 
spherical fruit with its axis transverse to its path of travel, a 
cutter in the path of said conveyor bisecting the angle of the 
Vee trough and cuttloj^the fruit carried thereby, a moving 
table receiving the cut portions of fruit from the Vee conveyor 
and moving such portions away from the cutter, a cutter table 
adjacent said moving table, a first driven shaft moving verti- 
cally axially beneath said table, said shaft having a radial arm 
on the upper end thereof, a vertical cutter adjustable on said 
arm. an annular opening in the table through which said cutter 
projects when said first shaft is raised, means acting on said 
first shaft selectively to raise and lower the same, a second 
driven shaft spaced from the first, movable vertically axially 
beneath the table, a hole cutter on said shaft, an opening in the 
table through which said hole cutter extends when said second 
shaft is raised, means acting on said second shaft selectively to 
raise and lower the same, stop means on the table top adjacent 
each of the annular opening and the hole cutter opening 
whereby halves of fruit are positioned and drive means acting 
on each of the first and second shafts. 




3,708,004 

GOLF CLUB CARRIER 

Paul F. Seibold, 26665 York Road, Huntington Woods, Mich. 

Filed Aug. 31,1 970, Ser. No. 68,073 

Int. CLA63b 55/05 

U.S. CI. 1 50— 1 .5 B 3 Claims 

A very light compact golf club carrier is provided with a bag 

portion of rigid construction preferably of molded plastic. The 



A device which provides a means for carrying large bulky 
skirts without unduly wrinkling or compressing them. The 
device in its simplest form comprises a frusto-conical bag hav- 
ing the larger end open and the smaller end closed. The 
smaller end forms the bottom of the bag and carrying straps 
extend from the open end. An open-ended cylindrical or 
frusto-conical shaped section of material is attached to the in- 
side bottom of the bag. The point of attachment may be 
somewhat inwardly from the outside edge of the bottom 
whereby the section of material in conjunction with the side of 
the bag forms an annular cavity. The bottom of the bag in- 
cludes an open slit. In operation, the skirt, such as a crinoline 
petticoat, is rolled or folded such that the waistband comprises 
one end of the roll while the bottom of the petticoat comprises 
the other end. The petticoat is then inserted in the bag by the 
operator extending her hand through the slit and into the bag. 
She then grasps the petticoat at the waistband and pulls the 
petticoat into the bag through the open end. The height of the 
bag should be approximately equal to the length of the pet- 
ticoat such that the lower portion of the petticoat is essentially 
even with the top of the bag. The annular pocket formed by 
the section of material and the side of the bag may contain 
such items as dancing shoes and other paraphernalia. There 
may be additional pockets attached to the outside of the bag 
for carrying smaller items, such as badges, lipstick, etc. Thus, 
the invention teaches a means whereby bulky costumes, such 
as crinoline petticoats, may be easily and conveniently carried 
to the social occasions demanding the use of such costumes. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



167 



3,708,006 3,708,008 

TIRE COOLING DEVICE AND METHOD OF COOLING TIRE LOADING AND TRUEING APPARATUS 

Calvin J. King. Muskego, W is., assignor to Perfex CorporaUon. John Henry Schildmeier, 6038 Crows Nest Drive. Indianapolis, 

Milwaukee. Wis. l""*- ^ ^, „, ^„, 

Filed Dec. 14, 1970. Ser. No. 97,873 Filed Dec. 14. 1970. Ser. No. 97,903 

Int. CI. B60c / 9106 »nt. CI. B29h 2 / 108 

US CI 152-153 6Clalms U.S.CL 157-13 4 Claims 




A cooling device and method for cooling a rotating wheel 
that has an outer periphery generating heat as it contacts 
another surface. The cooling device is a sealed tubular 
member partially filled with a volatile liquid that vaporizes as 
it contacts heat from the outer periphery of the wheel. The 
vapor rises to an opposite end of the tubular member where it 
condenses as it is cooled and returns to the first end of the tu- 
bular member due to centrifugal force of the rotating wheel. 
This cycle repeats and is a continuous cooling process. The tu- 
bular member may be a conventional capillary heat pipe ex- 
tending through the rim of a vehicle wheel so the first end ab- 
sorbs tire heat and the other end rejects heat to the air. 



3,708.007 

PNEUMATIC TIRE INCLUDING BELT CABLES 

Donald L. Roberts, Silver Lake, Ohio, assignor to The 

Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio 

Filed Oct. 28, 1970, Ser. No. 84,709 

Int.CI. B60c9/y<S 

U.S. CI. 1 52— 36 1 7 Claims 




An apparatus for loading and trueing tires. A threaded rod 
supported by a pair of upstanding arms receives the tire and is 
rotatably driven. A floating roadbed having parallel rollers for 
contacting and loading the tire is forced against the tire by an 
expandable bag. The upstanding arms and tire are movable 
toward a cutting blade. A disc mounted to one end of the 
threaded rod receives graph paper on its outer surface, and a 
marking stylus is positioned over the graph paper being driven 
by a rod clamped to the floating roadbed. 



3.708,009 
FOLDING DOOR ARRANGEMENT 
Gunter Viol, 276 Bloherfelder Str., 29 Oldenburg, and Werner 
Kohfeld, Breite Strasse 104, Brake Unterweser, both of Ger- 
many 
Division of Ser. No. 657,970, Aug. 2, 1967, Pat. No. 3.476.630. 
and a continuation of Ser. No. 773,610, Nov. 5, 1968, 
abandoned. This application May 8, 1970, Ser. No. 33,173 
Claims priority, application Germany, Aug. 4, 1966, L 
54250; Jan. 1 7, 1967, L 55509 

Int. CI. E06b 3194 
U.S. CI. 160—84 V 6 Claims 



L-. 




A radial ply pneumatic tire having a pair of folded belt plies 
which includes an inextensible cable extending circum- 
ferentially about the tire in the fold of each belt ply which is 
located adjacent the lateral edges of the tread. 




A folding door arrangement of the accordian door type in 
which the cover is made up of relatively wide and relatively 
narrow wooden panels so that each fold of the cover is defined 
by a pair of relatively wide panels spaced apart by a relatively 
narrow panel, with the panels of each fold being connected 
together by articulating tapes applied to the outwardly facing 
surfaces of same, with such outwardly facing surfaces being 



168 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



covered by wood grained bearing veneer arranged so that in 
both the opened and closed positions of the door, an attrac- 
tive, substantially continuous wood grained aesthetic effect is 
presented b\ the door side surfaces. The edges of the respec- 
tive relatively wide panels at the inside of each fold are articu- 
lated to adjacent corresponding edges of adjacent relatively 
wide panels by similar tapes that are secured to carrier bars in 
turn supported by a lazy tong type extensible frame that is 
connected between the fixed immovable posts of the door. 



ing the air to be conditioned through one or two of said cham- 
bers, said fan being rotatable sti that its outlet can be adjusted 



3.708,010 
APPARATtS FOR THE CONTINUOUS CASTING OF 

TUBES 
Willi Simons, Duesseldorf, Germany, assignor to Schloemann 

Aktiengesellschaft, Dusseldorf, Germany 

Division of Ser. No. 14,298, Feb. 26, 1970, Pat. No. 3.638,715. 

This application Sept. 17,1971, Ser. No. 1 8 1 ,526 

Int. CI. B22d 11 100 

U.S. CI. 164-273 R ^ 10 Claims 




Apparatus for the continuous casting of tubes includes a 
mandrel which extends into the mold. The diameter of the 
mandrel is expandable and contractable. suitably by having 
the mandrel composed of radially movable segments. During 
casting the diameter of the mandrel is expanded when there is 
no relative movement between the tube being formed and the 
mandrel, and is contracted when the tube moves relatively off 
the mandrel. In oscillating molds, in which the mandrel also 
oscillates, there would be no relative movement between the 
mandrel and the tube during the downward movement of the 
mandrel, during which the mandrel is expanded. On the up- 
ward movement the mandrel would be expanded. 




7 /J 



22- 



22 



in a stepiess way to correspond with the inlet of one of the 
chambers or bridging the inlet of two adjacent chambers. 



3,708,012 
HEAT EXCHANGER 
John W. Zimprich, Knoxville, Tenn., assignor to Modine 
Manufacturing Company 

Filed May 1 1, 1971, Ser. No. 142,206 

Int.CI. F28d//06 

U.S. CI. 165-152 7 Claims 




i^'^ 

J J J J J J ''"''^f , r I 1 I I I I r 




A heat exchanger such as a radiator including heat 
exchange tubes for a fluid and a heat exchange wall such as a 
header with an opening into which each tube extends and an 
exterior flange on each tube extending generally longitu- 
dinally of the tube and substantially spanning the space 
between the tube and the opening. Joining metal is provided in 
the opening uniting the tube, the flange and the wall at the 
opening with the joining metal when in the molten state 
wetting the tube, flange and wall in the region of the opening. 
The flange comprises a relatively soft metal such as aluminum 
for easy removal of the outer edge of the flange as by peeling it 
back when the opening is smaller than the space spanned by 
the tube plus the flange. 



3,708,011 
LOCAL AIR CONDITIONING APPARATUS 
.Angelo Serratto. Piazza Novelli 10, Milan, Italy 

Filed Dec. 10, 1970, Ser. No. 96,784 
Claims priority, application Italy, Dec. 24, 1969, 263021 

A/69 

Int. CLF24f J/00 

U.S. CI. 165— 22 7 Claims 

A local air conditioning apparatus for installations with dis- 
tribution of secondary water through four pipes, comprising 
two heat-exchangers housed in two different chambers with an 
interposed neutral or by-pass chamber, and a fan for convey- 



3,708,013 
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING AN 
IMPROVED GRAVEL PACK 
Newton B. Dismukes, Dallas, Tex., assignor to Mobil Oil Cor- 
poration 

Filed May 3, 1971, Ser. No. 139,525 
Int.CLE2Ib4J/04.4i/7/9 
U.S. CI. 166—276 6 Claims 

This specification discloses a process for providing a gravel 
pack adjacent a subsurface formation in a well having a string 
of casing therein In carrying out this process, first perfora- 
tions are formed through the casing adjacent the subsurface 
formation and materials are flowed therethrough to provide a 
consolidated gravel pack. Second perforations are thereafter 



L. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



169 



formed through the casing to extend into and terminate within 
the consolidated gravel pack. Also disclosed is a well tool 
which may be employed in carrying out this process. This well 
tool is comprised in combination of an elongated body hous- 




3,708,016 

LEAF LIFTERS FOR PHOTOELECTRIC PLANT 

THINNERS 

Benjamin A. Shader, Golden, Colo., assignor to The Evermans 

Mfg. Company, Denver, Colo. 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 12,288, Feb. 18, 1970, Pat. 
No. 2,654,998. This application Aug. 1 9, 1 97 1 , Ser. No. 

173,011 

int. CL AOlb 6i// / 2, ii/00 

U.S.CL 172-6 8 Claims 



ing a means for forming perforations in casing in a well, which 
body has a recess in the lower end thereof. A plug is provided 
which is adapted to be set in the casing, which plug has fixed 
to the upper side thereof a protrusion that is adapted to be 
positively engaged by the recess. 



3,708,014 

HYDROCHLORIC ACID/HYDROFLUORIC ACID 

TREATMENT TO REMOVE ASBESTOS FIBERS FROM A 

WELL BORE 
Robert F. Wally. Bartlesville, Okla., assignor to Phillips 
Petroleum Company 

Filed June 23, 1971, Ser. No. 156,091 
Int. CI. E21b 4J/27, 43128- C03b i 7/00 
U.S. CI. 166-307 4 Claims 

An aqueous mixture of hydrochloric acid and hydrofluoric 
acid is employed to accomplish the 98 percent disintegration 
of chrysotile asbestos. In a specific embodiment an aqueous 
mixture of hydrochloric acid and hydrofluoric acid is injected 
into a well to remove chrysotile ash>estos injected into the well 
in a well-working fluid. 



3,708,015 
SYSTEM FOR FIRE PROTECTION USING 
RECIRCULATION OF COMBUSTION PRODUCTS 
Cheng Yao, Weston, Mass., assignor to Factory Mutual 
Research Corporation, Norwood, Mass. 

Filed Nov. 12, 1971, Ser. No. 198,386 

int. CI. A62c 35IS2 

U.S.CL 169-12 19 Claims 





A mechanism for lifting obstructing leaves from the path of 
a photo-electric light beam which is being propelled along and 
above a plant row for photo-electric thinning purposes. The 
mechanism includes a gauge wheel rolling along each side of 
the row and leaf-gathering discs positioned between the gauge 
wheels and over the row and having first transmission means 
applying torque from said gauge wheels to the leaf-gathering 
discs to cause the latter to engage and lift plant leaves above 
the path of the beam and having a second transmission means 
for frictionally applying torque from either gauge wheel to the 
other gauge wheel for driving the two gauge wheels simultane- 
ously in unison. 



3,708,017 
ARRANGEMENT FOR MOUNTING AGRICULTURAL 
IMPLEMENTS ON A TRACTOR W ITH ROCKING SIDE 
TRANSMISSIONS 
Nikolai Ivanovich Alexandrovsky, ulitsa Olega Koshevogo, 1, 
kv. 58; Vadim Fomich Pronko, ulitsa SUkhanovskaya. 37, 
kv. 25; Mikhail Ivanovich Perepechkin, ulitsa Promyshlen- 
naya, 13/5, kv. 23, and Petr Adamovich Amelchenko, ulitsa 
Gritsevtsa, 1 , kv. 59, all of Minsk, U.S.S.R. 

Filed Jan. 15, 1970, Ser. No. 2,989 

int. CI. AOlb 6i// / / , 63128, B60g 79/00 

U.S.CL 172—239 1 Claim 



20 S 



h '" 7 Ij 




r-yyy"f\r"/^^--,'- 



2 7 --« ■ -^, 



A system for fire protection wherein a nozzle discharges an 
extinguishant in response to a predetermined fire condition in 
a manner to create an aspiration effect which circulates the 
combustion products from the fire in a path including the fire 
The circulation of the combustion products is terminated and 
the rate and manner of discharge of extinguishant from the 
nozzles can be changed in response to an additipnal predeter- 
mined fire condition. 



An arrangement for mounting agricultural implements on a 
tractor with rocking side transmissions comprising draw-bar 
links for mounting the agricultural implements thereon, lifting 
levers, and a system of links connecting said draw-bar links 
with the rocking side transmissions and serving to transmit the 
rocking motion of the transmissions to the draw-bar links. 



170 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,708.018 
TWIN-OFFSET DISC IMPLEMENT WITH RELEASABLE 

FASTENING MEANS CONNECTING DUAL FRAMES 

Rob€rt A. Wilbeck. Reno, Kans.. assignor to Wilbeck Machine 

and Manufacturing, Inc., South Hutchinson, Kans. 

FiledFeb. 22. 1971,Ser. No. 117,343 

Int. CI. AO lb 2i/04 

L.S. CI. 172-313 8 Claims 



are pivoted upwardly, they engage the upper links and raise 
the cultivator rigs independently of any movement of the tool- 
bar. Coil springs are tensioned between the upper links and 
the lift bars so that when the lift bars are pivoted downwardly, 
the springs are tensioned to provide a downward bias on the 
rigs. 




A twin-offset disc implement particularly effective for earth 
working operations on uneven ground, is disclosed which in- 
cludes a pair of mobile frames each having an adjustable ton- 
gue structure on a forward end thereof for connecting the 
frames to a prime mover and a fastening member extends 
between the frames for positioning the frames in side-by-side 
relation and has opposite ends thereof mounted on the frames 
to permit independent raising and lowering of the frames dur- 
ing working terraces and uneven ground. 




3,708,020 
CONTINUOUS FEED HEAD DRILL ASSEMBLY 
James Sidney Adamson. 539-47 Avenue S.W., Calgary. Al- 
berta, Canada 

Filed Jan. 15. 197I,Ser. No. 106.691 

Int. CL E2 lb 5/00, / 9/05 

U.S.CLI73— 7 19 Claims 



3,708,019 
SPLIT-LIFT CULTIVATOR 
Edward Clyde Ryan, Ankeny, Iowa, assignor to Deere & Com- 
pany, Moiine, III. 

Filed Nov. 2, 1970, Ser. No. 85.997 

Int.CI. AO lb 6i//0 

U.S. CL 172—470 7 Claims 




Opposed pairs of piston and cylinder assemblies each have a 
drill stem chuck which can be engaged or disengaged from the 
drill stem. When drilling, the lower chuck engages the drill 
stem and the lower pair of pistons moves downwardly while 
the upper pair moves upwardly together with the upper chuck. 
When the pistons are fully extended, the lower chuck releases 
and the upper chuck engages the drill stem whereupon the 
piston movement is reversed. The chuck engaging the drill 
stem rotates so that continuous rotation and feed is accom- 
plished. The reverse action withdraws the drill stem from the 
drill hole The upper part of the tower is pivoted so that the 
lengths of drill pipe can be moved from the horizontal to the 
vertical and vice versa. Hold means are provided engageable 
with a length of drill stem to prevent same from dropping into 
the drill hole while raising and lowering the drill stem. Hydrau- 
lic means are provided to jar the string loose if it jams in the 
hole and a modulating valve assembly is provided to prevent 
excess pressure being applied to the rotating drill bit. 



A row crop cultivator including an elongated toolbar 
adapted for attachment to a tractor three-point hitch and a 
plurality of cultivator rigs pivotally connected to the toolbar in 
spaced locations by upper and lower links. A pair of lift bars 
are pivotally mounted on the toolbar and extend beneath the 
upper links for the cultivator rigs and a pair of hydraulic cylin- 
ders are operatively connected between the toolbar and lift 
bars to individually or simultaneously move the lift bars about 
the pivotal connections with the toolbar. When the lift bars 



3,708,021 ' 
DEVICE FOR TUNNELING 
Albert G. Bodine. 7877 Woodley Avenue, Van Nuys, Calif. 
Division of Ser. No. 749,686. Aug. 2, 1968. This application 
Jan. 11, 1971. Set. No. 105.482 
Int.CI.E01g5//'> 
U.S. CL 173— 49 4 Claims 

A device for tunneling comprising driving a plurality of in- 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



171 



terlocking staves into the earth about a chosen circumference, 
by resonantly sonically vibrating the staves as they are being 



, /^ 




driven. After a circumference of the staves are formed the 
core of earth therebetween is removed to form the tunnel. 



3,708.022 
LOW VOLTAGE SPARK DRILL 
George N. Woodruff, Merritt Island, Fla., assignor to TRW 
Inc.. Redondo Beach, Calif. 

Filed June 7, 1971. Ser. No. 150.371 

Int. CLE2 lb 7/00 

U.S. CL 175— 16 14 Claims 




A spark drill for subterranean drilling is disclosed which 
may be attached to a standard or continuous drill string. The 
drill is characterized by multiple electrodes having a layer of 
semiconductor material between them which provides an 
electrical shunt path and further includes a trigger circuit for 
initiating the spark. 



3.708.023 
SELF-PROPELLED AIR-PUNCHING MECHANISM 
Nikolai Grigorievich Nazarov; Nikolai Andreevich Chinakal; 
Boris Vasilievich Sudnishnikov; Alexandr Dmitrievich 
Kostylev; Konstantin Stepanovich Gurkov. and Konstantin 
Konstantinovich Tupitsyn. all of Novosibirsk. U.S.S.R.. as- 
signors to Institut Gomogo Dela Sibirskogo Otdelenia 
Akademii Nauk SSSR. Krasny Prospekt. Novosibirsk, 
U.S.S.R. 

Filed Dec. 30, 1970. Ser. No. 102,672 

Int.CI. E21b/ //02 

U.S.CL 175—19 1 Claim 



with a pointed head section with a striker being located within 
the body and forming therewith front and rear pressure cham- 
bers, and the front chamber communicating with an additional 
space within the pointed head section of the body, thus raising 
the impact power of the mechanism. 



3.708.024 
DRILLING MACHINE 
Carl F. Back. Orrville. Ohio, assignor to The Sanderson 
Cyclone Drill Company, Orrville, Ohio 

Filed March 10, 1971, Ser. No. 122,957 

Int.CI. E2 lb/ 9/00 

U.S.CL 175—52 7CUims 




f5^i^^ 



Drilling machine with tower operable in various inclined 
positions. The tower has operator controlled mechanisms for 
selective drill pipe pickup or storage and subtr^tion or addi- 
tion in whatever working condition the drill tower is erected 
for rotary-type drilling. 



3,708,025 
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING OBJECTS 

TO BE FORMED INTO GROUPS 
Federico Martinez Soler, and Jacinto Salvado Gomez, both of 
Barcelona, Spain, assignors to Mateo Grau Hijos, S.A., Bar- 
celona, Spain 

Filed Sept. 21, 1971, Ser. No. 182,460 

Claims priority, application Spain, Sept. 21, 1970, 384,171 

Int. CI. GO Igy 9/22 

U.S.CL 177—1 21 Claims 





A self-propelled air-punching mechanism for making holes 
in soil by its compaction, in which a hollow body is provided 



Method and apparatus for classifying a supply of objects 
having a common characteristic, such as size or weight, which 
is randomly distributed throughout the individual objects into 
groups in which the total value of all of the objects in each 
group will be the same, in which the random supply is divided 
into types having narrow ranges of said values, and the final 
groups are selected from the subdivided groups according to 
prearranged programs which are designed to utilize more of 
the objects which predominate in the random supply at the 
time the groups are selected. 



172 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3.708.026 
DIGITAL BATCHING 
Donald A. Senour. Carlisle, Mass., assignor to BLH Elec- 
tronics, Inc., W altham, Mass. 

Filed July 1, 1971,S«r. No. 158.688 

Int. CI. GOlg 13104, 13112,231365 

U.S. CI. 177-60 22 Claims 




the raw gross weight of a batching hopper. Both analog signals 
are applied to the non-inverting input of an operational ampli- 
fier having a gain of "two." When the values of the two 
analogs are equal, the amplifier output is zero. The pulse 
generator is controlled by a comparator that monitors the zero 
output condition to stop the further production or forwarding 
of pulses. The counter registers the total weight and the 
processed analog signal at the amplifier output represents the 
net weight added to the hopper for each material admission. 



"<>«-' t^^r^ 






3»TCH 



s 






I. r, '• '• 






Automatic precision control of high-speed filling and emp- 
tying operations, such as those in which a liquid is admitted 
into or discharged from a batch, is provided by a combination 
of a weighing system and associated electronic digital circuitry 
which regulates these operations in accordance with changes 
in instantaneous batch weight relative to stored information 
concerning initial weight and which further both reduces or "- 
dribbles" the rate at which these operations proceed just prior 
to their completions and anticipates and accounts for so- 
called "in-flight" amounts of material remaining temporarily 
in transit. 



3,708,027 
BATCHING SYSTEM UTILIZING DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG 
SUBTRACTION TO DENOTE THE AMOUNT OF 
BATCHED MATERIAL 
John L. Hill, North St. Paul, Mich., assignor to Ramsey En- 
gineering Company, St. Paul, Mich. 

Filed Jan. 31, 1972, Ser. No. 222,185 

Int.CI.G01gi//4 

U.S. CI. 177—210 1 1 Claims 




3,708,028 
ELECTRICALLY DRIVEN VEHICLES 
Paul R. Hafer, Boyertown, Pa., assignor to Boyertown Auto 
Body Works, Boyertown, Pa. 

Filed Dec. 21, 1970, Ser. No. 99,750 

Int.CI. B60k//00 

U.S. CI. 180—65 R 5 Claims 








This invention relates to improvements in electrically 
powered vehicles and more particularly to structure for effect- 
ing the quick changes of batteries in such vehicles together 
with improved features in the electric motor drive. 



3,708,029 
SYSTEM FOR GUIDING VEHICLES 
Hugh B. Sedgfield, late of Esher, England; Norman Kenneth 
Brown, Binfield, and Eric James Birchnall, Bracknell, both 
of England, assignors to Sperry Rand Limited, London, En- 
gland 

Filed Feb. 16, 1970, Ser. No. 1 1,637 
Claims priority, application Great Britain, Feb. 15, 1969, 
8,344/69 

Int. CI. B62d 3/00 
U.S.CL 180—79 15 Claims 




A series of pulses from a controlled pulse generator are 
counted by a counter and the count is converted to a negative 
analog voltage signal having a value denoting the count. A 
positive analog voltage signal is provided in accordance with 



An automatic steering mechanism for mounting on a steera- 
ble vehicle to guide it along a slot in a track has a feeler 
mounted forwardly of the front wheels of the vehicle to en- 
gage in and sense the position of the slot. Movements of the 
feeler laterally with respect to the vehicle are transmitted 
' through a system of incompressible links to control an hydrau- 
lic ram. The ram movement is damped and applied to the 
track rod of the vehicle. 



, January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



173 



3,708,030 
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM 
Atumi Ueda, Kariya, Japan, assignor to Aisin Seiki Kabushiki 
Kaisha, Kariva, Japan 

Fiied Sept. 24, 1970, Ser. No. 75,063 
Claims priority, application Japan, Sept. 24, 1969, 
44/75965; Sept. 24, 1969, 44/75966; Sept. 24. 1969, 
44/75967 

Int. CI. B62d 5/06 
U.S. CL 180— 79.2 R 3Claims 




pivotal connection at one end of each of the links. The other 
end of one of the links is coupled to the throttle pedal, and the 
other end of the link is pivotally anchored in the automotive 
vehicle. Means in the form of additional linkage is coupled to 
the throttle pedal and to a position intermediate the ends of 
the first mentioned link. When the speed of the automotive 
vehicle is below a predetermined limit, an electromagnet 
holds the pivotal connection between the two links in a given 
position. When this speed is exceeded, the electromagnet is 
de-energized and the pivotal connection moves into a second 
position which acts on the linkage connected to the carburetor 
throttle plate to move this throttle plate towards a closed posi- 
tion, thereby limiting the maximum speed of the automotive 
vehicle. 



A vehicle having a hydraulic power brake system and a 
hydraulic power steering system, each having its own pump 
may utilize the power steering system pump as an emergency 
back up pump for the power brake system should the pump 
for the power brake system fail. The fluid under pressure in 
the accumulator for the power brake system will act upon 
failure of the power brake pump to initiate the switch over to 
the power steering pump. 



3,708,031 
MAXIMUM VEHICLE SPEED LIMITER 
Zbigniew J. Jania, Northville, and Lawrence J. Vanderberg, 
Ann Arbor, both of Mich., assignors to Ford Motor Com- 
pany, Dearborn, Mich. 

Filed Dec. 31, 1970, Ser. No. 103,213 

Int.CI.B60ki//00 

U.S. CI. 180- 1 10 10 Claims 



l-' 







r/twsMiSi/OM 



3.708,032 
ACCIDENTAL LOCK PREVENTING DEVICE 
Masaru Suzuki, Hekikai-gun, Aichi-ken, Japan, assignor to 
Kabushiki Kaisha Tokai Rika Denki Seisakusho, Aichi-ken, 
Japan 

Filed Nov. 19, 1970, Ser. No. 91,109 
Claims priority, application Japan. Nov. 24, 1969, 44/94061 
lAt. CI. B60r 25/02- E05b 65/12 
U.S.CI. 180— 114 11 Claims 




A device is provided for preventing accidental locking of 
the steering shaft of a motor vehicle of the type having an igni- 
tion lock, operable by rotation of an ignition key. A locking 
bolt, which is engageable with the steering shaft only upon the 
rotation of the ignition lock to ignition-ofT position, and 
withdrawal of the key from the ignition lock, is prevented 
from engaging the steering shaft during the running of the 
vehicle by means which is electrically actuated and which will 
permit withdrawal of the key from the ignition lock only upon 
the halting of the vehicle. 



A maximum vehicle speed limiter for use in an automotive 
vehicle that has a throttle pedal connected to a carburetor 
throttle valve through a linkage means. This linkage means in- 
cludes two links which are pivotally connected through a 



3,708,033 
STIMULATOR 
Caperton B. Horsley, East Walpole, Mass., assignor to Braxton 
Corporation, Medfield, Mass. 

Filed Sept. 2, 1969, Ser. No. 854,373 
Iiit.CLG01vy/y4 
U.S.CL181-.5MW nClaims 

Apparatus for generating a sound field comprising a sup- 
port, an elongated elastic column constructed to maintain its 
structural integrity when subjected to vibrational stresses, 
constraint structure constraining the column against trans- 
verse motion relative to the support while permitting longitu- 
dinal motion of portions of the column, an electromagnetic 
motor arranged to provide periodic longitudinal forces acting 
on an end of the column, the period of these forces being 



174 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



equal to the period of the longitudinal resonant vibrational 
mode of the column, a control system for controlling the am- 




3,708,035 
DIAPHRAGM FOR LOUDSPEAKERS 
Hiromi Sotome, Hamamatsu-shi, Japan, assignor to Nippon 
GaJtki Seize Kabushiki Kaisha, Hamamatsu-shi, Shizuoka- 

ken, Japan 
ConUnuation-inpart of S«r. No. 803,822, March 3, 1969, Pat. 
No. 3,586, 121. This application Feb. 4, 197 1 , Ser. No. 1 1 2.784 

Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 30, 1967, 
42/100056 

Int. CI. G 10k 13/00; H04r 7/00 
U.S. CI. 181-32 R 2 Claims 




A diaphragm for a loudspeaker made of foamed plastic or 
like material, in which the diaphragm has a decreased 
thickness at its central portion to which a voice coil is at- 
tached. 



plitude of longitudinal motion of the column, and a piston af- 
fixed to an end of the column and having an extended gas-in- 
teracting surface transverse to the column. 



3,708,034 
STETHOSCOPE 
Carrell G. Ziegler, Flourtown, and Albert H. Hoffman, Roslyn, 
both of Pa., assignors to Dittmar and Penn Corporation, 

Philadelphia, Pa. 

FUedJune24, 1971,Ser. No. 156,449 

Int. CI. A6 lb 7/02 

U.S. CI. 181-24 2 Claims 




3,708,036 
APPARATUS FOR ATTENUATING THE NOISE MADE BY 

FLUID JETS EJECTED FROM A CONDUIT 

Louis Duthion, Paris; Andre Emile Roger Cabassut, Versailles, 

and Andre Julien Labussiere, Fontenay-le-Fleury, all of 

France, assignors to BERTIN & Cie, Plaiser, Yvelines and 

Avions Marcel Dassault. Vaucresson, Hants de Seine, France 

Filed May 1 1. 1971, Ser. No. 142,155 
Claims priority, application France, May 11, 1970, 7016980 
Int. CL FOln 1/08, 1/16; B64dii/06 
U.S. CL 181—33 H 9 CUims 



A stethoscope is provided having ear tubes connected by a 
resilient band which permits swinging movement of the free 
ends of the ear tubes toward and away from each other in a 
plane for insertion for use and removal but resists displace- 
ment of the ear tubes from that plane, the ends of the resilient 
band being formed into spring collars and having struck out 
projections engaged in slots in the tubes to prevent longitu- 
dinal separation and turning of the tubes. 




An openwork screen is placed in the discharge plane of a 
conduit discharging a jet of fluid at sonic speeds, to reduce the 
noise. The screen can be in the form of parallel slats, radial 
slats or a network of slats. In the case of aircraft jets the screen 
is preferably removable form the discharge plane of the jet 
outlet conduit. To do this the screen can be constructed so 
that it disintegrates after a predetermined length of time or 
can be destroyed by explosives or other such means when 
required. Alternatively, the screen can be pivotally mounted 
on the wing so that it can be swung by hydraulic means into 
the discharge plane of the jet or out of the way, it can be ar- 
ranged as a blind which can be drawn over the jet outlet, or it 
can be in the form of elements pivotally attached at one end to 
the conduit around its circumference and releasably con- 
nected near the center of the conduit so that the elements nor- 
mally form a screen of radial slats, but when their center con- 
nection is released they splay out behind the jet. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



175 



3,708,037 
THREE HYDRAULIC LIFTING STAGES SELF- 
PROPELLED CRANE W HICH MAY BE MOUNTED 
Jacques Tranchero, Via VillanonetU 2, Piasco, luly 
Filed Aprils, 1971, Ser. No. 132,377 
Claims priority, application Italy, April «, 1970, 68170 A/70 
Int.CI. B66f ///04 
U.S.CL 182-2 10 Claims 




ERRATUM 

For Class 182— 214 see: 
Patent No. 3,708,080 



3,708,039 

BRAKE SPRING APPARATUS 

John A. Germer. c/o The Budd Company, 2450 Hunting Park 

Avenue, Philadelphia, Pa. 
^ Filed Dec. 3, 1970, Ser. No. 94,715 

Int. CLB6 Ik 7/02 

U.S. a. 188-62 2 Claims 



A self propelled crane is provided having three separate but 
cooperating lifting stages. The three stages are independently 
actuatable. At maximum height the components of the crane 
do not extend beyond the perimeter of the bearing points of 
the base. Two nacelles are included in the crane for support- 
ing operators. 




3,708,038 
CANTILEVER SUPPORT 
Joseph B. Ewing, Jr., P.O. Box 978, Innis, La. 

Filed Sept. 10, 1971, Ser. No. 179,303 
Int.CLE04gi/70 

U.S,CL182— 150 



9 Claims 



— ^ 



This invention pertains to a compression spring supported 
plate assembly which carries a friction lining for coaction with 
an arrestment surface and which is supported a predetermined 
distance away from a movable base structure. The precqm- 
pression of the springs can be altered to change the brake 
force acceleration, independently and without affecting the 
distance of the brake lining from the base structure. Cor- 
respondingly the distance of the brake lining from the base 
structure to compensate for brake wear can be altered without 
affecting the precompression of the springs. 




A platform to safely support a plurality of workmen 
together with tools, equipment and supplies, for use in main- 
tenance work beneath and in close proximity to a portion ot 
the underside of a bridge on which work is to be peribrmed. 
An upright frame structure rises from an inner end of the plat- 
form and defines a vertical passageway by which the workmen 
and supplies may move between the platform and the upper 
side of the bridge. Suspending means secured to said end ot 
the platform extends to above said passageway for attachment 
to a transit crane, by means of which the platform is moved to 
and from a position beneath the bridge. The passageway ex- 
tends upwardly along a side of the bridge and to above said 
bridge side to be accessible from the upper side of the bridge 
when the platform is disposed therebeneath. Adjustable can- 
tilever means forms an extension of said inner end of the plat- 
form for causing the platform to swing upwardly against the 
underside of the bridge, while suspended by the crane, to 
facilitate securing hanger means, carried by the platform, to 
the frame structure of the bridge, after which the cantilever 
means is adjusted for reducing the counter balancing affect 
thereof, so that said hanger means will partially support the 
platform, and thereafter provide the sole support for the plat- 
form when the crane is disconnected from said suspending 
means. 



3,708,040 
DISK BRAKE W ITH SERVO ACTION 
Harold S. Hollnagel, Milwaukee, Wis., assignor to Kelsey- 
Hayes Company 

Filed Aug. 19, 1970, Ser. No. 65,080 

Int. CLF16d 55/46 

U.S.CL 188-72.2 11 Claims 




Two embodiments of disk brake assemblies embodying sim- 
plified actuators that include tilting pins The pins are tilted to 
cause axial movement of the brake pads into frictional engage- 
ment with the associated brake rotor. The direction of tilting 
of the pins is such that a self-energizing force is exerted upon 
the brake. 



176 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,708,041 3,708,043 

BRAKE DISC BRAKES 

Emil H. Hahn, St. Joseph, Mich., assignor to Lambert Brake Heinrich Bernhard Rath, Koblenz-Luetzel, and Wolfgang 



Corporation, St. Joseph, Mich. 

Filed Feb. II, 1971, Ser. No. 1 14,414 
Int. CI. F16d 55/224 
U.S. CI. 188-72.9 



Hess, Rubenach, both of Germany, assignors to Girling 
Limited, Birmingham, England 

Filed Sept. 22, 1970, Ser. No. 74,328 
8 Claims Claims priority, application Great Britain, Sept. 25, 1969, 
47,135/69 

Int. CI. F16d 55/22« 
U.S. CI. 188—73.3 10 Claims 





A brake comprises a ring-shaped housing formed of sheet 
metal halves secured together and forming openings for 
receiving pins. The pins slidably support braking plates that 
are normally biased apart and are movable for engagement 
with the opposite surfaces of a brake disc. The housing halves 
also provide an opening for receiving an actuating lever that is 
engageable with one of the braking plates The housing may 
be shiftably mounted on a fixed mounting plate for use with an 
axially fixed rotating disc, or the housing may be fixedly 
mounted for use with an axially shiftable brake disc. 



3,708,042 
CARBON CORE SEGMENTED FRICTION DISC 
Walter J. Krause, and Gilbert T. Stout, both of South Bend, 
Ind., assignors to The Bendix Corporation 

Filed Sept. 21, 1970, Ser. No. 74,054 

Int.CI.F16d 65/72 

U.S. CI. 188—73.2 8 Claims 




A friction disc for a disc brake having a plurality of inter- 
leaved brake rotor and stator discs which are forced together 
to provide a friction effect. The rotor is provided with a plu- 
rality of segments each of which includes a carbon block hav- 
ing friction material pads fixedly secured to opposite faces 
thereof The segments are attached to a ring or strap which 
holds the segments in fixed spaced-aparl relationship to define 
an annular rotor disc. 



A spot-type disc brake has a fixed caliper straddling the disc 
and containing hydraulic actuator pistons acting on the back 
plates of opposed brake pads disposed at opposite sides of the 
disc. The back plates have "T" shaped side edge portions 
whose circumferentially inwardly facing surfaces cooperate 
with circumferentially outwardly facing abutment surfaces on 
the caliper This enables the brake drag forces to be taken 
from the brake pads at their leading edges. 



3,708,044 
VEHICLE EXPANDING BRAKE ASSEMBLY 

Tatsumi Torn; Asao Kozakai; Takekazu Yamamoto, and 
Mizuo Nyunoya, all of Kariya, Japan, assignors to Aisin Seiki 
Company Limited, Aichi-ken, Japan 

Continuation of Ser. No. 797,062, Feb. 6, 1969, abandoned. 

This application May 18, 1971, Ser. No. 144,677 

Int. CI. F16d 57/22, 5//24 

U.S. CI. 1 88—326 6 Claims 




An automotive vehicle brake assembly, comprising a rotata- 
ble brake drum, a hydraulic service brake section and an 
emergency or parking brake section, both of said brake sec- 
tions when actuated either separately or jointly are arranged 
to cooperate with a common pair of brake shoes adapted for 
frictional cooperation with said drum, said assembly being 
characterized by the provision of at least one mechanical link- 
age connected between both of said brake sections so as to 
modify the brake actuating mode of at least one of said brake 
sections under certain operating conditions. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



177 



3,708,045 
LUGGAGE BAGS 
Ira R. Katz, Nashville, Tenn., assignor to Hartmann Luggage 
Company, Lebanon, Tenn. 

Filed July 1 9, 1 97 1 , Ser. No. 1 63,923 

Int. CI. A45c 5100 

U.S. CL 190-41 Z { 8 Claims 



of the link, the plunger, and the brake shoe assure good brak- 
ing action, especially in view of the efficient angle of the 
downward substantially tangential travel of the shoe relative 
to the wheel to braking position. The compactness of the 
mechanism usually permits installation on the free side of a 
belt-driven pulley wheel. 




A soft, flexible bag for carrying clothing and personal acces- 
sories or the like includes a top, a bottom, first and second end 
walls, a pair of side walls, and a novel continuous zipper-type 
slide fastener which is arranged in an unusual manner whereby 
it follows a curved path down substantially the length of said 
first end wall, diagonally upwardly across one of said side 
walls, and in a curved path down said second end wall, the 
opening of said uniquely-arranged zipper permitting said flexi- 
ble bag walls to hang downwardly and outwardly in a 
widespread condition facilitating the packing and unpacking 
of the bag. 



3,708,046 

ELECTRICALLY CONTROLLED BRAKE 

Howard W . Brown, 2657 Shiras Avenue, Dubuque, Iowa 

Filed Sept. 23, 1970, Ser. No. 74,738 

Int. CI. F16d 2i/00 

L.S.CL 192-2 16 Claims 




3,708,047 
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC SELECTOR FOR THE CONTROL 

OF MULTIPLE LOADS 
Willi Kuhnle, and Walter Frei, both of Fried richshaf en, Ger- 
many, assignors to Zahnradfabrik Friedrichshafen Aktien- 
gesellschaft, Friedrichshafen, Germany 

Filed Jan. 18, 1971, Ser. No. 107,287 
Claims priority, application Germany, Jan. 20, 1970, P 20 
02 315.8 

Int. CI. F16d 67/04, G06d 7/02, F16h 57/70 
U.S. CI. 1 92 — 1 2 C 7 Claims 



\ 



G.fMK 



jr. ^n, J.V 

CEAe C£AV WAK 

36 X 3i 



U 31 31 30 

'-1 



-' 1 r-^S «~ I ' 





A multiplicity of loads, such as the clutches and brakes 
designed to establish different speed ratios in an automotive 
gear-shift transmission, are individually actuatable by an array 
of hydraulic valves forming several cascaded stages, the 
number of valves per stage increasing as a geometric progres- 
sion of base 2. Several solenoid relays, selectively energizable 
with the aid of a coding matrix under the control of a manually 
operated shift lever, are assigned to the valves of respective 
stages for jointly displacing them between two alternate posi- 
tions, thereby completing any one of 2" distinct fluid paths 
where n is the number of stages. 



3,708,048 
FLUID PRESSURE CLUTCH W ITH EMERGENCY SCREW 

OPERATOR 
Peter Szynka, Witten, (Ruhr), Germany, assignor to Lohmann 
& Stollerfoht Aktiengesellschaft,W ittenburg/Ruhr. Germany 

Filed March 22, 1971, Ser. No. 126,927 
Claims priority, application Germany, March 25, 1970, P 20 
15 501.5 

Int. CLE 16d 79/00 
L.S. CL 192—83 6 Claims 



In this electrically controlled brake mechanism, a brake 
shoe, which normally gravitates to a braking position in en- 
gagement with a pulley wheel, so as to hold the wheel against 
turning when electrical power is turned off, or in the event of 
electrical power failure, is pivotally connected at its mid-point 
to one end of a link guided to move endwise tangentially rela- 
tive to the circumference of the pulley wheel so that the brake 
shoe is retracted and allows free turning of the pulley wheel 
when the power is turned on, the link being operatively con- 
nected at its other end with the plunger of an electrical sole- 
noid that is energized only when the main control switch is 
turned on for either forward or reverse operation of the drive 
motor. The motor circuit is not completed, however, until a 
servo-switch, that is normally in open circuit position, is 
thrown to closed circuit position by plunger operation of the 
aforesaid link. Thus, the motor does not start until a split 
second after the brake is released, which saves wear and tear 
on both the motor and the brake shoe. The combined weight 




All emergency device for a pressure fluid operated double 
cone friction clutch, particularly as used in a ship drive 
system, is provided in that the pressure fluid 6perated parts 
can be mechanically moved through physical engagement in 
case of failure of the fluid system. 



178 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,708,049 
SPLIT-RATE METER CONSTRUCTION 
Leonard J. Weber. Broadview, III., assignor to Qonaar Cor- 
poration, Elk Grove V illage. III. 

Filed July 7, 1971,Ser. No. 160^15 

Int.CI. G07f5/00 

L.S. CI. 194-84 7 Claims 




3,708.051 

CONTROL MECHANISM FOR ADVANCING AND 

LOCATING PALLETS 

Anthony L. Dato, River Vale, and Zoltan E. Zilahy, Nutley. 

both of NJ., assignors to SUndard Tool & Manufacturing 

Co. 

Filed March 26, 1971. Ser. No. 128,305 

Int. CI. B23q 5/22 

U.S. CI. 198-19 . 14 Claims 



A meter construction wherein purchased time is obtained 
through engagement of pawl means with a winding means at- ^ 
tached to a timing mechanism, the pawl means being moved 
into engaging position by a coin employed for purchasing 
time The improvement involves the use of a pair of rotatable 
memh>ers operatively connected to the winding means. A first 
rotatable member is directly tied to the winding means 
whereby driving engagement of the pawl with the first rotata- 
ble member will result in the purchase of time. The second 
rotatable member is maintained in spaced relationship with 
respect to the first rotatable member, and the subsequent in- 
sertion of a coin results in engagement of the second rotatable 
member, and movement of this member relative to the first 
rotatable member. Driving engagement with the first rotatable 
member follows this initial movement and the purchase of 
time only begins at this point. This results in a lower ratio of 
purchased time to coin value. Additional delay of movement 
of the first rotatable member and operation of the associated 
time mechanism is accomplished through the use of a blocking 
member which holds the pawl out of an engaging position 
when a coin is inserted after a certain amount of purchased 
time is already on the meter. 




Carriers are mounted on vertical rails having a wear plate 
on the bottom which rests upon wear plates.on a continuous 
chain which drives the carriers from one machine station to 
another where one or a group of carriers may be retained sta- 
tionary as the chain continues to advance. A reciprocal con- 
trol mechanism engages the wear plate of a carrier and ad- 
vances it to a station where the pallet carried thereby is accu- 
rately oriented and clamped during a machining operation. 
The clamped pallet prevents the carrier advancement and per- 
mits the reciprocal control mechanism to be released 
therefrom. An escapement mechanism permits one carrier at 
a time to be advanced to the reciprocal control mechanism 
which advances the carrier or carriers to the next adjacent sta- 
tion or stations. 



3,708,050 
PRINTER CONTROL WITH MONODIRECTIONAL AND 
BIDIRECTIONAL PRINTING COMPATIBILITY 
Justin H. McCarthy, Jr., Boca Raton, Fla., assignor to Interna- 
tional Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y. 
Filed Oct. 26, 1970, Ser. No. 84,026 
Int.CI. B41ji//2 
U.S.CI. 197— IR 5 Claims 



3,708,052 

UNSTABLE W ARE PUSH PLATE 

Alphonse W. Faure, Philadelphia, Pa., assignor to C.S.S. 

Machine & Tool Company, Inc., Philadelphia, Pa. 

Filed April 28, 1971. Ser. No. 138,123 

Int.CI. B65g 4 7/«2 

U.S. CL 198-24 5 Claims 



CW) 



POINTER 
CONTROLS 



r 



BI-OIRECT- 

lONtL 
CONTROLS 



® 



o o o o 



^^vl- 



J® 



o o s s 




b. 



n^^^ r^^,,^^" 

Logic is conditioned to respond as a function of whether or 
not a serial printer is capable of printing bidirectionally or 
monodirectionally. When a bidirectional printer is available, 
the logic modifies computer originated control signals so that 
bidirectional printing will be effected even though the com- 
puter controlled signals are formatted and sequenced for 
monodirectional printing control. 



In glassware forming machinery, a reciprocating type of 90° 
push-out assembly is modified to adapt it to the handling of 
unstable glassware. One or more stabilizing fingers are added 
which become positioned on the outer side of the glassware. 
These fingers cooperate with the normal push fingers to en- 
gage the unstable glassware on three sides and thereby to sta- 
bilize the ware as it is swept forwardly through an arc of 90° 
from the dead plate to the conveyor. At the end of the 90° for- 
ward sweep, the stabilizing fingers are automatically raised so 
that they clear the glassware during the retraction stroke of 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



179 



the 90° push-out assembly. The stabilizing fingers are main- 
tained in their raised positions not only during the entire 
retraction stroke, but also during the 90° return swing of the 
push-out assembly to a position facing the dead plate, and also 
during the entire forward extension stroke of the push-out 
mechanism. It is not until the push plate has reached its full 
forward position facing the dead plate that the stabilizing fin- 
gers are lowered from their raised position. In their lowered 
position, the stabilizing fingers are adapted to engage the far 
sides of the glassware just deposited on the dead plate and to 
sweep the new glassware from the dead plate to the conveyor. 



stacking marks and slots for fastening the stacks, and a 
mechanism for orienting the stator laminations, made of two 
vertical rotatable shafts whose upper portions are of the taper- 
ing shape.. The auger screws are positioned parallel to the 
shafts and installed together with the latter along an imaginary 
circumference, forming a cylindrical space for the movement 
in it of the stator laminations. 



3,708,053 
SHUFFLE FEED MECHANISM 
Earl R. Anderson, Los Gatos, Calif., assignor to Brex Corp., 
Los Gatos, Calif. 

Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 776,682, Nov. 18, 1968, 

abandoned. This application May 6, 1971, Ser. No. 140,865 

Int.CI. B65g 25/04. 47/26 

U.S. CI. 198—30 10 Claims 




This mechanism comprises a shuffle feed mechanism having 
two sets of longitudinally extending serrated members forming 
a grid or bed, at least one of the sets of being movable longitu- 
dinally with respect to the other so as to progress articles from 
pocket-to-pocket or valley-to-valley along the length of the 
mechanism by pushing of the articles upwardly along an 
inclined wall of a V-shaped notch and over the apex so as to 
slide or roll down into the next notch. The sets of shuffle mem- 
bers are elevated at their discharge ends with the outer shuffle 
members being at a quarter elevation so as to provide a trans- 
verse trough-like configuration to cause single filing of articles 
progressed therethrough. Also the shuffle feed mechanism in- 
cludes barrier means extending longitudinally so as to confine 
the articles to a narrow path along which only a single article 
can be fed. 



3,708,054 
DEVICE FOR STACKING STATOR LAMINATIONS 
Vitaly Konstantinovich Gilev, 118, 811 proezd, 65, kv. 16; 
Jury Vagarshevich Ovanesov, ulitsa Mayakovskogo, 17, kv. 
8; Rafael Tevosovich Sarkisov, ulitsa Aga-Neimatully, 20a, 
kv. 28. and Ernst Arakelovich Stepanyan, ulitsa Druzhby 
Molodezhi, 2, kv. 36, all of Baku, U.S.S.R. 

Filed July 14, 1971, Ser. No. 162.348 

Int.CI. B65g 47/24 

U.S. CI. 198—33 AC 4 Claims 




3,708.055 

DISPENSING METHOD AND APPARATUS 

Roland E. Miller, Orangeville, and David M. Neill, Chicago, 

both of III., assignors to Kraftco Corporation. Chicago, III. 

Filed June 28. 1971, Ser. No. 157,347 

Int.CI. B65g 47/26.47/75 

U.S. CL 198—34 6 Claims 




Method and apparatus for depositing articles at uniformly 
spaced positions on a conveyor in such a manner as to main- 
tain a predetermined flow of the articles on the conveyor from 
at least two dispensers arranged in tandem adjacent the con- 
veyor. 



3.708.056 

DEVICE FOR REMOVING BULK MATERIAL FROM 

STORAGE 

Gunter Strocker, Holzwickede, Germany, assignor to Gustav 

Schade Maschinenfabrik, Dortmund, Germany 

Filed Feb. 2, 1 97 1 , Ser. No. 1 1 1 .845 

Claims priority, application Germany, Feb. 5, 1970, P 20 05 

147.2 

int. CLB65g 65/25 
U.S. CL 198—36 17 Claims 




A device for removing bulk material from storage in a dump 
pile includes at least one scraper arranged to be raised and 
lowered on a gantry spanning the dump. 



The device comprises auger screws for rotating the stator 
laminations whose outer edges are provided with inward 



3,708,057 
SYSTEM FOR SORTING MAIL BAGS 
Ernest B. Hardwig, P.O. Box 2685, Jacksonville, Fla. 
Division ofSer. No. 47,8 12, June 19, 1970, Pat. No. 3,655,030. 
This application July 2. 1971, Ser. No. 159,390 
Int. CI. B65g 4i/C>0 
U.S. CI. 198—38 6 Claims 

A sorting apparatus comprising a train of carriers each hav- 
ing a tiltable support provided with a gripper device for 



180 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



releasably retaining an empty mail sack on the carrier. The 
carriers follow a loop track and are advanced therealong to 
and past a loading station and a plurality of unloading stations. 
Each carrier includes a coding device which may be set by an 
operator at the loading station at the time an empty sack is 
positioned in the gripper device. A cyclic drive is provided 
which includes an endless chain carrying a pawl in a path 
which approaches the track to engage the pawl with a carrier 
and move the train a predetermined distance, which is an even 
multiple or submultiple of the distances between loading and 
unloading stations, and then departs therefrom to disengage 
the pawl. As a carrier reaches the loading station, it trips an in- 
dexing device which stops that carrier and, accordingly, the 



3,708.059 
CONVEY SYSTEM AND ATTACHMENTS THEREFOR 

Herman Ackermann, Richton Park, III., assignor to Velten & 
Pulver, Inc., Chicago Ridge, III. 

Filed Oct. 14, 1971, Ser. No. 189,203 

Int. CI. B65g 1 7106 

U.S. CI. 198-189 ISCIaims 



"^".Hii 




train, in proper position. The pawl in departing from the carri- 
er contacts the indexing device and returns it to retracted 
cocked condition removing the stop element from the path of 
the carrier, whereby the train may again be moved upon en- 
gagement of the pawl with the next carrier. Code sensing ar- 
rangements are located at the unloading stations operative to 
actuate mechanism to tilt the support of a correspondingly 
coded carrier. In tilting, the support moves the gripped sack 
laterally, and releases the gripper device. Mechanism at the 
station is also actuated to restrain the lower portion of the 
sack against lateral movement whereby the sacks are 
deposited m horizontal position on a table at the station one 
on top of the other to form a stack. 



3.708,058 
VACLLM BELT CONVEYOR 
Alex E. Kalven, Somerville, N.J.. assignor to G AF Corporation. 
New York. N.Y. 

ConUnuation-ln-part of Ser. No. 863.138. Oct. 2, 1969, Pat. 
No. 3,608,895. This application Jan. 8, 1971, Ser. No. 104,971 

Int. CI. B65g 75/00 
L.S. CI. 198— 184 1 Claim 





156 



An endless conveyor system comprises upper and lower 
pairs of laterally spaced-apart guide rails respectively support- 
ing therebetween the support and return reaches of an articu- 
lated roller chain conveyor including lengths joined by con- 
necting pins, a plurality of longitudinally spaced-apart at- 
tachments carried by the conveyor, each attachment including 
a bracket having a base and a pair of depending legs each pro- 
vided with a laterally outwardly extending support flange, the 
tops of the legs extending longitudinally beyond the base ends 
and cooperating therewith to define a pair of support seats, a 
retainer plate disposed beneath the base and between the legs, 
and a support rod bent to form an elongated loop having the 
elongated sides thereof respectively disposed in the support 
seat and attached to the retaining plate, thereby holding the 
attachment parts together and substantially immovable with 
respect to each other, the rods cooperating to define a con- 
veyor apron and to support the conveyor along its support 
reach and the support flanges cooperating to support the con- 
veyor along its return reach. 



3,708,060 

RIGID CURVED SHEET ELEMENTS, SUCH AS SCREW 

CONVEYOR BLADES. AND METHODS OF MAKING 

SAME 
Daniel Ben-Natan, 27 Hanarkisim Street, Kiryat Bialik, Israel 
Claims priority, application Israel, July 3, 1%9, 32511/69 

Int.CI.B21d///06 
U.S.CL 72-379 - 4 Claims 




Flat objects are conveyed by the under surface of a springy 
layer on a continuous belt which moves in contact with the 
smooth bottom surface of a vacuum plenum chamber having 
an elongated slot opening to the center of the belt which has a 
series of perforations each corresponding to an enlarged hole 
in the springy layer that grips each flat object under the 
vacuum influence of the plenum chamber. 



A rigid curved sheet element, such as a helicoidal screw 
conveyor blade, is curved by being formed with a series of tri- 
angular segments bounded along their sides and alternately 
disposed so that their apexes alternate from one edge (the 
longer side) of the sheet element to the opposite edge (the 
shorter side); in addition the plane of each triangular segment 
forms an obtuse angle with respect to that of the next succeed- 
ing one. and alternates in direction with respect to successive 
ones. In a preferred method of making same, a flat sheet 
blank, preferably in the shape of a circle, is bent along a plu- 
rality of lines in alternate directions to form the triangular seg- 
ments. In another method, a plurality of separate triangular 
segments are flxed together, as by welding, to form the curved 
sheet element. 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



181 



3 708 061 sand may fall through the screen. The sinking chips and other 

ALBUM FOR FILMSTRIP STORAGE foreign substances are brought into a selection tube in which 

Marshall VVeingarden, 60 East 8th Street, New York, N.Y., and 
Harold H. Levitt, 313 Rutland Avenue, Teaneck, N J. 
FUed Nov. 17, 1971, Ser. No. 199,527 
Int. CLB65d 23/54. //i6 
U.S. CL 206—45.34 4 Claims 




A book-like album which, in practice, stores filmstrip cans 
such that the identification thereon is visible through a trans- 
parent flap, or so-called spine, of the album and thus also 
serves as identification of the album. 



3,708,062 

EYEHOOK FASTENER AUTOMATIC INSTALLING 

MACHINE 

Gabor Z. Feldheim, and Andrew Feldheim, both of 690 George 

Street, Sydney, New South Wales, Australia 

Filed May 19, 1970, Ser. No. 38,799 
Claims priority, application Australia, May 26, 1969, 
55552/69 

Int. CI. B65d 73100, 85162 
U.S. CI. 206—56 DF 2 Claims 







an upward stream is provided. By the upward stream, the 
wood chips are moved up for recovery and only the foreign 
substances sink through the stream. 



3,708,064 

METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INSPECTING 

DIELECTRIC MEMBERS 

Kent L. Schepler, and Larry J. Schmersal, both of Toledo, 

Ohio, assignors to Owens-Illinois, Inc. 

Filed March 16, 1971, Ser. No. 124,680 

Int. CI. B07c 5108 

U.S.CL 209-73 16 Claims 




"t^ 



A U-shaped garment fastener adapted to be readily self- 
loaded into a clenching press. The components of a complete 
fastener are secured to a backing material so that two chains 
of them can be placed in a magazine and fed into the press. 
Both halves of the fastener are similar to eliminate duplicate 
parts. 



3,708,063 
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR W ASHING WOOD 

CHIPS 
Hanaya Morimasa, Kure-shi, Hiroshima Pref., Japan, assignor 
to Toyo Pulp Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan 

Filed Sept. 1 1, 1970, Ser. No. 71,622 
Int. CI. B03b 7100 
U.S. CI. 209—3 9 Claims 

Wood chips including foreign substances are made to natu- 
rally sink in a washing tank. While the floating chips are taken 
out from the tank, the sinking chips and the foreign substances 
are separated by a submerged screen so that only the small 




In a preferred embodiment of the invention a method and 
apparatus for inspecting glass containers is described. A high 
frequency signal is transmitted at an inspection station. The 
transmitted high frequency signal is received and a detection 
output IS provided which is related in amplitude to the am- 
plitude of the received signal. The steady state detection out- 
put is sensed when no container is at the inspection station. A 
wall of a container is moved past an inspection position to vary 
the amplitude of the received signal and thus the detection 
output in accordance with the thickness of the wall at the in- 
spection position. The varying detection output is compared 
with the steady state detection output to derive a thickness 
signal proportional to the thickness of the moving wall. The 
thickness signal is compared with a reject reference signal to 
detect a non-acceptable container. The magnitude of the re- 
ject reference signal is controlled by the steady state detection 
output to automatically compensate for long term component 
and ambient variations. 



182 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,708.065 
MEASLRING AND SORTING APPARATUS 
Louis J. Aull, AtlanU, Ga., and William E. Gritt, Indianapolis, 
Ind., assignors to Amsted Industries Incorporated, Chicago, 
III. 

Filed Aug. 27, 1970, Ser. No. 67,434 

Int. CI. B07c 51342 

U.S. CI. 209—73 7 Claims 



cyclones, each mounted for rotation about an axis spaced 
therefrom and oriented transversely of said axis, and each hav- 
ing an inlet adapted to communicate with a source of said 



56) /-SB 



'■12 




-^T" 



QH] 



A method of and an apparatus for measuring and sorting ar- 
ticles IS provided having a plurality of sensors that are respon- 
sive to the presence and absence of light. Non-diverging 
coherent light is projected against the sensors The articles to 
be measured and/or sorted are guided through the light inter- 
mediate the source of the light and the sensors. In response to 
the sequence m which the sensors are shaded, a given dimen- 
sion of the article may be readily determined. Based upon the 
determined dimension, each article may be deflected into one 
of a number of containers. 



3,708,066 

INDEX CARD MEANS 

Roy Lee Elliott, 2101 Woodland, Wichita, Kans. 

Filed Feb. 1 , 1 97 1 , Ser. No. 1 1 1 ,432 

Int. CI. B07c 

U.S. CI. 209—80.5 



6 Claims 





suspension, a first outlet for discharging the lighter of said two 
fractions and a second outlet for discharging the heavier of 
said two fractions and which is more distant from said axis 
than the first outlet. 



3,708,068 
TIMER 
Edward J. Tischler, St. Paul, Minn., assignor to Ecodyne Cor- 
poration 

Filed Aug. 2, 1971, Ser. No. 168,241 

Int. CI. BOld 2i/24 

U.S. CI. 210— 140 15 Claims 



An index card has a portion with a plurality of apertures and 
slots therethrough with corresponding portions to receive in- 
dicia corresponding to the plurality of apertures and slots. 
Another portion has indicia identifying indicia of the first por- 
tion with an associated second^ plurality of groups of apertures 
corresponding to indicia of the second portion. The index card 
is used in a system of similar index cards and indicia codes to 
identify, by collecting similar items, groups of information that 
are different yet have similarly classifiable characteristics. 



3,708,067 
SEPARATING APPARATUS 
Alain Ferdinand Javet, Geneva, Switzerland, assignor to The 
Battelle Development Corporation, Columbus, Ohio 

Filed June 29, 1970, Ser. No. 50,509 
- Int. CI. B04c 5128 

U.S.CI. 209— 211 8 Claims 

Apparatus tor separating a suspension into at least two frac- 
tions of different densities, which comprises one or more 




A timing device for operating a valve assembly at a 
predetermined time on a given day or days. The device in- 
cludes a timer dial and a pinion driven by separate gear trains 
from the same motor and constantly in operation. A valve as- 
sembly drive gear is connected to the pinion and rotated by it 
at said time through an actuator arm manipulated by the timer 
dial. The timer dial in addition includes means associated 
therewith to independently manipulate a selected portion of 
the valve assembly at a predetermined time on a given day or 
days. 



3,708,069 

REVERSE OSMOSIS MEMBRANE MODULE AND 

APPARATUS USING THE SAME 

George B. Clark, Waukesha, Wis., assignor to Aqua-Chem, 

Inc. 

FUed Aug. 13, 1970, Ser. No. 63,561 

Int. CI. BOId 37/00 

U.S. CI. 210—181 12 Claims 

A reverse osmosis membrane module and a self-contained 
unit for separating the components of a liquid mixture by 
reverse osmosis utilizing the same The module includes an 
elongated tubular casing having substantial hoop strength 
which receives a plurality of elongated tubular membrane 
structures. Within the casing are a plurality of thin-walled 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



183 



tubes each surrounding and receiving an associated one of the 
tubular membranes. According to one embodiment, the outer 
surface of each thin-walled tube is configured as a hexagon 
and the tubes are interfitted within the casing with each other 
so that each is in contact with another tube or the casing about 
its entire peripheral extant. Thus, the pressure within adjacent 
tubes tends to balance out thereby obviating any requirement 
for support tubes for the membranes of substantial strength. 
The self-contained unit employs such a membrane module 
and within the casing there is further included a motor driven 
pump which receives a liquid mixture and elevates the pres- 




3,708,071 

HOLLOW FIBER MEMBRANE DEVICE AND METHOD 

OF FABRICATING SAME 

Richard P. Crowley, Wellesley Hills, Mass., assignor to Abcor, 

Inc., Cambridge, Mass. 

Filed Aug. 5. 1970, Ser. No. 61^07 

Int.CI. B01di//00 

U.S. CI. 210—32 1 26 Claims 



UREA RICH D4ALYZATE 

34 ^2 



UREA RICH 
BLOOD 

3CK 




.36 



UREA 
• LEAN 
BLOOD 



18-^ \ 20 

16^ DIALYZATE 

SWEEP STREAM 
c 



sure of the same to reverse osmosis operating pressures. Each 
of the membrane cells defined by the tubular membranes has 
one open end adjacent a high pressure area which receives the 
liquid mixture under high pressure and another open end ad- 
jacent a second high pressure area to permit recirculation of 
the liquid mixture. Within the first high pressure area there is 
provided an impeller which is driven by the pump motor 
together with baffles which operate to recirculate the liquid 
mixture through the membrane cells. The structure also in- 
cludes an accumulator for dampening pressure pulses within 
the casing caused by operation of the pump. 



Edwin A. 
Oil Co. 



Filed Oct. 2, 1970, Ser. No. 77,596 
Int. CI. C02b 9102 
U.S. CI. 210—242 



A method for preparing one or more terminal headers con- 
taining capillary fibers encased therein for use in a membrane 
device. The ends or a loop portion of a plurality of capillary 
fibers are immersed in a foam material. The foam m.-ilerial 
sets, encasing the capillaries therein forming a header. The 
header is then severed, exposing the open ends of the capilla- 
ries. 



3,708,070 
OIL SKIMMER 
Bell, Lake Charles, La., assignor to Cities Service 



3,708,072 

METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING 

FILTER CAKE THICKNESS AND FOR COMPRESSING A 

FILTER CAKE 
Henry Schmidt, Jr., Hinsdale, III., assignor to Industrial FUter 
& Pump Mfg. Co., Cicero, III. 

Filed Oct. 13, 1970, Ser. No. 80,270 

Int.CI. B01di5/20, 25/i<S 

U.S. CI. 210-332 19 Claims 



6 Claims 



,10 



T3 



P% •" 



t^^^^/feg 



^^. 



-n 



^ J1 ^ 'l6 67 a « '^ 



In order to recover surface oil from a body of water a float- 
ing oil skimmer barge is provided with a series of compart- 
ments, beginning at the prow of the barge, inflow to each com- 
partment being effected over a respective floating baffle 
pivotally mounted at its bottom edge to swing into its compart- 
ment to a depth determined by the pressure differential across 
the baffle. Position of the baffle is controlled by pumping 
water at controlled rates from the bottom of the downstream 
end of each compartment to thereby cause an effective sur- 
face flow between compartments. Surface oil builds up in 
depth at the downstream end of the last compartment and is 
collected, substantially free of water, in a recovery chamber 
which is also provided with a floating baffle and from which oil 
is pumped at controllable rates. 



S3 .?* 




A filter cake deposited on a porous surface is compressed 
thereagainst by a flexible sheet mounted adjacent the porous 
surface on the upstream side thereof so that when the filter 
cake builds up against the sheet it is forced by the hydraulic 
pressure of the liquid being filtered toward the cake to thereby 
automatically compress the cake when it becomes sufficiently 
thick to reach the sheet. 



184 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3 708 073 3,708,075 

ROTARY DISPLAY STAND WEDGE LOCK DEVICE 
Edward L. Davis, 814 North Bragg Avenue, Lookout Moun- Laurence Treffk LaBelk, Downers Grove, lU., assignor to 

Uin, Tenn. '^'"*'' Enterprises, Inc. 

FiledFeb. 17, 1971, Ser. No. 116,104 Filed Aug. 5, 1971, Ser. No. 169,420 

Int. CI. A47f 7/76 Int. CI. B61g 9//0 

US. a. 211—47 6 Claims L.S.CL 213—22 3 Claims 




A rotary display stand including a standard, a rotary support 
member, and depending article holders mounted in a circum- 
ferential path on said support member and adapted to freely 
swing relative to said support member. 



3,708,074 
STEEL RACKING APPARATUS 
Thomas D. Fahey, and Samuel Schlagel, both of Denver, Colo., 
assignors to Steel Storage Systems, Inc., Commerce City, 
Colo. 

Filed July 15, 1971, Ser. No. 162,941 

Int. CLA47f J/96.5/00 

U.S.CL 211 — 151 19 Claims 



1^ 



/' 






.^ 




V 



■»_-.J 




In a draft gear having a housing which has an open top, a 
solid bottom and a tapered bore which defines a shoulder ex- 
tending around the inside circumference of the draft gear 
housing, a lockmg piece which has a hub portion, and out- 
wardly extending fingers therefrom which are positioned 
beneath and engage the shoulder of the draft gear housing. 
The draft gear is maintained in assembled operation by a 
securing means which has a shank portion which extends up- 
wardly from beneath the hub portion of the locking piece 
through a hole provided in the base of the wedge and which 
has a nut secured on the threaded end thereof. 



,^'TE TJ'J^..^ 



This invention relates to an apparatus for racking structural 
steel stock characterized by at least two upstanding partition- 
forming wall sections interconnected in longitudinally-spaced 
parallel relation. Each of these wall sections carries one or 
more upwardly-opening saddles which, along with the carriage 
atop which It IS mounted, defines a cradle movable relative 
thereto in load-supporting relation between a retracted and an 
extended position. A common longitudinally-extending 
crankshaft interconnects two or more of the longitudinally- 
aligned cradles together for simultaneous movement so as to 
produce therewith an open-ended top-loading drawer adapted 
to support structural steel members and the like at spaced 
points therealong. In the preferred embodiment, the cradle 
carriages rest atop the crankshaft in frictional engagement 
therewith while in two alternative embodiments, the 
crankshaft is operatively connected to the cradle by a meshed 
rack and pinion. In one of the latter embodiments, a separate 
crankshaft is provided for each drawer while in the other an 
axially-movable shaft is selectively connectable to a pair 
thereof. 



3,708,076 
RAILWAY COUPLER YOKE 
Robert P. Radwill, Oak Lawn, III., assignor to Amsted Indus- 
tries Incorporated, Chicago, III. 

Filed Aug. 2. 1971, Ser. No. 168,179 

Int. CI. 861 g 9/04, 9/20 

L.S. CI. 213— 67R 10 Claims 




A new fillet for the intersection of the strap and the rear fol- 
lower bearing of a yoke is provided having a compound radial 
surface and an undercut portion. The curve is designed to 
reduce stress concentration and manufacturing difficulties in 
this area. The undercut portion removes metal from the draft 
gear pocket and thereby eliminates notching of the strap. 



3,708,077 
DEVICE MEANS FOR A VEHICLE IN A WAREHOUSING 

APPARATUS 
Kenneth A. Richens, Salt Lake City; Scott C. Grover, Bounti- 
ful; James K. Allred, Salt Lake City, all of Utah, and James 
H. Shook, Lakewood, Colo., assignors to Eaton Yale & 
Towne Inc., Cleveland, Ohio 
Division of Ser. No. 832,036, May 5, 1969, Pat. No. 3,632,001. 
This applicaUon June 1 1, 1971, Ser. No. 152,302 
Int. CLB65g 7/06 
U.S.CL214— 16.4A 10 Claims 

Warehousing system apparatus has a storage rack with 
several vertically and horizontally related storage elements. A 



January 2, 1973 



GENERAL AND MECHANICAL 



185 



mast is moved horizontally on rails parallel to the face of a 
storage rack, and a platform moves vertically along the mast in 
response to signals from a three-brush signal wire pickup on a 
control wire strung along the rack. Vertical and horizontal 
hydraulic drives and controls are independent so that the plat- 
form may fly or move diagonally in the shortest line between 
locations in the storage rack. Electric motors constantly 



3,708,079 

SUPPORT FOR ROTATING AND ADVANCING 

CYLINDRICAL MEMBERS 

Joseph T. Wloszek, Seven Hills, Ohio, assignor to Custom 

Machine, Inc., Cleveland, Ohio 

Filed Feb. 1 2, 1 97 1 , Ser. No. 1 1 4,998 

Int. CI. B6Sh5 7 /OO 

U.S. CI. 214— 338 8 Claims 






2K --^ 2M 

?*0 -. . f' 

COyNTtH 



S BIGHT 

CARRIED 

DRWC 



i VERTICAL \ 
249 Ca*TtB I 

1 CIRCUIT r 



PiAHLl 
U'PUT I 






i---^ 



LiLr . 



lC 



1- "'^ \- 

6R*«( P 



MOBiIOMTA*. 

WJTABY 
TRAMS DOCER 



VtRTlCAL 
W0T4RT 1 
TRANSDUCER r 



Operate hydraulic pumps; pump output is controlled by 
stepping motors having telemetering switches to indicate 
pumping direction. A positive neutral band is provided in the 
hydraulic system for better drive control. A carrier which is 
driven from the platform into the rack has a cam means to 
change the position of load driving lugs each time the carrier is 
driven to a maximum displacement from the platform. 



3,708,078 
BATCH RAM FEEDING APPARATUS 
Richard F. Clements, Chark>tte, N.C., assignor to Environmen- 
tal Control Products, Inc., Charlotte, N.C. 

Filed Aug. 26, 1 97 1 , Ser. No. 1 75,275 

Int. CI. F23k 3100 

U.S.CL 214— 23 7 Claims 





Apparatus for simultaneously rotating and longitudinally 
advancing cylindrical members through a test stand. The 
member is supported in a trough formed by a plurality of axi- 
ally spaced idler rollers mounted on a first common shaft and 
a plurality of spaced belts each rotating over a pair of spaced 
pulleys, with one pulley of each pair being mounted on the 
first common shaft and the other pulley of each pair being 
mounted on a second common shaft parallel to the first shaft. 
The pulleys have a self aligning mounting on their respective 
shafts such that the plane of rotation of the pulleys may be at 
an angle other than perpendicular to the axis of their support- 
ing shafts. One of the shafts is axially adjustable relative to the 
other so as to change the angle of the line of movement of all 
the belts relative to the axis of the shafts. One of the shafts is 
driven and has a driving connection with at least some of the 
pulleys mounted thereon. By relatively moving the two shafts 
and thus changing the angle of the belts relative to the axes of 
the shafts, a cylindrical member supported in the trough may 
be made to move axially forward backward, or remain sta- 
tionary while being rotated at a constant speed. 



3,708.080 

LADDER BRACKET 

Alvin O. Schlei, 3328 S. Indiana Avenue, Milwaukee, W is. 

Substitute for Ser. No. 641,321, May 25, 1967. This 

appUcaUon Nov. 23, 1970, Ser. No. 91,962 

Int. CI. E06c 7148 

U.S.CL 182— 214 I Claim 



A batch ram feeding apparatus for feeding of material to an 
incinerator or other mechanism and characterized by being 
constructed to feed batches of comparatively equal weight re- 
gardless of variations in sizes or compositions of the material. 
The apparatus comprises a housing having a material receiv- 
ing opening in the top and a material dispensing opening in the 
front and horizontally-extending upper and lower internal 
compartments with a communicating passageway 
therebetween The apparatus further includes reciprocating 
rams positioned in each of the compartments and drive means 
for individually driving the rams to receive a batch of material 
in the upper compartment, compact the batch and allow it to 
drop into the lower compartment where it is pushed out of the 
dispensing opening. 




Separate brackets are adjustably clamped to the cor- 
responding side rails of a ladder to interlock with a selected 
rung of the ladder, and a leg is pivotally carried by each 
bracket and adjustably secured thereto at a selected angle to 
extend toward and engage the side of a building or other sup- 
port with the ladder spaced from the building by said legs. 



186 



OFFICIAL GAZETTE 



January 2, 1973 



3,708,081 

BOAT LOADING APPARATUS 

Paul C. Schladenhauffen, 212 Dustman Road, Bluffton, Ind. 

Filed March 30, 1970, Ser. No. 23,763 

Int. CI. B60r 9100 

IJ.S. CI. 214—450 8 Claims 



of 
F. 



3,708,083 

CLOSURE FITMENT 

Erich W. Gronemeyer, 2100 South Ocean Lane, Point 

Americas - Apt. 206, Fort Lauderdale, Fla., and Louis 

Kutik, 8720 S.W . 23rd Place, Fort Lauderdale, Fla. 

Filed Nov. 25, 1970. Ser. No. 92,601 

Int.CLB65d5//0* 

U.S. CI. 215-41 43 Claims 



62 64 



Wx /*> It S6 





Apparatus for loading a boat on a vehicular or fixed support 
structure, such as a camper or a dock An elongated carrier 
frame is provided having forward and rear ends. An upstand- 
ing supporting frame is provided having upper and lower ends, 
the lower end being rigidly mounted on the support structure. 
The rear end of the carrier frame is pivotally connected to the 
supporting frame adjacent the upper end thereof with the car- 
rier frame extending for*ardly therefrom and being pivotally 
movable between a horizontal, boat-carrying position and a 
forwardly and upwardly inclined, boat-loading position. A pair 
of elongated, boat-loading rails is provided having forward 
and rear ends. The rails have a loading position with their for- 
ward ends removably and pivotally connected to the support- 
ing frame adjacent its upper end and being inclined rearwardly 
and downwardly therefrom, with their rear ends being sup- 
ported by the ground. A winching system is provided